© AUTHOR

PUBLUHERS :

BHARATI liHAVVAN, PATNA-4

PRINTER :

SHUBNESHWARl PRASAD SINIIA

TAPAN PRINTING PRESS, PATNA-4

TENTH EOinON, 1966

pucz ; R3. 5*50

 P R EFA U ii '

The book has been designed to meet the requirements of thestu>

dents who v<Uh not only to score high marks ia grammar but also to
speak and write correct English; and correct English, in my opinion, is

neither too loose a colloquial style which defies grammar nor too pure
a grammar which refuses to recognise idioms established by usage. It

is, on the contrary, a happy fusion of the two, for even dynamic
neutrality or peaceful co-existence is not enough.

An attempt has, therefore, been made to find a golden mean

between distilled purism and unbridled colloquialism- I should
naturally hope that it would very well serve as a utilily reference book
in schools and colleges, and herein, I should plead, hts the justification
for avoiding English as the mediutD of writing. To some, however,
the very idea of English Crammar in Hindi may appear to be auda>
clous and even ridiculous. Call it what you will, but you shouldn't
shut your eyes to the fact (bat to an average student a book in
English, and that, too, on Grammar, is a red rag to a bull. The result
of a delicious flood of books, they get not even a drop
is that, in spite

to drink. What to do then 7 Do you propose to make them read

books they can’t undentand 7 You can make one weep and even
laugh but not sing, and isnot reading a sort of singing to oneself?
I can't say whether this book will be read without tears. It is for my
readers to judge.

Summer, 1956 R. P. S.
 It is neeetiory to know gtommar, and it it better to write
^rammalleally then not, but il Is well to remember that grammar is
tommon speech formulated. Usage is the only test.

—SOMERSET MAUCMAM
 BOOKS CONSULTED

1. Webster's New International

Dictionary, Vols. I-IV.
2. The Shorter Oxford English
Dictionary, Vols. MI.
3. A Dictionary of Modern
English Usage H.W. 1

4. King's English H.W. 1

5. Good English G. H.
6. Better English G. H.'
7. A Higher Btglish Grammar .
L-’
8. Senior Course In English
Composition Soares and Maj
9. English Idioms Me
10. English Grammar Series Bk. ]V J. C. N
Modern English Granunar
DC
11.
12. Errors In English Composition
DC
13. Aids To The Study and
Composition of English
DC
14. Senior Course of English Composition
DC
15. Word Power Norman
16. Teach Yourself Grammar G. S. How
17. English Grammar G. WjlirAKER-’
fitioii
18. How To Write English
19. Current fjigfwA Usage
F.T.
11. N
20 College Composition
21. A Manual of Advanced Btglish Bernard Blaci
R. A.
22. The English We Use
23. The Oxford English Course
for S<c<*nrfiTfv Schools
24. A Guide to Patterns and
Usage in English
 CONTENTS
1.

Page
Syntax 3

Articles . . - 61

5. Adjectives -• 73
1. Adverbs ,• lit

5. Conjurvctioas .. - I3l
5. Nouns . . 147

7. pronouns . . 167
8. Prepositions .. 187
9- Verbs 215
0. Common Errors 242
1. Word Power: •• .• 247
(i)Syoonyms, (ii) Antonymi. (lii) Paronyms, (iv) HoDouyms, (v)
Homopboaes, (v1) The same word used as dTffereat Paris of
Speech, (vii) The Formation of Words, (viii) Figures of Speech

2. Similar expressions distinguisbed . . 301

3. Re-writing in simple English 30S
:4. Analysis 314
15. Synthesis .. . 335
16. Narration .. 353
17. Transformation . . 372
18. Idioms and Phrases . . 395
19. Precis-Writing 419
10. Comprehension .. 449
 SYNTAX
TEST YOURSELF
Q. Correct or jtistify the folloving stniencej ond then compare
results with the key gireit orerleaf—

1 . Too great a variety of interests are bad.

2. A mangoes U rotten.
gteatec part of tbe
10.
3. A number of boys and girls has come.
4. There are a mountains here.
series of

5 I have many mangoes but none are ripe.

6 Bihar were defeated by Bengal in the Test Match.

7. The jury was divided in their opinions.

8. What I need most are clothes and books.

9. Has neither Ram nor his parents come ?

Each of them have finished their work.
1\. I am one of those who am of another opinion.
12. Twelve and seven is nineteen
13. Every Tom, Dick, and Harry wear suit
14. Bread and butter are costly articles of food.
15. No boy and no girl have come.
16. He has read both in England and America.
17. I request you to kindly grant me leave.
18. But behold her mother—she to whom she owed her being-
19. He has not cone, nor he unll eo.
 KEY
(I) is— Rule 1.(2) are— Rule ». (3) have— Rule II. (4) is— Rule
III. (5) correct— Rule XIV. (6) correct— Rule VI Kote. (7) were—
their, or was— its —Rule IV. (S) is— Rule XVI. (9) correct— Rule XX(d).
(10)has—his-RuleXlll.(ll)art— Rule XVII. (12) correct-RuIc XVII
{b).(13)\vcars— Rule XVni(d).(14)correct-Ru!cXVIII(e) Note. (15)
has— Rule XVIII (d). (t6) In America—or read in both England and
America— Rule UPosition of Correlatives). (1?) Allowable, but it is
better to write— I request you kindly to grant— Rule VII (Position of
Adverbs). (IR) her to whom— Rule I (Apposition and Case). (19) nor
will he go— Rule HI (Position ofSubjcet & Verb). (20) he neither
comes— Rule I (Position of CerreJaiives).
 P

CHAPTER I

SYNTAX

S>nlax ^fn I i Rm qr fTRR frr ?flKl 'rtr

ffT% Subject atr Verb qr ami 1 1 tefgq Subject a^i Verb &
IE ftaR a? 1

AereemenI : Subject & Verb

S-S : P—
enra a Subject aV Verb % ^ (Agreement) tfii t—
“T/ie Verb inusl agree with Us Subject in Number and Person,"
nr fsrqir ^ agait Verb «i Number «*tT Person fhii i sf) mq
i; Subject uT rpi ? mfV? Siogular Subject i tnu Singular Verb «?tr
^
i

Plural Subject 5i are Plural Verb oun ) i Rw ^ Verb efi eiqsfr

iSfl’r Si^l rW I er sqt Subject i aqr ftuft t|i »nit 1 1 S~S sfrr

P-P a> qiq

S *isa t Singular P
wf?rr Singular Subject*
sflr «i Plural.
an Singular Verb Riinfm*? sir PluralSubject ^ Plural Verb w
ci; I&—
1. Mohan writes. 2 Sita plays. 3. Karim dances. 4. Manju
sings. 5. Muni runs.

tR % Subjects (Mohan, Sita, Karim, Manju, Muni) Singular

1 1 xsfeq Singular Verbs (writes, plays, dances, sings, runs)
*I qck gstl f I

«IT PT aieqj *> ?R—

I. Boys write. 2 Girls play. 3. Actors dance. 4. Women
sing. 5. Players run.

trr erqql * Verbs (write, play, dance, sine, run) Plural V; eqlf*
Subjects (boys, girls, actor*, women, players) Plural RC'ft
«Trq gr 1^, qqrpK S— S : P— P % faqn «1 «qnr *f trt nqi i i sr?, an tR
 now TO wmir mutter rvemn

1. ri3>cfi runi. 2. Women sinfi. J. Mohin write 4,

Manju laugh.

ffficojr a Suhjecfi (r/ajen, Women) P/ural f, itr Verbi

er
(runs, singO singular > t «fcl P— P * fti P— S f| >m J, wepl Plural
Subjects i rrn Singular Verb* *1 «ftt «t f?5i net f i in> btit. ff-*?*-
fim »i*Tf y Singular Subjects (Mohan. Manju) « an Plural Verbs
(write, laugh) «i aein ft nfi J ( fnPn e ^n‘f sm ? i bth rr
tnt 3 Subject •hrVetb*
fte «iprr?ir ftsrr^iftet Subject
«.^T Verb i ttsj S— S P— p « fni :
^ 3? CT mfpf tetfVr f«f r wt frrv i,
S—P P—S 4 etti 5trt
:
1

Note (a) — efl m tw « st» (Wt Verb 3 s et cs 5pt ar^i

flt ff singular ft »ini h id-
write— writes. cry— cries, sing— sings.
Writes, cries, sV sings 3 s ft es trn jsn i i
fftfitt n Singular
^ write, cry WVr sing 3 screismT jti Plural ?!
5 «i fls writes, cries,
tiT sings * 1 «t wtn Singular Subjects ^ 4
trm tbiT, 'tr write, cry «*»? sing «t jwW Plural Subjects 4 sre t -^T
Noun 4 ftfB ^ ^ i Noun Sscresam erptrd Plural fffl
j’; Tt Verb 3 s cr es snt *rT f>t Singular mi 1 TO fmr n? TO— 1

Soun + s Plural
Verb -h s mShtguJar
id-
Nouns Verbs
,

Singular Plural Singular Plural

I

book books goes SO

toy toys tries tiy
j

bench benches ^

laughs laugh
]

Note (b)— emi cf »ft Jlif TO ft ‘is. was sftr has’ Singular Verbs

ft are, were have f Plural, wn If >?) si ft I 4 tw Present

Tense 3 tot am HfW ftm ? m i

EXERCISE

Correct the following sentences —

Children is playing. WTiy is these wewren Jaughinf 1 These
nse in
green. Teachers loves good students. Stars shines at night. The sun
teachers Utes
east. Aeroplanes carries men and goods. AU the students and
.»^this book.
 —
These books lo me. (bdong. belongs]
Why.— these children crying ’ [1$. are]
Hoy many boys there
*
{was, were]
His teeth broken. [was, tvere]
These shee[^— innocent. {•s. are]

EXCEPTIONS
lo the S— S P— P Formula
:

Pnsr %^ ST'iTT?
I’—
Evception No. 1 Dare noi and need not — ^ ^ ^ Verbs 1“ sTr
ngular Subject ^ htv vfr Plural ?si it tft I;
He need not go She dare not oppose me.
TJi fftairl I Subjects (he & she) Singutarf. Verbs (need & dare)
u qqrfiBrr« wiJi not sni 5 «t J fsnt* flr »isra i w gtr

"The third person singular is 'need' and not 'needs'.

Just as 'dare' is
fd for 'dares' provided it is follomd by a negailve-Jie need not do
y more work. He dare not leave the room." _j. c. nesfield
Note-Dare sftr need k srs*»q « wtr tfl awV <it bjk j-
(a) « isri iTjq not snt «« arq, affirmative mtr
I
> fTWj,q ftrqq $ stgriR Singular Subject i «iq singular ^ .ftr pjurai
bject « giq Plural ?q it «ti^

he needs they need

he dares they dare
(b| wma Verb Mo- IT wh ita t .V „ot „
urn t (qi? S fT5T) nq ompq erqui^qi^ Singular Subject
tiq singular ^ if rfiq Plural Subject i qnq Plural ^ if gfai
"One does not need to know anything - _.j. j
q^ qiqq if Verb
5R q?i Singular Subject (one)
‘do’ «t srrtq jat }
« aiq
^
Verb
not ^ qqR need i: qrit J ,

Singular (does not

ml
TT ttSI,
. qfq TH qtqq
ITT qf qiqq qfr
if Verb
qqnr «1
'do'
^
,t,

5n<n—
,,0 ^ need
^ J
One need not know anything
E,„p.i,„ No, 2-Sabj„l «Vc feb 4 to,., fr,,, „
 —
Jiow to wnitt contrcT TNni nii

fopfVMiJion tm'V WTT -IT SingufJt Su^j«ct « frt tft Tfural V'erb

"iJfe hat now ta^rn hoIJ on him cn.1 toutJ him into. . . .finv.ament,
vhtre ht bursts into jn«»? at i/ht mitt eom'nuilble."
— D. It. LAttRfvcr

mm so, poftry woufJrratr to matttr." ~r R. tfAvit

same fate m ould kart ottrcome the pamphUteerin^ of Defoe,

"77i<*

wrff hp no! the author of ftohiason Crusoe end MoH FhnJers. or the
pamphleteering of Samuel Johnson, mitt htnoi the hero of Bos* ell.”
— T. S. EtlOT

tsf toft imf ^ Singular Subject (he A. it> 3r rnn Plural Verb ‘were*

TT s?hi 5*1 J. *1 cr }, *?(r« t5i*t Condition m Supposition

I ra ^sTTtR S—

I wish / mere a king.

If / were you, I would do It.

I wish It mere possible.

would fly to me.
iVere she a bird, she
He commanded as if he m-ere my master.
isr tnwTf ^ sff Singular Subject i: are Plural Verb rtc^^fC5^•
tsrtr %tfr sfvtrm (wish) m «?<pn (supposition) ci ’err ^PHTtr I
fsRTs^
^
(fact sifl)
1 1 5T PR tf)m } fis annj $ >ErT5n rt jnt

TC Rule of Agreement «i Subject sftt Verb ^

f5nm*fn ^ sticii I aVt Singular Subject mu »,'f Plural Verb cr euW
r>cnti
Note— (H 3 trtu ft araft* 9 u*n uum »» fp? Verb
‘were’ ^ tftfstr tr «tut 1 1 ««u Verbs 9m srrW at gu-m ^ *m ?m i

twftu Strw If he come i 9 If he comes ftpin

Verbs an Subjunctive Mood 9 siW siwi a)T ‘Ri mranaHt I, ft ^
wNiiiT 9 Kt ^ I
in
*‘The Subjunctire form is almost dead in Csgllsh. It juTTirpr
a few main sentences of wish or desire like God sate the king. —
—G. II. vALLtNS : Good English

“The Subjunctive Mood is in Us fkaih-throes, and the best thing

to do is to put it out of its misery as sotm as possible.”

—SOMERSET MAUGHAM t A WRITER'S NOTE-BOOK
 —

SYNTAX : AORroitNT

nr 5? «rn ^ ‘were* 9n rrgh wish

Verbs
jti supposi*
lion i; «rj 3 Singular Subjtci i «w«?»«rT «rsi »iri ^rff ?f, fn
^^
1

w'lx sftrs; ^
God save the king!
Long live the king!
Lord bless >ou !

s? smf s: erretr itr si^r^ gn 51 ifr Plural Verbs ‘save* siV ‘live’
An saVt Singular Subject ^ m«t fem sihi 3&—
Long live Indo-Russian friendship !

nr Verbs ^ wfafrAn sr Verbs ^nrftn Subjunctive Mood 3

JTTtY^^i%r rrrf^ writ ism have aja ^ »R;t sVr tffena: (pedantic)
STTO stm i 1 am %si saVi s »r—
Murder, though if ha\e no tongue, will speak,

vtgf^ stJTS ayI ‘have’ i Ari ‘has’ «t saW «Trn *fr FJNTfe^ «fr

?prai I \

EXERCISE

Q. Correer r/ie /odoweng seurmces—

{a) H« needs not *Tite more on ibis subject, (b) Sbe dsres not tun away,
(e) He need to labour hard <d) Itl eras you, I would not agree to that foolish
proposal, (e) If be was a bird, he would fly to bis lady-love (f) Ood saves the
queen I (g) 1 would do it if 1 was he.

Hints—la) MtditbVdate; (c> ueed^fd) wete; (*) were; (t) save; (g) were,

a) Ttr s^iT, A5r ?! snmir i) of m I fer Rule of Agreement

i srgTO Subject i number rffr person Verb ^ number
fhiTT ^
I ‘limited*
f I

(ffrfim)
^ cl Verb
Finite Verb, Subject
Finite Verb «ct utrit
ur

i cri ^
1 1 Finite
rfifirn
srir

ati

T?ni t, ermft
person

^
1

SRA*! ATsrrr Jtff chft I

WA STA A3AI t f* ^ AC StfrAyr («••»'( l rrCA TfTATt UJsfUTT

I?RT tfwT I ^ pri! aga cl attw I—(^)—«ai? ah qai
At?) stim sftr (a)
Ainj i AH cm 5^^^ so tPi i A ^ «Tr«r, Atsm if, AftAi^ aff
^
I

ATC fpA sfu AJiAr t aV ^-A«r> CAi f^lAK ft |-

|

ca tuRAt AAf rrcR, wrAtuT i ft ?»cf S gi

“Verbs frequenll}- change their forms and ending to make them-
selves agree wiih their nominatives. How necessary ii is, then, to know
what is, and what is not, a nominative in a ienrence
— COBBETT A Grammar Of The English Uncuace
:
 SYNTAX : AGRmiENT

co-or«f*iion beWeen the t»o couniriei have increased

(c) The condolence
mesu(es receised on the death of Dr. Jha tpeaks highly of his greatness, (d)
The rules of this book IS easy <e) To these are added this (fi Much of what
you base «Tiiten have already been discussed (gl One of the guests were eager
to make a rlcasing impression on evervone

llims—ii) have, (b) has. (c) speak, (d) are. (e> is. (f) has. (g) was

Q. 2. FiU up the blanks with suitable Finite Verbs —

(a) The standard of answers—scry low. (b) The standard of living of
most of the people of the under-developed countries— not high, (c) Sweet
the uses of adversity, (d) My suggestions for impravemeDt accepted (e) Too
great a variety of studies not very useful (f) TTie cost of iron and cement

too high <g) The colour and the smell of this flower very pleasing
/fifln-(a) IS or was, (b) is:«) are. Id) are or were, (e) i$.(f) is, (g) are.

Rule 11. Indefinite Number -t- of -b Noun

ft? sireT TtrrTT r? b«r Indefinite Number+or+Noun/

Pronoun, 3^

a number of boys
most of the boys
some of the men
. heaps ot cups
lots of troubles

TSf asft if of 5b ^ still I firrft Indefinite Number

(«r*rr^ gtctri) ^ Tfv rrflt ^ ^
«hb1 if of ^ at? sis! Noun i Hjsnr
Verb r.i Number sftr Person rlnt 1 1 Indefinite Number g?t i^
S m, strife b tI tT5j nwrtsmi of i -lyii sn% I' sfri; Indefinite Num-
ber ^ giB TOif ?— a number, a quarter, two-thinls, three-fourths, all,
some, most, mass, minority, majority, part, plenty, per cent, pro-
portion, rest, remainder, half, heaps and lots. —
"There arc a large number of people nho believe that all ills
are fundamentally economic." x. j. eliot
“There were a number of such little reasons." —aldous huxley
".... a number of politicians were struggling to preserve the
great traditions of republican Rome." _H. o. wells
“A Dumber of quotations are added to show how
common the
-H.W. FOWLER
“A large number of formal restiietions and ancient 'thou shah
nots' of academic grammar are now completely outmoded."
— NORilAN LEWIS
 1

10 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH

Between them there is plenty ofroom for most talents to breathe

freely." _G. b shaw
*‘There are plenty of ecstatic instants which are rahteless."
RICHARDS
"A large proportion of these essays ileal k-»iA ethical qualities."
—HUGH WALKER
"A large proportion of this northern array was British"
—H. O. WELLS

"A large part of the dtslinclire featnres of the tnind are due to
its being an instrument for communication." — A. richards
"For some three or four hundred years a good 'pati of Asia was
under a kind of eclipse " — jawaHARLAL nehru
"... .most of human life b3s to disappear before he can do us a
novel." —
E. M. FORSTER

"Most of those who use it ste probably unaware (hat. .. .'assets'

Is Itself a singular." -H- 'v. fowler

"The rest of the prose of the age is too voluminous.''

—IFOR EVANS
“rfte majority 0/ writers never pass that sioge." — fzra pound
rr tnft einf *f of 3f «ii% Noun * *3‘TtT Singular 51

Plural Verb CT a5>i r«5i wti Wt 5s f 1 ftj 5?tTTW

A number of boys are absent.

A quarter of it Is.

A quarter of them are.

Two>thirds of the site is lovely.
Two-thirds of the sites are ugly.
The rest of the book is unfinished.
The rest of the books are unfinished.
Half of /r is.
Half of them ore.
A part of the mango is rotten.
A part of the mongoes are rotten.
Lots of men have come-
Lots of ammunition has beeo prepared.
About 30 per ceot of tores have been polled.
About ?0 per cent of the amount has been spent,
rw ewT* 3 5^ of k vyw Indefinite Nunber ) i

cf c w-k VT? Noun « swtt Verb «T seW 5*1 J

 —

SYNTAX : AGREEMENT

Note (a)— Tf? ‘lots’ ^ of % fttA Infinitive sjfl': ^ fft

^fr’l (lols singular irrai vrrai t; Infinitive Noun

i TOTT l> sfr—

There if lots to say.

There is still lois to do
!T?f are 5n srrf^ srjs t

Note (b)— Number s: Tfil the Possessive Adjectives (your, our

?i their) ^ Tt Verb rrri singular rgtn I, «tTf«n ? a? (num-
ber) Indefinite Number ^ als ^rrT I, I&—
“The number 0/ poleniial poets born varies... from age to age."
— F. R. LEA VIS
“The number 0/ persons intereuedin philosophy is always small."
—7. S. ELLOT
rn twit 'the number’ rftT ‘a number’ if apt svnrii ant i era
trai Singular Verb cr natn ftm I art ^ tn« R^t Plural Verb «t, a^rf*
‘the number’ en Tt?tt i fsifr^ (figure), er ‘a number’ *1

‘an’ (many), 5lt—

A number of boys have come.
The number of boys is increasing,
ind a number of boys «i «ri t ‘«p ^ the number of boys
»n sra i, ‘ETT^f ^ I*fl «uT I
WIR if TWET tR« ?rra Verb en

Note (c)— nfr of iwEl ‘the percentage’ (pet cent Rtf) r^,
Verb H?i Singular eWt 5^1

The percentage of failures is small

The percentage of illiterate persons is very high

EXERCISF

Q. 1. Correct the sentences—

(a) The number of »eal» IB all chc colIe«CT haie been doubted. (b)A
number of queilions has been set <c) Heaps oT sand are tying on ibe bank,
(d) The rest of what he Mid were not beard <ci Pan of one of the lower
galleries were occupied by musicians io the Elaabelhan age. (f) Some of (he
original freshness of his works are slilt there, (g) The weakness lies in the
middle scenes, some of which is crude th) There are iliil lots to decide

/finfr-(a) has. (b) have. (c)is.(d» was te) *as,(fHs: (g) are; (h) i»

Q. FiU up the bhnKs with suitable Finite Verbs—

2.

(a)There- a number of books la my hbrtry.

(b) The number of fools in eseiy society— Urge.
 12 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH

(c) There^— Still tots to say on this point.

(d) A greater partof the mangoes rotten
(e) Two-lhirds of the book—— (imsbed.
(0 Most of his early youtl^— spent at home
Hints— {i) are: (b) is; (c) «s, (d) are; fe) is; (0 »**•

ftull III. Collectiie Noim-t-or+Nooii

^ t?r imr ^ ^cff I—Singular Collective Noun +

oF-t-Plural Noun, —
a series of mountains.
a set of books

Singular Verb flifi Col-

lective Noun i at «rT^ ^ ?jfi a»gsiT % w eg;w (collection) cr ^

I siV collection qpaa Jprm 1
(unity) 5 Plural Nouns
a:i srS 1

rv ^3 ^
»*g (object) «j itv «Tt^ ? PJoral Nouns i

% sr^^RTT (diversity) an sn atacRi 1 1 Collective Noun i nn w?it (unity)

STtutT *1^ ^ n(t I n au f?iT ti) Plural Nouns«r^ef % RtT-

CT fSTt fk?t «WT i eft cKR I f«

1 fifRt 3 Subject Singular tna- ^
CT Singular Verb ri sctn f%tn Rm ^ i nf? of ^ a set, a senes,
a team, a batch, a bunch, a band, a bevy, a herd, a flock, a
group, a class Singular Collective Nouns sn5 tfr Singular Verb
Ti Buln cT, J|r—
to
•‘Besides Hardy, Yeats and De La lUore, there was supposed
be a galaxy of Georgian poets
” — f- *•

“Then there Is the central groop ol Georgian poets."

— r. R- leavis

“On the other hand b a set of guile different factors."

A. RICHARDS

“There Is a large class of persons. . . nho regard any censure upon

a great poet as a breach of peace ” “f. *• ELlor

“A series of coincidences has permitted me to demonstrate the

^
How To Read thesis in a medium nearer to poetry than painting is.'
E2XA POfHD —
7TTTR S—
A set of combs has been purchased.
A team of speakers has been selected
A bunch of leys is iyiag there.
 SYNTAX : AGREEMENT

EXERCISE

Q. Correct the following sentences —

A parcel ot booki have been received, (b) A basket of mangoes are
(a)
there, A chain of pearls have been prepared, (d) A band of musicians have
(c)
been engaged, (e) A batch of delegates have been fonned.
Hints— Use singular verbs in all the sentences.

Role IV. Collective Noun and the Verb

SIT TiTT ^ Subject Collective Noun ?Vai I sVe atrJt of i sni

gJi gai Plural Noun sift eth i, fn Verb i stVt if Fitt^ sn
aiTift lut frsfni if Ttt ?it Singular tfi Plural stfl nni i

xtri Ttrfirr rfai % ft Collective Noun eftt Noun of Multitude ^ ffUn

srrf 1 1 stTT ft a? Collective
I’ Noun t>i irftn singular stu
if^ cf? Ttt Collective Noon igi smi XT 3if 3H«t BTfii plural
if ffm ax ^ Noun of Multitude ^ snn If s«i<% I",

Government, jury, public, committee, federation.

TIT XR Nouns trt atVi Vtnfular 3 ftat enw %, m e»* Collective

Nouns Tftf J' «ffE rr plural 3 nnbi ftm envr nr Nouns of
Multitude.

HI SRsei eg rjft
Singular itrtt) Singular Verbs «t
^ i f« fTO ogset 3
nel*i ftm
Collective
sir s*1e
Nouns
ftEt btevi
tmtst:
3
Nouns of Multitude trpret (smln w plural trsnirE) tstii nre Plural
Verbs ^
srafn ftxi (Nesfield) 3 ftor i—T/ie Jury
i nm
were divided fx.firs^ (Fowler) tnxr 3 nargnir The Jury hoj divided
r^iom sTT^ xlsT I

SIT w srjnf 3: alT mm ifn «i?i3x flf ftr ttmx ^n'r en

•Tti T3T '
Tl'itT 3, XT fneo CTTI fe ftn sRpn 3 Singular sV ftet
siETT 3 Plural JTR7 »T?, wfasr ^ t etiftr wit33 ‘?«r»vnT 3 m: bts fsTm
STTiTai 3— STF? stT3 T®t5Tg»nr Singular tt Plural tmt 5 sV tr
fmmr er r? x1«t ftrsTu % wit Singular et Plural Verbs cT stW te i »*t«i
SITT? i fstttft: sm TIE Singular 33 ? n> ml; tne Singular
jiT5t

Verbs wVe Pronouns ^ ir;1*i snEm 3 sim n* wX, te eft ttx «nx Plural
sist3 i’ (mtft stmft ipfl fS2i jlifl i), til e^ «nni 3 sma nc Plural nifl
w
i

WTT eItI trsit Es; ew niT tti swn, wrts ti* *IT tie Singular sftr 5«ift tie
P lural trff im iit3 i *1 E^
urte Singular Verbs rci stm ^>3
Singular i
?n mm nwn «i>e »> plural nmn on »ft moi fr sttee firitni, 53—
The Government has decided so in Its own interest.
The Government have decided so in their own interest.
 H‘J« tn n»iff fmtff t fv-if rif

»t! t^T e C.o^ffnrfnl *? ^tr£uf<f ef^r far Sniufjr

Vcih e'-f *Jirsu*jr T^nnoua «i ri'ft S Oovjfrrfnt «f
riiifal ct* t*?* *3" riutal Vffh r^t'nou’i tf »vt ft^t /“v J i

fn^T i i't! t> (, )•, „ ^

Thf Go«frrwfn< Ait dKt^ftil *n In fAe.f own itifcfjit
The flmeffitnsr.i ft >»e (!fCh!'d «<j in in own Inreretf.
ST? *’** ^ Grtmnrjfnl «f »«r re $mttil.tf mrtr tni Vt
Sinp5il»r Vefh *} I'tt T*' ^ d<r« •> riurilrraTf ms
fjT riufj! Pmnoun Oheirl •{ ai'it «r ftfj J *
fa*tc S «?*: {tnm t?*' «a> > jnJ #f»t S ?*ti f' 'r^f f i

ift Kvi fif ;tn S»figtiljf. Smfotjr 'Vi Plural «

HI e*u vr«»i i> «s*» »f» }
w'ftit »?«f »t srtt J Colletiivc i

Noun Subjeci fj, nr «n »« «rr »f «t «r 5 f« «f Smjotar } «t

Plural. »:£ «n»;i i‘OT If f-rv*! •r-i 1 mi! CT v^r inji rftt «i
?! B^i *r»T I rJ. »» rr W: f4w» tV. »irir fm irrT » r*r«r»vjf. sn^r*^
wl j't « f« *ns nifflr 4 fsww n'int ft4 ?—
A'ouni o/.U«/f/iiu/e mar f'trty u\tJ >*lfh either a
Siit^ular <*r a Pturat I'erh, or be eeftreeJte by Pronou/ti of Singular e»
Plural meaning, thev ikauUnoi hare bath.”
-foxsirn : Kt.\o'sENOiJSH

And again.

"Ja general it may be MtJ that rthile theft fj always a better

anil a worse In the matiee, there it seUom a tight and a wrens
failure to abide bv the ehotee when made, and plunging about between
•H' and 'ihey', ‘hare' and ‘has', 'is' and*tbeir', and the like, eon only
be called insult to the reader.” —
rowicR ; Moders E'Xlisii Usage
“The may be a coUecIne noun, tike Congregation,
subject
council, federation, company, gorernment, etc. In Englith usage the
decision is left to the writer: only, once haring made it, he must slick
toil But there is no rule. Usage changes. Sometimes the
Singular is in fashion and sometimes the Plural. It is consistent respect
for the decision that matters." —
G. H- valliss : Better English

EXERCISE

Q. Correct the following sentences

—
(a) in t» opinions, (b) The Goverriog
The committee are nor unanimous
meeting to-day have decided to appoint a lecturer, (c) The Board
has
Body at its
of
decided to elect their new members, (d) The public have cast its vote irt favour
those who can help them in need. (*) The Teachers' Association has submitted
 SYNTAX : ACREEtlENT 15

a metnorandum for the fulfilment of ibetf demandt. (OThe govemn-.ent hasto

do $0 in their own interest.

/fmrr— (a) are theiroru. -its; (b) its.. ..has or their hate;
(c)has itsorhave. . have.... tbeif ...them or has. ...its
their. (d) it;

(e)has .Itsorhave. theirtfOhas lU or hate their.

Rnle V Weights & Measures and Ihe Verb

nfr Subject ^ Noun ft weights,

measures, amount distance (sm-tftsr ni tRrr) nr tn fR
Plural rpt ijT »fr %% Subject % tm Singular Verb n nuh i^j i srTIw
» rnu m n >na p;?7T (number) *7
3S—
Ten miles is a long way to walk.
Five rupees is equal to five hundred paise.

T5r emf iJ Ttil wi cut miles i c! plural J, iir iwk nw Singular

Verb (ts) ct setn erffc ejl fen miles ci ere ?— a distance of lenmiles.
*eTu eft rm (measurement) % 1 ins IJ rupees eftr

false Plural t «^r > er tr* fm Singular Verb (is) ci

itTl’t 5C1 isfr* ec rcu (amount) n ilif } rft inr b itvs
1

* 5«?-
Three ions of coal is enough for me.
Twenty pounds is a handsome amount
art three tons ft VC 1*5 r1 iRafwcighi) rtsntiff'n J twenty
pounds ft t* ecu (amount) «i 1mfsrv Plural rrft it sft tons v>r pounds
« frni Singular Verb ci satn J » cm |=» sil«i *.& ftnc cti ?
1630 and 1643 Z.00,t)00 *tn spent in eonve}ins X,000
''Bctneen
men, uomcn and children fo Sen Cngtand 200 ships. m
-~*j M. TREVriVAN
And again,

"Three thousand mllei HUMS >CT\ longnai.

-• C. M TRLStLYAS

CXERCISI

Q. 1. Corrcfi she follominz seniences—

(s) Trn rur«ct vrrcpiidio him <h) Si«<r tiiiIct l.vj di.t»r<e
in There n)r«i m my pfKltt tJ| Three rreundi
tie fiv< iit m, trorth'r
requirement.
tl.ni— U»« SneuUr V»»t» ft •'! the «ro*e-K»t,
 16 HOW TO Write correct engush

Q. 2 . Fill up the blanks with suitable Verbs

(a) There
chased yesterday
Hims— Use
(c)Ten miles —
ten rupees on the table, (b) Five maunds of rice
-not a long distance.
Singular Verbs in all the sentences
pur*

Role VI. Names and THles and the Verb

9n Subject qi ^ 51 sttjt (name) ^ qi ftqt jeqq

^ (title) 5), fit Singular Verb
Name trr Title ^ ft Tq ^ ^ a|r—
?r7 ipjVi 5)31 f, 3*T

The United States of America is a great country.

Arabian Nights is a popular book.
Lamb's Tales From Shakespeare is widely read.

T*r ?nit rf Singular Verb «iqW ft cs ft«t Subject

fs:?ft

a Names
Jii S'rra' «T SOT 1
& Titles %
1 S ^ srff fhit, T?tf*
wa?fll Capital Letters & 5? ^tt 1 1

Note— sprew (spom) %“» ffVfT i, sim 57 irr ^ ^rrn

(name) Plural era S traVi >, sra 9q|t Team (?)») «t ihr ffm
i, T* ai»jr er ^ Ti *tfr I ^ S Team «i sft'i Noun of
«ra
Multitude affri Plural if I aV wfira Plural Verb «i f^t*! rni t,
3 ^—
India ha\e lost by three wickets.
Bihar were defeated by Bengal in the first Test Match
Australia hare won.

TST 9 India, Bibar sftr Australia * ftrt Plural Verb

amt
m sr^ ftat 3 aft w
I. WtPk qfl ei sim 9: sfra (name) n ^
«tv 5Tft ^i, Tfa* Team mt wq ChU 3 TarfsTt Noun of Multi-

tude ^
rdfs plural 9 sg® ftm 3 1 9% inft»i si’rert pjn^-<rat wtr 9
srq 9, Collective Noun
sprir PrqS J ft, 9rft wt^ 9 nrcr •nit'i Singular
1

tt ‘rfr'i, srnr srff rtm si HTni 1

EXERCISE

Q. Correct the following sentences—

(»J New Be»rii‘»s have been wntlen by Leavit (b) T. S. Eliofi Selected
Essaytare a standard book of eriiieism. ft) New Bearings (n Ensliih Poetryare
worth reading, (d) Aipects Of The Novel have been wTilten by roriief (e)IIafd
Times are a great novel. (DTo Daffodil* have been composed by llerrLk.
(g) DicLefti have criikhed utilitarian philosopby in Hard Times.
(blTheUniied
Sutet ef Arnerk* ere e ^fpotref.
mult— Use Singular Verbs is alt (he seaieaces.
 SYNTAX : AGREEMENT 17

Role VII. The Inseparables and the Verb

Nouns (Pair) rslrli 3^ Inse-

parables aifi sTicn I. w ripi nrr & sign stai i A Nouns
I— scissors, shears and trousers, >f Si^ject 3ft ttrft ^
rT% aT«r Plural Verb 52fl»r I, ^^tR: 4 PiRr?!? Plural t; "tr ^ 53^
TffI a pair of sn^, ?fr Singular Verb ^ wh flrri I, TTtft %?ft ^
r5i% ?l nwT & fr 3rg ^ I. atr —
My scissors are sharp.
A pair of scissors has been purchased.
Trousers are used by many Indians.
A pair of trousers has been made for me.

Rule VIII. The Hyphenated Expression

fg wpfsl Jf Singular Noun i ar? w

Preposition srni t sftr air* ft?
ftrl Noun *l 5fTTSi ftrrr i ntfl ffr ^tft **r? «> Hyphenated Express*
1

ion *TT an **ai row upon row; ship after ship. expression
% *« Singular Verb *1 stjVi fim i—
“Letter after letter describes his struggle to find expression."
— RAV.VH FOX
Row upon row of delicate green ir soothing to our eyes.
Ship after ship Is sailing by.
One hour after another (hour) has passed away.

W fmt if Plural Verb «i fftn fWi i

Rule IX. Noun-equiYaleats and Ibe Verb

fm *T Subject Noun-equivalent {Noun « wrm

5%—
'

hi Verb Smgularfrai

To walk Is healthy.
H'alking Is a healthy exerase.
How to do A problem.
ii is

That he is poor is known to me.

ffi fTf? 3 ‘to walk' f* Infinitive I, 5??^ If ‘walking’ t*

Gerund, if 'how to doit,’ a* Phrase ‘that he is poor’
Tet Clause. It tml Noun-equivalents 1 1 esf^ r^tS: Rrr Singular Verb
«i 9 ?>r pn 9i> 5? i t irrf Plural Verb «i saVr mtat sgfan ^ ^
 —
IK Itow TO »Mt£ CORurCT fNCtJTU

Ral« X. Tlte AdJ^cftTf sml (he Verb

Adjective eitn Noun •Y etj f> «V vj* flt

cn‘t'( tf. nl eriT ri Subject ti^(rT aw« «n riunilVetb mi

3t|—
The rich are happy.
The poor are unhappy.
The haneu are poor.
The ilrtuoui are bleited.
The blind iio not receite light,
ur fTRf Singular Verb ct e?V «ts ^ i

Rale XI. 'Many a an* and ‘More than one*

Many a/an «V mote than one * win r?Tl Singular Verb «t

flat air—

Many a man wet killed.

More than one boy m-o/ absent,

iw fr^rr ^’SfRe—
“More than one, ihough its sense is necessarily pfurel. Is treoiti
agrees
as a sort of compound of ‘one*, folhneing Us eonstruetion end
with a singular noun and takes a singular verb—
More than one workman u-as killed.
More than one workman was killed, not 'workmen' or 'were',
—
Fo%vLEK Modern Encush Us.tCE .•

Iflsre, tw am 3 ffiOT «i "jraw 5W1 1

"Many of you hare the burden offacing these problems wKeh
will
, . . .may last for a generation or more than one generatioD.”
JAWAIiARLAL NEH»U —
EXERCISE

Q. Correct the following sentences —

(a) More than ooe men were rewarded, (b) Many a books haw h**®
written, (c) More than one hours have passed, (d) Many a ros«hIoomM
waste themselves in the desert air. <e) Many an ugly scenes were seen.

Hunt— (a) man was; (b) twok has; (e) hour has; (d) rose blooms and

wastes itself: <e) scene was.

 SYNTAX ; AGREEMENT 19

Rule Xn. The Apposition and (be V'erb

Apposition srak til Verb to Apposition

RTfi Noun tn Pronoun i «3*rR tltn^. Apposition tx sgart snp, —

/, Rajendra Prasad, am a student.
Tcu, boy, are very wicked.

xxf awT Rajendra Prasad 55^ Jf ‘boy’ Apposition xx

sfffe »5i^ sTifW I »iVr You ^ *w «> m i f%T rrr snro 5 :

5«t i comma 5; aVa wr »nw ? 1 rafer xsr av*xl i Verbs Appo-

sition (R i «r7 ^ sn^ Pronouns (I eftr You) i sg'nr f, Apposition "R
{Rajendra Prasad «?tT boy) ^ etgpu 1 w anxt 3 am ^ are i; *xit
is ^ snflTr »j5r tr«PST rri i

EXERCISE

Q. Correct the following sentences—

(a) I, Mohan, ts a siudeni of 1 . A. (M You.
the son of a rich msn. ii very
lucky, (e) He, the only ion cf bis old parents, are very dutiful (d) I. ihe man
you were lookint for. <1 here (e) You. my life-long compaoion, has been very
helpful.

Hmii— (a) am; (b) are, (c) is; (d) am; (e) have.

Rule XIII. Dltlribatlre Pronotns aad the Verb

flfx Tie? «i Subject r{ Distributive Pronoun (each, every, one,

either tn neither) tf til Verb to Singular }. a&—
Each of them has gone.
yelcfter o( Ibe two views is acceptable.

egt Plural Verb ^ j celn ueei aafwn T)m 1 rw ntr-v H r«? (Sttst ?t
vinsi e—
"Each os subject is ImarsaMy singular, even hen folloned by 'of
them' etc., e.g firc/i o/iAe wAee/s Ars rtw s/xsArs."
— rowiiR MootRN Escusii
: Usage
And again,
"T/iPUse o/ffurai ifrbo/ierFjtbtr, «j. In 'Either of these me-
r/ui./t are sufr«s/uf’ fr a common grammatical blunder.”
— rGwvrii ; Mootax Engush Usage
t’t Rlr fnxtJ TT Trasn rtk in ^aT«t •«? t?! }—
*' but Bclthrr of them net* able to enter It”
— s. aiaiATOsoN
 1

20 now TO WRITE CORRtCT rNOLim

•‘Neither of sheie two ntn mart than minor poets.”

— LAWRtNCr DCRRtLt.
"Each of these are a series of moral essays.”
—OLI\£R FLTOS
T5T aiTiif ?ncr wit *lrn •! ft tririw cj inf ftew wr n’i:>T 3
snO } I wtR »ft mrvtsfr
3 w>, afl wjtwtw ^
^ m ftirw tt tph ithtr i m
I jo^ ftmif err sfr^ int r*t^
qm ftqi inn i wSR«t i qfin fTnrfwrwiw i mq‘r «>—
i

"Neithor of Bile's sisters has minrA luck In snaring a husband."

—NORMAN LEWS
"la either of your sisters working V' — norman lewis
Note — Jrft Each wr qqVi Plural Noun ur Pronoun ^ r,
Verb Plural q>»n i. 3A—
We each wish to rise.

TH Ti¥7«7 Verb (wish) Plural t, fftft Each wj saPi Plural Pro-

noun (we) i frq 5sri ^ I qir jno 3?i?TW ift 5—
The wheels each have twelve spokes, ail Plural Noon (wheels)
TTCEach met J j rffftq Plural Verb (have) wr vitn 53: 1 r Kt^ q?w1f
3 Singular Verb wr suh «5S thpri win i

EXERCISE
Q. 1. Correct the following sentences —
mstbods are succewfgl (b) The conception Is faulty for
(a) Either of chess
two reasons, neither of which are noticed by Rato, (c) Keilfier of them were
there, (d) Either of the roads are Ions- (e) Each of the students have to pay
colJege tutioo-fee every month. (f> Everyone of his sisters are unmarried.
(g) They each has a book.
/finrj— Use Singular Verbs in all the sentences escept rn (g).

Q. 2. Fill up the blanks with suitable Finite Verbs

—
bad. (bl Neither of the sisters married.
(a) Either of the two roads
(c) Each of them present, (d)—either of your sisters working ? (e) Everyone
ofthem— a foot, (f) We each—a problem.
Hints- Use Singular Verbs in all tbe sentences except in (f).

Rule XIV. Indefinite Pronouns and the Verb

wiqm WT Subject lodefimte Pronoun ftfrri ?rT trt'iH'ifi:

Singular f UT Plural, one,
wftwil sref rfift I. V?
 1 —

SYNTAX : AGREEMENT 21

everyone, anyone, no one, someone, nobody & somebody 5^^ singular

^ e^T t^f5ra HT? Singular Verb aRiT 1 1

f?ft ssvR both, many, some, and few plural 1 1 ati: sti
Plural Verb srrat i,

Eieryone knows this.

Many of them know this.

No one knows this.

Both of them know this.
Someone has said so.

?ft^ Indefinite Pronouns? fiml: if chftl 1 if ?

none, any, all ^ siRft 1

NONE
None ^ RT«t Singular Verb «t miPi Ri Plural «i, re tTr^fV Sf tsr

“None is an a66r<vi<i.vd form

of not-one or Do-one and would,
therefore, seem to be singular, but In its context it usually has a plural
#«ie— of the collision several persons were in the tramKar
but none were injured.' Only a literary purist would write ‘was' and he
would probably be injiuenced by Dryden's famous line— None but the
brave deserves the fair. But in a mistaken devotion to grammar he
would be sinning against usage." —
c. H. valiins Good Escush •

“None tj more often used with the Verb in the plural and has
eomc |[> be regardeff os the negative o/‘ony' (plural)."
—
L. TIPPING : A Higher English GRAmuR
“None was used only as singular but it has also actfuir.
originally
ed a plural mean//ig— None hare gone away yet."
—
NESFiELD : Aids To Study Of English CoMPosmov

"It is a mistake to suppose that the Pronoun ‘noae* is singular

only and must at all eosti be followed by Singular Verbs', The Oxford
English Diciionary eipiicttly slates that plural eonslruetion is com-
moner." — fowler ; Modern English Usage
t=t ^ ^ srwiT s? ? ft: «w erqfSre s'ntsit S None ^
sraVi plural if rt ^ ? Itn ft: fiTt erewt »r9i ?—
None were injured.
A'ane have gone away yet.
 rt-n* -

**//f htfj iV t m^r^'irr rf tf

fvf/;w«f /i'* >1 flt >)v»f _f f tftvn
•7/r /'>* t *ri-i(ti»'r f<» rMV*- fV»/ ere tnr r-Kre Tef't
•rr »Kmf tj p vnw
"Stmt of ht fcitf heet tf'V fj (j!cS n r'lf’er

Tilt KrvtriN Rtvtrw ; Sprmi '55

"Stmt rf the m iifjti urtUtt jit a'/ l^ey want, ron art
cttfr’e^! ••
Tiif SVw Vn«i Tmri ; /ja. 20, '57
•*
n«)«f n/ the «:»nr eharjtttrt %tt /aft ifflo'atitr."
f. « roBifr*
'*
or^fc^'vi « raiMtr. or tttn\hUi tti /s^rKnli
hAfr? Bo«f nftt MtttV
IB fn?f 9 none tt rtunt sr^tr tni fyt rtunl Verb «f 8T*'r frjt
njj > I Mrct^reitl i etsjiu •ft. f«r« Untt «T<^ r"? »*t* w rr«f
^ I «i n fifiT *1 W—
'*/ Kou/>/ i/ui BMC of ihr ftayt tf Shaktiytart a
meaning. ..." — T. i. tuor

"Satitof (he obthus complaints that nett or ml^hi hart been

brought to tear upon the first Poems and Ballads bolii good."

— T. S. EUOT
•'None oj h\s works ibowj more clearly how wide and unexpected
were the resources o/ his genius." ifOR e>ans —
*'.... which none o/ his Imitators bate approached."
— irOR EVANS
emfr 3 Singular Verbs (has and holds) ci si^r ftTT >r!n
ifV

9aTr« Eliot aiy? ^ none eft Singular jtri ? wrn 3 Pti 1^ i

Ifor Evans ente ft Singular Verb nijW ftiei I, er 3?ft ft w

5 Plural Verb n
iwbTf€?j i l raft I fte none srpi elrf «
irt smr ft ^mi t »ft singular jnsiwi i iftr plural sh ^
singular sftr plural i 3?n ?. «Vr
snrW entr J i ftt ft’ifr

ft ft, ga^-a q STR «tq Singular Vejb

nw tri i f« wft none ft:

infbi ^ sftr none of ft ai? Plural Noun ei Pronoun sift er prft

Plural Verb ?:i Eliot ?rn7 ft wrr ft •rjft 3 Plural Verb cr Erbr
Tltn tft
i

RT s^Ct ^
ftRi ^ err ^ie>ft S' ft' ft ei^e 3:5 gstft 3tft ^ •
 1 —
"i’.
j». ,

SYNTAX : AGREEUE

ANY
Any «; u^ln singular sfft plural ^1^1 ft <Kf^ I,
Does any of them know ?
Do any of them know ?
Any of these is long enough.
Any of these are long enough.
Any ^ tiT>r Verb i snftfr if ajfe Ttii hi*i Verb
singular iftfTT I ^ plural v>, 3lfn tji |r €Hf 1

ALL
All «i »ft BijVr singular sftr plural ^ nr? ft rhii I; aft

^Hrjwell. All are wen.

«tqT it nrri «R<R ssrr 1 TWB if All

^^
1

^ everything Bt wbole (singular) ct <r frt); ft all persons

tilings (plural) ft i fg «frr

i4H’j well that ends well.

All that glitters is not gold.

xmT if All «t se>r everytbiog^i srj if jsi ^ *ftT TKftrx Singular

Verb BiT JtTtn >rTT i i
»t all «t u5 all^ men nt things ^ iff Plural
Verb stffvr ^wr er »e all «i srS everything *n whole ?>, iff
Singular Verb sti i all of us knows nV all has gone away,
am all is not yet lost 55 1

Rule XV. ‘Former,’ ‘Latter,’ ‘followlitg’ aod 'Undersigned'

^ Pronoun
are Verb singular
^ »nfit

aft
snfhr

d tmr \
Noun i
afir plural ift
ij

1
^ ajf?
J
ptki
«ftr arm
^
if

Noun ^ if si) Verb singular 5)m I, <ir uf^ ^ w ft *if^ Noun 5:

if si??ft Verb 5lr— plural,
“The great advantage of Drydenover Milton is that rAe former Is

always in controlof his ascent... the latter has crea/ed a perch from
which he cormot afford Jo /off. . — ^T. s. euot
"It is what makes Maryell a classic, classic in sense in which
Cray and Collins are nof, for the latter with all their accredited purity,
are poor in jharf«*p^ehn^y ' .
— T. j. eliot
srf tm S the former «ftr the latter ?: ftrr Singular Verb si^n
f. WTtfs Vefsf ^ Singular Noun k firr 113a gY I— the former ‘Dryden’
hi smthe lalief ‘Milton’ h em it the latter h

v ./
 N — 1

24 HOW TO WRITE TORRCCT ENGLISH

Verb (are) gji jrVi 5sn ^ siC Nouns (Gray and CoUins)
plural
following
i
5r
sTf5i

»f)
I
vt<
( SRH
fkm smi
*rfT

^ % *&—
arc is 9rr JT^jk 3f55 ^ I The

“The following hare left the Raj Bhawan—

Dr. V. K. R. V. Rao and Shri N. B. Subbakrishna.”
—^Tne Indian Nation : Feb. 18, ’57

“Following is the AH-India weather report.''

—The Indun Nation : Feb. 18, ’57

*r57 'R[^ ^ the following % m Plural Verb (have) ^ snrk 55

I, srstfy ?I7 5? 5l ^ «RT I \ fsrt am following i are
Singular Verb (is) ^ ark jut | gj J,
gft wTftr aff a? Singular Noun
(report) ^ fka njwi jsr 1
Note — a^am W tbF fc former. latter, following n«n under-
signed *f Plural a^ »j5i 1 1 era: following followings
sftr undersigned «i uodersigneds syr sebt i

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentences-^
(a) Doth Kean and Shelley are (ood poeia but ihe latter are not at great Si
the former, (b) Shaw arid Shakespeare are great dramatists, but Ihe difference is
that the former are anti'romaoiie whereas the iatier are romantic, (e) The follow-
ing are the weather report, (d) The uodersigneds lequesi the pleasure of your
company.
Hiatt— (.i) (be latter is; (b) (be fonntr is- . .the latter u; (c) Is;

(d) undersigitcd.

Rule XVI. Subject+Verb ‘to be’ + Complemenl

fg TwitcTr ^ eWV i — Subjeci+Verb ‘to bc*+

Complement, a&
It is he. It is they.

trr! rsr erref ff *lc’ Subject •«* Verb ‘to be’ si'It *hc’ im ‘they’

Complements 1 1 3 Verb *to be’ rt number «V person

Subject c wgwTT rl^i Complement « arjwTT wTl t
Subject fi
be^ k
a sj^ cfiwtt ?fl t» neffc Assertive Sentence *f Verb *lo
fW
») Noun ar Pronoun ryii } egy Subject tr>Tt ) a'r 'Vrb 'to be
k
rr ^ ou.t 9t Pronoun «Hi Complement, am fe STT*
ewTf « K? J f*tr aw? «r it is they k ark it are they
^ ^ *C*
ftm I tft ^ I

if are they fr ? a ? f« ‘they’ Subject J, at

 —

SYNTAX : ACRFTMENT 25

»f «JT i Complement THf?r5 «rtt Verb % asrr sr?T qr i

fjj
>^T ertrtt a—
The last crop uoi potatoes.
Our only guide uar the stars.
R qmf »? Singular Verb ‘was’ aifW 51 }; at Singular
^bjcct, KJT?!: ‘crop’ st>r ’guide’ i sig^rn 11331 5*1 f 1 potatoes
«ffT stars Subject ara ^ Plural Verb inibi ftiin s^t ^
1 TH a TB fBTir ^ at? as
"The A’oun that stands before the Verb should be regarded as the
Subject and the Verb adapted to n." —fowler ; King’s English
IB ftrqif w <rT5R ar^J* to! t'—
“What canceros criticism is not the or unarowed motives
o/ifcomji... '
-i.A»rauiiDs
"Coleridge's supreme coniribotion to poetry was the three
—C. M. BOWKA
Note— (a) ew »i« jriBT •n. afas am i—
Tbe wages of sin ts death.

VfT Singular Verb (is) Cl irabi err I mft Subject

plural

wages
1 1

^ Singular
wTsfsTW mfh is «5btt itrl arc
trmr at death «t Subject
^ wrfr? Ihjb st 1

bipbwt Singular Verb «i

(wages)

srqhi f«siT ^1 sirr bFT a sftr sr etri wmiT er 5BT1 tm »?riS 1

(b) wet wp mn } f* Verb ‘to be’ 3: q?^ «n^ arat Noun *n Pronoun
t Subject rtsn i, tt Interrogative sentence ii Verb ‘to be’ 3 i wh
erp Noun in Pronoun (1 Subject |t?ii Verb ’to be’ ^ sTr^t erai

What proof are these tears ?

crrareSiaT^Bi^ qim Noun (tears) Subj'ectI, sr^ jiBi
Noun (proof) Brf, qctfB ct Interrogative sentence i Plural
1 Verb
infk I raftiq, I

What armour is your achievements against death ">

tf Plural Verb ‘are’ bt Rchr 5>ti 'aiftx, q^tfs a?? Subject achievements
, armour 1

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentences —
(a) The only difficulty are the fart changes brought about,
(b) The
pompous mooument of Egyptian greatness are the s^ramids. (c) My
great
 .

26 now to wmtr coumcr rNottsir

• rt ihecloihei. (d) Min'i ('ntt fOeisf •« fcn miraJ qualitwt. fe) Whit h«rtquim
(tc bookt *1111 cloih«« <{v thctiouMemth mmi famit; lim tre thtir
molhert In Jaw. (f) Whai wf iweJ in ihe motbrn *011(1 are m-'raJ tj-alitjei. ffi) f

Uhe.(i»He»mJ (» YoaWh« tk) it ara they.

/Anfi— U<« Smiular VerNinatlihc wniencft ftom fa) la (f). but ‘tm’lti
(h); ‘ir In (I). 'att' In Ijl. and 'ii* In (k)

Ruir XVri. Relalite t’ronoona and Ihe Verb

tjf? Subject »l* RctMive Pronoun {who, which, or that)
r. ’fi
Verb 3'ri Antecedent « <tdi f i Antecedent tw Noun m Pronoun
Relative Pronoun i qfJt wrfi h «*fl r**ri Prr Relative
Pronoun »;t t>ni 5?i—

The won who It here my friend.

is

The men who are here are my friendf

tirf ift WTT^f 9 Relative Pronoun 'who' qr^ ei Anteee*
dent Singular Noun (man) i «At Plural Noun (men). «V.
WT9^ 21 Verb singular } sV *1 plural, rw «1t 3TTn*i S—
lam the man who has helped you.
It U t who Ime helped you.

trt^ 21 Singular Verb ciflTrtjvn ?, ftfUiK Relative Proaopn

(who) im Antecedent (man) singular } t pit ^ Plural Verb (have)

«Bt srih get! I, eqlft eti Relative Pronoun (who) Antecedent (1) fint ^
person f, firq Present Tense if Plural Verb (have) siFtT f i qrf

T5^ vm ^ have *f)r «nr» 9 has «i s^ftn rhn l

Caution—TV mw >1 one of «i sifbi nt of i vr? *n2| vr^ Noun m
Pronoun ^
tf Antecedent ma aiVr vwi sgwrt Verb WW «t, of ^
errl art (one) ^ sgmr sr^. —
She is one of those who do not accept this view.
Relative
Wf who Antecedent ‘those’ ‘one’ nrT «rU rtrfev

Pronoun (who) 3f firv Plural Verb (do) «r ftrvi mri 1 1 vff Singular
Verb ^iTT i cirv ft
\ w ^ ^
S Singular Verb «i snfbr fwi i «fi ufwff sfff—
"This, may be, is one of the first difflenltles that faces us in a
it

library." —Virginia woolf

was worrying Gide, or rather one of the things
"II ivas this that
**•
that was worrying him
marhs the romantic from the classical
"One of the qualities that
attitude derives from this diBerenee in the feeling for time.
—DR. A. A. MENDItOW
 SYNTAX : AGREEUENT 27

*7 flfft not one of the desk-pomdmg types that likes to stick out
kisjaws." —TiiE New York Times : Jan. 20, ’57
rr xmt if Plural Verbs face, were, mark
^
difficulties, things, qualities «i1r
w ai^'f if Relative Pronouns
types
i Antecedents
like a;r

1^
jfjjVr

siTTt;

«it tml plural f i tfiirr, frixxpft %

>rT fm tl^ >—
‘7fe eemnj'ns one o/ those nho have .ter standards for
English verse...."
-t.s. Eliot
"flis (Andrew Lang's) sonnet is one of the most fnrerejrfng
of the
mony documents that are 10 6e /oimif in the Oxford Book
of English
^
— F. R. LEAVIS
“Bur this is one of the hundred faults vihich do not matter."

—OLIVER ELTON
“Palpable Is one of the words (hat are liable to clumsy treatment
of this sort ” —H. W. FOWLER
Wti*Tf it Relative Pronoun (who, which, that) k ftr?
that,
Plural Verbs «7 aeVr m Antecedents cnri: those, docu-
nents, faults sftr words f wi plural J i wn ^ft «? i

EXERCISE
Q. 1. Correct the following sentences —
He u one of the best men (hat bat ever lived, fb) f am the man who
(a)
am to (e) You are the boy who have beaten me <d) It » you who hai aaid
blame
(«) I am one of those who am of a different view, (f) He is one of those
'bo has served this country heart and soul, (g) I am the man who have
done it.
(blThis IS an epoch of one of the most singular discovenes that his been made
amongst men. (i) It is I who is your best friend

Hints— (a) have; (b) is, (c) bas, (d) have; (e) are; (0 have, fe) has; (h) have.
^ ^

Q. 2. FiU up the blanks with suitable Finite Ferbs —

(a) It is I who— responsible for Ibis, (b) I am (he man who— guilty.
•r) This one of the hundred facts which— so common, (d) I am the one who
IS
•o blame, (e) He is one ol those men who—always finding fault
(f) You are
ibe person who— really guilty.
Hints— (a) am; (b) is; (c) ire; (d) is; (e) are; (O is

Rule. XVni. ‘And* and the Verb

Role (a)— t;f; d etfd^ Noons 91 Pronouns ar) and %

^ Verb plural ^fir I; Str—
 1 S

23 ltO\% TO WHITE CORRECT ESGIBH

Dome and were men of

Strift »-it.

Two and n«i) trtsiefovi.

She and I ere friendt.
You and he ere neiehboun.
Rnie <b)— rfr and Singutar Noun* «J
rriif "> Verb ]in:utjr a^—
The \fc:isiraie and Co’lectof is on lour.

tt' ingular Noun* (\tayi«fate and Collector) and ?> art

a? > c» «i ara *trt cV cT sfiT. rsffV flTR TT^ Noun >; an
Article ai n>: fan »'ri ) 1 s'"? ra «Vf 4 »nt Article «t asln |«i jWr, fiV

it e* ri »>a err* aV rn «t«*T n f'tura) ara ai^, a»1—

The Majittraic and t*ie Collector ere on lour.
SWT,

The fvet and phU.ytc'phee Kit »a!d *4‘*.

i Ai-fu!ir Verb rhJi) «t t**»t >. •T't'a er' •« 0 Noun b ar* Arlicic^
irr f »**» er'ae a**» itn ) f« afl •* i> »t'»i fw* *^1 philotopher
> **r ct! i» »'»*
I Noun* i ftJ Article «r an n'V l"*i

U 1 ’ •»*»» > •'r Verb pliifal at aTin-; ih-

The f'i'rt **J tke yk|Jo»i*i‘f!?f Kne wxf *0

N»e* t^;ure»» and * Wjm iiV > cn Verb *10

it UV. }. e-kth 'd rer».-n Snr.ijrcoir p*>> •''»

«r**« a c**' f ft r> • • I. -

T»s tnj fw^ ii f •vr

Tme *5d Imwarr fur
•’
»• ia i ^ - fl it <r»C*n «»• > i an I ^
.-j! »e'l *• Pt ifjt Verb ar iVn *

(««- ar* «e' a } i * **a‘ r C *1'"'

•/..r b /»*• «',•« »'»

»*>*<• •*re r,-vd'!/ aerepiJIe

‘t -t f-t t% tT',' »t
•»* Il»-* V.> »i» P''-**"
r* iz.. i.-.,
:

t - ,wN*r J '*« a* *1 ert > fcV ai C

^

ew fcrt.

* ii rsr> t »f»st.'4as.
 1

SYNTAX : ACREEMCNT 29

Role (c) — ^ Singular Nouns I ^ and % I s?>t

S ^
mT an^ li iTpft 13: Noun 3it^(pair) ^ I ^
Nonas TV'Parcel Subject” v> ^s=n%» ^ imf S Verb singular
Tltni: 5?T—
Bread and buiier is a rich food.
Horse and carriage is waiting at the gate.
The croy\n and glory of life if character
Pen and ink is required for me.

Pt tnfr 3mf if Nouns ‘and’ & S' tjr Verb | singular.

iTffs sifn $ and ft ftNouns arm stlft urer «nft I «ftr trra fftjtir

Note — ftft amt ft ifr Plural Verbs «t ipftii Tt mrm ? sk rf^iT

3ifti, n? fsr iftft Nouns fti^?»g5|sr^3Tqi«& sPji: 1:1 iht j^t 1

sipti ft Verb % Complement ft ir? rai ^ sim i f« ft Nouns ftra cr

^t3)« I' in ft iran-srrm «i a?^sr «i iba cttft I; »ft~

Bread and water are the necessaries of life.

N i^ber
^ ‘necessaries* eft Plural Noun f Verb «i Complement i ijtIi 1

ft iiti ^ ftr ttr etrs ft ‘bread* siV ‘water* ?> snn sr?n **5
iitffsfl
ftr5r«^i3r ;r?T [ efir ft iif eft *• «ft Complement
tltn tl wf ? era: it mI ^ ft ft Plural Vtib «t tiVi

’•rrTT I Trft fi^TT Tfft Tier fttfT ft—

Bread and water It the simplest food.

Singular Verb (is) ^ iraftn«ST>nt. iretft Singular Complement

Ttrami i ft bread sir water sran-sRn argw’ 5T^ ? iNt *a

Iftsm i»r (food) ti 3ft «xift ? i

Role (d)—3f5 singular Nouns lit and ft 3113 jftT Tsrft ft rn ft;

''ift ift each,

every 31 no s^Vi ^
<ft Verb singular Tftm J, aft— t),

Pach man and each woman h of the same opinion.

Every Tom, Dick and Harry nears suit these days
fiery day and every night ftWngf its own pleasures for us
No boy and ro girl h'ot present there.

. ft Nouns ^ and ft w)*! »m K ftr »ft Verbs singular f,

^
ft n Nouds i irft each, every m no «i ^sn i 3t 1 Plural Verb
1

^ ^ ^5 —
**^/e If fl /on? ftre/c/i /«// ff/rarfery, /« nhich every hoar
frcua^tatKe have ttielr peculiar mml." —^viROtstA v.ocnj
 30 MOW to wnjtr coji»rcT rNotnii

the
“....Etcry town ettry Wwtrr so short of labour
filaek Prarh that high wages were giten to Immigrants."
a/irr

—ft. tt. TR£Vn.yAV

*Ttt 3 hM iftt t» *t srn irm sV -pn 3
waj »T I wn t»Tl ni »f)«T r«r mtf 3 Plural Verb rr niyt irr rg btstt
iTT-n T7ff^ rtlt <0 »fR *rifirr 3 vt rrtw *T TR7 fltTTTTT
rnti ) I

EXERCISE
Q. I. Correct the ft>Uo*tng sentences^
(a) You and I am nrighboun. (b) lie and I ii clait-friendL le) TTie rJide
and c^rdian are dead, (d) Tbe kader and Kholar are to addreta ihi< meeting to-
day. (<) Ink and pa(wr Is reeeiaarjrarticletof daily use. (0 R*ce and lishare
my favourite dish, (g) Milk and honey is costly things (h) The Magistrate and
Collector «ere rr(«t<i there. <i) Every boy and every girl have attended this
meeting. (J) No student and no teacher were present there.
Hinit—W are; (b) are; (c) is; (d) is; (e) are; tO it; (g) arn (h) ivas; (i) bai;

U) was.

Q. 2. Fit! up the blanks with suitable Finite Verbs—

(a) Every thought and every feeling— not valuable, (b) The poet and the
critic—of different opinions on this matter, (c) He and I— bosom foendi. (d)Peo
and paper— necessary articles for students, (e) Bread and butter— a neb food,
(f) The poet and scholar—dead.

IfHits— it) Is; (b) are; <c) are; (d) are; (e) is; (0 is.

Rule XIX. 'As well «’ etc. and Ibe Verb

Rule (a)— trft 5 Subjects ^ as well as, and not, with,

together with, along with, in addition to, rather than, more than,
like, unlike, but, except, besides, including ui excluding^ sm sfrfT

3rT7 (trr stvpr pgtn vfR). at Verb 4 number «rV person Subject 4
sra>?n: trl^ S'.

‘*His {Blake's) philosophy. like his visions was his own."

— T. S. ELIOT

“Soil'd qaalUies, like a good marriage jeflfemertl, endure.”

— OLIVER ELTON

“This broken talk, wllb Us exclamations, interruptions and

changes of voice, is also found in Sterne." —Oliver elton
“Dante, mote than an.v other poet, has succeeded in dealing with
his philosophy...." T. s. eliot —
 —
SYNTAX AGREEMENT:

7?^ 9m Singular Verb (was) fs? I sfk if Plural

Verb (endure) *T, a) JJ.5. ‘Kt 9R7 Jf like ^ trcit Singular Noun
(philosophy) srpjT I «ftT If Plural Noun (qualities). TEft- sraiT fftEit
«?1t 9mT if Singular Verb iT sraPi «« t, like «rft more than ^
>tfll inni: Singular Nouns (talk s?fT Dante) 99^1 |srr 1 1 fef *ffT >ft

51—
The ihief, as well as his sons, was arrested.
The thief, and not his sons, was guilty.
He, rather than his victims, was really unhappy in the end.

r:r Enft 919^ if as well as, and not nV rather than 9T§t

Noun
trurm
91 Pronoun ^ 3r3*rrT Verb*! tuftn 5ST I, rrrfex ^ 9TW9
ftrrsTftifeci 9!99f if W9®T
li ^ rn
*T affisR *T *9 *) na) t

....a taxi along with two employees of the cinema house ate
also traceless.

On this opening ceremony were present Commissioner, Tirhut

Division, Shrl S. V. Sohni, /. C. S., together with that great stalwart
Shrl Moinul Haque.

h SingulatVetbs«!99>i along
with sfrr together with Jt enf ®«ni. tasi rftr Commissioner strif J' *ff

Singular Nouns ^ i

Rule (b)— ^ Subject ^ not only but dt not only.... but

olso St srn *)?! m, tff Verb number tftt person affiii! Subject 5:

«5*^ ^Tft j?r—

Not only India but all counrrier are in trouble.
Not only he but all bis/nends were arrested,

unr 99? wit 9199 if India nh «i9t J he i wgwir Singular Verb

*1 wh ftni a> 9T 9hii I

EXERCISE
Q. 1. Correct the following renfencer—
(a) He as well as I are goilty (b) The house with atl its beloagings,
were sold away. <c) You, rather than yonr father, is to blame, (d) Ram, like
eU his compaoioDS, are a spoilt child, (e) No one except a few fortunate
shareholders have reaped the hasvest. (0 You as well as I am respon-
sible for this action. (g) The ship with all its passengers were lost, (b) There are
nothing but miseries in life. (i> Not only she but all her sisters has been married.
HMis- (a) is; (b) was; (c) arc (d) |^ (e)has; (f) are; (g) was; (h) is; (i) have
32 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH

Q. 2. Fill up the blanks with suitable Finite Verbs—

(a) These houses with a garden in front lovely, (b) He as well as
present, (c)He more than his patents—responsible for his bad career, (d) Ram
along with his friends—going to the college, (e) You, unlike your father,— a miser,
(f) The robber as well as his associates—anested

Hints—{i) are, (b) isorwas; (c) is or was; (d) is or was; (e)are; (f) was.

Rule XX. The Separators and the Verb

Rule (aj — or, nor, either or 91 neither nor jm

9T ^ Singular Nouns 9i Third Person s? Singular Pronouns
^ (separate) arR, Verb singular fhn t; —
Neither beauty nor duty is an armour against death.
Either rain or storm is lo come.
Neither he dot she is here,

rr ^ sJhtiR ^ f*5 ftSTRf S 1—

"Seilher search nor labour are necessary" — DR. ;ohnSO.v
“AV/fAff painting nor fighting feed men." —'RlJSKIv
"parody or odaplarfon ha»e enornious advanfagrt to certain
novelists:' —e. m. roRSTER

"A chance word or sigh are Just as much evidence as a speech or

a mufdef." ^ «• to«STER —
“A'o young lady of Miss Austen’s acfuainianee wailing eagerly
seems
for the appearance of Scon's or Byrons next volume of verse,
ever to hare asked what ^Ir.Xhro^ or Mr. Tom Bertram mtit going
lo do to serve their eountrv in times of danger. O. M. TREVtir an —
T^rg’ul'arWf 3 Singular Verbci aTmfVwi t wit r^f

art h»n fc tn wr fr m i 1 nw »II trr J fs ftiTgtdt

H aiT trr» o siTPi wt n PiTu «f TPfR cr ?. wlf

j
hT

fjTT^ ft ii» wmta sAr rufevi mfr «ri^t ft fT ^ t

5—
"A reader or auSuor b at liberty to remain paitire."
— MZA fOOSD
"The teacher or lecturer Is a danger" —EZRA ftiL’ND

"H't say. In a vague way, that Shakespeare.or Dante, or luerf

t:us is a poet u ho thinks." “T. S EtlOT
Setther the teller nor she writer was in any degree Iniereulng.
-IX'-l alsten
 — 1

SYNTAX : AGREEMENT 33

T5r EiTTf ^ fsmgsn Singular Verb spft'r f^r^ri

% \ «n^ 'ft ^ »

Rule (b) 5 f? Plural Nouns in Pronouns kV or, nor, either

or ni neither nor i ?Ri irr ftqr siw, aV Verb plural Ttat I;
Is -
Neither men nor women lune come.
Either >ou or ue ha\e to do it.
Neither we nor they ore to blame.
Rule (cl— fV?5t-fvTj;t persons k Nouns at Pronouns »it or, nor,
either or at neither nori tmsRPt fttai aia, aiaa
Second Person ^ Pronoun ssrt I, 3*Ti eir Third Person «i sV sRT ^
First Person «i (2 3 1) rftr Verb trn hto Pronoun %
sg^rrmi: lit—
Either he or / am guilty.
Neither you nor he lj guilty.
Neither you nor / am guilty.
/r he or 1 to blame ?
Are you or he to blame ?
Are you or i to blame 7
m aieal if a 3 t Ji atn^ % lynr aar if fijsa-fvR bw i persons
k Pronouns ^ nn «m ^ «ffr Verb sn^ nafi suit attr % w3?Tir 1

Rule («l>— aft fi?»r-r«sT number k Nouns ai Pronouns aft or,

nor,either or at neither nor i STTi srsm fen ^na, ?ft wnt *f
Plural (Nouns at Pronouns) ^
oti snm I Wtr Verb siait rrrit snftta: wt%
atS Noun at Pronoun ^ ftm I. til—
Neither the son nor bis parents are to blame.
Either he or they are to blame.
Neither she nor they are to blame.
Is he or they to blame ?
Is the son or his parents to blame ?
T5t aiarf If Plural Noun at Pronoun aft »iaa If rat aai I sftr Verb
?nfta Slit at^ ^ siStnt gm 1

^
Caution— Rule
ftatr if ^lai a^f
(c) at? (d) t:

1 ^ a? aiait
aiaaa If

^ fe aia aiaa
^ if
^ ua If

fea-faca persons
|
ai
numbers % Nouns ai Pronouns^ or, nor, either or at neither
.nor ^ fen *1131?, ?tt area if wr^ arlf Noun
cRi wS'i ar Pronoun i
Verb aim i afti: a? Verb plural iftm 1 1
fti) ri
feraf a^—
H. W. C E.-3
 34 itow 70 wmrt coRtircT rNOLnii

“tV/ien two or mnrt mmlaalhes in dij/rrent numbers are Joined

by 'or', or 'nor' the Verb is in the plnril, as John or his friends are to
blame.

"If one of the Subjetts separated by ’or' or 'nor' happens to be

plural, It should be placed nearest to the Verb y^h!eh also should he
plural : Neither John nor his friends hare come."
n Oiuiff ^ tfiyir <rT & an? I ?—
Is John or his friends to btame 7
Has neither John nor his friends come ?

wR?i h an? 55 J t nrh ^ 5ft i ftn ?n% irr=i

sanmram »ri fa^ wrai mai {—

"Give the Verb the number of the alternative nearest it
— ‘Mother
or children are /o <!(?.' *ls r/ir child or the parents to be blamed?
IVhat should not be said is ‘Mother or children is to die', “Arc the child
or the parents to be blamed T’ — fowle* : Modern Evotnn Usage
i ft aa ftst-pRst numbers at persons % Nouns eTPro»
nrt at
nouns, Of, nor, either. . ..or at neither
Verb «n?r % trrfr snoflv
nor i tro atpi fti»i% it

ai% Noun at Pronoun i sg^rr Tim I , Sar ft

—
Rule (c) (d) Jf inaiat aai > t at smra^ atT I ft Verb plural ft ft

at sRT if sn^ ailt Noun at Pronoun i agsnt ft, 4ir—

fVere you or he there 7
iVere you or I there 7
rrr ft araaT if Verb % tofla you I eftr iTtfita t^ft sgatt were at
aabr jai 1 1 aft at? sf??t 8 suit aid he ai 1 i aignti was «bi aabi
at Sts® thri

^
I

—
Note Rule (c) (d)i ttma d ^ h
«m ftan la aVt ^
"IVhen ftva Subjects are Joined by ’or' or ’nor' the verb agrees in
person with the Subject nearest to it—Either James or I am at the top
of the class. Either you or James has done it." — nfsfieid
d7rft?a Hita i amaaK *ta at Subjects or at nor d: trn ®rTfii

td 5?
^
I, na Verb mdt tta& eifta aid ai^ Subject ^ wgmr thn 1
assm % ft ataa 5 First Person ‘I’ either or & ^ — 1

a^
ftat ‘I’ d: ag^rrc £< i, aatft at Verb d; srafW 1 fat am d ft?i * 1

‘James’ | wVt rafm ftat Eift i sgarr ’has' f, ‘jou’ ^ 5^ 1 f^ft

d aft «tl t ft saa-sraa number eftt person ^ Subjects ^
....or at neither.... nor & at Verb ard it aat ««1 wid ai^Sobjec 't

% sf
3*nr ttai J
 SY^tTAX : AGRCEMEitT 35

ail 'IT «ra s

“//i this construction /Ac Number anJ Person of ike Verb must be
common to both parts of ifie Subject.So both the parts of the Subject
must be of the same Number and Person. When there is a clash between
the Verb and one pari of the Subject, the construction is belter avoided.”
—G, H. VALUMS : Good Engi.kh
5?!^ c?5n I 3 aft fassr-Prsr number person ^ ^
either or ar neither nor & aw, eft ft:?r »ar ^ ^
^ift I, sft an® I, l%—
Either he or I am wrong.

am sata ^ fna ^ s'* n ‘be’ ^ aw ‘am’

w ^ ^ aw
1/57 ‘I’ «r?n, ‘is’

»wi 1 1 ta awa ft aft fta 1, 5i ^ ma art i

raftr ftft ?tw art faa i arzar aira ft at ast art I fa jfearsrifta ataa at
ftat vnm at ^>5; ftft i t ta ftafaa ft ftafa?* atra at aa ftt at a/tta-anta
afr i, arffti ftrat I—
“7/ would be belter, however, to repeal the Verb for each Subject.
The sentences would, then, be re-wriiien at foUows—Ehher James i$ at
the top of the class or I am; Either you hare done it or James has.”

aft rt ftat ftra fts Either James or I am at the top of the class,
at rtr aiaa aft feat ‘am’‘riana3tftswiifr?.a5 'James’ itr/asr^
^
i

rarftia aft ataa ft «rsm-«3m Dumber person ft; Subjects ^ either

or ar neither- . .nor ft *>*, fft ftsf*mflira ft anift ja ftaa ft egfftr atw
aft arna? aft efti-afT aaar a. 5ft—
Neither you nor I am righl=Neithcr you are right nor I (am),

r/ft art ftarr «T ari <it ). aa am# «w a/ft=T 5 dtx amw/ftar

^ aaiVnft Rule (c) ?r»if (d) # M3*na ^ araefftarl ^Pronouns ei Nouns

«ani-agnpersonainumber ft fl art eaft 5nfw aift a^ Noun ei Pronoun
ft «igm? ti Verb ci srabi ft?, aatf* ftraa afv^ iwVi # 1
aftfta:/ afer: *aiait."iMW ^ awa ni«nf afrt# irft ftran ftt
ft; (aafg r/aft tratr
ats aift Subject ft agait Verb ft naW ft)) aaawi 5
“One or two of her features are very attractive.''
—NORMAN LEWIS
EXERCISE
Q. 1. Correct the folhwtng sentences —
(a) Ntifher chapter nor verse are liven. <b) Either sugar or milk are requi-
red. (c) Neither a pen nor a pencil are there. W) Either he or I is wrong, (e) Only
 —

MOW TO wmrr conifer rvoiiTii

cncortwoboyjhjteomc. (f) Nttllwr hi* ffieoJ* nor he It (S«r(. ff) f jiher f--'
rarenu or he hlmtdf l« to Mame. (h) Ate the chlM or hit ^trenO to bit,Te ? hi
Arc he Of they to bUme •* 0) Xavefohn or hit friri'Jtcorre 7 tuber Tomer
Henry are coming here.
//init— (4) It, (h)lt; (c)i«:r(l)am: fe) have; to Ncliher he nor hit friendt
are therr, (g) l ither he himtelfor bit rorenii are to blame; (ht ft ibechitd ...7

(Dlihe .? ij) till John .. 7 4k) it.

Q. 2. nil u/> the blanks >rfih n/tablf Flftlie I'erbs —

(a) Neither he nor hit tlttct^manicd. (b) tither you or I— to bbme.
(c) Neither he nor you—toga, (d) Cither the or her friendt— tinging (e) Neither
he nor ]— torry for ihii (f)— the ton orbit rarentt to blame? (g>—you or be
to blame 7 (h)— neither he nor hit frrendt come 7
Hinit— (a) are; (b) am; (c) are; (d) are; 4e) am; (f) bit; (g) are; (h) hat.

Rule XXI. MullfpIfnlloA aad the Verb

rifrwi* (mathematics) # (multiply) cfif * FrrJti Jf tt^r

a«r>i tf

sis times four; twice two tuft i

^ cm') ? Verb siofular it trem i plural «ft, 5«—

Six times four is tweotyfour.
Six rimes four are twentyfour.
Twice two Is four.
Tulce two are four.

mfrft Jf Singular Verb *i irftn

5ft ^ tmft ? ft ^
(iff, two aift) &
six, w
trig (definite figure) Tftctm I «ftT ^ ^
Plural
1 1
Verb
jf itil
btPt ^ ? % tnmm ? ft
J tftc wftc rsf
^ 5ft
»i?r argtft Tt eW
f ^mr^f aft 1

STE^t 5m T?ft
tiviftt
fflTI ^ ’n W
WTt% ftf S ?

“That question each of us can answer, perhaps, for himself ; tut

no one for other people, it is therefore equally correct to sar ‘Tttiee
—
/ICO is/oi/r', ‘Tn'ice tH’o Moreoser, as the two are equally
are/rwr."
old, ‘Four times six' was plural as tong ago as 1380, and 'Ten times
two' uw
singular in 1425.” —
FOwtER : Modern English Us4CE
?i52rf S Singular plural Verb ettrf jt 53 : ^ ^
I ft ^
Tiwuft S Singular Verb >61 traftn
''tni »•

Wffteft^sfiesrff ^^ «f5r^^ r««ni

1 1 rifttTnTCr ^ ftsmff ^ ami if Plural Verb an wret ift st^ 1
 SYNTAX : AGREEMENT 37

Rule XXII. Quantity words aiid the Verb

Much, more, little less ? Adjectives of Quantity fsintt

quantity (tftjtm) ^ 1 1 «ra: awT ^ Subject aft irifit Bgaa 5>ft qr

Singufar Verb ii ira>r chit J,

Much has been done but much more is still to be done.

Little has been done so far.

T^T aiaal if Plural Verb train «55 flttl i

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentences —
(3) Much remain to be done. <b) Much of (he beauty aod glory of life
have disappeared, (e) Much of what be said have been criticised. (d> Little
have been said on (his point, (e) There are sliU mudi mote to do (f) Little have
been said and much less have been done.
Hints— fa) remains, (b) has, (c) has been; (d> has; (e) is; (f) Little has been
said and much less has been done

Rule XXIII. ‘A* regards’, ‘As concerns’ and ‘As follows'

As follows, as concerns sftr as regards err nuk plural if wnfr »ft

wf^iiii swt » src^tirsfiinraix* ^ Fqif t sfrrsrci inraww

utT I as follow, as concern, as regard feewr | i wciTTW—
The new rates ace as follows.
The deseripnen is as follows.
<1^ vm 9 Plural Noun ‘rates’ wm I »?fT {h 5: 9 Singular ‘desenp-
tion’, qc (frwT qraqT 9 qwaww as follows ^ qqVr pii f, trafftK ^9: qit
‘it’ f^qt TTWi 1 1 ut) as concerns wftr as regards i wtu «ft srni ^i

Many of those talks were failures, so far as concerns the object-

ive success.

Uff Plural Noun % 'as concern’ err sqbt WfT qqtqww

‘as concerns’ «i aqVi jsti I ^^1 1

EXERCISE

Q. Correct the following sentences ~

(a) The deuils are as follow, (b) Hts words were as follow, (e) The mam
provisions of the Act are as follow.

Hints — Use ‘as follows*

 . 1

38 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH

(ii) Agreement : Adjectire & Nonn

Rule XXIV. Demonstratire Adjectircs

Demonstrative Adjectives ‘this* «jV^ ‘that’ ft«n Noun s;

Agreement 1 1 fEr lippi % ® jHE Noun singular tt,

fa'i this rji that ^ sftr Noun plural ar
these m those —
this book; these books,
that book; those books.

t these kind sftt those sort f^a^t ns I, tr 5T*frT

S ac ^ tftfilft
STf Srfhl ^ef-«fI5T ftl SRPt ? Sfn — W
"The irregular uses— ‘those kind of’ and ‘these sort of’ are easy
to avoid when they are worth avoiding, that is, in print, and easy to
forgive when they deserve forgiveness, that is, in hasty talk."
—
rowLER modern Enoljsh Usage ;

TttfsR WIT those kind ?t those sort atf? ct whr st «?, s«rh these
»?rE those « fiT «n% Noons (kind, sort atf?) cl Plural Number if m i

era w me
"But
afi m
hope
i

I soort to put an end to those sort of obllgotions."

—SAMUEL RICHARDSON
those sort % tril those sorts ei that sort «t rtI'i rf^i i

Rale XXV. Adjeetfres and their Nornhrr

dat»> 3 Adjective n Number vtft rlit i Pirert Singular m Plural

Nouns c HTN Adjective Erp Rcif> 3 rr” 3&—
A good book Good books. ..
«ff VTTTtN ? Singular Noun (hooki smii ^ »lt fat 3 Plural
(books). NT Adjective (good) vc O 3 { } books c mn goods
art nriTT »ni s^rr a eann wifcv i Plural Nouns « etw important
i imponants s^r beautiful k beautifuls ct sw wrer >pr 1

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the follanlng sentences—
<»> I e* BOV tii< tbo»« Siwl cf ccn. tb) 1 lAe ihtie *Oft of book* (<l Thoe
lion arc terr icjporuim tot r^plaoaiiofU fdl These sigbis are bcauitfuls.
U) ILXrtotook atihese phesosenoa «( oa’urc if) Do rou likethesakmJ of
a-ples ’
iLarr—(a)tho,ekiads of 9ea«r that tb) these aortsef books or
tb» »ocs; (c) Bcpertaof; ii) tcat.’tifkd: (e) pbenctcenj. tfj ihrt* I'oJs cf apT^ et
th-»kB»a-
 ” 3 1

SYNTAX : AGREEMENT 39

(Hi) Agreement : Pronoun St Antecedent

Rule XXVI. Pronoun and Antecedent

Pronoun number, fender sIe person sff 35%
Antecedent (Pronoun ^ fsrr jq® trI Noun) ci TTtt 1 1 wii srprt f
Pronoun ^ rmln Noun 5 i 3 tlni 1 1 «<i: amr^t*
>fr i f« Noun aiT ait number, person eftr gender 5! 5ft Pronoun
«t ift Tt, a&—
The men who do ifteirdulies are rewarded in their lives.

The tree that is here has lost its leaves.

Jif! Pronouns (‘who’ end ‘their’) si wV: jsr I,
Jf Plural
fjflfc rrrai Antecedent Plural Noun (men) i 53^ 5135 Jf Singular 1

Pronouns (‘that’ and'its’) sii sraln 5^1 1 . Tetf* irrai Antecedent Sing- ^
ular Noun (tree) J i) who aur their k aifil Singular
^
1

Pronouns «i arjk «rtr fut <pnr if that om its Sr Plural Pronouns

tft Agreement «T rtn ^1 wrai «ftT »I5T ft »rm> isrn 1

f« who, which ah' that ci satn plural atr singular ftal ir^ir S;
Antecedent i: f?h ft«i 5 1

EW f5??»r Sr wg'Tfr Nona «ftr Pronoun i gender St «h Agree-

ment ^ sn wtfrt i vTx farfr Noun «t w
fir Masculine ei Feminine ot
Neuter rr S. Bt *f itir ftin i aft pt cow Sr fm Femi-
nine iftr woft Neuter Gender «t R^«i «t if atr*? mpsi snem ^roT,
—
1

TOT •[ *1 a^riR W if ^l >131

“Jr fr nor ofl/>' i/« regard ro /nd/a that Denmark /lar 6een able to
increase its foreign trade, with If'esfern countries, too, she has increased
bei foreign trade co/ir/deraW>’
—The Eastern Economist : Feb. 8, ’57

JTfi Denmark sfe fsrutann Neuter Gender (its) sftt fwfr err Femi-
nine Gender (she, her) w n^iVn gai I,
^*
1 {>t ft >Ri 1 1 qfi ftrtft ee? p
gender ^ nctn «n i

Rule XXVI. Nouns and Pronouns of Common Gender

Ett ¥551 % Nouns ^ ^ Common
Gender (umiFsm) 3 rfir I, airi=i. I
>1at E5.5 Masculine % *fh « J55 Feminine. S Nouns S’— student, reader,
teacher, engineer, lawyer, clerk, client, worker, poet, writer, lecturer,
professor, musician, politician, leader aif^ 1

Distributive efh Indefinite Pronouns >ft Common Gender if rft

all —each, either, neither, everyone, no one, nobody, anybody,
everybody, somebody.
 —
40 now TO WRiTT OOKRCCT tvotnit

*» Common Gender h eft Nouns

Pronouns ar aV
singular
ft HT Third Person Singular Pronouns »V Masculine
Gender (he, his et him) «7fTlt fhri ), sift—
Every teacher should do hit duly.
Neither of them hat done A/r duty.
Everyone should mind Ms own business.
No one should trouble his neighbour.
Note— ta Nouns tfttPronouns i *mi gender * srm « ft

ft; ^fjmr rrfi rt aeffe

ft Common Gender (snrefftn) ^ r*Tft>T i

strnf «! ern J fv ftaft 9 f>iT Masculine »;t rtpi tftc

gisra aavr t

ft S' r*: 3*7 s?t^ ar<V alt otr afacn faft sftr ftft Noons bAt
Pronouns ^ btt rht ^ w^rm pr ^ ^
Every student should do Ms or her duty.
Everyone should do his or her duty.
No one should neglect Ms or her duty.
T>r 9 Rsn ift egt at tram J ft: ftft ertg tft aff >IT

awwTfra aare I' ft*ft *mt *:«<<) 9 ft

i 5pr naffr ? t nrflrr ajf

a^rg ^
attr ft, Tgf an Common Gender trt *‘hls or her’' ft jrrn fW atii

ar tnaiw ^ra^Rt at ftmir? 9 ftan he, Ms ai A/m ft cw 5 i

5fl>fr 9 “his Of her” (fttjft ft agft 'their’ at faat t.

Plural aat ^ ft Common Gender ^ tOf*ai ra ai9t \ vftr "Ms or her"

terft ftft smnr aft aift «mfr, Ift—

Everyone should do lAefr duty.
No one should trouble Iheir neighbour.
ft?tt aala fg ft I—
"No one will ever goi/ge or measure English poetry until they
know how much of it, how full agamHro/j« qualities is already there

on the pages of Chaucer.” EZRA pound —

"The first phase of anyone’s writing always shows them doing
something they Anie heard or read.” EZRA pound —
“Everybody >v<ij pleased So think how much they had always dis-
liked Mr. Darcey.” JANE auSTES —
Ta ataaf 9 no one, anyone ctat everybody ft fea Plural Pronouns
ait naVr ft:m nar 1 1 ftft aft Prof. Bain^ ft twftft gwa: Higher English
Grammar 9 ‘allowable’ »nsn t ftww ag wa ^ fa ft aata aff r t
aa? arft ga sgi am I—
err fra?ai aft

”There are three makeshifts-ia) *Anybody can see for MmstM ot

herself.' (6) ‘yfnybody can see themselves.’ fc) ‘ Anybody can see for
himself.” —
fowler : Modern English Usage
 SYNTAX AGREEMENT
: 41

Fowler air^ ^ Tfr fa i fee ^ earn I fe Common aw

Gender i fe^ ‘his’ or ‘her’ sraln ^ ^
ai sa plural ^sneeraaifer
Third Person Singular Masculine Pronoun *t Bain *7 Ezra Pound i

HBJ Jane Austen plural aaiar e^mrwi*! fST fearar I tafee Bam ^
tnff ^ ^ satn aga «nai i

S Jrn fearr I fe Wt «rarai S Plural Pronoun bit Bata

•hI ^ a ft, ar ftfe ^ % Third Person Singular Masculine Pro-
noun (he, his at him) ^ vain iFowler mja ^ at ft {^r Ba?
faarl—
'"C is here recommended, h intohes the convention that where
the matter of sex IS not conspicuous or important ‘he’ oni/ ‘his’ j/ta// he
allo<*ed to represent a perron. . .”
sTjfe^ ETTftra aV afeara aft am it at atft H Singular Mascu-
line Pronoun «i ft eetn feant %

“Everyone, I believe, can remember some moment in life when he

*</as completely carried away by the work of any poet. Very likely be
worcarr/e</au'a;< by several poets ’’
— T. s. euot
"Anyone v.ho tries to write poetic drama even today should know
that half of hts energy mart be exhausted in the effort to erctfpe
fiom....theieiU of Shakespeare." —T. 8. euot
"Esch must decide that question for — mrGInja woolp
"That question each of us can answer, perhaps, for himself.”
—
FOwtXR Modern Enclisk Usage :

w Smfj It Common Gender k ta Singular Pronouns ^ fea be,

his m himself «i aata feat J itrt na ) fe an at ft a? wtr Ezra
^
i

Pound nai Austen * atBaf ^ aaa ar^ a*iat if Plural Pronoun at

Baht a Tc I

EXERCISE

Q. Correct the following jenrorcer—

Ut India t)»s to Cee4 her faople hutilheol pouihle unul tl (tistonign
aid for theimplementation of Iot Second Fiw-Yetr Plan (b) Everyone of the
•otdien laluted the General in their tom. (c> Each of the itudemi paid their tui-
tion feet. (d) Neither of them could fimih thea work alloiird to them fe) No
One ihould feel tired with their Ife <f) Either cf the boys ihould be fined for
then rniibehaviour. Ig) Heither of the student* Rot the prire they expected.
Ot) Each of the soldier* saluted the General their tam. m
H(«t— (a) India .... wtd
she .. Or, India feed its people . |ii
plan; (b) his; (c) his; (d) hia (<) hH: (f) his: fs) hr; (b) his.
 42 HOW TO WRITS CORKFCT ENCLISH
(if) Agreemeot : Appositioo & Case

Role XXMII. Apposition and Case

A Noun in apposition with a Pronoun (or other Noun) must be

in the same Case. ^ WFTf iH gcr I (Noun i
^ 5 35r^ sw ^rt ws i fa^) Noun 5)ir aira Jf Pronoun ei
Noun Cl sniVi ajfn se) (c^Noun ^
rra if Pronoun
51 Noun Apposition J j fjRpr « sgmt ?t Case if

—
But behold her moiher—she to svboja she oived her beinf.

fir S Noun ‘molhcf’ i air Pronoun ‘she’ srni t a) ‘mother*

ct nrjjset rrt i wfiiir 5? Pronoun ‘mother’ art Apposition J
I in i

5157 if ‘mother’ Objective Case if ?, aeJfr tt Verb ‘behold’ ci Object

i j w?i; 'she* Objective Case 5 ^fri. *511 ‘she’ ^ irft ‘her’

^ tniVr >1171 WT^—

But behold her moiher—htt to whom she owed her being,
sifr 5T»7 S
One comes round to again the problem of Kant—hf, too, »
cosmopolitan.
arf Pronoun ‘he’ ci n>i Noun ‘Kant’ it ai? Apposition i *1 w
jm i I aw: rr iW c) «t tc Case S I'Vatnirn.Ti Kant Objective
Case 8 ee'jf* er Preposition ‘©r atT Object I, ‘he* Nominative

Case 8 i I mtl ‘he’ « e;if ‘him’ «t earn rV^i wifrt—

One comes round again to the problem of A'nnr—/i/m, too, a
cosmopolitan.

(D) P O S I TION OF WORDS

Wr nc h Agreement « faiut frnir fcei J i
« W
S>a(ax € 5 <Ti firca Position at Order of Words (rrff i *7) cr ft r r7
ir*Rx 8 f8 eg e^i } f« f*n r*sf «t ene 8 5|1 cw7i wTrii
r‘Tf 51 *fm r^Fiaf rt "tti cttV i
ra ea mfc? ru ^ ^^
^
»‘t t

*< ri > f»7i »^*ru ft p»e’(€t»ir rrifef \

(}) Posittoe of Sabjcct Si N’nb

Rale 1. UtCTTOgatitc Scsieam ami Verb

litcfTOfsihe Sectmceja Verbera >« i •^r f'r* e^v Subject

c-T rwf ? f« feimojanvc Seatencrs 8 Auvifiary Verb »TfT fT??« /
foh Verb 5> Su^bject < 5flr nrai sr'r». S'—
 SYhTTAX : AORCEME>n‘ 43

AreyouWn
Where iV he going ?
What do you want ?
Why b he angry ?
Why ho'. e you beaten me “J

W 3 Auxiliary Verbs ‘are’, ‘is* sV *do’ Subject 5:

'n^ J' I rr ^:tn f?r5— You arc ill ? Where he is going 7 What
you want? Why he is angry ? Why you have beaten me?— eft ft
ara? U55 jift. aelf* xuft Subject ft; Verb «mi I, tfft stff 1

EXERCISE
Q. Corrwf the following sentences —
(a) Why ibe army losius so much on
(b) What he is doing disctpline?
these day 1 7 (e) When you wiil see me 7
Where you spent your last summer <d)
vacation 7 Why
thould hetp you 7
(«) How you came hete from Patna 7
I
Ul VrTiom you are speaking of 7 <b> Why you did not reply to my letter 7
(O^Tieo you uiU reply? 0) Where you are going’ (k) Whit you did
yesterday?

Hmit—W 'Vhy does ..insist . discipline? (b) What is he... ’

(e) When will you.... ’ (d) ^Vbere did you spend .. ? (e) Why should I
I (f) How did you come ’ <g) Whom
are you speaking of? (h) Why
did you reply ’ (j) Where are you
you Dot 7 (i) When witt 7 (k) What .

did you do yesterday ?

Rule II. Adverbs and Verb

erf?: xw tsf Adverbs ai Adverbial Phrases (hardly, rarely,

scarcely, no sooner ni never % 7J^ ft, ^ ew ft Auxiliary
Verb mai sft^ wtx Subject, aft—
No sooner ftarf/ reached She station than the train started.
Hardly (scarcely) hod he started when his father came.
Never did / see sucb a scene before.
Rarely b he absent.
w rrifr ft Verb Subject ft: 15$ TOt »rai 1 1 tjfft ^
Vi firft—

Never I saw such a scene before.

Rarely he is absent, al ft ags ft ailft 1

Note— a-Rjj xn Adverbs ft 5? mft ft, ?ft -astft Subject it?^anftr|

Taft Verb; aft—

1 had DO sooner reached the station than the train started.

 —

SYNTAX : AGXCEMCNT 45

(a) «;f? Relati\e Pronoun Object «i tiu 5^

This is the book that he re^wire*.
This is what 1 want.

T5! emt 8 ‘requires’ ‘wanr Tranutsve Verbs J ‘that’ fnti

‘what’ Relati\c Pronouns a) froiair k Objects S’ i e^rfsTt 8 firri 8:

(b) qfT Interrogative Pronoun Object ^ mna —

’
U'Afff do jou
erl ‘\vant‘ at Object ‘what’ i ^ Interrogative Pronoun 1 1 Rfftps;
Verb 5: iftit wtn i i

(iii) Position of Arllties

Rule I. Noun, Adjective and Articles

Articles (a, an. the) «i aatn Noun ^ I'hii f, »(&—
a book; cn hour; ihe cow.
«rr qfif Noun % rmr Adjective an s^n kthi s>, Article ai>
Adjective it rwvrr Noun k stfT, lit—

ogood book.
Noun 'book' It ?rre Adjective ‘good’ «iqi J « i Article
^ book k JTft raiTT Adjective ‘good’ k rtvi wr } i eft ?*r good
* book
^ «rn« cPn hw
^ ftraf,

tt^. !i>

'fft.llt-
n>
Article ^ Adverb
t ftiT.

8;
qfe Adjective
ra^i ^if^,
Adverb
Adjective
iri ifr

8:

a very good book.

8, WTT af JTTC xS f* «T^e 8 <i?i) Article rar wmi J, rr
Adverb »> Adverb % air Adjective an vtmt J 8 Noun
I

Adverbs « wi8 ar a?
*ftr

aura Article Noun ft i faa

sabi
Noun Ir asn 5a ’asi stmi I,
vraT sfrr, aVr 3?\8V ft
^ f, eaira Adjectives sfrr

Wear Adverb s?Vt Adjective I, Sit—

a very highly interesting and instructive book.
^
ft
^
aft Article Noun ^ «r8) fft aatfw Noun ‘book’ 5
af8 :

Adjectives en8 f ^r Adjective 5 af^ >ft at-ft Adverbs. :

Note (a)— aniT ^ at af Pie I Articles ?n tata Adjectives

^

ram I, ar aifta (Articles *1) asr Adjectives (many, such

'"'hart ^
many
I, aa8
man; many an hour,
a
^ S&—
«?rt

such a task; such a man;

whnt a book; what a place fwift I
 —
46 now TO WRITt Ci)*R£CT rNOUOl

T5T 3?rToff tf ‘many* ‘such* ‘H^hat’ « tt? Article ‘a* iftr ‘an*
^1 siftn 5 SI *1 rj ) | Article rt gjrn Adjective * Tf^
R> tf vni ngmi *i>it I

Note (b)— 0^ t>r.tfx Adjective « ci 3i ‘ai* «t ‘how’ «t r?r*t fft

Article ci rcia Adjective k etr rtni gf# srj% Sir—

as 6(7da man as he; as gooJ a ihow as that;
how goad a book; how nice a place,
rt tnft ^;irrvff Adjective ‘bad*, 'good* WVi 'nice* « erk ‘as’ er
•how’ geTn jg; ^ Article ct bcm Adjective * at? jsr f, tfk
rffT I

Note (c) —«rf; fctfl Adjective k gtk ‘so’ et ‘too’ ^ v. ^

Article k gflr *ft in af^t i
Adjective ar? *iV; 3k—
‘So seriousan aitempt' or ‘A so serious attempt'.
‘Too exact an answer' or ‘A loo exact answer.'
Adjective ‘serious* «?rt ‘exact* « erk ‘so’ m 'too' ct 5«t
3 I TtrftR Article «> Adjective k ew et ar? 3 tom tinf ^ 3 l rf» W
rratt k Article at> Adjective k aR toi vug, ifr rftr wvgr tI, agft
’ll sR>t if vif^ai 3 dVr gsfk 3 vft ^awtfa^ gm 3 »

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentences-^
(a) It IS very lovely • place, (b) I cannot do a such didicull work, (c) How
a lovely sight it is I (d) Ram is as a responsible man as Shyam. (e) A many mao
has come. (0 How a foolish plan ii is !
a veiy; (b) such a; (c) lovely a; (d)aman; (e) many a; (0 a
plan

(iv) PosifioD of AdJeclJvfs

Adjectives m gghi srnt & ft «it pi Adjective Noun k

psk 3, nV Attributive use 3 sfk sit 3k Verb k er? lak f, m
Predicative use; 3k —
It is a useful book. This book is useful.

^ gtggt ? Adjective *osefur an ngVi jm 3 I ^5^ ^

Noun 3? Attributive use 3
k
PPST srihT
‘book’ k gpi «igt 3 »
Verb k r? jsn 3, Noun k sr^ Ttrfk^ n? Predicative i
t

W
3 Adjective an sgbr Attributive
I gi Predicative pr «*.s'y k fW
ft mgt aiTfft It ««; errt «si maf ff «^Pt f
Rule
I. Qualitative Proper Adjectives &
Proper Adjective (Proper Noun k mngi 3^ Indian.
strong.
American. Russian, etc.) aei Adjective of Quality {3k— brave,
 SYNTAX : posmov 47

wise, good, bad, etc.) ^ ?Vf fV «nc & cim Altribulive

>ft ^ Predicative e:") ftTt »fr i

This game is Indian. This is an Indian game.

He is a brave boy. The boy is brave.
5tf ST3 stre if Proper Adjective ‘Indian* eti Predicative use jsn
i, artr*: Verb ^ ete wpii if Attributive,w xm
Noun ^
^ HT& win ^ I ttft TOT if ‘bfave’ «t Attributive ^ sVr
fit«\ 8 Predicative, if spiPi 51 i 1

Rale II. Adjectircs and the Noon

Tft ft ?rw Adjectives «i aT)«i w jY Noun ^

Ti ^ Adjectives Tirft ft, ^ Noun i to iftit I; l!t—
A man, young, strong, and imelhgent ....
God IS the maker of all things— visible and invisible, animate
and inanimate.
T«ft TOR. «fT Adjective q^fl (title) i ftre ften i,B>TTNoun
^ aw siw |%—
Alexander the Great; ^ueen Victoria the Good;
Yudhlsthlr the Just, Louis the fious;
Pitt the Younger, Cato the Elder.
TO ^>1 ft? it TO Adjective capital letters % 5^ frif I' 1

Rale III. Phrases and Adjective

^ as?! ff Phrases ftrsth Adjective «Y Noun ^ aie ttn

I; sir—
the body politic, heir apparent, goveraoi-general-, the sum
total', a god incarnate, president elect.

ST ?r»f) TTOtrf HT Adjectives I- wlr ^ Nouns ik ai; 1 1

*n't Tift: fTOT ^ TTsT Ttrf wfr sri wwiT TT TTi ft phrase v?f
vi? I

(t) Position of Adverbs

Rule I. Adjective, Freposittoo, Conjunction and Adverb

Adverb Cl ?mst Adjective Adverb ui Preposition iir Con-
junction 3: ffv? Ifai I; 3 ft—
I am partly responsible for this.
He is working very patiently.
 HOW TO WRITE OJRRECT ENGLISH

He sat exactly behind me.

I shall go only when be comes.
Adverb ‘partly* Adjective ‘responsible’ modify ^i
J «tm ^ Adjective siTr Adverb ^ evpt ^
i

q5nr rttn i *f Adverb ‘very’ 1:5 jht Adverb ‘patieotly’

<

fitrrt qR’TR Adverb ‘exactly’ Preposition ‘behind’ cr

•3®r TfraitTi t if ‘only’ Conjunction ‘when’ an 1 ^ Adverbs
Tn =B sirq I" I ara; ^ am—
He sat behind me exactly. I am responsible partly sit?: 1 1

Rale II. Transitive Verb and Adterb

qfq Rtqq if Transitive Verb asT Object xn irttn n't Adverb

Verb « q^t tt Object % xr? mat mftq. Verb srtf Object « 3
Jiff, 30—
I do ray duties ckttrfuUy.
Adverb ‘cheerfully’ Object ^ ‘duties’ « fir »rei t sftr tt
1 1 ufttrt ^'TT ftra— I do cheerfully my duties, Kt er iVn.
XTff^ Adverb, Verb ’do’ s>t Object ‘duties’ « «Y» if xiRt 1 sm
«n Adverb w
Transitive Verb i nr Object * rq r? 1 ?fstf C*
?i ct. Adverb «t Object « xr? mat sr^t »etT it»it 1 qx<t
•frtS-
He loves you sincerely
He reads books carefully.
tn etxf ^
»T*?t if Adverbs ’sincerely’ stt< ‘carefully’ x*! rW
Objects ‘you’ «>t 'book' « eir »«i •ni ?• "f C? ^ *** 1 ^
TJT«— He loses sincerely >ou. lie reads carefully books, n't xr 't^'f

etm, eatfx ex xt*qt i Adverb, Verb sftr Object « xtx if wt »« J i

—
Note XT XT? n? fx of; Transitive Verb < x:? xtA Object 3r
xst a*Tt Clause wt »n »n Adverb •'r TraniiHve Verb *iV Object « x'fx ?
rm Ti "X*! ?; 30—
He pu'tliheJ sererely all those who had wronjed him.
10 xH? if ‘punished’ Trsniithre Verb i, ’tr ’all those' Object, r*
irxr « x’o 3 Adverb ‘seversly’ »i xx'x j*t h "'t tpr •xff< Object *
r? »T clause ci txrx JO! J I »« me rx •V 3 —
I lore *Mf~heafifJly rferyih>nf that has been created by Ood.

f0 xrrx if ««h Adverb •whole-heartedly’ «f ri’n Transitive Verb

.*
wV Object ‘everythraj* < x^w S t»j »? ), •f’V Object
* r? .
 —

SYNTAX : POSITION 49

Examine erillcally the chancier of Anne in “The Door of

Opportunity.'’ [B. U. B. A. English IJ (1957 A)]

W 3 TratisUwe Verb (examine) ^ Object i bto ti.h

firs I'— the character of Anne in ‘The Door of Opportunity'

t fc PT
5<t

xm
Adverb (cnlicalljr)
if Adverb «> Verb «ctT Object
^ tT aft
if
5

fpji rr;!!
i^fr
silr

t, fttr
?r€ftl i

Role III Adjeclhc, Adterb and “Enough"

Enough fttrr Adverb i Adjective nr n"? Adverb ^ tt? wrai
1. 1??! Wf; Stt—

He was kinJ enough to help me.

He spoke highly enoujA of my works
T?f TIT5 il enough «R Adjective (kind) ^ *15 snarf sftr
if Adverb (highly) « nfx xnat eawr ts s«ix ^ \

He was enough kind (0 help me. He spoke enough highly of my

^—
works, (ff^sni5 Tt»nt'i

Role rV. rntransldre Verb and Adverb

irfr Adverb pra^ [ntransitive Verb «> modify nt T(t Verb^

TIT if Pvai wiftx, I&—
He walks slowly and sleeps sountlly.

pT PTT if Tt Intransitive Verbs ‘walks* sffr ‘sleeps' iTa)n jwr |

«ftr prfex Adverbs 'slowly’ «ff< 'soundly’ «et pri ttt tin nxi 1 1 sm: TT
Tran %— He slosviy walks and soundly sleeps.

Role V. Intransitive Verb sod Adverb of Time

clr Adverb a) sue w vtx wtii" t ^ l—always, ever, never,

often, sometimes, generally, rarely aftx seldom, vtto Intransitive
Verbs ^ iT?i) (fai vr? 9 aft—
He afrt'ays sleeps. He never jfeepT,
He seldont sleeps. He often sleeps.
Intransitive Verbs, Verb ‘to be’ (is, am, are, was, were)
ff rft Adverbs xn vxbt <tT?f »ft 5> I wk tit «ft; It
He is rarefy absent. He rarely is absent.
He is seldom present. He seldom is present.
H. W. C. E.-4
 50 now TO WWTE OJRRECT ENGLISH

n ?mf ? Intransitive Verb vn jsrr ^ i TfrftiT Adverb ^ Verb

^ wpit snf^, (IT jr?r *r? Intransitive Verb ‘is* \ aft Verb ‘to be’ j i

sra: Adverb ^ jprVr tit *f sft «tsii M55 Ji^f 1 1 Txrf^ if *775 ^
S'— He laughs always. Swift smiled never. A madman sleeps seldom.
T speak always the truth.

Rule VI. Auxiliary and Prificipal Verbs

Adverbs ipi iraVr Auniliary Verb {Hsnt flpiT) sVt Principal Verb
^ *f ft<n I;

He will certainly go.

TTT *r ‘will’ Auxiliary Verb | sftr ‘go* Principal Verb, wfex

Adverb ‘certainly’ f;r ^ 3 sipii i 1 ‘certainly* it iurnT ‘will’
^ *rt ‘go’ % TR ftS'tr rrau s'lm 1 jics sflr 51—
I have never seen it.
He is patiently doing it.

I shall nor do it.

Adverb ‘aevcr’ei
9R>t Auxiliary Verb ‘have’ eftr
Principal Verb ‘seen’ 3: Auxiliary Verb ‘is’sftr
Principal Verb ‘doing’ sb Adverb ‘patiently’ srm | sftrtftst RIRR ^
sft Adverb ‘not’ *n aifhr ‘shall’ eftr ‘do’ « at? 3 5*iT *f) rsti: Auxiliary

eftr Principal Verb ! 1

Role VII. The Split lofioitne

Adverb ?t snfpr ‘to’ wV Infinitive « ^ 3 nsm ^rirt srm J: a3—
I request you to kindly grant me leave.

xtT VTXR 3 Infinitive ‘to grant’ ^ sfti ct fT>n nxi I stt xa ^=3 3
Tt? (to srtr grant 3: at?) Adverb ‘kindly’ ^ tir mu 1 1
«Trx:t»i 3 f3
Split Infinitive I fmw R? 1
Rirff? split vi •«? ptai 1

Adverb ^
Infinitive 3; VTVTT. aa 3 w^HTr xS, Infinitive shr
Tt? 3 rrtt xtrflrt nr R RTd'rK RT aive eqjs
I
I advised him to care- t—
fully read. ^ Infinitive ‘to read’ 3: 8 Adverb ‘carefully’ ^ to fvtt
Verb ‘read’ 3 XR frxT
uiiT1 1 mcT? 3: fiTRRigmiT Adverb «t TRR
'Rtrct— I advised him to read carefully.
Note (aj — sTTsf^g Split Infinitive « e'rR 3 XR
STI RK I TSf^X X? WTXTR 3 WI |—
"The split Injinithe is an ugly thing,, .but It Is one among several
hundred ugly things Eiea that myiferfoKS <fua/jfy, •distinction’ of
style, may In modest measure be attained by splitter of infinitives."
FOwiTR : King’s Esglisii —
 — 1 *

SYNTAX : POSITSO‘4 51

And Again.
"We admit that separation of to from Us lnfiniliYe..ts not In itself
desirable We will split sooner than be ambiguous or
artificial', more than that, we will freely admit that sufficient recasting
will —
get rid of any split Infinilite." FOWtxR Modcrn English Usage

xra ^ ^ fipnife a?! ire am

ireK ^ ftr w m^ aft »ih Split Infinitive ^ »ft 5i arij i

tyr Split Infinitive ft i; ftraam ^ am »> ir?f af? i ^

tnm ac Pc ’yRgf t arrt? ^ S ax cti aja >nft n^at 1 1 ire wram
^ fleets xa ^ atrer ani re retr ^—
"Split infinitive with a single adverb may be allowed."
— o. II. vallivs : Better English
an {irxir J: if arm i re nftfx •arewHia ^ aa gs i

ax am ftrer %
If you expect to eventually succeed, you must keep trying.

s?m re atret frem re ren m Fret I—

"We have here an example of that
notorious bugbear of academic
grammar, the am
happy to be able to report to you
spilt infinitive. .. .1
that It Is not only legal, it is also ethical, moral Benjamin Franklin,
Washington Irving, Nathaniel Hawthorn, Theo.iore Roosevelt and
—
Woodrow Wilson among many others, were unconscionable m/n/f;ve
sphtiers. And moden writers are equally partial to the construction,''
—NORMAN LEWIS : WoRD POWER
xtrea H, Split Infinriwe ren w
ijiiw xaai afre ifi ret I pB re

ax xn xla axT aiar atm «iH fttfsti Infinitive «> split «x reir a'W if re-sta
Adverb xi aata refft ^
% x^ txi 1 1 d. Infinitive »ft split rel; ata
art-tr Adverbs ^
re xff Mtxai "h+h ’ft aj^;i rean anm aalf%
aiaa ag xt arai af[—
I have asked him to thoroughly, patiently, sincerely, and care'
fully read his books,
irxT Infinitive (to read) «) split
xftftaRt aaail
to sH read
X’t^tregt ^tnaPt re
XTa ^ Adverbs
Adverbs
i 'artt
books 5: am ret arrai I aia re awa ^ ^6f—
1 request you to kindly grant me casual leave,

axi Infinitive to grant ait split rei to sir grant ^ atx re Adverb
(kindly) ^
rerr 'rat 1 »x xiax xxr stff
1 xttt at nt Nesfield emt rex wr^ i

Si:^«rat^5BttTit^rmre:xm«r55:airei^»tt, aal?^ reif Split infinitive

aiTxta wt ret J, re Fowler, Valliiis «ixt Norman Lewis wtfx reraraTi
^*3^ xs aja ret ^ xft 5
 ^
52 now TO WRITB CORRECT ENGLISH

W ^ i}T> ff^ t fii Infinitive ^ split ^7:% to Verb i

rf «n<i ^&
17 erfsTT Adverb >rar>r^ ?iift :nff »?t, ?7rr|^ PT?r rtt d
^cn I THfa^ 7ft ^fwrV’iw wfT fW }% Norman Lewis
sratn sr^T JT^t ffRT 1 1 SOT JutfJT ift nr «? to sftr Verb i n
Adverb ^ stn^n
;r tft *rrt tralrW J, ?t nfr wrr
1 Adverb jf#i art rt ^
e, ?iV ^frt f« sngfi™ imVigqrt th
aVif aft srrtTrrjac pin *t? «ftT ^^
^7?1) TJT TrtpT«ff feR St ? I

Note (b)— Infinitive ^

4U4.< to sftr Verb i aflg if Adverb ‘not’
an spfW ^
I, RRffe not «t fnnt nrr Infinitive k Tm f; M—
He asked me nol to go there.
He asked me to not go there.
er* RTaR 3 ‘not’ s^tR Infinitive ‘to go’ * ^ I. art 55 1, it

jFt Rl?T ^ Infinitive ‘to go’ sran (split) ^

ftRT net | «fk to tier go ^ ^
Rtar S ‘not’ aft ^sainai I vt ^
ireR «l Split Infinitive ft I, arfft
I

•not’ RR! Adverb 1

sRiarERjanR fnaft
1

sf^ cf EtaiTn sftr r cfHT ^ f

^
Split Infinitive snVr 3 sr^f I sftr »ft Rt

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the folhiving sentences —
(a) He explained clearly the poem, (b) 1 do cbeerfully my duties, (e) D«*
cribe briefly your class room, your vieni. (e) He n-as eoough
(d) Express boldly
pleased 10 help ms (0 1 love my
country enoupb dearly. It) He looks never sad.
(b) He eomes late always. () He was told to ool laush (j) I advised bim to not
make a noise.
Hivs— (a) He clearly explained . -poem or. he explained the poem
clearly. (6J I cheerfully do my duties Of. I do ray duties cheerfully, (c) BrieHy des-
cribeor, . room briefly, (d) Boldly express or. .... viewsboldly (e)p1eased
enough, (f) dearly enough (g) never looks, (h) always conies, (i) not to laugh,
(j) not to make —
(vi) Position of Correlatives

Rule 1. Noun, Adjectise, Verb and Correlatives

fg 3t I" at TtivT Rw aw atft (pair) sn^^ S’ alt Conjunc-

tion Rt Rw J I R?l ft Correlatives Rfi 1 1 3 citbcf-

neither nor, both. . as much...*

..and, not only. .. .but also sftr

as. rai rtW « arsfu if vai vrir (position) Rt ana rmi

fRRir Rf i fc vrS & ea smt 5b aw fm Part of Speech at
Rrf^
fthi ^ R^
^
rw 5b aw Rt 53^ rwt ^iffR Rfe rc ai ^Rw Noun a Rfit ft, at prt 1

ct RvNoun rr * Rfa fWi ^iffR, Verts ar Adjwlivt wifT «

nett Rff Rf at runt Verb x r^ cr, «i) xi at Verb ^ x RT?t ftsn ^rcR»
fr-t exTT 5b vf*? X Rffr aft, at -
 HO" TO WRITE CORRECT
ENCU5H

^ ^ ^ ^ Infinilivc split to ^ Vi

•^i'TRT?
^ «r^7 aJ» ? t, *lff fic ft Nonrjn lf»s
Adverb IL ^ ft ^ Verb
to * rr
S. TT^ft wnt^Adverbr

^ ™ ^ '® Verb 5 2 Ad'^

tr!f4
He art-.^’
asked me „« to go
^
there.
Infinithe « <r^ TT

there.
Infinitive to go’ « 5ft t ^ T
K n„v* r; r^ Infill**

'? >ni7T ft
*i Split Infin-uvf
^ “r
‘not’ Adverh >. •

‘^•TRpr* T«?«t Infinitive s^lnSsnffts^vrAF

exercise

CT'be briefly Ib) I do cbeeifufly oy

yow^u?!'!.!!”''’'
<d) Esrress botdJy
^
f to help n, your dirt's. (*) ****^
fbj II* e„„e, U.e'oi*,' "ough H*
dearlv. (1)
’ y.f?;
^'IHe
m»ke4ootje »ai lold to oot laugh (D I afntr^

isTichirt't,""'’' "''''"I -pom «. b...r'='*|

my duties dieeffjBJ t^**^*!

tr.d.-;r”^‘? ...Tie*»M*J
tJ>»c«lanule "f'w looka. (h) alway* come*. 0

t»l> Pwiiion Of CofirlatiTn

OBn, Ad;ertl»e,
^ ^>Ib and Correlatl^F
^
>>'•'5
<iR-, rtVjV' (pair) um '

*• V*''‘*-"‘>t only.. ..but alto

*•'’5
«T > <e y,3 i M -1 (position) vf rn f"*’
f=>
•
r- i
'
^ of Speech
. '}i

fi
•!> r- i r* CT nnsi Noun *
sf' r'; »t R7»i-, ?T Adjeetivetn'f i*H*
”' *
‘«-’ { if'r k 5 r. ^ ftr Cl Verb «
 l^VTAX • roStItON 53

, ^ I law reilher Ram nor Mtihan

I neilher WH- Ram nor ttforo lo hitp.

. ^ *1*^ 9 neither *i Noun (Ram) «. f i m*

'

^
_yXTnmtnoT »0 v*i Noun (Mohan>isiA J 1 ma S ntillitr»i
’
,
ni* Verb ^ } »>r tnf»» nor *1 V) •'•m Verb %> ir (it> > «f? r«r ^'’l i

I neither saw Ram nor Mohan. M cr •frsitni.istfcefl'neiibcr’

'
*
erb t i •l^r ‘nor* Noun s itA i «-<t yrtin u'r S
He pa'e me not only a l^oL but slio mo;tr»
‘
He not only t^at me but me.

% ana t» not only * avjNountbooV.) urn 4 ) rtf^n

\ i ai> «i»a il

Jr (but aiioV* »n ri Biln

»b Noun (money)
1 3 not 1 mr
n!y is ar? Verb «ni i »>» rnf-ra fnsaMntr but also « atr Verb |i srnt
j of? r»
I »WR 8 irtTT «) aba-a ci a. lO an; errs |) *i7m, ai^- He
"
^ et only yarr me a book but also monrt. erl not only kai^ Verb
,

TTii. aa but also • m Noun •money'. »i: ct arrrori } i ct both.,

nd an «ft rrrrt" ir—
Both Ram and Shittm are food.
lU is both inref/ieenr and Jiheeni.

k ^raf t> •'*; 9 both a an Noun wist i *^r pffsrr and

re Noun f > fa> am 3 both « at? Adjective ci ffa'in jat ^ sftf
i

.nfya and * re Adjective ci »'i sain } sn: a ane r* ^ ea nr i i

|sT— Me has read both in India and Cnyland ed both 3 ir;

^’reposmon ‘in' mei K a; and 3 an Noun •England’, awri r* r;
, .

bi>—
^
’ He has read both in India and (n England.

er He has read in both India and England.

'
«T Pt aiaal' r>
“Both for sooJ and eril almost etcrythin^ that duti'nguishrs ou,
,
rje from its predecessors is due to science.'’ —
pcrtravd Russrii
"The poor both In M*n and coontty suffered terribly from the
^jrice of bread.” _C. »f. TRESelyan
r**,, "They ha\e beeniised eithts to ehae a very /^rioiiy problem In his
mind or ia rftar of his co-workers.” —The Modern Review
\
; Peb ’57

at and
^
% at? Nouns
aid'll 9 both
‘evir
Preposition ‘for’ aft; ‘in* wja
sft? ‘countty’, x) mx. 1 1 nxi and
i
‘
,(»xfr evil sft? country
either
9:

«
TtS) w Preposition at? tnfbi
at? Infinitive (to clear) wim i
^ <(? ‘or’
,
v't

k
j2
Preposition (in) 1 eft: either ^ problem 3= r? nnrnt ‘either’,
 —
54 MOW TO uurtr counter rvcitsit

ii s>5ff tnn ntm Tl wrff*? f?! i; »t? Preposition ^

Bfltn Tt wrani «l^r n? tm ri srifin i %f*rf. nrnpft % pT«ot ffpi ^
"The poet's command both of fils experience »nd of his technique
Is perfect." —r. R. LEAVB
"The plays of S)nqe form rather a special cate because they are
based upon the idiom of a rural people whose speech b naturally poetic,
both In imaperv and in rfi^rAm.*’ T. s. EUOT —
"Goodman is most successful with respect both to the control and
—
to the development of his oirrAorf.” Titc Kcnyon Restew Spring, '55 :

"}n this lecture I wish to consider both In history and In the pre-

sent day the relation of the exceptional man to the community."

— DERTRAND RUSSELL
^ boll' — and«t mrBiRt tr tot 'fn
both and i at? Preposition (w: of, in, to & in) m
r*i % I
err? JIT »ft n f« Jrff Dertrand Russell a & ana fart f,

TT ftiT lai i Ttrt aaimal 4; nta ajjfs snaa^t i tfr.

TFtr «tT w? 4 r« Correlative «8fe sf)aT tr »ft ssmt* 4

cua Tl sTTs) 4 I
«fTT TEitf srara i

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentences —
(a) I cotild neither help Ram
nor Shyam. (b))le neither bad gold nor silver,
(c) She neither offended friend, (d) He both offended me and my
me nor my
friend, (e) He is as much noted for his bravery as for his chanty. (0 He not only
also to
built a house but also a garage, (g) Latin is not only difGcuIt to read but
write, (h) I neither met Gopal nor his brother, (t) 1 have read both in England
and America, (j) He has gone both to America and Russia, (k) Neither be
comes nor writes. (1) I neither want ro take nor give.
Hinlt—M help neither Ram....; <b) had neither gold; (c) offended neither
me....; (dj offended both me. ...; (e) He is noted as much for.. .; (0 He built .

notonly....; (g) difficult not only to read....; (hlneither Gopal; (i)both in

England and in America; U) both to America and to Russia or. .-gone to both
America and Russia: (k) He neither comes nor writes; (I) neither to lake nor

(vii) Posllion of Relative Pronoun

Rule 1. Relaihe Pronouo and Antecedent

if Relative Pronoun (who. which sfti: that) nin Relative

Adverb (when and where) «) Antecedent % a?! mU
I have read the books of Milton who was a great English poet.
 — 1

SYNTAX : POSITION 55

jjtI Reliilive Pronoun ‘who* Antecedent ‘Milton’ ^ tnftT

TOi nsii s*tT sf? pr I firS—

I have read Milton's works, who was a great English poet,
fft ctI who Antecedent & sum J I iri srrsi sr^t

BufWTT wrt-^i^'V sn i! ift swrr tt ^t 8««ti i i Tftfhx nm ^pn ai75 st^f

ftw—
I went to Shyam's residence who is my friend.

^ mr ^ TJtiTJ ^ stVrt m t??i 1 —

I went to the residence of Shyam who is my friend,
rtr mvT if sr at «1r «nLfe i sk sr «re siV spreni i

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the folloKing iCTir«if«
<s) 1 like Riy friend's doe who ISA good oan. th) 1 do not like SheUey’t
poems who was a totnanlic poet, (e) A Urge number of wsts have been oceu*
pled by scholars (hat have no backs, (d) Some persons use walking-sticks that
are lame and blind (.e) I gave Ram a pen «bo is a nice ebap.

Hinis-^i) dog of my friend who (b). poems of Shelley .

who....; (e)A targe number of seats that have nobacksbave scholatii

(dj Some persons that are Ume and blind use walking-sticks; (e) I gave a pen to
Ram who IS. . . .chap.

(C) GOVERN MENT

Rule 1. Transitive Verb and Preposition
Jta T3T Syntax
3i fita«r Government (tnrrsr) ijt i

’Snciyi if ^ eft rKt <tr rnro 1 Tcaasitive Verb, 1

Preposition tnn fs Adjectives (like, unlike, near and worth) srrft tt? if
«tift Nouns tn Pronouns <R ufrt entiw Nouns ai Pro- ^
nouns 1^ Objective Case a iitsii I i ^ xf rrrtR ^ «fn ttxf 5f5Fsr,

«x5ii 5iir *t »f elk wki 1^ 'fttff ft st^T?; ?Tir?n snai 1

i—
I love him.
There is no humanity in him.
You are like him.
itTft ^Wt ft TransiUve Verb (love) ^ ai^ srft aTBi Pronoun
(him) Objective Case if 1 xftt tor: ft Pronoun Objective
1 »m
Case if mftfhi ttf Preposition 0n) % are; J ffRr^; ifvft i am
Objective Case (him) «T sraVi |sn I. aaffw ttr like an Object
1 srav ft 1

rraT araa ?15 1 1 ta aiatff ft Nominative Case (he) «r sbtPt tram »gfaa
 KEY
U)an— Rule n, (2) a— Rule 11. (3) a— Rule II. (4) a— Rule II.
(5) an, an— Rule If. (6) Bees wfacdcr— Rule VI. (7) I love nature and
poetry— Rule VII. (8) The Indian Nation— Role VIII. (f). (9) Everest
is the— Rule VJIl (»). (lO) keep house— Rule IX (a). (11) on foot—
Rule IX (a>. U2) taken action— Role IX (a). (13) elected president—
Rule IX (b), (14) sefti me word— Rule IX (aU (15) la favour— Rule
IX (a). (16) sort of man— Rule Xf (d). (17) kind of dress— Rule IX
(d). (I8t He is a poet and critic— Rule IV— Note.
 1 —

atAPTCR It

ARTICLES

?TS7 & Articles rt Syntax i stjjw ? Position'

of Articles Ji ?i Jt?i cJf | ft: ft:?t

Article sr>t «rR«nsT if iftii I at 5 ^ 1 1

Rale I. Singular Camnion Noon and Article

rfft Common Noun Singular Number if ^ fit ajfti Article

an snfrn *ra^ ^tn it flf? ?? Noun (Definite) rl tft 5a> Definite
Article (the) an sraVr ?hTi J aft a? aiftfr^a (Indefinite) 5>a>
Indefinite Article (a at an) «t, *%—
This is the dog that I saw yesterday.

It is a book. It is an inK-poi.
aft «*r Common Nouns (dog, book aV ink-pot) 5; ?s Article
rr BsVi »r^ ^i, nt ^ «i« tnnK aA 1
Note— RT fipiT wTvit er ar t ft; aft ana S Noun ^ safrr wff
rf. !?r Article «7 aak jrrf ^ Hunt t Noun i; rt#r <r ^ Adjective at
Adverb ^ ailt Article •ntti i 1 Noun i aaf tia at Adjective * T?fr
Article an sata rftarr ^ 1 aa!*al aaifrti S—
He is a faithful serrani.

‘a' an sa>t a*rftrt jsn % f« awn < Noun (servant) siai 1 1 aft
aa! % ttt Noun aD y?i ftai aria, nf Article (a) r? aiam,
He IS faithful,
sta pr ami ^ ts
He is a faithful. He is a loyal. You are a brave.
RT naat if Noun «i jrjW jai ftt >ft Article an aaft ^ ft;ar
aai L aiv wsjs: 1
EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentences —
Itisavery uvful. (b) She $
(a) beauurul. (e) It ] goad Ihiisg. (d)
There peo in my pocket.
is

i/;/iM-DonT use 'a' in (a) and (b). Use ‘a* before 'good* and ‘pen* in
(c) tnd(dl respectively.

( 61 )
 '62
HOW TO WHITE CORRECT
ENGLISH
Rule U. ‘A’ and

Noud ^ *

^^
. 1

^ ^
Afaan ^
It ?7,
™— I cf^ 3^ Nouir^”
'^'" better
ft=^ » ''„.d p
* Consonant {a?
ink-pot.

1T% an '™ '«"r W Voatl i

, t*t*t ff»i I
^ uaivenify ^
i

a C„, „ .aO,

mo,.
^ ^
'T- a % ^ ”'
arra r'ai aar humble 4 ar**a

ai"? •I/* vll^r Wa '*

r^oftowtcfj iHt ^ **
dutLieticn k^th'

••e^-iiYv,#.
: ^^c^OF»v nscusH l/atc

f'* ej»7’ t/wreu?^

•*‘-”>*f^crnturyh^Ufesu,:'
*~T it -^'4« ; Esgiish C*iM«*«
“ t^t%tu9 ^ wrnr fT*r?T J-
"^‘"X t^rawrr he k^l — T. 1. fUnf
o k-n.'" '
J^wnalistlf j.tcljl cs'ff'
** r* r*j «-- — T. I. ruot
"•I tKfy-rfs.fe Hf't'NTig
rh.ttKJ,r
s, A.J W-R.^ t.t<.^ ^ *» fc«aHe trbu-t

r,-'-r.f,i „„ ^ 0.>me
’ r^T «r> rt Ra-fa ,>. cr
 1

AKTICUS 63

^^t^«T»»^tbB^lWes^tVltslorica1 i sw.
5^^ g^ t <ir ^ »gTO, an >Pit fViiT 1 1 tf. hotel i; cm an sratn

sngf^ ? *'0 Praar 1

irti fr^w % Pb ftt f^iff tw «V «P
humble «ftT historical ^ bm a an tt srfWt ^ ^ anti nw i

EXERCISE
Q. 1. Correct the folloMcIng senlaiees —
(a) Ke reads in a H. E. school, (b) Ram ts a N C.C. cadec- (c) 1 have
an one-toot rule. (d)MymQiheritaM.Co(n (e) It Is in nsetul rule. (0 It is
an U.ht.O. resotuUon. <t) Bhola Manjhi was fonnctly a L. P. School
(eacber. (h) My uncle is a S. I. of Police. (>) A F.l.R. has been submitted.
Itimt-W «n: (b) an; (e) a; (d) ao; (e) a; (0 a; (s) an; (b) an; (i) no.
Q. 2 Fill up the blaitks with a or ao—
.

(ai You 8t«— university itudeot <h) My brother is— S.D O

(c)

U.
He is——one-eyed man. (d> It tS'^M C ^ool. (e) My son reads
P. school.
m—
a. (b) an; (c) a; (d) aa; (e) a.

Rale in. Adjectlre, Adrerband Artlele.

am «l Noun b Adjective m traW fl s?r Adjective % vtll

Adverb «t, jfr Article {a srr ao) eiv^ Btfm errir Adverb in
Adjective iU argaR cliii t. Noun i aigw 3 ||—
<2nan; an honest mao;
an artist; a good artist;
an ink'pot; a lovely iok-pot; an exquisitely lovely ink'pot.
Tfft raan % Uentgan z an sniVi 5*1 1 pit wia? if 1

•man i vfH Adjective ‘honest’ an »rai } s«l>r4 Article an i|?i>r hon-i

est « Sm i. man ^ sb? i wnawit sfi Noun ^ imt hi?! vrft

Adjecitive ai Adverb 4 aigsR a ni ao ^ iratn jan J
Rale IV. Nouns or Adjectises and Article

mw ft stFv^ Noun III Adjective et suF® *ri

aV
k Article ^ swln flar I, et si^.srcm
^ Ota it ^ it ritbai ^ Tsfl
a red and blue pencil, <2 red and a blue pencil,
Artide «i jpiW oV^n
srr s^gaif

a poet and tbinken o poet and a thinker.

’r?! qrft am it w rr Adjective % wif Article ^ oaf/T I. a^itfa?
it Adjective ‘red' ‘blue* w ft pencil % Rrt sijui ga 1 “
1 ^ ai^rr
^ Ohrl ^ Adjectives % t??! Article «i win jsii |, 50^ sr^ ^ qf^f q^
’S^'afrai^— red iJttpifr bine. edtWR, dwV am^ ^ Noun %
 64

n>ral^5„J, STOpoci,
•iriTn'hrtlNouMiqrtAPJ
Note— Articled ITH
•

»wt., TO- cr MS
rfl"
TOT n-rf,.-
'PfPT «>
S i ^ Anidt I

iolT-pot.'" '““s* on Ihi. lAbfc-a boot, a p=. a«I»

WT Noun ^
n llnnler and ™»!3 «t m toti n. A H
^
rn.„3a„ <hmlcor

"Tf^ Article ®fwr

3r?Tr
art Lro .ITV

f%
C VZ "1 "'"'•
“nf.

9
Sit-

>T5>t »r=T«r-afFr

Nouni
D„,. V n- .
«^nsr%CT»Tff^|
*rfT Noun
«rfTNoun«ff,4
wd Aitidt
^
.

nr Possessive AcSm„w'!'''‘’“'''" ''Utclive (each, either, neilhi

-ft nr, Noun i,

every books
^ J"’
<>•«’> T ^ i

Tfn W| rjgt i
„e„heTS^^’*»-
rt! r-
Article inrhr tfn Iv: ^ aTScIc
^ ^ "

^^
Diitnbutive Adjective
«i^1 1^ ^
*f’l« t, ?3frf%
jfxf
^
Noun ^ i««i Po$se«iv”*?
rossessive Adjective
«,
®
P'"
esri f |
nulpt Vr Di ..
"“''V'P-«.IN,.„„dArt,c,e

yonns’JST” u^rr
trar I,
Dog*
Indefinite {sf^jfr^)
A ;S-| ^ r? - ™ ”
barlr. Cows give milt.

ntfcSe^oSfeiiXT^SI.^a'Stb''' f-»
t ’*»

the Cl
Note— ir^ fc^ Plural
Bum cTTfi i,
Noon w
^ ^
**ff« «n 9=3
^*

cr ^ ft, a
The dogs of this place
bark loodlv
TA^ws of Ram give cmch milt
 ARTKXES 65

the 53: 1 1 *177 ^55 ft Bwrwm ftsr Plural Nouns * 75^

the m\ ira>i fPrr H Preposition ‘0/’ % 7?^ sir^ J sftr ‘of 57^ Plural
Nouns TvT fSr fv^a ^h —
Men are good. The men o/India are good-
Books are useful. The books 0/ Ram are useful.
«r?T 77% efk 7mf men i» books k 7?^ the ttt 77>7 s®^
I. TTlft i?r% f7fr77 mft 7T 7f3 lufpi Tff 77 pt "iR 2f men
^ books ‘of « 77^1 WT^ h eitT Twfif? ^ ftIHil «7ft! 71 7?3 ^ tIu TTli
1 1 sRi: t7 TJTTf 3 the ci sr^n gs } 1

EXERQSE
Q. Correct the folhmng s«j/enc«—
(a) You tee an aood irtijt (bill •« a red and a blue pencil, (e) An every
man can do this work, (d) The each boy it preseoi in the class, (e) li i» a your
book, (f) The mookeyt are veiy mischievous <;) The bees wander from place
to place.
//lnr^-(•) a. Don't use Article before btue, every, each. your, monkeys and
bees in (b), (ek (d), (e), tf j and (H respecuvely.

Rule VII. NoihCommofl Nonns and Article

Proper, Material ifir Abstract Nouns b tt^i Articles «t swm nfl
tlBit; ai?r—
Ram is absent.
I like milk and honey.
He got justice.
We love beauty.

77^ 7177 3 Ram k; 77^, pr tru

3 milk and honey 3, 773, fftst 3
justice 3^13 3 beauty k 773 Article «i 77>i 77T j*i
TTst "It Tcffc 7 h
»sn: Proper, Material jmi Abstracl Nouns f i 77k 77^ Article k\ 77m
7T71 ergs etitl I

Note^ Proper, Material rfrt Abstract Nouns « 773 sit Ankle 77

TsVi 7*1 R77I ?, efs 3 Common Noun tjtf 71; 33— O
Kalidas is the Shakespeare of India.
The coal of Jharia is of good quality.
The prosperity of a country depends upon its citizens.
The beauty of Kashmir is praiseworthy.
T7 itttI 3 Shakespeare, coal, prosperity u'lr beauty rep: Pro-
per, Material 771 Abstract Nouns ) t 7\ ra« 773 Article ern n
I«t *7tf« Common Noons rl «t!f.t ft 77*t nm 571 3 1 «« eg ut
fti^amTSk'nfr Nouns ‘of berk •!>»*> r-r Wfwtfsn^^tlr iw-
Vt Tfl Definite Article tspi 5»iT i 1

it "W. C. C.-5
 - 1

66 now TO WRITE CORRECT ESCLISH

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentences —
(a) The jealouiy is had. (b) Ibc love ii Rood,
(c) People of the India aie one
la spite of their diverse dresses and laoRuages. (d)The svaler
is cool. (elThejosti*
has been done, (f) 1 love the nature and the poetry,
(g) The rice and fish is my
favourite food, (h) It is a good poetry, (i) It was decided after a mature delibe-
ration. (j) India IS making a rapid progress.
flfnia— Don’tuse ‘the’inlaTandOj). (c) The people of India. Doa'l«
‘the’ before water, justice, nature, poetry and rice in (dj, (e). (Oaod (g) respecti-
vely. (h) It is good poetry, or It is a good poem, (i) mature deliberation. 0) rapid
progress.

Role Vni. The uses of ‘"nie*

PnsrfeRjrj
(a) Before
Proper Nouos % the
names of ranges of mountains (wssPl
^ jnftrr ^ I—
Tfrf).
Me Himalayas; Me Alps; MeVlndbyas.
vx *1 Tcf f€ if plural H 'trat alVTlin ^ Rif&T
the ^ jtn 1 ^rn I vyrt the vr ^
^ ttit
snfrir 1 sfr *1

I the Everest «it the Mount Abu 1

names of groups of islands; l^t—
(b) Before
the East Indies; Me Andanans; the West Indies.
W
sVtI S' VXf ^ Trtr
singular t eftt ry fgg erS the
I. ^
S plural ? ajft-S
srrtn srff ^
f^
Ceylon, Sicily, ^ |

t
^
Java, Sumatra S il't singular i ttS the ^ seR >ttl

Before the names of rivers; aS—

the Ganges: Me Danube; Me Indus TRTf? i

(d) Before the names of gulfs, seas and oceans (orr^, «RI

sTtranr); aS—
Me Gulf of Mexico; Me Bay of Bengal; the Indian Ocean;
Me Atlantic Ocean. ^
(e) Before the names of great boots; a?r—
Me Raraa)!^; Me Mahsbharat; the Bible; the Vedas; the

Koran; Me Gita.
(0 Before the names of newspapers; 3lr—
the Indian Xation; the Leader; Me Sutcsman: Mr
Searchlight.
' , . .

(g)
.• orsoinepUnetsorheavenJybodies;5&—
the iky; »Ae earth.
 ARTICLES 67

(h) Before the dates of a moQtb, —

i/ie 2nd of January; the 4ih of Match.
(i) Before the ordinal nuoabeis written in letters,

the first; the second; the third; the sixth.

Note (a) — irft Vt ^ Roman figures Jf fijui fft

le »:t iratn 5^7,

Edward I, George III, George VI.
Note (b)— *71^ fw Roman figures % ai? st, rd « th w vV jrrhr

ft ftTii I
Edward 1st, George Hlrd, George Vlth ftfisfrt

(j) Before the Superlative Degree, air

ifte best boy; the most beautiful flower; ffie highest tnountam.
S 'best’, 'most’ ‘highest’ Superlative Degree 1
the «i S7>r tta? aiatTW J 1

(k) Before Adjectives used as Nouns, Ift—

the poor (poor men); rhe rich frich men); the Messed
blessed men).

0) Before the names of professions, ^li—

tAeBar; tfte Bench; ffic Press.

EXERCISE
Q. Cmtct the /o/low.ng seniences—
<i) TlwEvertstisthe Wsb«tttnouou«o lOttewMW. (t>) Gtotse ihe III
war a bad king, (c) 1 read Bible and Oiia every day. (d) One likes lo look at
moon but not at sun. (e) He is most inielligeat boy of his class, (fj Indian
Nation IS a vety populat daily.
/Ttos— Don't use nhe’ before Everesl and III uj (a) and (b) respectively.
Use ‘the’ before Bible, Gita, mooo. aun, niost and Indian Nation.

Rule IX. Omission of Article

rr W7?7i5ff if Article wi iitiW«sfV ut nst ^—
(A) yrr phrases i rn7—(i) to make room, to catch fire, to take
action, to give or take offence, to keep house, to shake hands, to
leave school, to set sail, to send word, to set foot, to give battle, to
give way;
(li) at home, at fault, »t dawn, at night, at noon, at sight, at ease,
at school, at college, at hand;
(lii) day by day, side by side, face to face, hand to hand, hand
in hand, bound hand and foot, part and parcel, from hand to mouth'
(iv) by name, by train or steamer, by land, by sea,
by air;
(v) for sale, for favour, for fear, for leave;
 61

(tl,','.'
1" f«»'-
it.l.r ciininlcrii,m,. unjir
jrntinj, onjor Iral.

I I1.1VC o„,„ ,pi„„

Tlicre li a p„jt„
I thook with hJm.
The matter it unJft eontlJerathn.

'’"‘I' coniW:nlw= i '

s; j r,
* *'»• ‘ ^
“

They elected him president.

He was appointed chairman.
Ilewat crowned king.

? I fa / *>*1 'king* Common No®'

(C) Common Noons

Kinj o^ngland. Q„„„
} Tide
„f
^ ^ ,*^ |}-

What
I do not
W
(D; Kindofandsortof^ifi^^
0/ dress are you looking
like this wrr 0/ man.
5^_
for 1

sfr?Ji?f kind of dress sort of m^r, 3 r.^ .-^ r j-

sort of a man fitm tmtr A« fe kind of sfrt
»'
of aK Article sr ;1 mm 1 1

*?? asr aiaifr ^^

oursehes and deyelop so^‘
kind of an integral
„j, .... —MWAHARLAL
W
, ,
It IS idle to speculate nhat sort of , .,
i»« fc nor ,n„r„rd

—
—IFOR
IFOR EVA'*
E»-^‘
»tTf Tft aifa 9 life i ar* tfte wt {f artist a: , _^l

\
 ARTtail 69

Q. Corrfct ihf fi'HowIng

f«) At (imc my tnrmory «i-ttatlNeftutl. (() ll< came (•() lti( foot.
c)I trrt«h(«>^hoo4 In |94t.(iil H« tent fhc word (hi! he vmiU come, (e) Viciorli.
he 0'>nn rf fri’ind, «ii ^rn'llnd-hcitlexl (0 Rim ii In the heJ iht« dj)i.
t) I im not In the fitoiir of ihi« rno|y>*i> (hilicnme here hr the tea bvt
•ent H the iir.fi) He •iteln.'ied • chimnaa. O) U'hii kind of • ficturc Jo rou
iVe! ft) One l.Vet lhi» loft of honk.
ute in> irtKte heforefeutt. fooj, khool, ncrtl, Ox>een. bed,
I'oof. »e». lit. thilnriin, picture ind hook.

Rn BrSHtR COURSE 1

Ccrreei thf /oWiMnnp

1. He it in the debt.
2. t lent him • •crj.
3. t^htt kind of a C"l it the ^
4. T>4 irorranjoulrr «ii:> ate itroflt
5. T>« Secretary and Accountant pa>« been pvnithrJ.
«. The honetJy i* a beit policr-
T. Rkb ire diOionetl.
I. Are ]0u an gnivenitr ttudeni t
9. 3k'outd rou tratet by a train T
)« liUanhMttl
H. Himalar*! lx tn north of (he tndia
IS. More row |«t more you *rtBt.
U. WTkit lott of a book do you (ike the bett ?
U. Hov did (hit houte catch (he fire 2
15. lihe in the iall 1

(. la debt S. him word kind of till

J 4. the outer S. The
Secretarr and Accoontant haa. or the Sccretarr end the Accountant have 6. lion*
eny itthe bru. 7. The rich. 8 a. 9. by train. 10 a. ii The Himalayai lie to the
Borthoflndia. IS. Tbemore .themorc. II. aort ofbook. like beti 14 catch
fire. 15. in)ail.

REFRESHER COURSE 11
Explain *hy the following xcnfcrtCM are eorreet or lncorreei~
1- An Ink it an u«ful article.
2. He itan African, not an European.
3. It it a fine poetry.
4. The man ia mcrtit.
5. The love it a noble aentimeni.
6. Ganget it in flood now.
7. Dead man tellt no ulet.
 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH

hand,
in bed, in front of, in favour
m fr/ifl?
in trouble,
m earnest, in jest;
of,

»" 'ale, on earth, on fool;

I
""/'"’“‘I'
un consideration, under ground, under irisl.
3i?r—
I have aciion against him.
^ snrdcn in front of my
house.
T
1 shook hands with
him.
The matter is under consideration.

**01 : action, front,

hands eflr consideratwa

'

^ ^
They elected him
president.
He was appointed
chairman.
He was crowned king.

(C) Common Nouns oft

King of England.
» Tille (uuVI) S; firl ssh W
Queen of England. Queen Victoria t^'

-•iftr
'2"””

(D> A-»,do/ and sort

ofk mr. Stt-
Whai kind of dress are
you looking for 7
1 do rot like
this sort o/man.
•'t so'rt oV "''‘’""“H sort of man 3; rtslrart '!>
^
"A4!eSr.^T,
^ »w nmf *>
kbtdof^n integrated
KLiaoJnn 'i\"
oursehts
life.'’

ee, ifj he no,

teen »/ ”
e..fe«t,oee
^^
.fe""
if urtist i ne3 sn .i -
le
- •
hfe«f^ kind of ^ arjjjj j; ^ tort of
I
 AKttait

Q. C<wrfff the
U) Ai «>i»i lifw* «^r M >!e ot* wi ihcfiM-
kfi iS( in l?tl (dl He «mt l^•r>r<] lh«t he aiHiM rn<r«. (e) Vktcti*.
1

Quem F< rrf^inJ. «*« terr

\«tT»nr\la ^^efl>•nur rf I'm
tinj->)ctrtrsl (t) Rain It In (he
fl>>Hetame here Vj ike
M |he«e
*ra but
ri H He viateliori) a rHaiman. OtUkat
liw a'f.(i) VinJ cl a riourt dcfcu
e? (DOncUftikit atti da beck.
}| <Hr— D.'n'l v<c an) artKle ketiHc laolt. to«^a(kco). wcril. Qinn. bed,
Y«!f, aei. alf. ehurman, rKeaft and beck.

RURl-SHtRCOURSni
Cerreti jAe tr.g imfmrM —
t. He iiiaihedcN.
J. lte»tbim«»icri.
J. \kkilUnJ<-fartlli»k«’
4. Tke Inner and oumaallt arc ttrent
5. Tbe Seemarr and Aceevntani ha<« brtn fvnitked.
6. T>i* bmetty it a beti rcl.<7.
*. Rich arc diOicnrit.
I. Art ) ng an gnivmiir ttu Jeni t

, $ VmUbRi vttcl br
le tiittAhcui?
I I. HiTiiUrtt lit (4 (tcnli «f (he lr»d>a
tS. Mere y»t (ti mere yov nioi.
U. Wkii MT of abock do rou like the bett t
14. Hew did (hit bout* catch the Act T
li. Ubc tntSc )td ^
'
U,»ii-^\. in debt 2. hint tord- ) kind (UJ. 4. iSe outer d S The
ORerarr and AcrouniiDt bat. or (he Secreuit and (he Aecoununi have 6. Hon*
QT itthe beta. The fich. > a.9.bTtTau». 10 a. 11 the IliroaUjatheiothe
ortheflodut. 11 The more, .the more. O. ton olbook. .hka bett catch U

RCFRIISHER COURSE 11

Exp}Mn ttkr ihe follonlrg arnfmera or^ correef orlnn}rmi~-

1. An ink It an inerul anKle.
2. He it an African, not attCutopeati.
3. It it a fine poetry.
4. The man ii moftal.
5. The love it a noble teniimenl.
d Caniet it In flood now.
1. Dead man telli no talei.
 now 70 w*frf roimfrr rvcinii

rmfri incarnwi.
in Iroubic,
*" of. in fMC',
injeit;
Mi} on demand. «„ ,a{e,
on carih. on fool;
) under conuderalion,
under ground, under irji.
31 »f—
I have

P^rden /it front of my house.

I
I 7^*t*f*
shook hands with him.
The mailer ii under eonUderat/on.
a ran: aclion, fronl. hand,
atr co»iitoS»

- S I
» ™ .w..W, i „ ^

Thty elected him

preiident.
He wa, appointed
chairman.
He was crowned king,

•''’airman- mn 'iing' Cempe*'

> I IW

) ^<’"’“0“ Nouns ** *
55 eft ) Title ir ftr
King of England.
Queen of England. Queen Victoria 1^'

i Q“«n * 77^ArticIe?tS^^‘

(DJ Kind of and sort

ofk 5^—
What kind of dress are you
looking for 7
X do not like this
sort o/man.

«>»^ AtdeUr„S',

kindor»^-^^^
fcind
to balance ourselves
of in integrated life."

***
V«utoe what sort of an artist he
" hidh
been
possessed this passion
for lavish expenditud-^ ^

BIT ^ '• life

^
% 1,^ kind of e,V
if artist
artist 3;
^ <rft

«rT^ sort
an
of si^
 ARnCtfS 69

s Q. Correct the following sentences —

(a) At that time my memory was at the fault, (b) He came on the foot,

left the scboo( in 19H. (d) He sent the void that he would cotre.(t)Victoiia,
Queen of England, was very kind-hearted, (f) Ram is in the bed these days.
,
I am not in the favour of this proposal, (h) He came here by the sea but
it by the air. (i) He was elected a chaitniaii.
(j) What kind of a picture do you
'

"^7 (k) One likes this sort of a book.

^intr— Don't use any article before fault, food, school, word, Queen, bed.
nur, sea, air, chairman, picture and book.

REFRESHER COURSE I
Correct the foUov,ing sentences —
1. He is in the debt.
2. I sent hun a word.
3. What kind of a girl is she 7
4. The inner and outer walls are strong.
1.
S The Secretary and Aeeountanl have been punished.
6. The honesty is a best pol>cy.
7. Rich are dishonest.
5. Are you an university student^
9. Would you travel by a tram 7
10. Is it an hotel 7
11. Himalayu lie to north of (he Indu-
12. More you get more you want.
13. What sort of a book do you like the best?
14. How did this house eaieh the fire 7
13. Is he la the jail 7

in debt. 2. him word

kind of girl. 4. the outer. S. The
3.
iretary and Accountant has, or the Secreury and the Accountant have. 6. Hon-
y is the best. 7.Tbe rich. 8 a. 9. by (rain. 10 a. 11. Tbe Himalayas lie to the
rthoflndia. 12 The more .the more. 13. sort of book, .like best. 14. catch
(• 15. mjail.

REFRESHER COURSE II

Explain why the following sentences are correct or incorrect —

1. An mk is an useful article.
2. He is an African, not an European.
3. It is a fine poetry.
4. The man is mortal.
5. The love is a noble sentiment,
d, Canges is in flood now.
7. Dead man tells no tales
 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT EVGUSJI
8. Friend In a n«d ii frie,K|
y. He i* heir loiheihrone.
10. There ij an ewe in the fieliL

REFRESHER COURSE III

I. I ha\e five pots.

2- They are honest men.
3. We
are unisersity students.
These are useful rules.
5. They are M.
Ps.

eatnUaU of Good Engibk ukich lit

cuUmiedsp^Ur
culnJJ'J!* targ/unyob^errt,.-
^WRStAN t£«TS
 ADJECTIVES
TEST YOURSELF
Q.
9. Correct or justify the following sentences and then compare
your results with the key given overleaf--

U have two peas and evecy pen writes well.

I

2. Neither courses of action would be safe.

10.
3. I do not like those sort of persons.

4. As I have few money, I can gwe you ten rupees only.

5. Me has much milk and mangoes.

6. I like the poetry of the I6th and ibe I7tb centuries.

I. The whole resolutions were accepted.

S. Which is worse— smoking, drinking or gambling ?

The power-house of Chapra is bigger than Arrah.

1 can run as fast if not faster than you.

I I. Ram is much taller than me.

12. You are wiser than braver.
13. This is and intelligent way.
the safest
14. He is better than anybody in the class.
15. This book is more preferable than that.
16. The patient is comparatively better to-day.
17. This boy is the better than the two.
18. Which is the best— meat or fish ?
19. Me is one of the best if not the best men.

20. Wordsworth, Keats, and Shelley are great poets but the
latter is not so great as the former.

(71 )
 Ad, -Uufc I. AIIo*.Ka k,,,, uii
«nrc-.h 0 K ,o,„ Ih„ K,rt-lkA,o„„„,i„ Adj.-Rpkl.(4)
ldlItmnr,cy~Nun,mlAdj.-RurAV,a,.„j,k,

Adj- RulcIM
cen,„jL!v„„"
(7) The.bok,t«,|M|„„„,
«ere^Quj„t„a„ve Ad,. Rule VI.(S, »Dr,i_.'i„~,,a,i„
Rule
Demc-
I. (9) bijscf lhan lhal of (|>o«cr-hoaie
oD Anah-Com*^.
VII (II) lhanI-Con,^n.l,ve^8rea_R„,a y.
,|2)„„,a wise lhan
bravt-CompaiaUvc D«si«-Rufc v„, ,, 3
, ,„j „„„
way-CompanHive Desr«-Rol« IX. (14, ,„ybtiy
live Degree— Rule X. (15) This book la
cl^ComAn-
preferable to that— Companj*
live ^greo-Rule XI. (Id) is
helterorcompatalivelywell-Compara-
tive Degree-Rule XII. (17) better of the l«p-Comparative
—Rule XIII. (18, Which is better—Superlaiive Degree—
Rule I and
preparative Degree-Rule I. (19, one of the
best men if not the
beil-Superlative Degree-Rule VI. (20) but Ihe last
is not so *
great
as the first — Superlative Degree — Rule VIl.
 ADJECTIVES

Adjectives ^
fwi tei iWK Tom tf ^ '^ifr? tc Syntax ^
iiwjpi ^ Position of Adjectives % s«tw fV 1 1 sr? 5!? sn^Rt

t f% fkR*f^ s»rR ^ Adjectives I; ^1 1

ir^*?vr ^S
>fl^ 37 -tT I

DISTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVES
Rote I. Each, Every, Either and Neither

PUSS 3 Ts ni 91? ?f5i Singular Noun wi vnVr El<n I,

each hooit; every book', neither book', either book.

ejJ Plural Noun (books) «t aaPr t

Note— every >i rrx ^ fa%9«i (Plural Nume-

ral Adjective) nl 9^ Adjective kar? Plural Noun amr Singular
9^t, i*r

every two hours; every fine days.

Rule n. Each and Every

Rule (a)— Each an tn>r s?;i et an d % «r99> safvfafT «n 9^‘I ^ RR

rhti I, aR every *1 spitn 9) ft stfvraR % trw (sitifec ^ me) ift
^ Hie ^ 5tff, a?r—
fflsr

The two boys had each a pen.

The ten boys had each a pen.
Every boy had a pen.
W wftfpl 919? (t 9f f fe SI99!l ^ vi^T WT*&*9TJ n’t? att Bf^T?
9t I Tfrfe art tef 59f95t9f 9T 9tgv?f «i it? ?>, rit every ?i qitir bh?!
^rftt I vm: 99 <955 f
There are rtvo boy.f here and erery boy had a pen.

^
99revery%99iteach«tJRik^9i?ift9i
nt each ^
snftn 99lfe i^n mtk it sir ^ (r i
ihli 1 1 959 stVt 'each and every’ w ift aiW 9R?t ^ wt
51 ^ l aitn

( 73 )
 «avv TO \VRITE CORRECT
ENCLISI7

w ’R w fe aft fma f
There .re ,„„ b„„ j
^
,11,^ *W=achf,jT„,a^^*^^,

^ TO
Pronoun
",1
XliS
e>af u> J or
± r*^
^ t,
« STO tot ,r I
at every art
ft each lit

aaf; sraft ‘each’ Adjective

Free...
str

^c/i of them is doing his duty.

»f "'»)*> aata
aft
TO
evTO
ri ofrt^
rjL «iH
ff^r rr ?r«7n
o* '2? S!?’
«r?^
™ (rial erjfaj tftl
aik pXun a.
I

E\eryone of them is doing his duty.

Rule Ilf. Dbtributires and Article

Distributive Adjectives i
an each book; the every book snfe
Artielea*,TO=ailrls#t »,
" |&
irff Article

^cTwhJTrtr>!rM
fta* TO
nrfire

at^ a(

EXERCfSE
Q. Correct the following tenienees—
{!) Every boy* are readm* their bx>ki.
(b) i ha»» .
pen write* til. (c) The me<Ji«-K 1* siveo to *
. pa'i«, ff'*
tuve to take one tablet each four hour*. («) Vt>^
ihouirf
E.lher road* will lead you Every of o* ,houM do
there. (»»
book t* not equally useful. (•) The each book *houIJ h^! work
be r», i
^ a’^”' 2
J/uirt—(t) every boy i* rradint hi* book-
(b) ea-h /
(e) »idc; (Oroad. {sirveryone. Don't use •.«•’ ,nd *'^’
lively.
^ *'’•1 (I) re’Pec-

POSSESSIVE AfXJECnVES
Rule I. Po**eMlTr Adjeetlfe* sad Noun*

Possessive Adjective* (oiy, our. your. it*, her

.Ar •h.;.s n
sive Proaouas tr Adjeaive «i J Possejsive
f-micc. ourv. jourt her. Ibrin.
AdjOT^!^!'
PossessheProoouatCTSTTewTfU'^’Awfl ftr?» ee » r*- t»
’
Adjective Noun 4 eT> » - *»ronoua Verb
iV;r-i‘"
Tti* i* mr ' - wiJne. *
 ADJECTIVES 75

This is ; our book. The book is yours,

5 my ak your suwk Noun ^ ii?t gsri q\

f*i^ ^ mine 35i yours iT Verb ^ ?K ^ Wbr 55 1 jir myt

*F^ Verb 5; ^ IJ3 5 'n^r mine ^ Noun % fft ?? *175 ^in

1

»RI5 I—
This mine pen. These are
IS theirs books.
JifT mine 3; ?Tt my si sratn {isn theirs 3:?^ their sn i

Note (a)— His ^ iwtn Noun i trw I thx Verb k ^ ift,

?^ff% Possessive Pronoun t aV Possessive Adjective »ft; 3&—

This is his book. The book is fiis.
Note (b)— Possessive Pronoun 3; spelling ijt 511 to—its (it’s
*r^,) ours (our's a?), yours (your's njT), hers theirs (her’s iji

their’s 1

Rule II. Possessive Adjectives and Nouns

Possessive Adjective 3r «tr Noun 3, fire Article at snfbi ttrl thji

This is his pen. That her ink-pot.

is

at;! pen iftr ink-pot 3; are a, an m

the ct seln mf ^
3 Tiae u^s ?—
That IS a my favourite book.
This is the your best work.

EXERCISE

Q. Cerreet the foUov,tttg sentences

—
(a) These are mine books not yoor'* (b) Out’* wants are
unlimited
(c) Her’* bait i» black. Id) Their'* idea* ate old («) It it a your house (fi This
It the Rime best dress (g) These thing* are our's
HInn- (a) These books are tnioe. o<n your*; (b) oun («) her- (di ihrir.
(e) It is your house: (0 This 1* my be*t dress, tg) ours.

DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES
w * fire Noun iTl Ai «3^ (point out)
^
(i)
m a«g treH
Definite (this,
i
that, these,
t 3 r»^i,
those, the same,
^
i[,e
j
^
j-.
^

Indefinite (a, an, a certain, cerUin. some, another

other* "
other). ft3 a, an net the nw “Vvri Article
^

Rule I. DemoRstrative Adjeciives and their aoinber

Demonstrative Adj
otRtBiTTsrTfrefcSingi-

A'
 76 now 70 WHITE tOHRtCT tNOtnn

Adjective 5; r?t<t Singular Noon ri Plural Adjective « rrr* PlunI

Noun »7TTtt rt; stJj—

iA/t boy: ff>rse boyj; this book: a certain man; certain

men: another ^Kn-, oiArr pent.

Note— sffl >(3 fc a, an, a certain, one nr another

wrr cr »fr la-

definite Demonstrative Adjective^, singular Vt

Singular Nouns an PrW fW J i ^ aiv? htt ?
These are another books. There are a certain boys.
T*fT Bvm Indefinite Demonstrative Adjeclise ‘certain' sfti ‘other’

T^z. plural J f»Ti nm Plural Nouns ci fi e^m

’Btfrt: an—
certain boys; other boys

Indefinite Demonstrative Adjectives i, sft singular ^

plural etsff ^ S'— any, such, some sftr any other. Ttrfire Singulai

BT Plural Noun ti sem ^ fsntt con I; c%—

any country; any countries.
Definite Demonstrative Adjectives 9 ‘this’ sftr 'that' singular

CT ‘these’ e?n: ‘those* plural. «pk »ft Noun ct sem rc« ewsr?*

CTttt ^ I Such, the same act the other ct cem Singular rftr PI“«J
trtaf ct if thn i; 5tr—
the other man-, the other men.

Demonstrative Adjectives ^ ctl tah firsartivc tafac

I f% smr pj% Number bt ^ ’itr vftr singular s bt^j Singular Ness

Cl sraVr
faBn Cl
^ a«n plural 4
c^oiBST fcBt
trnr Plural
mn f
Noun cr i
sit ra rarf 9^ ^
I like these sort of men.
I do not like those kind of men

?r5r these wh those I: tiw Singular Noun rar. sort sftr zz

bbVt cr fpii mn t; 55 CB 9 —
I like this sort of men.
I do not like that kind of men.
s^rct ‘rd SynUx if Adjective sftr Noun i Agreement s:
*

f» jc a fkonT^BC BT9 ft HI
^
these/ihose sort m
these/those kind ci infm
frrrra'^ ^
Fowler TrtH HRI?,

ciai f I
it

BTra F=r^> ^
 ADJECTIVES 77

Rule II. ‘Another’, 'Other' and ‘Any other’

Another Singular Noun % <TT*r Noun

m Affirmative Sentence if fhii I, any other
sftr other
^ Hrrfn
Plural
Singular sftr
Plural e>il ^ rgiff % Nouns ^ mv Negative sentence if, ^|r—
I have read another book.
I have read other books.
I have not read any other book or books.
^TTT vm Affirmative I' | irS 3 Singular Noun (book) sn^i
f trri; ctv another ci jut I, «tr 55^
I
S Plural Noun
(b^ks) ^ sraVr jar 1 1 tnu other juai i 1 aVtt Negative
T srfr qilany other w wrPr nar 1 1 ^
I have read any other book.
I have not read another book.
551 Tfjf S another ^ inibi ^1 sftr if any other ci,’
75^ 5m Affirmative | sftt 5*Tn Negative.

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the /olIoHing sentences—
(a) I do not read th«>« k<nd of books, (b) t do not lAe
those sort of men
(c)Tiere wai cettam man whose name I do not remember, (d)
They are another
men. (e) Thu is other pen (f) 1 have met any other person ibis
evenini (a) I have
not used another pen to-day (b) What does other
teacher autsest 7
ffi«M-(a> those kinds, or that kind; (b) those sotii
or that sort- (el >
certaio.{d)othef:(e)aaother:(f)anothef.. . . ;(«) any other; (h) another.

NUMERAL ADJECriMIS
Numeral Adjective feim) i ^ ^ J'—
1. Definite effr 2. Indehnile.
Definite Numeral Adjectives % mn }—
(a) Cardinals (one, two, three, fourelc.),
(b) Ordinals (first, second, third, fourth etc.);
(c) Muliiplicatives (single, double, treble, triple,
two-fold ' three-
fold etc.).
IndcSmT. i| t-.II, .or,,, mjny,
^
enough, no, none and few.

Rote 1. Many and Several

Many s^r several k vr 051 Plural Common Noun se),
ae—
many men; several men. '^
 78 MOW TO WRire tontrcr tNOLnjt

^ n? t ft? t5?« irw Maierul b«j Abjtract Nount *i «rpT

f( i, rt^T plural fW f> n^j i b vn *rx J—
Itc has many money.
You have many gold and ailvcr.
She possesses many beauty.
I have several milk.
w erraf tf much sew cIbi afjrc 'i;
Material jm Absinct
Nouns ? I

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentence! —
(a) Ram has much pens and pencils, (b) He Teels much dilTiculties. (c) He
has observed many uncommon phenomenon, (d) I have faced much troubln.
(e) The poet says that in life these ere much cares and ansieiies.

//f«M—<a) many; (b) much ditTicully or many difficulties; (c) pbenooiesa:

(d) much trouble or many troubles; (e) many.

Role It. The Ordlaals and Noons

ftm Definite Numeral Adjectives serial order kt ?rii ylm t,

Ordinals^ llr— first, second, third I qr^ the ci
fhn ^ sftr Jf Singular Noun «t, 5%—

the second class: the third period; the fourth dimension.

Jiff classes, periods act dimensions ci *r^ ^ i

Rale ni. Ordinals, Cardinals and Noons

Jiff and ?r«fV Ordinals 3? fer «ta> ft Noun ?n snitn ^ «frf firr
Hfsl
Hift
Ordinal % iffS the si^, ?ft af
Ordinals ^ Tf^ the siq>i
Noun
<f) af
Plural
Noun
Number if rf?n iit

Singular Number S tT3t

^
t. att—
I have read the literature of the seventeenth and eighteenth
centuries.
I have read the literature of the seventeenth and the eighteenth
century.
Ordinals (seventeenth and eighteenth)
Jiff't^^T^ fl
Ordinal (seventeenth)
^ ‘and*
& is?m »rai I. IT Pro 3? vfS the stun
1 1

Hff Noua(centuries)PIuralNumberif |j $ and ^ riggi vi

frtt tt Ordinals a? vfS the «rai % f»Tfq>T Jiff Singular Noun
|
(century)
an fljfpi 5 «n 1 aw? g (century) aftf
1 if (centuries)
^
IT ^ ^ ^ «i)tt-H) tft smavnft i mt?
 1 —

AIMECTIVES 79

•RTfft "smiV I—
"....let ui merely remind aursehes of two relevant forces — the
scieniifie movement of the sixteenth and the seventeenth ccntaries.”
— BASIL WILLEY
pr 5rm if Ordinals i the atrai 1 1 itrfiri ^iff Singular
Noun (century) ^r 3{)« Rirnt s

«r7 ran to sraW

..and ihe part o/ji ihai he fcoj mow e«jo>erf w the literature
of the great ages, the sixteenth and jerwireenfA centuries.”
—T. S. EUOT
"Secondly, how did the religious conflicts of the sixteenth and
seventeenth centuries leap up to the growth of natural religion in our
period ?’•
—BASIL WILLEY
fi Ordinal ^ the »i^lt rafefl: Plural
Noun (centuries) «T
^1
EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentences —
Mebasread the first tod secoodchapieroftbis book. (b)Hebasread
(a)
the and the second chepien of (bis book, (c) G. B. Shaw hved throuth two
fiiii

ceotunei—(be 19th and the 20tb.

Hints— (a) ehapien; (b> cbapter; («) the t9tb aod 20ib.

Rule rV. Ordinals, Cardinals and PosiiioD

tives «iw,
)iRft

^
Noun %
?i9!r H
r?!! Cardinal nui Ordinal
Ordinal «l ra;rT utira
^ a*ir
ra^ are:
a; Adjec-
Cardinal
a%—
I have read the first two chapters of this book.
Ordinal (first) woi I ^ rai: aiR Cardinal (two),
^ffi — I have read the two first chapters, tf) i

EXEKClSE

Q. Correct the following sentences —

(a) He has read the four first books of tbe Paradise Lost,
(b) Tbe two
first boys were rewarded, (c) Tbe five first competitors got gold
medals and
three last silver ones, (d) The three first candidates have been selected
appointment.
for
/
Ifinis— la) first lout; (b> first Swot (ckfitst five .... tj.
three.
 so now TOWKrrE CORKCCT rSOLMIt

Rule V. F(i*i A few and The few

Rule (•)— nii; nw net Tlufal Noun ri J *

Noun Jni rf^^t ^ plural fi *?«; 5?r—

He has /ew pent, lie has a few pent. He has lost ihefeyf pet

he had.
I^fn0«w4l *1 Plural Noun «i iPrtT jsilJ, wt r 1 1 1
^
Singular Nouns €i aatn 5wjTMi.nl *r?» wr? jT 9n^; 52t—
He has few rice. He has o/ew love for others.
Note— Few sftt little, « few sAt a little nwj the few lAr the^

^ *M i| Writ stfl faff* fstAcJTTT: ‘fg 'tfl'. 'fg'

rtw TMt «1 cfe & laH w»nc f? ^ f* few, a few ?rai the

* fTPt tr?T Plural Noun ctsalf »>ai ax little, a little im the lit**
?rTW Singular Noutjs ci; 3?r

He has lliile rke. He has a liule love for ethers.

Tttfir? ‘fg’ 3; sf 5 few i Bw Singular Nouns *j trtfW hVt little *

BTW Plural Nouns *t J » wt rw wne ^ ^—

I have less friends
and /ewer milk than Shyam has.
rrrf less 3: fewer ft
Hule (i,)_ Few «i w5 ^ai t
less ci awW
nfl’, a few bj Tb’ eftx the £i
^ '

wT ‘efi TS fT ^ mI f« *iri
*5^ ’ft *t Tt? axf few »ft 1 wtrrrtt ^
few «T f eVr Tl*n *if?T *fl<
^ few 3: a few ai a few k few cr hjfhr ft vtiw, tft KTTTTf

eft ft wtT, ^
eft % *ft **11 rra-Bi 3m»n; &%—

Ram has few books and so he can give me only two.

jrrf few books & ft eni ? ftr rnr i inrr f® wt f'

I, Bt ftx Wf ^ ^ ^ 5X. a few ‘

st?rk I

EXERCISE

Q. Correct the following sentenees—

(a) He has few money. (»
She
has few love for her husband,
(c) I bi'
I •“vefew cows that give
purchased a few nee co-day. (d) me five seers of mai
with me and so t gave ooty two annas to the beggar.
(e) I had few coins (0 1 bv
books which 1 have read very thoroughly, (g) jje has a little pens,
few (h) S**
has a little rupees, (i) My
cow does not give me fewer milk than yours,
(j) He sf
retomed from England
me few months after he a (d) a few; (e) a few; (f) , fe„.
HMf- a little; (b) IilUe; (e) tittle;

• f'*-
(h)'a few; (i) less; (j)

VI. ‘Many’. ‘Ma*'y and Nouns

3 good “"J * w: Noon TO plioll

 AtOCCnVES 81

Tfcn K many a qi many an ^ singular; 3?r—

There ate many men there.
A great (good) many have assembled. mm
Many a man has assembled.
Many an ink-pot has been purchased for the examination.
Tdt et Jf Singular Noun sfj?T % ?! ar^'f S Plural

Noun sn sjfVr tltn, al er aim i

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following seniences—
(a> Many a soldiers have attended the parade, (b) A ereat many flower
was offered to him. (c) A good many poem is bad. (d) Many an H. E. Schools
have been started this year, (e) Many an hours have passed away. (0 Many a
men run after name and fame.
Hints —
falsotdier has; (byfiowesa were; (,c) poems ate;(d) Sthooihas;
(<) hour has; (f) mao runs.

Role Vn. Definite Numerals and 'Of*

Definite Numeral Adjectives i (b do:en, a hundred, a

thousand a million) fitvr^ ere of«i»o>r infl jtnn vst^t r? fl Noun
^ ftrt eiTtri \i
a dozen pens] a hundred rupeer, a thousand rupees', a million
rupees.

’ift «ntt dozen, hundred, thousand sftr million ^ ai? of urat, fl)

e? wW si^ ftni I

Note —A lac. a couple aftt a pair % me of avtti «nen —

a lac of men: a pair of shoes; a couple o/hours.
tirl of w otfm ml sgs etm ^ntn i

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentences —
(a) I have a doaen of pens, (b) You have a thousand of rupees, (c) 1 have
seen a lae men to-day. (d) The GoveromeoC have spent a milhon of rupees
over
this project.

Hints— {a.) dozen pens, (b) thousand rupees; (e) lac of: (d) miii.nn
topees.
““

Role VIII. Notneral and Possessive Adjectives

trfk Numeral Adjectives eftr Possessive Adjectives

(Possessive
Pronouns ft Adjectives—my, your, his, her, its,
^ snrbr fevft Noun Numeral Adjective
tbeir) ^
H.W.
S; Tfll rf. atjlTst
^
^
c. E.-6 . .r
82 HOW TO WRtTE CORRECT ENGLISH

TT? Possessive Adjective —

All my books arc missing.
jr?T books % ifTft Adjectives sri^ —
? all ^
my ^ SHtr: Nomcnl
sfrr Possessive Adjective I'l *11^ Numeral Adjective srnT^^
aR if Possessive, Possessive Adjective sffr tt? Numeral
1 1 my all, his all etrft at? % Ji?fbi sr?! i

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentences —
are good,
(«)
(d)
His all books are missins- (c) My both
My all friends came, (b)
have fallen, (e) His many teeth have fiC*®-
Your some teeth
^
(f) My a few books art lost, (g) These aU men are bad. ,

HMt— (a) All my; (bl AM his; (c) Both my; (d) Some of your; (e) Many
his; (0 A few of my; (g) AU these.

QUANTITATIVE ADJECTIVES
Rnle I. ‘Moch* and Notma

Much&sfnm (how much) «T vtv gfen I, sftt wfriv tnv

Material m Abstrae* Noun tVt •*!> Singular Number if rr*

i , fHt »r Vt m j ft Plural Nouns aek stfl rl

much water: much milk; little water: little milk;

ST « eneT
fetl nrjeh difRculties these days.
1

He has rmjeh cares and ansieties.

„ ,Tt5t ? much J «« Plural Noons «i Bern gm ^ »t> «r^ J ,

«
va.r^'f
many ?rsfail«t»^

r**! J I

C.XERCISE

Q. Correct t*w fiy‘^ "i smienett—

soonew and pUyt (b,
,t.
h«.-w..«Jfcvr«s M>Sf,k,.„«hboot
»=“ j lar.w*’* •»*.« •It»* inj sutTtrjft,,,
•-« --'>.1.1 many.

R.WIL
Vyes . ».T ' Mar •ft
S.jsv'ar Adjective
 ADJECTIVES 83

Number sft irifs I. n? rI: aw Tloral Noun «ntri

—
Not ci/ hvs poetry is good.
Some of his poetry is good.
All men are mortal. Some men ire foolish.
Most of his early childhood was spent at home. Most of the
boys are poor.
Vtt tPiVt in=’t I—
“. ...vhere all vision is lost and»\\ memory dies out."
— D. H. LAWRENCE
‘‘....f/iey eAoose raiAer fo hear hardship t/ian (a make away
with themselves." —JOitN bunyan
Rule III (a). ‘Mach’, 'Many’ and Nonns
Jif? and ^ Nouns eftt 3; i^, bV

^ 7?^ much 7t many(vfy?73«^)«T«e>jw5Wsf3mf\^^f^,

^ ^
much many "Et w^T; 3$t—
Have you much milk and many oranges ?
3H?fv’r

etT milV s?tt oranges «> ‘and’ % Ap 'Wi V. ‘milk’ Singular

Material Noun ^ ‘oranges’ Plural Codiejod Noun, milk it
much smrr I sV oranges i 7?^ many. afkpj^fWff—
Have) you much nxitk and oranges 1
7T, Have you many oranges and milk 7
ifi sots cmt, a^tPe »i*a S milk k r?n «7 much ct srrtt ah* I,
oranges % ftw mff awa S oranges ^ f?R tfl many srtg??!

^
i

qi: milk % fan i «m. rswagtrit 5 ai»i sms I—

Has he many
pens and ink ?
Has he much ink and pens ?
Did he bring much nee and plates 7
Did he bring many plates and ncc ?
ra amf if nf^« Noun % f^nt much many *i irqH w^pi-srsn qVjn
’stfqq I trr s*n ^ ^*t—
Has he many pens and mucA ink ?
Has he much ink and many pens 7
Did he bring much rice and many plates ?
Did he bring many plates and iwwcA rice ?
Rule in (b). Ntuch many «qtn Negative
Interrogative sentences ? qtm 49—
I mucA motwy.
haven't
I haven’t many friends.

I
Have you ntuch money 7
Have you many friends ?
 84

Subject ^ em sentences if much WVi man/ c

f
Object $; fn«r much sV ^ ^ ?ne sr^ , Affirmative senw
of. PJ'oty ^f. a
tSl W?' I; ^—"“"'ber • ^ege quantity of
^ large amonrti

^ n men*X'
ranch ^ VTfn s>5
1, ^ p’ ^ ^^
much
I
many
JTT

know many
i,^
men
^ ^ ^ t mfllc ^ Object aal art. ^

fTl'
iwfr » men of ram. tale plenty of a
^ raany S.,,* ,
,1, „in
« tut 5ra }
I

, VnfatetlPt

Mucheftptnanyieima. TOT amrei 1

ti« eentenees
yy^ „ "T TT AfP

^ J, =, mnnb
ny « em so, .'
as,
t'
bow
®“’’^'“
?t too rt

f <^0 not know Aow’Xl"'”'**'

bring. mangoes or how mueA fiah be *3

v°uL“;rat:::::;^“«“'ike.

*° e>ccor
in Sev»f many, when not r
not noma,,,
p„„,y ^
^..e and IntereogaUve senten
compound dclerminaf *'"’cnces. in Affirmat
’.“’‘’“""‘’^•ndp/emy J^"
n /0'S'
’'
-tt- o. imm,„ {^^rre""’
•t-AiTBaNJAND UsaoBlvE
exercise

•"«*-<»; eijci ^^‘*”0'*ndBf»».

pjae- .u,
 ,

ADircnVES
85
r Rule IV. Some ind Any

" =< '>»' >.

»y „
Ht hai um, monty. H. hai to, my money.
Ihavcomefood. 1 haw to, nny food,

aw S St. 5'* aome nit

I W efs ft ^ *1^7 OTii >—

He has not some bread.
! have not some money.
>»?! some i any ^ neh <q|(^
Note-^ ftr any «i irftir Negative jenteoce
S „
^ (any
no Adjective »
i:) <rrft not «rm
^ any
no stfl i No any *t miVt *n1 ri
Ttk Adjective, AdjStrvr«iw^&
fy,, f

<™ J !
i

No, » Adw,b ,1 Adjechw";;,.

I have not any money,
^ “Zf*;
arl not any ^ a^ft no any «j aqh ,

Role (b)-Some At any » mow « o« <«, *, „„ le, ,

4^
.f,
lowteoeoliw
wt
Have you ony /oorf ? Have you aome/wd ?
JfTffe Inlcrrogative sentences

I «R3ff
^^
any ^
^ any i fire unn ^r , 4
if AffiRw...-

^
Jf
irffn Ehii I wh »e «riaTifr a™T > trsomesT
”^1 '”15 1

Role ‘Little’, 'A little’ and ‘The little’

As I have little rice, I can give you only five seers.

 f* •
-n *
Y tvtrm
7 ’•»
"»J»* f,. ft
• *'”1? ^nunifrir *VrTr
«»:«« « '
tk
sr AbmM N„„„ --fl »| ni„'^
-
^ Mif f«rw i rr Mj"
«i Proper Noun «j
u^f,
^ atrr tifife i rr Cer:
' liavc /,„.
’" < »>77 .7, >_
„„„

Rule (c)-The
rei-TK. few ^»rew„,Tr-Tr-’t»^ni
.t ..
The few ihe linig
^ a frr r? ciopr ®n?
f=w. a few, liiMe
,1, , n,,,^

1. He lojt /Ae ///,/. ^^

2. He has read rA
^ fetvVn
'^‘^oobAeAa^.
1. He lost litllc/a little m/» '

2. He has read few/a

' few ®oofcs
bo^v^he
had.
Rule VI. W. .None-
None i?af f fj|»« ^ .

er7!n>rrhirtfT^3B%qf^no rhr
Have you any bread ?
•™».«e.e“^%f
^
No, I hav
jst ?wr if Noun ‘bread’ «t ek, ,
it awr * have no bread.
nonesti^i «rfT yut^r ftt^-Ihave
fft ax ’TI ^ [
t>read.
rrt; rt# no

Nole-None %
None
i^vuv
I.
I. or Uf
jnr
n5f Pronoun
..wi • .»... f.
•<»

Noun. Adiective
Noun, Adjective
Adjective
j •••V
jftr
^
Adwiri. _x
Adverb i
( ^ jr^rn^
jfnprin s ^ none
e-
^
“one
' ' ^
' ’n’Fri
??>
i
«
Prono
ift
Dictionary Vol. Ill (P. 1662) Shorter Oarorrf*’*^'*^ * ^nternaiioc
sftr

(P. 1334) if ^t5T tnftiraWf'RJreTtreRrT'ml, ^'etionary Vol.

no one; not one;
p
11^ none sw *>ai t ”3^^
nobody” v"*”
S f?if)^iTT— no, notany. «9nR«f «) eft
3 ^ none
^
?hrr ITT — ^ Attributive us

“/ have none other disease than a swelling

my ilegs."
o inrny
WT^ftssrah if none « Attributive use srff^^ ^
-SWIFl

none t: no ^ fVfli ?. none ci Predicative

‘‘'
'•Remedy there was none." , ,

. ^ ' V tfOBBES
 ADIECnVB 87

jff Hobbes 3^ *ifT none Predicative use pjf

^ ^ ??RTmi I «r? tw Adjective % 1 wfdt aWf sort s^ht ^

T?5f =9irrJ fff? ?5r siT^ ? Remedy there was none.
I
Hope
there is none—‘none’ Adjective afT I, tft err WT I ? r7 ^ tr?i

tTf 1
?^ Adjective 1 1

EXERCISE

Q. Correct the following senlences~

(aj 1 have no any booV. (b> 1 have not aome money, (e) He has any
books, (d) I have tittle rice and so I shall give you ten seers, (e) He has spent
a little money he bad (f) You have ooite books, (g) You have a little books.
tW Thttt were not less than twenty petsons. W
I did not know his whereabouts
and so had little difficulty in finding him out. 0) He is too busy to attend to

HCnts^a) no bookot not any book; (hi any money or bnve some money;
(c) seme; (d) alittlei(e) the UtUe;<0 oo:(g) afew;0)) fewet than; (1) a little,
(j) any work

Ralo VII. ‘AH', ‘Whole’ and (be Now

All ^ ?T? singular sir plural ft wtr i: Nouns ri riVn ft Hvnn
V wr I all Ir Ttoin (quantity) an tW ftdi J, a? gs>; m Singular Material
qr Abstract
Plural
Noun errat
Common Noun
i. wv
nir—
(number) »;t ^ ftnr k, n?

All the money is spertt. All the boys have come.

Whole <f« ^ firJw I fsmw n't (all) flni J, n are

Singular Noun ^ riStm ftni Plural «i «ift srff, si&—
The whole money is spent.
The 11/io/c book has been finished.
The whole plan is defective.
nft tniT book 5i rjit books nVr plan i »eit plans ct cem fbtj, tit
Jitl ail »ii intn tRni, wholes ai? books sitr plans «:i aftn
«55lVn I

EXERCISE
Q. Correcf the following sentences —
ta'tThewholeresotulionswere put to vote <b) The whole acts are full
of derects. (c) The whole colleges ire overcrawded. (d) The whole
sonnets of
Shakespeare are fine poetry.

Jliitis —Vise Instead oS *tiWfe'*V«tS^ or tree Singular >5 ouns.

 86 iKiw TO wBirr CfiRKtcT rNr.t/iM

Rule (b)^ -Liltic, a little *ftr ih; httle i »TM»t S r*

^
r» rr
r« i Material 91 Abjtract Noun Tj r HTT^r
rr?;ni i, RRlff: ij rx iRuirt^ J „„ fg^ ^
UT AbstractNoun Win sriO er rrviir. irf; errr little « rr Comnics
Rt Proper Noun fit ^^r tMi r fof;?7 4 ,riT *rr* >—
I have few money. i h.ive //;;* book*.
UtI few ^ little «i tftr little « rr^ few wi s?w vm 1

Rule (c)— The few the little * if ev: m •! «i;sf srnTt^i

The few the little « tix 4^ Adjective clause bttt J, Tt ffS w f*

few, a few, little s^r a little % tit stff, 5i?—

1. He money he had.
lost ikc liitU
2. He has read ihe/ew book* be had.
Tmt % errun TT *rrt ^ TITT :rrT f;nj rrr^—
1. He money he hod.
lost little/t little
2. He has read few/a few books he had.

Rale VI. ‘No’, ‘None* and the Noon

None ^ fTilTO t fattn btI’i Noud fe tt& st^ tItt t

Til ttVi clttt f. ttr DO siai none ttI,

Have you any bread ? No. t have none. 1 have no bread.
5??^ TiT’T *f Noun ‘bread’ WT jin ? I rwftrr tttI t>®
none stfl i itfr 571 ^r Rw—-I have none bread. He has none ibob^
T5
ffl •Tt"! sl*f( I

Nofe-None i rr*T^ t t f

None m Pronoun t. Adjective 1 % in^m f fir none P«o°“

I, "tr JTf Noun, Ailjcctive sftr Adverb Webster's InternatioBJ
i lit 1

Dictionary Vol. Ill (P. i662) shr Shorter Oxford Dictionary

(P, 1334) jf ^T5rT'^T^'lTOr^TKfT'niTl Pronoun Tfr«ifisi3^f t

41 none tti w<r t no one; not one; nobody wlx Adjective Tit
si3T?r^'r^ no, not any.
^ none Tii Attributive 05*
*11
t=Tl

»/ have none other disease than a swelling

in my legs."
—
RTtn if none «i Attributive use irff *
^37. TTlfir
none 4: tt^ no ttt srrhi ^«n I, tt none t:t Predicative use svft 'ff 4^’
' rnvT I—
"Remedy there was none" —HOBBO
 —

ADJECTIVES 87

Hobbes none ^ Predicative use he

jffift

?»i ft v^RTini ^
^1 vifpi
!IT
?,
T* Adjeciivc ift \ t «?rfiTV
W
*17=11

TTTTf 5 Remedy there vas none.

^ frTit
Hops
<1777 fra I

there is none—‘none* Adjective sifl f ,

sft 75 wr t Ht ft 7?r
7^ 7^ Adjective % 1

EXERCISE

Q. Correct the following sentnicei—

(a) ] have do any book, (b) 1 have not tome money (e) fie has any
books, (d) I have little rice and sol shall give you ten seers, (e) He has spent
a money he had. (1) You have none books. (g> You have a little books,
little

(h)There were not less than twenty persons. ( 1) 1 did not know his whereabouts
and so had little difliculty in finding him out. (j) He 11 too busy to attetsd to

lf(rtti-»(a) BO book ot not any book; (bl any money or have tome raonert
(e) tome; (d) a the latte; (0 no. <g) a few; (h) fewer than; 0) a little,
little; (e)

(j) any work

Rule VH. ‘AH’, ‘Whole' and the Noun

All )i »iT singular srV plural «nfr <1 snt ft Nouns «t nVr |t ir^iTT
1 1 « all ft qftHH (quantity) n uw flfl i, m »«tft utq Singular Material
9T Abstract Noun emt 77 m tnft s;**! (number) eii rtv Ebtr (ti

Plural Common Noun cr. aft—

All the money is spent- All the boys have come.

Whole 7« ^ farm > f«i*ttn wy «) *^1’ (ail) J, qy trtft irr pqj

Singular Noun *n sJim f'nt ). Plural n «»ft srfl, aft—
The y*hote monex is spent.
The nhole book has been finished.
The nhole plan is defecine.
ufq 7|1 book ft rrft books nlr plan ft qqft plans qi sem ji-i.
all VI jRVn 7:771 TTpii. •alf« whole ft vt? books «^r plans vt seln

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the fotloHin^ senreRee*
(»)Thewhote resolution! were pul 10 vote <b)The whole arts are full
of defrett (c) The whole collrgei are overcrowded. rJiTbe whole sonnrn of
Shikrspcare air fine poetry.

Ilims— Vive 'all the' tnstrad of "tbe wbeV w eve SiRpular Nows.
 80 MOW TO WRITE COIlRtCT tVOLHII

Rule (b)--LIHle. a liHle rflr ths liHlc « if tif aV err cr m

f« ‘fg*
^ wi »1 ink R(T Ors Material Abitracl Noun ti r ttttf f?
tTTflt i, tTffc U si« qfriTia»m* ftrm J" fywffrrr few « ert Material
I

UT Abstract Noun «f ^nli siff pBrnr. arft ^rrr Hufe « tit Common
«;t Proper Noun tii am rtI fwi i q ,nT irrz }-—
I have /nv money. I have Ihile books.
iitI few ^ ttS little rfh little « rr# few *i bw tw ^iff b i

Rule (c)—The few «ftt the little i o»T»u if w: ttt «i ctr stttt r? l

The few the little 4 at? Adjective clause stm f. bt tit r? ft

few, a few, little sIt a little 4 tit aij—

1. He lost /he little mooey he had.

2. He has read the few books he had.
Tsr TTTTf 4 srrtnr tt «rrr 4ft trt ftra

1. He lost little/a tittle money he had.

2. He has read few/a few books he had.

Role VI. ‘No’, ‘None’ and the Noun

None TT! 4Ht ft?m i finret artn Noun 4 Brft ''fl ft^t t
Noun
Til BThr ifti k, tiT ?f4 Bift DO wnrr none 5ft—
Have you any bread ? No, I have none. I have no bread.

1^4 TRT 4 Noun ‘bread’ srPr ipn ^ riftr qtft no sm I,

i

none Tft ?T4t?I f?ra—l have nonr bread. He has rone money,
fft Ti after
I

5r?l ^ i

^o(e_Noae 4 ft 4 mt 3 vr 1 1 ? I' ft

None Pronoun t, Adjective i ft mm f ft none Pronoun

I, BT Noun, Adjective sift Adveeb1 Webster’s International ftV 1

Dictionary Vol. Ill (P. l662) sift Shorter Oxford Dictionary Vol.
11

{P. 1334) ft ?=r tnftBBWfBBsnsmTraTmirli Pronoun

BT none m
sw tifli t ®ne; not one; nobody «fk Adjective

spa ^
IT— no, not any. eft ft none m Attributive use ^
^ctI BBi Chn TT

“I have none other disease than a swelling in my legs." —swtft

jR>r ft none *T AttribuUve use Tff TBfft ftftt srw^ ft

none 4'*TTft no m btPi dai k. TT none ci Predicative

use snft «ft fiai f,

rfriTFrl—
“Remedy
.

there was none." — HOBBES

 ADJECnVES 87

it flt Hobbes none ci Predicative use ctb

?? i «rf Adjective nti I wfa^^'ff^rt jtt^n

^ifn I fffe T5r «tWT jf Remedy there was none.

Hope
there is none—‘none’ Adjective «i 5t i, ^tf fiT 1 7 % ?r5l

gt'TC Adjecti\c i I

EXERCISE

Q. Correct the following sentences—

ta) \ have bo any booV. (b) I have not some money. He has any M
books, (d) I have little rice and sol shall give you len seert. (e) He has spent

aUnVemOBtj hehad. (0 Vou have nooe books, (gl You have a little books,
(h) There were not less than twenty persons, (il I did not know his whereabouts
and so had little difficulty in finding him out. ()> He is too busy to attend to
some work.
lfhas—(t) no book or not any book; (b) any money or have some money;
(e) some, (d) a little; (e) the liiite. <0 no, <g) a few. <)> fewer than; (i) a little,
(j) any wotk

Role Vll. ‘AH', 'Whole’ and the Noun

All % gi? singular st'tg plural gtvff ^ tot i Nouns an ffnVr gl tubst
i 1 arg all & (quantity) g>t grai jr gsri; gig Singular Material
Iff Abstract Noun ernit i. gr atg (number) tsi ^rtr t W
Plural Common Noun «r, —
All tbe money is spent. All the boys have come.

Whole iw ^ ftjigvt

Noun ^ stm gtar I, Plural art «vft

I fimen aig at ‘^tt’ (all) i^ai I, IT ini gig «?t
Singular 3^—
The whofe money is spent.
The whole book has been finished.
The whole plan is defective.

JR! all
trft

isi
ggr
stntn
book 3; ggj books ^
plan % ge^i plans an ning
^TgiggaT, gulf* whole i gjg books wtr plans
gtai, a)
g;i ggjjr
ar^tPn i

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentetKes—
(s) The whole resoljtioas were put to vote (b) The whole acts are full
of defects, (c) The whole colleges are overcrowded, (d) The whole sonnets of
Shakespeare are fine poetry.

Hmfs—"Use'an the’ instead •the whole’ or use Singular Nouns.

 —

ss H(IW TO WRITE CORRtCT ENOLHIl

PROPER ADJECTIVES
Role I. Proper Adjrrllvn Rmi Capitjl Ertfm
^ Adjectives Proper N'oun fr J rfrr rrey capiut
letters wttn? f^tn»rTT j, 5ft—
It isan Indian game but that is a Russian one.
This is Indian, not European.

T^ aoef Jf Indian, Russian itri European ^ inposTT capital letter

^ US J I ^r? »{Tt It *R«r fcTt »rTi. tfV «t «TTS tnm rpt i

DEGREE OF ADJECnVES
f«7A rq ff g«t frtprf «Trn (Degree) if f »5»it grsrttJf ^ ft
Degree of Comparison i i ar irm tftsr ff«TT ftffr (a) Positive,
(b) Comparative, and (c) Superlative.
«rf? Adjective ct g i vir t it^ rt, tft ^ Positive Degree rt% ?, aft—
He is a good boy.

srfe rr t*) tn «t k ^ at vtg i

tc) g«ff oft fft 9% Comparative Degree cp Rim 5&—
Ram is better than Shyam.
It is more useful than beautiful.

SR? ^
*nr rsr fr sr*nK
«rf^
mgar at «ifRRrt
m fr»% «Jr gs I.
i gRj
»ft
«T?f

sft Superlative
I” frt ?
Degree R5&
^
I, aft—
He is the best boy.

(A) COMPARATIVE DEGREE

Rale I. Scope of Comparathe Degree

^ jn mg^fr ^ flr« Comparative Degree n^pi t «tr ^ m

(r «ff^ ?! Superlative st 1 refer fee ?t mgsft in ssfesf ?> fev Super-
lative Degree snrtn sftr S wfew % fev Comparative Degree si infts
»ra«T li^r f—
This is the best of the r>w» fwoftj.
Which iseasier to leam French, German, or Spanish ?

irm tc? mss ? better wYc 55^ ? easiest «i 1

s? pr

“IPAen two Subjects ore Arhted A/ ‘or’ or 'nor' the verb agrees in
person with the Subject nearest to U. —J- c. nesfield
 •

AIMECnVES 89

Jf Subjects ^ ippfi 5{ i WVt rifirt nearest 5:

ntarct (Comparative) t

EXERCISE

Q. Correcf fJie Jolhvlttg senunees—

(i) W'hich u the best of the two boy* t (bj Thi* i» the most popular of my

t»o books, (c) Which is worse— iniokinfc dtiokinjs or gimblirg (d) Which is "I

the Vest— meat ot fish 1 (e) Which ot the two do you like roost— the spider or
the bee 7 (f) Of the three he i* more clever.
WnM—
{») It hetief; (b) Is more; tc) the worst; {d) is better, (e) more.
(f)the cleverest.

Rule II. Unequal Coniparalire

Tt? etrf^qf qt Tfgrfr it ^ Comparative Degree a)

ettfsel qi tK) Pt5 CT & trwr *1 riril S w
t^I than lhaa ^ n?,
The elimate of Chapra is belter that tfiai of (or better than the
climate of) Patna.

Jr(! Tt ^Vifr afr ^

55RI »nrt I— Chapra cr climate sftr Patna eri
climate ttf ’wi i ^ w J| Chapra «t climate Patnafeclimate
ft tPCT 1 1 «ft: rf Tiw ^ ww w treit e—
The climate of Chapra is belter than Palna, nl qt: srstts:

q? %st angt t ^ Chapra % cUoiale g5Rt ?ttt Palna % (Patna ^

chinate & tr^T) ^ rral 1 1 ftwi ^ ew ft si^ sprat 1 am sftr 3—
My shirt is better than you.
The crop is better this year than last ytar.

TKf ai?it 3 Swri shirts ^ 55R1 aiiHrai ^ttui J— ^ roy shirt

^ your shirt i sfl^, w your
tn^ ’tTtt
shirt ik you ^ sniVi
nqi ^ I TBtt *tBt J bs ira silr my shirt ^ «ftr you.
f5 CP?ii?77 Jiffhr fbn f, aiffPs shirt you ^ gsrtn ?ft art ^ awaV

My shirt is belter than yours (your shirt).

Trff s«TT jnt 7W7 If geRi ^ nuT ^ ‘ew tri^ «V ijsirf’ (the crop of
this year) & ‘rra su ^ ifrrra’ (the cropoflast year) 11^ 575^ ^
>nep i Ps crop sfR year ^ tfti t*rfeic ra ^
tr^TT ftfam —
The crop oi tVis year Is better than vhat it was last year (or
belter than the crop of last year).
 1

90 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGUSII

5rt Comparative Degree m sirt'i frt ^TRiTRt & jj? ^

^ifl^ ^sTr % «ti fif i TcRI
?iT ^ Tt STTT 5 etc ^ fas’ sftc than 3i ai?;
i

sr^ 3i^ Noun ?r

Pronoun itt uiR tS. wtf% W >J5r cta> j i TEft jjet ^ Un-
equal Comparative t j

EXERCISE
Q. CorreeS the following sentences —
(a) The climate of Bihar is belief than Bengal. <b) The rainfall m Bengal is

heavier than Bihar, (c) My shoes are finer than you. (d) My home is farther than
be. (e) My covs give more milk than your brother, (f) The power-house of
Chapra is bigger than Arrah. (g> My land is more fertile than you.
HlMi— (a) than the climate of Bengal, or that of Bengal; (b) than Ihe
rainfall in Bihar or that in Bihan (c) yourshoes oryours: (d) than his or his
home; (e) than your brother's, or those of your brother; (f) than that of Arrah;
(g) yours, or than your land.

Rale III. Tlie Sign of Comparatire Degree

nr syllable k Adjective (»eh w adjective Ob? nm-nR JCTl

*Tk TTt sr^ *n irkl ? ‘f’ or ‘cr* apiwr Comparative Degree Tsrrft apfr ii

Ik— small— smaller, tall— taller oifc i

n V k f''*' syllables « Adjective 9 more oi less ernm «k

Comparative Des«c *'*•

beautifu1~more beautiful (or less beautiful),

d. fe ^ ‘tl Adjectives ^ fiRvt Comparative Degree strsRfiR rr

(irregular way) <r mr ?. 5k—
bad— worse,
good— better
many— more r^ife i

Role IV, ‘TIisb’ and Comparitlse Degree

Comparative Degree * n? Coojunrtion ‘than’ «i 4V''r fiRt vi'fT,

from I'e Cl *r^, l»T—

Ram is more beautiful than Mobao.
You are better thsn be.
foRcf rrc 5 f< iban *i vi’n •!» r^i ^
Adjectivecr Comparative Degree 9 n»i»i-n?i e'e «*f Adjective

Pov tise Degree S r, than «i sc'o r»»t sr* »pf 1

 1

AmECTlVES 91

- Pakistan ismuch backward than India.

Sohan is much wealthy than Ram.
than % siPt arlt Adjectives ‘backward’ tpn ‘wealthy’ Posi-
tive Degree if 1 1
much ^ more «i nvVr ^sti i

art w than *a w>«i ^

^ ft Comparative Degree stff
rreffl, Adjective ^
»fl Comparative Degree ski "Wte* 1 ^
Note — rw 5r?s*r if sr5
^ ft than ^ str^ siif Adjective

^ Double Comparative ^ ^stwt l *1? srat t ft: Comparative

Degree
svW
5; ^ ‘r’, ’er’, ‘more’ rflt Hess’ i
more
i Pnnrg^nr rrif &
more stronger srif?
^
Cl <tc tr afvc ci srff i vtrfjpt better,
>rcK ^ Comparative Degrees •wi?' i
‘Better’ eilt ‘stronger’ Compara-
tive Degree ^ V ft i fer more less set envt^cai ft V5i ^ ? ?1. Com-
parative Degree S; <r?rf much ct ssra?R snv ct tr«^ I; c&—
He is much better than Ram.

EXERCISE

Q. Correct the /offowing sentences—

(a) She is beautifuller (hao her sister (b) You ere mucb bad than he
(e) America is much wealthy than India, (dl You are more lal) than I. (e) You
are more braver and stronger than I. (0 lodta is more tdvinced and cultured
front Africa, tg) He is more handsomer than you.

lUnit— (a) mote beautiful; (b) worse than; t<) mere wealtliy, (d) are uller
(<) are bnver and stronger, (f) than Africa, (g) more handsome.

RuIeY. ‘Than’ and the Case

Than ^ ei? Noun ui Pronoun Nominative and Objective ffnf ft
Cases if n trmi i i aft »iaa if ft Subjects * jajen eft via, nt than 5:
ra Nominative Case cam ft Objects is vfa fiq et than « ry
Objective Case, SS—
you more than f.
fie loves
He lows you more than me.
it ftat ft aiw ^ er rAenj if erft «»tt \ eiaatr »a } fti

He I frsft »> you v> ‘nt Ji v

Mle* ‘you’ ft 1 rt jftpi sfve: c^rr
} I eisa 3 He ft Objects (you eftr me) vt hk rfiit >, ar a?
) ou ft me v?t *>*11 «>ra« eart erm ^ i

Note (a)-aft »m 3 Intransitive Verb r>. nt than * ai? Noun ai

Pronoun p?t Nominative Case 3 artr I. at Transitive Verb apt
ar
Nominative aita Objective fbfl 3 ft fc*ft Case ai sfia ft Rvni > i
 —

92 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH

He is belter than me. He is more beautiful than me. You are

better than her. She is older than him rr?? wgj f j

Note (b)— Intransitive Verb »ft than « vr' Objective Case

rftfT f jwhr
,

Nominative Case tt
vTcT^
wbi
^
?
ft *rm if 1 1 ^ J

“// is greater than they **

— T. s. euot
"Your husband doesn’t believe you are older than I”,
NORJIAN LEWIS —
"Little does she realise that lam more widowed ihaa she.”
SIAHATMA GANDHI YOUNG INDIA, APRIL 26 :
,
'28

EXERCISE

Q. Correct the folloMing sentences —

(a)He Is better than me. (b) You are mere loiellisent tbsn me. (e) She is

older than him. (d) Youerestrongeraod wiser Ibso him- (e) My brother is taller

than me.

W/irs—(a) I; (b) 1; (c) he; (d) be; (e) I.

Role VI. ‘Much' and ‘Far’ and Conparalire Degree

Comparative Degree « Adjective « rm much vt far err wtn 51

f, «iT very srebr srj*; 5?r—
He is much better than you.
He is far wiser than I.
atR^t a better s'V; wiser i much sftr far «i svbi

5sn J srI 5* i I «nri much 41 far » very ci ffaVt yfffi—

He is very better than you.

He is very y^iser than I- — fft ft vtvv srra: t

Rule VII. Comparison of Qualities

eft ^ seftr wi a*g « el 3^1 (qualities) e'f

*t»!
Adjective * vrft more nrles* *isrrm fi^ t sfrrthan* atq utft

Adjective Positive Degree if rm f vft— ;

hlohan is more brave than good.

Ram is more good than snteHigeni.

vrT vrft am W fi ft
Mohan « et *jat (heave
 more w sroW jsri 1 ®?T more good %
1
betler more brave ^
well biavt w 5fl>i sHft >

wt? ’I? to; Ta syllable i ‘r’ sjT 'ei' smiaiT s«n %

afw syllable i Adjective if more «i less g^nrr Comparative Degree
5r7?ft 3T? S57r-sr5rT ^ S'* 35RT ^
anft fj

Ram is better than Shyam.

Ram ntr Shyam % gsRi »nft I sft^ ^^ ^
good «T Comparative Degree •better’ srabr jrn ^ Jrrr rtt^ tT%'T if n i w
a^r ’ii^ rs— than Sk Adjective «t asibr e^r syllable J: ^
Adjective «i «ft Comparative Degree more less anm stim m
I «tf; than « vk Noun »Ii Rronoon aii?i, Comparative Degree
^rwtty! ^ agmt k —^ syllable % Adjective if ‘t' Jtt ‘er’ anro;
wIt si^ ft sRffi Syllable 5: Adjective if more irt less anwr:
Ram is belter than Shyam.
Ram is more good than wise.

^57 aril vivir if than k ar? Noun ‘Shyam’ sn^t 1 1 rtri^ vgr Com*
parative Degree ‘better’ v:t sratn 5«n I, jst xrtn if than 5; ai5 Adjec-
tive ‘wise’ «rm? i, Noun «n Pronoun siff i r^fsre good 4 Comparative
Degree if ‘more good’ ri aabr {sn better vsi sr^ i
«nt: ^ rw sf^s f—
You are wiser than good.
The book is better than cheap.

5gl whet i; mote wise iwt better i exit more good en sreht
gWi I
ay »fr m? w f« ^ wi?«> if that S; eix mif toi Adjective
tt?i Positive Degree if xiai 1

EXERCISE

Q. Correct the foilowl/tg «ntMc«—

(a) ttao IS itrongcc than braver. (b)That book is cheaper than betler.
{c)You are sironger than wiser, (d) This flower is eeddec ihin whiter, (t) He n
bolder thaa wiser. (0 This house is finer (ban Mronger.
iTmir— (a) more strong than brave, (b)inore cheap than good, (c)
more
strong than wise; (d] more red than white; (e) more bold than wise; ff)
more fine
than strong.

Rule Vin. ‘As* & ‘Than* and Corapniative Degree

TIT? ? g?mi i ftiv a* than <hff vt atibr n't as ^
TIX st^ «i^ Adjective at Adverb % vr? w: sfVx ss (as as),
ftre V* ^ as »rr jtxI; Stf—
 1 — —
Ram is beUtr and vise than Mohan.
You are braver and strong than I.
^ Jf ‘better’
‘braver’
Comparative Degree if
Comparative Degree h
qr ‘wise’ Positive
‘strong’ Positive
rf i

if 1 BOT f5tatrT3?iTr wise 5; ???» wiser nar strong stronger <iii sraVr

I
Superlative Degree i Adjective % arr ‘ft apj cr^ri

He is the braxest and strongest man.

Icis the best and avsesr plan.

lative
h ^
Degree
VTvq
ri 1 1
55 ,

«tv
,

w
and & aft
^
«i^ <cW iff Adjective Super-

He IS the bravest and strong man.

It is the best and wise plan.
This is the surest and intelligtnt way.
h a»fr rrqit I, vJtff* whq; S ts: Adjective Superlative Degree
I qt |titT Positive if f^qinamr qlsff it Adjective ifI Superlative
—
I

Degree if r^JiT

Thists the juresi and most inteIHgear way.

qq rrw 55 w'l’ftr ^ Adjectives, ‘surest’ wk ‘most intel-
ligent', Superlative Degree if ^ i

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the /olloH-ing sentences—
(a) I am bolder and brave than be. (b) Tbia plan i» be.ier acd easy than
ibat. lOThis la the cbeapesc and safe courseol action. He isthe wisest and
brave maa, (e) Thu bouse is fiflet and strong than ihat.
(a) braver; (b) easier; («) safest; (d) bravest, (e) stronger.

Rale X. Comparative-cam SiipcrlaliTe

nfe qn It »n ^ gavit qq; «tf« ai qft

g?mi 3tr qsi 5 : tt>ft (all) aqfjsqf at ^ qua Superlative Degree

if fcqr srmi t, hi than I; enh aft Noun qt Pronoun i other ci
else Vvi saVi sarq chri wifgv, Sh
Ram is better than all other students.
I like U better than any other book.
You are better than anybody else in the class.

aqi awn if Ram ^ ^pn B»ft It ^ mft 1 1 rtql fh'R ?!

sirfWr aft gshi ;rfl nal i 1 rartw all ^ aw other ct nftn 5111 ft sia^w
 n«f> r«ii«r » tin •, f>Hl nt /t ft’Trr * »Tri sTft I rf:rr> Tit7 jf yoD
7ft tvft (anybody) /t J » «7: 77! el« m 0717 577 > 1 7^ 1^7
n7f »f th.m k trr wtJ ar) all. anybody, anyone, everybody mifr * in
other 71 cite «? «7^, wiani afj »nfJ5 nv'f, 5^—
Ram it better than all iiudentt.
I like it better (ban any bnok.
You are better than mybajy in the clatt.

7»! all net any < *7? other m'.r anybody % rr? elte t*! 77:7
mrri I

Note— «n n 71? m fkc than i err Noun rpt 77 other e; r'Tt

qr Pronoun qr elic atr. i»t— all other bookj, any other man,
an>or»t t\«, everybody el«, ervybody et« t

«» fu qrrqf *> q*t—

"There ft another ego according to nhose acilon the indiridual Is

reeogftlzahle, u hleh needs a deeper sense than any we hate been used to

exercise." — D. H. tAtvliESCE
"The world of our dally life is more man-made than at any peal-
OUS epoch." —BERTRAND RUSSEU
"Yet Marx is a Strong force In the world, siTongtt than any
had In the past." —Tiic Modern Review, Feb. *j7

71^ %t(t
jsr a any
Tiqqlf

srO TRit—
J: tit other an RTtn ^ ^tffq 1 fnwm it

"Milton handled blank terse in a uay which no one has ever ap-
proached. . and In so doing he did more than any one or any thins
.

—
.

to make it impossible for the drama." T. s. EUOT

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following aenrencej
(a) He is wijer tban anybody lo Ihs town, (b) You are taller than all stu*
dents of your class, (c) I like tu’oi better than any mao. (d) He is more
iotelUgecit than any student of bis class, (e) This book is better than aoy on the
subject.

^
~ - J/ints — (a) anybody else; (b) all other, (c) any other; (d) any other, (e) any
 Preferable Adjective t finii qfil. Latin comparative

Jilfe, more qi less vr? S than ^ Jiqh srql i

iban %
?3:it i(TO to vrr
—
This is preferable to that,

srft: pr ^ —
This is more preferable than that, JTf sr^ rnrpT t

EXERCISE

Q. Correct the foUowing sentences—

(a) This book is more preferable than that, (b) Thai ,jlan [it more pre-
ferable than this (c) Milk is preferable than egg.

ffinrr—(a) is preferable to that, (b) is preferable to this; (c) is preferable

to egg.

Rule Xn. XomparatWely’ andCompasaliveDegtee

qft Adjective rrr Advcib k qfil comparatively rrt? ^ sbl'i

t?l qq Adjective at Advecb Positive Degree ii tTni %, Comparative ft

I am comparaiively welt to-day.

tive qi
qfit rt comparatively better fa® ii>
Adverb vfl Comparative Degree if roat
^
ft (ft
i aft Adjec-
comparatively
rtq w tpfttr w
Adjective Adverb ^ «ft?l as *T. m
I am better to-day.

ittftq «iq comparatively well ftra qi better,

er^S ^w «hft 1^ faviYi aift aO q«ii—
trt tftsTt »Ttf» aaJftt

"If was, oj course comparatively easy for Burke to accept the

English Ccnjfi/ufjon as pari of the order of riature." —bash, Willey
"This IS comparatively easy.” —CHRISTOPHER caudwelt.
*tr am ft comparatively easy «i rr^ 1 qcr easy ^ easier
— li?
1 vir

^ ft st^5 ^ vrpit I srv Ttr RRq ^

“ that an advance against Government securities now
becomes comparaliicly higher or costlier,”
The Eastern Economist, Feb. 8, ’57
H. w. c. E.-7
 —
Q. Correct the following seniences—
(a) How are you ’lam compitMively better today, (b) This method
comparatively easier and safer, (c) That plan is comparatively cheaper.
Hints— (a) I am better or comparatively well; (b) is easier and safer
comparatively easy and safe; (c) is cheaper or comparatively cheap.
Rule Xin. ‘The’ and Comparative Degree
Adjective Comparative Degree ? sf>r ani: the srr^ <

Adjective ^ tt? Noun Pronoun «i uttt ftfl qr htt of the two srr

This boy is the better of the two.

He is the wiser of the me.
if of i sRf% than aiYr two a three, four wr^ «i
93 J ^ wpR I—
This boy is the cleverer than the two.
This boy Is the cleverer of the three.
This boy is the cleverer than the three.

EXERCISE
Q. Correct (A< Mlowirtg senfenccs —
(a) Youare theiiroReer of iheihice. (b) He is the wiser than the two.
(c) Ibis IS (he finer than (he three. <d) This plan is the better than ail.

Him— fa) stronsest of the three; (b) wiser of. (e) finejt of the three; (d)

better of the two or best of all.

Rule XIV. Latin Comparatlm

j?! u& Adjectives ? a> Latin 3 un ^ i
rv? Latin comparatives
•Tt »l’ri } —senior, junior, prior, posterior, superior, inferior net

anterior. rr» more ei less «j sstn stO rw rflr ert H5 to «t

i

sralir rrm than ct •y'* Hit; 5ir—

I am senior to him.
He is Junior tame,
nr. srn ^3 em 3 f3^
He is more superior than me.
You are wore junior than him.
T3* tja rt it

He is superior to me.
You arc ywsior to him.
We — ri[ ift Latin comparatives ? »> srr Comparative Degree
ij cwrsc Htt f« nik I I3cr »i‘’3 «f ire Positive Degree if srm^ finn
 ^ ftai J I «ii: lo »rftn ^^ ,^&—
It is a major operation.
It is of minor impotlancc.
I have no ulterior motive in doing this work,
pr ^ major, minor tmi ultenor «T seVn Tosilive Degree tf

5 sn Comparative ij nfl vttf?? ^ to i nern ^5&— cr etvr rt ^

^
i

t «TRt? it TtW Noun ^

He is a minor. You are a major
snfi; i

«iT «rT i f« major wtr minor »ii (rjin senior «Vt junior

^ me ComparalWe Degree it «r<ft «> vtfS «i[ n artrt i i—

He IS major to me. You are minor lo him.
EXERCISE
Q. Correct the follav.ing senienees —
(a) Your position is superior than hit (b) Sha'cespeare's plays are more
tupetior than Shaw's, (c) You ate more luoior than me. (d) I am more senior
tbao him. (e) My status is more superior Chao yours.
Hinrs— (a) superior lo; (b) are superior lo; <C) are junior to; (d) am senior
to; (e) IS luperlorio
Role XV. Degreetess Adjective

59 ij^r Adjectives ^ tro Positive Degree S fr rpr 5“ i

vstsi

Comparative 9i Superlative Degree f « I'— absolute, perrect,

i

complete, entire, full, whole, chief, extreme, unique, excellent, right,

wrong, circular, annual, moolbly, vegetable, mineral, milky, blue,
goldeo, lunar, solar, oblong, round, square, universal, impossible

Note— w Ttvit 5; tn?=? if rmi ft «f^i ^ ftr strn fWret ^

ei'tsft Ttsft (style) sft spiwTiRft ^ ftpt W {siest if «tlsi Tirf^w *>
wgf^iT sTfl I RTfec sm ITS fullest, more perfect, most perfect, most
impossible, most universal treift BWft nrtn ffi ^l ftrait S' i fi?

“In the plays of Shakespeare a musical design can be discovered

in porlicular scenes, and in his snore perfect plays as wholes.''

— T. S. ELIOT
“Decorum
is the most universal of all she rules." bxsil svilley —
“Bui there are other things in Pilgrim's Progress besides the most
perfect representation of Evangelical religion."
o. m. trenti-YAN —
and (Air fuller kind ofcriticism is w/iaf we desire."
—I. A. RICHARDS
 . t'ui ineplaXt tfif Sfiat/<n\'y H’alrfs, serntJ to me one oj
mou perfect expreu(an of the tat^e tnehantrd beauty oflhaischo
T. s. n —
fJt tf flr »q? J f« vrwr? full sV perfect ^ Degree i
•nr J ?ff TiTl snf^n J l tf, 5^ nifr ? wV fH’t^ Adject
?, 3^f I Bq't'i Comparative in Superlative 3 sn: fsrm » «f:

smri Degree vaw vit sr|1 «i i

(n) SUPERLATIVE DECREE

Rule I. Scope of SaperUdtc Degree
Superlative Degree rt o^lir ^ & wfvc wfwvf «i a*5Tf ^ r?m fR
el i mr *rr7 , a&—
Me is the Aesr student ofhis class.
He is Me tv/rerr of all.
tu fTO—
He is the best of the two students.
He is the wisest of the two men
hI if etfif ^55 s9 f«j|t OJ i Superlative «t
cl wc”! rT«?ri; cl « fa? tft Comparative Degree «t whi J 1

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentences--
(aj Which is ibe easiest to leara— Enslish of French 7 (b) SVh/eli a t

easier to learn— English. French or Oerman 7 (c) Ram « tbe bravest of the ft
men. (d) He is wiser ihao all. <e) Which eotour do you like more— red or blue
j
green? (0 Which of the twodoyow like mott— meat or fish 7 (g) This is tl

youngest and most intelligent of my two children.

like tl
Hints— (i) IS easier; (b) easiest; (c) braver; (dj the wisest of, (e)
most; (f) like more; (g) younger and more intelligent.

Rule If. The Signs of SuperlaliTe Degree

Adjective ax Adverb S f
ct: syllable i *st’ Rt 'esf giriST stir

syllable i Adjective uiAdverb 3 most «rt least amanc Supcrlatiit

Degree tpnfl ^n?fr ct ‘at’ tfl? most (least) cVr! ^ ^n«t srIR

ijsr I I CR RIRCT ^
He is the wisest tnaiu
She is the roost beautiful girl.
wise ^ wisest >nnf t. »lc beautiful ^ most beauiifu .
jjcf
^
Atm m syllable ci Adjective I «flc |«ttt & sfes syllable sr 1
 He is the most wfiert mao.
She is the beaulifulest ptl.
S most ^ ‘est’ ft «o iPtk ^ {^i nsi I, «fV

Wise syllable ^ Adjective J I fH»n Superlative Degree

‘esV ii jra 1 1 tt «if^ syllable ^
Adjective, ‘beautifur Superlative Degree ‘esf ^ »JrT?T 'Hi f, ^ *>^5

Vi tr5lrriosi^jirTm^t5n^if?i atn B ^ i

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the folloMng seitlenees —
(a) He is tbe most strongest man. (b) This is (he usefulest book (c) This
isthe wholesomest food. Id) This IS the most ivorst story (e) George Herbert's
Grace is the most finest poem
/rifl/T— (a) tbe strongest: (b) (be most useTuI, (c) the most whoesolme,
(d) the worst; (e) the finest.

Role ni. ‘The’ and Superlative Degree

Superlative i «tSi the rr «ni)n r^i

He is the best boy.
This is the most important passage for explanation.
tbe it finn I fad sid—
He is best boy.
most important passage, m h stt ^ «T?r
This is i

Note (a)— eft: Superlative Degree Possessive Adjec-

tive (my, our, your, her) vr Possessive Case (Noun *f ’$ pn) wrb,
fit Superlative Degree i Adjective i the *n artn *nff gt ^rrtrT,

ir-
itis my best dress. It is Ram's best pen.
tnct Superlative Degree ‘best’ i cun' my sV Ram's sta t \

urT the ci uxk utT jvT i I nerviilfthe cr auln tr»V

fftr I

Note fb)— cvft-cwt Superlative Degree ct uem very ^ Jf gtar

4 I rmd
It is
if Adjective
most unfortunate.
% ^ the ki inW gt^r, 5^!—

Rale IV. ‘Mach’, ‘Very’ and Sapevlatlse Degree

Superlative Degree 3: nS much ui very «t trjVt p nr-n 4, l»t—

You are much tbe best man in this village.
He is the rerj best boy of his class.
 one ofthe wisest men if not the svisest (mao); (b) one of the
most learned men if not the most learned (man); (c) one of the greatest thinkers
if not tbt greatest (thinker). W> one of the gteate« religious teachers it not the

greatest (religious teacher); (e)one of the best books if not the best (book).

Note— ?R5I gm Singular Noun siiW bracket ff sr ffra

Superlative Degree ^ ft to »

1.
Rale VU. Some confusing Comparatives and Superlatives

f T fS ^
Adjectives if ^ fiRT^ tr^rtn ^ f5 Hif^ I—
Elder and eldest^ older and oldest.
Elder «ftr eldest snitn nc ft qftfR % an at»i1 i ftrr ftn)

t tn: older 5: rr than ^ nrirt gint 7i ^ fetir rhn 1 1 'll

TO elder »k: than tpttn rift feai ^ta older i; aif (^i *rRtt I.

My elder brother loves me much.

My eldest brother is the head of the family.
My friend is older than I.
This U the oldest tree here.
XU »T»ft ^ elder ^ older sftf older « ffll elder err «ra>'7

fifli I

2, Farther and /urther— Farther «n ws fini I ‘sifirK p' Imorc

distant), tR ‘further w ‘«fiw p* sfK (additional) ffsff ^ I:

Chapra Is farther from Sonepur than Cultenganj.

We saw a temple on the further side of the bill.
Furlker argument is not required,
etf ffll ? farther sftf pi^ aiff 8 further en sfra ii

«w h tfret RWf if further w train wfeftnn ii «a if |in ? i

“/4 rough duriVrCf/on Is this : farther, farthest are applied to

tfijfoflce and nothing else; further, furthest, either to distant or to
addition." — Ektc p#>.trioge

“....The most that should be said is perhaps that fMhtt is not

common except where distance is in guestton." foweer
3. Nearest and nex/— Nearest d *p' (distance) w eW rTiTT I, <fT
next % 'wm' (order) wtf

What is the nearest market ftom your home 1

He is my nearest relation.
I sat H«r to my friend.

We are next door neighbours.

 4. utu ana /a(ctt~lAil 'fim* «T
—
latest ‘earjiesi
m 1 infsTf last (i *>n« « wa (orifer)«^ jtm }, latest (t1m«
«t; sJft-
l am the h%t man to beat this insult.
What is the laie$t newt about Egyi^t ?

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the foHotvtn^ tenleneet—
(a) Thti (empte (s«Ucr than ttuc. (tiHIeiseny older bf other, (c) Voi
are itie eldest man of (his village, (d) Darbhanfj it further Ifoin Patna thar
Chapr.1 (e) No farther ditciution it allowed. (0 tVhat it the laietl day foi
fee-cyl)eetion 7 (gj I wat the fint man to tupport (hit retolutioo but you wen
the latest
/fttirr— (*) older, <ti) elder, (ct oldeil; (d) farther; (e) further; (f)

(l) last.
5. Later latter — Later ‘late* cr Comparative Degree irr

latter 'former' cr fftrfr<TW* i »»ta af «is J later & fnr? (time) «T

^ «rlT latter sjt trr raja (order) aff—
You came later than he.
Shakespeare and Milton are great poctsbwt I prefer the for-

mer to the latter.

vrf em *f latter tftr jnt S later ct stth f)?n t

tf. forater and latter— at H &;g?T ift *3^#! m ftjsjf w wW

^rar I, tft former «t «?t>r J sVr pr i ftR latter wr; ^—
Keats and Shelley are romantic poets but the former is

greater than the falter.

ffr aTR Jf ?t> (Keats Shelley) eft 1 1 s»tf^ <tT^ i
former «fk ^ ftw latter *net ^ «ffl e> % (tfw-wrt)

^^
fipt

arfttffl si til fonner sDr latter ^ jrV mp i *fft ai?RT

Jfformer % assl first «t sik latter i e^Jast ea otV t *07 ffr

itsiisrs—
“TAe latter should nor be used when more than a pair are in

question....” —FOWLER
"When oneof three or more indhiduab,the
the reference is to
'

First, not the Former, should be used”

fowler —
sm: erw % S3*nr 3r sgs f
the
Wordsworth, Keats .and Shelley are romantic poets, but
former is greater than the latter.
ttr am S' akr «i wr J i ^ former ^ et"
first «T «fk latter 5r last wr whr ft:?? i
 —
ADJCCTtVES 105

7. FtVsf and lasi—im f« mn 'rai I, s'? if ^ & arfira

?*3 sif i?;t =5^ ^ fe? first «T sfrx sfrn? ^ last

^
«iT

former latter sRT 5&—

Wordsworth, Keats and Shelley arc romantic poets buttle
Jirst is greater than the fast.
former w last % latter «t STfln sgfafi
rttf«
tiff first 5; *?:&

W ?T??
s^rfftal fft ata fhfr.
^ n'H
tit former
^ ^
etlf latter
I, ^
«t mil?
=ts^i
slur, first stir
551
flfiT.

d?'
last ri

I SI? Ttt ?T?? ^

“There was a second triumvirate of Lepidus, Mark Antony and
Octaw'aj Caesar, the latter the nephew of Julius Caesar"'
— H. G. WELLS
jjff latter i last iwln slrn ^rf^. a1? atf?*!?! ?fT

sU.
EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentenees—
(a)The Gitj, tbeQoorsnand (beBiUeareertai books but the Tormer is
• older than the Utter. (b}The lodian civihration and tbe Creek eiviliration are
very old but the first is older than the last, (c) Rats, Sbyan Mohan are good
and'
punters but the Un«( is a SKSteranKt than rtiefomtt td) Covd EnsUsh and
Better English are very good books on Grammar but the last is not as good as the
first, (e) He eane Utter then bis rather.

Hlnff—ii) first——lest; (b) former latter: (e) lest finii

<d) latter former; (e) Uter.

REFRESHER COURSE!
Correct the following seniences~
These roses smell sweetly
1.

2 These kind of things are bad

3. Which IS the best of these two *
4, Which IS the least of these two evils '
S Is he stronger than any mao living t
6. Is he not the wisest of atl other man ?
7. Keats is superior than Shelley.
8. He has the sweetest voice than any other singer
9. The populatwo of China is greatei than any country.
10 Thisis the most unkindest remark

tl. Hotbing can be more Cheaper than ibis

12. Is he the wisest of all other man?
1 3. Is your scheme preferable than mine ?
14. Not lets than one hundred men were killed.
15. It is most unique.
 17 t fjrt^«r
I* tM ttift »t9 fiv^}
19 U( Kfre f'i I in rtxtdil
WiH t-ttie hop* nf Jin irc'’»f rj
U I "ill rv'f Nif ».'»nn fijfi

22 I huti I Jn"** ttMhinC

2< Mf i« •*n*IVf ihjn fitVr r/hl« l^rM tprinrn
24 i« h« IV nhlni of IV !•<« ^rr(^<'i ?
25 Urnnrr f^tt
2« TV«e loit of »jii ai* iliH H rj«riion
27 TV Ian firtt ratM ar* Mint
21 A dill 14 lalfifr ISan arir an»ra5
29 tit It m >f* IrarwJ hut not to t*«fnn«tSIe at hit father
>0. You arc at rwA ntnn tkVr thifl I

}(. NtiiVf (otJt tte taft.

J2 WTikhitthf Viftrofihtthnanifthoili?
51 Tlvlt buftdit tt (htta bmtt Vaaitt (ban that.
24, Me II Voer than tty li*in( mai).
IS. Of (hcihttt, mtat. fiihandimlk. ihaUtut it tny fatouiise.

fffius— t. : ihiotiofttut hind; j. the better. 4. the kuer. 5. anf

other niatU A. all men: 7. turerior lo; S. tweetrr voice than ihji of anjr other uottr:
he
9. than iVt of any other coufitry; 10. the unklntJctt or the moit unlMSd; il-
cheaper than: 12. the wiieti of all mea or Miaer than all other meo: 12' toiiuM;
14. No fetrrr chan: IS.itumoue; 16 older than; 17. further; IS. Ihefint three:

19. eommon friend. 20 a little: 21. any ftih; 22. done anything; 22. the eroat*** ef
hit three eouvni; 24. older of; 25. to. 26 the tun of thu ten it, or thi* wrl ci
tuil it: 27. The 6riti»o:2>. than any oiVr 29. karned than; 30 as
nchw
35. the
31. roadli; 32 cVbeit: 3). three tine* at heavy at iVt, 34 any other;
tail it.

REFRESHER COURSE H
Explain why the JoUawing senttnets ort eorrtcl or incorrttt
1. He hat not brought tome bread.
2. He spent a iitlk money he had.
3. Will you jive me few r»ce ?
4 Every of the two hoys had a hook.
2. Neilber of the four pens will do.

6. Thit boy is the cleverer than the two

7. He is a worst man.
8. Who is the greatest poet—Keat* or Shelley 7

9. He It the better of the three brothers.

10. He IS the dullest of all other boys.
n Gold is the most precious ofall other metals-
 ADJECTIVES 107

12. He has tnemoryof any other boy.

the shortest
13. The population of Gopalgatu is greater than Chapra
14. Knowledge is more preferable than power.
15. This is the best and powetful engine.
IS. Bombay is one of the biggest if not the biggest cities in India.
17. That book is cheaper than better.
IS. My friend is richer than me.
19. He is more senior to rue by four years.
20. He IS as rich or even richer than me.
21. I have fimshed a few books! bad.
 K K y

(I) very food-Rute I. (2) kJnd enough-Rule 11. (3) very

inlerCilinB— Rule IV (a). (4) much intercrlcd— Rule IV (c). (3) ?«7

inlelligent-Rule IV (a). (6) *{11 go lhe« prcfently— Rule VII.

been ill for a moofi
0) come back juit now-Ru!e VII. (8) lie hi*
—Rule X (i) (9) Three hour* have pa»»ed *in« the patient took

mcdicine-Rulc X (ii>. (10) It I* a week lince hi* father died-Role

X (ii) Note. (I I) I firtl *aw you five year* ago nod have rcmembereii
you ever Itnce-Rule X (ill). (12) rain* fall-Rule XI (i). (13) withia

aweek-Rule XII (ii). (14) ago that-Rule XII. (13) a huodred

j-eari ago— Rule XKI; (l«) allowaWc;
but better than tht* ii-kiudlj

to grant-Rule XVI. (IT) died only

yesterday— Rule XVIH. (18) I aa
quite right or I ant all right— Rule XIX. (19) It is— Rule Xtu)-
(20) I pa*sed-Rule XIV.

( no
 •CHAPTER IV

ADVERBS
Adverbs ^ WH fW! ij 3?1T

Syntax S ^ >rat 4 I «r?f ?if nsi Adverbs iR frw w?fl I fsrJr% suftrr ftrW
nwT I jRiTpn swbi % wS aiK s^m^r ;Vf ^ v?i«t >3^

Rule I. ‘Too’ and the Adjeciwe or Ad»«b

Too 5T vw ^iTt % ‘n?TSR f*r!Pn si?l (mote than enough).
«n^ too veiy i S'? Ji ti^Sn veiy «« I ‘nga’ i

sn vciit ^ I am too gtadto see you. a) cavrr «m

rim—•& 3tiT?;> ^gwT isat ciR*r I fti(i’it a?1 i’

wrr VT 9?— My son’s health is too good, A sw t>»Tr— H sr?^

n wrf*v TtTsn svpr ^ fiissn «^1iriai «trfT i’ snr >!T»ir f ^)i ifr

fmt «!> ^rrr tn ^ jn i ftnn ft 4m aH dt ;ttf arm i mmf ft

fniit ft fJrr sflT fftm «ft too mn very « «i cr |4 mcT 1

sRWTTr t very ftt vrft too «i antn «t «m ^ sTs ^ i taftre
*fTm ^ ^ fti too % ^ «i ih* «Trai mm Sn an ap 1 mn Ta matfi ft

very m »u>t tftaii too art stp—

Ood is too merciful.
This house is too strong.
This flower is loo beautiful.
I write too correctly,
1 love my mother too mueh.
The water of this tubewcll is too pure.
My teacher is too learoed.
Sugar is loo sweet.
My friend is loo good to me.
*ta rw an^f ^^ fStwft loo *i ^f
You are loo weak in English.
It is loo hot to go out.
It is loo cold to-day.
The price of iron is loo high.

( 111 )
 112 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENOLISfl

II is loo much for me to bear.

The house is foo small for my purpose.
You are too late.

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the JoUowing sentences —
(a) I am too glad to meet you. (b) My eon's health is too good, (c) This-
book IS loo good The weather
(d) is too fiae (e) Cod is too kiod to flie.

(0 Peace is too good for mankind It is very hot to play footbaU.

Hints— (a) to; <f> use ‘very* instead of Hoc'; (g) too hot.

Rule II. 'Cooush' and the Adjective or Adverb

Adverb of Quantity ^
trr wct: ifftm 9T trrn »iT
i ? i

Enough SM I, ^
tmi sf (proper limit or amount), ttri
« ?rvT«r ^ sfl? n> yriT 10% ? nn ftf iff Adverb i

^ gn fagrwi t «?(%: ?t«: stpu J ati; 3%—

He was kind enough to help me.
Tbe weather is fate enough for me.
rr fr % enough «i it^'i Adjectives ‘kind’ jibt 'fair' ^ »tT fWU
^ I m*!
He was enough kind to help me.
The weather is enough fair for me.
TR swf % enough w sAm «sr ftsjBvif 5*^ ^
«?Rrm i t

Note— srrt ttf tnr f»in gtf)’! Adjective aft fftf ">

«tc Noun Bii rpi ^ wtr Noun % m

enough loaves; loaves enough anf? i
SJ
SIT T«tci Adverb ct BT BTT Adjectives
Adverbs % »TT SHI 11 % «Kt 5t*T; <
,

enough, ha
good enough, cold enough, bold enough, fast

enough nuir? i
__i, % i ,7 1
rtrr?v STB enough Adjective Bi Adverb % BT%

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentences^
t»> It* runs ejKHijh fast w wimluiw*. (b) ll« b
(JJ
'-",*^*noo»h
»'
do this work, (c) He has acted eoowgh bddJy to deserve praise.
nch to rpmd so much. (e| He wasenoufh good to help me-
(c) botJIy e**®'**
enoogh; (blinlellifeoteaoagh:
(a) fijl
eaoufb; (e) good enough.
 ADN'ERBS 113

RoI« III. ‘Liitlc* and 'A ItKit'

liltic?! a Adverb %nRi:rftnii,n> Adjeciive vft

t. little «t «in ftm VrJ ® “10* *rT ‘vfTi’ i

sr>5 i!t wiR if PT*! XPt! Rfl liV *re *t *R4 f> ?rv!at 1;
Ifl—
Ram failed and va he was lUtte sorry.
•Little sorry' >n S*i f« cw «> ja ^rn Rjl awi i *3i %«i ct
n»i>n J 7 ar rut if f«i nl vai bb fe ’ft jtn aff jw 7 aFfta if ^
ftim AT •n r»; 'vl?! l**’ r“» < wfjrt ail little sorry i a little

sorry «i iRln wfrt tfsrt i

When Ram was banished. Dashrath svas lilile unhappy.

'Little unhappy’ It «t ^tiit i fc *r tta iFf 5*1 ift mw WR
f5 sfl sriT 5?, eft aT«R *1 all 1 stf. ail a little aam
*tPp;i
Note— The little <0 nfw Adverb tft *ffa Rp rfilT i
pfftrr *rt %if

He was the little sorry.

You are the little ashamed.
EXERCISE
Q. Correct the f<}llowin$ tentences—
(<) Intle sorry, (b) When a tiger
Wbrat&edesresi ton died, the fither was
appeared tuddealy, we were liute surprised <c> When the traveller lost hit way
and Wandered for days and nig ris he feh liitle tired. <d) When he felt little hungry
andthinty, heciiedfot help.
Hmit— (a)a litile torry: <b)a liiile aurprised; <e) a little tired, (d) a little
hungry.

Role IV. 'Much' and ‘Very’

Role (a)— Much eti wht Adjectives sftt Adverbs 5; n?fi
^ Comparative Degree 9 rT^ ^ i e? W8 } ft? much ni^ Positive w
Degree if srrT gf troi i Positive E>egree % Adjectives nm Adverbs ^
i

Bt* very ghn i. much

sjoh stiT; 3i&—

Ram is much better tiutn Shyam.

You are much more iaIcUigeot than Mohan,
Ram is very good.
You are very intelligent.
He loves me ^ery dearly.
’ITT sft wmf if much «i sj^fji 5wt Adjective ‘better’
BRI ‘mote intelligent’ Comparative Degree if i 1 «nRv1 if

H. \V. C. E.-8
 IM now Tt> WRirr a>*»rcT cm.i nr
,,tr« Adjcclivci 'gmid- •inicijijtni-
Dcjtct it?, rA«nt,I„,mJAdvr,bii„»>tryr,
’* 'TO Poillive Dcsrtei
V. ”1
n»n AJvcrbj * on »V very «i
Adjtclito
Compjrjnve ? nr'r iji ;r^t w'r i m vosJ
nr *t erJTsr fr^t »w >—
Ram ii muf/i intellipeni.
Vou are t?iuc/i laborious.
She is mt/e/i beaiiliful.

He is rrrj- worse than you.

You ore rrrr stronger than Mohan.
Hee.splained the piemmweAcIearl}.
He walks muefi slowly.
The bool is mwf/, di/Hcult.
RTrel 8 very i tjit much sftr much k sery asm r?i
I

Note— vrr r*r «»«.v arps ii fc sr* much «i wrn Cbmparatbe

Degree * r, «> very cr em much i- «tt% (very much) rr ffw J:

He IS very rttuch stronger than I.

You are very much belter than he.
tt> »tr arrr pr ? ft wry stronger im* ir^ very much
stronger tji \

Rule (b)— Much very «unrp» Superlative Degree

sftr
^ plar
I, «R/r!fr
snx; aif—
if trr stPit: I ft much «t «9>r the ^
very wi the i „
Ram is mue/i the best boy in the village.
Ram is the very best boy in the village,
snr: 5l f
You are the much strongest man.
He is very the strongest man.
Rule (c)— Much sfir very S WVr «IT } ft 'much' Past
Participle ?rt 3»i ^traraif. «fT ‘wry’ Present Participle «t, air—warA

surprised, much astonished, much \e»cd, very distressing, lery interest-

ting, very perplexing tferft «mi J ft «rv Verb If ‘ing’ aiim sfrr
^
i

srr a? Adjective f (Verb ci mv stfT), ffr air Present Parti-

ciple ^ I T?rt Jt^r Verb 9 'ed', 'en* «ift 5mi^ rw ah Adjective
fiTf sTapT I trr Pa*t Participle
1 erw 9 nj- ant 1
^ «n>T er iff ft surprised astonished Past Participle
Participle. reftT Past Participles
? ifir
distressing ?!«tt vexing Present t fttv
much ri sgPt £SI I. tr Present Participles i ?ne very urr tnrr 35r?T i
 —
ADVERBS 115

sTff Present Participles % >TT«r much «ftr Past Particip-

les if: trw very !tft i 5*rf«r<t it ^rpr J—
It is much interesting.
It is much distressing
I am very surprised.
You are very ashamed.
Note—TST sjjin j} srr? a ^ ^ phrases | Participles

t?:% tR »ft much « very ^ si^ln slgr t ver) pleased, very tired, i eri
dejected, very contented, 3?H ni RWIT phrases n?%

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentences—
(a) This question is much difficult but that is much easy (bi You are
much ugly but she is much lovely <«1 He » the tmith best bw of his class,
(d) He was beaten much severely (e) It is much amusinf. (f) He was very
ashamed of his conduct (g) You are very the best hoy. (h) 1 am very
interested in your story
Win/e—(a) very difficult very easy, (b) very ugly very lovely,
(c) the secy best or much the best; (d) very; (el vety; (fl much; (g) the very best
or much the best; (h) much interested

Role V. 'Very mach', 'Too inacb’, ‘Much loo’, aod ‘Only too'

Very much «T « > 'jr n %% too much sftr much too #r Tri
wfVsR frusr sr^T
tim J.too rr
crt «T(r»’ tJv ^ i i Only too B ‘ept’ (very) ri The

I am very much obliged to my fiiend.

I am very much sotry for this boy.
It gives metoo much pain.
It is muck too painful.

1 shall be only too glad to sec you. (= 1 shall be very g’ad to

see you).

m iTfiTT srra ?tj?t > fc only loo «t «m too ^ fvst rwi f sV i

RtssfivsTR^j) qjR J I an <Snfc too much ^ err Noun armt, gr mucli

too ^ ai? Adjective m Participle, ist arsA
lie gave me much loo pain.
It is loo much painful.

trrl eraij if too much mt aV jnV S much too ti arn nm

^ifrt I
 ,

lift I"r> wVtfr f ri*<fr t

Wilf \ I *AI •frrmiOy'. a«i 'fKf«IIy'

At fftitfi! •» •«* ^ r (fof jK« prtwrfit. ii
prrwnt n^'rirrUl. f-ffumly. »r jl.ftcJf/ «f »i j Vif
flcraj) *1 in f* T*t*«flh •» *i at prcvfit vrre.
• 1% in «>iofi
« «Ji»c>.tly «f r'-ft

Dair Ml Rim*
rtrvfiiljr *1 tt'f luturr i firt tMt tf /on nfw
f. »r part
action 4 f-rf, ih
I If A<Jt fr*"/ jt}«t flfm.

I f pfrtccll>.
X<i>*X 4 Rf j ^ —
I th.:lf ex'^ j\t%t BOW.
He Aa* roote feetcntly.

Hale VIII. 'Hard* aod'flardlj*

He ttorkt AW. He Ajn/7r workt.
xri n»7 «i ir>J *er €»> ferte i ore tr» mrrJ*. tt pi «7 *
n } f« '4r era m: wxm’ i

Hardly «r «3 am V scarcely, lofot «n hard rftr hardly cr arp

an? a erB «r I

Rule IX. *Ljle' and 'Lately*

Hecame/ore. He came fore/y.

iT»i o er are elnt i f« '•» ?t ettk; •m*. et pi »5 e? i

•»r r?T el ? (recently) «r7i* i «t: sre «» wna ? ttrsT |t i^m ^ ’

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the /ollovmg sentences—

gave him much Coo ffeedom. (t>) He is loo much free (c) tVhac
(a) I
are you 7 rresenlly I am a aludenL <d» I ahall go just row. (e) He has
gone presently. (0 He want* to stand fint the Univenity etaminatioo and so
m
he labour* hardly, (g) A* the boy came lately, be wai fined.
just
/H/fM—(a) loo much; (b) muditoo; (c)8l pteseni: (d) presently; fe)
non (0 labours hard; (g) came late.
;

Rule X. “nie uses of ‘Since*

Since «T «;?gTC ^ xmn (lime) *Tt% 1:

yii Preposition, Conjunction ^ Adverit tflsff ft

^ rnr^
*

PT fflsif 1; sriWf if "tsw ^ I

 ADVERBS 117

since ^ VTnr cf Preposition s?f^ « Conjunction fm Adverb ^ ftr?

since i; Point of Time (?:» 5)

fn m rt, fft ?rjjiFrHT f« t»TCi ink Preposition ^ fiTir 5 Rt |, lit—
since Monday, since yesterday, since January i

an «fT 51? Preposition <1 «ic tt since i r?

f<riV. fta, rnttsTT tn »i w irfm i f«»t% e? pie in 'W aiftr f fc cni ‘€7

ft’s^^sni
V7 since «7 tr^'m Conjunction «l aff«l fitn k. 57 7*l« ttt Gause
W777 aiflT at—
Seven years have passed siflce I came here,

erf ‘since’ Conjuciion cr cw crni 7f 5r Clauses rt fjRi

m% I 75 7t Clauses «f 77: Gause (I came here), since « rr? wret i i

TP R7,ti en ^5 ? k since ct Rutn tit Conjunction ct 57

since 5: 7R 77; Clause sttt J, 7T t? 7»rtl 7715 Preposition ^ mT ftm I.

B7 7*t>: 77T 7« Noun «r-n Gause htI i

917 since 7:1 wpi Adverb «! 7rj rtfl i. 57 7r ptuuitti tttu «

>1 wi^T } I Vlt rni if 5T srn jm rt 7T •ttI ? f« erf 75*1 a^n Adverb
^ 5T7 571 1 1 eft since « 7^ ever i»ni si (ever since). sft 7r»?75 *
sftr ift TTRTift ftifr, eeffc tt f5*<»957 Adverb iim 1 rr rsn W)r ifr eu
rS I eft sm H f« since it 5 Clause ij*: 1)71 i«V 5 tw* «? «ti
ftft 7t ftR et *fw 7'inft 7:1 WTR srtm i, «t wTS "m* S f« erf since «t
arm Adverb €1 Air 571 1
SI7 f7 since i aek'f er fewnstsV feett *> 1

tt) Sioee ; As a PrtposWoa

vik sTtn Ttil er 0) since » er^ Present Perfect,
Preposition e)
Past Perfect tt Present/Past Perfect Continuous Tense wtst i. u'fr (lit
inir (sin« «t tit ti^ vti mreifTT rse (ri. mki, f<5 I'nfel «itt i fvnA

Tt 7'rt 7511 1 fe; 77 tit Tt 5’ (from when) ip: jtt. vh -

tie has been here since last Tuesday.

You hare been iff since January last
It has been raining since Memhj/

rt iPaf fT77l if since i TIT nscr. Tuesday. January V)t Monday

TT'T f»r”»t T7 771 re* *7 (t TT TITI ) fS TTT 'rr ft’ i;* IJTT > I f«I. Tfi
Tt *i*7t a Since T. 77a Present PesfecT Tense Tt tfiHt if Present
Perfect Continuous ti stit ?«i t i it Tcrr imce 7 Tnn n ni7'?wr ra
titT ft fireai »T 7tTT 5*7 > I

• 7 77 *T77l 7l w
He If here since Monday
He has been ill smre c wttI.
 now TO WRITE CORRECT ENCLfSH

r TTTT S Nfonday § ^ «iftx | 9if ^ jy;,

TT since « Present Indefinite Tense inrra jst I, 3i>
1 1 ?t?
Present Perfect ‘has been’ w STPr ifRr ^fcT
He has been here stnee Monday.
since % Present Perfect Tense ?i 7 STin g^ir J ft
THS fT? a week 977 f^*T^ , wra (Period of Time) ^ Tt (77 f, *57
n’ (from when) «7 ^Ti
-
f*fr5R jttI since « 77^ for «7 srrPr ^
He has been ill for a week.

TTit smr, ^ fnft 777? SB5 J-—

My father died since last Thursday.
The school uos closed since last yesterday.
My father has been ill since three days.
The results have been known since two days.
?^r <7?^ 777? if died « has been dead nit jrt jf was closed «
??% has been closed w n?)? tPit ?7frf 1 afVr if since Ir

for si?t? ?7f?7, 7?{f« three days sflr two days s Period of Time
7>T ?t? I, Point of Time «T 1

Note— ?f? since 5; tt? Noun «n^ ftrrrt Period of Time

5W? ^^ Point of Time (?? %) «i ?rl. ?> since * 7rS for *T s?t?
f)?I ^ ?j??f 7 ?n7?T >177 i 1 Since eflr for «") ??f Pre-
position 3; srwiT? if ftwirrTs** jf 3 1

Since k vrpt 3r 7? ?t wth ftr??? ?t »n:?T eft? ?|T

3 R77 T*r si?hi if cakai ^ »? ftnwf «i THfa? f«?T n?r I—
“Mr. Sahay who had been Muzafjarpur about a month back
to
in connection with his electioneering was slightly indisposed since list
few days.” — Tiif Indian Nation : March 15, ’57

TfT since 7?^ Past Indefinite Tense (was) «t 8?)? ft?T >177 1 sV
3:

Since « 777 Period of Time (last few days) e7. J ?fl was i I

77I! had been er inftn 7)77 ?if«:7 since 3: r;^ for 71 ?ft since «t
sTpi 7 ?f 7777 j't 77? iff last few days fTTer T*»« 7?3 Point of Time «
e g. Monday, Tuesday etc.) ei 7^7 er 1 t? 77f?
(777 er 7777 fe77 >i?r t—
“The committee plan.. bos been in operation In London for two

hundred years in support of Italian opera." —O- n. silAW

(if) Since : As a Conjonction

W7 since ci 5?I7 Cbnjcuntion <T 7ff?

^ w mn^s
3 bt (i)

Tn? 77 nTT? rTBT

^
Preseat Perfect Tense tttt f, (H) nr«
 1 1 1

I Period of Tine ?nPT &) I. Point of Time

5t?t, (iii) T5!^ Past Indefinite Tense «i irek I; S?t-

Scven years have passed since / came here.

Ten years have passed i\Rix mf father died,
WIT ^
f fw since i Present Perfect th ipjVn gsiT I wtt seven
years nai ten years ^ Period of Time ?hf 1 wit ii? vt w
T Clauses wt since ^ sRrT
died— ?;iif Past Indefinite wt spfin gwi 1
^
!•—since I came aV since my father

ST TiTTf wt ^—
Seven years passed since I came here.
Ten years have passed since my mother had died.

Tft Tf^ 3ITT ip since % T7?l period of Time vn ertn fft gsr f, tt
P resent Perfect i 1
Past Indefinite «i 5?^ ^ j ara: n% atjjt 1

since 5: TT% Period of Time ^

JiTtn ijai J ntt Present Perfect »fr. tt
Past Indefinite ^ Tt^ Past Perfect ci, ifr »raa 1
fS 'seiCT’t w'tt 3—
Twelve hours have passed since the patient had fallen asleep.
Eight years have passed since I had gone there.
it Kflj a month Since the examination has been started.
A
year passed since bis brother came.
it since i?«tT% Period of Time si stVi jsi ? «ftt

Present Perfect w.t »fr, tt since >: e i? Past Indefinite > trli Past Perfect
wiTTtrrsTftmtTTi, t T?! had fallen i ttIi fell «T mn had
gone % e^Si went wm ^tat i ?fW^ awa it since ^ Petiod of
Time wt whi tft fwrr wr I, Tt is it arTt was «i, A Wfi 1 1 fiPT> since it

WR Past Indefinite * ittt has been

Present Perfect *i netn cV
»rai i i

started a; a<5l win fhn wifw

fwr; started «t»tw Jp since tt^ i

Present Perfect li wit Past Indefinite «i whr wt f^i mn 1 wl passed 1

% has passed ^wt wif^ i

Note— !jf? am 3 since i TsS Verb 'to be* wi whi fft 'is’ wi
snfFT ftai ‘was’ ai 'has been* an mft; 3?[—It fra weelc since his
father died, wf ‘was’ m ‘has been' wi win fhn
«F§ *n fitrnt

••fiery ir/icA o/canvus has been

wi
Off
^Aw |— since
i

we broke ground
at the mouth of the hfei-nam.'' —Joseph co'Jra.o
(iii) Since : As an Adverb
^ since wisrhi Adverb «T wlfii ^lai > w (i) since ti^ clause if

Present Perfect Tense w ttM chtt I, aft^ (ii) since fenr WTVTt«iTT7 titt
^ «B5i it Txat i t since % ever vftrwr ever since vn stW
 ADVERBS 121

5 !m 3 JTHffr ft fr?ft 1 1 ft. Conjonction sfij PreposUtOD ^ rRf

ift'T ft> ^jsnt ftrft t 1 TH «n«r «IR? I

(1) Before i As a CoaimicKoa

Principal Clause H Future Tense si»fir ft 3t before ^ fr?

irpl Clause H Future Tense sr sifbr ^f! f^; Future 3; Present

Tense ?;i sf^fR fki I

The patient will die before the doctor comes.

Principal Clause The patient will die. ftrJf Future Tense
SI fen >m I, TT before S; ?b- sna Clause (the doctor comes) 3
Present Tense an. Future >Kl siff fR %?fUTft fer tfet—
i

The patient will die before the doctor n-rfl come.

rnfer f wtipr I'
—
Look before you will leap.
The crops will die, before the ram vnll fall.
You will leave India before three months will pass.
tR 9 5ff 3 before % axf «i3
t Cbuses K Present Tense rt
ft^ti 'snfe I

(in Before ; As a Preposition

Pieposttion rstr wtn ft before 3; ftf «stt bni Noun enm t

tff Point of Time tn wtm i, Period of Time «i Rff:
He will not come bade before hfonday
He wUl come back before 5 o’clock.
fft Monday ?WT 5 o'clock Point of Time e>i ^ i prftrr
before «i 55 1 1 wr eifff «1 ^—
He come back before a week.
will not
He
will come back before hour. m
TR fift 3 before lei sniln i. eftf^ a week ntn an hour ^
Period ofTime mftRfhrr t. Point ofTimc^iRfl «rf? before i i

within snftn ft^n within wih Peiiod of Time ii fe ^

I, <R before ci Point of Timei fet
5tll
Preposition « sr^jf 3 1 ^ «fr

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentences —
(a) I thatl so before you will come, (b) I dtall do ibis work before a
forlnighl, (c) You must return before 6 tc days, (d) t wjll finish this book before
you will return from your lour
/fin/s—(a) before you come; (b) wiebin « fortn’cht; (c) within five days,
(d) before you return.
 122 MOW TO WRITE CORRrcT tNGLtSIt

Rule XU. ‘Ago* and ‘That*

sif? ago ^ aiT JE)r Clause arpi, 3^ ihat p ijc since S

It was twenty years ago that he died,

2tfr that ^ since snftn ^5 fTai l Ttifait 7? tm I—
It was twenty years ago since he died,

sut since m swPt d?n sft ago ^ ttj( ci

f fc ago I; ?7? that ^ iRfI»i ^ I, since 35! 1
i

“// ago is used, and the ereni to be dated is given by a clause it

must be by one beginning with (hat and not since.*' —FOV\LtR

EXERCISE

Q. Correct folhning sentences—

the
(a) II was barely 50 yean ago since i( was introduced, (b) It was oniy
tweniyfiveiearsaco since he left ibis job.
ttin/f—Vse 'ago that* io bolh Ibe sentences.

Rule Xlir. ‘Before’ aod ‘Ago*

Past
TJT

^
^
Future
ft ^
ftsfl
«rS

ft
flfli

Tense If
?. IT
ftai ei
wrtiT

ago
er
ci
J ft before rr
i»a Past Tense «
wV
1

fm « I ft Period of Time »:i fti. «Ttft it ft? ago ct

WI I. tR Point of Time « ft? before w; 1^—
The purdah system was common in India some twenty jears

ago.
arw If ago *
T*r before «t jpi>i "tp fftr, e^ft twenty years
% Period of Time »;i ftm?. Point of Time »ct utl t

EXERCISE

Q. Correct the following re»f<7KVT—

before
(a> M»n is not as simple to-day as he was a hundred years
•<b) Aeroplanesare common BOW but half* century before they were nrely
wtn
fe) Reviews and newspapers are not as impartial and informaine at they were
years before, (d) Some days before 1 called on my friend.

flinit— Use 'ago' instead of 'before'.

Role XIV. Present Perfect and Adierb

«if? fHT Jf Present Perfect Tense rr sftn fr, m fttrt trit Adverb ei

Adverbial Phrase ci sm mf! frsrr fwnn Past Tense ri tri

 1

ADVERBS 123

f1 .
I Aar? p3ss:d (he examination /<urj far.
He has died yMffdaj.
You Aflrc come back last tfemng.
last ytat, yesterday
srnraf is
Ust evening a Past
Texse rr infat j4TPt*scni Perfect Tense i rr^ Past lo-
1 1

definite Tense ’atfjv. i ^ wm

r*»^t I PR «lfk aiTzi if fc'it ^if ^
Adverb 91 Adverbial Phrases vrr n^n fCTi sinr faett Past Tense »:i ^
rft it Past Indefinite Tense *1 «wm«Tsn ^f(Pt. Present Perfect
«7 5nf5

EXERCISE
Q. Correct rfie /of/owingsertteflces—
(a) He has come here ihe other day <b) I have joined this college only
last year. <e)You have said so last evening
He came «b) I joined . , :(c) You said

Rule XV, ‘Yes’ and ‘No’

fsrJi if snd nasfi (ft rmT >, qx >iit six m fsRtf ^ aws
5 (ft i>% Bit XT Tsft sft tr Ttxxn \ af? «m Affirmative sentence
•n win w (ft *tie yes srrW «V xf? Negative sentence rt
nt n* 5 ti—
Are you well ?

am well.
r«, I

am not well.
No, I

«Hf «in ^tt ^ As 1 am well ^ bib yes arai J. e?tf« Br btr AITir-
maiive VT I am not well « BTvno wm ), eelf* bt btvb Negative 1 1

STB IB BUTT % BUT Bgl «—

Yes, 1 am not well. Afo, I am well.

Bfl yes Ml no « bbI»i ?. eilfk ARinnalive sentence ^ rm no

ftr Negative « me yes wbi ^ 1

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the folhning smienrer—
(at Have you finished your work V No. I ha\« finiUitd (h) ti it not a
good rule ? Yet. it it nol a good rote
yes. (H no.

Rule XVI. The Spill InriDithr

iB*:t bbI fi'BTTtxx Syntax '*

wm* H Position of Adverbs » Rule
 126 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGUSH
humb'y, slowly, bravely Adverbs 5r wilh ttr Prcpositien

ir/rA most humb/y and respectfully I beg to state.

I am walking vith slowly.

He fought with brately.
You write with patiently and confidently.
T^r ?TT?rf if with ^ jwmrrvn srgf^T i I ^ snr^ S Pre-
position ^ infpT Adverb cit^ ^ Noun S ???l s. lit—
You write with patience and confidence.

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the fallowing sentences —
fa) One must »ofk with honescty and sineerely. tb) 1 read ihi* book wiih

(borouahly. fe) He taught me with elearly and afTeelionateb.

HiBtj— Don’t use 'with'.

REFRESHER COURSE I

Correct the fallowing scrtrenees—

I . H« had climbed to the top almost when a hran>h btoke.
L He oftly worked b\« sums.
) t speak always the truth.
4. 1 enough nett know about it

9. tie KoringiwOToeU.
onty succeeded in
6. 1 OBlj like her when she siwiles.
7, I did not find him rowhere.

S. lie has not got no food.

9. He fimsbrd utucker than I espected
JO. Firstly, it is Ino weak.
11. lilt not much surprisinc?
12. It IS noihing else Itun folly,
t}. V(Hi seldom or eseremne in tune
14 She caa'l hardly do so
I). He wi.'l pay heaty for his fJlIr
Ifi. Is it not wise to aUays a*o<J had men ?
17 He will pay dear for his misconduct.
I*. He seldom or cm t»»es early
19 I never re-rembet haem* seen you.
20 i too much.
like her
21. Of foune, be is a greaS mao.
22. Mj sm* itfwheafihy.
;j t em C5M.t« scjfry to eeceive t*i.s fetter
2* He was very scirr'sei-
27 ,*ri«sjeg haprem by chance ever.
 ADVERBS 1’7
4.

Him— almost 10 the top when; 2. only five sums. 3 <ilw3>s speak..
I.

well enough; 5. only he; fi.onlywhen, 7 anywhere, g any food, 9 finished

more quickly; 10. First; 1 1. very; 12. nothing else but folly. 13 seldom or
never; 14. can hardly do or can't do; IS. heavily; 16. always wise to avoid,
17. dearly; 18 seldom, or rever, seldom if ever, 19. do not lemembereverhav-
mgseen you; 20. very much, 21 Ceilamly. be is. 22 very healthy, 25 very sorry,
24. much surprised, 25. ever happens by chance

REFRESHER COURSE 11

Explain why the following sentences are correct or inivrreci —

1 I have read very often this book.
2 He explained very clearly Ibis rule.
3. 1 am enough pleased with you.
4. He only died a month ago
5. It was very hotter yesterday chan today
6. I have received no letter, neither from father nor from mother
7 1 was too glad to hear (his happy news
8 I only eat when I feel hungry
9 This mat) is much interesting.
10 Although he has plenty of money, but he is unhappy.
1 1 1 with to earnestly and emphaiieany advise you.

12. I am living here since (he last five years

13 Hit mother is ill for the last one year
14. Are you tired ^ Yes. a few
''
15 Is It quite all right

16 He lahourt very hardly SO that he may pass

"Ahi'teiiiimf'rrof iht fjriml rrttrittioin and aneieM •((inn »ho!f nafi*

0/ ocodemif jrommOT arv w>, ttmrirtrly omtittoM". HOR\t AN LET. 15 —
 CONJUNCTIONS
TEST YOURSELF
Q. Correct or justify the following semenCfs and then compare
your results with the key given overleaf—
Both he as well as she is here.
1.

I can neither $U nor stand nor sleep.

2.

He cannot read nor write anything.

3.

4. I have DO pen nor paper with me.

5. The poet says to bis beloved that you should not cry when

I am dead.
6. I Will go home after the college will be closed.
7. I do not know that how you arc these days.
8. The reason why he i« poor is because be is idle.
9. 1 doubt that he wilt pass even this lime.
10. You should act fearlessly like 1 do.
1 1 . But, however, I excuse you this tune.
12. He labours hard lest he wilt fail.

1 3. It appears as if a fresh trouble will come.

14. It seems as though I have lost my dearest object.
15. I request you to grant me leave, as I am ill.
16. I do not know that he is ill or not.
17. 1 wait here unless you come back.
1 8. I know where he lives these days.
that
19. White I started, it began to rain.
20. Unless you do not labour hard, you can’t pass.

C129)
Jt. \V. C. E.-9
 KEY
Both he and jhearc— RuJe I. (2). Correct— Rule
(J)
(jjo
11 .

write— Rule Itl. (4) or paper— Rule III. (5) that she should
not »«{
when he is dead-Rulc V (d>. (6) college is
closcd-Rule IV.
(7J Know how you are Rule V (e). (8) is thai-Rule VI.
(9)doubtwhether-RuIeVlI (b). (iO) Hke me or as I do-RuleIX.
(II) But I excuse you this time, or Howes-er,
I excuse you this tfme^
RuleX. (12) he should— Rule Xf. (13) would come-RuIe XIV.
(14) had lost— Rule XIV. (15) As I am ill, I request you to frant me
leave-RuIe VIU. (|6) Whether he is ill or not-RuJe VII (j)
(17) until you come back -Rule Xlf. (18) I know where helives ihe*
days— Rule V (e), (19) When I started— Rule XIII.
(20) Unless you
labour hard— Rule Xlf.

( IJO >
 CHAPTER V

Conjunctions

CotieUtive Conjuncttoas ^ ^ifr^ sfU

si^f ftra^>HsrJs^Ts?rf^^__^5rTsi5fK5y5iTffr|, fnft ^tsT
Syntais ^ tj-aiw tf Correlatives 3: RffPiii >m 1 ^ 1 5Er srizrrT t
5? 35r Conjunctions *R viT^n I f>nr«T >raW ^ t i

Rule I. The Correct Correlatives

Neither % tt? nor sttiit or st{1 ^ cither S; or sncTT I. nor

nfl I T*ft sRiTT both ^ TT? and siuii as well as aff e/h:though ar;
yet wHT %, but arf Hardly at^ scarcely i ti? when si before
i sttat

than no sooner ^ ttt than strar I, when srff, aft—

He is good nor bad.
neither
It is both good and cheap.

Hardly had he left when bis father came.

No sooner did the thief see the police than be ran away,

etl neither % ar? nor srrai t both i and f(R hardly k ar?
when atr sifw gsr t sfri; no sooner it err than «t i «Hr: b rrw nr i' eRf i

jr?1 neither err or «n sftrboth i ti? as well as, fft rm

*r^ 1 s«K
Ttfr hardly bt ar? than ^ «n snb ft iftr no sooner b when
% snj^i % arw tt gtJ % fwr etV wtriT if to^i ir^T,

^ Vn ^
i

Tt^—
"Like the Persian noble of old f ask that I may neither command
or obey." — Emerson
But / would suggest that the lime has come when other methods
should be evolved both for the benefit of labour as well as for the com-
munity at large." — jawaharlau nehru ; A. I. R., Aug. 5, '57

“Which differs from that und who in being used both as an

adjective as well as a noun.”’ — H. sweet
ejir am W or 1: arfl nor «nfh: star aTrrf as' well as
^
if

b and €T aafn ’arfca t

( 131 )
 132 now TO WltlTE CORRECT ESOUSIf

Nolc-'^ W/Aw i jfiT or wttt

9R. Tcr f« BO/ nor *rf{,

That house is not either useful or beautiful. Tff or ^ nor ^ ir^

5®^ 1^<TT [

EXERCISE
Q. Correei the following sentences—
(a) There was much atiMtion both in Dacca ai well ai in Karachi, (b) A
thing cannot be both white as mtl aa black at the tame lime, (c) No sooner
had he reached the station when the train started, (d) Hardly had he left boice
than It began to ram. (e) He has neither a pen or a pencil. (0 Tboogh be is

poor, but he is happy, (g) Your pen is ool either good nor cheap.
//in/s—fa) and in Karachi: (b) and bUck, (c) than the tram i

(d) when it (e) nor a pencil, (f) yef; (g) or.

;

Rale U. ‘Either’ and ‘Either — of; ‘Neither’ and ‘Neither— not'

Role (a)— Either eftr neither ti tiin Adjective sftr Pronoun ^
^ thBTT ^ f)nl
B'rher of the roads is loog.
Neither of the roads Is long.

Either road is long.

Neither road is long.

^ eftr
^^ tWT
TTWf t either sftr neither
*f Adjective ^ silf?t i
s^tn Pronoun tt
| »?
silfti

WC twrt
Pronoun art Adjective ^ ufft ar A d
ifhn I. Tl' «rT ^
trreJig^it either w to ^i|— one of the two sfR neither

^— not one or the Other-

Rule (b)— S’? cither % or wi aIrTT I sftr neither 5: aR nor
either or, neither nor), til ^ Adverb ^ Conjunction ^
aflr rrftR Correlative sft wn atiiiT I. iPifftr pri SHT ^
^ S ^ wf«re ^ *
^ ^^
srnrr 1 1 totut snrbi

ttrt sft Ti % fen srO, TOR. ^ either. . ..or avT

t,
Pronouns, Verbs Adjectives
neither. . nor * grtr R «Pi* Nouns, trt

^ -^TT 5rT 5—
that
“Either as a ConjtmcUon, Adverb, or Correlative indicates
use
s\hatimmediately follows is thefirst of \no or more alternatives
or clauses uhich are
before tvo or taote co-ordinate wards, phrases
Joined by or." —Webster’s Ivternatiov'al DiciiovARV
“Ntitberaia ConjanefitOT or Adverb — Usually introducing the

first of two or more co-ordinate words or dames Joined A/ nor.”

—Webster’s Inter-vatio.sal Dictio''**’^
 : &

CONJUNCTIONS 133

Shorter Oxford Dictionarv if ^ either neither ^ n*’

^ 'i^ i—
“Any one of more than tw?.”
“None of more than two.”
5?r snnt 5? Pil J f« Conjonttion ?ri Adverb
either*... or a«rT neither. ..nor«i Nfn?? % Tfr nt ?> Ftatfn ?,

sflT ttrkx cither i sk* or am neither * rr? re wfii* nor si

— either. ...or or.... or, neither.. . nor,, .not... nor.
aW <n aa I fs Conjunction m Adverb ^ sifii sja- qt ifr

either sk neither «T sqhi ql si 4 ski ^tfk. sl ft stfqqi 4 ^

sf—
‘T/ie correct corrtffltivej ore ‘either or' and ‘neither ...nor.’

Strielly speakings we should not add another or or and nor, since cither
neither imply two and two — o. H. vallins
Better English :

Ji^ firwRif Vallins tHTsai wra apsj rrgf, ssTf* eft 35«cw

erift ^ Dietlonaty eti ift ws asifi nfl foam i wsl as srgfttqr ssla at ata
cs (ct Vallins 4 na ^ «t^t waat t «tq ^gr£ nc’t. ^
either. .. .or am neither. ..nor «T rent
. sfiis aegsT k tne fsm ^
^ Strftra «a% fmf cither 4 sr? re ft sfre
ft or eftt neither 8; stt re fr

«fre nor rs^ t—

“TAerc w<u, (ftaf ir to say, noiAini to from his
distract km
interestsor to corrupt these interests neither the ambitions of parents
or wife, nor the standards of society, nor the temptations of success."
— T. S. ELIOT
“Either from the moralist's point of view, or from the theologian's
point of view, or from the psychologist's point of view, or from that of the
political philosopher, or judging by the ordinary standards of likeablen-
ess in human beings, Milton Is unsatisfactory." — T. s. eliot
"Which, as a matter offact, are found neither m Shakespeare not
in the Authorised Version of the Bible, nor In the Poetical Works of
"
hfilton. Pope, Cowper and Shelley — jespcrson
“Neither lAe brilliancy of Hazhtt, nor the harmony of De Quin-
cey.nor the vigour of Macaulay, nor the eloquence of Buskin, nor the
purity of Goldsmith could for a moment be thought capable of cjiprcjf-
ing the meaning of Lamb." — hL'ch walker
S either — or am neiiber ...nor infta qt & sf^
«qki^ m q^st 4 fsR jst % i
Vallios wtsq 4 ntngnit ?i am ^
s^g; i

qiwq h 3»sk qtqq ^ at S'Pft yaw Good English if qast rrnta

vt fsqt st afaa aql i 4 faqmg^K ’ft a «fiT ^ qiaq ^5 qirfiV
 —
134 HOW TO WHITE COMrCT CNCtnit

Hu’r If r|? HfT

J—
"This reurlellon la tno does not hold for the adterb (conj.}—
Neither y?jA nnr flesh nor /oh/.” -fowErn : Modern Esotmt Usaoe
Fowler trm * Neither fuh nor flesh nor fowl nj J, irtf?
JTfl neither— nor ».i RTtn Ads’crb («n Conjunction) *rlft 5 »t J ^ rrfsr
TO
^.5 ^
i «TVH
«Tt1 STln
<iT Neither book, nor pen, nor paper sif?
i

k m
I Jf »ft i t rtf? Vallins wrf» i ffitg^TT r? «rpn
ni rri nTrsf «»«« n*5i rf s'pKj i

Role III. ‘No/Nol* and ‘Or*

JTfe 3 no et not hr •fti *»?« ere ^ri Cause rif irt no not *
fl7 or «i «r^ TMT
J, nor *u ah—
I have no pen or pencil,
lie cannot laugh or weep.

amf if nor ^ mn «tmw « fswrq*HT tiW. 3=n >rr=l

srara h r.tj ^—
“/ cannot reoJ nor write. I cannot read or write. The me ef
‘nor* in such jenfcnces was formerly in fashion, and that of ‘or’ is no*
in fashion." fowxer : Modern English Usacb —
Hreen if no srtr nothfR nor»t s#i Shakespeare «hr
Chaucer i
nra srsoi «ra*wi S or *n CT?Tt
S'!
if tttn sn t *rt

"Mr. IKA/h/c>‘ is not a critic of men or of books." —T. s. lUOT

TH anfjT if or I: TTft nor «T smn sr/l rl |

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentences —
(a) He cannot sitDor s(aod. (b) I do not sing nor dance, (e) He b« n®

book nor paper, (d) He has no brother nor sister.

//i/itJ—(a) or stand; Cb) or dance; (c) or paper; (d) or sister.

Rule IV. ‘After' aod the Tense

Clause 3 Present ?i Past
Before 3: HiTFT ^ after it »iR*N 1^ Rit
Tense ^ i

I shall
^ go
I, Future
after
Tense
he comes.
hit nit

I went after he came.

trf?; fn fsrer — I shall go after he will come, a) •

Rule V. The use of ‘That’

l> Direct
3
Rule That stJr vrs lodwcct N&tsatwsn 3
Nff,
He said that he would go<
 ) !

cosiUNcnoss 135

rrftr? 5T 9m I—
He said that ‘I shall go’

Role (b>—That « 91^ Imperative. Interrogative, Optative 91

Exclamatory sentences 9:t srftn *irft ^ —

(a) He said that bring a glass of water.

(b) 1 said that where does he IWc and how is he “1

(c) He said that bow beautiful it was !

(d) I said that may you live long

fs «Pl that
9 tnfr 9m
9>
•RTil ?
?
1
TJprt
^
95r Clauses (that
i ^ aTt% <TfHT cT^tTl
I

i 919 em 9 i^) 9>

at 9? t
inverted
f?{

5*rnF,<t9 t 99 i ft «Pl
commas era 91 «t Narration s;

ftw 9 S3>nt Indirect .Narration S 9951 e.fiRfti 9wt Narration ^ f9»mt-

lU
Role (c)—Than 91 99m CT% IT pft 919 ai% aiS Clauses i Tense
9T ?T1 WIR 9091 WrfTV, 99fft fttlt 9199 ? that ^ 9T^«n% 91^ ClausB If

9f9 Past Tense 191 99t»r9i,ft>rei:9R (that 9919) 9t^ Clause i «ft

Past Tense 9t S9>? 9T9t rpi it 3&—

He said that he Houfdgo.
99! will 91 99)9 srti« Narration k ftn*
ftSi *( fTFHTiT*! g S Tne i «m \ \
Role (d)—That r 9 "ft^t aril Causes S Pronoun « 9^ if rfr

*11991* * 9V1 91979991 \, Vft «9*9i S. 9(ltn-«i9 S, that ^ 919 «ril

aril ‘I’ ft (examinee) »i aft ^1
? sftr ‘you’ ft afitre (examiner)
911 1 tiifsTT Sohrab says to Rustum that you are my father rt a? %— m
rnma »»?19 ft rmt ^ ft 39 (examiner) (examinee a) ftm arf ^
Knmisfl % ana am an «9
Sohrab says to Rustum that he
tft 999 nai J »nfn 99 99 ac
1

is
aifr?—
Ms (Sohrab's)
^ father.
1

«?(T 99HT9 ?—
The spider says to the bee that / aru rich but you are poor.
The withered leaf says to the green leaf that you are foolish
but / am wise.
The poet says 10 his beloved that yvu should not remember
me after my death.
Anne tays that I want to be the wife of a Governor.
«9 tiril amt «t wa CT 999 at naj aatft 97! 1 ft arlOTaT ai aft ifti
>, spider, withered leaf, poet 91 Anne at 9^ nfi aatt atl jou ft 1

aOt'9 91 atv rmi >. bee, green leaf 91 beloved at at^ tn 1 sm ^ am

ftnar a(i}n«ff avfl itl 99ft ai »n=ft <9 J *!1t ml 9(15^ a^ , fTtfan that >;

ait (axHlndirect Narration 9) aa »n I you at sam at, at naatm ft

 — ——
1

or. iinw TowRirr couRrcT rvCLfvf

«V, »TT nn »rrfri !{;? i ttyft 1 •x Jj

wfl Tff InJircct N^irralion S (»»? I •:i rti kV nr tt
fi It If fm if f^ii in f ? ff? vrm »t^
fm a n. **> I »i »r«j »‘/«V»irs!n^ frt>:?a<!f=rtnTjr.^:
I i. he. *he, it r> 9 rfr «i B^Jir tV i Bril’ rt you n irrw •titt ^
«T ITT

| 5? 5 ;
BTH
f«<i 7
^^ *171

sfl
<j« q/* 5Tc »i «i:t frpn:
f»TT»» ti. ijT you k rra nBT^^Tx
c k f 7
he, she, ii
sfr srrn
f' 7rt;n
inftn rV 1

Note -<jn li {« Direct Narration S Pronoun %

eMi f 9 ir> wifri Kt nv 9 »j Pronoun rr Indirect S ifft iTin, 1^—
Ram said. *] shall go*.
Ram said to Shyam, *You wilt go*.
Cf I I tr na n n«t rwt J you n ma si. 71 Indirect Narration ?
*a Pronouns Jt {fit *71*1 slats gMi ait-
Ram said that I should go.
SfT I It ITS «T ffrs Mn in ^11 ^ 1 ptfsrt that « rx
Pronoun st «rsTiT «nst^ ft eS 1

Rule (el—af? Interrogative Pronouns (who. which, what etc.)

St Interrogative Adverbs (why, how, when, where, whether etc.) & cit
Clause rl
et Interrogative Adverbs k
^
Principal Clause *rff sr^, st Interrogatirt
sin sr^
Pronouns that sr
I do not know how he is.
tnrf how % ?w Clause ‘he Is’ rs ft«T | rfrr t*r Clause « nt Prinri*

pal Clause srff srjsn f 1 swfasc how k that vrt siftn fui ? 1

S7:tx aiapj — understand whai you say— 3 what i that *et sTS
atxsn sr^ fIfiT, what you say i 717 Principal Clause wttt fi
«t

I do not know why he is absent.

7*T am 9 why & w Clause "he is absent’ sic ft^t f, xr rrk 715 ^
Principal Clause sr^f wntJ 1 1 TWftn why k 77^ that th smi *17? jw f l

SI7 SfTT 7W 7mT ^ —

I know come.that when be will

I cannot say that where he is these days.

You do not follow that what I say.
yir TjTTf S when, where utt what J: that *171 fw ’u*^' w
ystk 777 srrS 7i^ Clauses k 717 Principal Clause nff sntT f 1

Note 7(7 77 Interrogative Pronouns «n Interrogative Adverbs

that v’
k 7T7 snw 7tft Clauses k 717 Principal Clause sni', a) TTk-Tf^
sr^ XhtT 3i&
I know that what yon say is correct.
 CONJUNCTIONS 137

irci what ^ Clause ‘)oa say* am I vtA m Princi-

pal Clause ‘is correct’, what ^ «red that «T ^1 1 fB

-sftT S—
1 know that when he will crane, he will bring money for me.
I can say that where be lives is known to me.
fir ajarf if when fiai where i that cr wW ^5 f , Brffft; 1=1?: bit

'P rincipal Clauses ai^ 1“ i

Rule (I) — Agree, assert, assume, aver, calculate, conceive, hold,

learn, maintain, reckon, stale rftr sucgcsi.— pr Verbs c bt; that-Clause

<n: that ferr srraftr^ otVi % «g*iit sv^i enw snirt t, a%—
I understand he will come to-day.
1 assert it is right.

I maintain it is alt wrong.

rn 71?^ <1 understand, assert maintain ^ ai; that n sziln grin
BIlftTI

Note— Believe, presume, suppose flat think 5; »r; sigft^ sTtm-

^rit that fert tr^i 59fe n srcl «t * uctn fe rw Verbs k fir that »?t

EXERCISE
Q. Cornet the following sentences—
(s) I do noi know (hai how and where he I*, (b) I uid to my servant
that bring a chair and a giais etC water (c) to this roem O,
the poet says that
my beloved, you wilt remembermeia your otdape (d) The withered leaf saysto
the green leaf that you are ia(e(>eTieTiced but ) am espertenced (e) Louisa says
to bei father that you have ruined my life <f| 1 do not follow that what be
says. ( 1 ) He said that be will ooi return wiihm a week (h) I know that when
he will come 'here. (0 1 cannot eaplain that why I like birO so much. (J) 1
agree it is a nice proposal,
/{/»iu— ts) know how, (b) 1 asked ot ordered itiy setvant to bring; te> says.
‘O— age" or says ihat she wjll remeinber him in her old age; (d) that she
is but he IS, (e) that he has mined her tife or says to her father, "You
life", (0 follow what; (g) he would; (h) know when; (i) eaplain why; (jJ agree
lhai it IS

Role VI. ‘Tbe reason h’/^emson wb)'

aff aiaair the reason is ui the reason why snB. n't ink err
awt Clause that ^ urw gtm because m due to ^ aifl. ill —
The reason is that he is ill.
The reason why he is absent is iter he ts ill.
TW *iv5l i tViat ^ became 7t due to wt vem af^wn gmi, 77fr«
 — — . .

13S HOW TO WMTE CORRECT ENGLISH

fjTJIf I—
"After such openinss as Hie reason k. Hie reasoa why, the
conlaining the reo^n must not begin with ’because' but with 'that’."
—Fos'XER : Modern English Usvce
‘‘Grammar insists on ‘that’ following 'reason' never 'because'."

— C. WHITAKER'WILSON
TH ^ rr TRff S
"The reason why Denmark has been able
^
to build up its trade cnS
industries is dne to the advantages of transport. .

—The Eastern Economist : Feb. S, ’57

^ I fWCT r*T CETT §VHi ai iim The

reason why is that it has the advantages of transport...
Rule \T!. *11111’ and ‘Whether*

Rule (i)— That ah snj ^rr ^ ’f** ot whether «t ‘f* i»TT. **T l

T»r^ whether i rr? or no st or not «mi f , aftw that « m

aSTTE? W tfETf ^^ P 3%—
I do not know whether he will come or not.

«n, rtr ti*^ ^^

Ido not know that he wiH come or not.
that k rrs whether ct am ftwi wtfir i

Rglefb)— That «r>T whether Stfrtm 3 re rfrr m

^ at »T ^ f< Affirmative sentence S doubt vi doubtful i wa whether
n rmi that ei ^7. 5»r—
I doubt nkether he will come or ooL

Whether he will come or not i$ doubtful.

douhiful’ Affirmative ? infiRR whether ei
eft ‘I doubt' i^T ’ll i

arVn gai } that ar i whether* that *t ari rHt i

Note— cTT* Negative ar lotcrrogaiiie ft, fir doubt at doubt-

ful « FTt that n sa>i ^ awi aj«i ?. 3%—
1 do not doubt that he will come.
It is not doubtful that he will come.
he will come ’
It there any that
is li doubtful that he will come ?
tw met 3 that *i «m ?, ertr* <t rvj Nefifive f
O Interroeatiie

E.XCRaSE
Q. Correct the fvllowin; senteneet —
(d Ttal be h»i been fc> tB.vtrl 4ovKM- ft) It •*’ r»^»'’X •*^**eJ
 cosnJscnoNS 139

that France *outd permit the use of her force, (rt It i» extremely douHfof
that he «in iucceed in this vork.
////irj—<i) W'hetber be : (b) *betheT Ffancf. (c) whether be

KaleVlll. 'As' Qaate tod Its Posltioo

trf; arm ? Clause *a»' % (cause) r't'isi

Tfj, tt) 3?l as-Clause arm k 2| s^r ^ Pnact-
pal Clause Tt; iT^ Principal Clause e^T aw* *tt as Clausc rr wfl

3e—
As I am ill, 1 request you to grant me leave.

eri as-Clause rrrw 1 1 mf ?! r twai rr»7 S apt rm nn ?

mi jtT^ Principal Clause— I request. . leave v't i e^e ct* Pnneipal
Cause ^ era nai »ni > sV awi as-Clause ci, ni r^t tff A »t
awT
nt? *m*i Tw wj«sy «i fTT »m 3—
I

"7b casual or explanatory As-eltovrs if rhev ore placed before the

main smimef (As he only /aujhrrf at all my orsummts, / govr i( up)
there ts no objection. The rerene order (t pare ii up. as he only laugh-
ed at all my arguments) is tnlolerable to aii)i>ne »ilh a liietary ear. Alt
tt>od*ruers Inslinetirely avoid tt.but being eontmon in talk, it is muck
used in prim also by those n ha hare MS yes learnt that eomposillon is

on art and that sentenees re^rt airanjrrwenf."

-•louua -
Monas Cscinii Usarf

KoIrlX ‘As , *liV«' and the Cave

Cia'r fi *1 wt •aJ)' ei '»«ia‘cw m et J fe ‘as* Conjunction
3, ST ’l»W Adjecitvt «1 Prtposrtion at on pri \ i tttftrj jAe •
ere Ohjccuve Case as sw tr^nr I a» • are Nominstive at. 5w -
t am like him.
I am at good as be.
•TV rfl ewe o(t fan nei—
)am like he
He li as good as me.
*n*t er amet eorw tfwt (r ifoi Jrr'’** rrfea rrra A eg errg
f^mer
few haie obtefrdltht }O0 haw door." OAawp.
"t'nforiunjiely
rn em
6 like a ere )nu •> NominaiiTe Case if rn frxr '*T
r»T»r "TTi « omanTT «»f».-r5T ui ws* J I f'l f >pu « ri fs rrrm rw
r'rt nr'gf ar Me a rrsi a«rt cirn t »a r» «t« at e^ —
You should act like I do
eO like r>e er as 1 dvV t'wiwr'ee i
 140 now to WWTT COBRrCT tNOtntt

Nolc— Ai i; TT? >11

^ Noun jn Pronoun Ohjeclive Caw 4
-r»nr f, ijf? «t Transitive Verb ^ Preposition »:f Object rtf

3it—
You love her as much as mt.
tnft «n in’, i Rfr snn 8 n TtansitWe Verb r1 sf Preposition
fl'l fts i tf: Nommaiivc Case vit TTn rWt i

EXERCiSt
0. Correct the foUawirt^ untertees—
ta) Keep your bojy uprifht like I do. (b) Younj Briam appeared fora fe»
minutes in the part of Juliet just like boysdiJ in Shakeipeare's own U'lne- (e) Voo
aire as dear to me as hi-n
r/inM-»(a] as I do. (b> a* boys did; (c) as he.

Rule X. However and But

However «nTry if «rf rwr »Tn > f« rri ^ but ci sTin (but
however) rrfP ip^i: «n
but «t arm »t rr however an, rr ^ w
fra m I 8 «f55am
Out that, however, is not hard.
But one thing, however, has not changed.
er( but ate however 8 hfeaft ^tvrr arm « ^ i

Rule XI. ‘Lest’ and the Verb

Lest art w r?ii ^ sr^P atr at? tsrt should ^ vH
Vhii 5— .

idiomatic caruiruciion after 'JesT is ’should'. Instead oj

“The
‘should’ good writers rarely use 'shall', 'may' and 'ought'.’’ — rowxr*
He laboured hard, lest he should fail,
should i will, shall, may qi might «t ^ *

Hule XII Until and Unless

Rule (a)— Until sisa

Unless
I ‘siB
sw ^<rr I 'am ^
^ Bfi sr^’ shr pnt (tim*)
^
fl?n 1 1

8 unless
siT Btvi ^rnl; ?‘rf^ condition i 3W# until »vT sfk time ara

?n' jptH srrf fhrr i

^—
I will wait here unless yon come back.
You cannot succeed win/ you labour hard.

until i
BTi am 8 unless %
unless art i
until ^ sratn ^ =aTf^ sft’T 5^
sense
Rule (b)—‘Until’ «rk ‘unless’ Negative 1 1 t?rf^ Negative
 S

COWUMCnONS U1

era not «t mV st^f fhit i, at—

UnUss you do not labour hard, you cannot pass.
I will wait here until you do not come back,

xa arVf do not ?t mfr i i

Rule Xlll. While and When

When «T STln ftr rffn I, m
«r« wn enra ^Tett | aV {Sir arrnr
fWT I,
Tw ^
TT cnr i
I. ?r» while
^ IT ft fmt «t*; arttv sVar I jh ?t ero
wfa g while ^n^whenaftr
ft

when ^ ??ii while ^rt afn ?—

U’hife 1 awoke, I saw a snake.
Whtn it was lavning, { slatted for home.
^ <1^51 ^rm *1 when rnl*! ?Vi ^ S while cr i

Rule XIV. *As if/As though' nod the Tense

w ftfr fr«T«:wff«rJ fhn^eftrer^ i rai sti? ar

Hff ftr rt'« »tT ttTt Past Tense «t «fw fnr t. Present ei Future *r
rfrtnet—
"These should invariably be folloveed by a past eondiHonal, and
not a present /arm ('•weu/if not ViH’, ‘c£>uW' not ‘con’, ‘Ad’ not
‘does', *wns' or ‘were’ not 'is', ‘had gone' not ‘has' 'knew' nof
‘knows')”, —FOWLER
w Tst awft aft ^—
looks as if a. new lot of men have sprung up
It who Hill

require their share of the public plunder.

To the observer it seems as ij (here has been some lack oT
suge-management.
etr arm *1 as if i have d; had an wV fwt wil) ^
would an 5r?k ftsi ^rrff^ i atm ^ vt has had cl smfTr ftm
^ifVi
ra^ nxiafn etirf% m
ft iwuer wt» ft fset I—
‘‘And now he js gone indeed' and it seems as though a part, and
that a very happy part of life has gone with fcim.” — a. o. caso»nir
r? am if as though h an had gone ^ s^tn fhu » umwfr %
Tr rH f't4*( St a5«u*j !tfl —
"You have been promistda texUboak, andlperhaps rambleon
as if H'e bad been taken outdoors to study botany. ...” — Ezra found
‘‘Do you know I feel as tbongh / were split in ihoI
—
DOSTOEVSKY
"I do not want to give the impression that I regard his earlier and'
 {42 tlOW TO WHITE CfJ»«rCT ENOLnH

Ills later work oUnau »<i If the/ ^all been written by two Jijftient

— T. S. ruoT
"Act you mttt already happy, and that will tend la make
)OU happy. ^DALE CARVtOIE
»mf 3 a* If m^e at though * fit Pait Tense wtrircrpt
CntEII
^
(Tf T TTlstiTI If
I«1 } I rn •ft ^ tt flY 1

CXERCISC
Q. Correct the following sentences —
(t)lleb«haK< •« tf (>e it my nutter, (b) lie pretetult (a mda booSiti
if know anyihint about the nutter (e) It appeirt at if a fmh calimiiy
he (loet not
will come. M) Out. however. I cxcuie you thit lime, (e) He bbourt hard, kst
he will fail

he were; (b) he diil not; (c) would come; (d) But exewe or

However, I .. (e) thould fail

REFRESHER COURSE I

Correct the fallowing sentences—

I. Several things have happened ti.-ice I have joined Ibis college.

2 He lied for life lest be might be arrested.

3 I shall not go except you permit me.
4. He boasts like his father does.
5. Directly the meeting commenced, a censure motion was moved,
d. Such dresses are seldom or ever used here.
7. He gave do more than he could help.
S. Scarcely had he slept than a thief broke into the house.
9. No sooner had he left but it started raining.
10 I do not know that how is he 7
11. He is not only famous for his wealth but also for wisdom.
12. She sang when he played.
13. I am as rich or even richer than him.
14 Are you wiser than her*
IS. He not only reads English but also science.
16 He isricher but not so popular.
17. It is very much like I espected.
15 I would neither help or barm.
19. I am not sure wbeCber she likes me or no.
20 Do like he does.
21. No change took place unce be has died.
22 Why do you not either read nor write 7
23. Fools are both found in Asia and Europe.
24. Did be only die yesterday?
25. Does he not look as if be is a gbost 7
26. I cannot read nor write.
27. I have received no help, neither from her nor from him.
 CONJUNCtlONS 143

//I'fTff—(I) I joined; (2)hethoiiIdbe; (3) uoltss you; (4) like his Talher or
as his father does; (5) as soon as (be meeting. (6) seldom or never; (7) (ban be
could not help, (8) when a thief; (9) than it; (10) do not koow how be is (not, as
itohow); (II) famous not only forbis wealdi: (12) while he; (13) as rich as or even
richer than he; (14) than she; (IS) reads not only English; (16) richer than •• as I,

as I expected. (IS) nor harm; ((9) or not. (20) tike him or as he does; (21) has
'(17)
taken place since he died, (22) cr write; (23) are found in both Asia and Europe
or are found both in Asia and in Europe, (24) only yesterday. '(25) be were; (26)
>Qr write; (27) either from her or from him

REFRESHER COURSE II
9.
^Explain why the JoWowing sentences are eorreet or mcorreet—
1. Until you remain idle, you will noi pass.
2. No sooner be had died, but his sons quarrelled.
3. !t has been now a year since he tad left.
4. The crops will die before the tains will fall
3. Scarcely he had returned before h'S wife was taken ill.

«, Not only he was iojured but mined.

7. He tow early, levs he raigbt not be late.
ft was a week smee (he holidays had beguo
9. I am not a liar like you are.
10. Sports are not only good for the body but also for the ismd.
11. He behaves as if he is a child.
11, Let me know you will return or not.
that whether
13. Tell me that how much (be book cost you
14. Soth the teacher as well as (he student was there.
13. Unless you ate sot careful you will fall into trouble.
16. Seven years passed since I have come here.
17. She (Old me shat I will help you.
 NOUNS
*
TEST YOURSELF
Q. Cofwr or tftc /orto*inj sentenea and thtn compare
}Our resuhs K’iJft the keygiren orerieaf-^
1. Th« lecond Itve^yean fUn is too ambitious.
2. The s«Mf>es of the lovrn have been invited.
3. The cattle is sold away.
4. Many furnitures and machineries have been purchased.
5. In his poetries Wordsworth has described lovely sceneries.
6. tiis mathematics are weak.
7. I am an esamincr of ibc Patna and Bihar University.
The price of the book is three and a half rupees
9. t went So J. hi- Oem's & Son's.
10 1 have read Keats and Shelley's poems.
1 1 The barber's is too full of customers.
1 1 My means is much reduced.
n The cleTBies and She nobdities have no respect to^Jaj.
14 We cannot live without airs.
15. My little children arc learoins alphabets.
16. Mow msny issues have youl
17. This table is made of woods.
IS. The Fox were food media.
Sisters
19. I like the literature of the I6lh and the I7lh centuries.
20. The poors and the sicks desene help.

( »« )
H. w'. cr.-lO
 (I) five-year— Rule gentry— Rule 11. (3 ) correct— Role 11
1. (2)
(a). (4) and machinery— Rule V. (5) la
items or arliclei offumiture
his poetry. . . .scenery— Rule V.
(6) correct— Rule X. (7) Universities
—Rule XV. (8) three rupees and a half— Rule XVI. (9) Dent and
Sons’— Rule XX. (10) Keats’s- Rule XX. (II) barber’s shop— Ro5«
XX. (12) are much reduced— Rule-|VNote(b). (13) clergy and nobl-
Hty— Rule n. (14) air— Rule VII. (15) alphabet-Rule VII. (|6) iaae
— Rule VII. (17) wood— Rule VII. (18) mediums— Rule XU Note.
(19) century— Rule XVI. (20) the poor and the siefc— Rule XVJII.
 CHAPTfR VI

NOUNS

Noun ar^ ^ «w Smgulat Verb «rt 51

Plural, w TK
Position of Words
Syntax
i
% ««n?
3
if

5)
Agreement S: wTiiu?! ^
«ft ft^rc f«?rr I ftr dr Noun
^ 1

Object
Nouns % spa
m ^ am *f afWT wra «?r fhn ^rfca
1 0>a^ ®tia^ & S5 feaf
i sa t?r st^TW Jf
i
?if

aat»ff at ‘"ata i

Rule I. Numtial Adjectlit-tHyphen+Noun

Numeral Adjective efta Noun ^ Hyphen (•) i sttt ftsrrstaa:

Compound Word amai an, lit Noun n hyphen i; an snm I) tro
singular trn %. a& -

I have two rupee notes.

five-

You have a ten*rupee note.

af^ ataa Jf Definite Numeral Adjective ‘five' ttar ‘rupee* ^

hyphen ft at?aT a^ ?pa (five-rupee) aarar «m J t«%a Plural five % i

atKTSingularNounfupeearrflahjaji.ropeesctn^i a?ft aant

aiaa 9 ten vftt rupee PR(t«< ^
p«c aatar net % anl^ ten-rupee i ii

aaft ten-rupees an sahi vnji ^n«nn an

Noun singular tjat 1^;
ut vata % ^ ft; am 9
hyphen TS% at aia snh ai?n ar hyphen aft
•rt a? Noun plural tt awr i; st«—
You have twenty rupees,
1 have two ten-ru/ee notes.
It is three feet »n length.
It is a ittne-foot role.
It is fifty feet in width.
It is a fifly-/o<7/ tape.
There was an all-parry conference.
taaiaaT Numeral Adjective Noon * «ra hyphen * sn% aa
Nouns singular number 9 > i plural «t aar sr^ ftaT i

srt Ttt ana

•‘ and the mlf money t erer hoarded kos nifney that
( 147 )
 (I) five-year — Rule I. (2) gentry— Rule II. (3) correct— Rule II

(a). (4) items or articles orfumitoie and machinery — Rule V. (5) la

his poetry. . . .sccoery— Rule V. (6) correct — Rule X. (7) Universitiej
—Rule XV. (8) three rupees and a half— Rule XVI, (9) Dent and
Sons*— Rule XX. (10) Keats’s— Rule XX. (H) barber’s shop— Role
XX. (12) arc much reduced— Rule— IV Note (b). (13) clergy and nobi-
lity— Rule n. (14) aif-Rule VII. (15) alphabel-Rule VII. (16) i»ue
—Rule VII. (l7)wood— Rule VII. (18) mediums-Rule Xtl Note.
(19) century— Rule XVI. (20) the poor and the sick— Rule XVIII.
 148 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH

/ had no tme to spend within the narrow compass of a twenfy/onrJio

—ROBERT LV
iifl hours ^ hour w i

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentences—
(a) He is a filty^fcais old man. (b) IJ is a five-pounds weight, (c) It i:

seven-men committee, (d) Tbere was a three-hours sitting, (e) The fire-men s
committee had a two- hours coorerence this morning, (f) The Second Eive-Ye
Plan IS good, (g) India cannotacceptihetwo-naiions theory. (h}AQalI-paP
conference was held to consider the food problem, (i) There is two-wayi tr»
here.
Him— (a) fifty-year; (b) five pound; (e; seven-man; (d) Ibree-hP
(e) five-man ...two-hour. ...; (OFive-Year; (g) two-nation; (h) all-party (i)t«
way.

Rule II. Nouns Singular In form but Plural in nse

fif Nouns ^^ FT! plural stu rf rliiT ^ Wfr ^

singular tfrit' I ' w»t wtn singular 3 RfT ^ ‘s’ '

‘les’ a nwe pt plural stff prnr »t ««?!? & Nouns i

?—
admiralty, cavalry; clergy, gentry, infantry, nobility, pouhrj
peasantry, yeomanry, children; lit—
The cergy have always stood in the way of scientific progres!
The nobiWiy hose oppressed the prosonrry in several ways,
ufir clergy, nobility siV< peasantry ustn; clergies, nobilities d-

peasantries «t Nouns «7 trrm singular wn ? ri^ »T

fttPET niT I

Note ()— Cattle, swine, vermtn, mankind, police ner public rs

ft 3 CJ71 rt^ ?. unfi »=trr ^
fRf fr rWf 9 cl tnrpr rrrr K
T?rif ‘s' mnrr ir? plural sirt aaici apii plural sr« 3 cattle n
i

cattles, police public wr publics afl ft

polices rflr i uw
Note (b)— rt* uTPr « wr?ry 3 f?f trr'ff k»R3eviRiT} ft
plural sw 5 ft fl% singular 3 aft. Tt ct flw stff mr Pf i

"The cattle ia soU The cattle are In the hay." — rowi«

‘•These sulne mxe a nuisance /fell a dirty ss^ine,"
^
— rowif*
"The British public was elated rather than dismayed."
— tt.a.uttli
anil
"ManhinJ is collectitely engaged under the guidance of fools
with the ingenuity of sLsnes in etdermlnallng itself.
_8r*r«A>n«L'««t
 MOUHS 149

“ . . . .at present mankind te demented” — ii. G. wells

"These verm/n are an incessant torment. 5tfcAa vermin as you.”
— FOWLER
Vt 3^1^ % rre % fK xspci «pik ^jfr (t S 1
Note (t) —People sn sniln ‘si^* % m i?
^ plural number S
^ I.
a people,
^ «w singular,
'rfsi’ i wS 5 people ntt
%rfr fra?!

plural ft
a ^ sRi>i

I peoples, tt
ft?ft

t,
‘
sre^ft* i sra if people ^ peoples vtpn 1 1

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the folloteing sentences —
(a) The peoples of India »re marching *beJd (b) The people of Rossi*
is hard'Working (e) The gentry of (he town has assembled here (d) Out

peasaottj is very poor, (e) These cattles are mine. (f> The jtrfatiines were ordered
to march on. (gl Ctuldceiu are playing.
/fi«e—<*) people; (b) ere; (e) have; (d) are; (e) cattle; (f) infantry, (g)
children.

Rale in. Nouos Plural hi form bot Siogalar in use

ITS Nouns %% f fsRk sra if ‘s' rfw t «V rsfe? ^ plural

h TT fTBR if i singular If. oar—

News, gallows eftr summons, aftfm

This news ts bad.
A summons has been issued,
tin: ^ am ?—
The news htne spread quicicly.
Summons Aove not yet been served on him.
Note (a)— news «t ftsfr ^ if RfVr «T f sh strsfii*

wbi 3:

"The number varied {The neu>s b bad, ere bad) for more than firo
centuries, but has now settled dawn permaneniiy as singular"

—FOWLER
Rule IV. The true Plarab

3;gNouns3frl'fV;^«»nif*s*rf?tT|i 3 tt*% if ft Rff. firar if tft

plural I' 3 if I"—

I

aborigines, alms, annals, ashes, bellows, billiards, bowels,

breeches, caves drawers, fetters, measles, proceeds, proceedings,
riches, thanks, tidings, troosen, vegetables, scissors, shears, spectacles
and tongs.
srn ‘s’ fTWL T?rai wtn Aguiar we H wft ^ l
 „ i

l*n Ipy* frtw#rt»frwifrr»'.T.fftn

St>*t ( ) - Iftf.if •? ,*,* f- 3 }

••n* ^V4/ tt
/?»»«?> fyf»f Uftj f.-* ttikrf -a* er $(rtt*^t "

— rmi
>t<i»t J*««.f:fM» *»-f# «t »t «f»7 ^ /r aUijn uifJ <

>‘"l» rfcl Vfrani *'<»i» tr t«*r rr^ /Vnf-e^

•f’rt * •?!
it p-'tt •s’*»"iif rfi atfJut I'ff^fjr ”
»f f7s» «-ri «f r-» tf I
"I’iiKf ir^it •<-i.-4-w*r' f/f '«nrcMt’ at^ati laiti a Plural I'rr^.'
}fj i^rtrr •hui i r'ucS ffJuceJ h |V irnif '<ray to 6
r*».f tie Ofjfn /!lr» ft ii/*fKAt/- IVr^, 'm*m\ tsn he trtattJ
tlihrf Sinfulit t'e Plur,)! all tneartt {Pt efttf mtann {Hart)
”
),

tn fr»t» J *« «n xrret •>•{» i wi «^ftssj!»c7^

ff, »> t#r r>lufai t »4im *1. xt xlf riMni i rr> a «7 orty i
f'} (a n<an*, eTMjr meant) •! a*» uricJat st3 j t*t now 5

eri a «i «»<fy rt ti:n »f» jr, "'t t»»«f ti'x )i n3 try iinfott
tflutal r«niJ i -

"The nreexi <fa not ce iotx oot /M»///r fV eti. Vie erut U gtd
hat the eneCfti «<, ct h M./.~

EXLRCJSE
Q, Carreet the foUamn^ sentmcei^
ti) Mj mean* i» »-:uU. tb) Tb« hou«: "qi reJimJ to an »*b«- (t> Tbi^
itiJue to him. (Jl ^^h<ftl» yow (pectac^* ' (e) Mu U lome to-dij-

(0 Riche* ha* »|B»* <j) I Me »efetaNe <hj The |6 ef i* lO fetter. (0 Shear h**
been purehatej for my factlcn 0> He u lurfenni ftcen meaile
Uiiui~U) are; (by lo atlie*. Kl are; (J) are; (e) bowel* are; (0 ha«;
(t> tetetible*; (hi fetter*, (i) (bear* lu*c been, (jl meailet.

Rule V. Noinn that are alnan Sinsnlar

fTj Nouns ?i5) ? fnsm plural aiaftTbn eV ^ i T*rfir( ‘s’ 5i

gq r *< ^ plural aaiTsrt «f*T ? i^ « Nouns ?—

fum'Hure, dust, lagPS®*
poelry, scenery, machinery, dirt,
rubbish, polish,
baggage, wastage, breakage. percenDge, traffic,

nuisance frUifTi
electricity,

TtTfsm u etftj sri ?—

Wordsworth’s poetries are liked by all.
I have seen lovely semeries in Kashmir.
 3

NOUNS 151

These machineries are costly.

•
Ihave many furnitures in mj drawing-room.
There are heavy traffics on this road.
All bis luggages were stolen away.

Note— afi; Noans plural wq i! iftu items

of, articles of, pieces kinds of raft irerr « espressions
tfrhi —
I have many iie.ws o/fumture.

Role VJ. Nona and the Article

Proper, Material ftut Abstract Nouns k S «ns rsRt

uifipt m>j Article ci eePi srfl *fti nm plural tt sft fWr.
e^ff* h *i?i singular rrr a%—
Shakespeare »s a great poet
I require milk.
He reads poetry.

Tsteteel H Shakespeare, milk tfttpoetty lu?. Proper. Material

^«T Abstract Nouns > I f*Trsr» iwa ore Article er vim rrai tn rwah
plural ttri*n errs pni i at »t ^—
flit Ram IS a good boy.
He loves golJj.
A kindness is a noble thing.
VVe eat rices and milks and take woters.
till erJi em 9 Proper Noun ‘Ram' h: Article n «rer»» 5*1 } 1

w^
ftT siira if Material Noun 'pold* plural rti fe^i rpn } 1 »T »7 H
Abstract Noun •kindness' « Article «t S'itn fCTt rtet I u'tt ^''1

Material Noun ‘rich', 'milk' sftr Vaicr' *> plural vm fjTt mn } 1

*{^i r^tnr if f»»« ? I

Note— st? Proper. Maicnal Ai Abstract Nouns ciuTW Common

Noun c”! w!f> gt. flt rut cr^ Article •! urn ft rTTm \ shr sarr plural «jt
«^iei F( «» >*1 }, ft fie or ft c«i tri ft «« trf *tfi >, ih—
She ha^ great beauts.
She II a great beaut),
fustice has been done
He IS o justice

frS fTfti J beaut) *1 WJ ‘wsjTfj* ft gnr 3 ‘f^.=et *^0' 1 rfm?

fue a jutliee n «i } '»en' friAir a 1 fnf»r «f •> 3 n«
ft nitvsfi ft Material, Proper li'r Abstract Nouns a fT> Article »t
febi •! . ei fni plural «»i7 t
152 |pr» r»>«»»TT »';< tri»f

Q C^'’rrt uifftfft •

«<4 tvMt'-ioix ^<>^V'l•^<v.?t^I

s»*!« i»»i rvi.w't, >rti*f>|'fwr^r« ft ftmr-'i t><rt
»..n.J.i- I. in*v. Ut Ift V» f# r.v^rtricj
l|>lt ihtlHfriTiy m 4«{ 1%) Ot4«fr'.*» M !•»
H r^«i *•* f»i
f
//•». fc„. »., Oll^^^«o.fn ,

CAl (*.) |V #w. (fi (fi m JM dj«<

RaU V||. .Vwm Ikatittg m* mraan^ ta .•*l»*SBf*f k»f Mitnthtt fa

Vh»t\
fsf Nouni ^ flufjJ »*:« n ftf 2 -
abuve -»bu«f« j^rntf).
•IrbiM (r*ff-TO» »irv.r*h
fldrKCfrrO- advice*
Air(r<i> 4if»
beef (ni »i a'nj -bcevr%(**ait. p*n-2a).
compj** (tfifi) - co!n{vttt<* (»« rf«).
food (ara)-foodt lew).
Hon (e'tO— itont(«<t.
{4ige ('»MW)—i*«ue* Itfim. fm>.
ph)*i<; irTt^-fhj-nct («ft?nt firra);

return (<n'i)— return* <fr»n<i*'«r»rr).

vopcf veiper* {"'jtt *>

sand (»!•)— und* (fr^nn'r).
force (»^, iTT^'T)— force* (?Wi).
manner f^fNn)—manner* l»7*rm).
wood (?»rfl>— wood* (»*R> i

nnr er
nt ftr m
f hr nrei plural Hirepfr ^ fsrrrn uiffT « «w
«ru a ^
fff plural *jn?. rrfl 'tt ^
Why do you give me so many abuses without any reason ?
ihis gale is made of irons.
Sands are required for a house.
Buddha left his palace for the goods of men.
We cannot live without airs.
1 shall see you on my returns from Calcutta.
I hit the ball with ail my forces.
My little children are learning alphabets.
He has three issues.
 NOUNS 153

abuse, iron, sand, good, air, return, force,

alphabet issue ?;i snrt^ plural if inffn TT *T?t

•srq 5T^ i

Rule Vlll. Nouns haring same form in both Numbers

jG Nouns 1 3ft singularfpn plural ? ?t 5^ # r?ft f ^ I"— i

sheep, deer, cattle, swine, salmon, yoke, brace, gross, stone,

hundredweight, pice, police, public, means, innings, senes and
species, trrif ‘s’ 5prm wrr plural «i suca irff »>t i Fr msnft 37t

He has five sheeps and seven deers. I have five pices.

You have three yokes of oxen and four braces of bud.
Ff^mt S sheeps, deeis, pices, yokes wtr bracts ^
sheep, deer, pice, yoke sfir brace wbt 'sitft? i

Rule IX- Numeral Adjectifc and the Noun

f? Nouns ^% «t Definite Numeral Adteetive k

singular rxir i, ^ Indefinite Number err etx f;
plural FT rrwr K 5?r—
pair, dozen, stone, hundred, thousand, score, gross, hundred-
weight.

five dozen pens; six stone weight; three hundred rupees; four
thousand rupees’’ two score; two pair of shoes.

f5? nsfy Nouns 5: <r?3t Definite Numbers (firfNn rr*?) sie

^ I nrfcT'c five dozens, sis stones, three hundreds, four thousands Ferfr
nr? ^ srns 1 1 irf? Ft ti»5l & 3n atu ft, (ft ftst
plural ft Gatrn 1,
dozens of pens; hundreds of boys; scores of men; thousands
of books; several pairs of shoes.

ext dozen Si dozens rfht hundred S; hundreds snf?

FTtn
^ I, Ffff% F?^ rten tt fW fhii I \

EXERaSE
Q. Correct the following sentences—
(a) I have three dozens pins (b) How maey pair of shoes do you require ’
(d) There are two thousands boys in ourcoIle{e. (d) I have three hundreds
books.
Hmtt~ (a) dozen; (W pairs; (c) two thoosand; (dl three hundred.
 154 now TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH

Rule X. Nouns coding in *lcs’

Nouns ^Ir I' srrfi ? ‘/cs’ sm I,

mathematics, poliUcs. classics i ^ i Number

*‘This is not so simple a matter as it is someiimej lAouffel....

T/ie rules that seem to emerge are (/) Singular for the name of a scien
strictly so used; (ii) Plural for those names more loosely used, e
for a manifestation of qualities, often recognizable by the presence
'Ills,' 'the' etc. —
His mathematics arc weak. Such ethics are cbomi
able. The acoustics of the hall are faulty, (ui) The presence of a Sing,
lar noun complement of the makes the verb singular— Mathematics, *

even Athletics, Is his strong point.” — FOWit

WTHT BTfT «UT I (1 fe sa (fsRi SPtt Jf ‘ics* rpTI f)
gnlar ^ nVn
Physics is
^ tii% fiptfi

taught even in schools to-day.

i; sm?' an

Mathematics requires practice

TT. mrr«i plural a ufr fctfr fm rt *i f***

^g»ff’ (quality or properly) an ahi f), si%—

His mathematics are weak.
“Most men’s politics sh much too loosely about them.”
T? emf a mathematics dig politics «t plural >f J« «»

aqff% rrfT « arn «t atu mp airo *«rr; mathematical qualihe*

«?rt: political qualities «t ita flai 1 1 sra ra awfl ^ ^—
Mathematics is his favourite subject.
Policies is an interesting subject,

aa aiwf 3 mathematics sir politics & far? ^

1 1 T5W v^tn singular if jsr ? i

*r» ^ aif? fa*nf politics
*1

snrl’i political qualities % wr if pfuntl if jwi J. af ns f—

chtmge.
“politics are the outcome rather than the cause of social
-O. M. IREVELYS*'

arar if politics ci Jorhr Political Science (at ^ ^ ®

sTSt JST ^ e?tT T*r^T nehi singular 5 nef % i

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentences-
<b)
ti) Metaphysics are
Matheoi
subject, (c) Physics deal snOi Hear. Light and Sound (d)

difficult to tearn
 NOUNS 155

ffmts— U« Sinjulat Verb* m #11 the seettnees.

Rok XI. Pltital of letters, fiptres and abbrerialions

1. Nouas sfR Pronouns tjiir «i plural 0Tor>w: srs?

ftar I fsT «w 3 f»r ssrer plaral 's tpiRET t', stfT

if— iPs; but— bufs; shall— shalPs; will— will's.

I do not like your if's and but's.
2. Ttfta^ir^ Letter («<n) «7 plural 's sm sR

p— p's; 1 — I'a.

This word is full of p’s and I’s.

3. Kt plural 's sfr w? asTOl ani V, a* (figure) h f?fm

wrr. trj? if 5nl; 5&—
S-5’s: lO-lO's
Your S's are like 3*8.

4. abbreviations w\ plural letter ^

% 3 %—
p-pp: i-il.

?tt p <n «5 i page «?rT pp ct «w i pages, wl srrr 1 & line n

^wilwTiiftTllftlineswt (

5. rs abbreviations (sftiB r*?) »T plural s frrrfl rwi J. »e

ferft or ere elm t; ih—
M.P.— M. Pi; M.A— M. A.$; B. A-BA,s
ojl M. P. n sre i Member of Parliament, M. A. «T Master of
Arts she B> A. Ti Bachelor of Arts, r^r rr»tT firrf) sofO' rteiertm
1 1er< r*!f & degree (Terfo) «ST ebi n m asm plural ‘s wm *t e^ni
5mi 5?t—
B. A.— B. A ’s (degree); M. A.— M.A.’s (degree)
6. Proper Nouns wt plural ift myrm: «rrt tt'ti i, er frrft ri>7 an
^ efe 5Jin plural Tai?t it tft s ?r>ii « plural i^rwi *i n^in J. 3^—
Mary— Marys (not Maries); Henry—Henos (not IfenrUs)
There are several Marys and Henry# in this town.
Correct the foltowlngsenienees—
These M. P.’s are honest Your 7s are like 5s. Most of the
N(. A.’s are unemplojed.

Role XII. (.atln Nouns rndiu; in 'am'

Rule (a)— Latin V frj w > fiaV H umm r
 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH

memoranda: mediu„_„rti;. "7“'

ri
^5 I'—
*« Tin 5T I ^
ftrf^ ^ "'“'"lx

has been dravm up.

up.
The agenda have been drawi

^ f^«9—The agendum
plural
media
‘med1'i~j^1'“'"^'*lr
sr?? i
^
^
w»f (spiritualistic sense)
M
has been drawn

^
? mediums.
up.

rm

"/« the spiritual,

Stic sense, the plural
Is always mediums:'

Sisters of America were

f®* all mediums.

SwM T* * ^ "T. sigf^ ^ ,

‘UDJ’ ^ «??r *a’ cr «Ti irff.

decorum-decoroms: forum-fonimc
harmo7’l'77“’''““’’
7?™°°'“"’- norlr»m-.o.-
irams, pendulom-pendijlums: pelrt>Ieum-p«,„]cum,: pomalam
-pomatumi; premium-premiums:
quorum-quorums.
exercise
Q. Correct the following sentences—

Jdf Wh , J •’f *>'"« «' "o* J"

***" ’ <*) Do you know the ejeaduiM
of the mLTins
***** dicu: (b) strata; (c) pendulums: (d) memoranrlt;
<e) agen^j^^^”

Role XHI. Latia Noom ending fa ‘os’

Latin J' fbwe w?t J ‘us’ } j trci ajTWW ‘us* ^

‘i’ 3 tTff R TSfdl f; 33—
alumnus— alumni; focus— loci; fungus— fungi; genius-
genii; radius— radii; terminal —termini.
 .

NOUNS 157

Nole— Genius ^ 'sfJnwiifl *7fa' «rw ff geniuses ?>m I,

genii :Tft t

Rule XIV. Greek Nouns ending in ‘h* or ‘on’

Rule (a)— Greek sR t «inT ^ ‘is’ 1 1

aaci
‘s' ‘es’ if ?*ra! I; 5ft—
analysis— analyses; basis— bases; crisis— crises; hypothesis
— hypotheses; oasis— oases, parenthesis— parentheses; thesis— theses.

Role (b)— Greek ti*5[ ? fsRfi *t^ ‘on’ rfsi f i

*on’ ^ ‘a’ »f e55rft ft ?^fn 5; 3ft—

criterion — criteria,

phenomenon— phenomena.

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following seniencej^
(i) Out eounlty is ptouil ot gttat senu like Gandhi end Nehru (b> Our
country is facing many cnsisei. (c) Mon of (he ihesises are worthless, (d) II is
a wonderful phenoinena. <e) What are (be entenons ol selecuon 7 (fj There are
nos many oasises m a deserL <t) Wonderful phenomenons have suddenly
eppeared
Mifilt— (a) geniuses; (b) crises; <c) theses, (d) phenomenon; (e) criteria:
(f) oases, (g) phenomena

Role XV. Noun repeated after Preposition

tifk fVtfr Noun Preposition % jrmi nw ift at Noun (sfl

Preposition ngft sftt

City after city was destroyed.
ft erni t) Singular Number ft ^ I, Ift—

Row upon row of delicate green is soothing to the eyes.

Ship after ship is sailing by
One hour after another (hour) is passing,
fsf airijT ft after ^ upon ft qgn aiT wft ra Noun si singular
number ft oat »nn 3, ^ 3 i «rfk ft>TT ftren srifn—
were destroyed.
Cities after cities
Hows upon rows of delicate green are soothing to the eyes.
Ships after ships are sailing by.
Hours after hours ate passing—?ft ft i

Rule XVI. Article, Adjective and Noun

and ft AdjecUvCift if! Noun r:i rnftir ^ l^tT
ftsi=r ^ ft Adjective ft rrs Article sr^,?ftcT Noun plural number ft
 '
"'uni CORRECT ENOUSII

‘um’
Jir-
% a»CT ‘a’
w
STT frA-
J*r V
,J,

da,R„-d«
m^oranda; madiua.-„cdia; '”™"“‘'""-

^ agenda a;i jpfRJ singular sftr plural TR

agendum
5)^

The uje„*&,a been

drawn up. The ngenAr toe been dram

^IsfRisr Sfhr ffi

Rtn niT InntI—The agendum
has been drawn up.

Tlural .7ed7a''etot“""""lZ T““ ”

sr-^ifni^ w»T
*!.» w me.
(spintualistic sense) Jf mediunis,
media :rff i

"ft lie spMimIMe aenre, lie pW I, always mediums"

Ameiica were all mediums.

.lann w ’Am nnij, 'um'

« 5;
«
ae^'d’
W ™ll am
anirfriTanSlirtli

‘’'“™'"-d«»ramsi forum-ronims
harmoto77“’’''“™’
harmonium-h rmoniums;
museum-mnseums; noslrnm-nus-
" nuL, '’'"‘'"'“"-‘“"‘'uluinsi pelroleum-petioleums; pnmalunl
pomatums; premium— premiums;
quorum— quorums.
EXERCISE
Q. Correct l/ie fallowing sentences —
•** cjrefutty in lupporl of your dictaj
iA<t .t,
(b) Can yw
Thependota of lh«e dock* arc no! fa order
Wh .
memorindum* have been prepared f
'f (e) Do you know the iseoduou
of the meeting ?
ZA/t/r- (a) data ...dicta; (b) scrau; (e) pendulum*; (d) memoranda;
<e} agenda.

Rule Xni. Latin Noom endln" In ‘us’

^ Latin tr^ J atfr H ‘us’ rgm ) j ^srtT firfJT ‘us* ^

TS ^ 3^—
alumnus— alumni; locus- loci; fungus— fun|i; genius—
genii: radius— radii; terminus— termini.
 NOUNS 157

Note— Genius i w ft geniuses 5>?n J,

genii sfft t

Role XIV. Greek Nouns endins In ‘is* or ‘on’

Rule (a)~Greek jg rp? ? pRi «irn ft ‘is* tsm J

^^
ft: r

‘s' ^ *es' ft ^ ?5rai \l a?r—

analysis— analyses; basis —bases; crisis— crises; hypoihesis
— hypotheses; oasis— oases; parenthesis— parentheses; thesis— theses.

Role (b)— fg ift Greek S' fsRti ft ‘on’ tjtn S i 35m

‘on’ ^ ‘a’ ft »egft ^ f^ttn S; —
criterion — criteria;

phenomenon— phenomena.

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the JoUowing sememes —
(a) Our country n proud of treat (enii tike Gaodbi and Nehru, th) Our
eoustry IS faeincmany crinres. <e) Most of ibe tbesises are worthless, (d) It jt

awondetful pbenomena. («) Whatatetbecnienoosofseltciion? (f> Tbeteare

not mao) oasises lo a desert, (g) Wonderfal pheDomenoas have suddeaty
appeared.
(a) geniuses; (b) crises, (c) theses. (d| pheROmeaon; (e) eriteria,

(f) oases; (g) phenomena.

Rule XV. Noun repeated after Preposition

trfic Ppfft Noun «> Preposition % ui< sttWi eiift fft at Noun (sfl

Preposition ^ sr?a sftr at? eirai $) Singular Number ft Tfttn h lift—

ft

City after city was destroyed.

Row upon row of delicate green is soothing to the eyes.
Ship after ship is sailing by.

One hour after another (hour) is passing,

aiaal’ ft after sfk upon i irh <nn at? «nft ai^ Noun aft singular
number ft toi mn t. «> fls f I 5lt ftnr fiwi sum-
were destroyed.
Cities after cities
Rows upon rows of delicate green are soothing to the eyes.
Ships after ships are sailing t^.
Hours after hours are pasgng—^ ft am tntfti ^nft 1

Rule XVT. Article, Adjective and Noun

nft and ft ftga rrfty Adjectives ft: fiw itvrift Noun an irft>r ft ^ir
fta^t car ^ Adjective ft Article snft, sfl ar Noun plural number ft
 128 Plow TO WHITE COHHTCT ENOLISI’

trrt «'%« Adjectifc

St sr^ Ariicle mt ft. nt *f Noua lij

gular number Jf trsT 3^—

I am an eraminer of ihf Pjina and Bihar VnlrtrsUlfs.
I am an examiner of the Palna and the Bihar l/nhtrsllf. ‘

aff Palna aAt Bihar w.i titn Adjeclive «t |*! 3 »r and t ^

3 1 stS IMS if T* ?> Adjective (Patna) i si^ Article mw 3 i at
Plural Noun (Univeriitlca) «t am jm 3 i am ? r^ rt Adjec
tivei Patna «Vt Bihar i sr) Article «T7i mfVf erf Noun (tTnoer
i

aity) singular 3 i sft Sf^ am if Singular Noun at sfm ^ »ptT sVt fH

3 Plural ^1. at at ««« ^ mti « s*t«J Numeral Adjective % Rule I!

4 min i| jM I

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the folloveing sentenees~~
(a) The Chineellor of iPk Patna and Bihar Ummsity came to ourcc^kre.
<b) The Chancellor of the Patna and ibe Bihar Univerxtn ca.-ne to our eollrre-
<c) 1 very much liWe the literature of the 16ih and the I7lh ceatunei.
///eta—(a) unitenlciea; <6) unneriiiy; <c> ctotury.

RuleXVn. Nooerat Adjective. Fracllon tad the Nona

sft Cardinal Numeral Adjective i nn ‘a half* tn 'a quarter’ «t^.

ef) Noun ^ (Numeral Adjective it Number ^ sm if tacO Cardinal i
ai? ?6f sftt arr Noun « tit ‘a hulF tn ’a quarter* 5 r—
I have one rupee and a half
You have two rupees and a half,
TJT emf 3 Cardioals one stVr two ^ nm ftti 3. ‘o°*’

singular f ertr 3 one ^eiT rupee win

'two* plural jtvt
rupee i tit ‘a half*. 3 Plural Noun ‘rupees* am^rdinal i ^
?tT rai BTr f rupees 3: tit ‘a hair ar rt ^ i
^^
I have one and a half rupees.

You have two and a half rupees.

3 sr^ tirf Noun af) Cardinal % tit
t ^ ^
—
^
TIT Ts 1 |3J TTTFta srfr 3
ftsi nri 1

gave him three and a quarter mangoes.

I
The meeting was held for two and a half hours.
TB Tmf 3 rfl Noun ^ ®nK *a quarter’ tm ‘a hair 3r tit rat tTt

!• at ^ BTf
I
I T^ Cardinal
gave him three mangoes and a
% air Tmi
quarter.
33—

The meeting was held for fivo hours and a half.

 NOUNS 15 ?

SH Pi^nr ^ *f3au i
“....6*fw«n /SOI end ISH the inhabitants of England, Wales
*’
and Scotland rose front eleven to sixteen and a half millions.
— O. M. TREVELYAN
3?^ sixteen and a half millions 3; ??sl sixteen millions and a haif
i

Note-irf?CaTtJin&l AdiectWc7rttFfaction(ahalf in a quarter)

^ and tBa:i smVr (multiply) i w a? Noun
plural number if 'a half 31 'a quarter’ i 315 afifTl Cardinal Adjective
^ 31^ ST^, S&—
One and a half times.
Two ond a hal/ times.
33 331 rnsil

One time and a half.

Two times and a half.

EXERCISE

Q. Correct the foUoviing sentences—

(a) The length of chit table is one and half feet (b) This pen haa coit me
seven aod s quarter rupees, (o The Britishers ruled India for two end a half
tentuiias Id) Ii is three limes aod a bait as large as that
one foot and a half, <b> seven rupees aod a quarter, (c) (wo
centuries and a half; (d) three and a half times as large as that,

Rule XVni. Adjectives used as Plural Nouns

3ft Adjective an tnfft Plural Noun wfft gt, fit qril the wrar
1 1 rttfeq ‘s’ 31 ‘es’ srrwr plural aaRi I, »et— .
The poor and the sick were helped.
The poors and the sicks were helped.
3Tf qrsn 3Ta3 33 {'Hi sira, Ttffft poor sift sick ait Adjectives
I asian plural ‘s' 3;n3t *i3i 1

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the /of/aw«ng sentences

The lames aod Ihe blicds deserve our sympathy, (b) Neither the ptvors
(a)
northerichescanescape death. (c)The sicks are not properly looked after in
hospitals.
Hinis—fi) The lame and the bliod; (b) Ihe poor. ..the rich; (c) the sici.
Rote XIX. Nouns and their Gender
Rule (a) — fsie Noun sstqr 3ir masculine 31 feminine 31 neuter
 HOW TO WRI7T CORRECT
ENGLBJi

s-4 fe be.
ra
his
*
A tL i *' il, she. Its stVe her tt n
*

’
a]-j-~

-I' is
i;

-
X’
“°
S
®'°''" ' ™ 1^ fni J-
•
fereese iB for^ig, 1^?^-,/° to be™ «*b

—The E«njLN EcoNo\fisT ; Feb ?

‘

o--».er=Bbee, I * „ ,,

r- < ^ «x-chaace'r^„^, n=T she s^T her st^ i

M^...,.e feBic, , P„n„„,

„ ^
r^^:,'
r esvnine Tt
'

T* ttzj f;
fTf '*’>
5i_
^''TBrSMisceJmeCencitt*!'

iLsdattft

... .
Ml} loivarJs to parenll bill llu
U»»i^S«A,i^fJ.Wefv

V '1:
* '"*“ <•' Common OenJer »
.
. '"s
M
4i,Tsl.w CienJer i rr.'ftoun (he. hii) rr »^Vr jrr ? j
Nearer «i FeKi:Taf Geiier •itT^ sri i

N^ ;*>— T^e CB'-i'a.'a CerJer i; Nouns « 7r^ girf. ttoman. «?

f.-^^4‘e «~'e rr eiN,

S fiv-sl. ’•‘cman stuJerti, female child, fcmj'e
teaeVt, f.vsJe J.vt.v
» !•** I '•‘"1 e -vCe^der « Tronoun TT vsyn r^in sitter t

N««ef Nv'ca* (Common Gender * Nouns) 4 J I.11I/

'<V *(4 *<»> |f.«..j,.;^ jfji, 4<rit, estf* lady^ffl^K'-'*

|Vv ',^^• i' latV •’ sN t'^'T ) I «*; «r»»i H ie\ «| mi «fKt 4 f’l*

(.' “tV i‘ >iO'~»n «s i' vr«i«»(ir>m *!«} —

t’KiciST.i*t fociirion as a nuiri of iff
j.-A.',
, ,-x. a ei*^*wuf
K,tf,» /.'•(, ^».-.) St for a
' r^'^'Jhe frrftrrr-J *httt it tVUl Of cun tf rnU'lf

r' jL** •wvxjr** or 'ft’^U' MtmU te tet.'er lKin'lu‘fy t

• rW IfTtlerant fufjetnoitt of
' : ^frto^ r
 TiOUNS I6l

EXERCISE
Q, Correct the following sentences —
<a) India has rich mineral deposiCs and va«l population and so it can be
reasonaWy expected that she w«U be « great power »n neat luture it all its tesoiii-
cts are fully exploited for the tmplecRentatidn of her Second Five-Year Plan.
{S| A reader should not blindly accept everything she finds in a book, (c) A
husband must love her wife and a wife must love his husband (d)He does not
care for her daughter.
Hi^ii — (a) her resources, or it will be its its Second Five-Year .

Plan; (bl he finds; fc) his wife her husband, <d) his daughter

Role XX. Noun and the NnmmatWe Case

Noun tPl ^rrf (Nominative) ifl 7% Nominative
Case j! virf^,
Dickeni is a Vitiotian novelist-
Keats is a romamic poet.
If?! Dickens w'Vx Keats wn 4 «in J i TSftt? *1 Nomtnaftvc Case
ai I gJt emf 1^
Dickens's is well known for hts humotit.
Keats's was a great lover of nature.
Xft rWTf Dickens aflr Keats wit ^ Possessive Case i nst
•ni t, aft K*tw: >p i ( 5cf Dickens’s sftr Keats's k wirt Dickens sftt
Keali ^rfee i

Rale XU Noun and the Possessitc Case

joint possession
Rale (a)— efk tjl 'n ^ % sfw Nouns
ilu erw ^
and «Yti
fwt ««?!
-m,
«Tv?i ff
tit

stti
^aro
Noun S 's’ m( !Fim Possessive Case attwr atm It ef? ia5t« sepa-
^
’ )

rate possession (s5R'S3^ fa’a) «i «iu ow wiiT tT, % H-ka: Noun

ft (
’ ) er (’8) 5m«r Possessive Case esner niin t, 5%—
J. M. Dent & Sons’ shop.
Keats’s and K eats's poems.

*15^ Tetr?! ft ft «n^ aisi Noun (Sons) it (

’ ) r%
Possessive Case erner mrr i, etrtft Dent & Sons' $ joint possession
«i el’f Ttiii i I
ft Keats «V Yeats eW tt (’s) ft

Possess^e Case
% efti^ ri siTK fevi *115—
rrm wffreff separate possession vn ^ fttn

I have placed orders with J. M. Dent's & Sons’.

1 have read Keats and Yeats's poems, ti) ft sm?

tTft i

Role (b)— ef? house, school, shop, church rrmlft Nouns {fksrfr
tnut n
ii'q fi)«rwWTO5 ft Object Possessive
It. w. c. t.-ll
 162 HOW TO WRITE COKRECT ENOUSH
Case ^ Noun i tk «rm» tfr Nouns ^ fen ftn nt tr^i f; <rK
^

Nouns Possessive Case i Noun ^ srr^ ?i?2r 3 Subject *7

tiV ?*l srtT ai a&—
I went to BlackweU's (shop).
I went to the barber's (shop).
The barber's of customers.
is full

Blackwell's is prompt in service.

«T?f «rf^ ^ if KUit; Blackwell's sfrr barber’s ^ sr? sft Noor
(shop) smn I ^ Objective Case if | j tHfer nr ^ shop fen 517 i
^ 1 1 ff«n if anin barber’s srfe Blackwell’s sr tit Noua
(shop) arm ferm sig^ I, TTffe arf shop Subject ^1

EXERCISE
QCorrect the following sentences —
(a) Dickens's was a popular novelist (b> 1 like Keats ani Yeats’s potuj.
(e) I went to Blsckwell's &
Soas’. <d) The barber's is far from Ibis place
Hints—(») Dickeos:(b) Keats’s sod Yeats’s poemr, (c) Blackwell * Sons'}
(d) Tbe barber's shop is....

REFRESHER COURSE I

Correct the following sentences—

1. There are not many ceniries in this villsge.
2. Wbat are the peoples of this place doing ?
’
3. Whose poultries are these
4. All the cattles have been sold away.
J. Why are there more os Ibao e$ in ibis poem ?
6 She is In her teen’s
7. Don’t write 3s like 5s
8. Is It a giri's school ?
9. What is this book’s price?
10 He was paid two week’s wages
11. It 11 a nice poetry
12.There are two females here.
13 He gave me five ten nipees's notes.
]4. I gave him three anda half rupees.
15 . How many M- P’s have eome T
(«)teeB^
Hi«rj—( 1 ) gentry; (2) peo(^ (3) poultry: (4) cattle; (5) o’s than e's;

(7J S’sIikeS's: (II guls'.fOlihe price ofthisbook;{IO) weeks'; (IDimice roeiC/

Of IS a nice poem; (12) two wo nen; (13) five ten-rupee notes; (14) three nipeessfw

a half. (IS) M P.s

REFRESHER COURSE II

Explain nhy tbe following sentences are correct or Incorrect—

1. He likes new poetries
2. The i»neries of Ranch) are charming
 HOUMS 163

3. These news «re very bad.

4. Tbe Indians are brave peoples.
5. All the furnitures were burnt
(. Help the deafs and blinds
7. He gave me five and half rupees.
8. 1 save him many food advices.
9. He is a student of three-year’s descee course
to This boob has been tecommended by the Bibat and the Bhagalpur
Universities.
It. How many babys and ladye are there 7
12. His leetbs and fcets were broken
13. She is a good actor.
14. She IS the hero nf this novel.

REFRESHER COURSE III

Rewrite ike following senieitces, changing all the words into their
opposite number —
t . These cbildtea ate tmee.
3. The leaves oftbeieirees are green.
3 She does not do bet doty well.
4. He takes meat and fish daily.

S They do not love their bustonds.

 PRONOUNS
TEST VOUBSELF
Q. Correct or Justify the following senienees and then compare
your resultv/(th the key given oterleaf -

1. Tb« two boys are beatios one oooiher.

2. I, you. aod he sat) io the same boat.
3. You, ttt and I tried my very best.
4. Nei^er of the three Iraoks is very useful.
5. Everyone of the two guests reached io time.
6. own choice.
Neither of the two sisters bad their
T, One must a\ways do bis duties sincerely.
8. Myself can do this wotk without yout help.
9. Do you really know who you are speaking to ?
10. I do not like them who are not dutiful.
11. You are the man whom I believe can help me.
12. Yours of the 15tb ultimo b to band in time.
13. Received your letter and I thank you for the same.
14. It is me but this is him.
15. It is him who is really guilty.

16. 1 know the man to be he.

17. This is the only book whom I like.
18. We must not do such actbns that are harmful.
19. Each of the soldiers saluted their commander.
20. It is strictly between you and I.

( 165 )
 KEY
(i) Correct— Rule (. fee and 1— Rule 11. (3) our best—
(2) You,
Rule III. (4) None of—Rwle V- (5) Each of— Rule VI. (6) her own
choice— Rule VII (b). (7) one's duties—Rule VII (c). (8) I m)*
self-RuIc IX. (9)whooi-RuIe XV. (10) those who-Rulc X\1-
(U) who I believe— Role XV. (12) Your letter— Rule XVIl. (13) for
it or this —
Rule XV|1(. (14) Correct— Rule XX, note (a). (15) he
who— Rule XX, note (b). (16) bitn— Rule XX, note (e). (17) that or
which— Rule XIII. (18) as are— Rule X. (19) his eommaoder— Rule
VII (a). (20) you and me— Rule IV.

( 166 )
 CHAPTER VII

PRONOUNS
Pronouns «?tr Verb % tn^ «V Syntax 3: sMTiii i tf
eran^t Ji fif ffj ^ Pronouns qr «nii I nq>r fttv fr i

Rule I. ’Each other’ and ‘One anolher’

h Reciprocal Pronouns ^ t 50^ «iraRT ^ 5: win if ns

osar URi % ft: each other vi sqk si qt ^ fin shn k, sr one
anolher vri s> ^ «rft« ^ fas—
“Eoch other fi usetf whtn i*’o pttsons or things are eoneerned', one
another ts used when rnore than two persons or things are concerned
NESflELD —
ss «w\ipts st wsr «st wwt rpjs
"The differentiation ts neither of present utility nor based on
historical usage."
— fowler
SW1S s! 5?t wfhRl tn a?gal i ftiv sft one aooihei ^ siftn wft
k IS Sj *ft fhSRI I—
"They both simpered and looked upon one another.”
—WCHARtaOH
ffl-s 5: 'fr w>i ft eft waN# sr^t—

Shakespeare the effect is due to the way in which

"IVhereas in

Ihe characters act upon one anolher tn /onson it is given by the way in
whleh Ihe characters fit in with eadi oiher," x. s. eliot —
"The arlisiic result of Volpone is not due to any effect that
VolpoM, A/osca, Corbino.Corbacfco andVoltore have upon each other.”
— T. S. EUOT
•*
. . neither the Chestnut nor the Oak spoke to one another.”
— T. F. POWYS
"For you and I are foreigners to one another, /ore/gnerj/n time."
— ALDOUS IlUXUY
ssf SS^ eixq J( characters « es: vtr one another ai cTtn jut %
sit j'Txt r< each other ei i
another « vt wfh ^
s*i% qq
qiqqr i
i ft each other «?lr one
fTW Jf sft «qft;aT ^ fstq each
^
other VI sqPi 5«n i rfftS Risq a ^
^tt iChestnut and Oak) « ftn

( 167)
 — — ^

16? uo-A To»»mcoixicTi-v;tcj»

C3f ascihff r;, »T VciScJi wrr* r 6»rrTy=^ yry py"; y;;' *, yr

Fo»Ifr err* »r«'>r ss*»T i rri rs^s-jT? '‘rr? f fr e:i
oJbrr t^} cot aftoJijff i ^ g r»-y* i t*. ^
rr s rr. i ti t= tt?’ * r^s
^ ^ J —
Tbt Ihree t tttn tors racicfkrr.
The t»o m!fn l3'»t of.t oryithtr.
Thj l»o iota brl;»ed ov <aw.'A'’r. « ry» *7 r=r rf» ?.

•»^r*fic 5; irr: ? f- I ^ it- to tt*: C sr» 5 j

Rale II. Pro99C9% tai (&ttr Pothice

^
f-»T ? r^-«^ Pctv«» r Nocai « Pr«3«» r:?,

«T^ Second Perwa vtt ?. 7=^ «? Tt-.n! Pmos «?* 5 FirtSI^ncn ^

(2 3 II, 5%-
J'oa, he icd / are g oisf.
Twftr «5 »755 ?—
I. }cu zs6 he mezitbcTt. t »a£ ycu »rs ftvoii.

J«, he lad fvtat tier?.

Ten and / are lati fnesdt.
Nate — e*r ttw 5 'r^ r,T ’T e »» . f*^ ^
^ » *1? rr* Rm Penoa ^ srt ?.

/ 2 cd he are fa2ty.

Rale HL Pra»os» od f&ttr Pmoa ad Nssicr

Rab (a>—rV ar^r 2 r- P-Tsoci sf Sc=3» sT Pn?s»«^
^^rrr Pxoaaaa •trs'^ ^ Pranaa
pTi First Pexsoa noral {tt?) nox ?: 'f?
Poa, he asd I ztt tJoizg oar <!ct:es «eIL
Toa, Rew and / base tried oar fc«t-
T7
Fim Person
5 *T Persons
Rural “we’ c; ^rr®'
? r>t ir Proaoca ^r? srr
2T*P7'»*^‘^
^
fi T^fjrr •

ai fK>fr Proooca acr an^i i

Rale f6>—snr
=s>^ ?!": TtE r»
2 Sscorsd Ttird Persons cr
PTonoEaarxTfW^a^fr, =^aTi Sesoad Persia Rc^
^
(} 08) ci *erx-r ^r r

Yoa and be did cot do tew dcti» ••rfL ^ ,

JO * Second Third Persocs zsd » ^ »*
r. rrr t tT
T=faf Toar C7 sab" f l a?T fets *t tbt-r ^ »
 ritoxiUNS 169

Rale IV. I’fonoufN tnd Ihclr C«'e

Cl? Pronounj lil 'ici i\ Case J{

It is betneen him and ntf

Lci him and mr lead the procession

•rn ? f* 'between' Preposition } «iV rnfre rwiireObjcc-

lUe Case 'him' *1 eett I'rai vntn V i f« 5 't^ Pronoun tme) « me
and tm i 1 s^ eiat «
Objcctrse Case Jl wt nci i » cf?

between him and I. flt ei

It IS flnr. aerfe CT Pronoun Ob-
jeetne Case 3) «>t NominaiiseS i ern »ht 3 ‘him’
Objective Case H ^ f»»t and i; ftrt «« f«»r Pronoun k hit tTii net > i

sefne {HtT Pronoun 'me* »n Objective Case 3 4 *nt wTi 3 hitt— i

Let him and I lead the procession. It is between him and I. nl c? «rr5
rcti wffT 'him' Objective 3 J «ftr 'I* Nominative S i

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the /<i//£»H/Bjie«/fnfe»—

(a) Ui h« *nJ I work loseihrr tbi There > rnendihip beiween you
kadi (0 The book tv liked byhtmaodi tdt both he and me were asked
(odoli. (e) I aed he ere fan frKndt (f> (te and t have done my work
lofcther (s) You and he diJ not do (heir doty well ih) Let she and I do it
(i) Me end my hutband have been invited.

/rmr/— (a) him and me. (b) you and me, (e) him and me; (d) he
.andl; (e> he and J, tO out work; (|> yooi d<it>; (h) her and roe; (1) my
husband and I.

Role V. 'ESlhn', ‘Neither’ and ’Doth'

Pronoun * clffl at3 cr tm asoinT a> erftRTT cr «*5«f

« ^ Thi 4, cl F etPra; i fee «vft vfl I et « 5|; cither i|;

anj^one. neither * rra none (not one), aftr both « all ct nak
4, 53—
Either of the two pens will do
Ketther of the two pens will do.
Ttr Bctr i; »m rrff fes —
Either of the three pens will do.
ffelihcr of the three pens will do.
Boi/i of the three pens will do.
 1 5 —
170 jf'TA' tn ^ftrr rntx'rr

n'V t« *1 i ?
pf ihe ihtee pfn« wiH jfo.
AW fnPt rn*)prifi» ihfje wiIJ Jo.
/<// <he th!« r<nt«tH<!n.
Nolf fn*( rr» J fr anjon^. non: <Ttj til «: e-hr v if afV* i

rxrRC^E
Q CfrfCf/ /Ap /;,/A>w/,.- ,rntfn(ft—
(«) Clsli. iilrtf »'h1 «i'her wiT dA (^) Ne’e* fte t»>
tutntJ u;i (cj Actiatt iinjnpe of tse t*o q>K»{!<w. (J) tf

Ihe four honV« v)!! (I « It) Cither (hrtvcjmri nil (Uit Mw. (f) S?*
<<( my faoi^TA «tR<t <() Anyone t-f yhc l»o rr*n wwilJ be iWeJsl®
tbit «ctk.
flout u> anyone wt:! do; tby Jneither of the t»e; {<y either of It*
toe. (Jl N<*ne of IS« fi^r (et Anyone of th« three cjreert; 10 NrLter
of itiy !•<» {i<nt wfitrt oen; i|) fiiher of r.he loo men.

RafeYl. rich and F.irrjoM

Each %i trin ct ci ft ttfec •“n'f * fV» tT^ I, ^evetyete^TF^f

'*
0 ft f're « fw. f«ft Ktft Alft. aft—

Ea(H of Ihc tMO fueiU came.

Each of the ten fuesti came.
ETrr}vne of the fen fnests came.
AB7 WffA «rf « m Iff ft 4 fjTT er* ^ ^
ft

rtt ii ft * fsn *'t^ 2 eteryone «l i ^

•tra — Ereryone of the two guettt came. »ft er aT»7 <.* P h
cterjone «

^^
«rtf 4 far eveo'onf •tm J i

irfpt ^tTrt I

Rale VII. DistTlbatiec and SiDgalir Indefinite PronontH

Rple (a>— Dijtribulive Protioun? (each, everyone, cithe^o-^
neither) fim Singular Indefinite Pronouns (no one, nobody,
onjlx^
anyone, someone aod somebody) 4 Singular Prononns r?r^ ^

Masculine Gender ci auW 4 Synt« 3 Agreement s

tTT??ti ft rl mfr 1 ftrn fi whi ?
“/I is almost impossible for KasaoK to secure a correct
in tr
of bx% on n personal appearance or of the features of anyone
he is personally interested." *• —
Rule (b) — Distributive Pronouns (each, everyone,
either
 —

FROKOUMS 171

and ^ at? Feminine Gender % Noun

neither) a) Singular

Feminine Gender 5: Pronoun art nak ilar ’aifpr. Masculine a;i aft,
att—
J/eiiher of Xht two si&ttis has paid her tuition fees,
Neiilier of the two women has a choice of Aer own.
Eiiher of the two wives is dominated by her husband.
Foc/iof the two girls has prepared a dress /or herself.
E\er}one of the women has a taste of her own.
Jf neither, either,
eisRT each am everyone % Feminine
Gender S; Pronouns sn%
I',
sit ^5 I: spitRi Feminine Nouns
women, wives, girls wV women
SHT'. sisters, jst I nt tTC «
%
ri? ntfii I ^
^ Distributive Pronouns Feminine Gender if af? i

Feminine Nouns ^ <?»t Plural Pronouns (us, you ei them) er

Masculine Gender % Nouns siit, at a?f Singular Masculine Gender 5;
Pronouns Jra>r|t?ti,

Neither of them has done his duly.

Neither of the boys has done Air duty.
Rule (c)— One?*: ^Singular Indefinite Pronoun % fef
«?ione, one’s TT oneself «i 9^ ftar I. be, bis, him, himself liT

«rfl,
One must do one's duty.
One must love one's country,
one’s ^ his «t swia «?!,« ftat t safe? h «w i—
One must take eare of his health.
One should love not only Ai/nsri/but also others.

f’linni
U51 *wtr: one’s
^
^ oneself ct rritu ftar aift'C i ffe?, ih fau*: *n
JlJI

“One
H’Aoji/mpj up antf/foufijAcj his foeJtAree fiVnet, before he
comes lo the ground, may hate three hundred a year.”
—OLIVER GOLDSMITH
"One should, therefore, be careful not to make himself obnoxious
toothers.” —The Searoiught ; March 12, 1957
ta eisff if *JRi: one’s, one JTO oneself Rjftn ftar
sr# Ih^ sn farm qist^r & «dt J—
“But even when one is fully informed about Mr. Pound's allusions,
one's recognition has no significant effect” F, — r. lea vis

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentences —
(a) Everyone of the stiidents have paid Iheir tuition rees. (b) Everyone
 172 IfOW TO WRrre CORRECT E^CLISH

«r the two aUtinattve^ equally painful, (c) Kone should oppress iheir BtiS
boars, (d) Neither of the two wives looks after his dosnesttc affairs, (t) Each
the two sisters has a separate room of his own. (f) Neither of the tao sons lo*
their father, (g) Either of the two daughters loves their mother (h) One ino

not be blind to his owndefects. fO One can rise in life only when he puts for
his best not only for htinstU and his fatuity but also for others, (j) Nobody shot)
lose heart when they are la the teeth of difliculties fk) Everybody should fflia
their own business
/iintj — (a) has his; (b) each; (c) his. (d) ben (*) her; (Ohis; (Jlhc
<h) one's own, (i) when one puts f«th one's best not only for oneself w
cne’s famil); (i) he is, (k) his own.

Rale Vni. 'And' and the Number of Pronouns

Rule (a)— qf? and ff Singular Nouns & w etjf® 91 *
tn Singular Pronoun «7 sraW ^31 V.
Thtt Principal and Secretary has tendered his mtgnalion.
The Magistrate and Collector has prepared his statement.
The scientist and thinker has expressed himselfagainst the
of atom bombs.
fw ?i?Tf if the Principal and Secretary, the Magistfaie
Collector fiet the scientist and thinker i ftrr Singular Pronoun «
^
himself
5srT ar JT5 f. gstfr «r gl »7fos fW J erf his 1

« Ts:^ «pr: their sftr themselves «t w>n ajfwf fW 1

Role (b:— efr and ^ ipi Nouns i each 91 every sff

Singular Pronoun rr saw glttt »iffe. ^ft

Every boy and girl did hi* or her best to win the match.
Each man and each woman should try to help hh or he'
fellow beings.
r?r »if 3 f if Singular Pronouns wt nqtn erffr and if ^ Nouns
w eril each 91 every *? nete 5*1 ^ s Cfl their w mfr'r srji jff^t t

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the folhitin^ sentences—
(») Ram indShyamait-wy irregular in hi* habiW. <bl Th«
critichaie • scftcorocT (rt iheir bear! for Shainpeare fc) The p'**
every
Cbtrlrr has erprericJ hir views dearly. <J» Every man and
duly toward
K»»e i“seir own laate*. It} Every setemnr and Ihinker have a

their habrti, <b)ba» hisbeafi;fcl have txprtiitJ •

(Jl ha* bis or hrr. (e> has feirvocrety.

*
Ralel.X ReBetfie ProaoBiw gnd Cave
ReUcsive Pronouns «i vni vr wffs sem «rwi w^'er ^
 1

PRONOUNS 175

JlfjAfy will do it.

Himself and Hari tried but fai'ed.

I m>-sel/v. ill do it.

He himself and Hari tried but failed.

Note— Reflexive Pronouns 5j myseJf. our«el\e«, yourself,

yourselves, himself, herself, itself arid themselves, un self, ourself «fVt
themself ^ szihr «vt t

Rule X. ‘As’, ‘Such*, *The same’ and ‘As/That*.

Rule (a)— rrfJT 3 Prat Noun 3: such sn as nrh. nl as Noua

^ firt as ^r esfhr jhn I, who, which ei thai srcl, atf—
He is not such a good man as I expected.
As many questions as were set were answered.
tRtqT^aietT^maaiertrsuchainTli xHk f?re (mao
fin) pronoun'as' an ctVt % eiTj 3 questions 3: i as sriai i (

wftiT t?f% nx as ^ seW 5«ti i me 33 «r7 ftraf

— i

He IS not such a good man iltai I expected.

Ax many questions wAjcA were set were answered.
Role (b)—efx awe 3 Nouns 3 <1x3 the same wr setn rt. «> f3
Nouns 3 fire as et that an «eaiix ttr firan 3 flni } —Verb wt BelrT

wt3 Tt the same ^ mx that ut as «n?n i. ex Verb 3 xt3 ex as, i3—

This is the same pen ihailas I bought yesterday.
This is ibe some pen as yours (is),
ex^ etee 3 the same 3 ere Verb 'bought* wrei 1 xafee e?f the 1

same % er? that ei as wi sehi jai 3 5s3 ei?e 3 Verb (is) f?;et ssi 1
^
i

wa: XXI eRX 3 as wi spiW jsti f, that «i i ex? that wi seVi sits x")?!! l

xfT sTpu 3 eroeT « elw «fw »ri3x 1 1 ene^^r<WKfqx«iHe—

“T/ic use t>/ that or as w guided 6y t/ie /o/iowing rules—(1) IV'/ien
a verb is ea-pressed o/ler </, ur generwHy use that. (2) fyhen the verb
is understood h’c oJB'ays use as.** — j. c. NtiFiELD

5(tx« « stgatx *ie the same « Verb msi I xft that eit

esbi rWt it ex 3re Verb f^ei xxm ? tie as wi, 33—

This is thesame man that came yesterday.
This is not the same book as mine (is).
«xe sRiqf k iraigetx 5«l »«w 3 a) as ft ei irVi fWi ^ifce, that
w !TX'. ex ex3fwf 3 that 3 ex^as vretd>r<3 ^ xrferr
?
 174 MOW 7f» »*irc coBitfCT rvcLmf

ft: rhe j.imc « trt Verb i that «*lt « 5? fVtfi ,f, « jf,,
Jrrr ihai a"* *i 5Jt—
"h thli the «amf it. or the same lhaf, or the same, you sh/rtti

mr 6f/t>rf ’•'
—TifF Oxford DrenrwaT
"Thh ii ihf xamf limr-iahle you had tau year. This Is li<
^amc hetrip Jhat tton the race latl year"' — SOaafJ & MxnwoAi
nr wjsit if Hie same i arr Verb tt a* *0 Ifiat cr arPT ftn ^
J Tje } 5 ax siTfTT stV! } f« the aamc k arr Vetb ie? that f
•:t r> I r?. aft the tame i »it Verb ot5. fir as
wiffr. thai »i T^It !Tfi.

This it the tame book at youn.

that n ffe'm ;rf7 ft *mi | -xr. »nff (N'etfield) * Tf •

ffrrt Hnfw {

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the folloH-tng sentences—
(a) Th«re are many tuch men wbo 6o sot are lor oibert (b) 'h'e nnA
4]o iitcb aetiont that may injure ourcountry. tt)A>oa9yboystbatca]nevef<
marked present.
Hinn—it) at do not; (b) at may; (c) at one
Rale XI. Aniecedeat and the Case
Relative Pronoun ^ Antecedent id Possessive Case S ntT T'swt

These are the Principal's orders who must be obeyed.

I had the pleasure of Pam's company hAo is a
deh'ghtfu]

fellow.
3 who ?n Antecedent Principal's | sit ? JIamy, 5
qfS
tcbtT ff Possessive Case 3 aV ? j am etw
These are the orders of the Princrpal who must be obey^-
I had the pleasure of the company of Ram who is
a delfgh
fellow.

Rnle XII. ‘And, 'But’ and Relalire Prononn.

wrr Relative Pronouns ‘who’ ti ‘which’ 3: irs^ and m but
Antecedent t
(and who, but who, and whk*. but which) srt3

VlcrtiJ ^5*7 i,,

/ ,
from antecedent oy
"Do not separate the Relatire Pronoun its

read by all.
It is a good boot, rwn/wAicA should be
 pkcn«in)Ns 175

^1 RcIiUvc Pronoun Antecedent J book, tst

‘which* t wit
•rtf (Relative Pronoun wit Antecedent) «> ‘and' srtT »RPi «T ftsT nur

i I sr. and cr stj* 5 t anttw wit ^ a—

Ram is a pood man aiiltn-hou my friend,
erf who 5; and «t tti Relative Pronoun ‘who’ «1r rwi
Antecedent 'man' «t wsm »t WV i tnfsn oft and n iraVn ^ i

tw «7»a Jt and •> rn b,

^ t* f1 i «1
Note— Relative Pronoun and ^ buiva win thi % « w
vrrr a iW ^ wfvw Relative Pronouns »> wl^T »TtT i. ait—
it is a book \ihlch is useful <W hAiVA cserybody should
read.

ttTBTBl if and which wt bb>i ce}. *Btf« stfand i: gTtTtl Relative

Pronouns (which wit which) wt wlfT *iaj ) i flft 5rf «hich ci OBln
f)<TT, 1*1 and «T iral'I *TJ» T^nt »

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the folloKing tattentei—

(t) IhkeStiaw'seUyswho wsstsogddtamatiu <bi Ul.et to read Om

Shskespesre'isoAnets «)io was« («» poet, tc) 1 have read >our book and
whKb isvtli'Wtmen. (d) lie has bought a oew house and whKh has cosi him
Rs. MOOj-.
//iitfj—(a)t&eplanorSha«, (b) the sonnets of Shakespeare; (c) book
which; (d) house whieh.

Rule Xin.''\'ho, l^'hose. Whom, Which, and That

Relative Pronoun ‘which’ «i aim int 05 (thing) wit *iaat
’(animals) ^ lin; f)m > sit who tjai whom srr r?f^ (person) 5? 1

trtfsrt who sst whom «t vi wmt fttt aaP: wt^n t, 3 (t~

This is the book HA<»it 1 like much.

This is the house » An was hudl last year,

book wit house i fet twyi; whom sftt who an jwi ^
s^li atf that ci which wiaainKPiiwtftti
Note — Relative Pronouns ‘whose’ <m ‘that’ wr SBlrr »3fa wit
^ % fea flfTT J I

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the fallowing leniettets —
The dogwho is here is mtae. <b) The
(a) cat whom I bought last year
is white, The book whom I have written has been liked by many,
(c) (d) The
school who was started last year is rooctioniDg well (e) The boy which is here is
wickeii, (O This H the house whom ilmilt last year

(a) that or which; 0>) that or which; (c) that or which; (d) that
or which; (e) who or that; (t) that.
 " I

176 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT INCilSH

Rule XIV, Compound RelaCire Pronouns

Compound Relative Pronouns, ‘whoever*. ‘whichever’
ever Interrogalne Pronouns wipti s?f^f fer^ srf ni
=5Tf^.

Whatever do jou want ? Whoever is there 7

5T??rl’ if sirrr: what aftr who ct wW /

Rule X\’. ‘Who’, ‘Whom’ and the Case

?rf5 Relative Pronoun ‘who’ Subject ct NomitiJii't

Case if who Object ^ «ijr at Objective Cast?
whom, —
I love those who love me.
I love those whom my friend loves.
Jffl 11 ‘who’ Subject I. avTfV tt?rr Finite Verb ‘love’
«fTT uTrftn sitl Nominative Case n rm >m t'~whc*,
jnt ^tr ? ‘whom’ Transitive Verb ‘loves’ sit Object J nV ifftd

Objective Case $ whom.

fTife u'rt 5—
U'ha are you speakinj of ?
Are you sure nAo he really wanted to punish ?
Do you know rAo you are speaking to ? ,

It IS those wAcm I was told were killed.

He is the only man whom 1 believe can help >ou.
?atr« ecf Subject J jou
•'t
iTtf VT?l »TTr H ‘who* Subject ?.

rrfT ^'erb i arc, erl ’ll Preposition (of) «t?t ^ *T Object f

'
»?fT nRrt who « whom cr srhr rw ll’Aom arc you *P*^

*
jnr ewv S ^ CTaoses i vri Qause it Subject < you «'t
«*rt rt^ who irtl fc»lT Verb wj Subject wft } er J i
Transitive

‘punish’ *T Object i^T SHfRT Objective Cass If tCRT Are you

sure wA'jm he really wanted to punish 7

ci Clause
ifiR^ TttT 3 Vt who etVT Subject wet «fr« irtf

3 ‘you’ Subject \ O'?* Vcrbcmt: ? do A are, TnfhT who

Objective Cast H fTT? wi O"
Ptepoiitioa ‘to' cT Oojert ? < »t:
you know tiAym you arc speakios W?
a
«rCf «TVT ^
Haite Verbs ?-«. was WV< were,
w
were rr Subject * -r
V*
He
k SubiectcK^: U 1 1 1 »«» erer
tn nrx * Clauses «’ «T'i fen •rr, »•> w-t vn •nt'rr f< *«« ^
Subject •whom’ i ti\ e«P« Nominafse Cjsc 3 rr-rt M
 ^

177

Objective Jf 1
st^; «ifr whom ^ who It is those
who I was told were killed.

stf^fiJT ^ tfw clauses ?•—(0 He

the only man; (2) I believe,
is

(3) whom can help you. clause %

Verb ‘can help’ Subject
‘you’ Jfff SI? help ^ Object 1 w?r 5f ere I f* whom ?> ra
1

Verb Subject I »\t ipt Nominative Case S =n^'!;— who

can help you.
ott: jrT^»r ? f« ^ aif7 Sf w & clause
fr? who «ftt whom «!i?isr *i shii i I

^ JIT? trfil 251 ^nff clauses s^ *ih*i «t ir «ftt ^ ft clauses h sfr

Finite Veebs | Subjects ^ i rat a? tat 'ra

^T^nrfc ‘who* Subject } ar Object, sn? simt I ft: Object Tran-
sitive Veib «fft Preposition ^ BWnrat it rafsi^t Transitive
Verb sft? Preposition wr mrPi tft ^ nt ^ ^tn ^frt fw who gi whom
Object I gt sifl I gf? ?? f«?ft Transitive Verb gr Preposition *i Object
til Objective Case ^ tirai mftg— whom; gfe *t ftw’r Finite
"Verb ^ Subject ?t, ^ Nominative Case who.

EXERCISE
Q. Correcf lUeJoUowlng sentences—
(a) Who do you think, I Iov« more * (b) He found in her a woman whom
he thinks will make a good wife, (c) I don't remerebet whom it wa* (d) Shakes
peare Is a poet who, as Is well-known, the world admires, (e) Who were you spea-
kingotl (f) Whom doyou think «an doihiswoik ^ ts> Who do >tn> think!
met ? (h) Do you know who Is there and who he wants to speak to 7 (i) Who
are you awaiting and espectingt (jt I vnU diwuu the matter wnh my friend
whom I know Is very sensible.
//lnri-~{i) whom; (b) who; (c) who: {d> whom; (e) whom; (fjwho;
(gl whom; (h) whom he wants..; (i) whom; (jl who.

Role XVI. ‘They/Them’ as Antecedents

Relative Pronoun « Antecedent ^ f?i^ they gi them is g?3[ ‘those*

Cl ipftg ?tiTT t; a»t—
They who labour hard are rewarded.
I do not like them who arc irregular in their duties.

Cfl gr gra? if Relative Pronoun (who) gi Antecedent iheyk

•fU pi if them, at tmje i i ra ^ arggi if they sftg them »;
those an ggW gtai ^irri—
Those who labour hard are rewarded.
I do not like those who are irregular in their duties.
 RnleXVlt Pw'mlTe rfflumm
Mrf
roKc.i.t p,„„o„„, » ,,, ,,5

' out lm„ or ihc lOih „|ii„„ i,

I will cnmc ,0 >oiit *™„ „„,

.1 , to,
™ f'” * nt Nte
1 oun of the loth ultimo it to hand.
ill come lo j-cuea nett mofnin^,
nt n fttr to^ el oTaii I

» .15 }" SV-"

If jou come to my retidence, I uill go to j-ourj.
"7 * ei «ii rr cet } enfm! u
Vn.,.7
(reji cnee)
I
el roitcitivc Pronoun *>our* « me Isree 1% jmm
net et, nl tontgort etr Postetiitc Pronoun 4 ntT toter eifer em
erf
t« 'TJi f I

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following senUneet—
^ *•’*'* «« you *« >oun Ibis cveaioj. (b) He csuie to mine this Borsfet
( > Yours of the I 5th instani has been rewiverf.
(d) 1 shall be et hisby 2 pjn.
///flrs—(a) al>ourhous«: (b) to my house; (e) > our letter of; (iJ)al hi*

Role XVIII. 'Tlte same' as a PronooD

-The same snfVT Pronoun ^ tmi irnr.

^ ^ Adjective 1 1 rr ^ ^-
s,Iflr erfft

This is thesame pen that I bought yesterday.

I g^e him a pen and the same was relumed to rae.
S the same an spflT Adjective itsTTf^gsnt ft
en r ay snftjj
(
^
pen
^j llje same ^7 sim Pro-
|

$ siKT 1 ir? 1 1 1

Your letter of the lOth instant thank }0U for

is to hand and I
the same,
the same ti
’Iff

MRi f ^ I
^
sitftT Prononn wt nffa fsrr f
f
ar letter i
sr»wi S the same 3; eft SNit^
 1 1

mosocNs 179

Pronouns it*. ‘ihis’, *lhey' i

sTn it

•'It (the simt) A.it the pfcuharlty that It cecurt chiejly In nrlUng,
Bijf o/Vm In tptcch, and^ct Is oroidtJ by ell nho hare any skill In Krih
ing. .<1 xofUnc ntanrjJs on Ws Sun.fjy tliSihts lo fhoJos^offtrrf,

so the unliierary aJjrns himtelf with 'lli* *««' nhen he Is to appear In

print; each secmx tent an giring the teorsi possible impression of
h'lmtrJf." — rov^itii •- Modtr« ENOi.«» U»xr.L

••The must te regarded cs an aJjeeil\e—hul never as

a pronoun. This Is thoroughly haJ gtamniar ‘HV thank you for your .

letter and in reply to the same ’ Sa, the writer Is making 'same' to

stand for 'letter' which It can neter be. tn reply lo 'It' It the ansurr
because 'it' Is a pionoun and neter anything else."
“WIIITaKCR wtuos : Unoluii Crasima*
tn J[ i»ORt ^ f«; the tame «T R4il<T 1 Pronoun tlfn tt ^
«'fT KtTiT (law and business) k «« fftpt't rat nw i

»« feir 8 k"! Bsln «ift «Ti 1

Kelt XIX. Doable NooiinalUn

aft S Fifiiie Vetb «t Subject Noun «t pronoun tl»

(ft rp Verb k TiW eat eftr ufnrta pronoun <t ae>i ct>n fiet nO:
The man who is here he is my fnend.
Dashraih, when his ton was banished, he was filled with
much sorrow,
erl aiw 3 Xt clauses ^—<l) The man is my friend; (iOwho
is here.
clause S is ci Subject 'man’ i Wit Subject ‘who*, im;
eti he % Wrt «i^ »fi t

5‘’^sr»e ^ ^r et clauses ^—{i) Dashrath was filled with much

sorrow; (ii) when his son was banished, oeil clause <t was Subject
% Dashrath sV 5*^ S son. mfire Ws he wi wsot safon 1
Pronouns Wl Redundant Pronouns err »finT "Rflk
*WT if 3RT1 nTii, »rr»m5tTa^f •

EXERCISE
Q. Correcr the following senitnces~
(a) The cows ilist are grjzirtf in She field tbey ire mine, (b) lie wbo lab-
ours btrd be is re#ard:i. (c) Tnoss who kill titnsthsy are killed by time,
(d)The boy who is here he is my brother. WThe people of the world, when
ibeyheardofGisdiiji'sdssiti.ibsywjrarddHr «h>c<ei. (f; A mao when be
becomes old. be behaves very much Lku a child.
 180 »tow Tq WRiTF f n«»rcr rsdititj

Th« (0«1 |lMi__Ue(,j ire nilnt; (b> ffe •ho— biri i

fO Thow »h»>— timeire kilJeJbriime; (d) The boT»h»—4 er

fe«jrileJ,
hwrbfothet. («JTMpeeT««--«Je«hwnt lodety jhoeied. JOA m»s
h«hl«»—<hild.
Role XX. Verb *Tf» bt* tc Troffoon and the Caie
‘TTTTW i fs!«rT3^Tr Veib To be' * ttr »tV aRt Pronoun ?*fr Ox
S ^ fwT Cflic H Verb To be* i »Rt Noun et Pronoun m
); a'1—
It ii he- It Hi. Tbi<i«ahe.
era? H Verb To be* (ii» It srnt ) an Nominafe
Caic H ) I inftw >4 « an wT^ am Pronoun «ft Nominative Case I (W
J jnrI nai arvT if*ft Ivftr ihe rt Nominative Case ^ nnairrKaT*!?
ist^ arJt *OT‘. 'it' ‘thii* Nominative Cave il ^ i *5:
ft ‘It i»/i/»r, 'it is me*. Thii i$ Aee' rerfr earr * am
Note (Q)-«ri««jf tn fin«r i f»>r tbarn ant rV J
8 T>T (uMge) tft ?r. <rm »TnT J—
Uijme. TbHhhtf. Thi»i»bim.
^
ejT 9^ k tT»T»tr ? fvr famfr « ‘s'—

•'Me Ii tceftnicaUy nrong in If wavn’f me: the phrase being 0/ iw

iery nature colloquial, such a lapse is of no imporianee, and ihlt Is per’
haps the only temptation to use me Instea.l ojl."
— fOwuR : MODEit'r EsotiSH Us**'*

shovtl
*'lt is reasonable to infer that subject and complement
remains
both have the same, that is. the subject form. But the fact
that few people would say or write It's I; This m he; niat'j she.
to sack
Usage, a little shamefacedly, admits, the object form
expressions— It's me; This is him; That's her."
o. Ji. VALLiNs : Good
Enciis^
—
saiKUon-
"This violation of grammatical law has been completely
ed by current usage." —norman
Ltw is : WoRO Po"^*
me. This
XB 9?nr. 8 T pn I f« pr wraral « *nTT3*iiT It is me; Thi^is
is him; That is her pinf? aataJisI^, fTin pr >fV a 1

Note (b)- ff, artr an f sitr ar a? ^ ^ !j

Relative Pronoun (who, which at that) «Tflr aa V'erb ‘To
an Nominative Case srerf I. Objective aff;
It was he who was really guilty.

It was Aim ivfto was really guilty.

9?^ ai^a ^ Verb To be’ (was) S: he ^ 9 w 5
*
 rKOvoum (SI

Nomioative Case »f i, aw it; Relative Pronoun *wfco’ sm

i I flf; «d who snff wm, swr? »;=f II wa* he tf rrt> sr he « ;;* sjrfn-
him Cl *fi SI7W nTJfi *TCi; aw—
It was him.
who i »T *7^ *1 hjm cr sihisul ft *mi, ciirc e; »7ictw c> vfs
;t
»i Bi } ft, ttrrn k tft fnft»» J t «=i: »; *i;» i *; i ^
Verb ’To be' (is, was arfe) i err
Tc Pronoun mm % net c*t«
n? mnti rl ant mt a;1 tm Pronoun Nominative m Objective fr’i'r ^
rft Case it rw; 3 |j—

U\sl. Uiswe.
a ft esm srr^ wicn. erafc Verb ‘To be' « «tw rr^

Pronoun i rt; who ft that «i ct. <neRPronoun^*»;iNomi- wm

naiive Case K rn. a»'—
It is he who is to blame.

efe effT «n It is he ft mi. at he « nil him tfr 13: mm ti»j.

m who * SI HT^ h erf him «i siVi mrjs mm ngm

m
1

Note (e)—fr« Verb ‘To be' « nm Nounm Pronoon

Objectne Case i r. m
s^V *15 •« eili Noun m Pronoun at i(i Objec*
me Cate *1 »1 irsi sif;*. Nominative il sft; ah—
1 Inow the man to be him.

ati Veib lo be' » fii man mas ^ w Tranvitivt Verb (know » ci

Ob;ea ) rwr*" faemgoir rftt aeim^sR s^ Verb 'To be’ c eir ma *w
I

Pronoun (him) ti Objective Case it rrm m'W. »! art J isf»» e; *h« 1

r* > «f1 him • »*> he »i cs'tn 'eifi tft ef h—

I et estn ft - ^
sfci set eir fnrrs »^r 5 —
I

I Vnew it lo be him.

eti sfr him * eeit he ci »*m sr; rm. eetre Verb ‘To he' « ?f
••h *t«r Pronoun (it) Objective Case 9 J i

rXERCISC

0 Cnrrcfr the f.ilhniig mtfr'im-

(» bt>ir*«Tien |a.Siy l«) It »•* |S<e-n wSid were (o bti-ne. (c)| foiRhl
It to S« be (d) I (imwi ihf •rmin lo be ».*>( (e> SVt tnrn n 10 be i-Se. <r> Wc
tSiiHiy'si ihe onmt lo h« sb*.
/r«t ID I obo •m.iMIhrywho.UI ber, (t) hen (flSer.

RirRunrRcouRsi: i

CnrriTr fiir foUemirg serrenrrt~-

I llrcemt ol-.b Mohea •sdirywtf.
 IF2 3. rfow toniittr ro^Bfrr

Rim and mjttfff piKircrk

$. M)r<«U fo-iTid Mm Hnlint-
I am not on« of thoM who l>;f<re Hfrythlnj I htu.
S )i It m(int tor yo(i and Rificif
6- I. fou a nd h« will fo locm
7. Ii’i mt who haw t*|f<d Jon.
f. I am at food aihiffl.
9 I ant«rrtfl moreqnrtiionrthan him.
to. tl it iltictl; Htwtcft he and {
1 1. I help cttryorc ettny in |h«if itmfiri.
12 li ih« taller thancither ether three liittn 7
I) The itudeni who you praoed to hrftitjr, hat fiiled.
H I do not know whom they are.
It. Hteryone of them think that they are t'lhi.
16. One thnuldnT he proud of hl« weatih.
17. taiher of (he Aw bookt «iR tetw the purpote.
IS. t am one of ihoie who tayt what 1 feel.
19. Mone two bookt «>tt do.
of (he
20. Whom do you think It the cldetl of the two 7
21. Someone lave me tbit letter but I don't remember whom.
22. It It Mm who I krtow full well.

23. The dag who it here It it mine.

24. She toIJ you and I that hertelf will do the work.
23. fie ij a man whom I believe it honest.
36. ( don't know who I thould blame.
27. fie It not tueh a man who can help me.
28. Neilhec of the eleven pUyen turned up.
29. He who hat come late. let him tulfer.
30. Your watch it better Iban that of mine.
4. they hear; 5. and
«K
f/ih/r— J. and I: 2. and I myself; 3. I myjelf,
11- “*
6. You, he and I; 7. ft it I; 8. as he; 9. Iban he; 10. him and me;
studies; 12. tallest of her three sisters; 13. whom you; 14 who they: 13.
““
lh*l.
that he is ri|ht; 16. one’s wealth; 17 Anyone of; IS. who say what
the oMesi; 21 remember who; 23. he
19. Neither of;
23. wbich/lhat it here is mtoe: 24.
20. who
you and me that the herself would;
»
*5. ^
suffer;
man who; 26. whom; 27. at can; 28. None of; 29. He .... late should

30. than mine^

REFRESHER COURSE II

Explain why thefoilomng senlences ere correct or inforreci—

1. Each of us have our osni problems.
2. One mus take care of bit health.
3. Let you and 1 do ft together.
4. I am the person who havesiarted this work.
5. He is one of the greatest poet who has ever lived.
6 None of the two brothers came.
 PRONOUNS IS3

7. Ilwainie who caught the thief.

S. I am not one of they who criticiK everything I co me acroo

9. I have read Plato's writings, wtbo wat a great philosopher
10 I did pot read either of the five l>ooki.
If. You are the man who wnb to help all.
12. I have received a letter and icptied to (he same
]}. The magistrate and collecior^ve tendered their resigaation
14. lie and I are doing their duly well.
15. He, I and you will work together
16. One who labours he succeeds
17. He does not love her wife.
IR. Does she love his huvband 7
 PREPOSITIONS
TEST YOURSELF
Q. Correct or Justify ihe follotcing sentrnees and then compare
joi/r results with the key given overleaf—

1. Candidates 'iviU be intemtewed between 2 p.m- to i p.m.

2. It is strictly betueea you or I-

3. There is a treaty between the five great powers.

4. The whole property was divided between the three sons
3. I will come back after a week.

6. I am here since the last few days.

I. You must return before a week.
8. He insisted me to go there.
9. He succeeded to do this work.
to. Ram Is confident to pass the examination this time.
II. We should prevent damage and theft of railway property.
12. He was afraid and alanned at the sound.
13. None but he was catted for interview.
14. go on leave since Monday.
I ssill

15. She covered her face by a piece of cloth.

16. NVhcnl went in the garden. 1 saw a snake into a vase
17. I am in the Board of Studies.

18. He aims to be a great man.

t9. She slopped between every stitch.
20. He came and sat besides his wife.

f tS5 1
 CHAPTER Vni

PREPOSITLONS

Preposition ?jf{ ft ^ «fra-flra

& «ra «r5r s'lTift Jf Pre-

(ct, %, 3. <1? r^nf?)
posiiioQs ^ sft^fn st^ft i i «n *Pt& f fr^”^ 5? ^ far

s'lbiV 3 with, by, from, for, since trfife Prepositions J r?! ft’ i

etgrjf with ftat i, tft Tiff by «?>< since for cr ffTtn »Tsn tit

w snitT etrcft stiwMt i I eft ^ ft Prepositions i: u^m if naftral

ft Prepositions «i ^ srifn "TT

If 'Rrat
fwi >Et
^ i ft ftf
*T^ f:t trf ^ f TBftf am ^ trrW ft ‘fTW5—

Role I. Between
Role (tV— Between « we ^ Nouns «ti Pronouns st% I fit I

and % ifjf* J', or et to 3; jttt sr|t; H—

Please see betwefn 2 p.n. and ) p.m.
me
You have to choose b^tneen death and dissrace.
One has to choose bfOrfen this and that,
aft ta fWfl sf and k or nt to wt sstn ttm fit srtwt ttfit i ^
?raf, IB aiff if It ?P<t 1^ sA i—
“Tht choice before the two eountries lay between a closer union
nesotlaied on equal terms or the sereranee of the existing eonnecllon."
—O. »t. TRENH.VA.N
vt eiee K or 5; *e?l and wi srafn ffti wsfte i

Role (b)— Between % eft fc Plural Noun wi Pronoun wni

i ft at Nouns ft Pronouns ifft J sit and % rslt f, ft twi; (between)
art DisltibutWe ‘each’ fi 'ever/ wi fftn wft Bwni; a g—
He is between rao Anm of a dilemma.
I am between two perils.
He is between the devil and the deep sea.

fl^ wtt |nl five K between 4 ttf Plural Nouns wnr: ‘two horns’
»lt< ‘two penis' sifVi iflw\ 4 between « frt ft Nouns devil sV sea
ft >, *> and it "li »ft J' » 4 ft sriW n ft f »i*T *5t ^
There is rivalry between each boy.
The batsman blew a whistle between exrry ball,

t 187 I
 aiAFres vHi

PREPOSITIONS

Pcepoiltlon ^ !• ^ fr^'V #
wnJat
qr^-sra
Pre-
(«T. &, i», fc P7 ir?J Ir «in *13 «iTai I, rcr jf

positions ^ Itsfr TTt^ 1 1 «Ti i P« ^ ^ ^

an^ Jr with, by. from, for, since *tJnfe Prepositions I' i ‘It’

with ^t f, aV by «ftr ^fif since ei for »ri Uiftn 5^. it^

*10 Ptepositlaos 5t R^t^T If >wfeaT

<5^! «nft^ tsTca wi % t

0 «!ra'’r 1 1 itr ^ ^ Prepo«tions ct iraPi Jtff nit

*nn«tt:fnfsi^ast^ i wf^sniTros^rn Tt:‘9Hi—

Rale I. Between
Rule (a)— Between «» d Nouns at Pronouns
% Tt? str^ at i
and tt ?}gw J', Sit—
or at to 5; jun
Please see me be^w^en 2 p.m. and 3 p-m.
You have to choose ^erH-em death and disgrace.
One has to choose beiween this and that,
eft wane^t? and i a?^lorinlo«tae>iKftt i

tw ateq if lw«
^farr,

“The choice hs/ore the tH-ocmnlries lay betweraa ciojer union

negotiated on equal terms or the severance of the existing connection."
— O. M. TREVELYAN
TW SRS If

Role (b)— Between

or % ??S and
3: wis
«i aatw ^
<rw
^ftt
Plural
l

Noun in Pronoun $mn

I in ^ Nouns in Pronouns wiSi | wt and % sift itr T?fti (between)
Ti? Distributive ‘each’ ijt ‘every* *Rft wO wemi; a|t—
He is between two horns of a dilenuna.
I am between rira perils.
Me is between the devil aat/ the deep sea.
’r?ll

‘two perils’
^ ^ between h at? Plural Nouns ffrm: ‘two horns’
N*t< sftfl cilnl9tKtweeQ%«n; Nouns devil sift sea
wft 1“. ^ and ift S'
ir i S: Tc u ei??
I
S— ^
There is rivalry between each boy.
The batsman blew a whistle between every ball.

I 187 I
 — .

pitEPC»moNS 18^

Jprfm miT ft *r?f %—

“Bui between can be used for more than two things or persons to-

denote some reciprocal action or relation.*'

— NESFiELO : Errors In English Composition

There is a treaty between ihefive great powers.
Our choice iies between these ^bur candidates.

There is not much space between the three points.

T5T Jr among sii rnfin sifT fhn. Wife r trisfra an
1

Rule III. Among and Amongst

ftnT 5; rraln if ai?T «i«n Jiff It it ^ Nara Tfi si nairii | f>f among
amongst srfu^ fftiT I i Fiivtfi aftn % fa? sn? tti in?:

Tof— among fr amongst % ’rf? the arra, fit fWt sft w an setn
I; 'TT fTf vowel «nli Rt amongst w uftn anRi ^if??
amongst the men; among the men; amongst us.

ItTT r?i RfR. ^ ^ I—

be said with some confidence that (/) among is the normat
“It may
word,{il) tmoogst is more usual before voweh, but (in) before Ibe. ..
the two forms are used quite Indifferently." —fowler
Role IV. Beside and Besides

Beside an «« ^nit I. 'rr^ V, ‘tnfr?’ m ‘erfi;’— by the s'de of ijr

outside: besides e>t eij I (in addition to), ifr—

There is a river beside my residence.
Your argument is beside the point.
Besides English, he knows many other languages,
s? pr amf 13—
He sat besides me.
Your answer is besides the point.
Beside a pen, be has a watch.
*rtf 'tftl ft J( beside »i eft? eftat if besides jhi wife? i

EXERCISE
Q. Correct ihe/oJ/owIng sentences —
(a) The entire properly was divided between bis five sons (b) You have lo-
chooae emong these two evils, (c) Please distribute these prizes between these
three boys, (d) He came and sat besides his wife, (e) Beside my faiher and
mother, my brother also came, (f) Beside giving me advice he gives
me practical
h'lp. (g) There is a treaty of frieodship among alt the five
great powers, (h) Dis-
tinguish among artistic, artful and artificial.
 J90 HOW fOWjtncCORRtCT ENGLISH
//Inis'- {a} among: (b) beiwten; (c) amang; (d) bes/dfi (e) brt<lf«:f
besides; (g) beinrcn; (h) betiteen.

Rule V. \VHh »nd Hy

T*f a» ‘ft’ ‘tfHf* ^in ITT sr=^L 9? ^ with 97 ir^
(insirument with which a thing is done) sk ^9 9l f.
if> ^
•91 >r tnrlg •rwVnF (agent 91 doer) * t?w; S^—
!79

Mohan was beaten by hh teicher wiifi a cane.

I write h7/A a pen.
It was written Ay- me.
99? by % 99^ with «ft< with i 99 ?? by ct TPft't 9RI 1

Rule Vf. fa and After

•
979 ’ (after (he lapse of) ^ se i| Period of Time 9( 9 ^ 3

future Tense % m^t in ct ttiVi ^tn after 9f(; 3%—

He will come in a week (n tmr 95 9^ si^) t

99^ after wr 59)1 ft«j t

He will come a/ier a month.

I will see him after a few days.
He will see me after a week— *1 after « 99^1 in tt ^
Note— After win Past Tense B79 rWt f; s&—
He caroe after a week.
Time Future
jff9 9T9*r ? Point of Time (Period of ^ftO t^p tfl

Tense $r tTT9 vl after 119)9 ^ trairi aft—

I will see you after the sixth period.

I will see you after you come back.

Role Vlf. Id and Witiuii

In % ‘XT?’ «r 9I9 chn t. 99 within & 5 ?r—

He will come in a week. (<tw rntr? i 97t)
He will come trithin a week, (w hht? i 9t^)
Role VHI. At and In

•«Il in 9T 9^ f=9T5T 91 tmr » ad

He lives at borne.
He lives in India.
He arrived in the country.
He will come at 5 o’clock in the morning-
 r)iinniiM)s5 t9l

Role IX. In itm! Into

w tWr *1 wj t^nr i «*“, «n ft nl mV *iri »f n'^v €n> *

into m ft»T V. rf!f nil n'^ «rsT>i| •«l«1 ft iti' J nt in «T: Jft—
I am in my lit'faTy.

I entered Imp my library

jtO in i into into i «n a^’in a<an \

nxLRasL
Q. Correa the foUovlitx tentnties-

<»i Uc\\iTiiQb>\taTJ<n. *t‘> I atkall be (it< attet a «etk. (c) 1 ihatl

to at M<M<.}4y cn S o’clock |<J| Ihe bon ••» ihci »iih me by » riRe (e) A
»omjneo>tnbtt f»«bj ar^t r-fclotb U» Ihe boy »a\ beaitn by can*
(ti A Oiirf entereJ in my fo<yn
Htnf*— U)in.tb»‘n.<«lo<v Mon-iay at lo’clcci.tJ) by me «Uh« cifte. {«»
»ith;(0*<ih.(|)iR<e

Rale X. On and At

m
^t»,T i,
a^tt i
at «t «»l thaut)
f«r« on ai
I
rjin ow
ift -
f«« (day) «t fnfe (dale) k

I will itart on Monday.

I will tiart Off (he 2nd June.
1 will Stan or 5 o‘elock.
<eT stS e) ana't ft at At ft on tty treln nrs fw i

Rale XI. In and On

fftft «ra et tinmn at ftafn ft ttft «T ate Ttrft k Tin in cr
wh
«7;
ttm
3ft—
i. «iVt rrin ^ ft •ifwdts ft ^ aw

He is tn the room.
He is on the Committee.
I am on the Board of Studies,

fftf erft arytr ft on ui s^t wfsrjii ^ ft (a ut uiftn «<( ,

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following senrencea
(a)You ire in the Board orPirecton. (b) 1 am in the feace Commitiee.
(c) I >».iU toil Tuesday on 4 o'clock.
//toi—(al on; (b) on. (f) on Tuesday at 4 o'clock.
 m HOW TO WRfTE CORRECT ENGLISH

Rnie XII. By/Belore and Wilfiin

IT *1? I by/before siVi Point of

Time ^ ?rTir ^ar within Period of Time iw ett?; ?&—
I shall go before (or by) Monday next.
I will start before (or by) 6 o'clock.
I will see him within a week.
^ tjV wwtl if within aftr sif^ if before ^ STTn |Vl i

Role XIII. For and Since

of Time «
f=T ^ trpT
fr ^ ew •%’ ?, qr T5t9> stffn
wrar f, qr ‘since’ Point of
if

Time ^ tm;
«»?tt ay i T-k 'for’ Pericd

I have not met him for the last one week.

He has not seen me for seteral days.
I have been busy since Monday.
He has been suffering from fever since January.
erf qr^ trf emf 3 Period of Time (one week, several dayi) i
for wT?i i sftr »f»?w qt errqf if Point of Time (Monday. January) i
Y*
since. i Adverb i if for n«T since et ftin mrr iwt mr f i

7ir srsre q? 6 i

Role Xl>'. Since and From

I3T ewf frcT v-J ‘h’ e>qi) wtTiqoT BiTn Point of Time i Ht« I

i
i, qr rsf? «>qT v? J f* since «T «^q irq Past Time (*(i«r5r) eiBt)
erqr ? «ftt mfqq amj if Prcscni/Past Perfect qi Perfect Conlinu>'“«
**’"•*
Tense rt aq'tn ftnr i. qr from «T qqtn Tense if qtnT } i

«l BTin Future Tcnie « niq tr^i sins ) i aqTTtn —

Me has been illamce Tuesday.
He will be absent from Tuesday
He was absent from Tuesday to Ttiursday.
wVt vTir rx He will be absent since Tuesday J •
i( q{

tXFRClSr

Q Correa tke foUowinx stnUnees-'

III Ytni mwi return btfott » week (b» ll •>/! N d'H*
hours |.-> It* is •'-sent ««!..-* Monday. (Jt H« M* bw" !'
l»> tuVA’J e iScRt
i s>nc« MonJay. (f» t has* iwt seen
(ft I epim bkli befar* • «»<n«h.
s,consc a
,
•»**
tl.Mt - III »iiS;a. Ibl wiihai; tei bai b«eis ibsefii; fJ* fjf
•

«f}fo» ies«nl da>», lalwnhiaamonrn

 . ^
PRCPOsmom 193

Role XV. rrepositlon and Gerund

fn ^ Verbs sfti; Adjectives ^ Infinitive (Verb i <iT5t to

rn) *r<T sr?n t it*?! ^ Infinitive 3; Preposition wjtir T

«>r Preposition i ing »pn ssi) wHt ^ if t’—
rr^t Gerund (Verb if 1

abstain from, aim at, assist In, bent on, confident of, debar
from, desirous of, desist from, des[>air of, disqualified from, dissuade
[one) from, excel in, excuse for.fortunatein, hinder (one) from, hope-

ful of, insist on. intend on, meditate on, nc^igent in, passion for,
persevere in, persist in, prevent from, (to take) pride in, prohibit
(one) from, proud of, refrain from, repent of, succeed in, successful
in, think of.
T^r vfr % *it^ ft fttt Verb m Adjective i aie

Preposition stmi i sVr it? vn Prepositions % arc Gerund ?>t

STh trar? t 5ftn w Verbs nt Adjectives i ?T? Preposition ?n

^ ?tlt Infinitive nxbr ^ ^
He prevented me to do It.
He refrains to do it.
He is disqualified fo appear at the examination.
I am desirous to go.
I am hopeful lo pass.
He persists to do so.
W ?i??l If Infinitive «T ??tn sons; i i
xngg; Preposition m saVi
•E? ifVt XI?; Gerund sn, Ift—
He prevented me from doing it.

He refrains from doing it-

He is disqualified from appearing at the examination.
I am desirous of going.
I am hopeful of passing.
He persists in doing so.

Note— Aim i ?t? Preposition Vtx preposition ^ ?i? Gerund xn

xxl'i xiT^ 5; Infinitive ^ s?bi ^W^ nt xxr nhftxt sTtn
(American usage) % i
?J5
xebi (British idiom) ingmr aim at ?tsn
aim to fix JTfiq, %—
“The Verb in the metaphorical sense ofpurpose or design or en-
deavour Is Idiomatically followed bp *t with the gerund and not by to
with the infinitive.... And the infinUire construction, though not good
British, appears to be good American, since it is certainly a favourite
with Emerson. .
— FOWLER ; Modern English Usage
H. W. C. E.-13
 194 /fow TO WRrrc cohrect tNOLtsif

aim i Tr» Infinilive (aim to) w? ^

*n(T TT >171 T I «T>i^^ % irTp^MRf ^ ^ T*rRt «nm fsRiJi r
L wvis 1^!l T. $. ruoT aim to
njft it «T>
wV aim to return stT? sti
t»ff

S7t>J ?—
"Our lecanit <hnger ts lo associate tradition with the immoral
to thinkof H os something hostUe to all change; to aim lo fedrra
some previous conilltlon n'kich we Imagine as haring teen eapalle
preservation In perpetuity, Instead of aiming lo slimnlafe the life rvhi
produced that condition In Its lime. —t. s. elk
Fowlcrniff n7ur»Jt sj'itt’AttI aim to retora ir r
aiming at returning aim to stimulate 3f aiming at ttimuhlh
Ttsri^rrt 2rtt OJntrif r«T s^*>«a Americanism rr^esr
1

517 % UTPI if TtJ 5i7ai7l } mffc7 *f trnTR^f WI

Ttti afTrTTT i »7m«r
fit to aic wife sTT^isVr i sfr
fsTflsn wsjtT fjnT J ff TO nm i: f<»7 aroi f JfTOiic fas ihii J if

7T ffl inTO? f"! nm aim % fig Gerund cT ii7t>i InBnilive & sfTO
i 5fri artn if tfr •firaTrr tti fii?rai ^ i

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentences-^
to do u f
(a) Who can pwvsnt m« to so there ? (b) Would you assist toe
bent CO ruin himself. (d)Ram isconfideot to win. (e) 1 etoBOt
fciflwf
(c) He is
ha'*
you to go there. (0 He is negtigenl to atiead the class, (g) 1 am proud to
a fr/end like you. fb) He repenwiltodo/t. WHe tocweded to do
ilu»

learn new things, (k) ! prohibited him to do

that wort
(j) I have a passion to
(I) I insisted him to leave the place.
winowK
H/n/i—(a) from going; (b) In doing; (c) on ruining; (d) of
(e) from going; (f) in attending; (g) of haying; (b) of going; (i) in doing:
learning; (k) from doing; (1) insisCcd on bis teaWng.

Rule XVI. Ellipsis in Preposition

Preposition % siw r* TOI ^ 717 to— ?T77lf TtilH

»l #i9 « ram jl Preposilion ai Aai i, aft ai

tion aaif » a.a 3i laa aa3«

(Appropriate) pt.w aft i ^
& 5|=tt^ % fsp? 75 5?5T (ito % faR
^ fSt * ''
.

^ig; ^ gr; Prcposstson >Ei tiTR-eran R7f7 TO STO

Preposition err I

We should prevent damage to and thefi of railway

751 5( Noons ‘damage’ eftr ‘theft’ and & sIti
^ fi; damage % 517 to enni f, 55 llicft % 717 of- TO Tt^l 7;

stTOTO^TO Preposition str^gst^'f

1 1
P«pos'ti°"* ^
77T J I
 —

PREPOSITIONS 195

*fr? tRT *ttt —We should prevent damage and theft of

railway properly, «rff ‘oP theft I, ’It damage «
ftrt W|{ I *17 EF WRJf ^
He is not only hopeful but also confident of success.
5?t hopeful fnn confident ^% faR ^ Preposition ‘of’ 9:1

s?hT jTii I, ^ ^5 I, vTffF If? Preposition ^ 3: fir? t—of

(hopeful +confidenl). sffia
He was neither ashamed not sorry for his deeds.
He has interest and passion for sports.
?t 1
<1?^ at?? J( w ft Preposition ‘for* «! ir!il>T f«ni
•Rl J sft sorry ^ firv 7? ashamed 3; faR ashamed i
VR of sntn \ common factor ajS % wfir? KU ^
VFiTJ tF siFR
He was
^
1

^??ti

neither
‘for’

wifr?—
ashamed of tor sorry for his deeds.
i

o\».\
^
%, for Fft
g gr
1
‘for’
aa-. tf
common
atve
factor
fata? w WR •ft
aflfir interest 3;

Rtl^—
in

He has interest in and passion for sports.

EXERCISE
Q. Correct ihe following sentences—
Plcste lliien sn4 reflect on this matter, (b) He v>as afraid and alarmed
U)
at the sound, (e) 1 neiiber object nor approve of d. <d) Lei 4 be added or subtra*
cied from 8 (e) It added rather than detracted from ita beauty
listen to; (b) afraid of, <c) object to; (d) added to; (e) added to.
Rule XVn. Transitire Verb aad Preposilioo
Transitive Verb
Fi7 Preposition
3; uiVt sf^l ftni wt!^, Sft—
The poet describes about nature.
He discussed on this problem.
TF amf g describes sfl? discussed Transitive Verbs TFfir?
<rr3 am g about al? g on ansala vn(^f ^ 1 an aivff rt fawr Pre-
position 3: EF nan? fiiawi wren—
The poet describes nature.
He discussed this problem.

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentrnees—
ia> t asted from him a question. (blAwife must love to her husband,
(c)The conference discussed on the merits of the issue, (d) In these tines the poet
has described about death, (e) I will Jntvstitite Into the case (0 He forjot
about me.
 m HOW TO WHITE CORRECT ENCltSH
//Znr;—(a) asked him; (b) love ben (c) discussed the merit? (JideserX
death; (e) investigate the case; (f) forgot me,

Rnle X\'ni. TransKtre Verb and Gemod

Avoid ttar tnn Verb ^ ttn Gerund apti J, loficnhe
a&—
1. He avoids there.
2. She aviods seeing me.
T5I arwf Jf iDfinttive w srabi w ijett Jrtt ff trem—
1. He avoids to go there.
2. She avoids to see me,
Rnle XDC *Bot’ and the Case
But except gW^.iTT TSE7 TThi Conjunction A
position ^ ffETT ^ f sftt rafe! Nominatise ifrr Ob’jeo

live
tf but
^ if
tfpft

aiT «7^
^ f€^
»Trr
Ir

«T
Noun
sft JpfW «s Thn {
iftt Pronoun ^
t
itt

t?, «TRC? Modem

NemlBStivc Cate ? r*^

T^ei Trm Conjunction stHH in I > er, rmst et

*
but if TTT Noun sh Pronoun trl Objective Cate ? war •

fT»TT*f,TtEVTH«'rtrm3, iftr <?nr CT American usage k bet i «

w ”
sfipRT Objective Case cr ft sfbt ftnt^ tmw 8 sn
i

e— ,
't*<
“/n eollo^ial use 'me', *«’
etc. are mare eommon after
than */*, and are equally eorreet."
*we' etc.
—The Shorte* Otroxo Dicno'^*'^
rxnns rd
**In Modern English the uses of 'but' followed by
ufees
pronouns are regarded by most writers as eonjunethe. although
the spoken hngvn .
a preposition before pronouns is still prevalent In

especially when the pronoun ts In the final position.''

— Webster’s IfntRNATiowAL Dicnosis
“rSe answer is that hot was originally a preposition .
Case
side, but Is now usually made aconjunetlon, the Subjeethe
preferred after when «£Tt/«/We. ...‘all but he bad fled
It
'

those
the normal modem literary use, 'AH but bios' is used by
do not know or da not eare whether It ts right or not, and
b coDoqnUl
*•
Eowua : Mowrk E>cihm —
it itlO

"Custom has sanetlaneJ the targrammallcal

^
bntirr.
she, bet thef. But none need be afraid to say hat him.
» VrA would be far tetter grammar."
OMfOStt^
Msnno : Errors —|h E^oush
 FREPOSmONS 197

w sTraiJil It ’ll f«i?7 I but 3: itn Nominative sh:

Objective if fr ftttft ift «t snftn tk i—but him ^ but he. rRT tr
s«iT I but 3: Nominative Case (but he) srigf^^ eiftR’T*
(modem literary use) s« but arfiic^ Conjunction frmsi

but t n? Objective Case (but him) srJu^J^ cr (colloquial)

5iim % 'Sit 3;

li vTTfe fa 5fh sis) sft but «) Preposition t) «rR% 1 3 f)

^
1

i, <R snf5ni ssitvits sift

515 tf 3a> a) but 3: ra Nominative
Case Vi] svW Objective Case % srv^ 3aT ft fowler 3 ’^l ‘tasiTqi

1 1 NESFiELD ^ ft but him, but her snf; but he, but she ^
rrtfv SET

S’. he snft ungrammatical 1

Eqfft but she, but qt vras 3 ?? 1

ftsR s e) aftssir % s ^
ift» sitft 3=Tt *iei t. but
q:i jrW sfsErT^ Conjunction nffh jt 1 ^ tft ^ ^
J ft sm 1

Fowtf R sifv Si Sfi^t ^

«r)T but him asi but he ^TsT *) g$ 0.
1^3 SR> sifts 5) efa 3 si3f2i« •iw.ts efe ft ^
vs 5)sff 3 «ftvi i

*1^ 5ft sTlft jrT s* ?5(i vn sits e?T I ^

siDs I, irt RTS

ft STITW srK sv>i 3 afft srv^r in f?i ^

I ‘ Tuff «r^i ftsTT ti) Sf I ft
T*ft aisR ST enq Ts yrrff Jf) STsef
«> 55 flTR—
All hut him had fled away.
All but he had fled away.

Rale XIX. Some Appropriate Prepositions

Abhorrence (hatted) of Addicted (habituated in a

Abhorrent (hateful) to bad sense) to
Abide (act according to) by Adequate (enough) to
Abound with, in Adhere (stick) to
Absent from Adapted to
Absolved (excused) of Admit of
Absorbed (engaged) in Adjacent (near) to
Accede (comply with) to Adverse (unfavourable) to
Acceptable to AfTeclioo for
Access (approach) to Anectionate of
Account (explain) for Affable to
Accountable (responsible) to Afraid of
Accustomed (habituated) to Agree Kith a person
Acquainted (familiar with) with Agree to a proposal
Acquiesce (agree) in Agreeable to
Acquit (declare not guilty) of Akin (related) to
Accuse (charge) of Alarmed (afraid) at
Add to ARen (foreigner) to
 19S MOW TO WHITE CORRICT ESGtlJH

Alive (conscious) to Clear of

Allegiance (loyalty) to Cling (slick) to
Allotted to Close to
Allude to Clue (hint) to
Ambition for Commend (recommend) to
Ambitious of Comment (remark) on
Amount to Commit to
Angry «7/A (at a thing) Common to
Annoyed (vexed) with Compatible (consistent) with
Anxious for, about Compete with
Apologise to (for something) Competent for
Appeal to Complain to (against a person

Apply to (for something) Comply with

Appropriate to Congenial to
Apprised of Conduce to
Aptitude (talent) for Concur (agree) with a person
Concur In an opinion orpropw
Ashamed of
Confuse with
Aspire to, after
Congratulate on
Ascribe to
Connect with
Assent (agree) to
ConSned lo
Associate with
Connive (overlook) at
Assure of
Conscious e/
Astonished at
Consent to
Attached to
Consist p/(raaterials)
Attributed to
Consist in (facts)
A vail oneself of Consult with a penon
Aversion (hatred) to; Averse to Consult about something
Bare (without, naked) of Content with
Based on Contrary to
Bestow (give) on Contribute to
Beware (cautious) of Control (noun) over
Bind to Convenient to
Bristle (full) with Convict (declare guilty) of
Brood (think) oxer Convinced of
Busy with Cope (keep level) uith
Capable of Correspond (write) with
Caution againM Correspond (agree) to
Careful of money Count for
Careful about dress Crowned (rewarded) with

Charal^ristic of Culminate in
 PREPOSITIONS 199

Cure of Divert (turn away) from

Cut in, into or lo pieces Dream of

Cut m half Draw money on a bank
Dawn on Dwell (speak or write in detail)
on
Deal well ot ill by a person
Eager /or
Deal (trade) in
Eligible (qualified) for
Deal wi(h a person in trade
Emec^(come ool) from
Deal wiih a subject (write)
Employ in
Decide upon
Encroach (trespass) on
Delight in
Encambeted (burdened) with
Deficient (weak) in
Endear (make dear) to
Depend on. upon
Endowed (enriched) with
Deprive (take from) of
Engage in
Derive (get from) front
Enter upon a career
Desist from
Enter into plans
Despair of
Err (mistake) on the side of
Desire for
Envious of
Desirous of
Equal to
Destitute (devoid of) of
Equivalent (equal) to
Deter from
Escape from
Detract from
Essential ro
Deviate (depart in bad sense)
from Estimated at
Devolve upon Exception to
Devote to Exchange one thing for another
Die of a disease Exchange with a person
Vixfrom fome cause Exclusive (excluding of
Differ Wr/i a person Exempt (free) from
Differ/rom anything Explain to a person
Different from Expect of, from
Diffident (not confident) of Expert In, al

Dilate (enlarge) on Exposed (unprotected) to

Discontented with Fail tn an attempt

Disdain (hatred) for Fail of a purpose

Dispense wftfi Fall in love with a person

Dispose of Fall (attack) on
Dissuade (discourage) /coos Fait into a mistake
Distingulib belief two things Fall In with one’s views
Distinguish one thing from Famous for
another Feed (live by eating) on
Due 10 Feed (give food) with something
 200 now TO WHITS ODRHTCT CSGUSir

Feel for a perwn Interest or interested in

Fertile in Involved (entangled) in
Fill viUh anything Invite a man to dinner
Fond of Irrelevant (not to the point) to

Free of charge*, from troubles Irrespective (without cotsider*

Furnished (supplied) Kith ine) of
Glance at an object Jest at
Glance o\er a letter Jealous of
Glory (take pride) in Knock at a door
Grasp (hold fast) at Knock against something
Grateful to Know of
Guard against Lacking in
Guess at Lament for
Guiltj of Laogh at
Hanker (wish for) after Lean ogoinst a nail
Hear of Lean on a stick
Healo/ Listen to
Hide from Liable to
Hinge (depend) on Lost in
Hint or Marry one to another
Hope /or Match /or
Identify Kith Mindful of
Ignorant of Mourn (be sad) /or the dead
Impart to Muse (tbink) upon
Import into, front NegJe^ul of
Impose (lay on) on Object (dislike) to
Indebted (obliged) to Obstacle to
Inaccessible to Occur to one’s mind
Inimical to Oflend against something
Instinct Kith Operate on a person
Indigenous to Opposite to
Independent of Owes to
Indispensable (essential) to Part Kith (depart)
Indicative of Partake (share) of
Indulge in Passion (strong desire)/^
Infer (conclude, deduce) frtm Piefer/Prrferable to
punishment on
Inflict Prepare (get re3dy)/or
Innocent of Preside at, orer
Inquire into Peculiar to
Inspire (encourage) Kith Prevent y>om
Interfere MiVh Preventiw of
 PREPOSmONS 201

(Take) pride in Smell of

Proud of Sneer (mock) at
Profit by Snatch (take by force) at
Protest (object) against Speak of a subject (in brieO
Protect from Speak on a subject (at length)

Purge Stare attentively) at a

(clear) of
Quake with
person

Reflect (think) on Sure in the face

Relate/Related to Surt for

Relieve of a duty Stick at nothing
Relieve from doubts or Stick to a point
anxieties Stoop (bend) ro

Rely (depend) on Struggle with

Remind of Subscribe to
Remarkable for Substitute for
Repent of Suffer from
Replete (full of) wifA Sufficient for

Resemblance (similarity) to Supenor to

Restrain (prevent) from Susceptible to
Restrict ro Suspect of
Revenge oneself on Sympathise with
Revenge for somethiog Sympathy for
Revolt against Teem with (full ofj

Rob of Testify to
Rule over Tide over
Safeguard against Tolerant of
Save from Tremble cr
Seek after, for Trust in
Send /or a doctor Truthful in
Sensible (aware) of Versed In
Set about (begin) Void of
Shudder (tremble) at Wanting (tacking) in
Side Kith a person Yield (surrender) ro
Similar to
EXERCISES WORKED OUT
lExerclsn from NesSeM’s Gramroirj
(A)
I acquit you of all complicity in that crime; and hope you w ill
be compensated /or the annoyance enUiled o/wi you by the ground-
less imputation.
 202 HOW TO Write CORRECT EKGUSH
I was horrified<1/ the si^l
of so much distress.

He did not die of cholera but from the efi’ects of over exposers
10 the sun at an unhealthy time of the year.
This shopkeeper deals in grain, but he did not deal honestly hy
me and I shall have no more dealings with him in future.
You will have to answer to me for your misconduct.
Forty students competed with one another for a single scholl^
ship.
I must consult with you on that matter shortly.

Z>o not exult offensively Ml the victory you have waaoreryost

rival.
«ry
not possessed o/much wisdom but possessed hi/A a
He is

high notion o/his own importance.

Will you entrust me n*A that letter ? No, I will entrust nothing

to you.
Always be prepared for the worst.
That motive prevails with me.
not
I prevailed on him to make the attempt, but he could
vail eter his adversary.
I rejoiced not only (n my own success, but also ol yours.
We must provide for our children against the evil day.

Some men stick to their point.

bad manners to sur«
Why do you stare me in the face . It is

<7/ one in that manner.

The ship touched at Cibralter.
He touched upon the subject o/ tides.
He supplied money fothe men; and they supplied buhor***
Hlrh provender. .

to sraii
He could smile <1/ their threats, for fortune continued

on him.
that they had
commeac^
They proceeded with the business
o/anyo-
yesterday, before they proceeded to the consideration
qitestioni.

Do not live for riches, bot whatever you livc/vr. live hr b->n«^
•lihin V
LiKour. and if you have to live <w* small Income, |j»e
rreacs.
He IS libo'jfiBf unJtf « fnisaFT^ebension, but he tbiniti’*’*
UbouriJ^^ a good cause and far the public welfare.
 PREPOSITIONS 203

Heoncela»dmewtcf<r anobli^tion, and therefore. I am very

his charge.
unwilling to lay the blame o/this affair ro

He not only intruded /»fo my house but my leisure, fori

was engaged at that time in reading an interesting book.

The railways intersect n-fth each other at this place.

Let me intercede wfr/i you for my friend.

I enquired o/him concerning t)al matter.

He is impressed with that notion, and he desires to impress it

<B)

The river to which I went with my brother abounds in fish; we

took a boat and rowed across the stream ro the opposite bank.
He promised to abide by the conlfact, and they relied on his
honour /or its fulfilment. But they were disappointed o/their hopes,
and found they could never trust their work to him again.

He lives at smalt cost, and he does so by abstaining from every

kind of luxury and accustoming himself to humble fare such as is

suitable to a person of small income.

The person who stood before the Judge yesterday was accused
0/ throwing a stone at his neighbour's window, but nothing more
came 0/ the matter, and he was acquitted o/ihe charge imputed ;n
him.
A man o/honour will adhere to his convictions, and act /rom a
sense of duty, even if men rail ar him and think him weak of
understanding and wanting in commonsense.
The intentions of that man admit of no doubt; we must agree
10 his tenns, whether we approve of them or not, and there is no
reason to be anxious about the result.

Aim at doing your duty at all risks, and do not be uneasy in

mind about the consequences.
He was much alarmed what he had just heard, and alluded
flf

to it as soon as he arrived at my house and alighted from his

carriage.

The ship stopped a little way off tbt shore and an experienced
man was at once appointed to the post 0/ pilot for bringing her into
port.
 204 now TO WRITE CORRECT ENOLBH

He had a great afTection./br hli parents, but he had no taste

for hard work and was not attentive to his studies.

One man complained to the Magistrate of A's dishonestf,
another brought a compiaint against A about some debt; in fact, A
has made many enemies /£>r himself.
When you attend school, attend to your studies. What has

been the cause of your tdicnest, hitherto 7 Surely there was no just

cause for such laziness.

He look advantage of my ignorance; but he gained no real

advantage o\'tr me in the end.

I am vexed wlik him for what he has done.

A man Is adapted for any occupation which is adapted to fcis

capacities.

I am annoyed HtrA him /or saying that; and I am not easily

annoyed at trifles.

(Q
Whatever you decide on stick to it and do your best wtdir

dilhculties.
I understand from all I hear that, though be despairs o/$ucces*»
nothing will deter him from his purpose.
I differ with you ai the exact point in which dogs
as to
wolves in shape or kind. But there is no difference 0/ opinion
their comparative fierceness.
him. Care oust be
He is so weak that all food disagrees vriih

taken that hedocs not die /rom weakness.

delight
He was deprived of that very thing in wh'ch he
most.
but noiwiikstt^
I depended on his coming at four o'clock;
all the hopes I had formed he deviated from his
purpose an
^
nothing to defend me from injustice.
**
must, therefore,
I disapprove of yourwayo/ working, and
pense with your services.
darkness. Death
A blind man cannot distinguish light /rom
not distinguish between the rich and the poor.
too
I can divide
to be divided among
this apple between t» 0 persons, but
forty; for it cannot be divided
it is

into forty p
^
 PREPOSITIONS 205

disposed o/all their wares, there was a

dispute
When they had
about the profits, each man differing with
the other.
he weak
Dissuade him from this folly, if you can; but I
fear is

in his head from constant overwork and

atuMty.

I will have nothing to do with a man who tries to domineer

over everyone and cavils af everything which docs not coincide with
his own opinion.
More things are wrought by prayer than this world dreams of.

He dwells among a simple-minded people, at the Kalpi village,

in the northern part of the district.

He dwelt for a long time on that subject but no one really knew
what he was driving at.

The Magistrate’s decirion on that case was not in accordance

with the evidence. Wc must
appeal to a higher court, where perhaps
this slur on our character will be removed.
He has an excellent appetite for bis dinner; but no aspiration for
anything higher.
The hill was veiled in a mist; and we were tired of waiting till

the mist cleared off besides being tired wth our exertions.

Iam reconciled w/iA my opponent, but not re my losses.

He was disqualified for the post on account of age, but he was
not disqualified from competing for a diploma.
It is better to be clothed in rags than to be clothed with shame.

(D)

He embarked art board the steamer, which was to take him to

India, whecc we intended to embark {n some kind of trade.
He was more popular than most men with the people of the
country.
In some place the sea cncroacbes on the land, in others the land
gains on the sea. This is so well known, that I need not expatiate on
it any further.
As soon as he emerged /rom poverty, he emtred info partner-
ship hi/A a man 0/ wealth, and the two then entered upon a grand
commercial career.
I will exchange this book with you /or another, if you have a
good one to offer roe in exchange.
 205 now TO WRITE CORRECT ENOtlSn

1 fe rejoiccJ h hi* success, and exuUed oter his fallen rival. I am

not familiar with that subject, so I cannot fall In with your views, cr
engage fn this controversy any longer.
lie fought with the robbers for his life. The Spaniards allied hiVA
the English fcughl against the French in what is called the Peniasular
War.
While the cat was running at the mouse, the mouse ran inlo its
hole and freed itself from danger.
Dc so good as to furnish me triih a copy of that letter. Furnish
medicine to the sick.

Aglance at this letter will convince you of its contents that he

is grasping at your money. Everyone will grieve for your loss.

He increased In wisdom tfith the increase of age, and at last
grew our of follies 0/ his boyhood and youth. Thus hy degrees he
rose ro eminence in his profession.
A young man should be on his guard ogoinji bad company*
beware o/falliog Into Iherr evil ways.
He loitered about this place for the greater part 0/ the day*
sometimes leaning ago.vji/ the wall, 10 “*
and sometimes strolling

opposite side of the street.

The
Madagascar is an island off the cast coast of Africa.
French could not prevail upon the inhabitants to surrender wiifimiaa
effort.
inquire
We must get rid of this difiicult business at once. Let us
about the danger; and be ready against the evil day.
It
Your words are strange and quite beyond my comprehension.
you were
is foolish to say what no one can understand and I thought
about such folly.
prejudice
This leaves no stain on his character, and no further
u
against him should be entertained, as he has now cleared himsel

all the faults imputed to him.

dec! e
I have DO liking for that mao; in fact, I have taken a
dislike to him. For all that, I wish to deal fairly by him.
is no
My relations with him are now quite friendly and there
feeling left in relation to that dispute. ...

Did you beg pardon of the teacher? No, I do not 1

entreat anyone for mercy.

therefore 1 do n
I cannot agree with you in this matter; and
agree to your proposal.
 pxcposrnoNS 207

I blusli at my own fault more than I blush /or your reputation.

Rhetoric might be compared with poetry.
I am in need of good advice, but there is no need for your
reproaches.
There Is no use in my purchasing that article, for I have no use
for it.

1 have failed of my purpose because 1 failed In my first attempt

and was not allowed to make another.
He is invested with full authority by me to invest my money in
that speculation.
He is profuse fn his promises, but not at all profuse of his
money.

(E)

You must apologise to him for what you have done, even
though the act was not done with any bad intention.
You will have to answer to your master for that mistake and
you may hope/or pardon, if you ask /or it in the proper way.
You can appeal to a higher court and apply for a fresh trial; but
it will be wiser to appoint some man who is versed in such matters to

act as arbitrator between you and the opposite party.

To continue arguing and disputing tv/rh a man, when you ere
certain that he will not assent to your own views is not wise of you;
men will only blame you for wasting yout time, and ascribe your
conduct to obstinacy.
While he was battling with the sea, the wind rose and the waves
beat ogams! the shore, he begged for help from those persons who
were in the boat, and they pulled him up our o/ the water.
1 have bestowed great attention on that subject; and 1 bethought

myself of one thing, namely, that a bridge must be built at once oyer
the river, and that this bridge should b: o/iron, not o/wood or brick.
One man boasts of his wealth, another prides himself on his
Wisdom we cannot help blushing for persons who are so wanting in
:

modesty and who cannot blush a/ their own faults.

India borders on Burma, and is separated from it partly by the
Bay of Bengal, which lies between them, and partly by a line
of
mountains situated to the north o/the Bay.
A man should not brood oxer Ids troubles, however much he
may be burdened with them.
 208 HOW TO WWTC CORRECT ENOIISII

She burst Into tcTri. when she found that be did sot care for
her affection.
I am indifferent to beat and cold, because I have a strong chest

is no need for caution; I am sorry, however, that yon

and there have

need for so much caution with every change In the weather.

Me has a great capacity for mathematics and In respect of this
subject his teacher has a great respect for his abilities.
to
In consideration of the fact that no one is perfect, you ooght
show more consideration for other men’s weaknesses, though there s
no need to connive at (heir faults.

(F)

A drowning man will catch a/ a straw; and if he escapes yoB

need not caution him again agalnil the danger of throwing hio5>
into the water and bathing out of his depth.
Vo
Cease from speaking evil of others, and cling to charity.
will yourself be judged according to your judgment of
others.

It is useless to clamour for what we cannot have.

Do not coo
and leav
plain o/your lot. Be content with what you have already,
the future to Providence. .

eye for an eye, and a tooth for a tooth; this was

the ol
An
but it now been superseded hy the duty e/ forgiveness.
has
agawr
They brought a complaint beforr lbs Magistrate
holes
neighbour, who wf/how/ asking their consent bad dug a
*
unsafe for
under the foundation of their house and thus rendered it
their reqowt
dwelling place. The Magistrate complied with
i *
issued a summons against him. He sentenced him to
trespass.

A man who confides in a friend will not conceal anything

importance.
him, but will confer with him on all matters of real
The wing of a bird corresponds to the arms ofa man.
I had a long correspondence with him on the
wisdom o co
«oa^
ming to custom, but he did not yield to my advice and
unconvinced o/his error. A man convinced against hia ** ^

the proverb.
You
the same opinion still, as you know from
cure a mao o/his prejudices.
The culprit craved /or pardon, and succeeded in ^*^*
*

'„ jj
One cock crowed over the other
one man boasts o/ having conquered another, and exu
$

defeated rival.
 PREPOSITIONS 209

You cannot compete w<fA a ntta who is supstior lo youtself in

resources. It is better to acquiesce in the fact that he has the advan-
tage over you.
That trader there, who deals in cotton goods, has dealt hardly
by his customers, and they must not concede ro his demands in
future.
The point you spoke o/ wilt be attended to. But if you ever
touch upon it again, I hope you will speak at length on the wider

question on which that point binges.

This is an exception to the usual lule. I hope, therefore, you

will make an exception of my son’s case, and show some forbearance

for his inexperience.
Live amenably to reason, and independently of other men’s
help.

It is better even to be blind 0/ one eye, than to be blind to

one’s own faults.
He is commuted to a policy which be now dislikes and is not
at all certain of its success.
He Is blessed in his children, who have all turned out Vttllt but
he is not blessed with good health.
The ship is bound for India, and is bound by contract to arrive
at Calcutta 6y the I6th of July.
He is accountable to hU master for ibe money.
Ido not concur with you in that opinion.
The decision of the dispute is left to me; but I have not yet
given my decision on the matter.
I have had much experience sicknesses, but none I'n curing
them.
He
guesses at his answer; for he has no genius for mathematics;
in fact, he is not a genius in anything.

was made mio England by the Danes,

In old times an irruption
who were more than a match for the Saxons.
at first
have no influence over that man; and therefore, my advice has
I
no influence on his actions.

REFRESHER COURSE I

Correct the following sentences^-

1. Everyone except the singasong.
2. Nobody but me was able to aDswer tbe eueslion.
3. Let it be divided between you aod I.
4. Noihitig can ptevenl me to do what I hLe.
H. W. C. E.-14
 210 vow TO WHJTr CORRECT ENOLISII

5. Would he eccert of my Invitalioti 7

fioi
6. Why did you not teply
my Jeiier 7
7. Thi* problem hat lo
be considered In every point of view.
8. How can I agree wiih your
proposal 7
9. Why should I diflTer with you 7
10. Please write me at your earliest.
11. Can you connect the one to the other 7
12. 1 will prefer death rather than dishonour.
13. Is she lit from fever?
14. This scheme it entirely different to what planned.
1
13. Has he really profited from your loss 7
16. He would prefer dying than begging.
17. She was presented with a nice gift.
18. lam not averse to play football
19. Is he really addicted lo gamble 7
20. I am confident to secure victory.
21. He is eapert to cook up stories.
22. I Insisted to have my say In the matter.
23. He was justified lo blame you.
24. Nothing cao binder me to go there.
25. He penisted to give me the same reply.
26. He thought to win over the enemies.
27. I decline saying anything at preseoL
28. I hope patting the examination.
29. She expects meeting ber friends.
30. I am inclined holding this view.
Hints— 1. except ber. 2. but I; 3. you and me; 4. me from doing; 5.
accfpt

my invitation; 6. reply to; 7. from every; 8. agree to; 9. from you; 10 write lO!
11. with tbe other; *’!
12. death lo dishonour, 13. ill of; 14. different from; IS-
your loss; 16. dying to; 17. presented a nice gift; 18. to playing; 19- to gambiieS
20. confident of securing; 21. expert in cooking up; 22. insisted on han^
23. justified in blaming; 24 me from going; 2S. persisted in giving; 26. thougoi
of winning over; 27. decline lo say; meet;
28. hope to pass; 29. expects to
30. inclined to hold.

REFRESHER COURSE II

Q. 2. Fill up the blanks with appropriate prepositions —

1. Youareproficient—Physics but deficient— Chemistry.
2. —
One must conform rules. One’s actions must
3. My views may be different—yours but you should not be mdi e

your interests.
4. He is endowed—divine gifts. - jH
5. I differ—him but my pen does not differ— his. It does not
' rnpects.
6 . I have now retired—sennoe. 1 now wish to retire— a jungle. I
of haf
7. While labouring a noble cause, — I bad to labour— a lot

have laboured hard my boiA. —

 a

PREPOSITIONS 211

8. He is not entitled—a!I the honours which have been showered— him.

9. Promotion acts as an mcenlive—hard work.
10 I have considerable inBuence—my students hut I have no laHueDce—
any minister. Your suggestions had a remarkable influence my career. —
11. 1 am anxious— my son's result. lam anxious—avoid future litigation.
I am anxious—my son's welfare.

ti Hemet me— my way home and I asked him to meet me— the office. My
appeals—peace— the town met— a rather poor response.
13. He hindered me— leaving the nMeting. Dowry system is a hindrance-
suitable marriages.
14. What a contrast—his father ! What a contrast— the two brothers !

15. He IS greatly appreciated— his skill—acting.

16. India cannot yield— the ambihoo— the Chinese to take— force a portion
6.
—her northern borders.
17. A number— accidents are due— rash driving—the crowded roads— large

18. The rules-grammar are essmtial parts— speech and usage peculiar —
laeguage.
19. indebted—you—writing—roe— lime.
lam
Most of the corruptions prevakni—our SKiety are due— ambition—
20.
pawer. We should not be ambiilous-fatne—the cost—our society.
Hwti— 1. IQ, in; 2. to, in, with. 3. fcom. to; 4. with, S with, from. In;
from, to; 7, for, under, it, 8. to, upon: 9. to; 10. over, with, on; 11. about, to,
(or; 12 o&, tn, for, of,vii(h; 13. fiooi, to; tl.to, beiweto, IS. for. In; 16. to,
of, by, of, 17. of, to, in. of. 18. of, of. to; 19. to. for, to. in; 20. in, to, for. of,
at, of.

REFRESHER COUME III

Explain why the following senltnces ere correct or incorrect—
1. His father Is ill since two months.
2. \ sat under the fen of a great leacber.
3. Detween you and I neither of us is to blame.
4. He IS absent since two mootbs.
8. Please excuse me being late by a few minutes.
6. I iosisled my friend to call a doctor.
7. He is angry upon me.
8. He does not obey to my orders.
9. Who were you talking to 7
10. I was prevented to go there.
11. I ordered for bii dismis^l.
12. All but him had fled away.
13 Here the poet describes about a lover.
14. He is justifled to blame you.
13. I have great pleasure to introduce him to you.
16. When did he reach at the stailoDT
17. He has not written me for a long lime.

18. He asked from me a question.

 VERBS
TEST YOURSELF
Q. Correct or justify the follotviitg sentences and then compare
your results with the key given overU<jf~-
1. He prefers to die than to live in misery.
2. 1 could not avail of that lucky chance.
3. I would like to know your valuable opinion.
4. NV'ill I pass the B.A. Examination this lime ?
5. He did nothing but to laugh and sing all the lime.
6. They did not and could not have known it.
7. No one has or can ever prove the existence of God.
8. He promised that he will must help me.
9. I reached the station before the train started.
10. Milk tastes sweetly but curd tastes sourly.
11- 1 will be happy ifl were a bird.
12. I would not do that if t was you.
1 3. 1 heard him to weep and to cry at night.
14. Please pardon me reminding you.
15. The ship has sunken in this river.
16 English Grammar is not difficult to be learnt.
17. Reading in the library* my dog began to bark.
18. 1 prefer fish rather than meat.
19. I hope to have succeeded in Ihu work.
20. I should have liked to have seen you.
 KEY
than live, or dying to leaving— Rulf V (b). (2) a«1
(1) rather
myself of— Rule VII. (J). Correct, but better than this I»—
like-Rule IX (d). (4) Shalt I pass— Rule IX (b). {5j but Uush arJ
sing —
Rule XIX (c). (6) did not know— Rule XVIf. (7) has prt»cd-
XVII. (S) would certainty help— Rules IV and X (»)-
reached-RuIe XI. (10) sweet. .. .seur-Rule XVI. (ll)uoulJt<
-Rule XVIII (i:)| were you-Rule XVIII (b). ( 13 ) heard liifl
weep and cry— Rule XIX (a). (14) my reminding )OU— Rule XXh
(15) haisunk-Rule XXVI. (16) to learn-RuIe XXI. (I?)
I was reading in the library— Rule XXIV. ( 18) fish to meal— Rul^
(a). t!9) to succeed— Rule XX. (20) to see >ou— Rule.XX.

( :ti
 1

ClIAFTEK tX

VERBS

^ TOTt it Verb ^w Number ftsit mri

position ft=ii tsf <nft Syntax 3; srsjw S Agreement
ir?T Position ot Words h firafeS # ft inn 1 ft «raiPr if

fif SS9 rrnT «^t5r 3=ri i )

Rale T. Is and Am
5| Thft<V singular!', fti 'is' Third Person
Singular % s?tT ‘am’ First Person Singular, is ci suI't he, she
it % trrt Tifii ^ am w I ife tna I
3*ti anT fim ! og tfiai-firersr

(philology) frn ! sfr TTg asanm i f« am ‘eimi,’ ‘asmi* Verbs ct

t «« 1 ft !—
‘^Aitsh'Sa^on Am, Eom, is akin to Coihle Im old Norse em,
Ulhimian esml, Latin <am, Greek eimi, Armenian em, and Sanskrit
asmi.”
— WtBSTEIl’5 New lNTEItN.VTlOSA,L DtCTtOSIkHY
rsf) fletTT, is »fr ‘esli,’ ‘asti’ *nft etnfiFtl—
"U is akin to Gothic ht, Lithuanian «ll, esf, Latin est, Greek
nil, and Sanskrit asll."
— WEBSTta’s New ImriiNA-novAL Dictionarv
«m *TR>! fei'eimi,’ 'asmi* «if^ «i natn First Person Singular
Pronoun 3; tnr gtm ! *V ‘esii’. 'osii’ mr? ei Third Person Singular
Pronoun 3; (ira i rOrax am n
«>i 3«:s First Person Singular Pro*
noun (I) 3; nw ghn I is«i Third Person Singular Pronoun (he, she,
me eft m 3; ssl't
it) 3: i
wi im 3et.^w wreit ! mfsre i i i

me is CT mVi ulr he, she, it 3; me am «i aeht fi f> ncei i el, »'in*

3: s"jB 3in eew et3 !. et f3 a^«T ««eT erMi Htffe i

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the foUowIng sentences—
<«) 1 it llfsamstlrr ot iBiS sdiool. (b) 1 is he. (c) 1 Is a teacher in an
Jl. E, School.
Him— Use. •am" intiead of •«.*
ms>
 216 now TO WHIlr < OHRtCT INOUSIf

Kole tl, It and Dtcoinc

Is so ^ ‘J,’ Tt become si *«t »pn' vi *rrm* t

so stf ^Tt Tofl m irt nrorts «f»«t 3 J ?ro Is ci srw rra

wo -a'lit PC sopsi f{ hfdjnO wofoi 3 or^'V eo o^f become cis^'
tfai 5?ft—
Me ij u king, (o? ow} 0
He became a king, (o? orwr ft nor t)

of^i om it Of ofm ? fc or ort^&riwion’i^ frifrof^r^

tT'ii i OT orJt ot»i stfl «o, Off 3mt ft >rn oc-fl ofist o sft? S—
i
'

He is angry.
He became angry.
otof it Of <n5i ^t?ni i f« of oro ^ so^ 3 of3 it ^ i; T
^ Of oty rtni ) o>t ^ ^ sow 3 or^ it or os bo?ot 3
oi,

sopot 3 (o^viopot 3) oftso ^ooii «). wn otf f5fc become 3f.

rmt i fc stf 0^ os soi^ 3 5 «tO spot S o? 5T STot J I
pr om ^
There became a mecUng.
Of? became si ootn srjf: ojfpo ‘meeiiog os *P=*n 3 fsft
3 Of^ oft’ ST so ft Oft asm so: of! was st oiVi fioi siftf
i
J

Rule IH. May and Can

fossoto 3otytatfSBftoft wnto s oi }, oolfs ‘ttsoi’

(permission) sr, or can 3 >mto (power ot capacity) si otsf^ ’

3 ami

You can do {50 so ost ft), sjtfs 2o3 tnow 1 1

You may do (go st ss3 ft). fas STfi ft siift f i

^
wf«o so ^ »Tto 3 fost 3t sm may oi can si foto
Interrogative sentence 3; o3
May I go out. Sir ?
Can I go out. Sir ?
May you help me 7
Can you help roe ? .
Pt
ooT ntot om si wo 3t ofT sooi str

of3 art ^3 OTOO ^

I ^ ^
Note— snsss aJrftsT 3 aim (permission) can
can ST ootn ft SOI 1 1 aff^os aisio 3 fo oiw
°
^
I go out to play ?— sftf f*rst 55 s<n3 go stot 00 pr
ssK
“ 'Mother, can I go out to play ?' Right. If wsis
Ij you in — ,
'„gjern
'

child say may and nothing but sss»y, ivhen asking for perm
ssion.
 VERBS 217

parents nwy consider you old-fashioned and puristic. Can is not diseour-

\ieous, incorrect, or rulgor — and the newest editions of the authoritative

dictionaries fully sanction the use of can in requesting rights, privileges

or permission." —noruan lewis : Word Power
SB S ^i Bfl I fs may % can an
BB fr ^ i b? bb BifjftJre snikHff bbt 1 1 SBfB? bw may rfts

can ^ aBln if tna i

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentences —
(a) None may live without air. <b) Can I come in. Sir 7 <c) You can
come in, if you ao like,
Jf/n/T-(a) can; (b) may; (e> may.

Rale IV. Should aod Must

B TfBl sf Auxiliary Verbs I' ^ mfes Conjunction 5< sm

9 sain bbih I, or bi sort « aw ^ fun Conjunction
TRi *1% 5^ arm naar h 5^r— ^
He should must do it.
He should and must do it.
UBi Tw? erjs i sr jsrrr 55. naif* sfti ewn ^ should aftr must «>
Conjunction Etri nai i an %tfr »j5fT ^ atm eN a?Ti

should must «r an ?>, should certainly ni ftps must at anVn a?p TC

should must at atft b<T Ttff satr. will must sftr shall must at *fi svm
i

annt agfan 1 1 an anj if kea must vi iwh aV m shall certainly,

will certainly at i

EXERCISE
Q. Correcf the following imrencej—
(a) He will must come today, (b) You should must do it at once,
(c) I
willmust punish him. (d) I shall must start tomorrow.
must come today, or will certainly come today; (b) must do it
at once,or should certainly do it at once. (c)«iU certainly punish him, or must
punish him, (d) shall certainly start, or must start

Rule V. Prefer to/Ralher thin

Rule (a) —nf? prefer ei? Noun, Pronoun at Gerund ana fft to
VI sain 'nif^ir, than nr rather than «r b^; 5ef—
I prefer work to rest.
I prefer you to him.
1 prefer walking to riding.
 218 now TO WKirr cnmrcr tsctisir

9 prefer i ?t? ej Nouns *«orl‘

TiTT 'rest'
^
? ?;*> Pronouns ‘you* wVt ‘fiim* sf^ if er Gerund* ‘walking’
‘riding*. T*7fsrT ^ns'f to in trM
2f fcri »T 7 ?
t i r^r 3 to « »t
than tWi
Rule (b)~>qr; prefer * tt? Infinitive »nr, fft to « rather tfa:
«T iratn «n^ ^rrr, ftri than «i cVV srif; S^—
He prefers to die raiher than pay.
He prefers to Ute rather than die.
ersft *mf fl prefer k tit »3tjt: to die sftf to live cr srw J, ^
Infinitive > i Tnftrr Infinitive k tt? rather than TTflsVrn^l
rather than 3; Rtt than m to « {Tttt sgftrt xPtl i VJ
«iT? rn fe^R bt «^pi e—
“Prefer hat /no fonurueiions— ‘I prefer this \Jitiag) to ih:t^

{dying)', and ‘/ prefer to do this rather than that'. The infidlite

consirueiion mint not be used uiihoui rather.’’

—rowxnt : MooEB-v E.scush Umce
Note— Tfr Infinitive « If? raiher than TT ^
Infinitive Gerund 3 rather than
He prefers to die rather than pay.
He prefers dying to paying.

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the follotring sentences —
ta) He prefers to read than to write, (b) 1 pitfer nc'
than trad (c)
prefer walking than rtdiog. (d) Sbe prefer* me ihaa him- (e) I prefer
to ^
than lo eat. You
prefer lo siog than lo talk.
(f)
_

than write, of prefers reading to wriliog:

(a) rather
/ » jo:
(bJWW
(d) lo; (e) rather than eat, or prefer feeding to eating; (D rather
than Ulk,oipttJ

singing to talking.

Rule VI. Seem and Appear. Remain and Continne

trf? TtvB 5 seem al appears tmW sfff

^ ew ft ftai ? wk ireir. Tfk remain ^ bbVt ft. ar

^ BBtn
vt;
sff! TRm =TrfiB,
I

VBtft tit w5 remain an ^ | av continue

I continue to remain cheerful- . .

reac
These conclusions, it seems to me, appear to be
naturally.
continue ti remain ^ STtir jpn
_.e_ ^
fksisrftj
>r?3 Tiw H
THtt^.^fRTHif^terseemsjrTappearTi 5^
s
^ r
^

«T TTfft r;r ?tnt «i stW Sktst tt :ffF, *ri •

 \XRBS 21?

Rule VII. Verbs and Reflexive Prononns

f5 Verbs | nx Reflexive Pronouns 1 1 ft I—

absent, avail, pride and plume.
5^11— He flbsenM/ijmsW/ from the college without any reason.
I availed myself of casual leave.
He prides himself on his style.
w V1V3T ft Reflexive Pronoun «t spft»r ^t, aft ft *155 ^
5int I ft Oraw sn tfHJf ttn*iPtft & fen I
“/ availed myself of it Candida.” — G. n. shaw
Note— Avail of m usjftn Passive Voice ft riil jtat 1 tafax: I availed

myself of an offer vit Passive Voice—The offer was availed of— sr^
% ( •oR? erft ^
“IPe may notice here a curious blunder that is sometimes made
with the reflexive verbs I avail myself of. The passive of this is never
used, because there is no occasion for it...."
— rowiER : Kino’s Enclisk

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following jrnrrocei—
(a) I will avsit of this opportunity, (b) I may kiodly be allowed to avail
of earned leave (e) She prides on her curly bau. (d) Why do you absent from
the elan? (e) One may very well pride on honest labour, (f) The casual leave
was availed of by me.
i//iirr—(al avail myself of; (b)) avail myself of, (c) prides herself on;
(d) absent yourself, (e) pride oneself on; (0 1 availed myself of casual leave

Rule VIII. Let

Let ft: Verb ‘To be’ an ft:ia ‘be’ ^ 95^ fftm is, are arif? sr^t;
sift—
Let it be a triangle.
Let it be a circle.
Let it be so.
Let there be a fight
rt ?i?!|ft ft 'be' ft: 'is* % sahi ^ feraft ij5(f ft j

'f^nft ft vifT 1

Rule IX. Shall and Should; Will and Would

Rule (a)— First Person ft: Pronoun 3; arv mvit«:?i5T shall m should
Ttni ft; 3ft—
I shall go.
 220 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGUSH
I said that I should go.
Note—5rf will *n would «i Pint Person ^ ew t CT q
future ^ intention, promise ?n determinatioa
(ST3 cnai —
I will never doit again.
zrn will Ir promise ^ ihi crar J i ^ ? First Person *
will ?7t would in sr^ j i

Role (b)— T?r^ pta ^ Interrogative sentences if First Person i

•ppi will ^ jratn ^ 9« ^ PTtn i tafapt Will I do it ? «« J
will ^ shall ^ gtsrr aifrc i

Role (e) — rrfe wsn 3 compelled, obliged, have much pleasure, at

a loss ^ under the necessity of cr siT^n stTif, First Person i

shall STRI ^if^, will ir^; alt

I shall be highly obliged lo him.

We shall be compelled lo 6nd out another way.
^
I
shall
will be at
St ^
will in w«r ^mr sw: 3 tut
a loss to decide what to do.
i
t—

I will have great pleasure in going with )0U to the pictures.

Tfl will « TT3 shall «i a?l>i ^ai wiftT i

«i
Role (d)— Tf^ tutT 3 Itle, prefer, care, be glad TT be inclined
st^ gt, ifr First Person 5: mr should «i gl^ would ti tfi

a&—
1 should like to suggest.
1 should like to know.
I should be very glad to see you.
I should be inclined to say so.

PIT trrormTT ?rr mil 3 should i frir would it ^ ’

tlntat « »3*nr *r^ » pr n»Tiu 3 wn ft’rtt w S'*"

*7/1 rArfeshoold. not would. Is the right form.”
"If the shall cfldwin U:om h worth prrseniog at all. I

like i» wfiMy ai7 1 should like righr"

Note— r«?* K7S=% 3 g'** tin gT rjm ) f* I would hke eT
crtft

1
grit f , wi'r «t "irw 3 1
should 1-ke TT
u'g •ntm ct ef? 3
sstti tph sPr 1 would like •yjs:
^ ^
f*?’

rrgj C7 SI J ^r t«Ti‘’e» ?»re should liAe tt wg r.

•n Tft t
f^j.
“O-t the other hand, I sbooU like to be clear tkit ! cm
not

ing a kigh-brow ogjintt a low-brow Itterature.”

 1

VERBS 221 ,

“ •^figbl be continued'— These are the words Milb which I should

like to finish my Coiners."
—andre gide
statement arc. ”
"The phrases I should like to underline in this .

—The FCenyon Review ; Spring, ’55

’ft, ’PTfti 5^ would like eft
1 jtrsti i

fteTewefitwrl— I would like to ask you a

question— sfti 5? ^ may be used h ith though no
"In current American usage, would I,

die-hard purist will give an inch in ih’S matter. Strict, old-fashioned

rules demand IshanU ” — norman lewis : Word Power
ft if sTTf. enan ft tfi 1 would like ii usfW eiifi ?>ai 1
fta 5^ e'eSe ^ UEi*«rH TRt (Her Majesty Elizabeth 11) ft >ft B. B. C.

ft *Wft r? I would like ea <reftr fiet *n i ftn ftwir i 1% sn 1 would

like ^ STTO srfi Enra i ?i. «rt »fm cP ^ Te: I should like n irft'r

I would like wf«w «r^l i

ft i

Role («)— Second sfrt Third Persons ft ew will ei would «i srftn

»)m shall er should rr command in threat ft «m if Second iftt
Third Persons ft me shall ei should «i nefn ts ittri *ph k; aft—
The college shall remain closed tomonow .

He shall be hanged.
You shall pay the penalty.
XH *if?t if shall «i «sfr« itwi «i ifu ftni 1 1 ?r< ufti

•ifvTTft fit The examination shall be held from tomorrow tft rje
ex shallft cut nt vx
wrxxVn 1 meixx rl^—
My friend says that the examination shall be held from
tomorrow.
rr *iTe ft («m ^ shall ft Ttft will «i ufln ctm 'Uiffr, exlf*: sft'
«iTtii rr urvm x1 rC i xl. ofx fim ft «xft Principal, Head-
master, Controller ei Vice-Chancellor ftnt «ne fftS. at rx jtri upjm |
Rule (f)— tn serr ex i?re i fx Intenogative sentences ft Second
tnti Third Persons ft tnx shall rt rain uft wtai tx eieaf er «ir e— ^ i

Shall the school remain dosed for a week ’

Shall he be punished ?
Pt entf ft shall ft e;ft will uiSTr'ixRixnfkT.eiffx exl command
ei threat ci err xlm i

Ruletel—Shall ei will exft should ei would rt stm rip efj

•’li »il «ji tv rxV »r<t 1; 5ft—
I should b: thankful to you, if you Mvuld help me in the
matier.
 •

222 itmv JO w*»r crjitufcr Fscttsu

li’ouU jou lend me jour book* for fen daji ?

ut! should would k shall im will ti si'.n ?
rfiTt. «rT un»r nfl uprrft 1

Role (h) — oi?! if Second ei Third Person Pronoun Fir

Person k nn wn, shall ei will 2f fr»fT «T Jwu V h '

will «i uTtn sTwe wast irpn ain Sir—

Me and I will go.
You and I wWlive together.
JTff wifi i shall nrr wttt st<1 ?r will tt snh shall i

w^f lT^5t ^ I

Role (D— Lest « »rt Pcnoni (First, Second and Third) i e?

should att «TTTTT tfffi J. #trf< lest « rr inr should cr ft srfn ^ ^
S; 3&—
works hard
lie test he should fail.
Tfl would fail «ir« fltii t

Role (f)— Duty i| should ci e?rfK Ftdt Penoa t srr fW

I: a%—
I should do it.

He should do it.

Role (k)— Would ci saipr ci elf « ftr fftiS Penew

«fT?t

^ imr ft ytnl
would go to my friend and talk lot
There was a time when 1

hours.

EXERCISE

Q. Correct the following sentences —

(a) My father loforiDS m; tbatlb: Uiivemty Eximiaatioa 5li»3
(r)
be held in April friend thinks that the prisoner shall be hanged,
(b) My
the college remain closed today T (d) My
fnend guesses that Che .

shall be posCpaned. (e) Shall he see me today? (f> Shall yon

goto Pau>*
evening ?(g) be drowned and nobody shall save me. (h)
I will
time ? (i) I am not sure whether 1 wQI be able to do it. 0) Do you
thin
remain a
fail? (k)Ithai been noUfiedbythc Principal that the college wQl
for two days. 0) t will be compelled to punish bint.
Hints—(a) will; (b) wiO; (c) wilt <d) wilt (e) wflU (0 wilt (S) *

nobody wilt (b) shalt (!} shaQ; (j) shalt (k) shall; (1) shall.

Role X. The Sequence of Tenses

Sequence of Tenses ^
sr? tt r?r3T^ t r«ol srn
»
sentence ^ Subordinate Qause Jf Verb tt Tense
 N’ERBS 223

Role (a)— PriQcipal Clause i Present 51 Future Tense %

Subordinate Clause ^ sft Tense t? V. a%—
Ram says that he will help me.
(i)

(ii) Ram says that he helps me.

(iii) Ram luyj that he helped me.

(iv) Ram will say that he will help me.

(v) Ram will say that he helps me-

(vi) Ram will say that he helped me.

Rale (b)— Principal Clause ij Past Tense tJ «> Subordinate

Clause if tfl Past Tense ^tir i: —
(i) Ram said that he would help me.
(ii) 1 was sure that he wouMcome.
ffsg fff fit^«T Cl «:c spf?!? *fi 1 1 Principal Clause if Past Tense
Subordinate Clause universal truth siw habitual fact
Wit i Subordinate Clause *1 Present Tense |>n Past Tense

(i) I learni at school that the earth a round.

(ii) The boy replied that he r/aea early in the morning.

Rale (c)— Subordinate Clause «t wrwt ftaft Conjunctton ^

^1 Tl f«*T^ titi^ a^t^tpurpose) jtntSiff pas 9 Principal Clause
Verb Present aa»T Future Tense 3 Subordinate Clause cr
Verb ‘may* (Present Tense) i po Tcut »pn t vftt Principal Clause
CT Verb Past Tense 5} t<5| Tt Subordinate Clause cr Verb ‘might' (Past
Tense) i: skt mw
fcm uwi aft—
(i) Me labours hard that he may stand first.

(ii) He wit! labour hard (hat he may stand first.

(iii) He laboured hard that he might stand first.

Rale (d)—cfc Subordinate Clause ci sirnr ^ Conjunction

B rr firaft 5
Subordinate Clause 8
^
(comparison) *1 mv litaT

Veib^ (eia’i aft Tense

«« ^ tit Principal sftr

ft ift—
He loves me more than he lores you.
He loves me more than he fornf you.
He loves me more than he will lore you.
1 le loved me more than he lores you.

He Vi ill love me more than he loredyou.

uf? Subordinate Clanseci BTcru Conjunction ‘since* ft
at W Principal Clause «t Verb Pmeni Perfect Tense ft rftrSubordinate
 — ^

224 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLBJI

Clause ^ Verb Past Indefinite Tense 5 fftn I;

Four hours hate passed since he took medicine.
Rnlc ^f) — Subordinate Clause irt Conjunction ’lest’

fit

Auxiliary Verb should

Principal Clause
3&—
Verb ^ Tense if p lest k i

He labours hard lest he should fail.

Rule (g)— *1 ^ Subordinate Clause

eii sn»l Conjunction ‘befot

jfT 'after’ fr ?> sit if Principal Clause Verb Future Tense ^

uT before k;Future Tense jht; a tf—
I will go before he comes or has come (not ‘will come’).
I will go after he has come (not ^viIl come’).
k: fere pr f^ifr «ry siprt snar * J I
^ftre, rt
Rule (b) ^ 3T5ja;r fetpn 5«n I
"The Pakisiani Foreign ,lfm«rrr, Mr. Z. A. Bhutto tcdif tt

that Pakistan will sign the Sino-Pakistani border agreement.’'

The Indian Nation, Feb. 2li 1”

fTT ejTte if will ); would wVt |twi wrfe? i

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentenets—
(») I replwJ (oltImthAt I willdorvtrjrthlng I can, (b)

water was cool, wherraa fire hot. w« m I was w4

wtli PJ
monaL (J) DiJ not I tell you that when 1 will return from Patna I

(e) He «trag|les] hard that he may win. .

would . .Icoold. <t» water It Hr*!'- (cl*"”**

I

would 1 would. (e>mif*it wm

Rale XI. Put Perfect Terwe
^

Past Perfect Tense «t iprV»t etts if w<f *

•Ha^ b’l
ftrx regi era wm p
*jtn p i EnfsTt rmt
eaten’ mn } t He ate fiiwk ft f1 Tnt ^ aih ;
Verb)
»:? Past Tense S er eta nan p nh eU «I xtk «aii f«’t 5^
'J/'’ ,
..cniir
'i" Past Perfect s‘‘t f?; H »nm ft? xia * ''cfb •

*t i<*n r=»! ^ 2%-

1 kaJ rraeAeJlhe itat.on before the train CJine.

The tram A^rJcn-liey before I reached the tUiK’H- .

^
Not*— Past Perfect inre Past Indannite »T
M<f ^
^
*T dauae if past Perfect sAr |"r 2f Past Indefinite-
*€ Tr> »• wm
VV f«4
»* Past Tense i ti evs nns Jt »% ty» » p,j(
js
•T. r n> « Verb tfrr Past Pctfect nt an'T sAt jnr a
laieii'da cr «ri» esr^rnr n
 1

VERBS 225

Pcrfscl «i Jijl;

I had reached the station before the train came.

The train had armed before I reached the station,

ta if PRT5 art «nr Verb fair Past Perfect

»:i 5«n I sftr if tfirm rt^ Verb ^ ftut Past Indefinite 51 1

J7f;

W ?t^'{ ^ smf i Verbs k (wefa araa i elalf Verbs % fin?) fire Past
Indefinite ?n ai fire

I
Past Perfect «i mVi
reached the station before the train started.
^ tft

«> are? »sr rt flij, a&—

I had reached Xhc station before the train had started.

«irf tl«t 41?? if tnn<f ifif ?Tlt itPtf ft «wT 5: fa?: Past Indefinite ti
train 5J11 i «ftr 55^ 3 51 ^ fire Past Perfect ^ 1

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the feUomns sentences—
ta)l readied the station before the icaiti had evnie tb) ) had reached
home before (he thief had fed away <c)l reached home before Iheibief fed auay
(d) I had |one there last month.
(a) had reached. tram came; (b> . . ihtef fed away, (cl had reached
(d) I went.

Role Xn. Used to

fiifl oiw (habit) «i ere la? Past Tense

if used to «r B4m
r«t aipii if eft tj?; <tT If ^ etreit 4? Present Tense
if use to
ei Future
4 will use to at aeVi irel el’ll 1 used to come (4? «ret ertni er)
wfe? be
ift ^£5 4< ‘4f atrat ctflt V vt sgaire he uses to come '44 *ret 4^ni'
^ he will use to come y^c t Present «I n (lu rts) is fare Indefi*
niwTenwb ft 4W ^ wret t. ^^1— He comes (4? »t?n i 41 a? mai
ensti) j

Rule XIU. Aualtiiry and Peiitclpal Verbs

af? »5T Auxiliary Verbs— shall, should, will, would, may, might,
can, could, do, did, docs ni must » em Verb *ib, m a? wet Present
Tense eftr Plural Number if 4441 ; 3ft—
He will go.
He did not go.
He does not go.
Co he must.
14 mft mrsf *.r1 'he* singular } 1
if f%i rft. Principal Verb ‘go'
*tev4 s^ if rt?« 4r } f« »»*h4tft Auxiliary Verbs ‘will*, ‘must*
J I

•ife «i *1*4
J 1 il are? arri }
iHfr^T? —
He does not readt.
H w. c.r.-15
 226 IMW Tt» WHITE COBHTCrr FNOtRH

Me did not hrouzht.

He did not ti'07Tr</lo do it.

ijt! fc.idi, brought iftr wanted * rr^ fisrn: fead, brinf »:

«T 97fn Et9t Wiff* I

EXERCISE
Q. Cormt the foUowim; srntenefs —
(4) Ram couti nol »l«nt Ut( niabl. (b)
If you have not brooThi it tfrd

you rnu'l hroiifhi ii io-ffH>rr<rw. (t) Where and ho* do« heliveiT
UboureJ, to that he mt(hi («ai«e«l. (c) He did nol ranteJtobelpnie.
/Wefj— (a) jleep; (b)inuit brinr (c) live; (dipiti; (e) want.

Rule XIV. Autiliarg Verba and Voire

Role (a) Verb ‘To be* (be, am, ii, are, was, were
^
^
^ HIT «tt Verb amt i aftr tr Active Voice 9 trti
smwni l(t-~
lie is hrlnu.
He has been hung.
He m.iy be lor$ng.
^
M eiWf 9 love S'Ing’ ?i>ncT loving warm 'm 9Tff« rf*

sun: is, been be suit ? i

9' aft Verb 'To be’
Rate (b)-in Verb •To be* i; r? Verb amt « «T ^ W®
.

Voice 9 tft Verb «i Past Participle form (Verbiflg^fti'

<t?l armi f ; 3ft—
He may before •

He is /o\ed. He has been hvctl.

atvTt 9 love i Participle form ‘loved’
eti

Verb 9 ’ing’ Ji|t ;mrai mi h 95 Passive Voice 9 ? J

^
Note (a)— IF ii«K »in Verb To be’ 9r ?Ti « .

f. jr (u)m‘
% i> It ^ mtft ?-(i) Verb 9 a> ‘ing’ wn
m
ciple form 9 Verb an qiFi
1
Active Voice 9 m
9 I am iim 9; era ^ ssnw 9w«l Voice an •
.^Si
Verb ^
I Verb ^ iw d^ ^ 9T ^*19 aft »ti9I

IF Fimt ^ —
He is read. He is reads.
„aV iW
reads i nft reading Ft
FIT tftFft it iimt 9 read «lti

Ver ‘Xo
Note (b)-igft Fi Rt wa I f« Passive Voice 9 tm
Ft si^F WITF ^l S; 9ft— k.^ten
He Ii beaten. He £r being beaten. He has wen » Verb
(c)-^ Verb To have’ 9: 11 ? Verb wmi h ^ ^>
 VERBS 227

Past Participle 5;q if 5«—

He has walked.
You have slept.
They had fought.
He has been punished.
Having done the work, he went away.
tirqisqf if has, have fr»t bad % walked, slept, fought,
been nilT done 57 |vi sil Past Participle S 1 1 Etrfirr n

You have went.

Having finishing one book, he has took up another book.
er! went, finishing sf)t book % mn: gone, finished rIe taken
vtsRiiifPn I

Role XV Intransitite Verbs

ERR! Passive Voice ft rttit. aitf* Active ^ Passive rti^ an
f’t’Pi flE % Tr Active Voice H Noun «i Pronoun Object rm % RE
Passive Voice if Subject (t rtw i rfir Active Voice if at Subject rtai ^
*E Passive if Object *% -
ifl atitt I.

He beats me-(Active Voice).

am beaten by him— (Passive Voice)
I

ant ^ fR Intransitive Verb <1 Ooject

ST1 riw ct afl i «
Intransitive Verb »i Passive Voice ^ ik ««m J ’ ka-Et WEta §—
He died toiiay.
This incident occurred yesterday.
It happened five years ago.
EREiEet 9 died, occurred aet happened, Intransitiie Verbs ^ atr
Mfeq iTTki Passive Voice Eimi ef? wn r^VT Passive
Voice iR HRrr ERT«—
He was died to-day.
This incident was occurred yesterday.
It was happened five yean ago—Rt ) Etn i

rnf^rr «n Intransitive Verbs w Passive Voice (fairif Verb To be*

V at? Principal Verb ci Past Pailiciple re nm J) Rvfi ut sfl eeie i

rxrRcisE
0- Oirreei the f’llohing senfruces—
lilWe »<r« Ml It t)ie(.v-4c4BhiR. (b) An incident «ai ocrumd tail
twmnf IcITbry are d* quicSty id)ll « Cltrendi ur^vn many factim. <«) If
you are atrt«.rl*a»« Infoim i! on.* irsilendwj (i) aopt of tbit field TV
 1 ^
22S How TO ttRlTf tOrftFCf fNCLf^tJ

hy t hoT (h) TTk ficM l< plij'j|*)in 2 hy a pic’ut’imsn. (itAq’Ji

«n tiktn ffac* iheft (j»h w«
lo happen* J many iime» H)lim»lepl
hel»»J('od. tl> 1 appaired AMh* *<anltiaiion. (m) TI»?y were perishfJ
lh< »now.
Ifintt (a) \Ne all or »e »cresifl<nf: (b) inciJenl oecurreJ; (vjHitjt
(JMI Oepcrklt, (el Ytni attce, <() He died or b« b'haJ; (i) tre wiulied b «
been waiched, (h) <a ptmiphe.l^ (i| qjarnl Inok ptare. (j> ll w
happened. (t)I
tleeping bui he ii aumt<nt. oe t alept bji he iiooJ, fl) t hj«ippeafeJ,{m)Tl
pcriOied

Ilulc XVI QuAal-|*Aa«ltt Vfflie

T4 Tfamitive Verb* J «j xnk if Aclive Voice * fniH

•eff* 501*1 ^ (form) Active Voice «< mi tt S5T^ Pa«i'^
ee (sense) str tmt J i «!»I ft Verbs «‘f Qjaii'Passive ei Middle Voii
^?! Veibs SR an Adjeclive «i STtn^Vn I *T»t Adjectives

Verb « Subject ci eipii ^

*r» aw Verb ^ «t 5* tith
Ver

i; aiT Adverb »MT J. Adjective sr^; 5^—

This fruit Mftct scar but that lasies rwett.

The sofa fteh$oft.

That wooden chair feeh hard.
This (lower smeUs swtti.
His words sound harsh.
This silken shirt f«ts soft.

This house looks nice.

Fish sells cheap.
W Verbs i an Adjeclive n siThr 5*1 k Adje5ni5^

i Subjects inf Adjectives i Adverbs

g«( aiRiit J
sf^tl srCf ffar, adffr Adverbs «i
I

sifrn airr n fsi ^ ^

B€ciT I «v T5T and! ^ —
The book reads well.
The book sells nell.
The sentence reads badly.
The house lets easily. .
«i
j
fir if Verbs i tr Adverbs ci a«iVr
a nqf jsn S. Adjectives

anff i Verbs «t
ffff 4a3WT '^T 1
ic an? ^ sffT fit, ?s& »C fvs « 1

Passive Verbs % fn Adjective an Adverb *t sra>i fhiT f.

‘nsTTfjprt anrriti

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentences —
tastes S9urly. t J
(a) This feaiher feels softly, (h) The curd
 —

V£Rn$ 22 !)

mango Ustts nicely, (d) This (to«cr smeOt sweetly, (e) My garden looks
beautifully. (0 Your «ords sound.hatshly. (t) This fruit tastes bitterly.
Iflnlt-ia) soft; <b) sour; (c) nice; (d) sweet; (e) beautiful; (f) harsh,
(g) hitter.

Rule XVII. Aux. Verb+An*. Vcib+Prlitcfpal V'erb

m ^ ^ sTw Anxaiary Verbs Principal

Verb actn^ aa tnrf aft tok ^ w sw Auxiliary
Veib+Anxiliary Vctb+Princifal Verb; IH—
He did not and will not come.
*'
You can and should do it
'T|^ arrtfsliit Auxiliary Verbs ‘did’ etlr 'will’iniT irw d Princi-
pal Verb ‘come’ sirn j«ii \ i 51 aft V) Auxiliary Verb ’can'
atb; ’should’ ^ ft Principal Verb ‘do' »iTpr f«l rei It
^ irtat ft ar^tj xs« w ^tsft anil 5l Principal Verb ct
Auxiliary Verbs ati common factor }. sn^ Principal Verb air

Auxiliary Verb I: ftpr i i art awt ^ fs come ti wtn did «fk

will ftft ft it ftm i 1 Tttt a«iT do sfm can 4 rrre ftar I sAt
should % RTv V) fbn i f% aft
I
Auxiliary Verba ^
«t, rffir Cf firs

ftR W
ft Principal Verb *t sfW ft, «t aj «rs«« | ft att Principal
Verb«t5;q art Auxiliary Verbs « fax common factor ft, xt aft ff
Principal Verb x« Auxiliary Verb i fax ax^« ft sV i ft? *tfl>
common factor snft ft, n1 #9 Principal Verb err nata at^W
Auxiliary Verb % xnj sran-sT?n ctar aiftx; 3a -
He has not gone and will not go.
ail Principal Verb ‘go’ ci aflx ft Auxiliary Verbs ^ rra srax-
wax sm I— has 1; an; Boh« *Ax wiH ^ aiago «i, aatft ar Principal
Verb fisfj Auxiliary Verbs w common factor sift V i wri siiatt \ ft
has i aia gone ar sak ftai I six will it aia go vi i sti: aft m aff go
»hx gone 51 %x« fi
ftxftsabi rftx w ^ feme. fiV at w»?: fiat—
He has not and will not go.
You will and have hefped me.
He could not and has not seen me yet.
STtwint aft taaraal 5l Principal Verbs ‘go’, ‘helped’ sftx ‘seen’
ajta: sixA Auxiliary Verbs % fax common factor aft, aflft has ^ aia
gone 3 srtetr has % ftx xx^a 3, xx will 3; ftx aft i t xat irtk helped
XTafk have i; aix fkt i XX will Siatxsifl I ftx. <ftxt^ xixx tf seen «i
sfk has 5; BIX rft i XX could i; am aft l xwftx fs Principal Verbs
XT sxtx wax-siax fiat 'xrftx: 3^
He has not gone and will not go.
 230 now TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH
You will http and have helped me.
He could not see and has not seen me yet.

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the/olhving sentences —
(a) No one has or can prove the existence of Cod. (h) He coulJ i
should have done the work, (c) No state has or can adopt such a nww
(d) You have and wiU help me in future as welt, (e) They did not and could i

have known the truth, (f) I have never and shall never believe it (g) I bi
never and shall never accuse a man. «
y/i/irj— (a) has proved or; (b) could do and. (c) has adopted or. (d) ba
helped and; (e) did not know; <0 have never believed and; Ig> have co
accused and.

Rule XVIII. Sequence of Moods.

Rule(*)—qf^TRiliSubordiDate Clause 9 Verb i Patl Tw'

w «! ^ LonditioB supposition (s«H SubofJinit'

Clause 9 Subjunctive Nfood btW t >) nt Principal Clause 9 dt

i Past Tense win fini ntrr9, Presenter Future
Tense*
«t ft
nfr. a^—
oblijfJ
Should you appoint me to the post, I would be highly

qfl Subodinate Clause (Should post) 9 condition «i it*

.
.
|
fir* Verb « p.sst Tense (should) «J w’ln !«i ) f*tflrT Prfnci^
'

Clause (I . .obliged) 9 Verb i Past Tense wi (would) «r ssln r«l»

ttf?arrl would « will vsl'i clm ^ **

Sequence of .Moods vin ft »rTi i «-<) »Ar «f-*

Should there be ram, there will be good crops.

Should my son pass, 1 will be very happy.
fT xRf e'l mtf 9 erm Clause Subordinate ^
Verb * Past Tense (should) ssK *

y1 *'
Principal Clauses 9 Future Tense (will) «T, «) 1

would «r frre ETTi wire* I

Suh-
j k Frf
Kale (b)-erTcoiidiiioa ei supposition «t *
i,n,din,i(«
ordinate Clause 9 Present s|» Future Tense «T nxM ir.uiti
Claus? Indkat've Mood rJisT Principal Clausen Pre«n* ^
9
Tense wi'n ftei mi'rt. Past Tense CT
—
I shall he glad if you see me tis-day. ^,1
*
1 shall Icam how to read and svrife if *
 3

VERBS 231

^
w if Subordinale Qause if condition an ?tvf vitrif

Present Tense ^ n5>i S'"! % I »ra'- Indicative Mood win ?sT I,

Subjunctive Mood ^ •fit Principal Clause if vt Future

Tense 5«n ^s: 1 1

shall % should sr Wlrr 5 ^T.
rat Sequence of Moods »f»i si anr 1 *rR ft: iir ftrw Sequence
1 w
Moods t agon Principal Clause rftr Subordinate
0
Clause i iftv
tn^ftvrj% ftra^
ft WT ^ Mood Tr«t ’adft— ^ t Subjunctive (Past
Tense vir
I
arjtn

ra sequence
^ if

art
Indicative (Present at Future Tense
stw 1 ® sftt a—
»;i infW

1 should be glad if you will see me.

1 will not do it if I were you.
TCt 9 Principal Clause 11 Verb i Past Tense FI (should)
^ si'ft jar % ftret «5T 'tnt % ft: ’ri Subjunctive Mood Rn «wrPT ipii
1 1 raftR Subordinate Clause if ift Past Tense Ft stW st
Subjunctive Mood if rwRi ^tfir^ «ra: «l?l wifi ^ would an sit)>i 5)nT
i

eftanwiUFtftnaiTt'^tptl'.autq.Subjunciive Mood ^
Indicative «i suln vnt Principal Clause Ifc should s?T shall ^ vw
at ra Mood if «t »td»)
ftwf ft Clauses Indicative 1

Subordinate Clause Mood ci autn sut f «^T raftrv Prin-

if Subjunctive
cipal Clause if ft Subjunctive Mood «i win fftt ^ifFt, suft ufl will

% v?t[ would vii flcVt tlRi vifra Few if. nrq ra ftra «> uw eo—I

To Mpr«s a eondiilOT and iJi conjf^wraee the inAfani>e Mood

should be follov-ed by the Indicative and the Subjuneffve by fAe
Subjunelhe.
rai ft’tJt eft Fftem: «iiraii wt «t vft 1 1

EXERCISE
Q. Correctthe /oWoRvng sentences —
Should he pass, his friend* wiU be bar^y. (b) flis parenli
(a)
would be
veryhappy if hewillpass. (cj I abooM be sorry ifyou fail this time,
(d) I would
do ii if I was you (e) If I were be. I will accept this proposal,
(t) Should you
repeat (his mistake you will suffer in bfe.
(g) I «r.U be very happy if I were a bird
HintJ-taMriendawouWbe;(b)hewouW; (c) you failed or would fail
(d) 1 were you; (e) I would: (0 Voo wooW;
(g) should be happy.

Rule XIX. Omission of InfiRitire

Role (a) Please, hear, see, need not, dare
not, feel make let
bid, behold, watch, shall, sboold, will, would, can,
could may’
might, do. did vv must i rat Infinirivc
Please help me.
«r Pvs to ftfVT ^ -

1 heard him cry.

 232 HOW TO WRJTE correct EVOLISft
He need not ;fo.
He dare not do.
1 made him laugh.

Let him tcad.

? help, cry, go, do, Jaugh read ^
^ ^ 3*rT to feri pi
i I Rff to i^?n I «T rt amt ^ ^—
I bade him toga.
He made me to laugh.
I heard him to whisper.
I saw him to take my book.
a?T amt if to netn J i pf ? Verbs Passive Voice 3 t!

?, ^ to srm i: 3%—
He ttas made to sing.
He iioj seen to fake my book.
Rjf to Rt ferraj Ri I pf, jst % Frr JpTT ait
Passive Voice 3 »ft pf^t arp to smii— He was let go.
Ifep PH ai w make 3; arp to ii ijaJn f,
Active Voice if f—
“icr this public mercy to the Church of Cod make jvu to /o/jw
your prhate sorrow." oitVER CROMWfU —
Rule (b)— Better, bad belter, had rather, bad sooner iftp had at

soon as li arp to f^Tt ppai |; 3%—

You had better go.
I had rather rest than work.

‘ffp^pf go, rest sfVp work i apt to cr aatT rp ftai aia, at at ^

pkr t HP PH amt ^^
I had better to sleep.

He had rather to die than to live,

apf sleep, die sflp live % ap?| to «t naht emi 1
Rule (c) — But, except, than aai as i tirp to ppm; Sh—
He did nothing but talk and laugh.
apf talk sftp laugh apt to Ri naVi wj® I

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the JoHoKir^ sentences—
(i) I beard him to monnor apaiul me. (b) He dare rot to
(c) You need not to worry, (d) The beggar had better to (he than to live in

(e) Better to reign in hell than to sene in heaven. (0 I "“<1*

(e) Please to give me some help, (h) He did nothing but to taufh M th* ‘
 t 1

VERBS 233

(0 He did everything ewcpl 10 inform me <j) He is belter ablelowaik than to

run. (M 1 was made sing. (J) He was heard say so.
sentences from (a) !o (i): (j) than run; (k) to sing;
Hints— Don’t use 'to' in

(1) to say.

Rule XX. Present and Perfect InfinHites

Role (a)— fietr Verbs ^ command, desire, hope, fear intention

^ii iln ^ to command, to order, to desire, to wish, to liVe, to

intend, to expect, to hope etc.) aftr ^ Present Tense if ti, sft et?
Present Infinitive ^ tVtt Perfect alt—
I hope fo meet you.
1 intend to write him a leUer.
I desire to see him.

iftT Present Infinitives cte: to meet, fo write aftr to see *t tpiVr

tyc ^ 1 ^ifK Perfect Infinitives (to have met, to have written, and
to have seen) ^ tlwi n't ^ r

Note - ftm Verbs It command, desire, hope, fear ai intention

CT vbf cl I Past Tense S ?it it? (i« efe Present ^
Infinitive *n seW tbfi (i hop<td to meet you), Perfect Infinitive
«TB7bi sr^Ts irff EPTi arr<n, ^atamwi if Perfect Infinitive ^ a?k
If unfulfilled purpose «t etv ct^n I; alt—
1 hoped to ha\e met you.
r«r eifv Ir «it civ chit % ft* '>1% ^ jnpi (rrfti) ^ ift, vr
vrit rwi’ I fi5 ^"1 frmt I f« Vn ncln sifl fRt ^cv. Past
Tense iff ^ Verbs 3s en; Perfect Infinitive >61 'I’iin sntf 'uifrr,
vr sRln ^ eft & tit ary Bcf «Ct at
"After Past Tense of hope, fcaty expect and the like, the Perfect
Infinitive Is used, Incorrectly indeed and unnecessarily, but so often
and with so useful an implication tiuji It may well be counted idiomatic.
That Implication is that the thing hoped etc. did not in fact come to
pass,and the economy of conveying this H'lr&Tirr a separate sentence
compensates for lack of logical preciaon."
— rowLER : Modern Encush Usage
era w umf vi)

1 intended to hai e written to him.

I wanted la have seen him.
5? t?!nT «i ircAi % f« irc! to have written sflc to have seen ert arw

Btl axre; to write eftr to see vn avbi ttin

lit ftVTt & it em i I c!,aft art Perfect Infimtive stein
 234 IIOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH

cTsn tmf rr
Ri i:r fm, sTr I'— ww
I intended to write (o him but could not.
I wanted to see him but could not.

Rule (b)— Past Conditionals (3& should have liked, wc —

have been the first etc.) % tit Present Infinitive TiaTVrTT^iTTftt.i
feet Infinitive ^t Htff;

I should have liked to see him.

I would have been the first to oppose him.
TR Ttvff t: TRift if Present Infinitives (to see sftt I® oppose

STtn asii I, «ff S' I t(zt Perfect Infinitives (to have seen ^ to h

opposed) Rzft'i si»t? I

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following sentences -
you. 0
(a) I hope to have succeeded, (b) 1 desire to have aecompJtued
to
should have liked to have visited Delhi, (d) 1 would have heeu the fint
accepted your proposal, (e) I loteod to have written to him.
(d) to *«*
(a) to succeed; (b) to accompany; (e) to visit;

(e) townie.

Rule XXI. Noun/Adjectire and iDfioilivc

ttmr if Noun tn Adjective I: trt Infinitive «m ^

Tl Adjective ^ gn ajisrmi 3lt—
This is a house to let.
English IS difficult ro /earn.

^ Tm'l if Infinitive Active Voice if

to be l«r“ f
TTTtfr *1 to let sfrr to learn passive Voice (to be let,

tiTbi) *1^5 chn 1 vtg ansTw »irt w

Radium not easy to get.
is
I have nothing to show.
He has nothing to da.
She is difficult to please.
It is easy to promise but difficult to keep.
Meat hard to digest.
is
I have several books to sell.
Grapes are good to eat.
fr if Infinitives (to get, to show, to do, to plMto*
^
< r*
mise, to keep, to digest, to sell, and to eat) ait Passive Voice

I TTaRjff^—
He has nothing to be done.
 VCRDS 235

I have many mangoe* to bt eaten.

You arc (JifTicull to be pleased.
Gold is not easy to be fotml.
n an?! 9 to be done, to be eaten, to be pleased s?it to be found

4 r;?t imri: to do, to eat, to please to find cr w'ln jVn i

»t5re ^ ^isit if Active Voice «t wW t—

"Put ihit iiffv it is plainly not an eoty question to ansircr."
—1. K. RiaiARDS

EXERCISE
Q. Currecf the following sentences^
(1) MaihemalicsisdirncuUtobefcarni. <b) It is easy to be said but
difficult la be done, (c) Ttie «otk iseasy to beperformed. <d) Cram is hard
to be digested, (e) She to be pleased
is difficult

Wwfa-Ka) to leam. (b) to say .......to do; (c) to perform, (d) to digest;

(e) to please.

Rule XXII. Genuid and Possessive Case

bfitaTan if Oetuodii Vfin Noun ui Pfonoun snrn
Noun et Pronoun Possessive Otse «i nVi aV sH
Gerund % iNi to^n
I ask the favour of your granting me leave.
Ram won by Mohan’s missing a chance,
tuf ai?? if PossessivePronoun ‘your* Gerund (granting) %
Tflt tat mn 1 1 tn f?ra—
I ask your favour of granting me leave,
tft ut Pronoun ‘your’ Gerund I; inrfr *10 snei 1 1

?l?7 5 sft Noun ‘MohanV ^ Possessive Case if Osit »ni f, aft

Gerund ^ ggif sitf 1

‘missing’ aft pi few— 1

Ram won by Mohan missing a chance,

fit Iff TOs 5PTI, 9rfffe Mohan «t Possessive Case ff trff cii rni 1 1
0,?;-

^r annvi in

You may upon my doing all in my power.

rely
Tn no other religion is there a thought of man’s being saved
by grace.
if Pfonoua ‘my* Possessive Case if |
0% Gerund sfR
^ if% twi nm 1 nr if my % me «i jr>»t
1 ^15?^ 1

if Kt Noun ‘man’
^ Possessive Case (man's) if i^ti n«ti | \ aif Gerund
?nr man’s maa*TiRbr wns^ri
Note— afe Gerund 3: aesf bijt Noun sr^ fsravn Possessive
Case 5i(t i?l 's a*| Possessive 3 ^
 2W now. To»*nefti»»rrrr'<f.ft»M

a't—
'Vc Inok forward K» mnch ottrnth'i bring giren.
I depcf'cl nn llie ir<i// being built ImrTHdi.llely.
ttI attention i ailenlion'i Vit wall i waifs «t Tftt ^
«f|T ftii. ^ilfc «»rT wr rw*t Pos«iii*e Case tt(i rm f t

Rale XX'IM. GrmiKi and falintflTe

Purpose <7? r7> «i wtr^ k f=r Infinitive «t earn *twj

cause (TtM) *1 <rrT^ i f^t* for « ort Oerond n; 3^—
1 will go to Patna loptrtfuue books,
lie was h-ingcd /w eommitUng murder.
^fl enr ft purpose at etir fMi ^ I
Infinitive (to {W*

chase) ai s-fw ijm }

5
«fk arv? 8 c.iuie fT=Trt «
i for « nw Gen&l
(for committing) «i ofin f/a» cei J r sr? rr »t »ml ^ Hf"
I will go to Patna far purthculns books,
lie was hanged roromm/r murder.
»rv7 9 purpose i m
8 Gerund «i nin uV ^ *

«ra 8 Inflnitive^t Ww ^ r wrT%^ >(Tft ft erar? «^l

EXERCISE
Q. Correct the following senieneet—
can rresent It being the mam litue at the general
(s) Noihittg
(b) Please pardon me reitnodinj you. (c) I »8s displeased •‘*‘**^'^1,
coming, 1 was pleased at him coming to-day.
(d) (e) I have purchased
for reading, (f) I have asked him for seeing me to-day.
wsv®-
Jflntr—ia) itn (b) my; (c) barber's; (d) his; (e) ioread;(0

Rule XXIV. Unattached Participle

^ swln ft waft
Participle ^ ft ^
sft ^ 3^3® Noun tn Pronoun i «ra ^tri
c ^
swft ^
Unattached Participle 31 Wrongly Attached Particip
5mn I, fttrs'V 131 8 — ,
is one o]
“The Unattached or Wrongly Attached Participle^

blunders most common with illiterate or careless writers.”

-fowler: King's INGUSH

w IJ5T ft raft % ftR wrr or ft^ ^ ^^tpi

sft

Noun
Subject
m Pronoun
^ I
ft:
3Fft

ftR
Subject ft:
3&
Participle ^tinitn rrait

Walking along the street, I asked him to go home.

Having met my brother, I asked him to go home. i, .
^
?w^bffarfrT ft Unattached 31 Wrongly
Attached Particip
 VtRIIS 237

'tssft stiT

f?rt v.^^l.^ng
5( J. ^
5« ^—
tnt *1 Finite Verb ‘mcl’ Subject i I

Walking along the strcel-Whilc I was walking along the

street.

ei?7 if asked «f Subject i I ftir having met ci c-ftn

jsn J—
Having met my brotber=I having met my brother,

rn sreR pi > fR W * Finite Verb i Subject rt ^ ffft

Paniciplc «i TiSn im % Subject Verb rftr Participle iRt

common factor i— S {V+P)*»Subject (Vcrb+Parliciple). sw PTRiTTf

Standins upon this house, the whole village can be seen.

Going to schooti a snake bit him.

x;r H Wrongly Attached Participle an sit >rai i,

TR? «t Subject i village, tt rwk fin standiog an «?Vi »tT jot i—

Standing upon this house^tbe village standing upon this house,
tm <1 »r^ tn i

wm ^ Finite Vetb I bil thr fi?«i Subject I snake. «t m

‘going’ ‘snake’ J? ftrt «pn I 7 fit fets^ «t sfetira J—
A snake going to school, bit him ?
sT<t, triOT tfl

Verb
^% w5 srft ?ni ctw b> pt ^nril ^ ft; ttr
i

^Rtl eitir ff Finite Subject ^ ftie Participle ti inibi sifr jot ?;

Participle rt «?ln fiwt Noua at Pronoun ^ ftnt feet fret %, tR
rrtTTtvi^
Noun OT Ptoaoun
ft 3tt Noun
aturtfl
ei Pronoun *i
»hf ftflt
flu'll ^ Participle
nut I, ftmft Wrongly Attached Parti-
nil agflja

ciple ui flh OT mil i i ^ uiflirf wl ^ arrft «i juri ftetr a? t—(i) Parti-

ciple i OTfl Noun Ai Pronoun ui siflln ii') Participle ^
Finite Vetb *iAifl ^ 3ft—
Going to school, a snake bil bim.
rHOT ?j5 w AT i—
While he was going to school, a snake bit him.
p;?: At »ftr 5—
Walking across the bridge, his •valking-slick broke.
Sleeping in my room, a ghost haunted my dreams.

A A177 «1^5 J, flfllftr flrft AHA a walking-stick % feu walking sVt

>i ghost i ftrfl sleeping ar aaIa rft *tAi V, fstAvn «ia ?1 ^
I Auft
^
AR A I'—
While he was walking across the bridge, bis walking-stick
 236 HOW TO WRtTE CORRECT ESCUSII

Wc look forward to much attention being pyen.

I depend on the wall being built immediately.
JR? attention ^ tt# attention's ^tei wall ?
sTfl 's 5nrT ^ Possessive Case ora Ji

Rule XXIII. Gerund and Infinittre

’i’
Purpose (35 ?5) «t tW k fnr Infinitive ti
cause (^TT»i) Tts «TT% % fes for « mi Gerund Ti; a'—
1 go 10 Patna to purchase books.
Will
He was hanged for committing murder.
«rff am
% purpose tiu 1 n ^ 1

chase) ^
si=ihi 5111 i 1 S cause am i
(forcommilting)ciJiTkfk^T‘TUiJ, a)^ll sTFttw
I will go to Patna for purchasing boob.

He was hanged to commit murder. ^ • a«

rrrl qT5t am
if purpose % m
if Gerund ci saW
R v j

«M if Infinitive «i a?fW st^ 1 1 sri t

EXERCISE

Q. Correct the following sentences— ^

(a) Nothing can pwentit being the mam
Issue

(b) Please pardon me remiodiog you. (e) 1 *"« rcrii**

coming, (d) 1 was pleased at him coming to-day*

for reading, (f) I have asked biro for seeing me to-day.

(T) ts
**

us; (b) my; (c) barber's; (d) bm t'i

Rule XXIV. Unatiacbed Participle

Participle i srak if Tfr WTlft R? ^ '
'V«
^
f*

^
sRife
^ Noun Pronoun *
Unattached Participle jH Wrongly
A
.
^ pjrtict’^
*’

rtI

I. fTTral
“The Unattached or
^ rt «5T •nn
iVrongty Attached
Port; fi
U ^
careless
blunders with illiterate or l-G-*
_fOVMER:K'=^
5 fiW'
?H i *17 JIC RR a*,irtir^’*'
Subjrel « fat Parlicip e
aft Subject I
Noun ^ Pronoun % feR stff; S&— .

IValiins alons the slretl. I h™ aslrf

^
htni ® *
Haring met roy brother, I asked
Wrongly AtU‘i>~
Unattached
T^r ^i*if RTTrf S1 1
Ti
 VERBS 237

5* I. ^ Rnite Verb ‘met' Subject t I

alking ^ srqVr |in t—

Walking along the street'* White I was walking along the

'
if asked ^ Subject t I Oraii having met Jrrtn

Having met my brother**! haWng met my brother.

'

- 'iple SI smln ^an

VJ Sffiir s*r fsf
i’ ^ ^
«! Finite Verb i Subject ^ fei?
I «nfe_aw7«i Subject Verb liVc Participle si
ion factor i— S (V+P)=Subject (Vcrb+Participle).
Standing upon this house, the whole village can be seen.
Going to school, a snake bit him.

, w CHsf if Wrongly Atuched Participle «t sn nm riffs

''
t Subject i village, Tt fev standing ^ rfbr mif ssi
‘Standing upon this bou$e>the village staoding upon this house,
. rti are ft ir^ ti»!?n r

Finite Verb > bit sf»T wsi Subject i snake. ffT

'
a' ‘atiake’ ^ ftet «nm I 7 vn sfnate ^—
' A snake going to school, bit him *’

5?^,
07^
a5tftrw«iiff^RN!i«5^^snnni sfrrt
if Finite Verb ^ Subject ^ fiw Participle ft
^
imVt
? Tfi

niff ipsi
if

'iple
.sft?iu«!
err
^ Noun
seln f«*rt
NounmPronoanvniriW
ai Pronoun
’rri
1; ftr?

Paiiiciple sA
ftrfrnin J, irr

sigTatfi
Pronoun SiBtestffteiueTj,
- Jn Wrongly Attached Parti-
/siehi*rT>Tiii%i^rvTf st 51 «i faair (ijparti-
, s mu 3735 Noun ui Pronoun ST iiu>>i
S7 str (iij Participle^
' Verbsi S7
^

^ Going to Khool, a snake bit him.

• >ttrsi Tpt S7 uf 4—
While he was going to school, a snake bit him.
-'‘ts 5I se.HTS sir S—
> IValking across the bridge, his walkmg'Siick broke.
• - * Siceping in ray room, a ghost haunted my dreams.
>*R7 ntfeertaRC? walking-stick ^ firt walking sftr
err? 4,
'
.
'
ghost ^ sleeping «i Bah nai 4, f>r!ict aili sb ft ;r^
^
• ' s!^ TO fr h 4—
While he was walking across the bridge, his walking-stick
 ,
'

240 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH

6. 1 will be glad to welcome you any time.

7. I expected to hive leturaed iit time but couM not.

8. I don't think I will be able to help you.

9. t wilt always rcoiember you helping me.
10. Do you oiod me femrndmg you ?
1 1 . Why should he insist upon you leaving at once 7
12. 1 cannot help but remark that you are guilty.
13. Turning now to the record, it appears to be uareliabie.
14. Have you not heard of him being punished 7
13. She hid In bed all day.
16. Ploughing the field, a serpent appeared.
17. He rung the bell and bid bis servant to bring tea.
18. I will be delighted to dine with you.

19. Having failed in the first attempt, the work was discontinued.
20 If it was possible, it should be done at once.
21. While waiting for bim, a storm arose.
22. 1 have passed the eaaminalion last year.
2J. He on Sunday, arriving there on Monday.
started for Patna
24. Silling in bis room, a dog entered.
23. Being an extremely cold day, I remained indoors.
26. Should you help me I shall be obliged to you.
27. He (a)ks English net).
28. He avoids to see me.
.

tfinit—i. has not Itnpfcmewed; 2. and hanged yesterday: 3.

J”'*
8. t
4. she would; 3. upon his; 6. I should be glad; 7. to return;
9.
y. your neiping; 10. mind mr.
helping; tu. II.
si- mmo mn
upun your, 12. cannot
upon youi;
,
(

13. Ifonclurns/Ifwetum to the record; M.ofhis; IS.shelayjlo.

should K
farmer was piougnmg -
:
ran? Kmnc I'nt-s. jj.
«*• I
"
was (one vras) •s '"* '

19. l!e/we having failed ; 20. If it is; 21. While 1

22. 1 passed; 23. on Sunday and arrived. 24. While I *5; {|i
j7
shouU be obiigta,
23. As it Was an estremely cold day . - ; 26- I
speaks. 2S. Avoids seeing me.

REFRESHER OOHRSE 11

ineorrtcl
E.xpfjin wA.v the following seniencet are correct or
1. I had witnessed a show last eight.
2. He had been married (n 1943.
3. I finished my work before I met him.
4. tyho had discovered America 7
3. Let us discuss about these poemv
6. What will I do Ibro 7
7- He asked if the meeting can be co*tr<ooei).
•• You never have and never can or will Ule this bold »irp-
9. Who hanged this map on the wall 7
to. Tennewr^emberahavebeeneoroHedandfiveresigned. -ttr’iU
’ This is the f^tevt misfartune that hss ever or fOuU
ouf eatioa.
1 hope 1 wiU |*a
 VERBS 241

U. 1 decided to at ooce call a meeting.

14. Being a rainy day, I remained iD-doon,
15. Standing on the roof, a heiici^ter flew over me.
I£. Reading in my siudy room. Ihe dock struck twelve.
17. 1 have passed the examination nett year.
18. He has come here the other day.

Pfople that trows ectksramrJ

e/ mint trip on
M tloppr nrlilMf Is a people In procest
In empire anj on bfelf.”
—EZRA POUND
 aurnti x

COMMON ERRORS
«r^i7 *f pr 3^ wflfeff ^ 331 a>
r^sf * vrj s?>'F 31^ je; *n? !ft3 H*3* rs a i? {brads
k »f}3^ f^j} !p }' I

(A) ONE WORD FOR ANOTHER

He is given free boarding and IcxJging, (board)
There is a crowd o( girls, (bevy)
This house is made of brieis. (brick)
There is a crowd of grapes, (bunch)
He has not paid the fooding charge, (food)
I enjoy /rerifcp.fffee'Sludentsbip)
He has applied for Ucturershtp. (lectoreship)
The house is beyond repairs, (repair)
You are a man of Hordr. (word)
He is true to bis words, (word)
I have sent a peliilon for casual leave, (an application)

He is out of door, (doors)

I have placed order for a book, (orders)
He is out of spirit, (spirits)
I am out of sort, (sorts)

I am a man of part, (parts)

He applied himself to study, (studies)

I am resting in the shadow of a tree, (shade)
There is no place on Ibis berth, (room)
I have no rupees, (money)
He H-o/A'ed on his cycle, (rode) .

hfy salary is Rs. 400/- per month, (per mensem or a mont

My salary is Ri. 4803/- per year, (per annum or a year)
Please credit tbb amount to my name, (account)
Goodbye, Ram, I am glad to sec you. (Good cvenins)
Good night, sir, yon are welcome. (Good eveoins)
The weather of this place suits me. (climate)
You are addicted to reading, (habituated)

( 242 )
 COMMON ERRORS 243

It is an ancient chair, (old)

This great poim is very artful, (arlistic}
youi chiJAih nature, (child-like)
1 like
Shakespeare was an imaginary poet, (imaginative)
As he is siek, he is absent, (ill)

Please grant me ill leave, (sick leave)

The great saint is notorious in the spiritual field, (famous)
You are a luxuriant man. (luxurious)
He is our mufuai friend, (common)
He rose by dint of sheer merit, (great)
They are aworn enemies, (avowed)
I ric/iiy deserve tb»s honour, (highly, greatly)
It is utterly right, (wholly, perfectly)
I have done good at the examination, (well)
The thief stood in front of the judge, (before)
It is 4-30 In my watch, (by)

It is totally good, (wholly)

It is totally deit to me. (perfectly, thoroughly)
The pot is raeant. (empty)
1 admire her womanish virtues, (womanly)
I took my bath and tea in the morning, (had)
I look my meal, (t bad/aie my meal)
1 rook my admission. (I was admitted or 1 got myself admitted)
Itook my birth in 1930. (I was bom)
He Invited me but I denied, (declined)
He denied to help me. (refused)
I drink tea in the morning and milk in the evening, (take)
A lot of men suspect the existence of God. (doubt)
The police doubled him. (suspected)
The ship was drowned ia the sea. (The ship sank)
Fishes /fool in the river, (swim)
A piece of wood is swimming. (Boating)
The picture was hanged, (hung)
I cannot rue iL (raise)
I will do it some way or another, (some way or other/one way
or another)
Neither of them saw each other, (saw the other)
The two cars were following each other, (one car was following
the other)
I went there espeeiatly to see him. (specially)
i cannot slay here any more, (any longer)
244 HOW TO WRtre correct ENCLISIt

}fcwas hung for murder, (hanged)

The smoke is raising from huts, (rising)
I hope (hat I shall fail, (fear)
Columbus Inrented America, (discovered)
You enjoy bad health. (You have)
I told him good morning, (bade)
He tells me a fool, (calls)
He has stopped at my house for a week, (stayed)

He saw my certificates, (looked into)

The doctor suw my pulse, (felt)
Have you seen ail the examination papers ) (examined)

See this word in (he dictionary. (look up)

The teacher told (hat the earth Is round, (said)
that (he Second Fsve-Yeat Plan not good.
My friend tells is

(says, feelSi hri'*''

I have siren examination this year, (appeared at)

He broke the news of my grand success, (communicated)
I could not help to laugh, (iaugbing)
My parrot speaks, (talks)
He talks English well, (speaks)
Do not speak a lie. (tell)
He told the truth, (spoke)
tne-
What to speak of helping me, he did not even speak to
e!
(Not to speak
He shook my hand, (shook hands with me)
posiii^""
Except for your help should have been in a difficult
I
(Without or

(B) SUPERFLUOUS WORDS

The fact is true. (It is a fact)
He picked up a quarrel, (picked a quarrel)
He died at the age of seventy years, (seventy) .
.yj
c
a five-year o
1 met a child of five years old. (five years or

The clock has struck six hours, (six)

It is almost guile right, (quite right or almost right)

It w rather (\t Vs
I walked on my feet, (on foot)
-He Is my cousin brother, (rousin)
^dered for his dismissal, (ordered his dismisMl)
 COMMON ERRORS 245

You are my only one friend, (only friend)

There is no other aitemative. (no alternative)
The poet describes about nature, (describes nature)
I saw him on last Friday, (saw him last Friday)

I doubt as to whether he is honest, (doubt whether)

Let us discuss about the problem, (discuss the problem)

1 am investigating into the case, (investigating the case)
1 am contesting /or a seat, (contesting a seat)
I recommended /or him to the Principal, (recommended him to
the Principal)
Her face resembles to her mother, (resembles her mother's)
Wait here until I do not return, (until I return)
Unless you do not labour hard, you will not pass. (Unless you
labour hard)

(O WORDS OMITTED
Please come at mine, (my house, ptoce, residence)
Yours of the 10th instant is to hand. (Your letter)
Ifind hard to do it. (find U hard)
Suffice to say. (Suffice it to say)
I know him a good man. (know him to be)
He appears honest, (appears to be)
He does not know to read and write, (how to read and write)
It IS regarded sacred, (regarded as)
1 took him a thief, (for a thief)
1 have a pen to write, (to write with)
You have a house to hVe and a chair ro jj/. (to live in to
sit on)
He resides in a boarding, (boarding house)
Open page 1 5. (Open at)
I wrote him to come, (wrote to him)

I him)
replied him. (replied to
1 pray God. (pray to God)
Go there and enjoy, (enjoy yourself)

(D) WORDS MISPLACED

My family members, (members of my family)

Many worth seeing places. (Many places worth seeing)
All round the year. (All the year round)
 fWW TO ttRITF CORUfCT rs'-.tRM

r nw n dead honewUinj aeron ihe fierj. (WaUingacnjiili!!

I,
field I MW a dead horse;
lie ihol *,d .f,„ .iii,
fUn. (AHtf hiJJint hi, .ife
joaj.h,,, ht shol hinjsif fad .ilhi

Me ».ii mutJtrtd. ifcjp-ng i„ c„rd n„(,d. ((,.

cold blood while he W3J jifeping.)
A large numherofjealj have been occupied
by scholars that
tiasc no backs. (A large number of seals Ihal have
no backs hasebeea
occupied by scholar!)
A motor car m.iy be driven across the bridge which swighslesi
an two tons. (A motor car which
weighs less than two tons maybe
driven across the bridge)
The death occurred yesterday afternoon at his residence of
Mr. Drown. (The death of Mr. Drown
occurred.... residence.)
lie gave a stool to the sersant
that had four legs. (He gave the

servant a stool that had four lep.)

Lost a canc by a gentleman with tkcarved bead. (Lost by a gesf-

leman a one with a can'ri head.)

I told him that hewould fail as plainly as possible. (I told Mn
as plainly as possible that he would fail.)

The storm burst just when the king reached the shore withgrMt
violence. (The storm burst with great violence when the king
just
reached the short)
Wanted a piano by a gentleman with carved legs. (Wanted faya

gentleman a p’ano with carved leg!)

Wanted a house by a government officer that has at least four

bed rooms. (Wanted by a government oflicer a bouse that has at least
four bed rooni!l
 CHAPTER XI

WORD POWER

i fere s^I*^ i *R5TI 5T?T ^

% I to ?Nt « «M it^-sw tra-sm ^ V wto TH sram Sf I

Synonyms, Antonyms, Paronyms a^t Homonyms rbO i

nsit acE tr sja TVen 1 13 qt »ft otia mi itmi. ^tTP® ftWf

i: sw & a> ^iTa if TO^ai Dilqt i

I. SYNONYMS
^ 57151 (.stoa 5fl) «M srfl 7i?i |, f«?3 ara fi tsi^ ^
^7 ^7t 7l rnTPT oraf } SvNONnis icrsnit I'; srimim crime th
W7TT7 «8f 5If» ^ ^ ft« tot Mim I, Vice 7T STUN J Sit ^fff5RI Si
toi sum I «tT Sin n strtm t at q^ tR fsRs f«m arm t i

1. Assentatsw i agreement (*qtfft), 7? ii ftqq ft awfto

trti 5^—
The Chancellor has given his asserti to this proposal.
Consent ar *ft era } agreement (p^ffA). tog 7t btsy sft fttff fr

tTTTtoti I.Sfr—
The Chancellor has given his consent to preside over the
function,
2, Addicted ^ {?ir il: ve 3) — He is aJJicied to drinking.
Devoted (qv§ k 77 i[)— I am devoted to my duties.
3 Avenge (to punish evildoers on behalf of one who is weak or
oppressed)— He will flicnje the murder of his bosom friend.
—
Revenge (is a Noun and a Verb to punish persons for wrongs
done to oneself or someone else}— The robber took rcicngc
on the odicer who had arrested him.
4. Battle (between large organised armies}— Three important battles
were fought at Paaipat.
right (between persons or parties but without the aid of army)—
The Hindus and the Muslims often fight for nothing.
War (between nations with the aid of large armies— is the biggest
type of armed conSict between nations)—The third world
Hor will destroy everylhing.
5. Begin (is used in a non-official sense)—! will begin the work soon.

( 247 )
248 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGEBH

Commeoce used in an ofHciaJ sense)—The PrincipJl t

(is

notified that the examination shall commence on the I5:h (

May, 1962.
6. Confer (to give —as an act of authority)—The President of lei
confers titles on great men-
Bestow —
(to give as an act of authority)— Many presetiU »er.
bestoKcd orj the flood-victims.
7. Confess (to accept reponsibifity or guilt)—The thief eenfeva
his guilt at last.
Admit (to accept as true)— My previous decision, I
not helpful.
8. Crime (offence against law or state)— Theft is a crime.
Vice (offence against moral law)— Drinking is a f’ce.
—
Sin (offence against religion) TeJIing lies is a sin.
9. Costom (feneral pactice in a society, an eswiishfJ
action)— Old customt are not always bad.
Ilibit (a parttculir tendency in an Individual)— /CjWi
second nature of man.
10. Defieleat (lacking in) — He is Jefeient In manners.
Defecthe (having faults)— His language is very dr/tWirr.
11. Deny (to declare something as false or untrue)—The thief
all the charges against him.
Brfme(not to accept)— He refused to help me.
%Ve cannot say **116 <fm/et/ to help me."
h’ 'I
12. IlHcoser (to (ini something that etisted before— to bring
s*
something that lay hidden for others)— A new planet
been JneoyereJ
l*«rat (to prisduce someihing new— to create what d«l n”!
fntfie-l ‘
before) Many deadly weapons have been I

days.
, j
|5 Drews (ts srsej for living objects only)— The body
ws*
13 the riser ,

Sisk (IS used f >f both liri.ig and oSj« >)—Th«

1
th'l*

!*. fseewws (hisini I'-spottance m s good scn«) -Indii

f-therC-esiSk.
• *’
S*j»rtnt (h i» ng lai^srtancs It « uai srur)— H* 1’

tnixi-ul
nr*c('‘> >
(s ujcJ w » gwJ senvs-bavng a
ra » )s a eit eeo
 —

WORD POWER 249

15. Liberty (absence of any check or restraint) — You are at liberty

to do anything you like.
Freedom (absence of dependence)— India has now achieved
political //fcdom.
16. Peaceable ^attracted towards peace, as opposed to war)— The
world to-day requires men of peaceable nature.
Peaceful (a state of peace)— Everybody by nature likes a
peaceful life.

11. Practice (Noun—a habit—repetition of an action)— Mathematics

requires practice.
Practise (Verb — to do repeatedly)—A false preacher only preaches,
he does not practise.
18, Shade (a place sheltered from the sun)— Cows are resting in the
shade of this tree.
Sbadow (a dark figure projected by a body)—This shadow dance
was very nice.
19, Stimulant (that which produces artificial energy for some time)
Tea is a mild stimulant.
Stlmulns (that which leads from a slate of inactivity)— Promotion
is a stimulus to elficiency.
20, Vacant (not filled or occupied)—The house is vortmi.
Empty (not containing anything)—The pitcher is empty.

1. ANTONYMS
fetf) trf? w afe yr) rrv; 3i ftttfri! tft at 5^5;
Antonvh «tsnm cold «t Antonym hot (mi comedy «7 Antonym
tragedy % j
je; Antonyms rnrainl ft artwi ^ftt—
Ability (atrci^i) Incompetence (•ra^'^m)
Above (TTt) Below (!fl%)
Accept arai) Reject {sndtm. ctm)
Acknowledge (e|^ «lait Deny (nft >tpri)
Acquit (gw a rm) Convict (rnn
Advance (rcil ajm) Retreat (fi & fjstr)
Advantage (^ra, gfaw) Disadvantage (ri%, sgfaar)
Adversity (fWw Prosperity (Wf't)
Affirm (»^»Tt artai) Deny (tsrsR^t^)
Agree (r^it kIst) Differ ^tRt)
Agreeable (apa) Disagreeable (aupe)
Allow (ngaffl ^:) Disallow (Hjafrt n ^t)
Always (R^?I) Never (a^ nfl)
 \VORD POWER 251

Confess ctstO Deny ’iTstt)

Confidence Diffidence (etfiRqra)

Consent, (sr^nfa) Dissent (»5rpTffi)

Create (<aHi) Destroy (rre ^0

Credit (otr) Cash (ire;?!

Crude Refined (qrt*Fr)

Cruel (it) Kind (5x13)
Death life (a1?;r)
Debtor (\^>, qt^) Creditor (?»i?T!TTi rrxi’i?)

Decent (>t5i Indecent (stvx)

Deep (>Tfti) Shallow

Defendant Plaintiff

Defensive (r^cirvi) Offensive (sT^rmifiTv;)

Dependent Independent (t*nsq)
Deposit (a«ri «^sn) Withdraw
Destructive Constructive (twnws?)
Difficult (etfs?) Easy (rnsr)

Dilisent (etwt, Idle (itgaift. «7r?5r)

Diminish (nm) Increase (*ewt)
Disease (dn) Health (WTW, «Ki'q)
Domestic fw^) Wild (anjfi)
Dry (^) Wet (ST?)
Do (eRHT. Undo
Ebb (»to) Flow (gate)
Early (qx^. tin) Late (etx. ^ &)
Empty (iiisft)
Full (t?rt jsi)
Encourage (3?aifiRr ^i) Discourage (xifRftiFrr ^=t’)
Entrance (5^)
Exit (fttCTtr)
Evil (sn) Good (vtH)
Exclude {^ssfO Include «FTl)
Exterior (qrx^) Interior
Extraordinary (srsfimt*!)
Ordinary (HmTT*i)
Extravagant (srttsifift)
Frugal, Thrifty, Economical

Examiner Examinee (xflwnff)

Failure (srream ) Success (ff^qrai)

Fait Foul, Unfair (jy)

Faithful (feT^RTt) Faithless
Fail (TtR) Rise t^crrH)
Falsehood (srgrqm) Truth (tnemi)
Familiar (qftpaa) Strange (sntW^a)
 WORD t>OWER 253

Like Unlike (ssRin)

Like (i^ Dislike (toms;

Literate (w^tT) Illiterate (flnsri)

Living Dead (^)

Logical Illogical

Legitimate (vn?ni) lllegWmate (stwtn^)

Long (5T^) Short (tot)
Loyal (jnsTTTft, Disloyal (safTrerC. fttaiFmnvi)

Make (?5TPn) Mar (5re ertRi)

Many Few
Material tn%) Spiritual («r>?tfct«. sritfe^)

Masculine (sfan) Feminine

Maximum (*trwfn»r) Minimum (^^sran)

Merit (!jn) Demerit (sIt)

Modest (fksra) Immodest (e^e)

Mortal (stitstr) Immortal (enrr)

Movable (^) Immovable (to?)

Much Little
Natural ?amr«) Artificial (ifsm). Unnatural
Negative (suRirW) Positive, Affirmative (t^l«irr>n>)
Noble (??r) Ignoble (rfra, sto)
Neither Either
Obey (snjnm «T;sn) Disobey (snetrauR
Old (w) Young (jai)
Opliniist (srmteBpl Pcssicmsi (fSrottPtTtt)

Oral Written (fertan)

Partial ( syrrfl) Impartial
Peace {?iif*?i) War (gjt)
Permanent (wnft) Temporary (swetift)
Permission (wgsrfit) Prohibition (tl^)
Persuade (i:ra1 Dissuade (tWm,
Please (inr»^*TRT) Displease ettni)
Pleasant Unpleasant
Pleasure Pain («!)
Plenty (sgO Scarcity (snnx)
Polite (RR) Impolite (ifTO, n)
Praise (asini erw) Blame ^Rt)
Presence (air'ern) Absence («3^r*vfH)
Profit(to) Loss (rlh>
Proper (afsst) Improper
Public (nisefer) Pfivalt (favl)
 WORD POWER 255

2. A«Ktk (btiuUfuD—ThU pocta U artislie.

Artful (cicvcf)— He succeeded by artful means.
Artificial (not natural)—Modem life is setting artificial.
3. Darbarism (uncivilized condition)— durdarfr/n still prevails in
some parts of the world.
Barbarity (cruelty)— Gieal conquerors have committed several
acts of barbarity.
4. Beneficial (usetul— it is applied to things)—The University Act is
very beneficial.
Beneficent (kind— it is applied to petKins)— My college is run by
the beneficent persons of the place.
5. Ceremonious (an excess of formality)— A friend's manners should
not be ceremonious.
Ceremonial (relating to rites or ceremonies)— My ceremonial
dress is very costly.
d. Comprehenshe (extensive, that which includes a good deal)— ‘The
Discovery of India' gives us a comprehensive survey of the
glories of ancient India-
Comprehensible (that which can be understood)—Your ideas are
not very clear and comprehensible.
7. A good student is confident of success.
Conlldeat (quite sure)—
Confidant (onewho is entrusted with a secret)— It is not safe to
make everybody your confidant.
S. Contemptible (mean, sil^)— lago’s conduct was highly
contemptible.
Contemptuous (hateful, tif'ea)— He dismissed the servant with a
contemptuous look.
9. Continuous (without gap or break)— Rainfall has been continuous
at Patna today.
Continna1(with occasional breaks)— My dog keepsxipiconiitiual
barking at ni^t.
10. CoDimuance (duration, time of remaining}— He will get all the
. pmileges during his roniintioncein the service.
Continuation (completion or resumption of something left io'
—
complete) The continuation of the work is delayed.
11. Corporal (relating to the body)— Corpora/ punishment at school
was allowed till recenily.
Corporeal (material) —Saints avoid corporeal pleasures.
12. Childish (is used in s bad sense and means 'silly')—You are
now grown-up hot your habits are childish.
fairly
Childlike (is used in a good sense and means ‘simple’ and ‘in-
—
nocent’) Auiobindo’s cMl^ike simplicity pleased everyone.
 A '

256 now TO WRirE correct engusk

13. Dfpcndcnl (i§ an adjective, meaning depending on)— My ca

is dependent upon this plan.

Dependant (h a noun, meaning one depending on otliers)—

dependants of my college employees are granted Mf
studentship.
14. Disinterested from prejudice)—
(unselfish, free A great les

renders disinterested senlce to his society.

Uninterested (inditrcrent, lacking in interest in a thine)-!
uninterested in local politics.
15. Dlrcrse (different, not alike) — Our opinions on this point are
diierse as sky and earth.
Divers (several)— D/rm men have tried to bring about so
reforms.
16. EfTectlve (having a powerful effecO-Antony's funeral speecfi

the death of Caesar was e/feetite.

Efficient (competent, officers do not prac
Efficient
red-tapism.
pre
Efficacious (sure to produce the desired effect)— ‘Aoacin’
<0ic<7C/our in all types of pain.
1 7. Enviable (producing or causing envy)—The perfonnsof* w
college team was enviable.
r«r/eai
EdtIous (the feeling of envy, ?it)— good man is not

the prosperity of his neighbours.

18. Elemental (relating to the elements, such as air, fire, etc.)—

ship reached the shore in spite of elemental difficulties.

Elementary (primary, introductory) —
Elementary education
now free in India. .

Formalism (observance of external forms)—We should

gi''*
19.
the formalism of religions.
Fonaaliiy (formal or ceremonial act) —A thanksgiving cerero

is often a mere formality.

20. Ghastly (fearful) — I trembled at the gfcajifv sight.
Ghostly (relating to ghost — am) —^The ghostly nguf*
dark was a creation of ray own brain. .

21. God-like (above ordinary mortals) — An act of

virtuous)- Vinoba Bhave leads a g« y
‘ •

Godly (religious,
22. Graceful (handsome)—Cleopatra had a graceful
—
Gracious (fflerciful) God save ourgrneiouJTresi'^^^
as ”
23. Honorary (holding office without pay, conferred -
—He got an honorary degree. The post of the
honorary.
 A

%VOia> POWER 157

IlonouraWe (worthy oftionoar) —Pandit Nehru was an/tonpurafi/e

man.
24. Human (belonging to mankind)—Struggle for existence is deeply
rooted in human nature.
Homane (kind)—We must adopt a humane attitude towards
animals..
25. Humiliation (loss of prestige, dishonour, emnrn)— He suffered great
humiliolion as a result of his failure.
Humility (politeness, Right type of education produces
humiliiy in students.
26. Imaginary (unreal, fanciful) —The Equator is an imaginary
line.

Imaginative (having creative ima^naiion)—No poet can be great

without imoslnaiive power.

27. Industrious (laborious, active)—There is nothing impossible for
an Mustrhus man.
lodnstrial (relating to commerce and industry)— Bombay is an
industriol town.

28. Jadlcial (impartial, pertaining to a judge or court of law)—

Judicial enquiry has been recommended.
Judicious (wise, sensible) —A Judicious selection of books is
essential to success.
29. Lovable (worthy of love, that which should be loved)— He has
many lovable qualities.
Lovely (nice, beautiful) —Rose is a lovely flower.
30. Luxuriant (having rich growth)— Castor oil helps luxuriant grow tb
of hair.
Luxurious (having much of comfort and luxury)—The Zamindars
led a luxurious life before Zamindari abolition.
31. —
Memorable (worth remembering) The 26tli of January is a
memorable day in India.
bfemorial (a statue etc. which helps us remember something or
somebody)— The Taj Mahal is a memorial.
32. Momentous (very important)—The first battle of Panipat was a
momentous event in (be history of India.
—
Momentary (short-lived) Physical comforts give only momentary
pleasures.
33. Negligent (careless)— A great man is negligent
about his dress.
Negligible (extremely unimportant or
small)—The difference bet-
ween the head-examiner and the co-examinet in marking is
negligible.

H. W. C. E.-17
 256

1.1 flfpcndcnt (h .

‘teprn^nlj of *P'"'^''’£on olfifr

niy”*.^,?"'"^
”’*'
>'..dcn>,Wp. “"'S' 'mploKC.
j„.,rf f,

“'’'""'"''S (»n«lli,l,, r,„ '"'" ,

Pr'JuJM-A gml
''"l"lrro„d ™'' "’. ''» »';«)'.
(.„d/ffe„„, ,

laniefcnt, not
alitei_n
*Airy«fl,jtyj^j^^^^ ^‘J“ropm;onfonffi;s po?nt i

.n^d ,0 ,,,, ,
,, ^
llle dMih atCaZZ'lf,rZ°P~^'‘'°°^’‘

red.fapijm, ' Vficient officers do net pne

Efflcacfous fsure
tn
,_ in all types
*^****^
19.
17. Enriabfe of^
fprodocinl
team was ®'’'V)~TIiepeffofmaocecfi
Ennoa, (the feel.ngof
eov?’^> .

's-

ship reached such as air, fire, elc.)-71

lire shni.**-
Elementary '“ *1’'^®
(prjmarv - °l'^7«wwra/fJifficahies.
now free in India*
*>ctory> —
Elementary etfacadoa a
rormalhin (observant
of
formalism of forms)— U'e should f ivf n?
religions”^'™*^

c=r.»»».'
20.

21. God-like l>ra>D-

fabov.
Godly (religious. ^***”'7 »
22. Graceful
vjrlDowLfv’**i~i^°
Bhave Jeadsayoi'ylife.
(handsoiDe>-a^
Gradotts(men:ifui>^ saw ^ appearaacc.
-3.
-’s- Honorary president I
fhoMincPdiB;
-I*
-ik Z,
got an
'7 5“ .

P“7. conftmd as an he
P'f. conferred
degree. The post oftheSecrci
honorary.
 A

Vk-ORD POWER 357

Honourable (worthy of honour)—Pandit Nehru was an honourabU

24. Human (belonging to manltind)—Struggle for existence is deeply

rooted in human nature.
Hamanc (kindl—We must adopt a humane altitude towards
animals..
25. Humiliation (loss of prestige, dishonour, sqsnn) — He suffered great
humiiioiion as a result of his failure.
Humility (politeness, sttFii)— Right type of education produces
humihty in students.
26. Imaginary (unreal, fanciful) —^The Equator is an imaginary
line.

Imaginatbe (having creative imagination) —No poet can be gteat

without imaglnalive power.
27. Industrious (laborious, active)—There is nothing impossible for
an industrious man.
Industrial (relating to commerce and industry)— Bombay is an
fm/uslriol town.

28. Jodklal (impartial, pertaining to a judge or court of law)—

Judicial enquiry has been recommended.
Jodicious (wise, sensible)— A Judicious selection of books is
essential to success.
29. Lorabte (worthy of love, that wtuch should be loved)— He has
many lovable qualities.
Lovely (nice, beautiful) —Rose is a lovely flower.
30. Luxuriant (having rich growth)— Castor oil helps luxuriant growth
of hair.
Luxurious (having much of comfort and luxury)—The Zamindars
led a luxurious life before Zamindari abolition.
31. Memorable (worth remeroberiug)—The 26lh of January is a
memorable day in India.
Memorial (a statue etc. which helps us remember something or
somebody)—The Taj Mahal is a memorial.
32. Momentous (very important)—The first battle of Paaipat was a
momentous event in the history of India.
Momentary (short-lived)—Physical comforts give only inomeniary
pleasures.
33. Negligent (careless)— great man is negligent about his dress.
A
Negligible (extremely unimpoitaat or small)—The difference bet-
ween the head-exaimner and the co-examiner in marking is
negligible.

H. W. C. E.-17
 256 ItOW TO WWfE CORRECT ENGLISH
13. Dependent an adjective, meaning depending on)— My careei
(Is

is dependent upon IhU plan.

Dependant (is a noun, meaning one depending on otheis)—The

dependants of my college employees are granted full free-
studentship.
14. Disinterested (unselfish, free from prejudice)— A great leader
renders disinterested unict to his society.
Uninterested (indilTerent, lacking in interest in a thing)— I am
uninterested in local politics,
15. Diverse (different, not alike) — Our opinions on this point are as
diverse as sky and earth.
Divers (several) Divers men have tried to bring about social

reforms.
16. Effective (having a powerful effect)— Antony's funeral speech on
the death of Caesar was effective.
Efficient (competent, aba)— Efficient officers do not practise

red'tapism.
Efficacious (sure to produce the desired effect)— *Aaacin* proves
efficacious in all types of pain.
17. Enviable (producing or causing envy)—Thepcffonnaaceoroy
college team was enviable.
EnvioDS (the feehng of envy, ct?)— A good man Is not eTri/osocf
the prosperity of his neighbours.
18. Elemental (relating to the elements, such as air, fire, etc.)— The
ship reached the shore in spite of elemental difficulties.
Elementary (primary, lolroductory) —
Elementary education is
now free in India.
19. Formalism (observance of external forms)— We should give up
the formalism of religions.
—
Formality (formal or ceremonial act) A thanksgiving ceremony
is often a vaete formality.
20. Ghastly (fearful)- 1 trembled at the ghastly sight.
Ghostly (relating to ghost — —
Spi) The ghostly figure in the
dark was a creation of my own brain.
21. God-like (above ordinary mortels)— An act of charity is god-like.
Godly (religious, virtuous)— Vinoba Bhave leads a goJiy life.
22. Graceful (handsome)—
Qcopatra had a graceful appearance.
Gracious (merciful)— God save our groriouL* President 1
23. Honorary (holding office without pay, conferred as an honour)
—He got an hotwrary degree. The post of the Secretary is
honorary.
 A

WOKD POWER 237

HonooraMe (worthy of honour)—Pandit Nehru was an honourable

man.
24. llaman (belonging to manVmd)—Struggle for existence is deeply
rooted in human nature.
Uumane (kind)—We must adopt a humane altitude towards
animals..
25. Humiliation (loss of prestige, dishonour, srtirn)— He suifered great
humiliation as a result of his failure.
Humility (politeness, stuni)— Right type of education produces
humility in students.
26. Imaginary (unreal, fanciful) —The Equator is an imaginary
line.
Imaginat'wt (having ttealWe imagination)— No poet can be great
without imaglnadye power.
27. Industrious (laborious, active) —There is nothing impossible for
an industrious man.
Industrial (relating to commerce and industryl-Bombay is an
indujtrioi town.
28. Judicial (impartial, pertainiug to a judge or court of law)—
Judicial enquiry has been recommended.
Judicious (wise, sensible)— A judicious selection of books is
essential to success.
29. Lovable (worthy of love, that which should be loved)— He has
many lovable qualities.
Lovely (nice, beautiful)— Rose is a lately flower.
30. luxuriant (having rich growth) — Castor oil helps luxuriant growth
of hair.
Luxurious (having much of comfort and luxury)—The Zammdars
led a luxurious life before Zamindaii abolition.
3|. Memorable (worth remembering)—The 26th of January is a
memorable day in India.
Memorial (a statue etc. which helps us remember sometbiug or
somebody)— The Taj Mahal is a memorial.
32. Momentous (very important)—The first battle of Panipat was a
momentous event in the history of India.
Momentary (short-lived)— physical comforts give only monienWry
pleasures.
33. Negligent (careless)— A great man is negligent about his dress.
small)—The differenee bet-
Negligible (extremely unimportent or
ween the head-examiner and the co-examiner in marking is
negligible.

It. W. C. E.-17
 E'*0LW"
correct
now TO- WRIT
V/RITE
^
25S
«»“*''"*
..head of '!l'tfkaw'">5'-
JA.

«conoe«**<* , Is not«

^^iSsSSs.-
pi„om(a-»"*“5 «bat «
,0

no rej s
/iiiickW P®P'*'®^®“Lve found
'’’"”'”TSS)-»''“'"’!’ to aa«P‘- »”L‘,
oI

^eaboak- TW
Rday- " nasyours.

•'»'>'
,, Seosaoi»C»P“'’’' . „taas

‘v“ro'rrfia L"r,o“°bo.t.b«>*",
 —

45.
WORD POWER 259

SpirUooDs (pertaining to atcohot)— The Government is now dis-

couraging splrituouj drinks.

Spiritnai (opposed to materiat; pertaining to soul or spirit)
Material progress at the cost of progress is harmful.

44. Temporal (opposed to eternal and spiritual)— The lust for tempo-
ral power is at the root of all conflicts.
Temporary (short-lived)— 1 cannot accept a temporary iob.
45. Union (act of uniting) —
A workers’ union has been formed.
Unity (oneness) —
Ilmdu-Muslim unity is essential.
46. Willing (ready without hesitatioD) — I am willing to help you.
W'ilfal (deliberate, conscious)— Acts of wilful negligence will ruin

your career.
47. Womanly (is used good sense and means ‘tender,' ‘affectionate’,
in a
‘that which is worthy of woman’)— The womanly qualities of
l.ady Macbeth could not remain suppressed.
Womanish (is used in a bad sense and means ‘weak and cowardly’)
—It is womanitk on a sodlier’s part to leave the battlefield.
48. Verbal (relating to words, oral)— tVrho/ orders for firing were
given.
Verbose (having too many words, having more words than
necessary)— His early style is verbose.

4. HOMONYMS
Such words as have the same form butdifferent meanings are
called HOMONVsis. Homonyms,
strictly speaking, are separate words
that are identical inform but diOereot in meaning. For example,
pole which means a ‘stake’ or ‘shaft’ is an English word and pole
which means ‘the terminal point of axis’ is of Greek origin. But,
broadly and loosely speaking. Homonyms are all those words that
have the same form but different meaning. In this sense date and
dear, too, are regarded as Homonyms. The following list is only a
small part of hundreds of Homonyms—
1. Arras— His arms (Kft)are broken. India is receiving nr/nj («ra-
yg) from America.
2. Bat—A bat becomes blind during day. I hit the ball
with my bat (^n).
3. Band—This is a
nice band (ea) of musicians. The military band
playing national anUiero.
(aisi) is
4. Bar—He drinks every evening at the local bar
The
Bar (rtW, ^ feer) and the Bench are not on good terms.
I have
crossed the bar (,Mt. «n2). The window bars
(sj^lwere
 260 HOW TOWRm CORRECT ENOLISH

broken. The criminals were put behind the bars

>5% "Ct fifR, ^). Have you ever tasted bar
Wq-0) 7
5. Dasc— He is very mean and base (n'Vw). The base (sfta) is tM
weak.
6. Become— He Jeromes angry. It does not iecow (tftsrr ^=n) you.

7. Bridge— Do you play frrWge (css mt«T(TO*T^)? There is

a bridge (jsf) across this river.

8. Bear— It is a Russian bear (>rt^). I cannot bear (nrn) this loss.

This tree bears {^er CTsii) sweet fruit.

9. Bore— He bore (eft) his losses calmly. He bores (&; RTtm) a hole
in the wall. You are a bore (ccaiF in oar

company.
10. Board— He gets free board (nVim) and lodging in the college
0‘
hostel. This factory is managed by a board (sfnr,

directors. When do you ioord (wrm) the train today? The

b\z<iV.’board (?n5fii) Is now almost white. This aiA-board (p.
nm) is quite thick.
11. Can— C<M you do It ? It is a milk cc/i (enra).
5i
12. Cat— I love my cat. They were whipped wilh a eat

for criminal oOeoces.

13. Capital— Patna is the copiro/ (cnraT^i't) of Bihar.

the interest but also the capital {^5nra). He

was awarC
capital punishment Th^re
14. Certain — It is not ewra/n whether he will come.
lived a hermit in a certain (PmT, sfwfrRir) village.
15. Charge— How much do you pay as food charge (^) •
' jj

a serious charge (?>iiTht^) against him.

He is my (=^' ’

16. Close— Please c/oje the door.

?n) relation. jn
'
17. Composed— He remained calm and composed
the teeth of difficulties. Keats has ‘if, not
18. Correspond —This corresponds «) to t a .

correspond (<I^-579?ir with him thesedays.

Almo ..gvery*
19. Contract-Theconrr<icr(«ni,il«T)isnowbroken.
thing confrflC/j(f«f?mj in winter. .
weiji
is passing through
» cris:
20. Country— Our country (^) ^
country {^) doctor. Do you like coW^r ) .

on credit {rart).
21. Credit—The goods were supplied '
(ml ">1'
credi, (mj. Pba.e d,«ll,
 WORD POWER 261

22. Cricket— Do you play crickei (?r ireic ^ Keats found beauty
even in a cricket's ^?i) music.
23. Custom—All old custrwu (nm) are not bad. The officer failed to
collect all the customs (tt, tw).
24. Date— What is your dare (mOa) of birth ? Do you like the taste
of date ?
25. Dear— Food stuffs are rather dear (nlm) these days. He is very
dear (c^in) to me.
26. Down—The signal is down It is as light as down rtsif).

Even these lonely dowra tnti «* ^ iRiitir, ISR) look lovely

today.
2'7. Exact- Give me the
exact (it -^l*) lime of your arrival. Officers
exact cwt) payment of loans from poor farmers.
28. Fast—His a fast (<rat) colour. 1 observe fast (eitsra) today.
Your watch is too fast (^).
2fl. Fair — tv«btento\btSotitpMt /nfr He stiles
a fair (wTs) hand. His complexion is fair (ntn). It is

not a fair (sRgi) business.

30. Fit— He js not/f (aim) for this post. She into a j5f
31 . Fix— I am in a j^x
«TWT) your attention upon
Please fix
this object.
fell

aitRt, ^^
32. Flue— It is a ylnc (^t, wath) P>o<m- He had to pay a /ine
of Rs. 5/-.

33. Fliia—1 am/irm (x^.ftnO'o my view. This firm vmpft)

is making a rapid progress.

34. Fly— Birds/ly but roan cannot. Don’t kill this poor ffy
35. Ground—The ground (wiftw) is slippery. He was granted help on
the ground (wtw) of poverty.
36. Hsng— He Aangs criminals (viftfY St She hangs pictures

37. Hand— A man has two hands (fis). How many hands (sflcr,
your department ?
srnwitl) are requited in Neither hand (^0
of my wrist-watch moves. >

38. Hide— Why do you hide yourself ? This hide is

too coarse.
39. Hood—The /iood(nr4» wzr)otmy jeep is new. He is still in
boyAood (Tj-nw). The hood (nhr <ei 'cw) of this cobra is terri-
ble. A graduate wears TO, fll ?hft w>
k ««wt at arfl wnft J) and gown on the occasion of univer-
. sity convocation.
 262 now TO WRITE CORRECT ENOLIStf
40. Import—The fm/rorf (rtthi) of food from America costs us much.
The Import (wfiriiiT. «nj) of his speech is not very ciear.
41. Interest —What is the raleof/fl/erest
(^ ? I do not fake mwes?
(»N) in g.imes.
42. Industry— //irfiufr/ (iftRir) and intelligence must go hand in hand.

It is an Iron and steel industry (cttori)-

43. Issue— She is my first issue (tfiipT). It is an important issue

«t7sn). Who will issue (Drs.H’t l) this notice ?

44. Just— He is perfectly Just ((arstTTT). He has reached here just

{*)«)now.
45. —
Kite Boys are flying kites (q^n, ss^). Kites (^) are devouriag

the dead body.

46. Lie—He lies (iiTJn) quietly in his bed. Do not tell a lie (^s)-

47. Like— I do not like etrsn) this picture. Ram is like (sRW)

Shyam.
48. Light—The light (ttruft) is dim. The load is rather light (iwt)-
49. Lead— Who will the procession ? Leed (thn.
is very heavy. '

50. Long— It is very long (5te?i). 1 long (rest to see him.

51. Low —The roof is too /oiv (stiwi). Cows oh’ (TtafWi, rTtm)-
52. Matter- What is the /Morrer (qra, -&T7)? /farter (TOR) «» P*"'

shable.
53. Mean — What does it mem («m 7 He is very mean (RiRt'

It is a golden mean (sfoassf, sfttm). _ .

detai s
54. Minute— Wait a mirmte (firr?). He gave minute (trK)
the incident.
Mole— A mole (gg’?r) gives out foul smell. There is a mole (tsT.
55.
»T5m) on her cheek.

56. Move— Please move (fqTtPn) it. Who will move “

Asta on
lution 7 Her tears moved me at once. is

the more (Ruhr, safe qftqvKr)- ,

... .
®
57. Object— A transitive verb has an object {«u). It is R®
and objects
^KR) of envy. He clearly explained his aims
plan.
(^Trr). 1 do not object (ftdu rjcrt) to your
pres
58. Present— He is pwenr (crfsir) here. I gave him several
5i-
Be patient (tiPl.
59. Patient— He is a T. B. patient (cWt).
vw) for some time more.
is a bamOO ^ ..Sf
60. Pate—The North Pa/e fun) is too cold. It
 WORD rovrcR 263

61. Right— You are rlghl It is my right (^rpn) hand. A citizen

has several rights

62. Rest— I must take rest (mtm) now. Hest (»i^) is O. K. A house
rests fw rrti) nn poI« and pillars.
63. Reel — Please wind this thread oft a reel (iTTTT ui aiT ^ ^).
His head reels mai).
64. Save — Please 5flve (Tm aiT5n) me. All have left save (erari) and
except Ram.
65. Set — 1 gave him a aef (93^, hot) of books. The sun jeM (tthi)
in the west. All the questions have been set (^l). A costly
stone has been set (hthi) on my ring.
€6. Second— I will not wait even for a second Is she your
second (fufi) wife ? 1 second (tren^ «Tai) this proposal.
67. Sentence— It la a negative sentence (ana). He is sentenced (sfks
TRt) to death.
68. Sole— A thojn pierced Into my sole (tRrst)- The sole (qit «i (wttt)
of my shoe has rubbed out. Man is the sole (eenn», et^)
judge of truth.
69. Sort— What son (ntt) of man is he 7 The postman sort* (swn*
stsni «wt, out letters.
70. Sobjeet— A finite verb agrees with its subject (arerf). The king did
not care for his subyecr (cm). What is the subject (^tre) of
your speech ^ The price of the book is jubyecf (enftra, flfvO to
changes from time to time.
71. Suit— 1 have a woollen wit (q;z). This does not sun frhtr
simri) you. This programme does not *uir (sgFT Thn)
me. It is a civil suit (g«Tm).
72. Top— Boys like to sfnn a fop (fiej)- He is standing at the top
(^) of a hill. You will top (trait «rm hri) the list of
successful candidates.
73. Too— It is too (ef^ & wftw) hot. He, too (»ft), will join us.
74. Trumpet— The trumpet (tffm, w swit hi Tim) has inspired our
soldiers.Elephants trumpet (frmiTTt).
75. Void— Dr. Rajendra Prasad’s death has created a void (r^r trsr)
in our public life. The law is now null and void (Wt).
76. Well— It a deep well (fm). I am all well (prtii). I have done
is

well (*rcf5i, UHnai^H). Water is welling up (fiiHaHi). fVell

(irt3l)« 1 will see to it.

77. Will— Who will go 7 God willed (toi httt) that man should die.
He left a will (Ttf l cam in) behind his death.
 264 now TO WRITE CORRECT ENCUSII

78. Wind —The wind (fri) is blowing hard. Please |in) tfce

watch. Let us now up ^ ^i) the discussion.

79. Word— Proper use of Hwrf(?r*?) is essential for good $t)!e. He
5.
sent me wcrd (<%i) that he would come. He ga^e me
word (smer, that he would help me. He does not obey
my Korrf

HOMOPHONES
Such words as are similar in look or sound but difTerent in
meaning are called Hosidpiionts; e. g. Birth and Berth. Beach and
Beech. The following list of Homophones deserves special attention—
1. Access (reach)— Students should have free access to their teachers

Excess (too much) E-xcess of everything is bad.

2. Accept (take)— He occep/ed with thanks some humble present
from me.
Except (excluding)— None could compete except him.
3. Accident (a mishap, jresn)— Road /jcnden« are common lo-day.

Incident (an event, e?sn) — A great man’s life is full of Imporlanl

incidents.

4. Adapt (adjust, suit)— Education helps us odupr ourselves to even

unfavourable circumstances.
Adept (expert, skdful)— Hiller was an adept in the art of pubhe
speaking.
Adopt (choose, tunc up) —
One must always adopt right means
(preiendcJ)
5. Affect (pretend, influence)— The criminal affected
)ouf
madness. This simple failure should not affect (influence)
career.
F.lfect (‘result’ if Noun and
used as a
n
‘to bring about’ if used
•

Verb)— Every must have its cause. Mahatma Oan

effect
effected great political ami social reforms.
6. Altar (a place for offerings in a temple of church,
SetenI goats were sacnficed at the aha'.
Alter (change)— Nothing can alter my opinion now.
7. AUirtioa (indirect refcreoce)— In this poem there is an allusion W
Gaadhrji’s death.
—Some phihsophers K*
appearance, we,
llIa\Ioe (decepitre wttt)

gard the work! as an tUuunn.

.hf.nn'tf
« .opposite (suitable, proper)— The remarks of the prime *ns
oa the defects of the present system of educaf.on
 WOKD POWER 265

Oppo»!le (contrary, quite diflerwit)—Your opinions are opposite

to mine.
9. A>ocstion (secondary occupation, »ft«r — My avoeaiion is

painting.
Vocation (regular profession, w)—Your vocation is teaching.
10 Bare (uncovered, trt^)— It is not safe to walk on foot.
Bear (tolerate)— I cannot bear such insults.
1 1. Birth (coming into life) —^\Vhat is your date of birth 7

Berth (a seat in a cabin or carriage)—! have reserved a berth in a

first class compartment.
12. Bridal (relating to marriage)— A bridal ceremony should be
simple.
Bridle (rein etc. sr’rur wife)— The ocw bridle has been put on the
horse.
13. Canvas (rough cloth of hemp or flax)— My shoe is made of
eanvas.
Canvass (solicit votes of some favour)— A candidate for the
Assembly has to camass for voles from door to door.
14. Casual (accidental, occasional, m«ffsn!)—Cajva/ leave to teachers
is granted by the Principal.
Causal (having the relation beiwcto cause and effect)—Thtreis no
causal relation between wealth and happiness.
15. Check [(i) restrain or prevent, (iO lest]— 1 cannot check him
from smoking. [ have checked (tested or examined) all the
accounts.
Cheque (a written order to a bank for money) —He was paid by
cheque.
16 Cession (surrender of sometbiug or transfer of a territory)~The
cession of a part of West Bengal has been demanded by
Pakistan.
Session (a term or period)—The college session has started.
Cessation (stopping) —
The U. N. O. is trying hard for the cessa~
of armed conflict in the Congo.
lion
17. Coarse (rough) —
I cannot wear coarse cloth.

Course (line of action) —

I do not know which course to adopt.
\i. Corpse (dead body) —
The corpse was covered with flowers.
Corps (a body of troops) —
The National Cadet Corps is doing
much service.
19. Complement (that which completes)— Milk is a good complement
of our diet.
 266 irOW TO WRtTE CORRECT ENGLISH

Compliment (regards, courtesy)— Pay my best eomplimenis t

mother.
20. Conscloos (aware)— am
I conscious of my duties.
Conscientious (honest, obedient to one’s conscience)— It is only i

conscientious worker who always does his duties.

21. Credible (believable) — The news is too good to be credible.
Creditable (worthy of praise and honour) — Your performance al

the examination ia really very creditable.

—
Credulous (ready to believe easily) Credulous persons fall victims

to cheats.
22. Defy (challenge)— He dare not r/e/y my orders.
Deify (to worship as a god)— Mahatma Gandhi is now deified by
the Indians.
23. Descent (downward slope)— This hill has a sharp descent.
Dissent (differ)—1 dissent from you on several points.
Decent (proper)— A student’s manners noust always be decent.
24. Diseased (suffering from a disease)— The milk of a diseased cow
is harruful.
Deceased (dead) —
The deemed has left his will. _

25. Draught (the quantity of liquid drunk at a time, current of air)—

The thirsty beggar is crying for a draught of water. If jw
sit in a draught, you will fall ill.

Drought (want of rain) — Bihar is very often visited by a

senous

drought.
Draft (to draw up a rough sketch, sn?7) — I have to draft all t e

letters. The draft of the letter has been approved.

26. Eminent (prominent, famous)— Newton was an eminent scienW*-

Imminent (impending, about to happen) Mr. — Shastri is sore

war is not imminent.

that
another)
27. Emigrant (a man who leaves his country and settles In
— He Is an emigrant from Pakistan.
Immigrant (a man who comes to live in a foreign country)—
**

India all the immigrants enjoy the rights of a citizen.

28. Eligible (fit to be chosen) — Persons holding at least a secon

class Master’s Degree are e/ig/We for lectureship.

Illegible (that which cannot be read) —
Illegible handwriting

very great defect fora writer.

police IQ
29. Elicit (to draw out by question and answer)—The
cd in e/ic/r/rtg some necessary information.
Illicit (unlawful) —
He was charged with illicit sale of op
 SVOMJ yOWIR 267

30. EniptioD {bursting up)— Volcanic eruptions in Japan are-

coRtmon.
Irruption (sudden invasion) — The irruption of the Chinese into-

Indian borders was condemoed by almost all the nations of

the world.
31. Fair [(i) just, (ii) a show}— All's in Jove and war. The
Sonepur fair is very famous.
Fare (passage money) —
What is the train /ore from Gopalgany
to Patna ?
32. Gate (door)- The gate is closed,
Gah (manner of walking, —
She has a charming gait.
33. Gamble (play for stakes, money) — Gambling has ruined many
rich men.
Gambol (to play or dance about, j^ai)— Young lambs arc
gambolling on the green.
34. Hoard (to store)— A miser does uotbing but hoard money.
Horde (a gang)— A Aorde of tribesmen have attacked the Indiaa
borders,
35. Ingenloos (clever, skilful)— Robinson Crusoe was an Ingenious
person.
lagcaaoos (frank and simple)— An Ingenuous person is liked
by all.

36. JcaloQS (envious)— A Jealous person has no peace of mind.

Zealous (full of enthusiams. atu au’n (f irn 5»i)— Mr. Nehru
was a lealout reformer.
37. Later (more late in time)— He came later than I.

Latter (opposed to former) —

Keats and Shelley are great poets
but the former is greater than the latter.
38. Loose (as an Adj, ‘nollrgbl’, asa Verb ‘to release')—Your coal
is loose. It is not safe to let loose this wild dog.

Lose (suffer loss)— A liar has to lose much.

39. Monetary (relating to money>— Do not be guided by monetary
motives.
Monitory (giving warning or advice)— We should respect the
monitory counsel of out trusted friends.
40. Pmecufc (oppreis, wserayr dr & dn erwi)— Money-lenders stil)
persecute simple villagers.
ProsKutt }(i> to bring before a court, (it) to pursue}— He was
prorecuret/on a charge ofeheating. TTiis boy is unable to
proseeute his studies further-
 268 »OW TO WWTC CORRECT ENGLISH

41, Pray (make devout sequest)— I pray to Cod everyday.

Prey (victim)— Dihar has fallen a prey to flood and disease.
4?. Prescribe (to give directions for the use
of>-TTie doctor has
prcKribed very costly medicines. This book is prescribed for
Pre-University and Degree Examinations.
Proscribe (to prohibit)—Indecent films should b« proscribed by
the Government-
43. Precede (to go before) —
A storm is preecdei/ by a peculiar lull-
Proceed (to go ahead, emt rpn)— He proceeded with a great work
in spite of difficulties.
44. President (one who presides over a meeting) —The President spoke
very yell.
Precedent (that which goes before, a previous example for illos*

tration)— The lawyer quoted several precedents on this

point.
45. Plane [(i) level, (iO a loolj— You must have a high plane of
thinking. A
carpenter smoothes wood with bis plane.
Plain (simple, easy)—P/a/n living without high tbrnkiDg is not i
very helpful principle.
4i. Principal (chief, head of a college, capital)—The principal streets
were nicely decorated. The Principal has granted me fuU ffe«‘
studentship. The on the principal is low.
interest
Principle (fundamental law or truth, fespa)— Nobody today
believes in the principle of ‘might is right’. A man of principle
often suffers but be does not give up his principles.
47. Quite (altogether)— It is quite impossible.
Quiet (silent)—The place is calm and quiet.
48. Stationary (Adj— fixed)— The earth is not j/ar/oanry.
envelopes, etc.H
Stationery (Noun— writing material —paper,
Much stationery is wasted in offices these days.
diso f
49. Umpire (a referee in a game of cricket)— No player can
the umpire. .

mur
Empire (dominion) —The British Empire has now become
smaller.
50. Waive (to forgo, iftr ?^li)— My claims were waired.
Wave— IFflv« are rising in the sea.

EXERCISE
SUBSTITUTE SUITABLE WORDS FOR THE
WORDS IN ITAUCS-
1. He was brought up at Oxford, {educated]
2. He has a surprising {astonishing^ tnemosy. [astoundir;]
 WORD rownt 269

3. Is this aa abbrerialed edition of Macbeth ? (abridged)

4. He has brought a huge quanlily o/books. (a large rturitbcr)
5. Is it not a careless and badly wtitlen sentence ? (a slipshod sentence)

6. Mahatma Gandhi was a notorious thinker, (notable)

I. Several famous names wercremcmfceret/. (Several norat/e names
10.
v*cic recalled)

8. Prime ministership was his lot stroke fate, (destiny)

9. It was a memorial battle, (memorable)
Tbeminister received a great imtoTotion at the aerodrome, (orarjoe)
II. That letter was Interceded by fhcC. I. D. (intercepted)
12. A lunar ellipse occurred last night, (eclipse)
1 3. He suspects the existence of God. (doubts)
14. His character is above doubt, (above suspicion)
15. Shelley's poems were deprecated, (depreciated)
16. He is partially wrong, (partly)
17. What is the signification of this title ? (significance)
IS. This principle is worthy of acceptation, (acceptance)

19. Tea is a mild stimulus, (stimulant)

20. He always speaks in a contemptible tone, (contemptuous)
21. He being n defender of the poor, (glories in)
glorifies (n
22. It is A momentary decision of the government to nationalise banks.
(momenroiu)
23. It is merely a momentous thought, (momentar))
24. It it a purely temporal post 7 (temporary)
IS. What he says Is ot no jlgni/iniiion. (sfgni/icflnce)
26. The wife's behaviour greatly aggrurcred the husband, (amojed.
irritated)

27. iUat effects zverjihing. (affects)

28. Do }ou mW
your date of birth ’(resiemfrer)
29. This door is meant for exodus, (evil)
30. The odm/rrimre of his guiH has now reseated the whole secret.
(admission)
31. Do you admit o/brealing into the house ? (aJmli)
32. The rules do not aJmli yourdoing like this (admit of)
33. The fthrcrrafiisn of ceriiin social customs is not convenient.
(obseTTOnct)
34. Thesmiuirimagery of Keats's poetry <s praised by all. (fenruour)
35. Corporeal punishment has been abolished, (wpara/)
36. li is really a very ingrnuwt device (mgenieuf)
37. The s'gn'/iconfe of \Ws word Is sutl -doubtful, (sign'/irctlen)
 HOW TCT wmtr conKFCT rvoLttif

3?. Let uj take meatorei lo /flwe that the {fiitnictiom are amd
out lenrure]
39.nit reputation hai been /^lerrufei/
by this poem, (r/t^nrri;
40. He it an (mmiritnt poet, {emlntnt)
41. The world Is not in an emhent danger of a world war. limmbrni)
42. The criminal re/urediheeharge. (JenleJ)
4). He den/eii to help me. {refuted)
44. I Will refute the invitation, (decline)
45. Life is a drlutlon. (an tHustan)

46. The magician created a clever Illusion, (delusion)

47. have paid the principle, but not the interest, (principal)
I

4S. There ii no free accession to his chamber, {access)

49. His adhesion to his principles is remarkable, (adherence)

50. Man is a bundle of ewtomt. (habits)

51. Hli sense of obserranee is very keen, (obserrafion)

52. I am ensured for Rs. 50000/*. (insureih
53. Kanpur is an Mastrious city. (InJusiriol)
54. He is an imaginary poet, (imaginatire)
55. I cannot give you some money, (any)

56. This bad book has been prescribed, (proscribed)

57. His handwriting is ineligible, (illegible)

58. He was given plenty of good eowieil but no food, (counsel)

59. He is aeruible to ciiticism. (snuitivr)
•60. Improbable is that which can never happen, (impossible)

61. I do claim my innocence, (assert)

•62. Why do you still claim that you are right ? (maintain)
63. These urgent matters assert my attention, (claim)
'64. Both sides maintain victory, (claim)

•65. Her sweet music captured everybody’s heart,

(captitatei)

66. When was America invented! (discovered)

•67. The university statue has been amended, (irartrfe)
68. She has great affectation for her children, (affection)
69. With my best complements, (compliments)
70. Why do you like judicious service 7 (judicial)
71 . It is a venal crime, (veniat)
72. A sinking person catches at a straw, (drowning)
73. He is a practicable man. (practical)
74. This scheme is not procr/co/- 0»rtfcrica3/<}
75. I lik. this poer b«hus. there is tet of ““ ““'."ft
,

76. It is totally good. (yrhoHy)

 WORD POWER 271

77. It is ttller}y faUe. {complettly)

78. He is a complete fool, {an unerfool)
79. He is on offlcious tour, (official)
80. His official manner is irrilaUng. (officious)
81. This novel is too imaginary to be cretHtable. (credible)
82. He has achieved credible success, (creditable)
83. It is a salutary climate, ^aiubrious)
84. It is a salubrious plan, (salutary)
85. The President has given oseent to this bill, (ossrnl)

86. Damp climate has effectednty health, (affected)

87. Your behaviour is not descent, (decent)
88. I decCTf on this pomt.(<fiiiefli)
89. It the earth stationery 7 (sror/<Mi<>r>)
90. Do you like this cite 7 (site)

91. The king's sceptre is a symbol of temporary power, (temporal)

92. Is it a specious house, (spacious)
95. Please stand in cue. (^ue>
94. He affected several reforms in law. (effected)
93. There are beneficial men in every sodety. (beneficent)
96. He gave me very practicable suggestions, (proer/ecl)
97. There is here a eontmual line of bouses, (eonttnuous)
98. I will take powerful action against
bim. (strong)
99. He
a decepilre persote. (deceitful)
is

100. His appearance is deceitful. (decepUtt)

IQt. He is t lusuricnr man. (fuwious)

102. This plant has a luwhus growth, (lusunani)
|D3. He is a populous man. (popular)
104. Is there any president for this 7 (percedeni)
105. I arose early, (rose)
105. A storm rose, tarosrt
|07. Is not your brother your blood relailre 7 (relation)
108. She granted birth to a male child. <gcre)
109. Several honoun were g/r«ito him. (etw/erred upon Atm)
110. He sat at a rerbal examinalioR. (an oral examination)
Ul. He was asVtd logo slowly with the work, (go slow)
112. He is walking s/ow. (stonly)
113. It is a story, (rwilc)
114. lie lut a eomfc appearance (eomical)
115. Itisroorooioryou. (rerygood)
116. He went to hanaras via train, (bs)
 272 flow TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH

117. The people iwjifW believe that the earth was flat, {used to)
118. His economical coD^iiion is bad. (economic)
1 19. Some misunderstanding has transpired, (occurred)
120. As a result of the inquiry it happened that accounts hid m
been maintained properly, (transpired)
121. These trucks are meant for the transportation of good
(fraftfjvf

122. This torturous route is estremely tortuous, (tortuous rouif i

extremely lorlurota

123. It has my unanimous support, (wholehearted)

1 24 The usage of water for washing purposes is forbidden, (we)
125. This is a wrong usage of this idiom, (use)
126. ‘It is me' is established by use. (usage)

127. Who is the iragiealbtro ? (tragic)

128. I am stopping with my friend, (staying)
129. Please swy talking, fstop)
130. He is a rural character, (rustic)
131. Don't arouse my anger, (rouse)
132. I will resign as a last recourse, (resort)
lemptallon)
133. I refrain from the temptation to do so. (resist the
(adtant*
134. With the adk'oncmenr of winter the days grow shorter,
135. It is a masterful piece of work, (masterly)

THE SAME WORD USED AS DIFFERENT PARTS

6.
OF SPEECH
(A)

Abote— Rain drops from oN>»e. (N.)

Kites fly abore like birds. (Adv.)
It is hanging abore my head. (Prep.)

After — I believe in after life.(Adj.)

He reached long after. (Adv.)

He came after me. (Prep.)
I will go after be bai returned. (Conj.)
All— /fW is lost now. (N.) ,

hare me now. (Pton.)

I had many friends but all left

All meo are mortal. (Adj.)

I aas all well now. (Adv.)
 ) ) ) ) ) )

WOKD POWER 27J

Any — Have you any money ? (Adj.)

I do not believe any of these boys. (Proa,)
I cannot stay here any looser. (Adv.)
As— This is the same pea as mioe. (Pron.)
As be was poor, I helped him. (Conj.)
Please see me as early as possible. (Adv.)
Before — >le helped me as btjore. (Adv.)
He stood btfort me. (Prep.)
1 will go bfforr you come back. (Conj.)
Better— Ram is betttr than Shyam. (Adj.)
I feel betttr today,(Adv.)
You should obey your belters. (N.)
Both— Both of you are lithl. (Pron.)
Both the books are good. (Adj.)
Both Ram and Shyatn are good boys. (Adv.)
But— There is no toother but loves her childtse. (Pron,)
'Butme 00 tuts’. ('But* is a Verb aod ‘buts’ is a Nous.)
He saw me tut once. (Adv.)
1 tried but failed. (Cooj.)
None hut graduates should apply. (Prep.)
Dowd— Cven these barren downs look lovely. (N.)
1 will catch the down tram. (Adj.)
Failures should not down your spirits, (V.)
HecaRiedonn quickly. (Adv.)
The boat went don-n ihe river. (Prep
Eliher— There arc trees on either side of the road. (Adj
Biihtr of you is wrortg. (Pron.)
Bliher he or I will go there. (Conj
Dmngh— He has had enough of pleasures. (N.)
I have eaten enough bread. (Adj.)

he if kind enough to help me. (Adv.)

lUtt— Half of the cour»e it unhnished. (N.|
Chanty is half*»y to heascn. (Adj.)
He IS ha'/ alive and half dead. (Adv.i
Little— Great men want but little for themieUes. (N.)
me take a little rest. (Adj
Let
am little tired. (Ad*.)
I
Miay— of my friends hate come (N
Xfany will chest you (Pron
Afesy men are good. (Adj)
II. w.c. E.*tl
 WDRDPO>\CR 275

That— That book is mine. (Adj.)

This is the book that 1 bought yesterday. (Proo.)
He labours hard that he may pass. (Conj.)
Than— I love you more than he, (Conj
I can read any book other than that. (Prep.)
The— The sun has set. (Article)
The higher we go, the cooler it is. (Adv.)
Well— There is a veil near my house. (N.)
Ihave done well. (Adv.)
You arc a good boy, well 1 will help you. (Conj.)

What— What is your name ? (Pron.)

H'Aar hook is that 7 (Adj.)
What with merit and vhai with labour, he rose very
high in life. (Adv.)
While— I read the book for a long while. (N.)
He was attacked while asleep. (Adv.)
Make hay whife the sua shines. (Conj.)
You should not while away your time- (V.)
Why— If'hy did you do so ? (Adv.)
I do not know why be does not write to me. (Conj.)
1 do not know the whys and wherefores of this issue. (N.)

W
Air—We cannot live without air. (N.)
We should air our woolen clothes from time to lime. (V.)
Arm— He lost his left arm. (N.)
Dacoita decided to arm themselves with deadly n capons, (V.)
Bark— 1 lifted him on my hack. (N.)
I will back you in all your plans. <V.)
He broke the bach door. (Adj.)
He will come hock soon. (Adv.)
Bare— Portia asked Antonio to bare his bosom. (V.)
His head is bare. (Adj.)

Battle—He battled hard against the enemy. (V.)

A serious boitfe has taken place. (H.)
Beard— 1 bearded the tiger in the forest. (V.)

1 do not like long beards. (N.)

 Itw tnwfittt

IlfH - The f-tfl it |0(!e. (?i.)

Who will Itllthttn •iV.)
I fray hreal M cjftirti f\',)
There a ahaep/e-Jin the alrrel
i* ne.if my heow. fN.)
Pile Stvsle-ffff 4% tatt in winlef.jS >
Hatlififdop teMort tiff. (V.y
Peifil I Kjae hectfVt/Ihe irain.(V.)
The rtamifurion PiV'Jitii loday. <N )
ITwok Thi» l» » ffH'd tflt'i (N I

Ptea»« *«k) 4 my
fujpfe. <V.|
Prate— tie ii a hrutr miR. fAdj.)
The »hip hat tratfJttie weather well. (V.)
Drtakfati - t hrrol/jtr at 7 a m. (V.)

I bad a I.ght ktrakfau. <N )

Pftail— lie ffttiifj the antry watei. (\*.)

Keep hreait weted. <N \

SrM|ie-> He croited ihe triJit. (N.)
The enmity between them war hlJgrJ at la*!- O’'-)

Cation— a eottly tuffon. (N.)

It It

rieate hw/ton op yooe thirt. (V )

Caa^— Hewai ecned today. (V.)

lie tvss beaten with a eanr. (N.)
Cart— Swcepen hate to can the rubbish away. (V.)
This carl is drawn by horses. (N->
Corner— IIc was badly cornered in the open meeting. ('^•)

Don’t sit in the corner. (N.)

Crop— Many problems hate croppcH up. (V.)

This is a fine crop. (N.)

Crown — He was crowned king. (V.)
This IS a golden cro\nt. (N.)
Cut — The tree was cut down. (V.)
It is an unkind cut. (N.)
Drink — You must avoid strong
drink. (N.)
He drinks hard. (V.)
Drive — Who drive the car ? (V.)
will

I enjoyed a nice drhe last evening. (N.>

Dog — Why do you dog my footsteps 7 (V.)
have a pet dog.
I
Dry — The weather dry. (Adj is )
Please dry my silken clothes today. (V.)
 AWRn POWfR 277

Eye— He lost one eye. (N.)

The police oflicer ejerfhim with suspicion. (V.)
Face— Wash your/aee. (N.)
1 have faced much difliculty. (V.)

Fill— The rise or faU of men depends upon Jheir character. (N.)

Fall in. (V.)

Feed— The mother /ee<£r her baby. (V.)
He was given a small piece of bread at one feed. (N.)
Fill— I have had my fill- (N.)
up the form. (V.)
Fill

Finish— Fi/ihh the work quickly. (V.)

The army fought to i finish. (N.)
Fix— laminajfx (N.)
The date has ban fixed. (V.)
Flock— I have & flock of cattle. fN.)
Students ftoek about good teachers, f V.)
Flood— The market is flooded with books. (V.)

Floods must be controlled. fN.)

Foot— He has lost one foot. (N.)
Let us fool the distance. (V.)
Clory— The ancient glories of India should be restored. (N.)
The country gloriedia the fall of its enemy. (V.)
Head— Headtbc ball. fV.)
He lost his head. (N.)
He is the head clerk of my office. (Adj.)
Hold— I have no hold on him. (N.)
I hold you responsible. (V.)
Moose— Our college is housed in a rented building. (V.)
He has no house to live in. (N.)
Homble — All his pride was humbled to the dust. (V.)
It is ray humble prayer. (Adj.)
Idle— He h an idle boy. (Adj.)
Don’t idle away your time. (V.)
Iron — Who has ironed J(OW coat ? (V.)
Iron is a heavy metal. (N.)
He ruled with an Iran hand. (Adj.)
Know— I am not in the know of this matter. (N.)
I do not know you. (V.)
Lame— It is a lame excuse. (Adj.)
My servant lamed the horse. (V.)
 278 now TO WJIITE CORRECT ENGLISH

Lead— Who will /«irfthe

country to freedom 7 (V.)
I will take the lead <N.)

Lerel—The ground is not /eve/. (AdJ.)

Who will level the ground ? (V,)
Lift— I cannot lift this heavy load. (V.)
A lift can lift even the heaviest engine. (N.)
Man —The army is monHed by highly trained soldiers. (V.)
He is a man. (N.)
Milk— I like milk. (N.)

Milk the cow. (V.)

Pocket — There
is no money in his pocket. (N.)

He pocketed a large sum of money. (V.)

Purchase— I have/'n/’cAojc^a cow. (V.)
The pwrr/jjrewas made on Monday, (N.)
Push— I pushed him out. (V.)
He lacks push. (N.)
Reach -It is beyond roy reach. (N.)
He reacbedia lime. (V.)
Refuse — He refused to help roe. (V.)

The ditch was filled with refuse. fN.)

Retotn— See me oa roy return. (N.l
It is a return ticket. (Adj.)
He has returned. (V.)
Right— Please right the wrong done to him. (V.)
It is my right hand. (Adj.)
A cilhen has many tights and duties. (N.)
Saddle— He is saddled with a large family. (V.)
The new saddle is very costly. (N.)
School— He reads in a school. (N.)
He isa JcAoo/boy. (Adj.) _

He was thoroogbly schooled in the art of preaching. (* •)

Second— I will return in a second. (N.)
It is my second attempt. (Adj.)
He stood second. (Adv.)
second this proposal. (V.)
1

Sjjjp—s^^tsch of our sugar I*

shipped to America. (V.)

The ship has left the harbour. (N.)

ShoaUer— His shoulders ars strong. (N.)
haveshou'deredbexvy respontibiliJjci. (V.)
I
crrahyeitcrdsy. (N.)
q,o»rr-Thcrewas a at^Usho^^ef
shoHeredteany '"d honouri on me. (V.)
He has
 WORD PmVER 279

Silcoct — The noisy children were silenced. (V.)

I am fond of silence. (N.)

Single— Why do you single me out ? (V.)
He has not a single book. (Adj.)
Smooth— Cream smoothes even a rough face. (V.)
His words are very smooth. fAdj.)
Sooi— This grape is sour. (Adj )
Curd has soured my teeth. (V.)
Split — Sp/ii it into two. (V.)
There is a spUt in the patty. (N.)
Spj— I have spied your movements. (V.)
He is a spy. (N.)
Station— The army has been stationed on the border. (V.)
It is a railway station. (N.)

Steam— The train has steamed oft. (V.)

Who discovered the power of steam 7 (N.)
Stone— Stone is hard. (N.)
He was stoned to death. (V.)
Storm— His house was stoemedisy dacoits. (V.)
The storm has damaged my bouse. (N.)
Stream— Tears are streaming down his cheeks. (V.)
He was drowned in the mWstream. (N.)
Thin— Famine has thinned the population of the country. (V.)
lie is very lean and thin (Adj.)
Thirst— He Is thirsting for powers. (V.)
He
has great thirst for money. (N.)
Thread— You cannot iftrearf a needle in hurry. (V.)
The thread is very weak. (N.)
Throw— He jumped at every throw. (N.)
U was thrown away (V.)
Thunder— The speaker thundered teyeral times. (V.)
The thunder has badly disturbed me. (N.)
Tide— 1 could tide over the difficulty with his help. (V.)
The tide is rising high. (N.)
Time— The bus is timed to reach in the morning. (V.)

Don’t waste your time. (N.)

Trade— He trades in rice. (V.)
It is a profitable trade. (N.)
Touch — Finishing touch » being given to the arrangements. (N.)
Do rot touch fire. (VJ
 :<o HOW TO WVftC COBBrrT f'.'CLOIf

Torn- Ths road Ukei a lum

h-rf. (,v
I l-truf-t him on!. (V.)
Tifof- The client wj, MartJhy hit |j«r,er. (V
Ife {| my tutor. f.V.)
- Who hai wattrrJthett pfanti ?(V.)
We cannot live »nhoat MWer.iN.)
>\eir— Don't wrar wet clolhet. (V.)
Thil It my Sunday'^ wtjr. (V.)
rather- Pt. Nehru weaihfttJ miny a political jtorm. fV.)
It M a fine weather. (N.)
Wet— Don't wear we/ clothe*.
(Adj.)
HVryoBf lip*. tV.)
Will— Take what you will. (V.)
‘•y'fl* man ha« prepared his will. (N.)
«lnfef-Thii year our President will winter in the Soatb. (V.)
ha* set in. (N.)
llV/irrr
Word- An application should be mildly worded. (V.)
He is a man of word. (N.)
Wrong— He was wronged by his own friend*. (V.)
It is wrong. (Adj )
Do a little wrong to do a lot of ri|ht. (N.)

7. THE FORMATIO.V OF ^’ORDS

(A) Formstioa of Noons from Verbs

Verbs Nouns Verbs Nouns

abide abode (Pwpr) arrive arrival
abound abundance ascend ascent (^tr)
(effiran) assist assistance
accede access (qf^) assume assumption
act action (TKaO
admit admission assure assurance
adore adoration (^at) attach attachment
advise advice
agree agreement attend attendance
apply application avow avowal
apprehend apprehension bear birth

(ar) behave behaviour

approve approval believe belief
 WORD POWtR 2S1

Verbs h'ouns Verbs Kouns

bcIoBg belongings depart departure
betray betrayal descend descent (aatO
bind bond die death
bite bite diminish diminution
bless bliss, blessing dine dinner
break breach (^n) discover discovery
burn brand, bum dismiss dismissal
bury burial distinguish distinction
carry carriage disturb disturbance
certify certificate do deed
choose choice drive drove, drive
commit (commitment. enjoy enjoyment
tcommittee enter entry,
[
compel compulsion (entrance
comply compliance envelop envelope
err error
concede concession exceed excess

(fifCRT) excel excellence

confide confidence exist existence
consider consideration expect expectation
consume consumption expel expulsion
(ars) extend exteasien
contain contents (ftm)
contend (conteatiOD, fail failure
1 contest (girt)
float fleet

contradict contradiction flow flood

convert conversion fly flight
deal dole (ng) give gift
deceive (deceit 80 gait (srg)
(deception grieve grief
decide decision grow growth
defend defence bale hatred
defer (deferment heal health
(pm). ima^ne imagination
]
1 deference («nit] 1
imitate imitation (^g)
defy defiance interrere interference
deliver [delivery,
^deliverance introduce introduction
1 (fil^) insure insurance
deny denial invite invitation
 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH

Verbs Nouns Verbs Nouns

judge judgment,
( reduce reduction
i judge refer reference
know knowledge refuse refusal
laugh laughter relieve relief
learn f lore (mm), rely reliance
Uearning remember remembrance
lend loan repeat repetition
live life, living resolve resolution
lose loss respond response
maintain maintenance reveal re\ elation
manage f management, secure security
(manager see sight
marry marriage seize seizure
mean meaning sell sale

mix mixture serve service

move f movement, shake shock
1 motion sing song
obey obedience sit seat
object objection slay slaughter
occupy occupation solve solution
oRend olTencc speak speech
oppose opposition steal stealth
perform performance strike stroke, strike

permit permission succeed success

please pleasure sustain sustenance
practise practice tell tale

presume presumption think thought

proceed ( procedure, trace track
trial
{ process try
prophesy prophecy unite funion, onity*
protect protection (unison
prove proof vacate tvacancy,
provide provision (vacation

pursue pursuit vary variance,

(]uote quotation vanalioft

receive recespl, «C3ve

1
reception «ed »edd<ng
j

weigh •tighf
recover recovery
reiee35<5^ rrsn) •riling
redemption •rite
 WORD rowtR 283 -

(C) FormatSon of Noam from Adjcctires

AdJ(clitrr Kouni Adjeeihet Koims
able ability moral morality
abundant abundance necessary necessity
smirate accuracy noble nobility
active activity novel novelty
bra\e bravery obedient obedience
brief brevity one oneness
broad breadth perfect perfection
busy business pious piety
calm calmness poor (
poverty,
casual 1 casualty, { poorness
(casuatness popular popularity
certain certainty precise precision
cheap cheapness private privacy
cruel cruelly proud pride
ectious curiosity prudent prudence
deep depth pure purity
efficient efTiciency real reality
equal equality rival rivalry
excellent excellence safe safety
false falsehood. scarce scarcity
f

1 falsity secret secrecy

free shortage (cift),
freedom short f
fallant gallantry (shortnessftfrirpt)'
lay gaiety solitary solitude
lenerous generosity splendid splendour
strong strength
grand grandeur stupid stupidity
happy happiness sweet sweetness
high suiftness
height swift
holy timidity (cHTTfiT)
holiness timid
hot
heat true truth
human humanity vacant vacancy
(rrjprar) vain vanity (simi)
hutnble
humility violent violence
inferior
inferiority vital vitality (m^)
just
justice weak weakness
long
length wide width
merry
merriment wise wisdom
mortal
mortality young youth
 2M HOW TO wmrr cor*cct EVGt.an
(C) FArmitinn of Abifrtel Noma from Concrele Nomn
Concrete Concrete AhUatt
iVtfimf Nount Sounr Nouns
af<nl agency king kingship
author authorship man manhood
baby babyhood martyr (rfrr) martyrdoin
beggary mother motherhood
bond bondage owner ownership
broker (T*rnr) brokerage patriot patriotism
child childhood pilgrim pilgrimage
coin coinage priest priesthood
coward cowardice robber robbery
dacoit dacoily servant service
enemy enmity slave slavery

father fatherhood thief theft

friend friendship widow widowhood

hero heroism witch witchery
infant infancy woman womanhood

(0) Formation of Verbs from Nonas

Noims Verbs Nouns Verbs
air aerate, air colony colonize

apology apologize
authority authorize company accompany
bath bath, bathe courage encourage
criticize
beauty beautify critic

belief believe custom accustom

blacken danger endanger

black
bless deity deify
Wiss
blood bleed
body embody dew bedew
drop drip
breath breathe
economize
brood breed economy
electrify
camp encamp electricity
example exemplify
capital capitalize
feed
f centralize, food
centre befool
( concentrate fool
force, enforce
character characterize force
defrautl
claim claim, acclaim fraud (sftar)
befriend
class classify friend
 WORD POWER 285

Hou/ts Verbs Nouns Verbs

fright («t) frighten necessity necessitate

frost (qrai) fretae ofiice ofheiate
fruit fructify patron patronize
game gambol peace pacify
glas^ glaze 1
personify.
person
glory glorify (personate
gold gild prison imprison
grass graze red redden
grief grieve roll enrol
guile beguile sale sell

habit habituate sermon sermonize

half halve shelf shelve
hand hand, handle society associate
harmony harmonize spark sparkle
haste hasten (farntift)
head head, behead substance substantiate
heir inherit sympathy sympathise
horror horrify system systematise
idol idolize (able tabulate
Joy enjoy terrify,
err r }
justice justify 1.
terrorize
knee kneel 1dethrone,
throne
knot knit lenthrone
life live title entitle
light light, lighten tomb entomb
mass amass utility utilize

memorise. vacancy vacate

memory 1

icomniemorate vapour evaporate

mind mind, remind vice vitiate
monopoly monopolize victim victimize
nation nationalize Mgonr invigorate
natore naturalize wreath (artfi) wreathe

(E) Formation of Verbs from Adjectites

^lijfCIlTes Verbs Adjeethts Verbs

able enable brief abbreviate
abundant abound broad broaden
base (;#W) debase cairn becalm
bitter embitter certain ascertain
bold embolden cheap cheapen
 fiw%- ro wnfiT co»Rfcr rvr-tiwr

Adjectlres Vetht AJjfcthet Verbs

civil Civili/e moist moisten
clean clean, cleanse new renew
clear clear, clarify noble ecnoMe
dark darken pirtfcuUr particclirire

deep deepen perpetual perpetuate

dense (m) condense poor ifflpoveris&

dilTfrcnt differentiate popular popularize

equal equaK/e proper appropriate

false falsify jpublish

public tpuMicitt
familiar familiart/e
feeble (arsntrt) enfeeble pure purify

fertile (^rt) ferlilire quiet quieten

fine fine, refine rare rarefy

Iconfimi. real realize

firm
lafTirm enrich
rich
fond fondle shorten
short
foul defile slckm
sick
fresh refresh rcoasob'dste.
general generaliee solid (sohdify
glad gladden special
speciaiitf

hale heal stable

stabilise

hard harden stnnge estrange

high heighten strengthen

strong
I humiliate, stupefy
humble stupid
(humble ensure
sure
just justify sweeten
sweet
large enlarge thicken
thick
little belittle intimidate
timid
liquid liquify
vilify
vile
fleogthen. venerate
long venerable
lelongate
whiten
low lower white
widen
mad madden wide

(F) Formation of Adjeclives from

Nonas
Adjeetiret
Nouns Adjectives Nouns
affectionate
accident accidental affection
airy
advantage advantageous air
ancestral
adventure adventurous ancestor
angelic
advice advisable angel
 \VOtt1> POWER 2S7

Nouns Adjectives Nouas Adjectives

angle angular day daily

atmosphere atmospheric devil devilish

authority authoritative dew dewy

autumn autumnal discipline disciplinary

beauty beautiful drama dramatic

black black, blackish duty dutiful

blood bloody /earthly,

earth
body bodily learthen
book bookish east eastern
boy boyish /economic,
economy \econmical
. \ brassy.
brass
i brazen emperor
imperial
burden burdensome empire
bush bushy enemy inimical
calamity calamitous /envious,
envy
capacity capacious tenviabe
centre central example exemplary

fceremonial. erpeose expensive

ceremony
IceremooioQs fable fabulous
character charaeteris'ic face facial

cheer cheerful /faithless,

faith
/childish, Ifaithful
child
Vchiidiike fame famous
chivalry chivalrous fancy fanciful
circle circular fate rateful, fatal

/classic, father fatherly

class
Idassicat fault faulty
climate climatic favour favourable
cloud cloudy /fearful.
fear
cotnioii comfortable \fcarless
commerce commercial feather feathery
condition condiiioital fever feverish
conscience conscientious fire fiery
contempt /contemptible, fish fishy
iTst) \conteropluous flesh fleshy
courage courageous fioucr flowery
eonard cowardly fog foggy
crime criminal fool foolish
custom customary (forcible.
force
danger dangerous \fofeeful
 28 g HOW TO WIUTE CORRECT ENGLISH

Nouns Adjectives Nouns Aijeethts

fortune fortunate labour laborious
friend friendly law lawful

fruit fruitful flifelike, lively/

life
fury furious lliving

ghost ghostly nimited,

limit
glory glorious lli«itless

god godly, godlike lord lordly

gold golden lovely,
love
habit habitual {loving
hair hairy machine isecbanical

hand handy fmanly,

/harmless, Imanful
harm DcdloQ^I
Ibarmful medicine
haste hasty memory njemorabiff

merchant mercantile
health
III mercy
/merciful.

heart |mercilf«

heavenly merit roen'terioBS

heaven
hereditary metal metallic
heir
(srtrrtPi^rt^) mind mental
heroic miracle miraeuloui
hero
hilly mirth mirthful
hiU
momentary,
/historic,
history moment momentoB*
Ihistorical {

homely money monetary

home
month monthly
/honorary.
honour thonourable mother motherly

muscle muscular
/hopeful,
hope musical
thopelesi music
mysterious
horror horrible mystery
national
hour hourly nation
natural
humour humorous nature
navy naval
Ignorance ignorant
need needy, needful
/industrial.
industry lindustrious neighbour
nerve (w»»)
nervous
irony ironic, ironical
nifhtly
yole jocular, jocose night
northern
joy joyful, joyous north
numeral,
Hudlcions, oumeroos.
jwJre Ijudioai number
i
numcrxal
king li3|iy
 WORD POWER 289
Adjecthes Nouns Adjectives
office official sympathy sympathetic
origin original system systematic
ornament ornamental table tabular
palace palatial talk talkative
passion passionate terror terrible
peace peaceful thief thievish
people {popular,
(populous thought {thoughtful,
person personal Ithoughtless
picture title
picturesque titular
play tragedy tragic
playful
practice practical
tnfle (trifling,
pride proud (trivial
profit profitable trouble troublesome
quarrel quarrelsome tutor tutorial
queen queenly type typical
question questionable value valuable
ruin ruinous verb verbal
sand sandy vice vicious
setioot scholastic vigour vigorous
science scientific virtue virtuous
season seasonable, voice vocal
( seasonal war warlike
{sensible,
watch watchful
(sensitive
service
water watery
serviceable
week weekly
shame (shameful,
(shameless will {wilful
sight sightly (willing
silk silken wintry
slave slavish
woman womanly,
smoke smoky (
womanish
society social wool woollen
solitude solitary world worldly
space spacious, worth worthy
spatial
( wretch wretched
star
starry, astral
year yearly
storm stormy
youth youthful
tunny
zeal zealous
290 MOW TO W»ITC CORRECT ENCLKH

8. FIGURES OF SPEECH
dissimilar (different) things
Simile— Comparison between two
I,
T(m,7e. From this .t Mow
or persons on certain points is called
shown on a ew po.
that likeness between two different things is
commonly used to introduce a Jirm/e are
only. The words
...so, as
like.as,ju$t’a8....lnthesamc way. even as.

Examples

(a) Thy soul was like a star

(b) Her eyes as stars of twilight fair,

Uke twilight’s too, her dusky hair;
is like a singing
bird.
(c) My heart
(d) Like to the summer’s rain.
Or as the pearls of morning dew.
N’ver to be fouttd again.
In all the examples, tbeL n
•”» been discovetrf beweea
« jjaimilst
and some points of similarity have
in ultimate analysis
should, however, be noted that thst the
•|“V° I'T. of or L »e shows
objects remain dissimilar. The j“ a
are omy
only ar aoo
similar, an ^mnm
nu icsl
h’nss compared
things
metaphors, the things compared are
rented « er

2. Metaphor-Comparison between Tie

all
persons on all points (or in to another
ani

qualities of one object ^ objects com-

there is cent per cent
pared.
correspondence
It is an essential
function of »
J metaphor
cm«
this it
means transferring’,
^ssib ,y
„hen coinpW
one. It is
to be different and become y
^
i^jdaation.
identity between two
things is discovered i
.^ 1 ^ ,„(y
show similarity
Naturally, like, or, etc. which
are not used to introduce a
meUphor.

Examples

(a) He is the star of the family.

(b) Was your hope drunk f
Wherein you dressed yourself ?

(c) The camel is the Mp of the desert.

(d) This news is a dagger to my tender compar*'*-
In all these csamples two different one sod
two o j J
comparison is so romplete that the
 WORD POWER 291
3.
the tame. A simile creates the impression that the objects compared
are no doubt similar but they are still difTerent from each other.
Allegory, Fthlt—Megory, parable anti fable arc
Parable,
fictitious some moral. At times it is difficult to
stories that teach
distinguish between a parable and an allegory, for, as Mr. Fowler
puts it, ‘every paiable is an allegory and every allegory a parable.’
There are, however, certain points of difference between them, A
parable a story that aims at answering a single question or suggest-
is

ing a single principle and offering a definite moral. But an allegory

is a story of greater length and the aim is not so clearly didactic.
Allegory has been defined in the Oxford English Dictionary as ‘on
extended or eonliaued metaphor' and by J. C. NesGeld as 'a series of
metaphors or s}mbols'. Mr Fowler rightly comments that the defini-
tionwould have been better suited to parable than to allegory. Since
an allegory is of greater length, worked out in greater details, we
should accept the definition given by Mr. Fowler—‘It may fairly be
said that parable is extended metaphor and allegory extended simile.'
Spenser’s /her/e Qiieenesad Bnyio's Pilgrim's Progress are allegories.
The Bible (New Testament) has several parables meant to teacb some
moral lesson.
A fable, too, is a type of story that teaches a moral, in most
of the fables birds and beasts and even insects are treated like human
beings and so they are made to tbinlr, feel, speak and act like men
and women. SniU’iThe Spider and the Bee and Aesop's Fables are
nice specimens of a fable.
—
4. Ptnoalfieslloa Sometimes lifeless things are treated as if
they were human beings. This is called personification.
Examples
(a) Nature might stand up
And say to all the world
This was a man.
(b) Death lays his icy band on kings.
In the above examples. Nature and Death which are lifeless
objects have been treated as persons i.e. living beings.
5. Apostrophe —
Sometimes lifeless things are addressed as
human beings. This is called apostrophe. Apostrophe, too, is a sort
of personification but in personfication things are not addressed.
Examples
(al O Death I come soon.
(b) O Liberty ! why are you so dear 7
(c) Come, Peace of mind
 292 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH

In these examples. Death, Llbtrly and Peace of mitdtvit)ytn

addressed by name, as living beings are addressed as Ram or Shyam,
6. Palhfllc Fittacy—Sometimes Nature is reprded as takrai
Pathetic fallacy, loo, therefore a
active interest in human alTairs. is

kind of personification but the difTerence between them is that the

element of Nature’s interest in man’s destiny is not present in
at the
personification. In pathetic fallacy, Nature is happy or sorry
rise or fall of man.
Example
Earth fell the wound, and Nature from her seat sighing throegh

all her works, gave sigos of awe that all was lost.

In the above lines. Earth and Nature have been

shown to N o
interest m
sorrow at the loss in man’s life. They are actively
human affairs. . •«
is a Greek word meaning a
ladder. Asm »
7, Climax—This
ladder, so in climax the sense rises step by step to what is
me oiiiereni loeas are
\iilie
placed first an
order of importance. The least important idea is

most important last.

Examples
(a) He was abused, beaten and killed.

(b) She sobs, groans and cries.

(c) I came, I saw. I conquered. ^^3
(fa
8. Anticlimax or Bathos—It is a sadden descent

something grand and great to something extremely *

jly
with wha is -

something serious and Important is mixed up

is
this arrangemen
light and unimportant The total effect of
humour and ridicule.
Examples
cast,
(a)No louder shrieks by dames to heaven are
When Aw5han</r die or breathe their last.
placed siflc y
Here husbands and lap-dogs have been
make the whole thing ridiculous.
(b) Who in course of one revolving
moon was
man, fiddler znd buffoon. u,, .

and statesman)
Here, too, something great (lawyer
buffoon).
mixed up with what is trim! (fiddler and

9.Zengm.-It literally means -yoke’. By "“f"" cne of

this verb s
arr joined (yoked) to only one verb and
 WORD POWtR 293

the nouns joined. Naturally, such a verb gives two entirely different
meanings and produces humour. Zeugma is, therefore, very much
like bathos.

Examples
(a) He took his hai and his leave.
(b) The moment and the vessel passed.
10. Antithesis—In this figure of speech one set of words or
phrases in the first part of a sentence is set against another in the
second part. There is some sort of contrast between the two sets of
words or phrases and they are balanced against each other.
Examples
(al United vtt stand, devidedva fall.
(b) Man proposes, God disposes.
In the fir« example, one set (united we stand) ‘n set against
another (divided we fall). These two sets of ideas are contrasted
and balanced. In the second sentence, ‘proposes’ is set against
‘disposes' and 'man' against ‘God*.
(c) To err is human, to forgive divine.

11. Epigram— Maximum of sense in the minimum of space is

epigram. 'Hiat is to say, a statement is called epigram if it is

extremely concise. Only a few words convey a lot of sense and the
statement is witty.

Examples
(a) Crying is the refuge of plain women, but the rum of pretty
ones.
ornament and ability.
(b) Studies serve for delight, for
12. Oxymoron— In this figure of speech two terms which are
opposite in meaning are placed side by side and they form one
lovely phrase.
Examples
I
(a) A noiseless noise among the leaves.
(b) And all its no more.
aching joys are
13. Paradox— There arc statements that appear to be meanmg-
^
less and even absurd but on second thought they are found to be
^'Wttsifnificant.A/’flrfldox, too, like epigram, is a precise statement
having a lot of sense at bottom but almost no sense on the surface.

Examples
^
(a) There is none so poor, as a wealthy miser.
(b) He who goes against the fashiat is himself its slave.
 294 HOW TO WRfTr CORRECT ENCttSir

14. «Melon)Tnjr — It meani 'name-change*. Metonymy is i

use of an attribute (quality) for

the thing. This attribute sutk
the thing associated with it.

Examples
Crown for Klnf,pea for writer uni purse ht money.
The pen is mightier than the sworJ.
Here 'pen* is used for ’writer’ and 'sword* for 'soldier*.

15. S)aeedoche —The mention of a part of a thing for ti

whole or vice versa (i. e. whole for the part) is called synecdoche.
Examples
(a) He can no longer earn his bread, (necessaries)
(b) Five more hands an needed, (men)
‘Bread’ is only a part of the necessaries of life and ‘hind* i

Only a part of man. But here the part of a thing suggests or staad
for thewhole of it—‘bread* for all the nectssarieseflife and ‘hands
for men.
16. \toay— Irony is a type of statement which has doubleineaa'
'ing—surfacemeaningaQdinnermeaning. The inner meaning is eppcsii*
to the surface meaning and the intention of a speaker is to con«J
acdienc*
this inner meaning. It is only the careless or ignorant
that can accept the surface meaDtng. Ceesae
In Shakespeare’s Julius
‘hoDocrs-
Antony again and again describes Brutus and his friends as
act
blemen’ but what he really wishes to suggest is that they are
honourable at all. Here ‘honourable* means ‘dishonounblc- b
this way, irony is a sort of %'eiled (bidden) attack.
17. Sarcasm —
Sarcasm is a direct attack and aims at cecss^
ridicule or contempt. The essence of sarcasm is the aim of
deep
pain by the use of bitter words. Irony, too, cuts quite
sarcasm cuts with an iron dagger. It does not cut as cleverly
if
Swift describes mankind as ‘the most pernicious race of little
vermin*. bitter and direct statement.
It is a
or ri
18. lanaeado—Innuendo, loo, is a sort of censure
but it is never direct. It isonly hinted at clewly as in
^ny
lacks the double meaning of irony. It is, therefore,
both irony and sarcasm, for sarcasm is a direct censure,
innuendo is an indirect one.
Example
He was bora of rich iarhoeest parents. , ,i,» rich sf*
tha
Here the use of ‘but’ indirectly suggests (hints) .j ^

not honest. It is a bitter censure but it is not stated in p

 WORD FOU^R 295

19. Ilypallas* Transferred Ephliet— Sometimes an epithet

(adjective) is transfentd or attached to a word with which it is

associated instead of to a word to which it really belongs. In other
words, the positions of certain adjectives are transfcired andso they
qualify not the right noun but some other ooun placed near it.
Examples
(a) He lay sobbing on his sleepless pillow.
(b) He passed a restless night.
In these examples the adjectives (sleepless and restless! have
been transferred from ‘he* to some other noun (pillow and night).
These adjectives really belong to 'he* and not to ‘pillow* or 'night*.
Hence, these two adjectives (epithets) are here transferred epithets.
20. Litotes— It is a figure of speech in which a negative (no,
not) is used with some other word lo express a strong aflirmative.
Litotes U a type ot uaderttatement (meiosts) that
aims at enhancing
the impression. A clearly positive statement is often not as effective
at an understatement.
Example
He is no mean scholar.

Here ‘no mean' means ‘very great’ and it is a more effective

and Impressive statement than 'very great*. In the same way, 'not
a few* means ‘a large number’ and •not bad’ means 'excellent*.
2t. Ujpetbole or Exaggeratioa— It is an ovetstatement as
opposed to understatement (litotes) and statement of facts.
Litotes and hypetbole do not tnaVe a statement of facts RS they are.
Litotes understates whereas hyperbole overstates them. Both of
them, however, aim at the same iWng—to create a powerful effect In
hyperbole things are represented as mcch greater or smaller than they
actually are.
Examines
Ten thousand saw | at a glance.
Forty thousand brothers could not . . male up the sum.
Here the number (ten thousand, Tony thousand) is not a literal
statement of facts. Jt is a definite exaggeration (overstatement)
to
create a strong impression,
22. EojihcmKm—The use of a good, agreeable or auspicious
word instead of an evil, disagreeable or inauspicious uord is called
euphemism. It aims at avoiding blunt or bitter troth and hence
it
avoids such word at are not polite or pleasing. Tor ioitance, *10
breathe one's last* is used for ‘death’ and 'a light fingered person*
 *

296 HO\V TO WRITE CORRECT EKGUSH

for ‘thief’. ‘Death’ and ‘ihicP and such other words are nther blan
or plain descriptions and so they are avoided in a decent society.
23. Periphrasis or Cirawnlocotion— It means a piece of writinj
that is neither plain nor predse. On the contrary, even a plain and
simple thing is The result is that
expressed in a roundabout way.
one has to use much more words thin necessary. In euphemism,
too, there is a roundabout way of putting things and hence ssvenl
unnecessary words are used for a single word. But there is a differ««
between euphemism and periphrasis. The former adopts a routd-
about method because it wishes to avoid words that are disigreeibh
but the latter has no such intention. Euphemism aims at decency h-t
periplfasis aims just at verbal beauty. It is therefore very
feeling of
difhcult to make any bead or tail of it and one has the
It is therefore
cowi"
reading nothing but a group of lovely words.
dered to be a faulty style.

Examples

(a) The flaming orb of the day-the sun.

(b) One’s prominent feature** one’s nose.
(c) The shining leather-boots.
24. Tautology or Pleonasm— Repetition of the same Uei w
different words
is called lautoh^y. Tautology, too, like periphf*’
as can
is a faulty because one has to use a lot of such words
style
easily be avoided. It is in a sense the opposite of
precis and, to h?

the least, is a careless piece of writing.

Examples

(a) He is an extremely oU man of hundred years.

(b) He rejoiced at the Aarpy sight
In the first sentence the use of ‘extremely old' it
for merely repeats the idea In ‘man of hundred years’.
it
Can a _3!i' •

*
of hundred years be ever young ? In the second esimplo the
‘rejoice’ presupposes that the sight must have been hsppy,
®^’’®

cannot possibly rejoice at an unhappy light. Then why use

at all’ It is thus clear that tautology serves

no useful purpose.
can. however, be justified when It lays emphisis.
^
25 RepetltloB-Sometiinesthekcy wordfimportantwo
sesireee is repealed, /tepe’ltlon in Itself Is a fau'f, as
in «
but it is fcl'y justifiable If it aisis at giving h
enff’* ,,
dfepe-ot on. In that case it tries to create i powerful
 WORD POWER 297

the following lines—

(a) O dark, dark, dark amid the blaze of noon.
(b) Ahnt, ahne, all, all ofone.
Alone on a wide, wide sea.
In the fint line ‘daik* is icpeated thiicc to suggest a sense of
utter darkness. This impression cannot be created without repetition.
In the second ctample, the poet tries to describe the feeling of terrible
loneliness and hence repetition here is welcome and even essential.
Zfi. Interrogation— It is a kind of qaestLon to which there is

only one answer— cither a strong affirmative or a strong negative. The

very nature of the question determines the answer. The reason is
that it contains some truth or fact which has to be either affirmed or
denied.
Examples
(a) 1: there anybody here who does not love bis mother and his
motherland ?
(b) If you succeed, do yvu not rejoice T
The answer to the first question is a strong negative 'No* and
the answer to the second one is a strong affirmative ‘Yes’. The ques*
tions are such that no other answer is possible. So, the answer to an
Interrosatton is inevitable and it is tbe same answer as the writer
expects the reader to give.
27. Escismstion— It is a strong expression of some powerful
feeling. Naturally, the rules of giammai very often fail to control the
writer. The however, is very strong. In fact, it is stronger
effect,
than a full gtammatical senltoce can ever create.
Examples
(a) A horse 1 a horse 1 a kingdom for a horse '.

(b) and ob !
The difference to me I
The rush of intense emotion sweeps
the poets away. They
cannot but write broken sentences like these. But mark their effect.
Well, it is tremendous.
28. Pun— Pun is a play on words. Lots of words, we know, have
more than one meaning. Pen is a play on the different meanings of
a word. It is rather a light work and so it may be said that the pun
is a playing upon words. In fact it is generally for some fun that pun
is used.
Examples
(a) If a woman loses her husband, she pines for a
second.
(sixtieth part of a minute; another)
 298 now TO WWIE CORRECT ENCLBH

(b) An ambasjador lies abroad for the good ofhis coontry.

(lives; tells lies)

In the above examples ‘secocd’ and ‘lies’ each has two em-
nings, and pun lies in using the words in different senses.

29. Alliteration — The ore of words beginoini with or contaia-

Generally, aiss
ing the same letter or sound is called allilerailon. it

more at beauty than at utility and hence it is not a serions wort of

art.

Examples

he sleeps well.
(a) After life’s fitful fever
a summer season when soft was the sun.
(b) In
second ‘s,«*
In the first sentence ‘r is repeated and in the
-
there is a lot of ‘f’ sound in the first sentence and ‘s’ sound
in

therefore, aims at producing a particular type

second. Alliteration,
seme use
sound. If this sound suggests proper sense, it does serve
purpose.
and based b?m
30. Onomatopoeia— It means 'naroe-tnaking' is

is the form* *

the principle of imitation. Onomfl/opee/n, therefore,

ofanamefor word) by imitating the natural sound that ,
s
An onomatopoeic word is suggestive of the
with the object.
‘poff-pufl’are
or the quality of the object. ‘Babble’, ’croak’ and
of the instances on the point. These
objects a
imitating the natural sounds or qualities of the
with them. Such words aim at suggesting or
echobg t esen
are therefore highly efTecllve.

Figures of Speech

in Ihc Jam^iKS S'”

FoM mt the Flsurn o/ Spetch
comments— .oar
velvet The
1. as black as oight. aad as soft as
Her hair is
it u sp
down hke a wolf. Money is Hkeraanure; not good unless ever-roUmi
swift as an arrow. He U as thin as a at«k. Time. Lfce
an
bears all Its sons away.
, v . i..rkneved-n«
(appropriate) but hackney
.

Hmrs— These are similes—are apt

—so they fail to add force lo a description. /.hesnol. S’*
2. The camel is the rJiiip of the desert. Hope U ° cold
table.
has ftony leader pul af/Wr nrrifi on the
heart The
Don’tsAaryoureyerto yourfaulti. Tbs ambassadar was
lions. He is the aaZr of the earth. . ceiicdt^

be metaphors and have become a part of common speech.

 . '

WORD POWER 299

3. (s) It is no use besting about tlie bush. You had better hit the nail on
the bead beiore it is too late.

(b) The soldier put hia toot in h right up to the hilt.

(c) Lite IS an illusion. It is a shadow that bursts m no time and le,<ves

mere ashes behind.

Mixed rnetapbor—hunting and haa)metSBg mixed up— is
rather far-fetched and confused, (b) Mixed Metaphor— foot and sword mixed up
—strained and confused— laclrs force and fails to add clearness to the description.
(c) Mixedmeuphoi-Life hu beencompared to a number of things one after
another— illusion, shadow, bubble <6«»rs suggests that life is a bubble] and fire
(life burnt to ashes by fire) —the tniod at noiL seems to be confused.
4 . ''How fat that little candle throws its beams
So shines a good deed in a naughty world."
Hinli—lt IS a simile, although os or We
has not been used A simile may
be expressed by placing two objects side by side This arrangement suggests
certain points of iimilanty between tbem This device bas been employed mtbe
nboie two lines. A good deed in wKked world is IiKe a candle in
a darkness.
S "Here, thou great
(a) Aooa ' whom three realms obey,
"
Dost sometimes counsel take— and sometimes tea
(b) She has lost her bealth. her wealth, her reputation and her handkereh*
lef ail at once.
(e) "Miss BoIo west home loa Rood of teats and a sedan chair."

/finfi—Bathos Of Anticlimax. In all the examples something great bas

been mixed up with tomeibiog hopelessly trivial. This produces humour and
Tiditule.

6. (a) O death, where is iby sting ?

(b) O Solitude, where are the charms.
That sagts have seen >n thy face"*
Hints— Apostrophe.
7. (a) "The moon doth with delight.

Look round her when the heavens are bate."

(b) "The grey-eyed mom smiles ou the frowning night "
(c) "Knowledge is proud that he bas learnt so much.

Wisdom IS humble that be knows no more."

/fiwrx— Personification. In (a) there ate two figures— personification in
"The moon her” and periphrasis
m
'“when the heavens are bare" for the

8. (a) "So frowned the mighty combatants, that hell

Grew darker at their frown "
(b) "Here's the smell of blood stilt : all tbe perfumes of Arabia will not
"
sweeten this Sili'e hand

(c)She grew so weak that you could knock her down with a feather.
//«!«— Hyperbole.
9 "Men must work and women must weep,"
(b) "Men have many faults, womea only two."
ff/nfi— Antithesis.
10. (a) He had no little difficulty
(b) There are no fools here : they have all become leaders.
 300 ItOW TO WuriE CORRECT EVOLISH

(c) You mujt have, 'a heart lo resolve, a bead to confinus, aod a hiad i
execute.’
(d)He (oak hit hat and hts tesve,
(e)“What a piece of work it man !"
<0 "He who can. doe^ he who cannot, leaches.”
*6) "'Life it biller sweet."
Hlnis—{a) Litotes; (b) fitnueodo; (c) Climat; (d) Bathos (or better
call It Zeug-ni); (el Eaclantaiion; (f| Epigram; (j) Orymoron.
 CHAPTER Xtl

SIMILAR EXPRESSIONS DISTINGUISHED

1. (a) The dinner is already on the table.

(Already suggests time and the sentence means— The dinner

isplaced from before.)
(b) The dinner is all ready on the table.
(All ready means ‘fully preparetT and the sentence means
The dinner is fully prepared.)
2. (a) It cost me almost thirty pounds.
(X/mosr means •about’ and is a mere statement of price Le.
about thirty pounds.)
(b) It costme nearly thirty pounds.
[Here 'nearly' suggests that tbe price (about thirty pounds)
was more than I wished to pay.)
?. (a) I have always tried, (at ail times)

(b) I have tried all ways, (every possible way)

4. (a) Anyone will do. (one of the persons)
(b) Any one will do. (one of the things)
5. (a) She dislikes you as much as /.
(She dislikes you as much as I dislike you)
(b) She dislikes you as much as me.
(She dislikes both you and me in equal degree.)
6. (a) He walks as if he were drunk.

(The sentence suggests that he is not drunk.)

(b) He walks as if he Is drunk.
(The sentence suggests that he is drunk.)
1. (a) She helped \im, as well as I. (She and I both helped him.)

(b) She helped him, as well as me.

(She helped both him and me.)
8. (a) There are, too, many people who accept bribe.

(Here too is separated from many and means ’also’.)

(b) There are too many people who accept bribe.
(Here too is attached to 'many'. Thus too many means ‘more
than the proper number’,)

(301 )
 302
9. KOW TO WRITE CORRECT ESOUSH
(a) He was /awiViar r® me.
(Fami7/ar /» means ‘known to*. The sentence, therefc
means—I recogoised bint wjtboat sny difScuUy, ttcaias
was known to me already.)
(b) He wa$7ami7iar wi/A Die.
(FamHiar with means ‘having a fairly good knowledge <

‘to know intimately*. The sentence, therefore, neacs-;

treated me In a friendly manner as though he knew ice ia
roately.)
10. (a) My friend ii ill.

(^/y/n>n<f suggests a definite person hose identity is *e

knoftTi.)
(b) A friend of mine is ill.

(It suggests ‘someone with whom I am friendly*. It i» B'

definite and specific.)

1 1. (a) If is a ga/J ring- (It Is a ring made of gold.)

(b) It is a golden ring. (The ring has the colour of gold.)
12. (a) //are you constipation ?
(Do you suffer from constipation at this mornent ?)
(b) Do you hare constipation ?
(Do you generally or habitually suJTer from constipation 7)

Note— ‘Do hare' is used for what is general or habitual, »he«'>|

'hare' IS used when the reference isto one particular occasion

particularly to a strict present. Note the difference in rnMinfll

between —
I hare no book.
(I have no book with me at the present moment.)
1 do nor Aorr a book. ,
(Not to speak of possessing a book at this moment,
St
not possess a book
I /Liren'i to go to college on Sunday.
(this coming Sunday only.)
I don't /ute to go lo college on Sunday.
(as a general rule.)
I hadn't anyth'flf to eat.
(I htd eto food in my poisesiion at l-hat lime.)

I dMn'i hjte anythiagto eat.

(t Cot eat any food )
n. (*) you See I/Rjea has imvri yet 7
*
(// ts used when the speaker wishes or hopes for j
 SIMILAR EXPRESSIONS DISmCUlSHlTD 303

(b) Will you see Hhether Ram has arrived yet ?

(IF/je/Aer suggests a mere enquiry and the speaker is pre-

pared lot a positive or negative answer.)
!4. (a) I feel ill.

|1 am unwell
(b) T feel sick.
nausea or vomiting tendency.)
(I feel

15. (a) Only he read a book.

(He read but nobody else read.)
(b) He only read a book.
(He read but he didn’t understand it.)
(c) He read only a book.
(He read a book but he didn’t read anything else )

16. (a) She ofttn thinks of marrying.

(She now thinks of getting married.)
(b) She thinks of marrying often.
(She thinks of getting married several times.)
17. (a) Ram. will have wcUten a letter.
(Ram Will have finished a letter in future. That is, the letter
will be wtvtten by Ram.)
(b) Ram will have a letter written.
(Ran will get a letter written by aomebody else. That is.

the letter will not be written by Ram.)

18. (a) He is a greater soldier than siaiesmon.
(He is both soldier and statesman but he is greater as a
soldier.)
(b) He is a greater soldier than a stdirsman.
(He is a greater soldier than a statesman IS. That he is is,

a soldier but not a statesman 1

15. (a) My dog is better than Mohan’s.
(My dog is better than Mohan’s dog.)
(h) My dog is better than Mohan.
(My dog Is better than Mohan himself.)
20- (a) H’ho » he 1
(What is his name or parentage ?)
(b) JV'hal is he ?
(What IS his profession or social staiot 7)
(c) » fc/chiihe?
(The question inquires about a particular penon out of a
group of persons
 30J HOWTO w^irr coRntcriNGtoif

2t. (a) I miijf ihK «Q(fc.

rf<9

(ft Indicates soma Internal compufjion.)

(b) I hare to da this wort:.

{It indicates some esternal compulsion )

(c) ] ihouid da this nork.

(U indicates a sense of duly.)

22. (i) Happily, his father did not die.
(His father did not die and it was a happy (foffona«)t
(b) Hit father did not 6\t happily.
(ills father died and his death was not a happy
11. {4> Tilt poet and philoipher has said so.
(The same person is both poet and philosopher aa
has said so.)
(b) The poet and the philosopher have said so.
(There are two persons. The one is a poet and th*
'

a philosopher and both have said so.)

24. (a) He has a btaek and a white cat.
(He has two cats. One is black and the ether is white.)
(b) He has a black end white cat.
(He has only one cat. It is partly black and partly
25. (a) He loves SheeU mote than /.
(He and I love Sheela but he loves her more than f
(b) He loves Shecia more than me.
thsi
(He loves Sheela and me but he loves her nJore
loves me.)
26. (a) He is not or home.
(He is not in tbe bouse.)

(b) He is not yet home.

(He has not yet leturaed home from outside.)
21. (a) She is a woman.
(IVomon denotes sexj
(b) She is a , 2
-
ore
(Lady denotes social rank. The sentence there
that she is not an ordinary woman.)
2S. (a) Do you like this kind of wine.
(Wine of this brand or make.)
(b) Do you like wwie ofthis kind f
(Wine of this quality)
29. (a) You will not find that book so easy.
(That book is rather dilSculf.)
 SIMILAR EXPRESSIONS DKTINOLnSilED 305

(b) You not find that book

will easily. W
(It would be dirficuU Tor yon to gel that book.)
30. (a) It is not worth saving.
(It (something) is so small or insignificant that it does not
deserve to be saved.}
(b) U is not wort/i-whiie saving.
(Saving is rather useless. It is no use saving money.)
31. (a) 1 shouldn’t do that if I were you.
should refrain from doing (hat if.
(I .)

tb) I wouldn’t do that »f I were you,

(I should refuse to do that if....)

32. (a) I went to college.

(I went there to learn or leach.)

(b) I went to the college.

(I went just to see or visit the place.)

33. (a) He was surprised by the police.

[He was taken by surprise (caught unawares)]
(b) lie was surprised at (be police.
(He was filled with surprise at the sight of the police.)
34. (a) The police searched the thief.
(The thief was caught and the police were searching his
pockets etc.)
(b) The police searched for the thief.
(The thief was absconding. The police were trying to trace
him out.)
35. (a) What sort of musician is he 7
(U inquires about 1m» cUssvficat«ot\ whethet he is in a band
or an orchestra.)
(b) What sort of a musician is he 7
(It inquires about his capabilities whether he is great or
average or bad.)
36. (a)These books have been bought for Leeta and Sheela's sake.
(Here the two persons are thought of together.)
(b) These books have been bought tor Leeta's and Sheela’s sake.
(Here the two persons arc thought of separately.)
37. (a) Tea is fairly hot.
(It is as hot as it should be.)
(b) The tea is rather hot.
Ot is too hot. more hot than it should be.)
It is

38. (a) Did she do it fAen?

(Here ‘then’ a part of the sentence meaning ‘at that time
is ’)

H. W. C.E.-20
 306 limV TO WRITE CORRECT ENGtRIt

(b) Did she do it, then ?

(Here 'then* stands apart from the sentence. It is za
troduclory adverb, and not an adverb of lime
39. (a) He //r« In India.
(He lives permanently.)
(b) Me h iMng in India.
(He is lr> India at present but does not live here pera

nenlly.)
40. (a) I (tare to say.

(1 have the courage to say, I am bold enough to say)

(b) I tiare say.

(I believe or think likely)

41. (a) He is dying, (espiring. on the point of death)
(b) He is dyeing, (colouring a piece of cloth)
42. (a) It is lawful, (not against law)
(b) It is legal, (sanctioned and recognised by law)
43. (a) Which do you like best ?
(The sentence indicates that one’s liking is depeodeat opot
a comparison between the qualities of the things an30 n|Sl
which one has to choose.)
one
(b) Which do you like mor; ? (The sentence indicates that
liking is a mere personal preference without any coapanwa*
In other words, the sentence means— ‘What is yourchoiw
without giving reasons for
it-)

should have liked logo. (The sentence expresses a

destr*
44. (a) I
oce I
that is a past
dfsirf
(b) I should like to hare gone. (The sentence expresses a
one;
that isa present
in
45. (a) He may have been injured. (The possibility of his being
jured still exist!

orbisbeiHa
(b)He might have been injured. (The possibility
any lonscr
injured existed in the past but it does not exist

46. (a) I am at fault. (I am puzzled.)

(b) I am in fault. (I am to blame.)
47. (a) I am tired of writing. (I am exhausted.)
(b) I am tired with writing. (I am disgusted.)
48. (a) She is the best poetess, (best of all the female poets)
(b) She is the best poet, (best of all the poets, mah

49. (a) Speak or die. (You shall die if you do not speak.)
(b) Speak and die. (You shall die if you speak.)
 ) )

SIMILAR EXPRESSlOm DlSTWCiUlStlED 301

50. (a) appeals to be ill. (He seems to be ill at present.)

(b) He appears to Aave been ill. (He was ill but is not so now,)
51. (a) He may haye gone. (1 am not sure if be has gone.)
(b) He might hare gone. (He did not go although he could.)
52. (a) Poor cj he is. (ahbough be is poor)
(b) As he is poor, (because he is poor)
53. (a) He reached sa/f. (He was safe and sound when he reached.)
(b) Vie reached safely. {He reached without any trouble on his
way.)
54. (a) He works hard (He labours bard.)
(b) He hardly works. (He docs not labour
55. (a) He went to market, (to purchase something)
(b) He went M the market, (for some other purpose, not to
purchase anythiog)
56. (a) He thinks Utile of me. (He has a poor opinion about ne.)
(b) He WHfe thinks of me. (He does not remember me.)
57. (a) Go to college direct. (Go wiibout stopping anywhere on the
way.)
(h) Go to college directly. (Go at once without any delay
 ciupuK xnr

re-writing in simple ENGLISH

(A)

Re-«rlfe Jhe followln;; arnlencn la jFmpleEosIIsfi.iToidisjrt

•boot exprnilam—
1. Iheclctiwojgltfnihesaek. (wu discharged)
2. He jpcakj a* though he had the £fgln marbles in bit ro
to
(lie speaks in an affected
3. We partook of a cup that cheers but not Inebriates, C^'t bad
cot

4. I spotted him two points, (allowed)

5. He Is a professor of the tonsorial art. (He is a barber.)
6. He is a hairdresser. (He is a barber.)

7. I can’t tolerate his minatory expressions, (threats)

8. Culinary department, (kitchen)
9. Culinary knowledge, (art of cooking)
10. He is the head of the culinary department, (He Is the head coot,
11. To trip the tight fantastic toe. (to dance)
12. This my
dear lady’dog. (bitch)
is

1 3. He is a Solomon. (He is a wise man.)

I4‘ The jflcre</ page. (The Bible)
15. He showed a dean pair of heels. (He escaped with speed.)
16. He is burning the candle at both ends. (He lives recklessly.)
17. He always tries to feather his own nest, (to enrich himselO
IS. To face the music, (to accept something unpleasant)
1 9. He shook in his shoes, (was frightened)

20. Discord fell on she music ofhis cord. (He went mad
21. The finny denizens of the deep look very lovely, (fish)
22. The adverse climatic conditions, (bad weather)
23. A succulent bivalve, (oyster)
24. The lords of creation, (mankind)
25. The weaker vessel, (womankind)
26. The nuptial tie. (marriage)
27. He is a medical aliendanilaJther. (doctor)
( 303 )
 )

RE-WRITING IN SfURU ENGLISH 309

28. The hand that rocked the cradle has kicked the bucket, (mother has
died)

29. He is not quite exact in his statement. (He is a liar. He tells a

lie.)

30. His statement suffers from terminological inexactitude. (He tells

a lie.)
31. The heo'iens are bare. (The sky is clear.)

32. T/ie pen u mightier than the sword .

(An author is superior to
a soldier.)
33. To ;iuf a ceiling on prices, (to control prices)
34. To draw the long bow (to exaggerate)
,35. His son) left for its heasenSy abode. (He died.)
36. He breathed his last, (died)
37* It is oil over with him. (died)
38. He departed front this world, (died)
39. He passed away. (He died.)
40. He sleeps the sleep that knows no breaking. (He is dead.)
41. He has Joined the great majority. (He died.)
42. He was gathered to his forefathers. (He died.)
43. He closed his busy life. (He died.)
44. Death laid his ley hand on him. (He died.)
45. He gave up the ghost, (died)
46. He went the way of all flesh, (died)
47. He paid the debt to Nature, (died)
48. He fabtes not. (He speaks the truth.)
49. He is no mean thinker. (He is a great thinker.)
50. He is singularly unfortunate in his dealings with his wife. (He is

not on happy terms with his wife.)

51. He partook o/his meal. (He ate his meal.)
52. I feel an aching raid. (I feel hungry.)
53. The loner man must he salis&ed. (the stomach)
34. He is a meat purvejor. (butcher)
55. He is an operative. (He is a workman.)
56. Do you like the fragrant weed^ (tobacco)
57. This is a canine specimen. (This Is a dog
58. There wasa lot oftran^rmar/on «/c«/>i7ol. (There was a lot of
expenditure,)
59. He was made a rec/p/eniofa gift. {He received a gift.)
60. SiVier oni/go/i/have I none. (I have no money.)

61. He bad been Her Majesty's guest.{\lo had been a prisoner.)

 310 »row TO wwrr conurcr ts-cusit

Thtxt iMi mixture of ^h^ tht ami the /ox In him. (He hstro:
and clevei

63. He haj reached the erenlng of his lift, (He has grown old.)
64. He is the AViror o/his service, (the oldest man)
65. She lay all night on her s\ttj>\ts^ pillow. (She did not sleep.)
66. The soldier is worthy of (worthy of h:'s sword)
67. His prominent feature was like nn eagle’s beak, (his nose)
68. It was blown away by the viewless couriers of the air. (by tb

69. Are you interested in £«c//</? (geometry)

70. His snowy locks look lovely, (gray hair)
71. The thief was put In Irons, (was fettered)
72. He resembles the animal that brouses on thistle. (He is (or is liktl

ao asj.)

73. He was pul away, (was murdered)

74. He is a legal adviser. (He is a lawyer.)
75. His action is notfriendly, (is inimical)
76. I bad no little diflicully. (I had a lot of dlfhculiy.)
77. Natal day. (birth day)
78. Nocturnal watch, (night watch)
79. The shining leather that covers our limbs, (skin)
80. Theu I felt like some watcher of the skies, (astronomer)
81. This/err/ve board a lovely, (dinner-table)

(B)
abs.rac
Rewrite the following sentences in simple English, avoiding
language, repetitions or glamorous words — .

1. He extinguished the terrible conflagration. (He put

beiuS
in the eventuality of
this
2. You will get assistance from me
yc
the case. (If this is so, I will help
un ^
'
under active consideration. (The matter
is
3. The matter fs

consideration or is being considered'

4. I sustained injuries. (I received injuries, or I was injured.)

5. At the psychological moment. (At the right moment)

6. I have not seen him for ages, (for a long time)
7. He ///anA: ofco/jj of tea. (plenty)
8. He made a speech of so offensive character.

character, (an
9. Itis ati iMvein'gaf/OH of an impartial
 )

RE*WRITtNG IN SIMPLE ENGLISH 311

10. I don’t find myself in entire agreemcDt with you. (I don’t fully
agree with you.)
11. He was conveyed to his place of restdeoce in an intoxicated
condition. (He was carried home drunk.)
12. He was involved in an accident. (He met with an accident.)
13. He sustained injuries of a serious nature. (He received serious
injuries.)

14. He received medical attention.(He was treated by a doctor.)

15. This post is of temporary nature. (This post is temporary.)
16. I called into requisition the services of a medical attendant. (I
sent for a doctor.)
17. Owing to repeated deviations from the recognised principles of
30.
honesty be received orders for dismissal (He was dismissed for
dishonesty.)
18. A vastly huge concourse gathered to witness the awfully grand
specucle. (A crowd gathered to see the grand sight.)
19. What is the ordinary beverage of the urban population ? (What
is the usual drink of townsmen ?)
What is the position with regard to the availability of a house ?
(Is a house available f)

21. The implementation of this plan would involve the expenditure

of a vast sum of money. (This plan would be very costly.)
22. The situation with regard to the export of sugar has shown a
slight improvement. (Sugar-export has improved a little.)

23. He died in indigent circumstances. (He died in poverty.)

24. There is a mutual agreement between the two parlies. (There is
an agreement.)
25. Both he and she are absent. (He and she are absent.)
26. My watch is in good order, (in order)
27. His answer was fn the affirraatiyelin the negative. (HU answer was
>es/no
28. She has performed her ablutions. (She has washed.)
29. Who look the initialiYe ? (Who began ?)
30. Your remark produces awfully painful sensations. (Your remark
hurts.)
31. The train was running with great (The train was runn-
velocity.
ing very fast.)
32. Are you not labouring under a delusion of a serious nature ?
(Are you not making a serious mistake
33. She suffers from somnambulism. (sleep-walkiDgl
 312 irow TO wjtrre correct enolbh

34. Mi* rase h of a hopeful nature, (is hopeful)

35. Have you seen his residence 1 (house)
36. How
does he (walk)
37. Me has coftiiaitd. (reflected)
38. Mis behaviour is puerile, (boyish)
39. This bellicose activity should be condemned, (warlike)
40. Several Implements were used, (tools)
41. Mow docs he ro/^6u/<ire? (talk)
42. Me has seen many a rlclssiiude. (change)
43. Me is an erudite, (learned person)
44. The generality of leaders, (most leaders)
it
43. I have nolhing to report In this eonnectionlvUh regard to
with respect to this. (I have nolhing to report aboot tiu:

(Q
Rewrite the following sentences In Idiomatic English, molEt
slangivulgarismjcoltoquialism—

). I am going to the eotrs. (to a hotel)

2. Aren't I 7 (Am not I ?)
3. I have had a ripping time, (good time)
4. He has a dicky heart, (weak heart)
5. He is a sharper, (swindler, gambler)
6. She is awfully joWy. (very, extremely)
7. That transaction was rather fishy, (suspicisous)
8. He is a reverend, (clergyman)
9. He is a gent, (gentleman)
10. My tooth is /m/Vri/ig. (aching)
11. I felt I could afford to chunk medicine. (I felt
medicio*-'

12. She could on a pinch sell her ornaments. C'f

ujty’

13. I had a bit of lack, (a stroke of, a piece oQ

14. It's me. (It’s I)

15. Me have won .(I have won)

16. He is an old Bull, (a seasoned criminal)
17.Rotten egg. (a worthless fellow)
18. letter of 25th uU. (of the last month)
Your
19. letter of 25th inst. (of this month)
Your yj
pap
20 All the papers made a great to^a about it. (All the
.

ofpuf'*^'^'
it a great deal
 RE-WRITING IN SIMPLE ENGLISH 313

21. Maybe I shall go. (perhaps)

22. Would you please signature this letter ? (sigo)
23. I don’t suspicion him. (suspect)
24. I don't like to occasion you any inconvenience, (cause)
25. Give me an overall picture, (complete)
26. Do you wear pants ? (trousers)
27. Please send the books per parcel post, (by)
 CIIAPITR xrv

ANALYSIS

Analysis % tft;r stages |=—

(A) ^ ^ clauses ^ «r«pT-sT3>i j
(B) clauses
(C) ^ I

(A) FIRST STAGE

^ stage tf uiji ^ j jjjf 55 f f* cfjctf

«» X^k ftsn clause »fjP7-s^ fcTi stff »i i f

r^5rkf?^rtirrf7^«HniR«f 7T<rttR7*l« J'

frtylc § f? clause fe^t sentence ^ w part ihrr J, Tt $eatfn«
^^
»i

clause Rff ifr ii

Sentence k s?r part clause ^ Subject rftt Finite Verb
r I Subject wti: atti Finite verb «t tm erra, ti> clause tfn-*!**'*
er^t'i rf «n: ^ fsnn (Subject ^ Verb «») eiii(y >tff •

r?r*rt n ar? w ^ ^wf rr ar^i 1 1

How (o find cat Ibe Subject

^ ft Noun nr equivslentsfift Parts of Speech

New"*
cT cw «?) 5 t Subject rt xrkk J; 5&—
NOUN — This book is good.
FRONOUN— //e is a good man.
iNFlNrnvc— To walk Is healthy.
GERUND— Walking is good.
pitKAse — What to do is dilTicalt to decide.
ctAUSE— What he says is quite right.
*
CT nrt mft«i (chart) eft n?? ft «n Subject «r •t":*'
CT^T^ I

How to Oodoat the Ffaltr Verb

»f m Finite Verb Tt few «r Finite Verb it Verb *T

J
^
\

•^ci Number Person Subject i Number «^t Person « «T" *

}. aft—
(i) "'e go. (ij) He gocs.

( 314 >
 — 1 —

ANALYSIS 315

1?^ «FPt Subject (Wc) ptutal i t Verb plural ^ i »ra:

tsfsre ‘go’

Finite Verb \ i

Subject (He) singular ^ wfjfY goes

smt, ^
Jim
tft
if Verb (goes) sirigular I,

Finite Verb 1

Note— fsra Verb «T Number «f>r Person Subject ^ sTff

sft Subject ^ rrt’ I.

Absolute Verb ^?t ^ i % Absolute Verb ?i1?i atr 5: flit S’—
(i) Infinitive— to go.
(i\) Gerund — I am foad of vialking.
(iii) Participle— (a) Present Participle— Going there he saw a
tiger, (b) Past Participle liming gone there he saw a tiger.

a) i?r atf Finite Verb «fR Absolute Verb & ?f<T 1 1

Finite
Verb rm Subject ^ wgtrrt ^at I w Absolute Verb Subject Si sgsn

(i) Having gone there he saw a tiger.

(ii) Having gone there they saw a tiger.

«t Ww
^ am ft 1 1
S Subject (he) siogular t
Infinitive sfrt; Gerund
sftr il

aruft }
(they) plural;
i
n Verb
Absolute Verb ^ w) ift Finite Verb aft siwin wificc, aft
a) clause ifwi’trv aim aff ft rw?ii i aja Absolute Verb «> Finite
Verb sw ? I lyft as^ eft jr i fiw atl Absolute Verb »ft aw?
araiftti

Elliptical (Contracted) Srniroces

Role I. anfr eiw fsiaif ft Subjects V. vt aa^ ce;

ft Verb an mftn 1 1 flat ^ aa awit faatf or, nor, os wtU as,
onif Ro/, £u/, Tiijr o/i/y. .buf o/so ai oni/ rAere/ore at sfW fiai li
atefl a) aim-asm clause at |ai wiffa sftr o? mi)- ft nafri t ar «na
flat Subjects ^ aim-aim Verb ar wibr ar*! ta aiaif tt mm ? i

1. Neither this man eametior that.

(a) Neither this man came.
(b) Nor that (man) came.
2. He as well as / is to blame,
He is to blame.
(a)
(b) I am to blame.
3. He is poor fcuf meritonous,

(a) He is poor.
(b) But (he) is meritorious.
4. He, and not I, Is guilty.
(a) He is guilty.
(b) 1 am not guilty.
 316 HOW to wKtrt cojiurct tMOLnii

5. ,\ol on/y h« a]fo hti friendi were arrsstid.

fa) ite nat artcited.
(l>) Mil friends were arrcited.
6. itcii rich, anJ ihfr/foff hippy,
(a) lie it rich.
(h) lie it happy.
Nole— ITT h «ifw« Subject «f and k ntJ ’f n 5^
Subjecit «r r> ton } nV r»rriTrrT«rw7't-snncljuss*S^
sri1 Sh—
Ram. Mohan and Sohan are friends,
itr f m 9 nt clause i, tfin n(l i i«rcT Analysii I’r ^^
f?ci *17— (a) Ram it a friend, (b) Mohan is a friend, (c) Sohaa

is a friend— et « 3 r»i ymt i

Rnie If, trr arj ek etTrl 0^3 w 0 Subject mrf. ^ rt ^

•fVs: Verb —
He came and gate me a letter.
9lr *n7f 9 Omk Rnite Verbs ^ clauses I' >

tnfr
¥7^t^^7; dir—
fgt 57 Subjects «> m «et WTftr ff» clauses ci

He came and gave me a letter.

(a) He came.
(b) He gave me a letter.

7^ eflt »r

He lifted a gun. took aim and fired.

(a) He lifted a gun

(b) He took aim,
(c) He fired.
Tsur i sf>T As i VK
Rule
Subject run Verb
m. As ntfi i ban k
Thsff if 57
Verb
1 1
Clauses «r
^
*F5 7^ 'mft7 sir clauses «t ?7

1. Come as soon as you can.

(a) Come.
(b) As soon as you can (come).
2. He writes as fast as possible.
(a) He writes.
(b) As fast as (it is) possible.

3. This is the same pen as mine.

(a) This is the same pen.
(b) As mine (ray pen it).
 ANALYSIS 317

4. He is btUtt than I.
(a) He is better.
(b) Than 1 (am).
Rule IV. W >f» r^t )f,

though, when, unless, till, white sj^ whether. .. .or Siai? Subject tftr

Verb Uo 6e’ 5^ ^ 1 1 clauses ast YtJTt fg? Subject

eflt Verb cl see CT ^ snfcc «At «1Y uft gap ctause ci gaj ^ I&—
1. Though badly defeated, he did not leave the field.

• (a) Though (he was) badly defeated.

(b) He did not leave the field.

2. He lost his way while walking at night.

— (a) He lost his way.
(b) While (he was) walking at night.
3. I will send papers if called for.
(a) I will send papers.
(b) If (they are) called for.
4. His argument, whether right or wrong, goes on endlessly,
(a) His argument goes on endlessly.
(b) Whether (it is) right or wrong.
5. It should be preserv^ till required.

(a) It should be preserved.

(b) Till (it is) required.

Rule V. fg ctn as if flh airl clause yc fi Subordinate

Clause 3tl—
He memorised his lesson as if he were a parrot.
(a) He memorised his lesson.
(b) As if he were a parrot.
«tY as if clause uw, III snet eijlfn as if=as+if. n
sfs d f?nim Trrt ? rftsf clauses rw ucir ft
(a) He memorised his lesson.
(b) As he would have tnemorised.
(c) Ifhe were a parrot.

fewf eft cTWfli 6 *rw wmraft

er «ft 4*t W5r wmi f« $ clauses Principal J at Subordinate,
§ clauses vl
^ wn
rt wtr, STY Analysis ^ firststagei^ Ytt VT \

(B> SECOND STAGE

n Analysis eft Ak Ml K cin kx^ 1 1 cyI VT fewn
vtsn < fr «g^: clauses fas sYir 4J I ni sist ) fr clatjci fara
 3IS MOW to wfttr coa»FCT CNCUMt

Btrt * J mfj cUuiei

I tr^ ^vff > tU ^^ J*—
(i) Ptintipal ot Main or Indfpendfnt.
(ii) .Subonlifiale or DepenJeat.
Sulxjrdtn-ile Cfautei «ft rfh? «»rt i r? ?'“(a) Adverb CUok.
(b) Adjjjiive Ciaujc, (c) Noun Cbute.
I loM (0 fltid oot rrittcipat and Sabofdiaate Claawi

Rolf I. ctauis Prrjj^ffirf subordinaiing: conJunctiOT &

i’i’ix t *< Subofdiftne CUute »Rt ) aft? »r Claose vx
Jubordiflitb!|

conjunction ^ tk itm wf Principal Gauie fV; J l « rubordinatiui

conjunctioftj
as. as if, as Ihouph. as much as. as far as. accordi'as as, afirr,

as soon as, before, because, siacc, that, to that, provided, proTidci

which
that, notwithstanding that, than, Ihoogh (although), who,
what, how, if, whether, until, unless, lest, when aad where.
S—
At he is ill, he is absent.
!]e behaves os </he were a king.
I will help you at/ar as I can.
I do not know when he wtl) come.
I know wAere he lives. .

tsratfef? as, as if, as far as, when *rt "'here & ^ ’f™

clauses Subordinate ^ Wh: Principal.

Note (a) — Who, which, when and where # s? ^^ claows

Principal »rt ^ tsro >riW continuative sense ?

sense 9 ;r?T i Jfc I ttii NouaaVeo““^.^
Suboroma -
tt I, More Hints On Principal Clause and
Clause « 9 fewtty * wiqift | ^ ’
Rule 11. should, were she had sre C*n

l!r—
Should you appoint him, he would be obliged.
IKere he here, he would help me.
Had there been rain, there would have been good

Clauses
^ TO(i 9 should, were wVr had arrtt clauses f?5T
sw
Su

^orn f« 9^ clauses
Adverbial a
1 1 siq

Rule III. srf once w *w 'awe ^ ttt' ^ ^

Subordinate ^Vai I, ^^ wtl Adverbial Clause
Once you move ahead, you cannot go back. clans*
gfl once an ‘snre Tit (if once)' f TT ^
Subordinate 1 1
 AMALVnS 319

Rule IV. ^^ fwsrai ’RStT clause Imperative sentence

jlm ^ 5TU fffrt Assertive;

Give me blood, and 1 will give you freedom.

condition
vfT »hr Kffli % I »r?T Give me Wood w «tv I— If you give me blood.
rtrfipt Imperative sentences Subordinate Clause nrmn A
«frt sS ^5n fV 5l ?f^i Adverbial Clause esr wn Ttmi ^ i

Assertive sentence sftw and

^ ft>

5( Imperative sentence sfVt i: srraT

t rjfr and i tr^ comma % i

Rule V. fs ^ ?5iwr ?tf mm ^ dfft I—

The Comparative Degree the Comparative Degree.
v%—
The more you have, the more you want.
a%The The clauses & Degree wr ^:}i %5i^ CRtr #
gRTT The— clause Subordinate (Adv.) gl^r 4 sftt jtrtt Principal.

^
Bote VI. For
clause ^
Ir 5^ f»% arai clause Principal
Subordiaafe Adverbial qpnr
gmi 1
al «5jfiw enwrtr
1 fff
i
^
uatnc
ufrff n<T I

Role Vn. However ^ aai clause Principal tbti I «^lt

Subordinate ift srr however
( i Wit ar? WV comma tym J ?fr at
Principal Clause «w ftrK rtA I, comma o:?ii t (vr ara: ? sift)

t^i eg Subordinate Clause glm 1: 3d—

You have committed a grave offence, however, 1 excuse you
this time.
You will fail, howerer bard you may tty.

eg! 75^ howeverrtgw^ clause Principal Clause

Subordinate.
Role vni. vrt gt clause ^ ate w comma ti «V *r Conjunction
^ vgm clause Principal ghii t ^ J'rti Subordinate; 3&—
I hope you are well. The food you eat is pure,
ggt ‘you arc well’ ami ‘you eat* Subordinate Clause ^ sfig ateft
Principal.

lolrmgatire Claeses

I
Principal stt Subordinate Clauses tt fr^rt tmr gn snr gc
^
Wv svrrr i Interrogative sentences ^
1. The weather Is very fine today is n’t it ?
2. These things will not be needed any more, will they 2
y
 320 HOW TO WTHTE CORRECT ENGLISH

Jifl Tm clauses J— The weather is very fine today »S

is nT it ? TETt !WTT. 5 *iV ^ clauses I—These things will not h
needed any more will they 7 fH ?ftwf w
anr f ft ^ Interronti^

sentences ^ ^tsff yt Clauses ^ Principal Gause WHI I «ht vt ^

^ 1 1 Jro frwn t fir wrm S «tt tw ^ clauses
^*
^ tf Principal Clause upr, clauses ft Tm ^
flftf w % 3^I 'fe 'rit ft Interregelhe sentences ct
»oal)T5

w stTK ftni

1. The weather is very fine today, is n't it ?— PR. ct,

^
will they
2. These things will not be needed any more,
p». a
jg ^ clauses ^ Interrogative Clauses 3> stR & 5*^
srn Principal Clause ft ma, at ^ i

Patenlhetlcal Clauses

PT *lftr «ft TJTTTT TT «IR «—

1. Esperience, they say, Is the best teacher.
2. You are alt well, 1 hope.
3. You see, we lost our way In the forest.

«irf TfHi rrvT ^-Experience is the best teacher

say «T tpn f<ei to i i
xm & «it 'y
apws 9. they say ct
j ^
5^'
«ftr TFfsrt comma i h «wt cl ftri tst t
ent sft «r»T i

1 hope CT »IT7 ^ sfUsBffiTT^^VcomtM

c>t wsfjw wfl
wWT CT fm TTi J fftnl COT 9 *tV
I
you see c> romma i

nvi TTT j, eelfe tfVT If swcl *H ORJW Wff f I

fit
hope, I expect. I believe. I suppose, they lay, you^
sf I ^

* clauses sni ui ?, xi*wx9*n7 It iwcic><

tt
9 comma ei dash i
iical clauses
stli h war lw vA r
epr *iti Jp nrciwcTTl*!
^
iA ^ w't w Subordinate Tt i
I
wJOf 9 t»^
CTT rn? f« 99 clauses c<^ «> xjvt 9 IP-)
^ ... i-.i. a fT «
fe iw ’a * •
_ ,j»,

Pnocipal Clause W f« </

pt-t cm3 i wt?
comma
rei'r Clauses Principal Clauses eri >
fwt eT cTt

CTftch af* r fw «nvf «T H— p

1. You are well. I hope-

2 t hope you are welJ. jo* «f)

»<“
f rwr *»! 9 I hope « *Jf comma
 ANALYSIS 521

«fW ^ *fY Principal Oause 1 1 Tfr PRpi ^ «IK *f

m ^.K t=ra analysis w skr t?—

1. You ate well, 1 hope^
(a) You are well.— Prindpal clause
— Parenthetical clau$e
(b) I hope.
2. I hope you are well.
(a) —
I hope. Priadpal clause
(b) You are — Subordinate clause (N.
well. cl.)

3. Esperienee, they say, is the best teacher.

(a) Experience is the best teacher— P. cl.

(bWbey say—Parenthetical clause.

4. They say experience Is the best Itacher.
(a) They say— P, cl.
(b) Expetieace— teacher— S. cl. <N. cl.)

W Ptitwipsl Subordinate Clause eft tif

^sn i {% Subordinate Causes (Iss iratt t YTtftR ««n:

^ Subordinate Clauses aft S <#« Rt srew i

ADVERB CLAUSE
Rale I. ^ clause Urb ^ Subordinating Conjunctions ^
tl^ ? ^ Adverb Clause eft ?—
because, since, in order that, so that, provided that,
notwithstanding that, as if, as though, as much as, as far as. so long
as, assoon as, according as. lest, unless, until, before, ere, after, than,
though and although.
Note ()—However &
comma Tim
^ ORi clause Adverbial
H
I, sr?

fa Ts^ qi lah
You will not pass, fcorever hard you may try, (Adverbial)
N.B.— However & gR tftqigi clause Principal itm sn
ffil fi ^T comma Tim ?; 5%
You have committed a grave offence; this time, /lowew, /
excuse you.
however & 55 clause Principal Clause 1

(a)
Note (b)—That &
«t5
lil^Ri clause Adverbial
Ps" itm I, (b) T>^ comma Tim J.
^
(c) nmtm!;
wr

qi^ so er such ttit i; S&—

He worked jo bard,lthat he felt tired. (Adv.)
I
He look medlciiie,/rAar he might be cured. (Adv.)
 322 HOW ro WRIfE CORRECT ENGLWH

N.n. —Thai H 51? clauses Noun, Adjective 9^ Adverl

nWf it ?i wfsrit rttf otrjTsrt ft <rr7F5n I

Noun Ctaiise i>f!i ^ m rrei «i^ T«' f’rm I s’tc rri irt comma sriT 0
^ 55 Aiijcctivc Clausa iriii J bt f»T*i w ‘jtV J s.^ ri* <11^

comma srfi tRfft 1

fe) —
As ^ 5s fJs^Tpri clause AiJyerbiz] nr
Noie f, ^
’tu ttfi fiR farjpTT fp ?; 5 ^—
He missed the train, <js he was late (ftflr). (Adv.)
He is not as clever as she is fc). (Adv.)
N.B.— stt as i 7?% auch, as 8jt the same tr^ i er »? Adjecui
Clause RtiTT } %«t RPm ? I<tT% comma «stV JffT tr ttm; aS—
He is not sucA a good man/ as I expected. (Adj^tive)
This is ike same pen/ as mine. (Adjective)
Rale 11 . Sbanld, Were aad Had —ai should, were sftt Izad ci
^

if (fm) C>. ^ ^ clauses Adverbial ?; air—

Should you appoint him he would be obligtd. to Ike post,
Had there been rain, there would have been good crops.
IFcre Ac Acre, he would support me.
if •*
UR? should, bad pet were at^ clauses Adverbial t'arrfirwt
€T«i^^r?r
Rule ni. aa cnee «l «a if once (ant RC »)T) R^tn k. ffR ^ll
R^^rrsn Clause ptr Adverbial
Once you decide, you
Cause ^ I—
will get all help,
you
afl once ^
ere ‘anr utr' I, ‘R’S Rit’ ^nff > rrfST Occe
decide Adverbial Clause 1 1
Rule IV. clauses ^ the moment at the minute il '

I' I ^ clause tiRi Adverbial the moment a,

minute ^ «w rIbi t— «n ‘fim 5 &— . .

arn
The patient dkd,/tbe moment (the miaute) the dMtor
tjRT the moment arrived w Adverbial Clause f,
momeot/the minute
Rnle V. clauses Rfit in case It
n «ra

^
t
^
Ta^ PR’ Rt ^ L
f
Jt* 5 Ad-

verbial Rlt I, rtTI^ in case «i »re Rim ‘antt’; I—

I will take roy umbrella w core it rains.
tfRi in case it rains w Adverbial Clause f 1

w ®^ ^ .vrativt
Rule VI. fs %ir *ft RITT ftin RRST clause 1

sentence r^cTT t sftr fURT Assertive. %lr

and^fW
^
t «*1
t and
Imperative sentence
% «rTi» comma rrbi 1
ft RC
1 ?!&

tru (condition) ?n
ami ^
tN ^
Imperative sentence ^
Adverbial Clause JtRt urttn
(ilvrt mr h„itatt «nH I wHl drive awav the Chinese.
 1

ANALYSIS 323

Give f:i i If you give. wIcTf Cue me bullets, sit

Imperative sentence *rff s:*r Adverbial Clause } i

Role Vn. fg vt awY i fwSl the wril tvt e>:if e: ftr

Comparative Degree «t Adjective >!t Adverb rtai f if, Sir stfaT i

vstta? vsr s«t? !rt ^<t> The+cOinparative. . .the + comparative.

3^—
The uoner joa go, ihe better for you.
^ if <rt5n Tbe-clausc Advctbul e>at i f**!® Degree ci
^tott 5 •si^ 5«TO Thc-clau« i Ptincipal, fimt ittit I't

Rule
hardly (.^eareely ).
Vin— »v fji
. .
^ «iTir «t
.«/iM«iSRt«i clAti :—
m sooner — than ei

No sooner had he started than it began to rain.

had he started ifhen it began to ratfl.
fhrdJ)- (jeareeh }

^YivTf if DO soonerit 55 *Ht clause i?«i t Principal «*tT

than & 55 Tprt clause Adverbial. retr, hardly ft 5s arai
clause Principal ytttt i uhen % 55 ift^ rstt cist J Adverbial. «sr
fsRS >rtR if CTjet; nh anit «i analysis mtr 5rsn m
No sooner had. . . .to rain.
1. No sooner had he started —P.Cl.
2. Than it began to rain. Adv. O. —
Hardly (^Scarcely) had. . .rain-
Hardly (Scarcely) bad be started —P. Cl.
1.

2. When it began to rain.— Adv. Cl.

str CTv 3f vn Ti SCSI kB i As soon as ?r 55 fT5rT clause
tr^i Adverbial jtni?. no sooner Rw;? ewi clause Principal ftfii
% I er^qf vt ^—
ft began to rain as soon as he started.
1. It began to rain. ^P. Cl-
—
2. As soon as he started. ^Adv. Cl. —
Rule IX. fef ^
Relative «lt Interrogative Adverbs I* f^s{%
Adverbial Clauses 55 51% ? diT Pli ttvi Pnncipal Dauses % comma
trull %l~
If. whether, how, when «iV where.

1/ he c£>njM./I shall go.

You must go.fwftefher you tike it or rot.
I am not anxioU8,//ww/iAaW reach there.
I shall go,/w/ic« he comes here.
Where there is a willJtbero is a way.
557 if, whether, how, when gqt where % 55 clauses
Adverbial 1
 — — ?

n r«'''w f* -vtrf- frniff fvctrRf

t» ** Cjt« •* '

C »f fll t-'t <»> f --*•» ey If-rJ laTtf J *'}

»
-•
I
•*
f.'t li-

I <>t -f I r .., e,f

I f? » f '? I* ' r»l! wit! t
I <*' t'J In '» irV'y («T*1
<t‘ k’’*. w^*rt M* •‘•tn? > f « cho«f Ch7tt\
NV* <V) W^>^ ^t *f-r? » cams W' « >. >

fa* S' tr^ }. T.-CH'~ —» *f*. ?•> —

T^« witff if.n It itity i^vnf.

Ttf k3ur-«’*«'i n-vf-.-w W4< fi»c pr»

*f* •i»rs ax* •t;a I* f «: c/jtr*c< AJjcctIte Cjs*? i

MJINfUI-SK
Bct«l. jJ!.l!. it. whf.hfT. to*.
• htfc ft r* Nc«a Cl-iottf ?, w«
OfJVte i (f’T.r‘;i Mf it'’ 't'f <b> *1 irt? ^ S rft ^
>. »> •«• 4 jr* cm j. S*t-
I leo«'**auS)il^a.
I d« eel Ifiow i*A/fA («*») f’cci jrva waft.
t tn(I(nt4e«l i»Acf{#if) ><>««/.
Oar «t<«r tfeyewJt cyon %Kii (m) wr fl^n.
1 1«* /lAjf (f«) i$ It a fujMf.

FjcTpl'/A<w ifc) kf n a k.ttU JuU hs i* quits fowi-

I it« quite clearly'iAjf ff#) /.* li a hozae. .4,
* '

r3i rift Noun aiusci i r< *« ^ r\ ? 1

whal inij that ertnjr clauses Noun Ojujs ? t

^ ^
Rdf II. Rflatise «i Iniereojalivs Pronouas
InterrojatiieAdierbi <»he. which, that, whai.
« TK tT^erS clauses wf fc*fi sentence i rrtw J td ^
etft Noun •rm J, r» i Noun Qauses ttt f
IVho https his ntf//<wt;'hcJp5 himself.
That he is honestjis known to alL
IPAai he saysjis quite wrong.
Il’Afrc Ac ifrd^'is still unknown. j^-gci
^
vtT who, that, what net where & ^
Clause i't •
*9 i
•

Rdf III. 3fr ?m Direct Narration Jf inverted corneas t

^fi’^ ttei ?, Noun Qaose tht J

He said to rae,"I shall go**— Noun Clause.
He cried out, **I am ruined.”— Noun Clause.
 1

AN\UtSI5 325

Rule IV. i sr comma ti eftr

clauses *t Conjunciion. ffT

Verb i; sr^RH clause Noun Claose tbiT t; a^f—

1 hope/jou are well—Horn Clause,
hstems/he it uol Noun Clause.
ADJECmX CLAUSE
Rrfel. Who. •which, ibat, ’When ni where clauses
Adjective Clause flit > »tf (a) ni aftt Principal Clause i comma
Tpn, (b) pti; Noun rpn t. eftt (c) -aa ifrvri si
tsil ^3 H
snfl

^ i, ^ 's* ^ par 5: i ft—

I do not know the mun'HAo (sr) is here.
This is the boofc/lAot (sJ^) I bo^hr yesierthy.
This is the plaeeiy^here (Sff) I hse.
I know the timejwhen (m) he will come.
W mft Adjective Clauses i r*? ‘s' ft ra V, sn: who,
that, where im when clauses Adjective i

Rnlell. clauses ft; Pw comma

!t sfti sr eonjunclioe, tfr

Noun ft vtt RtTRT clause Adjective Clause r«i t: # ft—

The alr/> 0 H breathe in/musi be puK.
Sale 111. As ft clause Adjective rtm ^ *i (a) isft ?fft
comma ?f( untt rfrr (b) prft arft such, as ei the same ft sefftt ilp

He not such a good man/os / expected

is
Asrai'a'j questions.'aiwen put were easy.
This is the some pen os mine (is>.
etf trp As'Clauses Adjective Clauses ? i
Rale IV. but ft aepr Relative Pronoun ip nti rwt I eftr

FR Tfin i- who not p that not (lit srfO; 3ft—

There is no mother but loves her child,
as w« ft But-cla.use up Adjective Clause % \
More biats ou Principal and Subordinate Clauses

VF fjpuiT ft sttt Principal sftt Subordinate Clauses ftt 'r^Fi^r

^ PfKi jfl FT SIfu Analysis ftue an? Ftft ^p tsp

PFnft
Pronauns
^ (who I Tuft Relative Adverbs (when fIt where) sftr Relative
which) <it fpra ara ftf> ptdt, tcTIf Tttft
ritr
clauses Principal, Adverbial, Adjective fV Noun fttI ft ^ 1
^^lTF5=tFft FTl-fITlsti.m 5>^t 1 TUlftT fF CtI
'^•TF FT s air ftFIT F? I

3Vben and Wliere

FTSTTmi: zrft n?
Pift clauses ft Trft comma d'tr Noun rh
flV a Principal rtft ftw comma Tfft FT Adverbial ?nn ftrsr Noun TTft
i', •n:

y Adjective, ft Ff? F comma ft ^

? Noun, ft Noun Clause 1; ^
 326 IIOW lO IVKITE C08JECI
EVOUSII

ordinafc'lo Pr' a”) '

to Pr. a.)”'"'
'‘“lyrd Jar a fcrlmskiCimrih
mn hr «lll camr, I shall go.
(Ad,, a.)
'*""»« w/l, Ihcfc is a way. (Adv. Cl.)
Ire™
The place wAere / /iie is good. lAdj. Cl.)
1 know wArtiAp villcome. (N. Cl.)
1 do not know he lives. (N. a.)
n/tfre
where « comma Noon
B .
.^'P'
^cjpal
h>t *1

;rff ^
Adverbial ^ ^ pri TfS Noon I
5t PTR (time «n place)
He sold the bool, uhcn it was the best he had.
we find grass, where we expectedjiowers.
^aif if when i
oun (book) time ci are
comma *rV Noun
sit7 irrm tpfitr when t i
^t cba
^•

Aovwbial jsi, Co-ordinate to

Principal Clauses sffl j Tfft WK pt
where « comma «ftr Noun '

e? 5 t Adverbial pr,
« here #r 5flr wt Noun (grass) wri I. er place sr ^ srff t

^'bo and W’bicb

3R w’ho TT Which « Noun sfif comma
clause Prioeipal, Adjective
Adverbial fftsTl r tret ?i tt «P
tWfqi
Who
iTC fr^TT ^ I

«TtT which i sTti clause

cODtinuative sense wfT anrr hfocs
f I mj ? who qr which t Pnd

^5^, S%_ efw

sre? 5fl
^
r> stpi snO t;
clauses sTrqifT (fact)

He killed all the prisoners, *hich irorfl crve/ffct.

I saw my brother, ivAo gaie me a book.

Clause
^^ ^ Co-ordinate 1
qiqqt w who ^ which t clauses Priflfip

«re who sf^T which t restrictive sense snftx f, Pit

*'
qrt clauses Adjective
^ wit I’ 1 Restrict wi «r? erar }
Adje«ive ci wnr 1 W7 r f« Adjective Prat Noun ^
quJli >
1

t. ft 5trei wq q7^^feqq-(Adj.)ewNoBa w>restrict*T^'''

wt students t tnfr fhaf^ ft®*) wi qlq rki intelligent «uden« «
w (t«)wi?)wpfiiti wft wi fufqq ct H« Adject'"
i, <rT

^
Noun qft w'^ tizvjl ft a), «rfe who qr which t Noun («
^
I) ^ *r? wiq fft 77 Restrictive Sense flct sV
^ •

kM^it clauses Adjective Clauses wt—

The men— bho/r<une herefare good. (Adjective Clause) .

Men t tnfr witIv cItt ?, who came bfrc(*

 ANAU-SIS 327

*rR7ft t) (^0 i« I
*'*

restrictive icnse i> 5VI } (

ets: «Tt Adjective Clause gsi 1

Who eitt which It Adverbial Qause »ft 5?: left *tT C*

»T& clause 5; Principal Clause if f«Jt «t^ cw «t cause ei purpose rt^m
vmitV.Sii—
Ravan, who was found guiUy, was killed,

sref Principal Clause i| itt fqi^ «i) vi? } attet attni who ^
clause is (Vet eei } 1
irtT^ ifK Adserbiat Clause r^«i 1

at, SIS who et which q?? Noun siV comma ci^tf tl «

tn ft
nivnat It continuative sense and restriclive sense cause and
purpose «i tr^^i wthf? 1 «irt^ «W « lU w fR^rt <5t f—
ST? Principal Clause 3 ‘wh^’ mwir sr^t t efe n n^ntT-
w host which Tijl clause if ftra aintft ei Adverbial flm 1
ef?
s'O ftil til w^ ft: who i err^ *1 Noun J ?«& *tft »
=?r5 <t vtT TN i^itt } sftr who aiit clause if ftniit aifa ei nf ^
ftTIucrtTeti, «Rlt ft;:^* ftefa ni «»!) «i iVe iW > i of?
ft f?et Cl fw ft n> »r Principal ftm, at «f^ er^ ft «fV4. ?i<wt ct r
\9\ ItTu w, RT »c Adjective Clause frn i vTtTt^—
Ravan, mAo *>as found guilty, was killed.
Cff Prineipal Clause I why anm ur stu erfl ^-
Why was Ravan killed ?

vwt fim }— He (who) was found guilty.

flsnS s'iRVB CTtr t. «)?« Priocipai Clause *t vT r«7i "W %
vw cause >ntf sttrstm HT J 1 wftK who & 5?: ftlpnsrt clause Adver-
bial (SIT I

StmveiTC^^
I saw my father, who gate tnt a hook.

Principal Clause if why kuwc u? srsr ^—

Why did I see my father ?
sue faa-sT i~Hc (who) gave me a book.
vTn sff. ufff« ucT Principal Clause if at ft:?i
’ni t cause anti srft asHWi rrai } 1 S, tetrv w uri fit ftfri «
^ jsi 1 f%r qf «Trn ft iit rwtn 7 swftrg 55 Adverbial rrft gsn 1

^ rtf Adjective ) vn <nrf 1 «fci nay father It ft «rfe

^
tive
ftfii I jftr who gave me a book ft *ft ^ ft ^1 1 Adjec-
sfr
ft 55 Adjective r^cn, fit who ^ sr^ii
Noun gftr who fcrt-pFW wrt «t ftu ftni
5Tlt clause jttt If ft? srft;
lr 1

tt^ CT fHfrin,fi)5«t^? %at ema if

51 ^0 ft *11
Adjective fr witiT, <rc sift ua: *t? Principal Clause 5S1,
Adjective 51 Adverbial sift \
 B
llUVk TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH

(C) THIRD STAGE

JT »TO clauses ersH f,S 3: SIS, sm 9, fil ei | fi 03s
ffTH fitf f ^ efti f 7 ^ ^ ^
? «nL ITT HTTOTI
(

^ ^ I HJnr if fj^JTT
clauses

^^ ST^ JlTft I
HIIR I I rn «r RIRST^ «T ^ ,pn' ^^
9rpi if clauses ^ sftr ^ awr ?; ? ? Tnfsrii sentence ^ 5rmT»r
*1 ^ if s') 'll 1 ifTf *nr fell afiT ? jJT^ sffJRI f fe
7 f%<T^ JWR % ^ I

(iii)
Sentence
Complex i^rr (iv)
=^tt

Mixed.
^ |=-(i) Simple, (ii) Compourd,

(i) Simple sentence= I Principal Clause.

(ii) Compound scnlence=at least 2 Principal Clauses.
Complex sentence=Siniple sentence -t-Subordinate Clause.
(iii)

Mixed senteDce=Coropound sentence -t-Subordinate Clause.

(iv)

IF JTFR vr ^ ft> Simple sVr Compound sentence? Sub-

ordinate Clause sTff T^fii, qr ? sTFir sr J ft> simple ? ^
Principal Clause tr^f I iflT compound ? F^-fr-Tw Principal OaosM.

Complex sentence ? qa: fi Principal Clause ttit i a*n ft

rimple ?, qq complex iS wi-%*^ qT Subordinate Clause w Tpt

qf^ti
Mixed sentence n qn-ft-cF Principal Clause iftt qnr-^-qq q*r

Subordinate Clause •?! 0[Ft ^ i

EXERCISES WORKED OUT

1. If man had a skin thickly covered with hair or wool, as an
ape or sheep has, be could not have moved from one climate to
another with comfort, and so he is made naked, but not without the
power of improving his condition, wherever he may be.

(a) If man. .wool—Adv. Cl. . .

(b) As an ape has— Adv. Cl.

(c) Or as a sheep has—Adv. Cl.
(d) He could not comfort—Pr. Cl.
(e) And so naked— Co-ordinate to (d).

(f) But not without.... condition— Co-ord. to (e).

(g) Wherever be may be ^Adv. Cf. —

It is a mixed sentence.
discoye^ tha^
2. Sir Issac Newton, alter deep meditation,
eve/y
there was a law in nature calledattraction, by virtue of which
composed of draws towards
i

particle of matter that the world is

 ANALmS 32

<very other particle of matter wth a force which is proportional

to its mass and distance.
(a) Sir fssacNewton--.. discovered— Pr. Q.
(b) That there was attraction Noun Cl. —
(o) By virtue of which-, -fbtce— Adj. Cl.
(d) The....of— Adj.a.

(e) Which is distance Adj. Cl. —

It is a complex sentence.
3. A blind
man. carrying a lantern in his hand and a pitch:
on his shoulder, was walking alone one night, when he was met by
thoughtless young fellow who laughed at him and said, “O fool ! da
-and night must be alike to you; of what use can this lamp be t
you V‘
(a) A blind man one night—Pr. Cl.
(b) When he was fellow— Q)-ocd. to Pr. Cl. (a)
—‘when’
used here in contiauative sensi
(c) Who laughed at him— Adj. Cl.
(d) And (who) said— Adj. Q.
(e) O fool !

CO Of what use.
—
you— Noun Q.
.you ?— Noun
. Cl.
It is a mixed sentence.
4. They expected that the king would either treat the matter a
a pleasant jest or threaten the insolent darwesb with puaishmen!
but to their surprise, be was neither amused nor angry, but serious]
attentive to the words of the darwesh.
(a) They expected— Pr. Cl.
That the king matter— Noun Cl.
(c) As (he would treat)
(d) Or —
punishment— Noun Cl
—
jest— Adv. Cl.

(e) But to their sorpise - . .angry — Co.ord. to Pr. Cl. (a)

(f) But darwesh— Co-ord. to (e).
It is a mixed sentence.

i. After his schooling was finished, his father, desiring him t

be a merchant like bimself, gave town a ship freighted with variou
sorts of merchandise, so that be might go and trade about tbe worl
And grow rich, and become a help to his parents, who were no:
advanced in age.
(a) After his schoolingwas finished— Adv. Cl.
(h) His father snerchandise— Pr. Cl.
(c) So that he might go—Adv. Cl.
(d) And trade. . . .world—Adv. Cl.
 ,

(c)And grow rich—Adv. Q,

(f) And become

(g) Who were

parents— Adv. Ci.
age— Adv. a. (Showing
— cause)
It is a complex sentence.
Clause No. (g) may be regarded also as an Adj. Cl
qualifying ‘parents’ in(f).]
6. Sometimes you may trace a river to a definite
spring, but
you very soon assure yourself that such springs are fed by rain which
has pel colated through the rocks or soil, and which through some
orifice that it has found or formed comes to the light of day.
(a) Sometimes you. .spring— Pr. CI. . .

(b) But you yourself— Co-ofd. to Pr. G. (a).

(c) That .... rain Noun Cl. —
(d) Vf’hich has. . . .soil— Adj. Cl.
(c) And which day — Adj. Cl.
(f) That it has found— Adj. Cl.

(g) Or formed—Adj. Cl.

a mixed sentence.
It is

7. The rootlets at the ends of these fibres strike into the ground,

and when they have become well fixed in the earth, the sap which
previously was fiowiag downward changes its direction and flows
upwards.
(a)
(b)
The rootlets
And when. .
—
.
ground— Pr.
.earib —Adv. Cl.
Cl.

(c) The sap changes its direction— Co-ord. to Pr. Cl. (a).
(dl And flows upwards— Co-ord. to (a).
(e) Which downward Adj. Cl. —
It is a mixed sentence.
S. Even as the driver cheeks a restive steed, so do thou, if thou
thee
art wise, restrain thy passloo, which, if it runs wild, will hurry
away.
(a) Even as the driver steed — Adv.CI.
(b) If thou art wise — Adv. Cl.
(c) So do thou restrain thy passion— Pr. CI.

(d) Which. . . . will hurry—Co-ord. to (c).

(e) If It runs wild — Adv.CI.

a mixed sentence.
It is .

great a hurt
woui
9. With some men at that time of life so
have been difficult to cure or might even have occasioned .
condition, wasc
with Carnaro, whose body was in the soundest
it

in a very short time.

 (a) With some men cure—Pr. Cl.
(b) Or might . .death—Coord, to (a).
. .

(c) —
But with.. ..time Co-ord. to (a).
(d) Whose body condition —Adv. Cl. (Showing cause).
[Abre— Clause No.(d) may be treated as an Adj. Cl. as well]
It is a mixed sentence.
10. When the Piper claimed his pay. the Major declared that
the promise which he bad made before the town was cleared ol
ratswas only a joke, as the Piper very well knew.
(a) The Mayor declared Pr.CI.—
(b) When the Piper claimed his pay— Adv. Cl.
(c) That the promise was only a joke N. Cl. —
(d) Which he had made —
Adj. Cl.
(e) Before the town . . .rats—Adv. Cl.

(0 As the Piper well knew— Adv. Cl.

It is a complex sentence.

11. However, upon my way, I met a poor woman all in tears,

who told me that her husband had been arrested for a debt he was
not able to pay, and that his eight children must now starve; bereaved
«* they were of his industry.
(a) I met. ..tears— Pr. Cl.
<W) Who told me— Co*otd. to Pr. Cl. (a). Here 'who* means
'and he’.
(c) That her husband. debt—N O.
-

(d) (Which) he.. ..pay- Adj. Cl

(e) That his —
starve—N. Cl.
(0 Bereaved .. .industry— Adv. O.
It is a mixed sentence.

12. I do not know what others may think of what I have done,
but to myself I appear like a child who is picking up pebbles on the
shore whilst the great ocean of truth lies unexplored before me.
(a) I do not know— Pr. Cl.
(b) What others may think of— N. Ci-
te) What 1 have done— N. Cl.
(d) I appear child— Pr.CI. Co.ord. to (a)
(e) Who is .... shore— Adj. O.

(0 Whilst....me—Adv.CI.
It is a mixed sentence.
13. 1 was with all that happened to me, I rose
Half-stunned as
lo my thinking, as I did, of what had befallen the joung men,
feet,
and watching the horse which was soaring into the clouds.
 »
WKIIi: CORRECT ENGLrsn

(a) Half-Stunned all—Adv. Cl.

(b) That happend to me— Adj. Cl.
(c) I rose to my feet—Pr. Cl.
(d) As I did so —Adv. Cl.
(e) What had. .men— N. . . Cl.
(0 Which. .clouds Adj, Cl.
. . —
It is a complex sentence.

14. Tho fox, who had been very much alarmed, now jod|ec
that there was no reason for fear, and demanded of the ass how he
had dared to put on a skin which but a little while ago had belonged
to an animal so noble that he was regarded as the King of the
Forest.
(a) The fox now judged— Pr. Cl.
(b) Who had been alarmed— Adv. Cl. (Showing cauje)
(c) Th.at there was. ..fear N. Cl. —
(The fox) demanded of the ass— Co-ord. to Pr. Cl.
(d)
(e)
(f)
How he had
Which. .noble— Adj. Cl.
. .
—
sklo— N. Cl.

That he was regarded— Adv. Cl.

(k) As the King of the Forest (was regarded)— Adv. Cl.
It Is a mixed sentence.

EXERCISE
Analyse the following senlenees —
1. When Iwas a cbiM. IspokeasaeUtd, I uaderiwod u a child.
thought as a child,' but when I became a man, I put away childish things.
order
2 I once put a wasp into the ocsi. but when the spider came out in
with, iC
to seize it as usual, upon perceiving what kind of enemy it bad to deal
lay in
instantly broke all the bonds that held it fast, and contributed all that
power to disengage ao formidable an antagonisL
3. The charts of the world which have been drawn up by
modem science
have thrown into a narrow apace ibscapreasion of a vast amount of knowleo^.
o
but I have never )et seen any one pictorial enough to enable the spectatM
nortoe
imagine the kind of contrast in physical character which erisU between
and southern countries.
wiU be able to
4. When such a man perceives that if he fails, evetyone
understand the risk that has been Incurred, but that if he succeeds
no om
nevertheless
estimate the danger that has been silently overcome, he bows
supreme dictates of bis judgment.
5. The lowest mechanic, bowever,laoks upon it U
his duty to be •
that m g®
ful guardian of bis country'* freedom, and often uses a language
ancesiiy
baughtyeveninthemouthorihsfieal emperor who traces his
moon.
 6. The bniie took ind dunk and cviileni'y enjoyed the nine which wsi
<ncw lahim and tardled aeaintt the (lismand eniteatei foe more and prayed to
UIjuci In tell him his name that be mifhi betlow a gifi upon the man vbo had
(hm him luch brave liquor-
7, My friend's talk made so odd an imprettion upon my mind, that soon
after t was abed, 1 felt iniensiUy idIo a most unaccounia'de reverie Ibai had
reiihet roral nor des'cn In it and cannot be to prorntiy called a dream as a

detirlum.

?. V.'htn, contTary totbt wKVtd hopes he had formed, his btMhti proved
victorious, his envy knew no bounds, and he swore he would burn Ihechamber
where Orlando slept.
When the ship fell over and the mast became horizontal he crawled
9.
out to the mizzeniop and sal there till ihc spar pave away and plunged him beo
the waves whence he was dragped into one the boats^
you pul the end of an iron rod in the (ire and hold it there, you do
to. If
seenethini more than heat that end. for you heat the whole of it up to the end that
you hold in your hand.
U. ne
lovemcr of iheiown, who was prevent, cried out wnb a loud
voice and ordered Androctei to evplam how a savage beast could have so for*
gatien its innate disposiitorv,all of a sudden, that it became convened into a harm*
less animal which preferred rather to spare its victim than to devour him.

>2. The lovernor who was himself young sympaibised with tbeycuogman
but temisded him that Uwsi the duty of anoffieei to fight when hiscouoiry was
St war with laoiber.

U. Ido Qoiknow whenhewiUeome. The place where t reside is fw elf

from here. As the smoke rose, she became hidden from view I have read the
books which the teacher gave me when be left us.
14. 1 think you have made • mistake. All the bleuings we enjoy come
from God. If you cut more than a pound, you die.
(5. Alt that glitters is t>ot gdd. We do pot know what he has dont. When
the cat Is away, the mice will play. The poor man who had run from them uw
both bis enemirs fall
Id. When Che father came home, he found that, although he had been
*way for a long lime, the childreo who had been left alone, had behaved quite
weit.

17. I am taller than he As it was raining, I did not go to school. Students

ih^d listen attenlivelytowhattbeteacheesays. The man whom we met the «
railway station is roy frieed.
I agree to what he says. He laboured hard that
be might pass.
It. I hope you are well. Po you think it is correct 7 The house he lives
in 1$ lovely. The food he eats Is not pure. Everyday we spend without learning
'S 1 day lost
19. The poise was so high in the air that at first I thought it was thunder,
you know who rang the bell 7 Uneasy lies the head that wears a crown.
20. YotiiRustremcmbertbadnost men feel ifek when they cLnib verv ’
high.
21. Wheab«(eacbeditsbqrdevs,hecriedouc. "I am teady.” Since vm
*rethe roost beautiful
flowers, we should live only in the select gardens.
 334 now TO WRITE <»RRECT ENGLISH

22. When h« tleppsd oa the ground and looked around, he thaught the
earth trembled Where there is a win there i* a way. He that u down needs
fear DO fall.

23. "1 will not letyou in”, said the man who stood at the door. The
teacher who was my brother gave away the prizes.
24.asked him whether be was surelhat the boy was ianoceat Think a
I

little further of all those persons whom you cannot see who also wear cotton.

23. Everyone who knows you acknowledges, when be considers the case
calmly, that you have been wronged.
26. When we reached the gale, 2 told him I could go no farther as I was
expecting visitors and must return to receive them.
27, Tliis put Viola in mind of her own sorrow, and she longed to serve the
lady, but the captain said that that was impossible, for she would admit none.
23. The people of one country thought that they were better than others
who lived in Other countries and they fought with those others.
29. History says that Soaaies, when he was given the cup of hemlock,
continued to talk to the friends who were standing around him as he drank it.
30. There is nothing that shocks me so much as that which I bear very
often that a man does not know bow he can make bis life happy
31. He as «ell as I Is to blame. You riiould run as fast as possihlei No
sooner did he see the poliee than he ran away. He came and helped me. It looks
as if he had seen a ghost. Were he here, be would help me. Once yet dedde,
you will have no trouble. The higher you go, the cooler it is. This is the same
watehasmioe There is none but loves his country.
32. I have noticed it often aioong my own people that the strong
skilful

are often the genl’est to women and cbildien, and it is pretty ta s«

them
men
carryiog ttie little babies as if they were no heavier than Lttle birds.
 1

CMAPTCR XV

SYNTHESIS

Synihssis ^ S ski ist ij* ?Tf:

®RH 5 , ^ simple, compound, complex !ij mixed ^ ^rasii 1 sn

^
1

sS t Rr fiisr-r»r5f (methods) i sgti Titif ^ simple

compound, complex v mixed scnicoce «i 5^ f<ijT sufir 1

1. HOXV TO COMBINE SIMPLE SENTENCES INTO

A SINGLE SIMPLE SENTENCE
simple sentences tt clause tm
Clause
smt
tt?ii

fB simple sentence
f: ^ I
«:«

it Finite
Jf

Subordinate Ctiose afT tpit

"W

Veib T5m 1 1
r ttrw sm
lalsfo
sif Principa!

? wn-l
ijt t

simple sentences 3^ « simple scoterce larm nsr J. r? et

«> erni) i ft; w Finite Verb «j seVi jr i jfr sr?? eft ^frr ft; ftp;

ftfunl k mrpt ft—

ft'

(d) we
0/ Participle;
(P) use of Hominatsve Absolute;
(C) we of Soun or Phrase In Apposition', and
(D) use of Infinlihe.

s? rt t*r ^ «r S «ftT m f* Pti fttff ?«tt ijn-fti

simple sentences ^ aftrcT ^ simple sentence eitiei aim ft 1 <r7 ift

«Tsn tVt fir f«tr uxfut S fia ftfW «j cx «T;it ^rrt 1 stufra
rmfti 9i!n
Kt TRTt se>i ft, iTftftaiwft^ftew^>ft:5neR:t^iaftaini<isTT7.5f)3R
W<Rt«si7bi^ftr5itraeawlinV>rtf?reao^ft 1

(A) WHEN TO USE PARTICIPLE

aisit*i!n:i Participle % 51T1 simple sentence ^ a? irni ft, ar?—
Rule 1. toft simple sentence i Verbs common (uisiiki
!pr« «n common factor) *), lel^'wr *iif^ cT ua toft simple sen-
tences if «xi! *T «3itb *ftt

Role U. w simple sentences 3: Verbs ^ ftur3 tt git ft; xmt

pft ft; ?i? jsfi siH ttrf^ ft «-5aft & ftft 5t ft,
ft 5&—
He raised his gun. He took aim. He shot the tiger.

( 33S ')
 — — —— 1

336 now TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH

rr rftsff ^ «ni! He He Verbs common Sub-

ject t— He (raised+look+shot).
Caatfon— RTWs rr fftsff Verbs & g?
Tfn >^1 f ^ fi5t *1^ fvjc ?Z7% r\,
I

tk Pwri eiqit cr
sftT if I th cn:^ « gK 55ti ngi 1
R tftqf simple sentences Participle % eth ^rftq i

How to ese Participle

Participle k mt gmf ^ «r iirgir g? t—

Rule III. 5Tr cpf (Verb) qrs) jitT stm Participle if tt? 5 sftr sff

gi arr?T if rt, Finite q^e; 5&—

He raised the gun. He took aim. He shot the tiger,
w fO^f qmf if ?fqO aft wwi qr^ ^ q sf f ; qrq
if sffr srsrt ^ qtgg if am: SH itTH si)??
1

Having raised tbe gun and taken aim, be shot the tiger.
sftr 5
He rfreH' bis sword. Hen/sbedat theman.
B Haring drawn bis sword, he rushed at the man.
Turn to the left. You wiH then see the post-office.

ssTVrn/ng to the left, you H-/// see tbe post-office.

They were too late for the train. They tried to hire a taal.
They hoped to see the princess.
™ Bewg too late for tbe train, they tried to hire a taxi, hoping to

see the princess.

He worked bard. He felt tired.
=» Having worAre<f bard, he fell tired.

I spoke to tbe teacher. 1 sal at the table. I held the book m

my hand. .

= 5eflr«f at the table and holding the book in my hau ,

spoke to the teacher.

(B) WHEN TO USE NOMINATIVE ABSOLUTE

Nominative Absolute <Et qbiT sw
Rule I. amf
srtt . % V
Role n. qq aifgf i Verbs t ^ «n^ "rTn t ^ ’^'^1
at? ^ «reK causal relation (^rta WK an* qu «

Er*q?q) f ; 5%
The jt« rose. The/og disappeared,
qq! qRf qraa sun f rffq ^ ^ fog* pf ^ ^
i) Verbs (rose and disappeared) «w faqif w ,,i,i:on
 —^
>nqil ^ ft ^ 3^ % ftl5t fefw ct 3lRt I

W R«K
The sun having risen, ibe fogdtiippeared.
VJ 9my ^ <r 1^—
The agreement wai signed. Mi were satisfied.
=The Agreement 6eing s^nrcf, all v/eic satisfied,
ai^'l Nominative Absolute i snt siV^t mi ^
sran-sF5i»i ^ fssr antil ist

I w'lt ?trtl «i
^
gt I, -ajft
utnsj
«it»!-^ sn
^ 1
|,

Htm to use Nomioative Absolute

Nominative Absolute aa (notninative) ^ ai?? i

faa> (absolute) *Ti! aft "BT aifa sR Verb <r si?

TOi I ^ amf if 's$tn' <ntK 'agreement' Nominative Absolute ( 3?

ataaf % nominatives swtt; Tog’ vlt ‘all’ ? j

Nominative Absolute i ira)*i ^ Nfir up |—

Buie in. ^ IK17 ^ (sft «rB* »;^) Bsi aer! «t Participle
% 5 eflT «t it «Rn «i m d) Nominative
»UT fi^uf if^mpt ftuiupf 1 1 Tp^ ql m anat jui rlr
?rp fpitri »rr M>:t pbti i ptift? qpS ai»u ^ rtr? (sun) Participle
(having risen) ^ pp^ ttsi mr
A
sun et Nominative Absolute
Nominative msfi npi
m
fpuT niTT «fVp fim ^ am! (fog) pu »ptn*ft i

The leader was slain. The rioters were seized with panic.
The leader AaW/ig h^e/» s/u/n (or Mng s/afn), the rioters were
seized with panic.
The steamer was delayed by a storm. We left by train.
“The steamer haring been (or being) delayed by a storm, we
left by train,
Your son has been
ill during the greater part of this term. His
studies have fallen into arrears. I am uuable to give him promotion.
«Your son having been ill term, and his studies Auri/i'
fallen into arrears, I am unable to give him promotion.
The town was well stocked with provisions. The guns were
Well stocked with ammonitions. The enemies were forced to raise
the siege.
“The town being rreil stocked with provisions and the guns
with ammunitions, the enemies were siege.
/ The siege The enemy withdrew. The city opened its
was over.
gates. By
means its trade and prosperity rapidly revived.
this
“The enemy having vUhdrawH and the eily
siege being over, the
having opened its gates, trade and prosperity rapidly revived.
>t w. c. E.-22
 • ^ to roRRrcT rvotmi

The will nnw »c an<l I h.iv- come to tem%.

pfo*per.
~ nnd I /Mpz-f eofe to term*, th; btnineitwill now prowr.
The fog nat (‘enjc. No one cnulj 8!e hit way' throueh Ih-
strecu *

"The fop Mfif ifrntr, no ontfcotifd. . .jtrecti.

(C) W Mf:N TO fSE NOUN OH PHRASE IN APPOSITION

Rnlfl. Appojition«i ^ »» tWT 9 i*r^»r*ffT
(«i:T fft linf «t!i Verbi or Adjectivei) f<«»rrpV ensTt ski ttriV ?
sn^fr i; 3 »i
Byron h.id wme of the great (]ua!tftcation8 of a great poet. Hs
posset icd great eomnumil of He was a keen obsener of nature.
He bad an accurate tnonteJge of men and nature.
^fl tfft «f»!l Byron art atfenjsrf iff J wVr sf?7ffr?

«r»if if (7? KX ««ff it •tTBij oft »rtrr J. nnh «r »^i nn f f€ ) 5^

smt sipren, effh*f<rthni aft |tf« sftr oi?? nsr f

tnfin eirtf «> Apposition feftfi ^t arrti^ifirt, 5 &—

Byron had some of the qualifications of a great poet, ogrear
command of language, a keen obsenation of nature and an accurate
knowfedge of men and nature.
rt fT?«f ^ <1 ^-
Siraj'Ud*dauIah perpetrated luiay atrocities. He oppressed the
British merchants. He oppressed his own people no less.He was de-
feated at the battle ofPlasscy.

«ry! esn if « «Tt< crI (aw'f) irt ji

«<t: t?f w J! 5Kw>TT net ^—

Siraj-ud-daulab, the perpetrator of many atrocities, oppressor
e
of the British merchants and of his own people, was defeated at
battle ofPlassey.

How to ose Noun or Phrase fn Apposition

Rule If. Apposition an 'side by side

rkrt
noun m phrase ei> noun i
^
^
(comma) 3 lit 5
^ *

rff noun ?ri phrase Apposition 9

>
?.
9 ^ ^ comma
(dash) ^ rtjT strat 1 1 'tFri *i

jat arar^dash ^ sn^n noun ^Apposition if rmnn 1

sfhr 5f — , . „ „ u.
Progress . H
Unit once
John Bunyan wrote “The Pilgnms
 340 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH

He must confess his fault. He will be fined otherwise.

— He must confess his fault to escape fine.
The child grew worse everyday. The parents were then
grieved.

=Thc parents were grieved to see the child grow w

everyday.
The General has jast come. The inspretion of the rolantet
his object.

= The General has just come to inspect the volunteers.

That man cheated all his creditors. He must have been ir.
=That man was mad enough to cheat all his creditors.
The head guides the rest of the body. It was made for t
purpose.
=The head was made to guide the rest of the body.
My father was very much delighted. He had heard of r
brother’s success.

My father was very much delighted to hear of my brotbei

success.
He wants to pass bis examination. He works hard for tha
He works hard to pass his examination.

How to use Infialtim

Role II. InfiuitivesTi wrtrRlt wrtVerbitl'

to srm «r ersprf sA «rtTe i

II. HOW TO CO.MBINE SIMPLE SENTENCES I.NTO

A COMPOUND SENTENCE
srr WRt ? fc compound sentence a Tt Principal CJsu^
rT% J siVr 5*^1 Subordinate Clause rrns i cm S r
simple sentences ^
ew compound sentence CT ¥7 f'Ti** l

curler
I f*
Principal Clauses
^
compound sentence ftvt cv-h-rt

Subordinate Clause ci^it

^^
rrrnrr*''
ift srrt I tRE CT J f« ct CR Co-ordinating Conjunctions
R^i^^rSubordraaling Conjunctions *:"t»»Tx art MEct
% ft r j
wTTsrTJtT^fciCo-ordinaiing Conjunctions ?— and. both

also, too, as well as, not only but also. either--yf|^’^'’*'

for r'*^t
nor, otherwise, or,bot, yet, however, so, thf^fore,
Conjunctions s rn »wit W s!ttt 'tut
rt'-tR
 —
SYNTHeSlS 34

1 ft facts statements i ftit’

(contrast) I, ff) Nt, yet airf? «t JtTk a^T—

He is poor. He is happy.
sfTT I" ft po«rty sfrr happiness ?t mr ar® ^ 1 A 1 wf
xH but sn yet i tto
He is poor but happy.
^^ compound sentence amTi «TTHt '^frt

?l He is poor, yet he is happy.

pfr
(inference)
7ft
ft^Hl 7f7 7t 7*7177 if
^
7177 fiw ftjfit 7^ 3i tt
(cause) 7?i?n7i '777
am? if sgat
f?iT
7m ^
C5TT ?ftrm (consequence), e# so 7T therefore i nrr I&—
He look bribe. He was dismissed.
»He took bribe, therefore he was dismissed.
7177 f73 fWtif 7Jtl-ffl Wttrff i 7ft 7* 7HS7 7T ^
7f7
^TPf Ttiff 7T7, tft either
7rtf77; lir—
or tt neither
TTTtn
nor tt mfft 7>Tr —
Do not do this. Do not do that.
« Ktithtr do this nor (do) that.
Take all. Take nothing.
» Either take all or take nothing.
^ 7T77 n ft7K> 77^ ft 71^ ^ ft TTW If Statement (tts
fft ttI and. as well as, both and 7i not only but als

He cried. He wept.
sHe cried arut «ept.
71 He not on// cried but also wept.
7t He both cried and wept.
71 He cried as treli as wept.

EXERCISES tVORKED OUT

Combine the/ollowins sentences into a compound scntenee~
1. Two cats had stolen some cheese. They could not decitl
haw to divide itequally between them. They decided on asking
monkey to stllie the dispute for them. They went to the monkey i

•:e for that purpose.

w Two having stolen some cheese, and not being able t
cats,
decide how to divide it eqaally between them, decided on asking
monkey to settle the dispute for (hem, and went to the monkey j
oace for that purpose.
2. The monkey agreed to hear and decide the case. He calk
the two cats before him. He held out a pair of scales.
He put or
^ece of cheese in one scale and one In another.
 342 HOW TOWMTc coRKrcr rvGLKit

«The monkey and dtcidc Jhe case, and har

ftgrew! lotieif
called the two cats before him, he held out a pair of
scaJej. c
piece of cheese being put in one scaJe, and the other in the other.
3. In all labour there is profit. Mere talking tends only
failure.

»In all labour there 1$ profit, but mere talking lends only
failure.

4. A certain
rumour was current. He was said to have b®
taken seriously ill. He was rjuilewell. He wrote to me that re;
day. He informed me by Idler of his intention to ertend h
business.
“According to a current rumour, he was taken seriousiyi]
but in point of fact he was quite well, and by a letter written tlu
very day he informed me of his intention to extend his business.
5. In private life he was amiable. In private life he was ere
fond of amusement. In public life he was severe. In public life h
was a rigorous dispenser of justice.
“ In private life be was amiable and even fond of amssestsat
but in public life hewassevere.and arigorossdtspeaserofjasdse
6. It was now stx o’clock la the evening. It was too late ta
start on our journey. We postponed starting tQ] tbs foUowiag
moraing.
« At six o’clock In the evening it was too late to start on eer
journey; so we postponed starting till the foliowing morning.
7. The people of this place are thrifty. They arc industriou^
Their cottages were neat. Their
I noticed the fertility of Ibeir fields.
persons were clean.
aad
=The people of this place are thrifty and industrious;
cottages-
I noticed the fertility of tbeir fields, the neatness of their
and the cleanliness of their persons.
have no knowledge of the person referred to. l am
unable
8. I

to say any good of him. I am unable to say any evil of him.

=I have no knowledge of the person referred to, and am there-

fore unable to say anything about him, good or evil.

the horiioa-
9. The storm had now passed. The sun rose above
wrble
Every drop of dew sparkled like a diamond. The birds
their morning hymns. Ihc streams were dancing down the rocker
bells. Ttiv
through the glens. The Jtttlc brooks tinkled like silver
trees, fanned by the momtog biee«, waved the
ends of ihrir bu^
chirping to-
branches in the blue sky. The birds hopped about
 344 HOW TO WRtTE CORRECT CNOLISH

= Thc courtiers pressed forward to taste this precious water,

the Khalif forbade them to taste even a drop ; for the water i
turned sour on the way, and the Khalif did not desire to give offe;
to the simpie-minded, but loyal peasant.
15. You have finished the job before the time. You have dc
itin good style. This is more than I expected from you. You ha
never before shown so mucli quickness and energy. I have seen
great deal of you for many years past.
==You have finished (he job before the time, and have done
in good style; well, I did not expect this much of you; for you ha
never before shown such quickness and energy, and I can say it
with confidence, having seen a great deal of you for many years pa;
16. The barons were not content with having thus far humbli

the king. They selected twelve of their number. The duty of the
twelve was to act as a standing council. Good government was tl
object to be gained. These men did not consult the interests of tl

country. They usurped the toj'al power. They gave their chief cat
to the aggrandisement of their own families.
-The bacons, not being content with having thus fat humble
the king, selected twelve of their number to act as a standing count
of good government, but these twelve men, farfror
in (he interests
consulting the interests of the country, usurped the royal power, am
gave their chief care to the aggrandisement of their own families.

III. HOW TO CO.MBINE SIMPLE SENTENCES INTO

A COMPLEX SENTENCE
•fix srptir ? ft complex sentence Jf cV Principal Clause
Subordinate Clause 1 tTfl it wfsn
J eftr «t

simple sentences «> vlger 3=? Rir complex sentence P>rr s'sw
ei
vw rt Principal Clause iS wV sr^v ftvfl cl Subordinate Clause

Subordinate Clause iibr rw < (0 Noun Clause, (2) Ad-

Subordinate
ective Clause sir (3) Adverb Cause, r ntRf Bvrt*
Clauses Rehtife Pronowr, RehtUe Athtrbi SubonliMU Conjune- m
tions % vrm rts that, who, which, what*
afihno*
order that, as. as if, as soon as, though,
.
siBce, so that, in
before, after, if. when, where, till, until s»Ttfs I f'*'
Conjunction ct cef ui cv tOT I »ri
irf'i

aause ei Adjective Clause rt Adverb C/iose vt vne ftT r

*
«'r complex senirnce CRiTf wr*r ?. vi-rsV i w" vt I'l
 —
SYNTt1£21$ 34

Hon (o «R« Adrecb Clause

Rnlcl. Jif? am'f i cause (fi^l

coodiJion (?in), contrast (1%^) 7i comparison (gspri) sr trwv fi

Adverb Clause i std ^ t a;r;< 7t ^ ^—

He succeeded. He laboured hard.
cHe succeeded berawae be laboured hard.
He has been very uoforlunate He is always cheerful.
=r/}ousfe he has been very unfortunate, he is always cheerful.
He 5s a clever boy. No other boy in the class is more clever,
e No other boy tn the class is cleverer than he ts.
You must sign your name. He will then agree to your terms.
“•He will agree to your terms, i/you sign your name.
Men may sow much or little. They will reap accordingly.
Men will reap according as they sow much or little.
You have treated me in a certain way. I will treat you in tin
same way.
»1 will treat you as you have treated me.
1 must have your receipt. 1 will then consent to pay the money
»l must have your receipt he/ore I consent to pay the money.
T*t TTfTt Adverb Clauses Is snt complex sentences Twr
•"A % I *t75 t % cause «t i yh because it sn
*V »nt i i a'tu contrast an ernn I aV
comparison «t i «m: 57^ eFRl «t though i: sni tfm^ eml «> that
^ rtr rffTf 'HtT ^ I Vt% ^
tRclf % condition eht gbit i i w
tf^ ETTf rftfruTT } cNfWtteJeuftilmannef eflsrratiTUif
I str^ I

according as ntn as % cm *lyi rm ? Ptat cl ei^f tf time wi eh 1

f «m: Tt? before «i aubi jwt J

I sir eieaf % sre st^ trtre
1

Subordinating Conjunction «i aul*i wr (jnrfj Adverb Clauses S

tTn)a:^ complex sentences % 77% % «w 1

How to use AdjectUe Clause

Role II. Adjective Clause % citi wt simple sentences re 77

implex sentence 77m snnr 1 75% em % f«tft ut »tg «t 77^
^
1

9 *177 3; gwT ft wntr «Kn ww, fit Adjective Clause 771% 3

^ who, which, that, when 01 where «i ctm I; Sh
I suffered OJwirty. Thenwrie/ywas extreme.
=»The anxiety ihat I aufleicd was extreme.
7?i XRU if anxiety % ftna awtr
nui li rrrfe^ Adjective Clause % estlnrcRt sfln mnJ i ns
 now TO WWTT rOUPirCT tVGttIf)

A houte itood at the foot of the hilf. We sfjwd th

for the nifht.

*rTf if houte »> jf ^ if 7»0 tt em >^i

(Wc ttj)ed there for the nifht) i rtfjrr ^ Adjective Clau« i r
tT rriT ^fr^r
Wc stayed for the night at a imall house jrWcA stood at ti
foot of the hill.

yu 5—
Me had received a good eJueatlot. This raised him above nan
men.
—The good education that he had received raised him abor
many men.
That is the Afutre. He was horn there.
- That is the haoie nhere he was bom.
This is the boot. I wanted to buy /r.
»This is the book rAur I wanted to buy.
Daniel came alive out of the <fc/!. In rAor </rr lions were kept-
« Daniel came alive out of the den in which lions were kept-
I went down a /oor^rA. At the end of the /oor/wrA there was
a chasm. The depth of the chasm was about twenty feet. The dtai
body of a man was lying (here. A faithful deg was still seated by
its side.

<1 went down a footpath, at the end of wA/cA there was a

chasm about twenty feel deep, with the dead body of a man Ijioj
there, and a faithful dog still seated by its side.
ptote Who, which, that sretf; i cm wt Adjective Clause ww
—
5>T<n ?iT rrsT «re ffvO S i *w‘ & wriw p ^
tit— ‘sV, ‘fsm’ snr? wrwtO i
I Analysis i ^ ^ t

How to use Noon Clause

Rule III. Noun Qause simple sentences it

fee*
afrfce complex sentence wnT 1 1 srfrTit twt ? ’tr

JTi statement (affirm or deny)

Noun Clause *
Noun Clause ^ cm sfrft wiTJ 1
grv rtw tie r that, who, which, what, when yi
1

where cr ^^
a&—
Perhaps belter luck is in store for us. We hope so.
= We hope that better luck may be in store for us.

wwp 3 t s?fT 5?^ ^

Tc ?7is (statemeBt) sfjt »r5^
complex '
fen 1 1 VHf^ Noon Clause % giu
awni nm 1 1 vw ai?ir 3— He was innocent. That nas the v
 SYrmists

of the Judge, ^r?! 'ft statement ff »w

ntfa'!, Noun Clause w raR 3!)^ —
The verdict of the judge was that he was innocent.

He is honest. I do not doubt it.

=I do not doubt that he is honest.
He will come today. I am sure of it.
= I am sure that he will come today.
You have acted wrongly- I believe so.
=I believe that you have acted wrongly.
A lazy man injures no one but himself. This is not true.
It is not true that a lazy man injures no one but himself.
Someone has been making a great noise. I should like to knc
the person.
= I should like to know who has been making a great noise.
The messenger told us something about that matter. I beard
=1 beard iv/inr the messenger told us about that matter.
Your hopes about your son's future utay or may not be fulftlle
Time alone will show.
*> Time alone will show n-/trMrr your hopes about your son
future will be fulfilled or not.
Note (a)— Who. which, that ^ Ctrr Noun Clause TSTt

It aw 3 &-
‘an’ TTatfY i

Note (b)— If m whether ksRt 'ft Noun Clause atw % 3

*5 ‘pB sffl' flat 1: 3tt—

I do not know if (ivhether) he Is ill.

'til If (whether) he is ill w Noun Clause ^ 1

Note—(a) «ftc (b) S: wffu if fntr smnrrft ik f^ vi^ Analysis

*'3rR ^ tran if I

IV. HOW TO CO.MBINE SIMPLE SENTENCES INTO

A MIXED SENTENCE
Mixed sentence 5 ft Principal Clauses iftr «iT-i
^ Subordinate Oause. smr rw fhTiT tm rr? to
Simple sentence—One Principal Clause.
Compound sentence—At least two Principal Claiisei.
Comple.x sentence—Sunple+Subordinate Clause.
hUxed sentence— Contpound+Subordinaie Clause.
 348 HOW TO WRnE CORRECT ENGLISH

ffV ^ f simple senteaces vx mixed sentence

% fIfT sTTl^f^^ Prwf ^ tj^'V sf)" compound sk complex
sentences ^ *f ?si% ’IT I' i wrr Co-ordinating wtr Subordinating
Conjunctions % sin q? »ra WRpft S ^ fsttPEt Wt irt Tt

EXERCISES WORKED OUT

Combine the following simple sentences into a complex or
mixed sentence —
The murder was proved. The judge then ordered the nun
1.

to be executed. The mao had been four days under (rial.

=The murder having been proved, the judge ordered the man,
who had been four days under trial, to be executed.
2. The supply of pasture often runs short. The nomads of
Taftary then shift their abode. They search for new pasture else-
where.
esaWhen the supply of pasturetuos short, the nomads of Tartary
shift their abode in search of new pasture elsewhere.
3. We beard the sad news. We imraedialely started for Ihe
nOlicted house. There we found the mourners.
Oa beartog the sad news, we immediately started for the
ofnicted house, where we fourrd the mouintrs.
4. They spoke in defence of their absent friend. They could
not have spoken better.
tsThey could not have spoken better than they did in defence

of their absent friend.

5. He behaved prudently under the circumstances.
Few men
would have acted so prudently.
=Few persons would have acted so prudently as he did under
the circumstances.
from the field ®t
6. SIraj'Ud-daulah was defeated. He fled
miles. Hi*
battle. His horse could not carry him more than a few
borse was of the purest Arab blood.
= When Siraj-ud-daulah fled defeated from the field of battle,
carry
his horse, though it was of the purest Arab blood, could not
more than a few miles.
become greater and greater, lie ihows m
. His difficuliies

and more energy.

«The greater his the more energy he show*.
di/TiCiilties,
frM“
*. I will visit your bouse in June next. You hive
I will not disappoint you any
longer.
asked me to do so.
 SWTHtSK

nlwill your house in June next, as you have frcqucni

visit

asVed me to doj and I will not disappoint you any longer.

Richard I, King of England^ was seized with remorse. 1
9.
had rebelled against his faUier.The father at that time was an c
man. He was much attached to all his sons.
= Richard It King of England, was seized with remorse f

having rebelled against his father, who was at that time an old m;
and much attached to his sons.
10. Iam very sorry. He has lost all hope. He has given i

work. He worked hard last year. He has excellent abilities.

»1 am very sorry that he has lost all hope and given up wor
for he worked hard last year, and has excellent abilities.

11. t left him to his fate. He persisted io refusing help,

offeredhim help on all occasions. On such occasions he needed it
left him to bis fate, as be persisted in refusing the he

which I offered him whenever he needed it.

12. The ships were in the greatest danger. They had not bet
wfliciently warned. A violent storm was rising Yesterday the wir
vat calm.
The ships were in the greatest danger, as they had not bee
sufEcieniiy warned; for a violent storm was rising, though yesteida
the wiad was calm.
13. He is attacked unjustly. He is blamed for serious fault
He hasnot been guilty of such faults. He becomes for this reaso
very much vexed.

He becomes very much vexed at being unjustly attacked an

blamed for serious faults, of which he has not been guilty.
14. The prince cannot increase his forces. He must first ran
the money. He cannot pay his men without this. He cannot withot
this induce them to fight cheerfully for his cause.
Before he can increase his forces, the prince must first rais
mcptey, without which he cannot pay his men or induce them to fig!
cheeifuiiy foj cause.
15. You may perhaps succeed in your
still object. You mu!
persevere steadily. Success is impossible without this.
U
steadily;
you are to succeed in your object, you must persevei
for without
tUs success is impossible.
16. We expostulated with him. He would not yield. He kep
If bis own purpose. This purpose was certaiu to work muci
“ischief.
 •..>!> TO w*irr coRBrcr fvrjf nif

»;

sentence? ., .,
’ *'' «V
^
'
S'Jfcdraii
Conjunctions
njunclioni *
^ j ,..71! Ttimr!

r.VOJC/SK H ORKED OUT

timpi, mirnc, hi, a arpirx
,„i
f'llxeJ srnltnee—
I- The murder wj,p,o,ed.
Tlie judje ihen ordered Ih: rei
0 -executed. The mifi had been four djyi under trial.
f'^»in8 been proved, the jud« ordered tSeina:
k had
who
. k j k
^en four day, under trUf. to
be executed.
*“PPty of pasture ofien runs short. Tfieoooadjo
T. .
a>»de. They search for new paitnre dre
where*^

.k-r.
*“PP*y of pasture runs short, the noraidsofTiraij
shin their alwde in search of new pasture elsewhere.
'Ve immediately started for IS*
,m- . j k
aniicted house. There we found the mourners.
"“ong th« sad news, we immediately started foftS*
..m- .
afflicted house,
where we found the moumen.
4. They spoke
in defence of their absent friend. Bey eodi
not have spoken better.
“They could not have spoken beticrthaatheydidiadef®”
ot their absent friend.
He behaved prudently under the circumstaace?.
5.
would have acted so prudently.
= Few persons would have
acted so prudently as he did
the circumstances.
6.
Siraj-ud-daulah was defeated.
He fled from the
battle. His horse could not cany
him more than a few oii«-
®
horse was of the
purest Arab blood.
=Whcn Siraj-ud-daulah fled defeated from thefieldofhsW--
his horse, though
it was of the purest could not
OW
Arab blood,
him more than a few
miles.
is difficulties become greater and greater. Hesho«®^'
arw more energy.
greater his diflicaltiesi the
more energy h* shows
6- I Will visit
your house in June next. You have fi^""
asked me to do so. I will not disappoint you any longer.
 visit yout house in June next, as you have frequent!
asked me to do; and I will not disappoint you any longer.

9. Richard I, King of England, was seized with remorse. H

had rebelled against his father. The father at (hat time was an ol
man. He was much attached to all his sons.
a Richard I, Kingof England, was seized with remorse fo
having rebelled against his father, who svas at that time an old mat
and much attached to his sons.
10. I am very sorry. He has lost all hope. He has given Uf
work. He worked hard last year. He has excellent abilities.
= 1 am very sorry that he has lost all hope and given up work;
for he worked hard last year, and has excellent abilities.

left him to his fate.

11. 1 He persisted in refusing help. I
offeredhim help on all occasions- On such occasions he needed it.
= I left him to his fate, as he persisted in refusing the help
which I offered him whenever he needed it.

12. The ships were in the greatest danger. They had not been
sufficiently warned. A violent storm was rising. Yesterday the wind
was calm.
The ships were to the greatest danger, as they had not been
sufBcienily warned; foe a violent storm was rising, though yesterday
the wind was calm.
13. He is attacked unjustly. He is blamed for serious faults.
He has not been guilty of such faults. He becomes for this reasoo
very much vexed.

He becomes very much vexed at being unjustly attacked and

blamed for serious faults, of which be has not been guilty.
14. prince cannot increase his forces. He must first raise
The
Uie He cannot pay his men without this. He cannot without
money.
this them to fight cheerfully for his cause.
induce
=Beroie he can increase bis forces, the prince must first raise
money, without which he cannot pay his men or induce them to fight
cheerfully for his cause.

15. You may stiU perhaps succeed in your object. You must
persevere steadily. Success is impossible without this.
=Ityouareto succeed in your object, you must persevere
steadily; for without this success impossible.
is
16. We expostulated with him. He would not yield. He kept
to his own purpose. This purpose was certain to work much
mischief.
 350 now TOWRriE CORRECT EVOUSIt

« Jfe would not yield to our ejpostulatlonj, but iept loh ;5 owr.
purpose which was certain to work much mischief.
17. He pution a gfavcf.ice. At heart he is a foolish fellow.
No one trusts him. lie has disappointed us a hundred limes already.
-Though he putson a grave face he isat heart a foolish
fellow, and no one trusts him; for he has disappointed us a hundred
times already.

18. I have devoted my life to teaching. To a man in my position

there is something esciiing in llnding himself in sight of an ancient
univenily. This is a fact.
= It is a fact that I have devoted my life to teaching, and that
to a man in my position there is something excitiog in finding himself
in sight of an ancient ttaivenUy.

19. The next two months were most pleasantly spent in this
lovely island. During that time we made m^ny friends amongst the
planters. We also enjoyed their hospitality. They are noted hr
being hospitable.
—The next two months were most pleasantly spent in this lovely
island; for during (hat time we made many friends among the ph'
nters, and enjoyed the hospitality for which they are noted.
20. Henceforth Axel’s progress in his studies was surprising. In
comparison with other twys he could devote little time to them.
Considering this fact bis progress was indeed surprising.

— HenceforthAxel’s progress in his studies was indeed sur-

prising, considering how lirtJc time fie couid devote to them in compa-
lision with other boys.

21. Mr. Merriman left the cottage. He crossed the river. He

returned almost immediately. He was accompanied by five Dyaks.
He had met them in the Chinese quarter. They had arrived there
with a boat-load of commodities collected from the jungle.
= Mr. Meffiraan left the cottage, and after crossing the river
he returned almost immediately, accompanied by the five Dyaks whom
he had met in the Chinese quarter, and who had arrived there with a
boat-load of commodities collected from the jungle.
22. Marsupials are a kind of animal. They have pouches for
world.
carrying their young. They were once scattered all over the
thus
Most of them have long since become extinct. The survivors are
r ere
ned to two quarters of the globe. One quarter is Australia,
linn e
find kangaroos, wombats, etc. The other quarter is a
 SYNI ISCSIS 35

porlioa of America Here we find only one small group. This grou
IS the opossums.
» Marsupials, a kind of animal that has pouches for carryin
its young, were once scattered all over the world; but as most c
them have long since become extinct, the survivors arc now confine
to two quarters of the globe, —
Australia, where we find kangaroo;
wombats, etc; and a limited portion of America, where we find Ih
small group called opossums.
23. In the opossums the pouch is very small. It is thus useles
as a leceptacle for the little ones. The mother carries them on he
back. The mother carries as many as a dozen. Their tails are lashei
round hers.
>ln the opossums the pouch is loo smalt to be of any use as .

receptacle for their Uulc ones; the mother therefore carries them o;
her back, sometimes a dozen at a time, with their tails lashed roun<
hers.

24. In former times there was a class of persons. They wer

called Icnlghts-errani. They were clad in coats of mail. They rod
about tiagly. One object was to fight with each other at toutaaraeati
The other object was to redress the wrongs of persons. These person
sought their assistance.
>ln former times there was a class of persons called knights
errant, who were clad in coats of mail and rode about singly with th
object either of fighting with each other at tournaments or of redress
ing the wrongs of those who sought their assistance.
25. In those times two strong and warlike knights came fron
opposite directions. They met at a certain place. In that place)
statue was erected.
» la those times two strong and warlike knights, coming fron
opposite directions, met at a certain place, where a statue wa
erected.
26. In the arm of the statue was a shield. One side of the shiek
was of iron. The other was of brass. The two knights approa
ched the statue from opposite quarters. Each saw only one sidt
of the shield.
»Iti the arm of the statue was a shield, one side of which wa;
of iron and the other of brass; but as the two knights approached the
statue from opposite quarters, each saw only his own side of the
shield.
27. They immediately fell into conversation in regard to the
statue before them. One declared that the shield was made of iron.
 352 now TO WRITE COBRrCT ENGtISM

The Other corrected hfm. It was made of brass according to

his assertion.
•They jmmediafeljr into covenation in regard to the statue
fell
before them, one declaring that the ihieid was made of iron,
while
the other, correcting him, asserted that it was made of
brass.
28. Two persons sometimes attempt to decide a dispute by fieht-
ing. One man may be right on the disputed question. The other my
be wrong. To settle such a question by fighting is sery absurd. Yoo
will think so.

• You absurd that two persons shouldaitempt

will think it very
to settle by (ighting who is right and who is wrong.
29. But persons may be ignorant. They may be proud. They
may be conceited. Among such people that mode of seitlemest has
been a common practice tn the history of mankind. A long and fori'
ous combat now ensued between the two knights. They fought ear-
nestly over this petty question. They would not have foug.’it mors
earnestly for their lives or honour.
• But among ignorant, proud, and conceited persons that mode
of settlement has been a common practice in the history of nankiad
so a long and furious combat between the two knights ensued, <ad;
(hey fought as earnestly over (his petty question as they would hare
fought for their lives or their honour.
30. They had fought for a long time. Both were at last exhaust-
ed. Both were unhorsed. Both lay bleeding on the groend. They
then found out something new. It surprised and vexed them greatly.
The sides of the shield were of dilfercat metals. They might have
saved themselves the trouble of quarrelling and wounding each other
for nothing. But they had not taken the trouble at first to look at
both sides of the shield.
= At last, after fighting for a long time, both were exhausted,
and lay unhorsed and bleeding on the ground; when they found,
and vexation, that the sides of the shield were
greatly to their surprise
the
of different metals, and that they might have saved thraselvcs
if they
trouble orquarrelling and woonding each other for nothing,
had taken the trouble at first to look at both sides of the shield.
 5 1 j

•ilOlpitfJPtJppif Oicii aqi icqj pics uc^

uicjj sqi„ ‘pi« lucH

ifiijc £ii J3sji5d jscj ‘ajiagapoi tscj u qaastlg paiJodsy (b)

—Ip 0SU3X JSCJ qj3A, lii

Ji q333dS p3iioda>] j;
«oaj. }»r£ qJ9^ Suiyods^ 4jb -f
n gnonoiiuoa jjsjjjj jscj
I

—snonniiuo^ )Ud»ijl\Ret39jJ9d jsej— psjjadinssarj

•JJ iMjiddmi jscd— I39jj3diui iirgsgjj

‘jj ajingapni jscj— 9jing9ptii jngsojj

4i2lt
g 9Sn9X ISPd 30IP00dS3JJ09
f ^ asudx ]cas3i<l dJojnj g»Bifj % stnumos pspsAoi
\
1 asusx isBj (pjcs> qi9A Soiijoda^ g jkiiiis: y»s m
Swoi u»f^ pm/ 91] >cq> pics 9(}
,^-gutoSU33q »\Dtj i„ 'piCSSH
•auoS pDtf 9q icqi pics an
,;iuoS 9im{ i„ ‘pics ajt
•SigoJ n>M sq icqi p{cs aH
„-SU!oS tUB I„ ‘pics 9H
oSpinoM 9q icqi Pies 9{{
^e>2 HIM I., ‘pics 8H
— ^ ‘I iei£ £i* i> asuax jscj 2uipaed

•S8Ji03 asu9X 9ininj ib tudsaij ik u» 9SU9X sJnjnj la )U9saj

i£ qsasds pajioday 9S99± SoiuodaH
^^ 7
1
1 im ctl
lui (o3 iieqs) asusx ainm-i

^ »swx ajnjnj
(o«) ssaax loass^d
i(/»
% qM«IS iiiysJ i^s
qi9A 3ai]iod9^ j;
tiku 1
^ ^ uoi)BJie/q l99iipo|
(jn9M) ssuax JSbj Up (oS |jcq$) asaax wnjnj i» ipasds pyods^
I
^ ii 9sa9X ]D3sa3(| .sKes, qj9A Soijjods^
•oS iimfstoS 9q jeqi
i;

iCes
kklk ^ii
men
^
n}«
,:o9 llo^s|l^2 1„ ‘-?BsnjMiDB^
-iuM,lo2 ii}A\ 9q jeq) sXcs luc^
,^'IU3mIoS iioi/s i„ •sXcsniBH
— gc *1 leik asnax qJa^ qosadj
paiJOdaH ^ ii ssuax ^-iRinj ik lOsssj j qi9A Suiyoda^ kjk (
3SN31 30 aOWIfD JI
1
ikii
:t>JE £kk g am ^ no.f
^ ^ sscq aAiiasfqQ 1

,no^, yu I life srq

^ Xm
sq ^
tjsS t^lils ib
j iiejai

1
1 ^ J9qmnM sscq aAlssassoj /ui, y&j 1^ gj9quin(q
JC{n3iris 1(1*

je^nSuTs iy» ssBQ eAi]ecitoo(q ,1 , isyt seuitooa psjWAOi lit

S5e NCHIWWN
 NARRATION

?I^r inverted commas % ‘1’ Nominative Case iftr Sing'

Number i{ ^ j ‘my’ Possessive Case Singular Number J

1 i he ^ sqVi 5^ I rftr my ^ his 50 » ‘5

ObjecUve Case i{ $ v sra: you ^ me ^ 1

II. CHANGE OF TENSE
1. at? Reporting Verb Present er Future Tense *f rt, tfr Repoi
Speech ^ Verb ^ Tense •aT-«i-pil‘ «cn t, 3&—
Ramsays, "I shill gojwent."
Ram says that he will go/wenf.
Ram will say, “I golshall go.’’
Ram will say that he goesjwill go.
<1??! ?IW if Reporting Verb ‘says’ Present Tense if 1 1 rs
Reported Speech «t Fotore Tense (shall go) t Past Tense
«?1 (m
Indirect Narration h !i?t 1 1 sw 5m S Reporting V
Future Tense if I wk wfire Reported Speech ^ Present Tense (go)
Future Tense (shall go) ^
rts f??i >I51 1
2. Reporting Verb Past Tense 3 rfsftr Reported Speed
Verb Present 5r Future Tense 3, «t Present tri Future Tense con m
ponding Past Tense if errai i,

He said, *T will go"

He said that he would go.
He said, “1 am going."
He said that he was going.
He aaid, ”1 have gone."
He said that be had gone.
He said, “I have been going.”
He said that he had been going.
W 5t Repotting Verb (said) Past Tense S i j eg
inverted commas % fwtsft Future «?tr Present Tense fspn^ ? ^
corresponding Past Tense if •tdt ?—
Present Indefinite— Past (ndefinite if.

Present Imperfect— Past Imperfect if.

Present Pctfecl— Past Perfect if iftr Present Perfect Continuouj

Past Perfect Continuous S t
3. 5^ Reporting Verb Past Tense rf nV Reported Speech If

•ft Verb Past Tense if, A—

(a) Reported Speech ci Past Indefintle, Past Perfect if t
».s»-
Ram said, “The train rwebei/ fare.”
Ram said (hat the train had reached late.
 NARRATION

inverted commas % ^1=1T

‘1* Nominative Case «?tT Sing^

Number? 'my* Possessive Case iftr Singular Number r

1 % he so r*c^‘3
Objective Case ? 1 1 are; yoa aS ate 3 ^?7 ^rg-j {

JI. CHANCE OF TENSE

1. uf? Reporting Verb Present at Future Tense ff A Rcpoi
Speech ^ Verb ^
Tease i, a^—
Rata says, “I skail go/wenr.”
Ram says that he will galwent.
Ram will say, “Igc/ifcaW go."
Ram will say that he goM/H-ffl go.
am ^ Reporting Verb ‘says' Present Tense ? ^ j r
R eported Speech wt Future Tense (shall go) s?rt Past Tense (»t
IndirectNarration S si?l 4 i rt) irett aw
<tTi 8 Reponiog V
Future Tense 8 i uV wfeR Reported Speech 8; Present Tense (go)
Future Tense (shall go) <V »u>UT*ts( tw fvn *^1 f i
2. eft Reporting Verb Past Tense 8 ^ eftt Reported Speed
Verb Present at Future Tettsc 8. «t eg Present uj Future Tense cori
ponding Past Tense 8 upit i. ah -
He said, “I w«/go-*’
He said that he wouftfgo.
lie said, "I am gotng."
He laM that he »<» going.
He said, *‘l farre gone."
He said that he had gone.
He said, "I have been going."
He said that he ftod 6<e« gaing.
rtt t?»ft 8 Reporting Verb (said) Past Tense 8 f j rs
invertedcommas i sitrn fv<R) Future eftr Present Tense fr?T^ J

correjpooding Past Tense 8 J—

Preienl Indefinite— Past Indefinite 8,
Present Imperfect— Past Imperfect 8,
Present Perfect— Past Perfect? AtPresent Perfect Contiauou!
P*M Continuous 8
Perfect
3- eft Reporting Verb Past Tense ? ft «>r Reported Speech
•fi Verb Past Tense 8, o)—
(i) Reported Speech Cl Past Indefinite, Part Perfect 8 trr »
^

Ram said, “The train froeAfi/iire.'’

Ram said that Ihetfim had rracfirit late.
 NARRATION

inverted commas ^*ft{R ‘I’ Nominative Case wVr Singi

Numberif |i *my’ Possessive Case Singular Number ^

I ^ be «7 vHn jsO f wV my %
fire bis *7 f fif} sn? 'y
Objective Case Jf f «ra: you
t me 3 ^ mn 1 1

U. CHANGE OF TENSE
1 . Reporting Verb Present ^ Future Tense i? tit Repot
Speech si: Verb ^r Tense tFtt %. SS—
Ram says, shal) gofwenl.”
Ram aays that he wiUga/went.
Ram will say, "Jgo/shaJl go."
Ram will say that he gMsjwiil go.
*rtr*r fnt ^ Reporting Verb ‘says' Present Tense r?? 1

Reported Speech «r Future Tense fshall goj sftr Past Tense (wc
Indirect Narration if
Future Tense if ^ s?tr
^
^ 1 v^tt qaiir ?fra^ if Reporting

Reported Speech ^ Present Tense (go)

V
Future Tense (shall go) ^
os ftm mti 1
»alf-«T*?^r 1

2. eft: Reporting Verb Past Tense 3 f) sih: Reported Speech

Verb Present er Future Tense if. til et Present ei Future Tense con
ponding Past Tense if eea Rim I,
He said, *T will go."
He said that be would go.
He said, “J am going"
He said that be was going.
He said, "I haft gone"
He said that be had gone-
He said, “I have been going."
He said that be had been going.
Ft tmt if Reporting Verb (said) Past Tense 3 J 1 rgj
inverted commas i «/hir Future ebr Present Tense «f( )
corresponding Past Tense if ew •nft i'—
Present Indefinite — Past Indefinite if.

Present Imperfect— Past Imperfect if,

Present Pcrfecl— Past PcrfectSwitPresent Perfect Continuous

Past Perfect Continuous if
1

3- eft Reporting Vcrt> Past Tense if tt Rlt Reported Speech

’t) Verb Past Tense if, nV
(a) Reported Speech ct Past Indefinite, Past Perfect if veg n

Ram said, ‘Thelraiti rwcAed/are.”

Ram said that the tram had reached laie.
 354 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH

GENERAL RULES

ra f
General rules ^ ftroT ^ ^ t irh 5: i hr ai

^ HtREi
I Inverted
^^
commas i hwe ftni nt hcte ci ^ ^
1 1
qTffr faqjff cl pi sfta >nn^ ^ ;h jtcte afe hc^ ^—
1. Change of Person
2. Change of Tense
3. Change of other Parts of Speech
I. CHANCE OF PERSON
Direct Narration c> Indirect 3f inverted commas % »^{
fsreH Persons (first, second aftr third) ipi ? i tg finpi ^ sigqii
^ '—1

SON, SR Son Formnla »ft c? ? I

TO S Cl 30? I Subject; O ci Object sftr N n None 9i No change.

TH^ HSHTC inverted commas % «ihiT aft First Person (I, tny, we, oar,
me. us) ktitI Reporting Verb ^Subject i Persons is nggriTTS »rn
I. 3^—
Ram told me, '*I shall do my work.”
Ram told me that he would do hts work,
cp Rcportiog Verb ‘told’ ci Subject ^ Ram a) Third Person 1 1

inverted commas i «ft?H *ft First Person (I sir my) } it Third

Person 5 fTH »Ri ^ nsrir I inverted commas ^ «frtTT Second
Person (you, your sif?) «> «t Reporting Verb I; Object ir sg^ir en
3fmT I, g%—
Ram told me, "You should do your work."
Ram told me that / should do my work.
^ Reporting Verb
inverted commas i
‘told’ w Object ^
whir w) Second Person (you
me si) First
sftr
Person S J
your) }
l

n
First Person 5 rrH mil ^ i srfir inverted commas % «rtnr Third Person
(he, she srifO tt. e?vfl'Cmr rrn I; th? rri rlrv^V wfl a&—
Ram told me, "He will do his work.”
Ram told me that he would do his work,
cfj inverted commas i wltir Third Person i i fwfin R? »'*
wfl 5®i I si) «in S sn froi «V sH TOi
First Person is changed into Sobject.
Second Person is changed into Object.
Third Person requires No rJuagf. *
—
Note Person « P
Number W)r Case »|) trir

inserted commas i whir rrit J. —

He told me, ”/ shall try my beat to help you.”
He told me that he would try his best to help me.
j

J
 — 1 1 1

KAXRATIOH 355

inverted commas 3; *ftin *1’ Nominative Case sftr Singular

Number S f^'my' Possessive Case Singular Number^li
TfffsK I ^ fir? he ?n Jtefbi jsn t my % feu his rri 5^ ‘you’
Objective Case S 1 1 sa: you ^ me if ar^ ftvi mti 1
IL CKANCe OF TENSE
1. Reporting Verb Present in Future Tense ?f rl, ?ft Repotted
Speech ^ Verb iri Tense I, »ft—
Ramsays, “I shall golwmi''
Ram says that he wiWgo/wenr.
Ram will say, ‘'lgii[shall go.'’
Ram will say that he gotsimll go.
??T ^ Reporting Verb ‘says’ Present Tense Jf 1 1 ?5fln?
Reported Speech Future Tense (shall go) 8^^^ Past Tense (went)
Indirect Narration Jf sref J 1 innt <fm Sf Reporting Verb
Future Tense ? I iftr Reported Speech % Present Tense (go) sftr

Future Tense (shall go) ^ esfl-cr-fuf Tt? l^ei «rai 1

2. eft Reporting Verb Past Tense 9 if) rftrReported Speech ati
Verb Present er Future Tense 9, nt Present ^ ut Future Tense corres*
ponding Past Tense if <*rai 5lr—
He said, “I will go.”
He said that he would go.
3.
He said, “1 am going.”
He said that he was going.
He said, “I have gone.”
He said that be had gone.
He said, “I have been going.”
He said that he had beat going.
W erf) 9 Reporting Verb (said) Past Tense ff 1
invertedcommas i »ftiTr fripft Future wV? Present Tense ^ I 9
corresponding Past Tense 9 >19) ?

Present Indefinite— Past Indefinite 9.

Present Imperfect— Past Imperfect 9,
Present Perfect— Past Perfect 9 dtPresent Perfect Continuous-
Past Perfect Continuous 9 1
u^Rcporting Verb Past Tense 9 ifrt Reported Speech
ift Verb Past Tense 9, ^—
(a) Reported Speech m Part Indefinite, Past Perfect 9 Tjg
»,3a-
Ram said, ‘‘The train readied fate.”
Ram said that Um tcunfawf «acfeed(at<^
 356 HOW TO Wf m cfw*rcT bh

(b> Repotted Speech mr t*jit rmpctfecl. Fust Perfect Confinuow

9 trw *rr»i }; 3»r—
Ram mM, "The boy tear ttaJin^."
Ram said that the boy haJhren resilinz-
(c) Reported Speech «i Past Perfect nV pjjt Perfect ContinooM
Tf irnt J i

Note— ey r«7nt»mH«»tfT Reporting Verb Past Tense 3

nl Reporting Speech «t Verb Past Tense S err sfrri pt ftn? rr
«rr7rT *ft i

yf? Sns'crted commas i «jr cpt ft habifnaJ er

univcnal truth m Repofting Verb « Past Tense S

Reported Speech 5; Verb «i Tense srtft Sir—
The teacher said, •'The earth is round."
The teacher s.s>d that Ih; earth Is round.
llesalJ, "Honesty //the best policy.”
He said that honesty is the best policy.
The preacher so/i/. "Man /•/e/’osrs and God dl.tposes.”
The preacher said that man proposes and God disposes.
T*i mrsfl if flf? rS fe inverted commas « ift*x w Proverbs (grnD

tr^ ? rrt vt universal truth curbs

ii sft Tense mfl 3&—
i *iH rrf^ ^
ftfft ^ ^
He remarled, "A bad carpenter quarrels with his tools."
He remarked that a bad carpenter quarrels with his tools.
I said, "Birds of a feather ^oc* together."

I said that birds of a feather JfoeA- together.

m. CHANCE OF OTHER PARTS OF SPEECH

i
Reporting Verb Past Tense 3 trin I, ar Reported Speech

commas ^
SIT

Verb TT Tense dt
sfttR)
^
Reported Speech ? (inverted
(eapressing nearness) Adjecti^
Adverbs dix Verbs yyt 3 5^-^ (e.xpressing distances)
That To-day f'/rto That day
This i/tla

These Those Tomorrow „ Next day

„
There Yesterday „ Previous day
Here „
Hiithcr Last night „ „ night
Hither >•

Then Come „ Go
Now „
So Ago „ Before
rhos „
Hence Thence
3 iry*ra«aFr|5rti)nff^jrfT Reported Speech
3 stPi *j3
•

Adjective et
— Adverb % nran ^ et
 NARRA1I0N 357

Ram said, "This is my pen.”

Ram said tliat this vas his pen.
srd this fe?: «w? that ^ 5rct nai,
Dm 'ft petufr if i, TOt (tw) i aw 4 1

Reported Speech if f«a> »ft s^jt 4in ^a ft, ft ataT general

rules n r^TT trpi 1^^ 4 I

SPECiAL RULES
« f?9ft crai 4 ^
special rules «rr iwx ^ ami’ ^ fg7
f^-fvsf 4 I
commas % jftar Assertive sentence
aft inverted nt
3: ftaa ^
nma^ar 4 «ft aft Imperative t4, at jnf a»:R ^
ftm ^ 1 sat inverted commas ^ Interrogative sentence at
^ fftat smt ^ ftmi srm^ 4 siVt Exclamatory 4: firt 5«n ^ i

•ft prft pre 4 f« special rules ftm CT Direct Indirect Sf ms?! 4:

T? srm tm? 5 f« inverted commas k S5?T fttFt «i tm 4 i

3 «t4 ora «fira^ *t^ wift to? 4: sm atps ?;? sftr

ftrt ftrm^ftn (punctuation marks) ^ 4ot? pr srwraft ft ?!K?raft4ftr

TO? ft;« trat? «T 4 i Interrogative sentence ft ara »rt ?t? tftn 4
dH ?i»? ^ sra if s???r?n (Note of Interrogation) smi 4: 4ft—
Are you HI 7
ftft ??iT?. Imperative sentence ft «iwt> ai?ni «n atnrn (order,
tequest, advice ?t proposal) ^ 4; 4ft—
Go there. Please help me. Let us go.

ft ??
Assertive sentence
m >S5r^ 4 ftr «)4 am
qr ^ r?^
ft)4
if rft

ft ?f
stoif
m JTt
^ ^tfl, qqfft
(affirmative ?i negative)
4ft TO?f

4 eft n?) 4: 4ft—

You are a good man.
You arc not a good man.
S'? ft n ^
Sira et TO eraem 4 xfft 't tou ei sirai ei fi i

Optative eft? Exclamatory sentence »ft ^ efra srff,

Optative ft option et #1? itm 4 ) ?ft ft nfimui (curse) ?i
»'Trt?i? (blessing) snft ero ^ m jft raftisrf ^ ?)? ft, ifr qft
Optative rnpRsn 4ft—
May you live long !
May he die 1

A plague split you !

?r<TO?i&?^*3f5rRJ, rts-^sn sn???-??! «tr? srair «fr auvrft*
sra siiraisf ?n ?iq 5), fil an Exclamatory sentence a:?T
wifn 4; 4ft—
 1 .

358 HOW TO WKITI! CORRECT ENGLISH

Alas ! he is dead.
Hurrah we are wctorious.
!

TH smr iaverted commas % srlsT

snq Special Rules ?j ^ «r? fji j

1. ASSERTIVE SENTENCES
Rule I. Assertive sentence «T special rule | sk
^ t f?> wrr inverted commas (“ ") ^ that if 9^ t,

Ram told me, *T shall help you as far as I can."

Ram told roe /Aar be would help me as far as he could.
757 special rule ^ sgttrr inverted commas ^ that fen
771 1
752/ (Tease efit Person %> tfl general rules % fcV
7^11
Note (a)— inverted commas 3; wTjr s^fofTTTtf tift (Proper
Noun) TPThTT 7TT7 (Case of Address) S Reportiag
Verb 71 7t Reporting Verb 3: fi5 ntSt »iff Preposition «T Object esn
Tif^ eftr 77 77 em ^ Direct & Indirect if 55771 71^, 5 lr-*
The teacher said, ‘'Rom, 1 am pleased with you."
The teacher said to Ram (told Ram) that he was pleased with
him.
Ilf) Ram frt7>v 7 «Tr« 8 i wfTR arvj fr frt Reporting
Verb 71 Object ttt fern mir J 1 w arrr wt tt efirtiV—
The teacher said that. Ram, he was pleased with him— *155 J i

ir5f Ram eft said i jVt 515 wit that i 558 r^Ti wtfn I
*7^

^7 fc r®5f 7T fVH that i <158 557t »T5 8 ttV Tff I

Note (b)— life inverted commas 3 ; Term of Address

( {ffa)v7 i ti^) friend, father, brother, gentlemen, ladies rvrft
Common Noun sn^, jft pf 3: 558 addressed *1)5 cr Report- m
ing Verb 7 55# rn « »rtr ae Direct tI Indirect 3 757 ?
The President said, ‘"Ladles and gentlemen, I should (hank you
all...."
President fl./y/'weJ (the public) as ladies and gentlemen
The
and them all.
said that he should thank .

fw ladies and gentlemen

efe that i 515 fl) ^
77% firt vi
WT7 eT^« sttT fVni j

Note (e)— irf5 Inverted commas % wTtT O. Well, Vou. Sec pei.j
STR i rx trrn77 « vfin fc? wT'f, A
rr*t winw nt7«f 85 } f« wn VH

7T»8, «Th77«t ff5J7 rt K7T«*8—

The teacher said, "Wdl, Mohan, 1 shall puniih you."
The teacher said to Mohan that he would punish him.
 NARRATtON 359

Well sflT ft *00. w wd f m ^ 'r >ft »mnfT srff

I flWf 5f, ir*f ftft \f, wHfr i ftrHfe# if 5| i?T ft

ft *11^ i’ I %?r ti*ff «t ni if «t< ^ H 7fl I

Note (d)— Bp? inverted commas i wPTiT bi f<ff|, welcome

or
Idiom
farea-ell (I& good riiorntne, good
^ wg?T< rri B|*t bid bt bade *itf « r?
ni^) mff
Reporting Verb
bbir % ^i «rw.
Bf^
f’3 ’Biff't; that i; stf Bfl, aft—
Myfriendsaid to me, “Good morning. I am happy to see
you.'*
My friend bade me gootl morning and said that he was happy
to see me.
Note (e)—Bfl inverted commas ^ ft Assertive
Sentence rr. nt ^ and ^ ^ n>f <nffB bi further added sific «i eBtn
«f«vftBraBf«rtf«^^istffB.B3it(%BR-Btcsay « tell w iratn bb
B m Bfi ft 1, 3^—
The king said, “It is enough. My mother is yet alive. 1 wil]
£0 and sec her before I die".
The king said that it was enough; that bis mother was yet
alive; and that 6e would go and see her before he died.
Bff inverted commas «
BRB 3* at Assertive
RSBt tfW
ritf rrrftp?
Indirect Narration M nysfr ft brb bbi ffBi bbi i B^t w i ft i

Bff and BBtB 5»T } Bf f nt«t Indirect form f?r B«n «ft ft stmt t—
I

The king said that it was enough and that his mother was yet
alive. He further added that he would go and see her before he died

Nate (f>—jfs <\ Assertive sentence ft% I n> st^i^ imB

ft*ft BTB 3: errt: S «ft Elliptical em mil ?, 3fr— yes, no, very well,
natatallBfBlfti %«ft saf«n 3 irrr
Tn Br 5 VT fcr bbic bbs?— replied
^ «l sm wrtiM vfR
in the affirmative bt replied in
Bi^ *>

the negative soft, aS—

I asKed him, “Are you ill ?” He said, “Yes.”
B?^ BiBBBf prak Interrogative Sentence % ftnrr'rlt if ftBir vfr«i, tt
BTBB Bt pr RBTBf tt BBBT BI «Bf)I t—
He said (replied) that he was ill ai He replied in the affirmative.
Bfi Yes Bi ^ SB I— He was ill.

n. INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES
Role 1. Reporting Verbwt askm enquire if Bfsre l

Rule H. Interrogative sentence Bt yes bi no if ftBt ^n

rr^, Bf inverted comma whether?
Bt if Bi TC eft ft,
*orta,Inteiiooative sentence wiwat Yes Bi Ho w ft Bf ^ ihc jhtt
 360 new TO WHITE CORRECT CNCUTII

fi, qnt fpn »f (nvetled comniat sfri cr «; if *rj whether cr

rtVi H'T I

Role Ilf. Inlerrogslive lenteoce Assertive Jf tt7 ? tr n t RTSt

l i

T?Tt{ «nf> ^ T>?ff J rrfiTT rw ifi! ^

f»rr^ Interrogative scntetjces ftjl

(I)fira3 Auxiliary Verbs

I

Mo*
? i rw Birr &
«t s?r)n rf<Tf t,
Tt Ktnf ^ rS
(2)
^rr ^ ?—
erps 7

Auxiliary
? 1

Verb Mo’ ^ BRVrwfl ^(Tr.R|t«T»7Verb,3&— is, am, are, was, were, has,
have, had, will, should, must, can, may r^if? sn stW fWi 3 j Itri In-
terrogative sentences8 Verb Mo* f.t BTin f i ?t sttt k ?— (a)
f>WJ| not ^
TTH i. Sir— do not. did not, does not, sir (b) fipr? not
ant txm
^
BfR Interrogative sentences fj do % ttw not
t

Ttr ffw Assertive rri?— ubject i rr Verb ^ rr e; vir—

^ ^
RTWf
Did he not go 7 He did not go.
Does he not read ? He does not read.
Do
you not laugh ? You do not laugh,
nfr Interrogative ? do 4 fnv not ffff «n^ rft Rirrf f9 bett ^
A ssertive 5f rrh— uxiliary Verb ‘do’ |>? fg gn «; 5|r— ^
Do you go 7 (Int.) Yon go. (Ass.)
Did he go ? (Int.) He went (Ass.)
Does he go 7 (Int) He goes. (Ass.)
What do you want ? (Int.) What you want (Ass.)
uft Interrogative sentence ? Verb 'do’ «i strbt jttT T^atfR Verbs
(is, have, will TftnfR) wbi Ttr stbtt Assertive rri?— ubject

i Ri? Verb ^
rw ?; 3lr—
Are you ill 7 You are Ut
Where is he 7 Where be is.
How will you go 7 How you will go.
Can you do it 7 You can do it
R^ RPfr Interrogative senteoccs Jf RRt Verb «nRT f sftt R^ ^
Subject R^ Assertive rri^ ^ fer Subject RWT >Rn ? ^ ^
Verb RR Ria tv witnR ^ 1 sw ftrs Subject Verb i ^ ^^
%RiR«TR. B^RTR^RrRgWRTREW^ldwf^J I ,

RR aVRf tv special rules ^ itrr ^ stt Interrogative sentence

ct

Direct Ir Indirect il rrS; —

Ram said to Shyam, “Will you help me ?"
Ram asked Shyam r/he would help him.
(said) «t
RRitfrRttVspeciaIru!csRfT^5R|;(I) Reporting Verb
asked if RR5n mn i (2) Inverted commas if ^ mri f

live -Will you help me 7’«r war ftre *11* Ri '•

jeet *fSR Verb % WK ^

R?ta «R Interrogative ^ Assertive if RR3
,
 NARRAtlOM

»m % 1 Tenic *?tt Penon ^ general rules

*1^ f I «rT rr R?tr»i mV «~
Mohan Sohan, “What do you want 7"
said lo
htohan asVed Sohan w/iot he wasted.
«ril Reporting Verb tiV asked # uaj J. ijt inverted commas
^ if 51 whether 3 srtT, 55Tfe W Interrogative sri atit ftrs tf ’ft mtl rJ
tt^i 1 tM IntenogaVWe fi do <^1 itnst Assertive sni^i «r5i i,
5ii‘lf«5tldo5;trriinot;r^«i5tii •P?qfl5^»fr general rules % «g-
mt cr }I «
RttryiT tftr 3—
The teachersaid to the student, “Why do you not read ?”
The teacher asked the student why he did not read.
5t1 Reporting Verb tm inverted commas % qftrw «b^ aqrctn ^
5^ % qt Interrogative Assertive it do w sftq ;n1 gsi i st^
vtt tqiTtw ^ fitt Subject ^ ttrr W
do
«iV «t? V'erb qft, t?i

5177 >1 do i fliq not sm jMt ^ qql f7i S55I qtar 1

Nate (t|— Intettogalive sentence cl Indirect if K that *7

5qW ^^ Vmfl Assertive sentence if qtm }
»fl «r?r i 1

Note (b>— Inverted commas Interrogative sentences

tt^ qq q?'! and ^ 51 further asked uifq aq^ qir^ vt nVi
q? I

Note (e)— Assertive sentence ^ ciqvq ii ^ Note (a) R (d) nc

qqt qqt 4 ail «tq Interrogative sentences ql «(i Indirect Narration if

tqtfl tntq xqisT 8 tS \ q»rT Preifr & cut csr Mtom 1 ql, say 51 tell i; qq?f

ttl ask qi enquire ct qqfn flm crftq 1

III. IMPERATIVE SENTENCES

Role I. Reporting V«b cl, *q k; «^nK, order, request, pray,
oggrst 51 advise 9 qq? q 1

Rale II. Inverted commas ^ to k eqa e 1

Ram said to me, "Go there.”

Ram ordered me to go (here.
The doctor told me, “Take medicine in time."
The doctor ad\ised me to take medimne in time.
I said to my father, “Please give more money.*’

I requested my father to give more money.

Note (a)— Inverted commas % please, kindly sifk hck ^ cl
51^ I I Indirect & qn fqk J, oqfftt mrei «q nl Reporting Verb
’ll tqt fl wim
'
I a>rT fti »fq ftk wpspr nqiqt^ if fem *151 ^ 1

Note (b)— Assertive sentence i: if vfl fej Note (a)

% (d)
^ w
k 3%nf »f» ‘^w if iS du. ajtff fsiOTf k stamr fsTfik *rt gWiVw
inverted commas k;
'
fti -5^ Indirect if Reporting Verb k:
 362 IfOW TO WRire CORRFCT ENOLCIt

7^ m s I fj, S3y w telf k order in request «rr^ «

mi 9(rrc I

Nolc(c)— Jif< inverted commaf 3; “do not. ....,” sT^.tf

e> fimf S it nz ^ erjTlf 3& Imperative sentence ^
Direct & Indirect if —
Role I. Reporting Verb (Tense i sgmr) forbid in forbade ?
^
s, inverted commas to if eft? do not *1 rn 5 I soar

t« s I

Rule II. Reporting Verb ^ (sr5 i order oi request

•rg'Trr) if m
« b'It inverted commas ^ to if i or do «f art e »>? do not ^ not
to S|V1 Twjf ^ lo, Sn—
The teacher aa'id, "Da not cry."
(a) The teacher forbade to cry.
(bj The teacher ordered not to cry.
mrf Imperative sentence wrfifurft Ioiiif*ct if vm>rn}—
fjpnr ^ «f3»7iT sft? wg^nr t «rw^ sft srrgr ?r^

BvVi *rc, Bt fvm’f BV! ^ er.*Vbrf «T*rnn-sm^v?? firryt rirf imi

N.B. nft inverted commas « nttir Imperative sentence if do tt
(do not srrf). fft wiTffiviT^ prwit aamr Reporting Verb ^ order ei

request if I sftt inverted commas ^ to if, lit—

I said to him, "Do that at once."
1 ordered him to do that at once.
ijTt Note (0 if (Wf
SF? t I

More Hints On IraperatiTC Sentences

ern ^3 fcf Imperative sentences ‘Jet’ B ^ 3 l

Indirect if ftrr B—
iff5 let art Tif? & feat (proposal) b>i^ v. m—
(a) Reporting Verb ^ propose if B?5r e I

(b) Inverted commas ^ that „ » I

(c) Let ^should » I

(d) Objective case (us) ^ Nominative (we) ? if I

^
.

eft?, Auxiliary Verb ‘should’ ^ Subject (we) ^ ?R ^

Ram said to me, "Let ns sing together.
Ram propi>3eJ tbal nr iWrf sing “E'iber.
Rule (a) % sgBK proposed w STbr jsn t, (W » 3

(c) it
ii?r

nyiR should «I nit (d) » IdW m should sn I

o,. (
,
*'•1'"'®'
NB. win A fsmmuMtluluitrtiiuwiitPW"”'
 NARRATION 363

{iij2flet3:Ti^(letus....)wiffT|i if 'sjr 43i 5 »rif ^

(a tl d tra) ^ ^rf^ i

fW ’rt let I
rr^ Tmproposal t1^ srff ^i i 3:1

»i?Tf if let me, him, her, them ^i there be «i sr?k fhn 1

% TR ^
^3^1 ?n (wish pennUsion) 5;i Thi
The boy said, "Let me go out, ^."
|, :§%— ^ 1

The lover said, "Let her rest in peace."

God said, "Let there be light”, and there was light.
I said, “Let him do what he likes.'*

He said, “Let me help yon ”

Indirect sf?si^ I: Rw
if Pt Rrarf ^ uiiear a-
(a) Reporting Verb ^ wish 3 e. wife & W>l ^
=0 ^ vr ws tt sirai % i

(b) Inverted commas ^ that ? < 1

(c) Let «Kt should 3 ertf « ^ Objective Case (me, him, her
twfO ^ Nominative (I, be, she 3 wH ct should 3: irr^
(I should, he should sife) < i

W i wg^nt wt fi;3 nh wnl wm^’l ^ Indijtct w itsti’. TH

ttiTCf^—
The boy yvlshed that he should go out.
The lover wlshtd that she should rest in peace.
Cod v/lshed that there should be light and there was light.
I wlshedthal be should do what be liked.
He wished that he should help me.
Note— There be tpf ^3 re am 3 KcWt (Supposition) it

The teacher said. “Let (here be a (riaogle.”

^ TTW wl Indirect 3 « fei Reporting Verb ^ wish 3
^ suppose 3 e?5r itfitr sftt let there il this to at that to 3,

Tbe teacher supposed that to be a triangle.

TU Birr w ^ fe there be ti3 aiw & P5T at «wi n
^ Ierfet Nnli«n iR 3^ siwpft 3 Indirect 3 1

ja amf 3 let 3 tR it aim J, 33—

Let it be so. Let it be a cirde. Let it rain,
w
elaf tl *T’5f 3 let it arai }. fw 31 u3t awef 3 w
^ aw TOiit ?—<tt3 3 net (wish) it air 3 ivwi (supposition)
tt iwq II «rw eiw iff 4 1 wnt aw f€*ft nanSelaiaei
*1 aw 5 fe jral 4 all at tri? iT rrr asn aiar w
4 1 atfi aw w? Tltflil ifiitfl avtai 3 »Tam4— "Let it
'^la.
Imusigo," ^ «t! let it rain It, aww 3 aa 4 fe w! ah w
 »»o\v lo witrtE coRRrcT Evcmii

ST|I i" sr ft? fff »rTt mi Indirect et rfnt— He said that /le die
not care for rain.
m^r a fsT iTi^ inff (r *775^ }" trinf *7? I sV
^
> «ii
3rni }— “Let It rain,” ttI (9 rr? ft xrn ^i, TTirp R?
f Ok rtf 9 «ri
sftr afl gift J S 39^1
1 Indirect rr
He wished that it should rain.
«t fIPt7 CT i let « fIT it *t RThT fM 7T 39 & 3m
(wish), (supposition), s^aiyi (approval) trr 3TT*rt93l (indifference)
rt *nT 33^2 3t p«m i » rut jo «i stt? ?fi i) ^tai i
sAt rttfsTR ^ A 3mf «> 013129 fmnf oitmT S (3> let « *m?3 3 mit 33 ^
ft Indirect H 3? 3 f at 0331 } 1 ff, «m «rr3 (approval 31 indifference)
rt 3)3 T>^ 32, ar f3Ja-r>t?3 303 if r*i^*f3S3 CtOt, *03 33 mTUT if 20 32 ^
3^ Indirect if 33 ^ 1

307 if, Let «

33 33 sit 3T3 053J3otl 3T3Tt *373 STf? 3237
if,

3nfTf ^ 3)2 33 3C ^ f« fg let 3ti 3n3f % even if (3ro «7 rv pa7 1--

Let it be ever so diffieult, 1 must do it. Let it rain ever so hard,
I will go io<day.

^3t?3f Let it % 313 ever so «f3T3 i— (Let if.... ever so).

n ^I33f ^ opam ^ oot —

if srrtn

T3^ iodirect ^ fa3 on

if 3^3*1
(a) Reporting Verb ^ 2T^ e 1

(b) Inverted commas ^ that 9 133 e j

(c) Let 3^ even if 5 330 ? 1

(d) Ever so mrht «T3 1

Ram said, "Let it rain ever so hard, 1 will go to-day.”
(n'rect)

Ram said that eren i/it rained hard he would go that day.
(f/ri/irecO

IV. OPTATIVE SENTENCES

Rule I. Reporting Verb ^ curse, bless, pray 37 wish 3^3 ^
33f39T2 333 3, 32rff% ^ 3ml ^ uPmrr, »ntfi3k, 37331 37 f*g7«T3hi

^31 I 7

Rule II. Itwected commas ^ that 33^ 3if I

Rule in. Optative sentence ^ Assertive 3 333 372 3? 23 3372-*

(a) 3 : 33f if 20 ok 33^ 3K Verb
subject ^ ^ «k (W note 0
exclamation (!) ^
full stop (.) if 339 37 32f—

May God pardon yon ! (Op/ative)

God may pardon you. (Asstrtire)
Father said to me, "May you five long 1”

Father blessed me that I might live long.

!”
The preacher said to me, "May God help you
 NikS.6AT10N 365

The preacher prayed that God might help me.

He said to me, “May you die !’*
He cursed that I might die.
Note (a)— Optative sentence if may art spttri ;tfl

(may arsjr % wkih ? l^rT ^&

God king« May God save the king.
save the
A plague split yous A/ay a plague split you.
ttr irerr, may ^ itt S i

Note (b)— Inverted commas % ap^ tnrlVJT-qgvr r*? *n?, A

Assertive sentence ^ trnrs^ if Note (a) & (b)«nratT^n^ f^WTa'TTt
ff, say Jff tell 5< bless, curse ar pray «t S5>i »rpTt

^T«:i

V. EXCLAMATORY SENTENCES
Role I. Reporting Verb ^
exclaim with joy, sorrow, surprise,
anger, contempt irr applause if^thr 8«ir i tiaff if. Reported Speech
I

Rule II. Inverted commas «) that >1 a^e i

RuUUl. Interjections tfxtwatftits* ti^) <t e. Tsifr tst»

»fl Reporting Verb ^ w* rf i' i f*R. mt arem CUtrr rr
Tliftl?

Rote IV. Note of exclamation (!) k full step (.) *7 srtVt erm
'nitr.il-
He said, “Alas I am ruined.” !

He exclaimed with sorrow that he was mined.

I said, “Ah he is dead.*’
!

I exclaimed with sorrow Uuit he was dead.

N.B,—efe inverted commas i Exclamatory sentences
V how at what great or greatly if XTSre; how
^what Noun «n^ ft sft (how ui what great ff xea, vr etrit atr
Adjective wt^ aft greatly in very >1; 5i)
!"
I said, “What a fine place it is
I exclaimed with joy that it was a very fine place.
He said, “How dark the night is !*’
He exclaimed with surprise that the ni^t was very dark.
\ said, “What a fool 1 am 1”
I exclaimed (confessed) with sorrow that I was a great fool,
w xiv5( j( what how % very « great « inin 5vt
V rivqf if what how very ? qeai »wi fq!f« Adjectives
 366 HOW TO WRrTE CORRECT ENGLISH
fineok dark *i irikr sm L lit 8^ « wlat 3i great r;
I wliat % Noun ‘fool* sthji i
Notc^a)— sir? Exclamatory sentence if m Verb sifj

What a 1= What a fall it is (was)

fall
1

Oh, enough != Oh, it is enough

!

Nonsense !=slt is nonsense I

<
inverted commas 3r ifTnr 4 ?r^ ^ ’
«w A a?5 that % ft Assertive sentence Note («) t
^
^ 5^
'!r«rt
^
1 1

„
atn ?l? TBT ft

^
51

^ tn? that i

^ ^ I a> ^ i T

f ftojA 3H ^ 31^ ^^ 3fj^ I

MORE HINTS ON NARRATION

ral
w»ft fra
^
special
«9jrf
rules ?<
i ^ Indirect 5
ftwR f«ai »r?7 J
i
trimi &
tn??? ? ftf
snr vrarn) Sr
^rect Narration « f?5r tra^ ^ vri &?«•?> ri?
^ ? j ftr *f» if(Pi
*»ra^ fi ft inverted commas % SR?!
ffW
9^ % ^ atr Indirect if ^ cp strar f, 5S—
Ram said to Shyam, '‘Please take your seat. I am veryjbifl'
see you. Where had you been so Jong ?*’
5Tl inverted commas i «ftar ifw vm ? ftrif vnt Imperative t
|rr(i

snr %
Assertive ^ Interrogative. tsrftR tn fftrrf vnif ^
special rules tft a- % Indirect n x?HHt ii&-
Ram requested Shyam to take his seat. He told him Ibel ^
(Ram) was glad to sec him and asked him where he had b«a
long.

9?^ arre «) Imperative sentence ^ special rules «1

rrt ^
Assertive sentence i
ftwrasH *fV^ ffTR^ inlerroP’^ ^
sentence % special rules
eft ^ Indirect ? 9 ;rt 991 f ^
general rales *fr
3: HT«t iprft ?i ?>. wrt »J7 ? ra ft «
commas 3; tm-mm nr? %
inverted commas
Indirect if ^
lactor Rpr ft^i
3: wir fta^ ?b?
irt > anl mft tirrl «i
‘
^
^ ^ir*viT
Trrm J
ertim irrm f, 3^_
special rules wrr 3:

v«,. fVv*'*
“Wsaw help me. I am out of pocH!
you? I hope you
will.”

OM» Jr “«CMe help me.” I told my fri«'J'

^ I told my friend. "Can you T' I to'J
“IJ hope
Rrt
you will.”
 NARRATION 367

2fTf STT ^ I inverted comntRs

Imperative, jhti Assertive. tTt?m Interrogative ntr
i: ’TtfR ^
ftrx
S'—
Assertive,

vri “I told my friend” inverted commas i 975^ I rfr(%^

common factor jtw vrr r^r w«pr*sRm S sts

sir ’i^n i

pT«f special rules sfr nr? ^ Indirect $ sr^nt sifrm 1 nft «i? 1

FJ fi»ft STSsf ^ ^3 Imperative ni Interrogative sentence %

special rules sft nr? t ??5r ?»t tft sr sW i arsit 5^ crrat &
«> nlftm srff 1

EXERCISES WORKED OUT

1. The violent man said, “What violence have I done ? What
anger have been guilty «f T** Then the others laughed and said to
I
him, should we speak? You have given us ocular proof of
“Why
your violent temper.”
Indirect— The violent man asked »-hat violence he had done,
and what anger he had been guilty of. Then the others laughed and
asked why they should speak. They further said that he had given
them oeuUr proof of his violent temper.
Or, Then the others laughed and said that there was no need
for them to speak, because he iiad given them ocular proof of his
violent temper.
2. “What do you mean ?” asked the man, “how can a rope
he used for binding flour ?” “A rope may be used for anything,”
Ttplied the mao, “when I do not wish lo lend it.”
Indlreet— The man asked what he meant, and how e rope
coufd be used for binding flour. The man replied fhat a rope might
be used for anything, when he did not wish to lend it.

3. The robber said to Alexander. “1 am thy captive. 1 must

heat what thou art pleased to say, and endure what thou art pleased
to iaflict. But my soul is uoconquered, and if I reply at all to thy
reproaches, I will reply to thee like a free roan.”
The robber said to Alexander that he wos hij captive,
Indirect—
must hear what he (Alexander) was pleased to say and
(he)
endure what he was pleased to inflict. He fttrsker told him that his
soul
•*'«r Unconquered, and if he replied at all lo his reproaches, he would
”Ply to him like a free man.
4. Joseph said to James, “I can strikes me as the
tell you what
most useful machine
in the world.” James replied, "Can you Joseph ?
1 thould like
to hear of it. What is it used for r
•“direct— Joseph said to James that he eoutd tell him
what
r^ck him as the
most useful machine in the world. James asked
 368 JIOW TO WRm CORRECT ENOLUJl
Joxeph if he could and said that he would like
{o hear of that. H
further inquired of him (Joseph) what it was used for.
5. And Reuben said uolo them,
"Shed no blood; cast JosepI
into this pit that H in the wilderness, but lay no hand upon
him.”
Indirect —
And Reuben adrlsed them to shed no blood; /ocas
Joseph into that pit that M-of in the wilderness, but (to) lay no hanc
upon him.
6. And Judah said unto his brethren, “What profit is it, if w
slay your brother and conceal his blood ? Come, let us sell him to

the fshmaelites, and let not our hand he upon him for he is oor
brother and our flesh."

Indirect— And Judah asked his brethren kAo/ profit it was if

they slew their brother and concealed bis blood. He advised them to
sell {proposed to them that they shoMWje//) him to the fshmaelites
and H’/jAed/Aof /hey fAouW not lay /Ae»> hand upon him, for he vas
their brother and their flesh.
“What is this strange outcry
7. said Socrates, "I seat the
women away mainly in order that they might not ofl’end ia this way;
for I have heard that a man should die in peace. Be quiet and have
patience.”
Indirect— Socrates asked them what (hat strange outcry wtis.

He women away mainly In order that

said that he had sent the they

might not way; for he had heard that a man should die
ofifend in that
in peace. He (Socrates) advised them to be quiet and haw patience.
8. The teacher became angry with the student and said, "Why
have you disturbed the class in this way ? I have told you before
that when I am speaking, you should be silent. Leave the room, and
do not return again to-day."
Indirect— The teacher became angry with the student and
asked him why he had disturbed the class in that way. lie said to
speaking.
the student that he had told him before that when he irar
leave the
he (student) should be silent. The teacher orrfererf him /o
room, and not to return {forbade him to return) again that day.

EXERCISE
Q. Change the following from Direct to Indirect—
earth 'han
1. "aeDtelmen." 1 saW; "Ihere ire more
things in heaven sad

are dreamt of in your philosophy. Do not be astonished at

my statement.
it fair to judge me by appearance only?"
•i.n.itffrfly
2. "Let me hire you as a niirsC for my
poorchildren, ..

to a quiet Caterpillar. "See these little eggs. I doaT know how long
 NAMLAIIOS 2fc9

fcefm (tK7 come lo life, lad t feel verr tick aod poorly, tad if I thould dse, tbo
mQ Uke can of my baby butteriliCi »bent intone 7 Will you kiad. mild,
ptea Caterpillar 7’*
J. “Wdr.ened l,~my cood boyt,'bo<irdo you like your V«i3 7 1 bepe
yon are not afraid coiteep la ihitroom" “No, papa", tiiJ Dick, "I an not
afraid to be aaywhere aiSece you ate.“

"Cast thy eyeteattu-ard*', taidtbe teniuiio Mina, “tod tell me •hat

4.
thou aeeti.’' '*1 tee", taid Miraa, “abu(c%a(:ey and a prodiyiout ble ofnatcr
Ccr»iiiithrousJiil“, “The valley that thou »ee»t“, taid the fenina, ”ii the vale
of mnery, aad the tide ofwaterihal Uiou teeit ttpan ofthe creti pde cf net*
eicy." “What it the leatoa." utd Mirit. “that the ttdc rttei ojt of % thick mirt
at one end. and losei itaelf ia a thick iniu at Itie other?**
5. I uid. “Do aot
brood over the ra<t- 1* t7cre not aometluRf In ettry
ir< which rt is happineii to forgn ? 1 have so much to remember here, so much
to leara. sad so much to repay."
They said, "Brothen sad Sisters, bear uhai 1 tell you. The enemy
b.
tpproaches and you ou|ht to know what »iU happen wlcn they come berc Do
aot expect pesee; for ihert «iU be aone. They will rule youand make ycu om
iU»e%**

?i An old iioa Mid to a fot, *'Please come near roe in my cave Come, let
this’ll of your bealth." The fos said. “Quite so. sir. but I sm afrsiJ the iilk
• n»l t« benefloil for my healtl.**

I. “You ate Old“, said the youiK “One would hstdiy sorpeie that your
<N*siit steady as ever. Wtiit msde you so awfully clem ^
“1 best avroervd
aiTcqutifioni,ind thii iseaouih. OmY
five yourself airs. Be off or t will
you dowaitsirs**, si'd his father.
Tbe sni said to
9. the crlcket,**ttbj| sme you doini sU the summer*
*>y do you but fiwn when instead rfesieiTityouio'sntv'Od? tt you tan
while iirjy the lurnnier and dtncipf. tben you can past Ihe autumn In
In siRi'iix
•'••ante •ly."
10. The farthing rambleJ from poclet to pocket. It would be
said. “I Ihos
ledioos |» relate all
my adveniofst Soon I gir* old and was ditflrurtJ by coot-
laeisie Then cstne the fatal end cf my life Along wnh many oiler colril was
Ihtovn into a furnace,
tlul itrapgely enough I did not dic I only rose out ef
HefurtiKesuh grcaier beauty and brigStness than Irm hiJ tef.'fe.“
11 Teookir— That it true: It H very cold tndeed. But climbers wear «ery
aann clMbev.
it it not often the cold ihsi stert them.
TlerMId—)Inw do they spend Uicnighlt theft and where do they grt their

fnirhif — Giiod You have iboogM of ether gnrsl d'Ticiibes wh«rlicl »*»
tirtr.ome Rememher. howtste. they sale enarty wrong conlet wt;b timm
'hew men Cairy their forid and tents in wfcKii they tketp at tiigM. ttJt tVee
•’•oiher and grealti
d-TK-uliica than these
12 rnerkfir— M ho know* which is theb*gVit r».>«rlara ia tJir wttU 7
f i'»r
r*Jd— 1 diu SU. It is Kawbeiyurga in A kkim.
7Wke»_«Co. wrong. Va bo knows 7 11 at is a very hlfh en'-jr.ii-a bvt
bell fU.t nf all

f*it/-Is It Mount Ivertst, Sj T

“ C. r.-:4
 370 HOW TO WWTE CORRECT ENGLISH
Teacfier~^Yn, tbit's righL And it ts over twent^'nine thoimad feet 4
you know, tt is covered with snow atl the yesr round, even in laramer.

13. The yooofeit Princess took her fitber's hind in hers and slid. “Fi
dear. I love you better thin salt.** The King looked at her in a.'niieraeat
cried.**Do you ineasure your love for f&e by eomnon salt? Vour sisters k
spoken of gold and gems. Have you nothing better to uy ?" The Ptiat
sbook her head and again replied. **l love you, father, more than salt.** At i

the king was enraged and said to the Princess, “Ibid you net to come near
or speak to me in future.**
14. The Duke said to Shytock. “How can you hope for the mercy cf C
if you show mercy to none ?** Shylock replied. "What judgensenl cf Cod sh
**
! feat,basing dooc no wrongT You have your sieves. ShaUI say to
Ibetn be free?* You win answer. The slaves are ours.* So do I answer yo
The pound cf flesh is nine and I win have it.**
“Liitfe sisters.*' he said. **ic it my turn to speik. Keep S'lenl mJ
'
IJ
Qu«t till I have flnuhei You ought to praise and love your Mtker very m*
He has given you sweet air. He has found food for you. and iireami inJ Uww
for your drink. pni« Ood, Who loves you and watches over >ow.“
16 Oraiuflo—“O esccllent judge ?**
Portia—“'ATty does the Jew pause? Take your penalty.”
Shjiock—“Cive me my rrincipaJ and let me go.”
Basunlo— “1 have it ready for you. Here It Is
Portia—“He has refused it In the open court He shall have merely H'*'
I'd h I b.-md."
S!i)lofk—**ShaII I not have even my bare principal 7”
Portia— “You sh»H feave wothini hut the penally.'*
ir. The man has confessed. “I am the guilty man end
meni.“ Ha told w. “I wrO agree ns »hai you propni*. ifynu sign this
WhuCi
siid. “The boy IS hiding In the place where we left him." Ha uiJ,
have espeeieJ Such e turn cf wenfi 7”
was aik*
H
^'hen Porusssaabrooghtasa prtKsner to Alesaodai. ha
“How do you iSasoa iis be treawd T* ’^ikeaking", laiJhe
aosa.ag fi»e w request T” uid AlaunJer. saiJ he. 'Ysvfjchi*g I*

m 15* word tin/ “

IV *^rria r* rrjl »J th* apider. “if U were not f^r hraaling
an old <
^
tn our I^esii'y, never to st.raSroad eislssl an ene-ny, I
y?ab*n«u»!ae'.«j’v“ “I pray, ha*e parwiKe”, Mid lire ,ji«a
y»gr s-hsta-kji. s.sJ *
f..r I ece. ytsu may Wani <n »<*J
rr;u-r 4.1 y.-sar “*sf aet Hogue T rsp^iad th* **1*' *

whom aT the w-wU atJow* •*’ •*

tlTjrrid fcuve more resneex f.Jt» person
yt-iW betWT “
t j a«r
•X'jm* #n” f sare-f the ihandcnug AMar.4. "W m» h • I'”*

b-je ta tse ea.' ao.1 new* have tseola-'li agi.s "

inae
 NARKATION 371

“Yet'', ttii the peaiaat. "Do you «>Bt one in which you can <pnd the eitbt ?**
“So“, "I only want a fiicil".
replied the traveller,

22- "You are wiier than you were. Kinf Mrtia* 1" taid the atranyer, loekinf
•enoinly at him. "Your own heart, I perceive, hai not entirely cbaayed from
fiethtofold Were it lo, your ease would indeed be deiperate. TeH me if you
"
tiDcertiy deiire to rid yourielf of thlt Cotdeii Touch. "It is hateful to me",
tepled Midai.
 'aiAf rtR xvit

TRANSFORMAnON
Tfansrormatioft tt mt to change the form,
fK rJ
^*111
lenience
r
« sw
|>TO «5
^ Jft ^ f? lenience
^ ^k fonn
# erf s*
’nrtj^fiT* fjT^tiT, f^ ;t lentence ^ ^
eeffe r«r eV *nr>s fe^t sentence i form lA aimr sjff r
rrftn
Rt
n
RR^
f*r5e-ft5^ nett k «mf «> r sH ^Sf ft ftR serr ^ trassfen
J t

Role I. Seotences «itb 'Too’

^ too ^ >1^1 f Rn \ I ^ im't ef pr ^ enff 8

^—
Role (»)—Too i Adverb, Adjective et Adjective el nfitr sg^
IT^ ?TRi sm k. ’VC ? Infinitive ei srfw rlin i VR »i¥^ ^
esTTR 5—
He too weak.
is

The news is too bad.

It is dans^vous to be too ^oo^.

It is too shocking.

^ aTwl ^ iransfonn er^ ^ rr 'it F?7eaJ m—

fl) Too^??T 5 I

(ii) Too % «tt% ai^ Adjective ei Adverb Comparative

Degree if to (Adjective if ‘er" ^ Adjective ^ more *v,

ITT less RRi art rrfX rIt than ci «#r «t^) i

(fii) Than 5; ai? wa^nr should, should be, should have et

should have been at it is/wa^wiH *>« proper gr sr^'r I

The weather is too Aof.—Tbe weather is more hot than It it

proper ui The weather is hotter than it should be.
He came too early.'’ He came earlier than he should have at He
came more earlv than if is proper.

yfeisXoo'y/esk.^Heistttorevreak thart it Is proper er He i!

weaker than he should be. a /

I I /
 —

TRANSFORMATION 373

Hthtooncg\is«nt.= He hwere ncgtigent than ii (s proper^

He is mure negligent ihm he should be.
The news h too shocking.* The nr«s i$ wore shocWng than it

is proper 5T The news is more shocking than it should be.

Rote (b) 3 too i Infinitive aifw ?>, iiiitTf! w w ait

tnrnn
(ii Too sft eftr SO spJtn ^ i

(li) So % TT? Adjective lii Advetb ^ tw Adjective Adverb

‘too’ S:

not 51 that, .could not

!5niS ^
th Clause
spKR
if
^ Adverbial Clause that
eiefgtnr Subject rVi: Verb
catv'

eT>t I Verb i cannot, could not 5i will not

« Pile jW *il< tufjri: infinitive «i ‘to’ ^ ^ amt i

He is too weak to move.^ He is .to weak ihar he cannot move.

He is too proud to beg.- He is so proud that he connof {will not)
beg.

He was too slow to win.— He was so slow that he eouU not

Wui,

I am too busy to go out.- 1 am so busy that I cannot go out.

It is too hard to break.— It is so bard that it cannot be broken
'' It is so hard that we cannot break it.
Note— fg
Adjective I:
^ btv? Tt^ k too % are Adjective tpn t sftr

for smT I. to S^r

His sorrow is too deep for tears. It is too macA for me.
*1^ % transformation i fire ^ ft firan f t

K? rq ifr fi?re UTR |;rr a? ne ) f« so i are i

that it ««ni
Adictbial Clause if Verb ^ sihr nwvmt % vitm reifiv, WTfp
^ereiUfor^vre'^t Verbniltni^i ntram ct ifter afuit
Tm vrer snrrm; 5it—
His sorrow is too deep for tears.*Hi$ sorrow is so deep that
be M;;i70f
express it in tears, or, that it cannot be expressed in tears.
He h too slow for a runner.* He is so slow lAaf he cannot make
tea runner.
Caation— nfrareij it tooai are m'Kh (too much) so
^*8 51 so shocking snf? if a??? i aj<? firea^^ s'"! nitt',

.H u too much for< TOe.*U U so bad (shocking) that I cannot

EXERCISES IVORKED OUT

1. The news is too good to be true.
 374 HOW TO Write correct English

=The news is so good that it cannot be true.

2. He arrived at the station too late to catch the train.
= He arrived at the station so late that he could not catch
the train.
3. He was too mtich distressed to speak.
= He was so distressed that he was not able to speak.
4. The sun is too hot for us to go out at present.
= Thc sun is so hot that we cannot go out at present.
5. He is too proud to learn.
= He is so proud that he cannot learn.

EXERCISE
Q. Transform the following sentences—
(a) You are loo Uiy. (b) You are loo Uzy to succeed, (c) It i* l«* I»®
tomrad yoorseir. (d) Yoa were too late, (e) It ii loo late for you. (OS^ei*
loo poor, (a) She is loo poor to buy this dress, (b) Her toe's death h w
much for ter. (i) I am too old to learn new ways, (jj You areiooy«n|f«
this «ork.
/fla/r—<a) ffloreluy tban you should be or llua (I It proper, (h)i^
lazy that you cannot suoceed: (c) so laic that you cannot nend younelf.
<d) more late thin U b proper or than you should have been: (c> so bts
poor
that you caaaol iueeeed; (0 poorer than she should be; f|) so
that she canaot buy this dress: ft) is so shockint that she cannot besr^
(i) so eld that 1 cannot learn new wty^ (j) so younp that you cannot
io ihi*
work.

Rale n. ScnIencM crpresslag ‘Condition',

fSvivT ? I « sm Safii

TT7II ? 5*1^ •n't 5 consequence (cFrenr) ^ wwf x''^

you work bard, you will sonred.
If .

sn^ «"
vml if *r| condition wisrnn } tnff « eiri »Tv-r fret
that, but for,
If. unless, in case, supposing, provided, provided
one more, and, were, should, haderirand.
vr fnn! FCWT & «tn ^ CFnf wT »TW H ^ |

should, had or and k tnt condition

,

Esic (ly-qf! if. uijfesi,

•'T'l if ««!«’. shoufd-

j
un e»s. -

m and 3 «; onlcis «> if, should, had er and 9; should «r if.

if. «>’ «’*•

had m and 3. had ^ if. unless. s.Hoold at and 9 d't and «1
|

should vThad 9; 3^—

Ubour bsid.I,oa
, . i I

//you labour bird you wdl paii.-f/n/eaa you

wC! not pais»i5Aott/yjoo labour bard, you would
ptH “
hard you will pass.
 TRANSfORMATlON 375

fJtif
PT
w form
i STB

^iT
3 ^ ^
form >Rni-BT5Tn 1 iHftn:
'?f<KW?r;B^formif5«nl:5&— if»:i unless, should
1

ft

li^and i|; unless BiT if, should and 21; should ar if. unless and
? TO and aiT if, unless should if i

Rate (b)— In case, provided, supposing sflr one more., and^

OTOT transform f%7Tairai J

you allow me, I will do the work at once.=//you allow

/n fflic
me, I will do the work at once.
Provided you promise support I will help you. = // you promise
support, I will help you
Supposing you fall ill, there Is medical aid here. =//you fall ill,
there is medical aid here.
One more effort, and you will pass.-// you make one more
effort, you will pass.
Role (c)—rfk OTTB if but for ci qatn tt, riV aft •// it had not been
t?fr—
But for his help, should not have succeeded-)/ 1/ had not
I

ittn for his help, I should not have succeeded.

Rale (d)-^? aRO if were to «i ^ should it «T5T ?;

he were to meet me, I would recognise him at or>ce.=Should

If
he meet me, I would recognise him at once.

’SK Pmf ^ mR % emT «i transformation sn>rrsTt it

^RiTi I, ^ it transform ^ ori 'tin

1 1 Vtt Tran 3 «vfl ^ w<isrrai i jtj TOTt'r 5

{[) By using “IP*

I get wet, when I go out in the rain.— I get wet, if 1 go out in

the rain.

/fed you not taught me so should not have passed. »//

well, I
you had not taught me so well. 1 should not have passed.
Should you be tired of working all day, go out for a walk. =7/
you be tired of working all day, go out fora walk.

(ii) By using “Conjonctional Phrase*’

You be punished for talking in the class.^'You will be

will
punished In ease you talk in the class.
Should he awake, send for the doctor.— In case he awakes, send
lor the doctor.
 376 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH
Supposing the house catches fire, we shall ring up the fir?

brigade at once.
=1 In case the house catches fire, we shall ring up the firs

brigade at once.

(iiO By using a ‘Tarticiple”

If the rain does not fall sooo, the crops will be spoilt.*® 6'appjr-
ing the rain does not fall soon, the crops will be spoilt.
Wad you
taken greater care, this could not have happened.*
Supposing you had taken greater care, this could not have happened.
In case Hari does not turn up, Jadu will phy.= Supposing Hari
does not turn up, Jadu will play.

^ ^
Ttr

«?T
aiiT
311?,
^
fil
^ fe eft
ax tit
fc*ft titi

«tft
^ ois toft « trn
3ft ^ ’ft transforo
3*4 &
^
«

^ srff ?!Tt uiT, art rft ftnft irrxiiT % Sr conditiefl

^ fit rrait ^ condition if tra git 1 1

MORE EXERCISES WORKED OUT

1. One more word. Aid I will send you out of the rooB.-//ye3
say another word, I will send you out of the room.
2. Supposing the bouse catches fire, we shall eitinguish it witb

the water of this tank here. //(Incase) the house catches firt.'fte...

3. been more careful, such a calamity would not haw

Had yoM
befallen us.— If you had been more careful,. . ..

4. But for your interference, everything svould have gone

smoothly on.^Had it not been for your interference or ifyou had net
interfered, everything
5. Persevere, afld you will succeed in the end.* //you persevere,
you uill succeed in the end.
6. Prof/ded we are all agreed, the resolution can at once

passed. *-// we arc all agreed...

Role III. Senfmees eapresslisg '•Conressloa'’ or “CoBfrtst

fH ct TiTT rrt t fagt «fr »rr gtt V nw if »t fS *T1

W
i

hon«f.
fET if u<r« fnfti cn wm 54— Though he is poor, he is

wwT 2 contrast « m? ^ »T=s wrt t fgt nr rw'f it 'ft'' *

...but.
Though, althoufh, as, however, alllhe same, indeed.
theless. none noSwUhstanding that, for all that 4^f
ths'less,
whaf^
contrast
Rele (a) -aft though ci although ci rrbi rr«
 1 ,

TRANSrORUAtlON 377

as «n indeed .... but if ?;

Though (although) hs is poor, he is honest. =Poor OJ be is, he
is hon«t He is poor indeeif, hai ht is honest.
Rale (b)— aT? as indeed but 5; srn contrast si hit
^?t HiH, at though HT although >1
Note (a)— enn fs
? I
Hirif ^ as, though, although, how-^
^
ever, at the same time, all the same, indeed. .. .but stHife; 3: fin

contrast ^ hit rra; hih if) usnsl i ?: !&—

Though (although) he is poor, he is honest. =Poor whc is, he is

honest «n However poor he may be, he is honest ut He Is poor iVi-

*ed. but he is honest.

Note (b>_ ^7
HT I f« contrast 3; hw h) bhs tiI
^
SHfiT ^ though hi although i| ars «;
Poor as he is, he is honest. ^Though he is poor, he is honest.
However poor he may be, he is honest. "Though he is poor, he
5» honest.
' He is poor indeedi but he is honest." Though he is poor, be is

honest,

(a) He it poor, he is honest all the same-

(b) He is poor; at /Ae sowe //me he is honest.-Though he is
P®of. be is honest.

He is poor, nevertheless he is hone$t."Though he is poor, he is

honest.

Rale (c)— awe contrast w hw though w although wHohi

^ TTHiTf siiT,
fsft

^ net as, indeed.. - but, however, all the same

Though he is poor, he is honest. »He is indeed poor, 6uf he is

honest in Poor as he honest.
is, he is

Ho{«jc)~3ia as w contrast as) vh® siTin %.?f) as^jpflH

Adjecilve * tIbi J (Poor as be is. Jt/ch os he is), clause 3: mriH if

Tf as HI a?tii fwft claused HUSH JfrhnJ, UT ruHT HHift WTt J—

As he is ill, he is absent.
Tuf^ contrast 3: hit sft «i^ % fwt as w !iTt'iti?i Adjective 3:
1

EXERCISES WORKED OUT

1- He was poor indeed, h«/ he was always bappy=. PAougA he
'''as
poor, he was., .
 —
378 now TO WRITE TOMECT EVCUSfl

2. It is true (hat we have failed but it is sot through onr owa

fault." We have failed fndffrf, fa/f it fault.
3. The weather, though hoi, is not unbe3rabfc.«=Hot a/ the
weather is. it is not unbearable.
4. Suppojing that he was rich, that was no reason for his bad

behaviour."! grant indeed that he was rich, but that was....

5. Though ho succeeded in everything, he was never vaia=He

succeeded in everything, or /Ac jo/ne r//wf be was never vain er He

was never vain, notwithstanding that he succeeded in cveo'^hing.
6. His mother stilt trusted him though he had deceived her so
often." He had deceived his mother so often, she trusted him cW tfe
same.
7. He finished first, though he began l3te.=He began late

indeed, but he finished first.

8. This man isno matter what we do for him.

never satisfied,
"This man is never satisfied, whaterer ue do for him m This
man is never satisfied although we may do everylbing for bim-
9. Admitting that he has no means, >et he dresses pretty
" Though he has no means, be dresses pretty well-
lO. Poor as he is, he will never do a dishonest act- He is
poor

Indeed, but he will never do a dishonest act.

Rale IV. laterchange of “Degrees of Comparison”

jnvet 9 Adjectives i vebi t>9 J- fcEft-st-PRtt
DtsK- ^
S’ I J Degree Positive, Comparative rflr Superlat^

^
pr wi? aY vw
SPAT snrf ilnTi
Degree ^
fwtr
9 era
sett ^ t9 rtr
^
tt IHit

Role (a) —
Fositire & Comparathe Degrees

Positive Degree i Adjeclivx tiV as % 9 T5T ^

dull oj, as good or sif^ sit stttT\
transform ^
i fer *n
'sn i
0)st^ras^nT'5t ^
Comparattvc tJcg-
j[n) Adjective wt (wt ^ asi^TTti^)
(iii) efitsTfs AfBnnalive ft, at Negalhx sirt 8
ft, at Eif Affirmative vat? I
(iv) STVT ^
5 -T^ STT ^
a9 VTVT 9 Slit few sftt SPI ET

?it-
Ram is as dull as Shpm.
Shyam is not duller than Ram.
 TRANSronUATION 379

You are as good as I.

1 am not better than you.

Kant h not as duK os Shyam.

Shyam is <iuller than Ram.
You are not as good as 1.
1 am fceiter than you.
Xb’i Comparative Degree ^ Positive Degree i{ ^ fev:

P? f^irf uiRat a—
(i)

(ii)
Comparative Degree
Adjective as (as
^ Adjective vii
as) i
Positive
W e 1
i{ ^ 5

(iii) atw Affirmative b> 3& Negative wi ? sftt Negative

Affirmative.

(iv) anpr d: jvt kht ir^ fwe if ^ t; St—

He is belter than you.
You are not as good as he.
He is not belter than you.
You are as good as he.

Rule (b)— Comparative & Superlative Degrees

vfl; Comparative Degree all other ut any other

if aeVn ^ nt
^ W swTt Superlative Degree arm I— if astat

(i) any other

All other VT ptrl 1

, (ii) Comparative Degree i Adjective Superlative H 1,

a^—
He is belter than any other boy in the class.— Comparative
He the best boy in the class.— Superlative
is

This book is more useful than any other in the market.

— Comparative
This is the most useful book in the market. — Superlative
Note—tfft irart Superlative Degree ^ Comparative if

Comparative Degree 3: «w most other sun t|, sit rsrvit Super-

lative Degree tor asTl^—
(i) Most other b; one of the ^ «mtn sfa \

g,
(ii) Comparative Degree 3: Adjective ^ Superlative if j
at—
He is more wicked than most other boys.— Comparative
He is one of the «ovfHidt«/ boys.— Superlative
Iron is more useful than most other metals.— Comparative
Iron is one of the most iseful metals.— Superlative
 380 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH
Nolc— Tfrt Superlative Degree «> «?> Comparalive ? tt?

Rale (c)— PosUiTc & Snpertalire Degrees

5IT VTT7 3 Positive Degree ^ ^ as (as.. ..as) * if lj?t vm f
stV no other vn trr Superlative Degree rr
OETT anf) J—
(i)Nootheritvtai as ^ yn« (ii) Adjective at Superla-
tive Degree 3&— ^ ,

l\'o other boy as poor as Ram.— Positive

is

Ram is —
the poorest boy. Superlative
No other bookshop is at good as the Pustak Mahal.
—Positive
The Pustak Mahal is the best bookshop. — Superlative
^ Positive Degree as (as., .as) « ^ rv
ak very few an srftn rl. at Comparative Degree Superlative if

(i) as rm very few tti «t one of the ri wW «Ti

sftr (ii) Adjective ^ Superlative Degree ci ^ e; a&—

Very few men were asMabatma Gandhi.—Positiw
great as
Mahatma Gandhi was one of the greatest men.— Superlative
Very few flowers are as sweet as rose.— Positive
Rose is one of the THeererr flowers.— Superlative
Ttff aiK Ptflirl i wivr vt vm Superlative Degree
p
srnrpf) & Comparative Degree if 0 I’ ^ 1

EXERCISES WORKED OUT ~

1. The younger brother is eleterer than the elder.

—
Comparative
The elder brother is not so deter as the younger.
—Positive

2. Gold is one of the hea\iesl of metals. Superlative —

Gold is heavier than most other metals.— Comparative
Very few metals areas AeovT’oJ gold. —Positive
3. This man has more dti/r than cash. Comparative —
This man has not as nttuh cash as he has debts.— Positive
4. That man has more money than brain Comparative —
That man has not 01 much brain as he has money.
—Positive
the
5. He treats the poor with the same respect as he does
rich.-Positive
 —

TRANSrORMATlON

He treats the poor with no less respect than the rich.

— Comparatue
6. You know his ways quite as nell as S do. —Positive
I dot not know his ways any better than you do.

9. Comparative —
7. 1 would as soon die as tell a lie.—Posilive
1 would rather Jie than tell a lie.—Comparative
1 would sooner die than tell a lie.— Comparative

8. A live ass is stronger than a dead lion. Comparative —

A dead lion is not so strong as a live as.s.— Positive
-l'ery few countries ere as hoi as India. Positive —
India is holler than most other countries—Comparative
India Is one of the hottest countries.— Superlative
10. Platinum is as heavy as gold.— Positive
Gold is nor heavier than platinum.— Comparative
11. No other ainget in the school is so good as Hari.— Positive
Harl is the best singer in the school.— Superlative
Hari is better ihsn any other singer in the school.
— Companuve
12. He was one of the greatest of Indian rulers.— Superlative
He was greater than most other Indian rulers.
—Comparative
Very few Indian rulers vvereao great as he.— Positive

Role V. loterchanse of Voice

Active Voice ^ passive Voice i ew

(0 Subject wl Object c i

(lip
Object Subject sjit e eilt by ci sqifr »r i

Ciii) (a) Verb % verb ‘to be’ (am, is, are, was, were.
*» been, being) ccW Subject i Number ifiT Verb ^ Tense*

(h) Verb *1 past Participle (Verb 5; lit?*) R to i

vt UTR *1*^1 *1 Verb ss ntc ^ sun J—

Verb ‘to be’ + Past participle,

!• Mohan leaches Sohan.—

Sohan is taught by Mohan. Patslre
 ——— —P———
3S2 now TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH
2. I respect him.— ylc/iw
He is respected by me. Passive

Verb ‘fo be’

Active Voice *f itr bek ^

a m/is /arc/wa s/ were/ + to + wrb.

^ ^ Passive Voice if am/is/are/was/nere i to be sniT J

eftr to be % verb Past Participle ftJ
1. Iam to heip him. Active
He is to be helped by me. Passive
2. 1 was to help him. Active
He was to be helped by me. Passhe
3. We are to help him. Active
He is to be helped by us. Passive

Verb *Io hsTe*

fH em*f fiTBR Active Voice J| ttr bti tTfll J”

haijliaw/had + to + verb.

Hr mef i Passive Voice if hai/havc/hsd k to be J

10 be k rr verb vt Past Participle Ik—

1. I have to help him.— Active

He has to be helped by me.— P<t«/»e

2. We have to help him.— Active
He has to be helped by w.— Passive
3. You have to help ut.— Active
We hive to be helped by you— Passive

>f»y/ean'»bo»ld etc. + verb

'may/mljht/ihoufdwoolJ-
rtirvef < Active Voice* can/could,
verb rT»T 1 1 ^
ensf * Passive Voicc*can/could/may/nifjhi
iho“

• odd *»:; he m-n } «^r be % »iT verbal Past Participle rtj

vnr » Active Voice if have+Past Participle rr’T ?. Pamve M
* have been T- Pa St Participle «i rvi I i

1. I can help hi-m.— /<c//»e

He caa be fcrfped by me-— osjIi#
2. 1 should help h'Ji?.— v4c/r»#
He »hoc!d be helped by sr.c.—Pasil>e
 — —— —

3.
TRANSFORMATION 3S3

I should have helped him. Aetl\e

He should have been helped by me.— Passive
V erb + Preposition + Object
Verb ^ Prepositioa sirai | sV 39^ Rt? Object;
3 &—
1 look afttr him.
erl sfcer preposition t atr him inr object. Active ^ Passive
If <rt ^ Prepositions sir «l wf w ft5i sirai I stV Prepositions
^ by ^ STtn Ttr acrr fctr »traT i—
, Preposition+by+Object
Tfl —
1. I look after him . — Aeiire
He is looked after by me.— P<»MHe
2. I am searching for him.—.4crf»e

He is being searched for by me.—^<j«/ve

Ccueron- verbs % Passive Voice i by «t eeiVi tnp
by

wvn#!
ftrefr fit Preposition «t aele ^ J j
% i

1. He satisfied everybody . Active —

Everybody was satisfied with him.— Passive
2. He knows me. Active
1 am known to him.— Pasn'ie

3. Her conduct shocked me. Active

I was shocked at her conduct— Passive

4. HU reply surprised me.— Active

I was surprised at his reply. Passive
5. This book has greatly interested roe. —Active
I have been greatly interested in ibis book.— Pasrive

Verb+ Object+Object
fs5 ervifl it Active Voice H verb % w? objects S' jrr
® jects
? vtr FTiftT Tpn I, fru ftiffr; ^ i

He teaches rae English.

teaches objecu (me, English) j inii me rra’rv
English ftmYv i Object ^ Indirect Object vri sniiT J wV
Direct Object I ^ Fasuve Voice 5? in sttt v;gvf i
 382 now TO WRITE CORRECT ENCUSJf

2. I respect him.— Aethe

He is respected by vnz.—Passiie

Verb'lp be’

ff; RWf Active Voice 3 ^

am/is/are/wa$/werc/+to + verb. ,

^ ?TT7f i Passive Voice ? am^'is/are/was/were * r? to be

eftr to be k vr? verb w
Past Participle 3e—
1. Iam to help him Adite . —
He is to be helped by me. — Passfre
2. Iwas to help him. Ac/ire
He was to be helped by me Pasihe . —
3. We are to help him Aetire .
—
He is to be helped by us Potsite .
—
Verb 'to have’

If VTTTI ^ mv? Active Voice J} th ntj ^ Tpft

has/have/had4 to+verb.
^ »T«rf Passive Voice ? bas/havc/bad i n?
to b* ^ . .

to be i *T^ verb stt Past Participle ?>?; 5%—

1. I have to help him. Active

He has to be helped by me — Paxsive .

2. We have to help him —Active .

He has to be helped by us —Passive .

3. You have to help us . —Acthe

We have to be helped by you—PcJtnc

Alav/can/sbonH etc.+verb

% Active Voice 9 caii/could/inay/njisi*tM®^'j^,jjjjrt)U'

verbTtfrrli ami 9: Passive Voice if can/could/may/®’ '

would 9: VK he% •?« be i rr verb «t Past

wtffT Vrft*

vmf % Active Voice 9 havc+Past Participle trar f. ^

9 have been +Past Participle «i % t ^
rtt atrff qr wrm s

1. I can help him . —Active

He can ^ helped by me — Passive .

2. I should help him —Active .

He should be helped by me — Passive

.
 1 — — — —
—

3.
TR-ANSFORUATION 383

I Aethe
should have helped him.
He should have been helped by me. Passhe

Verb + PrepoHtlOD-f Object

Verb ^ tt; Preposition sirai I sfiS: sr^ Object;

3%—
I look
1. after him.
after preposition I him n; object. Active b Passive
i|
er 5t?r Prepositions Wf n cflf ri? ajai f si>r Prepositions
^ ?i? by w w str f%^r wrt I
Preposition+ by + Object

Uookufter him.— ;<«««

He » looked aCw by me.— Passive
2. am searchiog far him.— <<cfn<
He is being searched for by me.— Passive
Cfluifon—jt5 verbs « Passive Voice II by ett saVi srf* ^Ttr ^
W by ^ ee;!
^ Preposition «T seVt tm J t
I

w enff
1. He satisfied everybody.—
Eveiybcdy was satisfied with him —passive
2. He knows me. Active
I am known to him.— Passive

3. Her conduct shocked me.— Acme

I was shocked at her conduct.— Puinie

4. His reply surprised me. Active

I was surprised at his reply.— Passive

5. This book has greatly inirretted me.—i4cfive

1 have been greatly interested in this book . Passive —
Verb + Object + Object
TOef if Active Voice 3 verb % stf? objects S’ i
®pjects i( ^ 3&
He teaches me English.
. .
teaches ^ aR objects (me, English) silt ? i srS me tralr
English I gvfta Ol^l ^ Indirect Object tti *titT 5 sftr
^ Direct Object I ^ ^Pasrive Voice if re imr wre=n
 — ——
—— ——————
382 HOW TO WHITE CORRECT ENCUSH

2. I respect him. Active

He is respected by me. Passive

Verb ‘to be’

^ Active Voice fH jOTT ^

am/U'are/was/werc/+to+vctb. .

^ 3; Passive Voice if aro/is/are/was/wcre i ar?

^
•ffr to be ^ TIT verb Past Participle
1. I am to help him. — i^erfre
He is to be helped by me. Passive
2. 1was to help him.—yie/ire
He was to be helped by me. Passive
3. We are to help him. Active
He is to be helped by us. Passive

Verb 'to have*

ysi eiTTt T'r ttke Active Voice if ib tnt

has^liave/had + to+verb. . x
ki emf i Passive Voice if bat/have/had k trt to

to be « rr vetb an Past Participle «Pt; I &—

1- Ihave to help him.—Active
He has to be helped by me. Passive
2. We have to help him. Active
He has to be helped by us. Passive
3. You have to help us. Active
We have to be helped by you^Passlve
May/can/sfaonid etc.
+ ^

TSTTvef 4 Active Voice H cao/eould/m3y/m)|ht,i^°“j^^

'erbry^T^i bir «m( 4 Paiuve VoIceifcan^couU/w^y/ _ j,y
*ciiM * WTxte wTrt ? aftr be 4 eft verb «t Past
4 Active Voice H have+Pasi Participle tTT
rv-i'* c.

ithave been+Pait Participle ui»rtn 1 1

VTfTVTfVt*eWS —
1. I can help hint.— <<ert»e
He caa be helped by me,— Passive
Z. 1 ahottld help him. Active
He should be helped by sae.—Pattht
 TRANSFOXUATION 383

1. 1 Wm.— ^cJive
He should have been helped by me . —Paisht
Verb + PreposjllOD-f Object

Verb ^ TT? Preposition snai | >rtt >n^ Object;

Is—
I look afier him.
<r?i after w preposition | «?V him lar object. Active & Passive
I »;5lS qr ^ Prepositions^ Tqt ci T«3 fttpi aifli % si\ Prepositions
% erq by aqln w I— anar
Preposition + by +Object

W tsXT^rnl ^—
1. Hook after him.--.4ct/«e
He is looked after by me.-'P«iMj»e
2. I am searching for him.— .4e«Ve

He is being searched for by me.— Pawire

Cfltti/oa— verbs h Passive Voice if by e>i aabi st^t ttitT i
w?r by % »?;tl iTtSfr
^ PfCpOSlttOD «t «9l«7 ^ ^ I
I

W ^r^^f ^—
1. He satisfied everybody.—-tetne
Everybody was satisfied w/rA him.— Pojf/ve
2. He knows me Aciire .
—
1 am known to him. —Passhe
3. Her conduct shocked roe.—
I was shocked a> her conduct.— pajsiVe

4. His reply surprised me . Acthe —

1 was surprised at his reply.— P<««ve
5. This book has greatly interested me .
—Active
I have been greatly interested in this book.— Puirire

Verb + Object + Object

5^ Active Voice 3( verb ^ objects nil

objects if ^
He teaches me English.
'"trr leaches it! objects (me, English) srqtl nrS me trslq

^ English fimTa i ?rale Object ^ Indirect Object I ^

’tl Oirecl Object I ^ maqi «l Passive Voice S (t? sanr
 382 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH

2. I respect hm.~Aelhe
He is respected by me.~Passhe

Verb ‘to be*

^ TSHTT Active Voice *f tf SIHT ^

am/is/are/was/were/+to+verb.
i Passive Voiced am/is/are/was/were % i^lobev^J
•ftr to be % verb ^ Past Parltdple ft; If-
1. 1 am to help —
him . Actire
He is to be helped by me.— P«r/re
2. 1was to help him Aethe .
—
He was to be helped by me. Passive
3. We are to help him.—Acihe
He is to be helped by us.— Pijin're

Verb ‘to bare’

tiTTf TFK? Active Voice 3 if Btr

bas/have/had4lo+verb.
^

to be ^ BTfTT
% VK verb ft
Passive Voice if has/bave/bad
Past Participle ft; 3k-
k to be

1. Ihave to help him . Active

He has to be helped by me. Passive
—
2. We have to help him . Active —
He has to be helped by us. Passive
3. You have to help us. Active
We have to be helped by you— Parsire

May/cao/ibould etc.+verb

k Active
Voice 9 can/couJd/may/mlgbtAboaW,'^^^,
''erb T?riT 3
tittI k Passive Voice kcan/couM/may/nigbi.s
I

would k ?TT he wniT be k TIT verb fi Past' Parficipl*

t
aTTTf k Active Voice '
9 bavc+Pasl P' ' rmlt
9 have becn+past Participle fi ttI"
IF TT WfTF e
I. I can help him.
He can be
Z I should '
•

• •
He
 — —

3.
TRANSFORMATION 383

I should have helped him . — jlctire

He should have been helped by me. — Passive
Verb + PreposUton + Object

Verb % rr^ Preposition srRt f mV rr Object;

I look a/ier him.

trrf after preposition J sftt him object. Active & Passive
I Prepositions ct Ntf w fe?ji axsj i Preposiltoni
S »7T by «i aifl't tH sr^iT fwiT wnr I
Preposition + by + Object

w ??rfT^f ^—
1. Hook after him. j4ctitf

He looked after by roe.— Pasjjve

is

2. 1 am searching for biro.— .4ctne

He is being searched for by me.— Passive

Cauifo/t—f^ verbs
by ^ TttJt Wr
S: ?i? Passive
TTe'w Preposition
Voice it by ct seVi
n sart (bn V i
styf ^ } i

w enef «> ^—
1. He satisfied everybody. —.derive
Everybody was satisfied wi/A him.— Passive
2. He knows me Actire .
—
t am known to him.— Posn'ie
3. Her conduct shocked roc.— v4eri»e
I was shocked at her conduct.— Passive
4. His reply surprised roc.— -4frne
1 was surprised at his re^y.— Passive
5. This book has greatly interested me. <4riive —
I have been greatly Interested in this book.— Pessne

Verb + Object + Object

nt ewrf If Active Voice a verb « are e>-<rf objecti «« fi tir
« jects it
fkafe; ift—
He teaches me English.

.
w.e wsha
}
*

* t
T English firale i 0)^1 ^ l&dinet Object ttt I
Direct Object I cr*?f irt Passive Voice if ts bttt
 3S4 HOW TO Write correct encusii

initT object ^ Passhe 5 Subject

i ^ I T^^PWCT »s;T*r T9ET ts *r?? «t Paui«
Voice IH 5CTC ’HITSTT ^ifrt—
He teaches —Aetire
me Enslish .
I am taught English by him — Passive .

5!ln fraT? object « Subject eJttET iw iteit Passi'c Vokc

*5T7^|—
He teaches me English . —Aciire
English is taught me by him.— Ptiwire
^ »?sn «> srtT tti rt trem «
eg sTsfitE esbi i \ *

sn object «> ifJ Subject evnrr Passive N'cice 3 Tfcnt a iT i

lotmegalhe ScRtrnces

Interrogative Sentences with dolJoes'diJ.

eiT^ fnferrogatireSentcnces if cfo;sIoe«/J(d «r i t

»T»tf eT Pamse Voice 3 errl k nfteaf %'t ftithi ii—

(I) Do, does, did Eimif Af?t« '»‘tT t't ^rr »ft Assertive S<ntenc«

CRT f I tnk rf C'T crrr ct voice it fcMfTrrr Passive ? ctr V t

:c fc ipfr TET 9 do/does,Mid k ctJt. object k Nutribet -h

t
erb 4 Tense k cf-^m tro,Ms;are/w4s;were Rif*t verb *to bo‘ «t tt

C*'T i I

(li) t=ik C T **? cTfT «‘T InterropUive sentence 9 ctc i' l

rv cre-i ** W-
Did hs shine )o« ?— -Cf»/»c (Irtlerrogative)
yoa—Aeihe (Aiserlive)
••lie J.Jaf'use
H* yoQ~~A<ti»e (Assertive)
•• You *ere abused by fcim— Pattit* (Assertive)
•> Were joj shiiscd by him ? —Patilie ((nierrogitive)

»« «TT, 'D i hs abuse you* El Passive Voice i*f Were

abu-sed by fc m ?

1 C r*r
J W.i»if-dteheir you 7 ~Aei t* (^.sf^rf<^Ttti’'*)
. V.hy fee beat yoijw^/'«#4r(Assertivf)
Jiu'r
«.Why »rr5 you beeieo by h-n'i — Poult* (f.t'irt
t>!n he * ~A-'i‘ ft
2. f f e7*are hit
« ffe Frr^.'r* t‘» teji-’e* ’AcHi*
m A/c Ick-f/^s ^r^trxA fry frim ? — Poult*
 1 KANSFORMaTION 385

3. When did he help me ?—Aetire

=When he helped me ?—Aettw
=Wheo was I helped by him 7 —Passive
iDterrogaliTc Sentences without do/does/dtd

& Interrogative sentences if do/does/did «t

sTHiViary verbs ^
1. Will he write a book 1—Aeiive
2. When will he write a book 1—Active
3. Are yon writing a book Active
4. Can you write a book ? —Active
pr rwef do/does/did WT »fT_^Passive
il srrbi sT^f 5«ii
Voice flnrir*! % «rgHTT 4?»r f> 5^ k) mr
J. Will a book be written by him Passive
2. When will a book be written by him ?— ?<wj/ve
3. Is a book being written by yon 7— Pojjire
4. Can a book be written by you ? Passive —
Interrogatlre Sentences wJlb ‘ntw'

f? Interrogative sentences if ‘who’ imiT 1 1

^ Passive
Voice 3
% fir? w fircTT «> ere icS—
Rale I. Interrogative sentence *By whom' wirew ^ l ttrvii

ft; *who’ wr sebi Passive Voice if ^ Tbn 1

1
Preiff 3; sgrnT j f«f et firaWt ^ ff ftvir wr
^^
Who gave you this boot ?— detire
By whom was this book pven ?—^PajwVe
re:-^ ?mr sVr S—
1. Who will answer this question 7—Active
By whom will this question be answered 7—P«ij‘ve
2. Who can save the coontiy 7—Active
By whom can the country be saved ?—Passive

Inigerstire Sentences

Imperative 5<nf«!Ces ‘ arderleammand

^ ’IS ft Imperative Sentences & order m command eir 1 1

^Passive Voice if srr srere rea

 384 HOW ID W*JTE CORRECT ENGLISH

Hiti? object ^ Passive xf Subject fsrr ?* l

k SI3HK rf I fH fJTW CT K;pf cif FI F*? 5T

Voice T*? SC7T FTTSTT —
He teaches me English.— Retire
I am taught English by him. Passive
5rl»r fiT^T object ^ Sobject aat et F5 SEit Psss.^
Fin ^—
He teaches me English. Active
English is taught me by him.—Pairfre
^ «it SI?! a:?! Hcin *17 sirafin
Fi%^ ^ ?nfTa object ^ ^ Subject mm Passive Vcice?t^’*^'

Interrogatire Seateeces

Interrogative Sentences with doldoesidid.

FFTf
n’t ^ Interrogative Sentences
^ Passive Voice S
w do/does/did «T kVi ^ ^

TsiftWf 5i

(i)Do,'does/did ^ amf % gn? ^ Ff ^ AssertireSttW*

I 4T? FI ^ voice ^ r»n;i5'd 7t Passh'cgtTf 1

fw tS3 ft Wr TOa 9 do/does/did 9 .7%. cbjret i "ra*®

verb SB Tense ^ bs F
am/is/are/was/were »if? verb ‘to
jfirr Ji
(ii) 7aii BIT FT am ^ Intcrrogalive sentence if ? i

Did he abuse you 7—Acihe (Interrogative)

=He did abuse you —.tcrire (Assertive)
= He abused you —Retire (Assertive)
= You were abused by him— Painre (Assertive)
= Were > ou abused by bim ? — P<ujire (Inierrogsdrc)
^
spBTT, ‘Did he abuse you’
abused by him 7
^ Passive Voice J*i

fi; BTV7 fftr a—

1. Why did he beat you 7 —Active (Interrogati'T)
* Why he beat you—d4«?i e (Assertive)
"*
=• Why V. ere you (is
beaten by him 7—Passive
2. Does he prepare —Aeiire his lessons 7
= Heprepares his lessons Active
“Are lessonsprepared by him 7 — Passite
 1KA.NSFOKM/VTIQN 385

3. When did he help me 7 Aahe —

= When he helped me l—Aetire
“When was Z helped by bim ? —Passive
loterrogatiTe Sentences wSthoot do/does/did

»FT & laterrofative sentences Jf do/does/did Jnft

auxiliary verbs —
1. Will he write a book t — Active
2. When will he write a book 7~Aeiire
3. Are you writing a book 7 ^«/re —
4. Can you write a book ?— Active
R H do/does/did cr
Voice mrR fspnrT % wgsK
*rfl 5*17 f i ^ awa!f « Passive
fnl rt ?)
1. Will a book be written by 7—Passive bim
2. When will a book be wriuen by him 7— PoHire
3. Is a book being written by you 7— Passive
4. Can a book be written by you ?—Porrire

Interrogatire Sentences with *wbo’

Interrogative sentences if *who* wmr 1 1 eTRf eH Passive

% Rtc ttr pHR «f «iK —
Rale 1. Interrogative sentence ‘By whom’ fr wKW u? mvn
^
I

“if'tTlsri ft ‘who* Passive Voice if w^t t

R W7V7 sst ^
Who gave you this book 7— Actife
By whom was this book pven 7—^PoMive
wsjy ei^?r s?lr 5—
f • Who will answer this qoestion 7—Active
By whom will this question be answered ? Passive
2. Who can save the country?—Aeftve
By whom can the country be saved 7—Porrire

ImperatlTc Sentences

Imperative Saiienees : erderjeommand

, ifImperative Sentences order m command cr »7u J

***
*‘»»ive Voice if cs aerc —
 I

386 HOW to wRire correct fnolish

Rolel.
^ if wk & Let ^
ifXB\
Rule n. S be+Past ParlieipJe is/are sift «i srf 1

^ ^—
1. Bring a glass of water. Aetive —
Let a glass of water be brought,—
P^jj/ve
2. Turn him out . Active —
Let him be turned out . Passive —
Note — if by you n ^ I

Imperative Sentences : aJvicelrequest

i5 Imperative sentences Ir «n Rivn (advicc/tequest) «t»TT

0a7 1 1 should be+ Past Participle ru «T.
Rio ^clj 51^—
1. Love your country.—^c/»re
Your country should be loved.— Pdjj/re
2. Feed the poor.— Aetive
The poor shoold be fed.— Parrfi’e
3. Help your friends.—derive
Your friends should be helped , —Passive
mi Let Jr 5 tfl ?,m ^rt w^i *rrl ffwr; i&—
Let the country be loved.— Passive
mftTR RiRtI RH RfcRW should be+Past Participle Jr Eitt ^
Wxbi ifhn I

Note — Imperative Sentences if please, kindly r^lft trtf J

tt tit 7RR1 sjfhr Passive Voice Jf irr ^ I

EXERCISES WORKED OUT

1. ThebookAafgrc3tly/'»t«vn«/fne.
in the book.
I have been greatly fnlerested
at
2. I found the boys laughing
hashed aXhy the boys.
I found miveMbeinx
bridge.
3. Ilew down
down.
Ut the bridge be hewnroom exoaee.
4 Ten h\m to \c»yelbe
to tenve the room at once.
yj h m he
 TRANSFORMATION 387

6. He faugfif her to read Hindi,

She H'or taught to read Hindi by him.
7. I was taught to spealc Englisli by the teacher.
The teacher taught me to speak English.
8. The students loudly cheered the Governor’s speech.
The Governor’s speech was loudly cheered by the students.
9. Brutus accused Caesar of ambition.
Caesar war accused of ambition by Brutus.
10. He iviu chosen their leader.
They chose him their leader.
11. By whom was this poem written ?
Who wrote this poem 7
12. The king gave orders that he should be set free.
Orders were given by the king to set him free.
1 3. He made the pupils do the work.
The pupils were made to do the work.
14 We expect good news.
Good news Is expected by us.
15. What cannot be cured must be endured.
We must endure what we cannot cure
16. The Headmaster gave him a prize.
He was given a prize by the Headmaster.
A prize was given to him by the Headmaster.
Rule VI. Interchange of Interrogative and Assertive Sentences

Je! ^ Interrogative sentences ? vft wj % vrgmr Assertive

3! J ^ Interrogative sentences Assertive S i
^
I

3 (i) via? 3 Subject vftr uk Verb wt; (ii)

(Note of Interrogation) IN full stop ci svtn eftr (lii) Jrft

iRicrrogative sentence 3 not tI. nt Assertive 3 not s*fw vr

a&—
Interrogative sentence 3 not ^ Assertive 3 not <ki >raVi ^ vr;

Who would not run from a lion ? Interrogative. —

Everyone would run from a lion. Assertive. —
Can the deaf hear 7— Interrogative.
The deaf cannot hear. Assertive. —
Can human nature change 7—Interrogative.
Human nature cannot change. Assertive. —
Does God not help helpless men 7 Interrogative. —
God helps helpless men. — Assertive.
 388 now TO WRITE t»*RECT ENGLIJH
Should you not love yonr mother ?— Interrogative.
You should love yoor mother. Assertive, —
rt ^ iTTT % wtT Assertive sentences Interrogative senten-
ces ^ ^ 1 1

EXERCISES WORKED OUT

1. If you prick us, <fo ne «o/ Weerf 7— Interrogative
If you prick us, we bleed. Assertive—
2. If you poison us, do we not die 7— Interrogative
If you poison us. we Assertive
3. Were you not sent to school to study 7— Interrogative
You Were sent to school to study. — Assertive
4. Who is here so rude as not to love his country ?
— Interropti^c
There is none here so rude as not to love his country.
—Asseitiw
5. Hose I not warned you of this danger over and over 7
—Interrogative
I have warned you of this danger over and over.
^Assertive
6. This is not the kind of dress to wear in school.—Assertive
Is this the kind of dress to wear in school ? —
Interrogative
7.
10. There is nothing better than bard work to cure nerves.
—Assertive
Is there anything better than bard work to cure nerves ?
— laterrogathe
8. No one can put up with such conduct. ^Assertive —
Can anyone put up with such conduct ? Interrogative —
9. The beauty of nature is beyond description. Assertive —
Is not the beauty of nature Iwyond description ?
—Interrogative

We could not have succeeded without your help.

—Assertive

Could we have succeeded without your help ?

—Interrogative
Sentences
Rule Vn. Interchange of Affinaalire and Negative

Poje (,) Negative sentences ^ Affirmative if i Nega-

Pronouns^ Positive transform
tive Verbs, Adverbs. Adjectives
if

craTvyrn 1; a^r—
 TKANSFORUATIOV 389

none but the brave =the brave alone; none but a coward ==
the coward alone or only a coward; not always = sometimes; not
gone far = gone a little way; no one nation » more than one nation;
cannot but =bound to; no one ^everyone; never again=for the
last time; no sooner than = as soon as, i

None but a coward would flee from his duty. Negative —

Only a coward would flee from his duty.— Affirmative
Learned men are not always Judicious.— Negative
Learned men are sometimes wanting in judgment.
—Affirmative
No beard the bell than they ran outside.
sooner had they
Negative —
As soon as they heard the bell, they ran outside.— Affirmative
He cannot but give me tbanks.— Negative
He is bound to give methanks. Affirmative —
No one will deny that your soo bas done his best.— Negative
Everyone will admit best.— Affittnalive
He left no plan unrr/e</.— Negative
He tried every plan. Affirmative —
His temper did not Improve with age.— Negative
His temper became worse with age. Affirmative —
«rr? Affirmative sentence ^ Negative if at
Positne Verbs, Adverbs, Adjectives eftr Pronouns sit Negative if e;
^^~doubtful = not sure; aIways=Dcver; as soon 8s=no sooner
fiian;
ailanone; quick ODderstanding=slow understanding

Tvi e —
It always pours when it — Affirmative
rains.
It ne-.er rains but it poors. —Negative
As soon as the master entered the room, everyone was silent.

— Affirinative
Ao sooner did the master enter the room than everyone was
si!ent.-Ne8ative

Only a little child would talk like this. Affirmative —

bone but a little child would talk like this. Negative —
^ere there is smoke, there is fire. —Affirmative
"I^sre is no smoke withont fire. Negative —
1 ou alone were to blame for this.
^Affirmative —
 390 jjow TO wnm connscr bsgiish
None bul you were to blame for this.—Negative
As soon as he saw her, he ran away.—AfBnnative
No sooner did he see ber than he ran away.— Negative
RoIe(b)— tft Affirmative sftr Negative sentcace^
fsma; Adjectives Degree it
«T *t7T ^ transform j;

5h—
You are not idler than he is.— Negative
He is as tall or you are.—Affirmative
/ am not so clever as you. — Negative
You arc cleverer than —Affirmative
/.

You are noi better than your sister. — Negative

Your sister is as good as you. — Affirmative
Affirmative % Negative eiVt Negative & Affirmative

Positive
trmr (i)

if
Adjective
Positive
^
^
Degree
Comparative
^ if (ii)
3&— Comparative
Negative Positive
ci

^ (aot art f7i «r) tim Positive ^ Negative 9 (not ^

(ill) <7T!T ^ <*n<r7 e^»r wrftg i ept ^ fkts 9T
nfi ^ ’tPT ^ awt if na wr) I

wr
srr ^ ar+flf aft t?^f ^ ^ i

Rale Vllf. lotercbange of Assertive aod Exefimsfory SesteDces.

Rule (a)—Jffir Exclamatory sentences if how what «rre. sV

Assertive ? qftTffifT ^ 3: w hnwT ^ g^ iv a t 5—

0) What m how ^ TOi 05^ Adjective veo'^rwV
^ I
(ii) *rf^ ^ Adjective sm, m if Adjective ^
Noun i ^ Adjective (great, terrible, dreadful ^ wonderful r^rrfO
«r «fVc (iii) wf Assertive sentence wtct ^e. wrfraivT 3
^
Noun ^
Subject
t
^ TO,
Note of exclamation wtwt
Verb sV w»Jt 9 Adverb. Adjective «ftr
5 full stop «t

Jfiki —
How dreadful was the dream J— Exclamatory
The dream was v^/y dreadful. Assertive —
What a problem it is I— Exclamatory
problem. Assertive
It is a great —
What a lame excuse !—Exclamatory
That was a very lame excuse.— Assertive
What a piece of work is mao ! Exclamatory —
Man is a wonderful (great) piece of svork.—Asserrive
O whaf a foolish questiem to ask l—Exchmalory
 ^ 1 !

TRANSroRMATION 391

a very foolish question to ask.— Assertive

It is

What delight a quiet life brings !— Exclamatory

A quiet life brings very sweet delight.— Assertive
How sad was the sight of the deserted city !—
Exclamatory
The deserted city presented a very sad
sight.— Assertive

get
Note (a)— qf? Exclamatory sentences
Assertive if
S Subject nVr Verb
Pie ?:>r & (wefetrit) sRtz
^ rr

fooli sh !., How foolish it is an xw Exclamatory sentence

J 1

L, A tw— What
«
^
a lame excuse 1= What a lame excuse
foolish. wV wtr. w
it is or was
*^tt Assertive if It is (was) a very lame excuse.

Note (b>^f^^,R^# O, Ah «nft Interjection i wV ^f, a)

Asteriive »I
rwt enr? m? i

W«.
sentence if O (Oh) that. O (Ob. Ab) to be.
Assertive S ^ Adjective (sad,
^ Interjections
fyould that I had not wasted loy time !— Exclamatory
f tvIjA I had not wasted my lime. Assertive —
0 /Aaf the desert my dwelling place t— Exclamatory
were
f WrA were my dwelling place.— Assertive
that the desert
O that he had a son I— Exclamatory
iy/ish that he had a
son.— Assertive
0 to be at home !— Exclamatory
Jvihh I were at home.
Assertive —
that he should die so young !— Exclamatory
should die so young.—Assertive
Rn/
•'*fr ^
Exclamatory sentence S If aVW fVt 1 ^
if wish er desire fasn

/ could only see him once I Exclamatory —

/
wmA (desire) to sec him once. Assertive
could only get one
—
more chance !— Exclamatory
V'ish to get one more chance. — Assertive
*1% Exclamatory Sentences fcrfUnfinitive
''t

^
^ (Infinitive
^
fne srlt
(I wirw
«T5l ‘It
rf.
is
**
Assertive sentence ^ |
392 now TO WRITE CORRECT BNOtBlf

To think of hrt meeting me here t — Exclamatory

It is strange that he ihould meet me here.— Assertive
To Imagine my seeing a ghost instead of ray friend !

— Excfamatory
It h strange that I should see a ghost instead of my friend,

— Assertive

EXERCISES WORKED OUT

1. IJ only I could sec him reproach him for his iogratitnde !

—Exciaffl3to7
I wish I could see.... ingratitude. —Assertive
2. O for the might that laid the traitor down !— Exclamatory
I wish I had (possessed) the might that... .down.
—Assertive
3. 0 my son ! would that I wen dead and you alive I

— ExelafflStoiy

I wish that I were dead and my son alive.—Assertive

4. What a piece of work is man !— Exclamatory
Man is a wonder/ul piece of work.— Assertive
5. 0 that I were young again ! Exclamatory —
I wish that I were young again.— Assertive
6. O that she were living to this day.— Exclamatory
I wish that she were living to this day. Assertive —
7. O if I could only raise the cover and look inside !

—Exclamatory
7 wish to raise the cover and look inside Assertive —
8. A horse ! a horse J my kingdom for a horse I
— Exclamatory
A horse I must have, even at the price of my kingdom.
—Assertive
9. Too late ! tao late I you cannot come in now.— Exclamatory
It is now too late for you to come in. —Assertive
10. //I could only gain the first prize !— Exclamatory
I wish to gain the first prize. — Assertive
11. 'WcU done !—Exclamatory
That was well done. 1
You have done well. J
12. A fireman, and afraid of sparks ! Exclamatory —
It is strange that a fireman should
be afraid
 •

TRANSFORHATIDN 393

13. I wish I had known that long ago. Assertive —

Would had known that long ago ! Exclamatory
that 1 —
14. 1 wish I had never left my home. Assertive —
Would that I had never left my home I Exclamatory —
15. We had a very merry time of it last night. Assertive —
Whai a merry time wc had of it last night !— Exclamatory
16. A little knowledge is a dangerous thing. — Assertive
How dangerous a thing is a little knowledge .'—Exclamatory
17. I should like to see my native land again. Assertive —
//only I could see my native land again ! — Exclamatory
18. To think of out meeting in this lonely place 1— Exclamatory
// is strange that we should meet in this lonely place.

—Assertive

19. He was the tallest man in the town.— Positive

There was no man to the town who was taller than he was.
—Negative
20. dll must admit that he was a great writer.— Positive
No one eon deny that be was a great writer.—Negative
21. He did not take tong to read this book.— Negative
He read the book very ^wicA/y.— Positive
22. Should not everybody be taught his native language '>

—Interrogative
Everybody should be taught bis native language.— Assertive
23. This story is very beautifully told. — Assertive
How beautifully this story is told '—Exclamatory
24. Read this book to write English correctly Simple —
Read this book and you will write English correctly.
—Compound
// you read this book you write English correctly.
—Complex

EXERCISE
Transform the following sentences as directed—
h I Wish I had never left the place. (Tuni into exclamatory)
2- As soon as he saw the tiger, be fled. {Toni into negative)
5. America is one of the richest countries. {Turn into positive)
He was too sad to speak < word. (Remove 'too')
4. How low has he fallen I (Totu into assertive)
The police is searching for the thief. (Tom into passive)
7. This fact is too evident to retpm proof. (Remove loci')
•• He leads a miserable life. (Twa into exclamatory)
394 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT CNOLfSir
9.

Can I mr for|sl him 7 (Turo into paishe)

10. Whowouldnol love his country ? (Torn into incrfive)
11. Nooneuw a brithterdsythsn this. (Turn into mterroRative)
12. This is the most beaatiftil pearl I have ever seen . (Tom into positive)
I j. We shall be blamed by our countrymen. (Turn into active voice)
14. Ifound him lauihingat me. (Turn into passive voice}
15. 1 made him sing a tong (Turn into passive voice)
16. 1 wrote him a letter. (Turn Into passive voice)
 CHAPTER XVin

IDIOMS AND PHRASES

COMMON MISCELLANEOUS PHRASES
1.

(A)
I do not know even Xht A BC TO) of science.
Old men cannot enjoy animal spiritt (Rf«f grwftn w) vjPacTi)"
Kashmir is an apple of discord (c^r? between India and
Pakistan.
My son is the apple of my rye («^m.
The Argus-ey ed ?i?t eft arai) lover watched his rival.
Many politicians have always their own axe to grind

Ifevery woman turns a h/ueWocA’/ff^, every home will become

* elttb (a woman affecting literary tastes).
He won through back-srairs Influence ^r). w
There Is bad blood (trsTnl between Russia and America.
Even our reading-room is often turned into a bear garden
«f;ui wi^).
Lifeis not a bed
of roses epf).
Nehru was a big gun (agra yi s^f^) in the world politics.
I took a bird's-eye yiew (sTroft =1^0 of the whole place.
Birds of a feather («:W ?rrE i fftu) flock together.
There is black sheep sirfrB) in every society.
The Nobel Prize is a blue ribbon (trffw tor) for a scholar,
l^n't be proud of blue blood
f5i).
This piece of land
is a bone of eoniention (Je vw efg) ^
kwtween the two families,
^gdish is my bosom friend (rrai ftRitf) fir*).
My bronn study (srs:'’-5nmi <rarsn «i rr) was rudely shaken.

repiial punishment
(?f3-er?) i$ rare now.
Tstel Was a man of cast iron mil (*?— A 5? *r fi^)-

( 395 )
 396 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENOLISH
The issue was decided by a easting vote (fsprir* sn).
Do not always buifd eastUs In the air (nit Pr?i)-
A soldier must net be ehleken-hearsetH^^).
A close fisted (rr») man is not happy.
There was a dose tote wV frr? Jf fpm Tim in oj
constituency.
There was acoU blooded (smc*t murder oftlse

child.
There is a cold war bttp?) between Russia and Aiceria
That Shri Subbas Chandra Bose is yet alive is a cock and bad
story ( yifl Tp, srfcsMH-f'i’i
She shed crocodile tears sTq) over the death of bw
step-son.
His case could not stand cross-examination (f?n) in the court
AU protests against casteism are a cry fn the wilderness {^‘
xtg^, SW
A curtain lecture (tirRHiT 3 TTsft is the worst tbinf for

a husband.

(D)
Damocles' sword «mft tihTT) hangs over mMy *

politician's head.
I am tired of my neighbour’s dog-in-the-manger pofiey(^
% JT snpn BPr ^
sftr *r *r).
A graduate is a drag in the market (fVw ?5g *rf^ sf p) in

country.
Wine gives you Dutch courage (jt^ si which goes doRU
soon.

(F)
A candidate gets credit for<r fair hand (sn*n^ & ‘Tl't at
rcTEfetitP)-
^
The fair sex (sTRt) is tender by nature.
trouble.
A fair-weather friend (g® ?rrvi) leaves us in
black mat e .

One has to pay a fancy price (it^urt Pt) in the

My woollen suit has/iur colour (Ren (i)-
No religion encourages fast Hting (»fhi-ft5rT d\m)- n
In the company of old men I feel like a fish out of ^
^

Flesh and blood JPiW-vrfh) can bear it nO

If you hope to pass, yoo are in a fool’s
paradise (XFI um rt).
 IDIOMS AND PHRASES 397
One likes to enjoy /e,(, ranij (ftsi it eft;) i„ snmner.
He isa/r« hnee (?7firR) polilician-
The student was fined for laUiig

At the lime of my
Fr«,ck /«ve

brother’s appointment I
^ ^
found'^n'^^^a
friend at court (Hrmi
»t^).
(G)
Holi is a jn/n *y (sms^-aOT *, j
rW i. not

* •eW me
All Sr“! 10 in my need.

(H)
In Ibe acddenl he had a Mr-brM ,x,pt (eu-w rmr).
A ta.„eh,d *»W (.mn eh IwhsAsI eh, errtTOIl cannot
help his brother.
(»)

JJe was suppressed with an iron hand

riot
{ai^rt %).
«'!« was man of iron
kIH (*,

If

^ m
« you arc master of none.
.ft cw « a it

ould not employ a Jait

»
bird (auft wtutfr erf etr»T ? ^
tl) to guard your house.
Don'* u
“ I look
t. A.
at this problem with Jaundieed
eye % frre.

Th * commander’s
iaeonk speech (wfeTT-tfri rnr) *as
Hisf«miL effective,
ish argument made him the laushing stock
{R»re ^ Vtw)
^'’cry teacher must have a bit of teamed leisure (ftotwa ci
••tTr).
 1

398 »IOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLUH

Even to-day capital gets lion’s share (aafVs ?T & rp

in production.
The police couMnt detect the light-finsered person ’

VK*rt) who look away my pen.

A student must be a light sleeper 5aT5T-nTTt ?T?n).

(
The long and short (tntftr) of what I mean to say is that j
must be honest.
The silken hrig ehthes are lovely Tltn*).

(M)
Mrs. Smith’s maiden name was Miss Jones (ftrtr 5r n *ri

The M.P.’s maiden speech (-fjetr S ffTT ’im) Ml »

impressive.

Dr. Jha was a man of tetters

Pandit Nehru was a man ofparts gr *TaT )•

One must be a man of spirit (fnprt ^3*7).

%Vhat help can you expect from a man oj straw

Modem English poetry is net meant ht the man In the

1*
Hii discovery of a gold-mountain proved to he « mare’i ee//
ftati vr •nnroBTi >fr& •m mPr^ tW.
This Dill is tlill a moot point (»nr *11 tHt fVTr
fmj.
Qirbal is well known for his mother wit (fspnftsr

Hiller's conquest was a nine days' wonder (A btsit fiJ

she TVinn rmra mrn).

{O)
*ot^}
An oily tongue {dtdt, wxi») IS a maiier-key to

A reader must have an open mind

before he has read it ftrt
t* r
Za-nindari aboliilois is no longer ff/i vve»t.£i/i

iwr Uxr foj frrj).

. • _ 1.
Uhanopeifeefff<<ii'pifTi9*i^ ar»e t'l) that |

key w proTJOiioa in Bihar.

The i* o^^tof hanJ(nn i n'St).
 IDIOMS PHKASES 399

'°-”°*.'°°^ P™*"* lo bt a
rtm?’''". Palo,a-, bcx
« ?tr Jf wPt^) for mankind.
TOs v/ork seems to be a Penehpe’s n-e^.
^ery nurse gets pm mono> (?«ir?
(firg qniT ^ sr rt)
^ fiimnn).
w-y
th*v settled down
** ^ ^’’fO «hw
in new places.
I ga\e a point blank
(mz ^ it) refusal.

f Jd«« “i*
'™fOM(ir5nffrf^?fJ(?ra)conncctcdwithit.

( Q )

'* * 9K«r/i* wr^ift, and so cannot

layb^y pull on with

( R )

Oae must lay by something

against a Mi>t/ day (rftn).
“'rp/r/is (iftilat ttTtt) made
bim almost mad.
^efe IS no rtady money (»it?
arm) with me now.

Russia and England were tied togelher

“ • wye n/«n</ (WTHPft
ft j,il ^).
“n’t be done by the ruU of thumb
«}wrft«

iS)

choose betwrcR fnend and country, one

is

** * loose (aRf>r« in him.

Rtf'*'oa '

is the sheet-anchor (ccft sgro) of life.

 W?Tr TO W»rTE CORRECT ENCtlSIl

is c,-' tmT (nT«j ^ to real progress.

ssnk people escaped with the jitrt o/M«rr«rf
t-r* tt; *T XT
Ti:e ^^&^^ss t$
^
joiag down because of my sleeping partner

T>as wc'tk ciasot be done quickly by a slow coach (s^«^

XT*') I.Vt n:T servant.
Even a srtaV ftp (»sq sftit) like me can do some service to the
vvtntry.
Wa hard for wealth and fame but in vain. Now you call
tried
t'jeta rubbish. These are *?ar grapes indeed (cr^ *f^
i\ rwtr It the grass
ott). ^
gut trx) is more dangerous than as
open ener-iy.
Yv'U must use spft sawder (gmO to win his favours.
Fovier and prestige are sour grapes (ijrjt to disappointed

leaders.
MittSs' I* a ttn vm).
My Weed's house is not more than a stone's throw (sr^t) fro®
mi«?«
let «i help these street Arabs (irm fx^).
The 'tVsth Of The Moth* is ihesiviMrongf^g^afWiTt^
t^t et «w) of Virginia Woolf.
(T)
ent)
On? mttst w-ork. For mere tail talk {erfrrtt

won't sUv
Most of the viUagers do not know even the r^ree /Ta (tT^

(U)
There Is tto ^'om for the upper ten (avw tn tttf) in *
socialist
_
ivstietn of a^viel)',
tfltthr) of life make you
wiser.
The H>vt trf tAiMws
Ihe Wm
of World nrorherhood is a utopian scheme

( w )
When th? *hil' »anl. many men met a Ha.'er/ g«rf (wx-»w.«

*''
tTir vdd tntn‘« pw«*ni'e threw o n-er A/j/i*rr t» rpt *>

. I on his vWldrcn** mirth.

(fa'rtmr'sftrv
osoi-'i vm Is n nl.’f«*<V/^»n/for a teacher
«t 0\
 J

IDIOKIS AND PHRASES 401

II. IDIOMS WITH VERBS

[a] jdioms with verb ‘To Be*
He has fceM afier (rfh, if an employment but in vain
I should be up to (HJTR
f'brr) the tricks of my enemy.
niust be up and doing
(fiRTinl^ ?h?i) in rainy season.
Mo. r.r™„ „„ no, ,„n»
QTO).
.1^)
"" " .tat S m,
°
(!. w J°^Xrr"
1 .« Jlck o/ (,iiT n, nini, hi, misconducl.

«(
All U, hard hboa,
„/„o o.o// (»,„ inn).
"I W«,au (TO, ib,,) wilh dtonbardl.
*"
I
At TOT mdT).
‘ .// ,n„ ,0 (TO » hi, ,p„th.
^
^ ffai) at cooking.
^fdi-

!re rt^rO.
1 hav,. a
<" beck and call wmi;.
Co-
capitalists are or</a;;err-</raH'ff (nrrt tniftiffm).
*1“’*® of borne in ?iiJT) mathematics.
Thi.,
I am n/
t^) at night.

I
**
(‘•'f ^l) to decide what to do.
tPT thr) with you.
The
^ at sea
Book^ in general knowledge.
1‘
htVZ7
'vto Is i„ ,h
^i).
^ f^i) at this meeting ?
tVfaen
^*'’** farmers look as though they were in the

^'“•'tintheTO,'^"^
'!*
*f«»'4*’*f'nf5Tt5ti) when his pen
hall.
His
A go^odT ”• *"• Ws speech.
*" (STOTusT ?hr0 of his teacher.
B.'26
 402 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH

If you are in
>ou can’t get a responsible job.
your teens fr TOft?r i ^ ri^)

Vinobaji isJn the van (sin

of thinkers.
In the event of a world war America will ffld that she is in ik
wong box (ttfcTfS Ri 3f( <«lJf «r?Rl).
The Indian army is on the alert (tm ^).
Capitalism is on the wane
tf?^i) now.
He IS o«r of temper
(r:j5 even at trifles.
Colonialism on Us last legs
is
He was absent, because he war out of sorts (yrtt r^)
today.
To a church is out of place (sirimi
fight in /

She has been out of her mind (irpia- f^) since her husbani
died.
I do not care if you go against me, because your opposition
is neither here nor there frin).

Ad upstart is full of A/we(f(RR*fr ^).

(b) idioms wmi Other verbs
(A)
My lawyer acts for (rtd if «nr me.
I act from r» «t«w irm) a sense of duty.
Heat acts on (stre 'tfwn) nieials.

You should act up to (ngmE *ni WEm;) my advice.

( B )
He helped me in the beginning but backed out P
sfRi) at last.
You must back up (u^ «E=rT) your friend.
My evidence will bear out (mresi ctm) the charge.
(rTE*3«t «
Come to the point instead of beating about the bush
RTfT ntvti).

Slow out SIT jwpn) the can dle.

The farmer isbreaking ground (whiwi, wur 5 ^ ‘ST’TT).

When all were silent, I broke the tee (jft^ u’lr

my fruni
I broke the news (swfpre ai tnrr^ mra) to

about his father’s death,

I saw the thief but be broke away (an »ri).

He breaks In «'''ry morning.

atVin S^) my house.
A tbicT broke info broken off
The lover’s engagement
is fhii).
 inio^ts AMD PHRASES 403
Pox has broken out in the town.
The college broke vp (from «n
Gir^mixbrousht about
^ ?hn) for holidays.
Jrl^ ?:Trr t;ri) a ®
great
change m
our country.
High prices have been brought down
(;rl% ^ sm ?ii sft^ ftijrunJ.
yKe% bring jorth (awr new leaves in spring.
^is inquiry brought out if gpn) hidden things.
Iwas brought up (^sR-qigg
iWt qt f%3n aw) by my mother.
Don t brood over the past (N^innw

( C)
My friend called at % qt qr HE hw) my house,
in
(3^ ^irai) a doctor at once.
The cry called off (t^R sTiri) my attention.
I called on (*r? a?w) my friend this morning.
A drowning man calls out (fqpspn) for help.
I «nnot call up (rr (bat old incident.
The teacher called over
(hr smtsn) the roll numbers.
« 1» useless to carry on (mn rtri) this business.
He carried out
wm hri) roy wishes.
Worried my point (e^
»nnn) in the debate.
Dur college team carried
the day (dnm) In the match.

Mvy ** ^ •"'fO.
k east all the others ihro the shade (shm wr ^).
n cast a slur upon
t
(W« sprpn) your great family,
wnen caught his eye
I
(rr atwai). I called him.
A dtowntng man will catch at a straw (hwz 4 Sr): hi (rth stHi).
menca has caught a Tartar
(q% % vri <RHt) in Russia,
e secret has now
come to light qVwt).
ow did the accident came
to pass ((bn) 7
•'/(mm & my expecution.
•'''A fi>-ins

I count upon
finft ^1 my friend's vote.
(s^ Eoods but cries down
those of others.
Cut short
*rxRi) your speech.
Hit misbehaviour
cut me to the guide (mf^ wla q{wRi).
’ ^ e?qRi) world HHTqiR
peace.
 itow TO w*fTr couBfCT rvotPu

{ n )

Thii merchant 4/aj/# tn (rrrtfr flee.

Vou thnulj iltal ntll hy (rrF* «r^) >our tervanl.
PIm»c i/raf cut the cirdt.
I have nnthfni; tn d.t (s')! jtttj tnarf) with politic?.

I mult finiih thi? work by 10 p. m. hr cr by erooh (‘r^

»h »Trt: h •ewt -*m nx «ft <*t ft).
Da the Jfory Mo verse (v^rrT vrrl: kt r^t)-
I nm d'jrif up (vcBi) under the presoirc of wort.

What does your arfument «fr/rf at (trrr «rf^) •

The enemy was drhe^ out (mn f;it »w, fr?! wpn).
The speaker ilxrtt on ttsRt ei the subject well.

( E )

Lady Macbeth tggfd Macbeth on (»««n5n) to murder.

( F )

Why do you /ighi shy of your teacher ? (5T*t

Is itproper to fat! foul rlsn) one's master ?
Boys were askrf to fall in (eer 9 STt
Sometimes even fast friends/i// our (^>rft
Old laws are falling info abeyance (savrtf 9 ’t rm).
He fell rtprey{ff%ff. r)sn— victim) to cholers-
My resoiulioQ fill to the ground («ro t)vn) fot waat of supp^-
thnju
You must have soioetbins to fall back vpon (ffTKT
old age.
All appeals fellflat («if< w ti)m) on the mob.
my
I go! ahead {snn wri) of others in the race.
His performance fell short of ray eipectatioO (W
(G>
truth.
It is through inquiry that we get at (q|-J5n) the

I have gat back (ei^rr iRi) the book from him- .

in
While passengers were getting davm (aiirei) ^nd getting ( «

the train, I lost my bag.

I gof over (fkwJT >rHt) the difficulty at last.
The boy was asked to get out (eifr fw^st^n).
My son got through (^ig- wRt) the examination-
Don’t get drunk (rrrra ^ wnn) on d^V-
y One must get rid o/fet
*
,

He got into hot water (ftiR

^9 q^m)
ft
habits.
'TWi) bad
for committing a
e
 imOMS AND MIKASTS 405

If)ou quarrel withjourtwsi.jou will into a scrape (it<V

f TpO and then it is not easy to get out of the scrape («t<V qi
5^
ftrTi & fSrrtRi).
We got )iWt>/(BTTtx 5^) the proposed taxation beforehand.
Seeia was gUet avray (jw ft S ^ f<« *iRi) to Ram in marriage.
In the end the enemy gore tn (j^sn)-
A flower gixes out (tm ftmasit) Hi perfume,
liegate oxer (sjs ktsti) charge to the new oSicer.
0.ie must gixe up ^ ft cliat) bad habits.
A student should ghe
himself to {sift Ft amsi) studies
'Vhen the boy came late again. I gate him a bit of my mind
(gW
slrai).

Don't g/rr the cold shoulder (acT’fl-'t stt ft «!» cisi) to your
friend.

The house gore n ay (fnt »ri) doting rains.

We should gfre bad company a wide birth (5T tpn).
Pl«ase give ter {str ^j) to my prayer.
Don't gfre eurreney (n't ftwi) to baseless rumours.
A poet gltes rent to (r* his own feelings.
My dog went after «TBt c^si) the thief.
1 have given the go-by (clpn) to silty customs.
If I go on (irtO ttRt) with
my work. I will do it.
America and Russia cannot go hand In hand (fta ft ere vm).
rat
Russia's recent attitude will
“Slag the world
gnofon* H'oy (eyn r AF frt) in
situation.
Let us go to law
(ft^ srt ftwi) to decide the case.
Lawcan’t go out of Us way (ftmfini «no ft rawi) to help us.
.
Wecannot say that those who tty to reach the moon go on a
Axif t errand
FTg ft tTRi).
1 am prepared
to go through fire and water (?nTt tt'ert ra arenff Ft
^11 ^rai) to help my friend.

(ID
I can't lake up your work, because have my hands full
I (ap
If a businessman has clean hands ((areair trn) he will prosper,
a Aond (voter) i/( (fr if era the construction of the
'«i'«ge.building.

English Grammar at my finger’s ends ft ft aftfati

^is rule holds good even to^ay agm).
has a short memory (fstrav^MTr frin) in old age.
 406 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH
The boy had not the face (cheek) to argue with the
Principal.
Some of the printing presses have too many irons in the fire (pni
3 5PI WRt fU CTI STR stHT SJT erjn If wr).

The talkative boy was asked to hold his tongue (57 ifRi).
A great man is humble; he does not hold his head high (str i
ftn g;’^i TTisn).

I hold it true {Hc?r irpRt) that duty is rewarded. Hold true=fo

continue to be true.
The advancing army was held back (ftd stht).

The spirited horse was held in (ih* ct toi sirt).

The judgment in this case is held over (wfhci nn

Keep in with (ii;r 9 nsrt) your neighbour.

Keep off (sTOT ifwr) bad company.
Military plans are kept dark (fefi «T n?l flwO,
Flatterers should be kept at arm's length (ji tm *rt). ^

You must live economically to keep your head above water fc»
^ ^ % WjT’T ifm).
If you keep good hours (sit ai alim ?i iTtnt) it will keep you Sli

but if you keep bad hours or late hours ifteJn at irt4t) you *31
fall ill.

Many labourers do not get as much as would keep their hey

and soul together (fwsfi ifwt).
('ffrft et
Our farmers work hard to keep the wolf from the door
yaaO If twwt).
(L) . . .
He looked blank when he was informed of his failure (ftcr iW.
UTfRl).
I laughed in my sleeve (iR*ift-*R at his funny dress.
Even lovely places are laid waste (TivrT iVstt, at miT
war.
The dog was let loose (j^ tslf
The enemy's plan was laid bare (3? ftrt wm).
A tiger lies in wall (fgT tfWi) fof *** P^^*
A hunter lays (sets) a trap (wiwfe^rn) for wild beasti.

One must lay up for a rainy day {*i«? t f5fR rtrrn CT^)-
returned late at night and saM.
‘ Ut
The drunken husband
in" (ifr^ ir:3 ^).
The thief was caught but let off (^ fin »Ri).
 IDIOMS AND PIIRAStS 407

The son lived up to the expeetaiion («nrq?TR) of his father.

Animals live on ^
grass.
A mother looks after her children.
One should not look down upon (?*n ^ ^i33Ti) the poor.
You must look sharp about it sR^i).
(M)
I fail to make out (B*r>pn) what you say.
The enemy was asked to make up ctsn) the loss.
The rival parties made peace (gip^hn «CTt) at last.
Please make room (a»rp for me in the bus.
I excused the student
when he made a clean breast of (ste-otk
'pn) the whole
matter.
A teacher works hard to moke both ends meet sTtt’i-

Though young, Netajl made his mark (Tn STR ^T^n)

“ politics.
hWem essayists make a mountain out of a mole-hill
^ 'rra^^rrt, Rrt tn ttTT rnwr).
("ro make much ado about tioihing" also has a similar meaning.)
He writes in such a confused way that I can make neither head
^
^ «m) of It.
wn'i make little (light)
0/(3^ amsm) others.
Don’t make much of (xgt smswi) yourself.
You caused me a heavy loss, and you should, therefore, make

(utosi) of(ufvv il wfvw gw asRi) what we

hav

Life isvery sad but one must make the best of a bad bargain (jft
^ ^ 'h gui 33rt).
The time for work has come and so »e should make huy while
' *
^ & irnr ssm).
'^hen my friend called at my house, l requested hita /• make
"nseljat home (ur 3 ^ tR5 tfgi).

(N)
The ring-leader was caught and so the plot was nipped In the bud

(**>
uie abused
. me and I paid him back in the same (Aij #>m) coin
f‘R=n,s1g|gi|fV*7*TK*^^STgT).
 408 now TO wmrt cor«ect ENcustf

There art men who instead of doing nsefu! works plek ho!es in

other} (other's eoat) (eh ^»*sn).

When there was an exchange of hot words and bfows, my advice
poured oil on the troubled voters eftr

Even college students very often p/a/ truant (err Tt tt »=r:^ ^rn

i »T^ ntr-Txr vrrK’n).

Congressmen played second fiddle (Wt? «T>r 3 et
•tm to Nehru,
A
real friend never plaps one false \n).
Driiishera played a double game (jj^t wtg’ ^^pn, «fhTT
The “
our country and created a rift between the Hindus and the Musluns.
Do not put off (f^«i<t cTJtl) till tomorrow what you can do
'
to-day.

1put off (fefi5Ri) my coat after college hours.

We put on (TTf^n) woollen clothes in winter,
Pat out (sTiTat) the lamp.
Most of os put up (tt^) in bad houses and have to put up with
the worst nuisance.
The enemy was put to the sword (rst «t emn).,

Your friend is put to (c/t) trial (iiflftra ftm) in your need.

I should not put in my oar {^tj^ in your affairs.
He must put the screw on his extravagant son.

It is putting (he cart before the horse amr *ET?n) if y°“

qualify yourself after appointment.

Let Ind ia put her shoulder to the wheel (|EfX & -rff 9 1^
^^sTl) to implement her Plans.
Please put down (feam) what you have to say.
He has put a spoke in my wheel (Tw; er^).
At the very start of his career he put his foot in it (mft

Do not run after wim) money.

The deer was run down. My health has run down (s^
m fhrsti).
,
An extravagant person often runs into debt (ca «rr *1 TT^/-

My money has run short (am ^ wT^i).

(S)
All the prisoners y/eie set free (ga ^).
Set about (55: 5?Tsti) your wort without delay.
My objections were set aside smn).
 IDIOMS AND niRASrS 409
Rainy season has jti in
I «-ant to set o//(s»«n:r
«thi) for home to-day.
The one was set on (acwni
riri) the other to fight.
**** capacity to set the Thames on
fire
V»5TVItRRTa«T!IT).
You should set your face against (e^ur $ rh^i) temptations,
us try to set our own house in order
mrrawr).
'^hen leaders aer peop/e iy ifte rnrr (9^ ?n w
Some critics split hairs
(fR ^ wr
^is house stands in need oj (rrzi repair.

'.rm.
Iasi flood my boat iroodmeifl jUH
rr).
Gjrman soldiers could not srond/AeiV groi//rt/ (<n^ (trr?>it
'?tnt)aga,n« the
Russians.
*hould stand to your guns and not shed
Wie tean^fii

‘«acher often stops 4/wrr(^isiSrrwaRT)»n the middle

«fliisl«*ure'*^

You must steer dear of bad men (eran saRl).

(T)
Children take after
(tretr iNr) Ibeir parents.
‘

'p
«ore
A//n for
deciding,
(w Vhr ^ 5rY
I shall
^ a th-ef.
take )our neivs into cccoiznf (fiRir

|»as taken aback

(^f«?r ^)3t
the sight of a lion.
«n the watch-dog
barked, the thiercs took to their heels («rFr

t^jYo“ should act and not merely talk big about yourself (iffn

A dwarf should not lake

a leaf out of a giant’s book
^ strong opposition, ow should take the
i bull by the

company’s
'''
tft% wowni WR ^irr) in buying a
shares.
foi" your own appointment you have
read out
of his mouth (q> ^ rhft err srrtJr-f^ «t maw
^on’t throw
cold yi'ater upon (seen? *f»r tot) my plan.
 4t0 Kow TO WRirc crmuFcr f>rot«n

When he flntlercd me, I (eU thit he ui«d to ikra» dust la m)

e} fS (Rlra 9 ijT «ftoT ^sn).
Politician* very often ri/m Me/r coe/ (trs TfT ^ gVfrr
3 for selfish end*.
Sometime* even sinner* turn oitr a new lea} and become laaU
(j' *nTr ITT sfr^TtR f5:nT9^n & rriRT. ^*Ft s st*T fwr).
In the man'to-man fight between the Rossians and the Cenaii*.
the latter turned tall (ftc femsif, ’tm wptT) at last.

111. lOIO.MSWrni PAIR OF WORDS

[a] NOt/NS TltAT CO IN PAIR
The English left India bat hagso^e (tre ttWR i cm).
Hitler carried /ire and sword wherever he went
if you work by fitsand starts &), yoo caaiet
succeed.
Do not try to earn money by Aook or by aook (IWV ^iiTr&)-
Let vtotk heart and soul [Not with heart and soul]
Do not adopt a Me and comer {gfl «V 5t^) policy to *erve yoor
interest.
I know his ins and outs (fi ferra).
His secretary is, to all intents and purposes (tnft snff ?, eT®W 3).

his master.
I love my kith and kin
India is progressing by leaps and bounds {?fbt wfil $)•

A worker should not be eager for the loaves and fishes («iS*
of office.
is *
This bag is meant for<w/i/r am/eniit. In newspapers there
column for odis and ends tnY jf ^
eTT»l"

Kashmir is a part and parcel (afv^ sm) of India.

A dishonest man goes to rack and ruin (smr)- /rr /
*

A leader should respect the opinion of the rank andfile (w

He was dismissed wilhonl rhyme or rtflion (’FTT')- »

Social inequality should be destroyed root and branch

^&)-
His speech was mere stu/fand nonsense (Hk)-
Time and tide (bjWi sratir) cannot wait for anyone.
Let us oppose capitalism tooth and nail (\rt &)•
should be f.-.j
^
IPoyj and means (srw, ww) to run the coUege
of maebi*
V mill-owner provides for the wear and tear
 i

lOIO^fS PHRASES 411

[b] adjectives that CO IS PAIR

He is all in ail in his family.
The patient getting from bad to worse
is

India voiced her protest in black and while (%fcci).

The thief was beaten black
and blue fert jr? flTT ^).
If you are /air and
square (ssiWl. you will be respected.
One can’t be free and easy (Fai»nft?r
Toe hard and fast
with strangers. ^
(?^, iai fsn) rules of grammar must be
‘hserved.

The Act was declared null

and raid (f^t^nn; SanO.
Shy/ and steady (if?,
f;nrfra .rfa) wins the race,
IV. ADVERBIAL PHRASES
You should love your
friends and rebtioos. but above all
your country.
Gandhiji’s plan was always above board (tire, wy).
8D. after all
is man and not a beast,
you try again and again (?it-aR) you will succeed.

and ‘rime and again' have a similar

is as were
a faithful friend.
it (trrdl)
He talks as
lf{a\^) he were my master.
He does notread
at alUn^).
° l^uow where or how he is or whether he ts alive ar

Irain was late (o-day, as usual (q?ti atn).

Go_«on«{3„).
thinker at once (tm-tire).
It* *k*
“®* 8O0d.
At fi

1 ca
^ I At least—
ten rupees.
Do °
'ek the ball at random (ul fjRi ti^e %).
mes even a sinner feels ashamed of himself,
i ?T?) my family joined roe.
‘3^ WET i ai^’, ‘am-ioa’ at SYV’ilV
tQjj ^ ^ sere Evcush iDiovisi
‘>T=fV
at? nfi
aai «I fast J— “It
|

while". a?T w«—'Before long’, ‘Sees'

^CI-ISH DICTIONARY H ift flRral t J

^tTT? (nesfield) wi a? wt—“This signifies ‘after an

»
’*'heiher the interval is a long or a short one”, — z's Tjl sw
 &
1

IDIOMS AND PIIIUSES 413

V. PREPOSITIONAL PHRASES
f£> (enni 3) my qualificalion, 1 beg <o jubmtt that I am
jflM.A.

Note— regards, with regard to, with respect and to, m

cmeetm W'ifh have a similar meaning. The phrases at home in.
at
iteiofo/.oi enmfiy wfih.and fli varfonce w/lA have been explained
irade: ‘Mvonis With Verb To Bc\
Because o/, on account of sflT owfng fo — t

He is absent because of (on account of, owing to) illness.

Ctotian— Due to ct pr i ?ntCT. '«iw %’ t^t f, vt.

nit pt iti^f & if sr^. «Tm« ^ cfe & I

'!H *171 ^ fe ‘due’ w Adjective 41:^ ^ Noun

Ti Nona i 53® ttii ?rai tis? strt fjwi ms *1 ^ pir ri;

Tbe eteldent was due to carelessness.

TIds it due to that.

Noun (accident) Pronoun (this) due ^

^3^OTre4?rnt«T}i «ra:wd w«i s^n Jfl« i i s? rr
eita-

Me is absent due to illness.

He could not come due to illness.
ilue to illness he
is absent.

4ddue%«[^jr^in5?fjf Adjective (absent) srml eiei fjffra S

® (“me)
^ d jg p, ^ Noun ^ tn*
^ ^ owing
W tfrTT I
5^ jijT^ arara ^ «kt |—
h o/ien used 6y the if/itfrOte as though ft had passed,
til,
into a mere compound preposition. Dae must, like
and adjectives, be ailachcd to a Noun and not to a
,, from a sentence. While oniog to can be either
'aUraJvech/al, flpe to can only be adjectival." fowler —
^ ^ i he due to sribi wift J?i 1 1 erwa" H. dt-^K
wfirt ^ «r4 due to i
"a w ^ smn 1

^J^dbouT.
o/=tif» (power) STD
^me get honour by means 0/(553 money.
PRECIS-WRITING
 aiAPTER XIX

PRECIS-WRITING

Precis rsx i Htl«T »M ?yin i H>T

'TC-TO
\ PtsKvs
^
JTTTT

^ srcinff % tfl

1 1
5X »raW »»
«?nBt sj«T*i?mT sngftiB
'PiiB
‘Bftiei

rft\

gn ^ *51
^
5^
^
x? nii'
it

J. ?^rfx «rra wixtft ^ xj-f «if<« ^,h *i aiix ftaai i xg% srsrft^,
preds-wriiing ^ cn frxRf ^ mtbpiI & O b^ «ftT & rRit
xt WTO thi] t fwrg «ft?5r sc«!« %xif Bn d»i i 1

Precis fea^ 5i firx yS a'hr yiif xt ^iftx—

1. Meaning; 11. Language; III. Length.

I. MEANING
!• ft^^5X'T5ttTXi'rete«t«(meaaingyT__idea) tra^xr mitob Ii
Tbe wrt «?r RtxxR't
'’tty XT Tffty Eft ^-ntsT XTT x? »i5
«it i ^ «hm *rri »Tft wfi 1 rr «b

2. Es% xiy ywPT x« xxsRt y!x« ^3 1 (tiile) xyto Xiftsr r^T,

s% nsty w xtiy if xiH R Tyro wytt WRi i 1 xT ^Tt f^1 brrt i
f^?ytBR5n|ytfWt^tT«8|{^Af^ifi tBitfWleTX RT yRR yt
^^’npE^frxxgxrt siyro ir^f* yRxi fwr (matter) wn % t

^
1

3- Rt^ yiy TO ETO fa^iiT «> g>r a jrto 5 «rfy title i

’TO 3 TOfTE stXR f^iif at TO tja ft araTR yt tori, rr

*ii!e % TOffwt frwy yt erir tyln «Vy ^ Rail TOf^ti r^T y*Iri 3 rtto

4. eb !i«k xto ft w ^ gR«E TO TO SR (order) 3

<T t5, wxf^ to
ra TOE fti xs fxRK ft yt t yat ^ natural order rn
logical BTO
sequence ^?r i 1 ilBi toh yafftx ayxt I f« xts jra ?t if «i
*’’’1
1 f? ^ ftx gy RUTS Ri xaiyr ft fyar^t ftt xxr aar ^I xy yy
Rft ^ fft xyft fsBftt XBT sfty OTft TO I «atx* Ryf J ftr to
^tat^sxty 3 b! Rxin yr xiiti if J 1 wft ftxfta, x^ RXRt gftx^Riy
^»x xt ^ XR ft XR3 ft) efe ft, fTOnf ft TO «> XRf e, «> yaft ffty
xfsXITOf) ynPFT RIXRT

tr precis
5- JB ^x 5E5 toxT xt ^ fg ft) grot TO xf yt ya 1
yff, y; fft reproduclion i 1 «m fttn x^ I

( 419 )
 420 now TO WRtrE CORRECT ENCUSIf

n. LANGUAGE
5T T5fn Rct •" T% jrrsi'V «frTT ? fsS j

1 07 PT f« »rm *TJ«7»r 3t f^TTOg^n? rf. (lelpgram) rrt

I SKW BTTT RT^if ct fc
*Tm WTT^ }, n> rrcT «rirf>n fewTT^ ft45T«Rfjr*tEnrn sfiT ^ r?-
T?fr 5: fTj ^prsV ait n
to ft^T f r cf. ^
RTtn ^
«n% TR^f 9 TO^O jttw wj^
^ ?rT7 ar^TO ^ ^ «m «r?:n («^
I

2 . Precis-writing if «fn o?T Third Person Pronoun (he, she, iti

they) ^ Raj)*! pirst person (I) ct arff i pttt ^i * 5^

& *iT^ar f% fTOR «nT% ?, RE snri ftrRiT Hi it srtT r ^frRrrHrf^
«t5^ srT^ i f TOf?R Third Person rr sttW 3f%R i
I i

3. Tense i rrir^ if je i itst 9 cr^t wr i Sri G. H. Siaia

^
f

% 3?fl€ 9 f^t I f^ precis 9 Past Tense w: sriR il *tT

*ncT t 9t
9 eth ^
^TPrii precis-writing 9 ^ Tense
9
^ *ttite fhrr
Pm ansi^
sirr’C •*
*’
ft9 ’Wirt I *ttR ?rir<nc f« f«iri irefp
RRR «W Hi Rt Past Tense 9 5& fetn srj tr^tn J ? Rft sRiT. Hit Nr
RT «f9 arftaR t rIt Future Tense 9 (t
«> «?Tsr CTtn i
Tease 9 n«*i«TR S^tii ? i
i

4. Precis rtj Indirect Narration 9 fe^rr arm J t Ptlsr?

inverted commas “.•••” ^ «TOTtS sn Indirect Narration 9 fiw

‘f?’
arfit dialogue nr conversation (Rrefem) «n precis rtrt Hi, tfi

R% »tr Indirect
Narral'on
Indirect 9 TO' i
^ dialogue jei siritr

9fe§5
III. LENGTH
HW
HhfT *ra^ I
f?:9 JR RRhr rt precis f%fRT R?i Ri sirt
j Sri R. P. Ghosh 9 “Good English” 9 fWi t
jt, TO Rvero 9 * ^
JR RRTT ?T J Rt J jhn ^fro, *t< «sdR-«RtT tnfl W# jhroi 9 RHT « fR RT t

Hi^ I gf^efsTf 9 *fi Rji tlrin* rtr ^ r toI^ ^

tPiv’T i 9 Rt curRiraslTORff wtt JR R®tr 9 I
rnff

Pr9?*fiE39 iftR9»nRei totok. srn r9 J «V 9 fHo r

sr5 Rtf f« sttt 5^ RT rmcT «T rrW arr Rt *rHi ?rR9

RTT RI Rpr «f^ R Hi 3*1 ?fW jR RRirt 9 } TORf I
^
Rolls', REsnRRrR-JjRff^Rj precis Rjfi RTt^fOairHl^*'
'

BTfT J rr9 9t stt to ciftHi ^ *r?R ^

1, METHOD OF ©.MISSION
Omission «t «p5 Hh>t I ^l-fl' I *^^9 sgRTR^^ 5^

sry’ciR (figures of speech) wIr rsrr (quotations)

ri, m ® t
 1 1

PREOS-WRITING 421

tjTiT jf fira? I ^ fr*!i in^f »i9iT swft

^^ jnTa qVn f« nrrr 5ft sphA 1
S—
He is as brave as a lion.
5?: as a lion I fsi^r simile >6?:^ ? i Precis i: ftri «rn

He is brave.
Precis 5 sfRwft? »tm srct ^ifpt (

2 METHOD OF SUBSrmrnON
‘Substitution’ sr{ ftftl i i ’>3'^^ 5^ 3 at
phrases, group of words m clauses t?. s'rople ''“•‘‘I (t* ^
«: air—
The books are lying at sixes and sevens.
1 beat him black and blue.

5n:r^ ^ far at sixes and sevens aV black and blue phrases i i

•5^ ftrt w
tRe: (single word) «t wVr ate^r if am gV Ramt \— w
The books are scattered. 1 beat him seierely.

tlPm
^nsrr group of words (tteg-iragR) rt tft single word if »gRi
Slr-
To loxe one's own country is not enough. Porr»>tfrrri is not
ttaough.

He be remembered for all limes to come.-

will He will be
remembered /or erer.m He wilt a/>r<*>-x be remembered.
«TT clause i ift single word ci iribi SR rwr «T Ran) ?—
Il'Ae/her he will be successful or not is doubtful. •< Ills success is
doubtful.
That you are honest is well-known — Four honesty is wcll-
xBown.
Note— Method of Substitution wt Fmrit 5:
^
^ Single-Word
“bstiiution vf snn O ‘tdt ) all el-wir trr I 5
3. A^’OIDANCE OF RErETTTION
Repetition ct »rJ rtjn J ‘
{H Pn* Repetition ft^fl idea(fk^ir)
i ft
*t word »n ^ tr^tf «t RRXi •V'lt.
(rr«rt^Tt. ?|r «*n ot?, astf* ei-ft
Cl WTg^nrn fc «^c fr«K ^ gt aiT at «t nrg h
^*1 »T «5ft-r«ft Tsef) »7TRai (explanation ) «fl RTttT ) 1 wnettn
V‘
S'* ?T^ rt
Precis if explanation nO wifk^ i w ms «^T i nrerts ?i»e
Pi^f ^ ngresi b w« erm J i nrfCT mrrs: jtJ r*e}
•’temillonglwmi; Jb-
He is a very very oUmsn of 100 years.
 1 1 1

422 irow lo Wiiirc correct Escttsii

ifff very veryoId*ftirf??nnfsrr7, arTfr«fVF5>3rT*^t«9Tf»^

n n> »i;i J f7: f-rr very very old snrmii rrr f 2 f ^
sfiE ii—
The resolutron n-as tmanimously supported by all. We reacfiei
the final cone/i«fon.
*irl VIV4 *f unanimously (»3t«?nrpT &) wTc by all ^ 5vr f
'IT vr? ft sr5 1 vin:
4, iw ?r»7 ? by all ^ j rft sttt.

5
=1
^ ?ive if final conclusion jfr tr^ final it iV
f Conclusion a
I final ct «w rtfet an
f i ^ ^
« «n ft: vm 3 ijn-^r Adjectives sftx Adverbs «t ^
snff iftn I ^ snw *f an 35i«;t m>i a wX t

USE OF VOICE
Precis »f Passive Voice «i Rq>f sri? «? ft^J? f
^
t

tT« fft sffi rf« ’Wfftr

5. Passive Voice k inftn & tr^f at »f?VT f

Active Voice & li^sn TO<t I; 3&~

Ravan was killed by Ram.— Passive
Ram killed Ravan.— Active
Good boys are loved by teachen.— Passive
Teachers love good boys. Active —
•Trt f« 6.Passive Voice ? Verb *To be’ sfli by *7 sebr
t Active Voice Jf mil i Active Voice «t >1^
wvgrt I

USE OF ARTICLE
Krt *rR^ ? fir ^ ComoiOQ Noun Singular Number H irtT

«nji a an ^ vrn J «ftc IH& 4t

RTff;
ftrn ^ vt plunl ««: ^«n am? a ^ an ^ srnrcvttt *ft^

(i) A good boy is loved by teachers.

(iU Good boys are loved by teachers.
“T
5 ^ RTV^r if a sniT vit, boy boys tt ficr TSt

Ttrt >wr ipa; (a) cir tt mji I w vvni atit vt emrat % trw imi 1

USE OF CONJUNCTIONS
CoajunctioQ m vr
well as wtr
9;

and « «w 3 «ti ssn ;ri7, vc as well as 3 Bta r*? I ^«

3 3vir w t fit, CT ETC t f« Precis 3 as well as i tc3 rt
and ar ^t

^tr—
He as well as In guilty.- He and I arc guilty.
^

’
TH S15TE

-1
both, .and
Ram afldShyamarcgoiJty.-Ram
atTC^^v^and § ct
W^ Sbyam
*•
arc gwuty.
.,
 PKEOS-WRlTINa 423

spt no sooner ..than ^<as soon as a i

No sooner
i...tban % juftn tit? if ’reiri, ijt as soon as 5:

fransft—
No sooner did he start than it began to rain°=As soon as be
started it began to rain.
As soon as ci tfr srart t

1. AVOID AUTHOR’S NAME

Precis if ttb Ocai stmT i

>R <r *m Tfrer srur-Tni sr^ fitfi i snu ^ the writer, the author
?t the poet fetjTT % I w? w <Rt^ (methods) aft n?? ah, fit

fhjTT ?) T? ft at?»fi sflt «'gt ftnr Precis Tsn ah i

Note—Precis h: tite* (title) hh *t ttatT «i «niVr Pbtt arar i 3ft^

1 a'? 3 Precis I ^ twrt a>r Ptfnft atf stfit i
Precis
Tt:3hhi»n;^f^a5??t(f"ahti«^ 3 Precis T5n?T «t?i rt) fira ^ht
^fwi
IJst of Siagk-word Substitution
9.
1. agenda— Items of business to be considered at a meeting.
2. aggressor— One who attacks first.
3. anarchist— Oae who plans to destroy all governments.
4. asbilTatoi— One appointed by patties to settle disputes
between them.
5. autocracy— Govemmeot by one.
6. atheist— One who does not believe in the existence of God
or after-life.
7. autobiography—The life-history of a man written by
himself.
B. bigot—One with narrow religious views.
—
bigamy The stale of having two wives or husbands at a
time.
10. One who speaks two languages.
bilingual—
11. bureaucracy— Govenunent by officials.
12. credulous— One who easily believes.
13. colleagues—Those who work in the same department or
office.
14. catalogue— List of books or other articles.
15. carnivore— Eater of flesh.
16. celibacy —The stale of bring without wife.
17. circumlocution— A round-about way of writing or
speaking.
18. cemetery- A place of burial.
424 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH

19. —
contemporary Living in tbe same age.
20. democracy —
Govenonent by the people.
21. diplomacy—The art practised by statesmen.
—
22. drought ^Wantofrain.
23. epidemic—A disease that spreads over a large area.
24. egoist —
A man who thinks only of himself.
—
25. edible That which is fit to be eaten.
26. extempore—Speech without any preparation.
27. exchange— Giving and receiving.
28. efficacious— That which produces the desired effect.
29. fatalist— One who believes in fate.
30. fratricide — Killing of one’s brother-
31. foreigner— A man residing in a country of which he is nr
a citirrn
32. honorary— An office without pay.
33. homicide—Killing of a man.
34. herbivorous— Animals living on herbs.
33. invisible—That which can’t be seen*
36. inaudible— That which can’t be heard.
37. illegible— That which can’t be read.
38. invincible— That which can’t be conquered.
39. inaccessible— That which can’t be approached.
40. inexplicable—That which can’t be explained.
—
41. incorrigible That which can’t be corrected.
—
42. inimitable That which can't be imitated.
43. indispensable— That without which one can’t do.
44« indelible— That which can’t be blotted.
45. inevtiablc—That which can’t be avoided.
46. incurable— That which can’t be cured.
47. indisputable—That whkh can't be doubted.
4S. irrevocable— That which can't be changed.
49. irritable— Easily eicited to anger.
50- irrelrvaai— That which is not to the point.
51. incredible—That which can’t be believed.
52. infallible—That which never fails.
53. lo.'ljmmable-Uab'etocatch fire eaidy.
54. Lnrul.nerablc—That which can’t be hurt.
55. insolvent-Oflewhocais’t pay debts.
56, illicit— A trade prohibited by Isw.
57. nairicide-Kiniflgofene’smotbcr.
wiihseawet
53. mifratory— A bird that comes and r>«*
 PRECIS-WRITINa 425
59. maiden speech—The fiist public speech.
60. monogamy—The practice of having one wife.
61. misanthrope— A hater of mankind.
62. materialistic— An attitude that measures
everything in terms
US »,».• of matter.
W. matinee—A. film-show m the afternoon.
4. neurotic—
One suffering from nervous disorder.
5. narcotic— A medicine that induces sleep.
66. obsolete— No longer in use.
67. optimist— One who looks at the bright side of life.
M. omnipotent— One who
is all-powcrfu!,
9. omnipresent — One wiho Is present everywhere.
.
omniscient— One who knows everything.
• Patricide— Killing of one's father.
2- posthumous— Dorn after the father’s death or published
,, .
after the author’s death.
• patrimony— Property inherited from father and ancestor.
• philanthropist— One who does good to mankind.
PMsimist— One who looks at the dark side of life.
• parasite—That which esists by living upon others.
• post-mortem- Medical exaruioatton of a dead body.
• P®Iyfainy— Practice of marrying more than one wife at a

p- panacea— Remedy for all diseases.

80. popular-To
be liked by everybody.
1. reticent— Reserved in speech.
2. somnambulist— One who walks in sleep,
somniloquist— One who talks in sleep.
. sinecure—An office with no work but high pay.
• —
soliloquy ^Thcactof speaking aloud one’s
thought when

^6- verbose-(A style) full of words.

""ho eats vegetables.
88 •
''eteran —A person with long experience in some occupa-
89. wardrobe— Place where dothes are kept.
0. water-proof—That which can keep water out.

EXERCISES tVORKED OUT

Now Jumman bad an old relation, a maternal aunt, who had

property. This she transferred to him by a deed on the under-
 TO WRITE CORRECT ENCUSH

Standing that She would be

wdHooked after. So long as the it
remained unregistered, none was so
oblising to the ofd lady is b
nephew, none so considerate to
her. Her every wish was antidjut:
and cheerfully carried out But
everything changed the moment tl
deed was registered. Jumman who
used to wait dotingly on his ol
aunt, now became supremely indifferent.
His wife, Karimao. »Tii
even further. She grudged even the
little food that the old lady i«
No meal was now sen-ed to her without Kariman leltinglocsei
barb or two dipped in gall or poison.
The very bread that the awl
ate seemed to be seasoned with the
meal of abuse. And this west en
mounting. Kariman would say, “How long is the old hag goifl?
to live? By giving us a few acres of waste land, she thinks she
has bought us. She is a great lady who can't swallow a morsel
without her d>/ being seasoned with ghee 1 We could have paf*
chased a whole village with the money spent on her feeding.” (202
words).

Title I.s-ORATnvDB

Jumman had an old aunt. She bad some property. She gs»e
it to Jumman on assurance that he would maintain her. Before the
registration of deed he was hospitable her but after regittnii'^''
to
he neglected her. His wife’s treatment was worse. She abused her
while giving even the little food she (aunt) ate and wished her early
death. The aunt's troubles increased every day. (66 words)

11

^t/ar/ow; What a wo had of

tedious uncomfortable day have
it * Wcwere told it wa* b“' across the country and *»
have come above three score.
; Acd
all. Msrlow, from that unaccountable ihynts*
os inquire more frequenify on the way-
of jours that would not Jet
t/ar/ow owfl. Ilastia**.
I am unwflJjnj to Uy myself uiuUi
; I
e’^t.a'sd often stand (he chance of sa
an obligatwfl* to eteryooe I

uamaa-nerl/ answer.
IML.!S : M prtM *• IMr >» ..c.l.. ..T
|
 ::

PRECIS-WRITING 427

Tony No offence, gentlemen. Bat I’m told you have been

inquiring for one Mr. HardcasCle inthese parts. Do you know what
part of the country you are in ?
Hastings : Not in the least, Sir, bat I should thank you for
information.

Tony Nor
way you came ?
the
Hislings No, Sir, but if you can inform us.
:

Tony Why, gentlemen, if you know neither the road you arc
X

foin?, nor where

you are, nor the road you came, the first thing I
htve to inform
you is that you have lost your way. (171 words)

Precis

Title— Tiie Two Travellers

.. complained of their too long and tedious journey for
11“
Hastings blamed his (Marlow’s) shyoess. Marlow replied that
.
'did not like to receive
discourteous replies by asking bis way
Kquetiily. Meanwhile, Tony interrupted and remarked that, as
wy did not know which way they came or where they were, they
»etelott. (53 words)

in
The very abundance of books, an increasing and confusing
* ndanee in our days, makes it important to know how to choose
foraptly and judiciously
among them if one is not to spend as much
in the mere choice
as in the perusal of the books that are
** wted. On this subject the first advice I venture to submit is to
nnd to read only the best books. There are plenty of them,
jor
more than you will
ever find time to read. And when a wide
®|e of excellent
works is so readily obtainable, it is surely unfor-
^unaie to
waste valuable minutes on any others. You may ask what
mean by best
books. Passing by for the moment (hose publica-
^
in each of the great languages of the world we call classics,

books those from which you receive most, and

can'*”
Wh w you Want ^ Mlhcr knowledge or stimulation,
to learn something about
a subject in which you are
volume which you have heard
"bich professes by its title to deal exhaustively with
the
teacher orauy well-read friend, or the librarian
of li^'
* "«>fest
public library. (213 words)
 428 frow TO WRITE CORRECT
EVOLfSII

Precis
Title Choice of Books

i,
Nat.nlly, te
IZ n
">'>’=«one< »hfchar»a»ail3HsinI„S.
tel booh, BoMc
cla«
class.c,, K
bcsl book, arc lho,c Ibat
giro „j
^spiration. For qmck and correct choice
the advice of Isacben,
cll-rrad friends or public librarians, and
not advertisementi, is
•
(67,void5)

Kiranwasa universal favourite with

her family and neigh-
oours, so that when she fell seriously ill they were all aniious. Ti:
lilap-wiseacrcs thought it shameless
for her husband to make so
® and even to suggest a change of air soil
j it
asiced Sharat supposed that no
woman bad ever been ill before or
whether he bad found out that
the folk of the place to which be
meant to take her were Immortal.
Did he imagine that the writ of
fate did not run there?
But Sharat and bis mother turned a deaf
ear to them thinking that the life of their
darling was of greater
importance than the united wisdom of a village. So Sharat went to
Chandamagar, and Kiran recovered, though she was still very weak.
There was a pinched look on her face which
filled the beholders with
pity,and made his heart tremble, as he thought how narrowly she
had escaped death. (180 words)

Precis
Title : —Kiran's Illness
The popular Kiran’s serious illness grieved her relations aod
neighbours. Her husband, Sharat. desired her climatic change but
the so-called wise villagers opposed the idea as foolish and shameless,
but to her husband and mother-in-taw, her life was dearer than
village opinion. Therefore they took her to Chandamagar where
she recovered, although still too wrafc. She had a narrow escape
from death. (60 words)

EXERCISES

Hetty was quite used to the thought that people liked foloek

at her, and she knew that Adam Bede— tall, clever brave
 rRccis^witmNa 429

Bede, of whom che people round about thought so well, who was
often rather severe
and who was not often seen talking to
to others,
girls—could be made to turn pale or red any day by a look or a
*ord from her. Hetty did not know many men, but she couldn’t
help seeing that Adam was a greater man than most of the men she
knew; and she was certain that her uncle Poyscr wanted her to marry
Adam, who had alwa>s been given welcome
at Hall Farm.
But Hetty
had other ideas about her marriage. She liked to
M admired by a wise, strong man, liked to know that he would
a!«aj-s be there
if the had need of him, but she had no thought of
raariying Adam.
She thought of him as a poor workman. When
t e had a
husband, he must be a rich man who could give her all the
Ihiogs she
dreamed about : a big house, servants, fine clothes, and a
' 5 of ease. If Adam could have given her these things, she liked
“imwell enough to marry
him.

Aids

.
habituated (stra People round about— neigU-
(Tfnft). Severe— strict, serious, grave (wgr, rwftr).Turn pale
*Tvrt, 7T^)- Couldn't help see/ng— had to see (^tm vr
qrr). £aje—comfort (mm).
II

It was a sad and terrible story that Hefty told Dinah in that
prison, a stoiy to make the hardest person feel full of sorrow. She
® d how her child was born in the cottage where she had last asked
How the next day, when the woman had gone out, the
r rest.

**'ought
had come to her, that rf she could be without her baby, she
Wuld go home again, and
nobody would know anything. The
*
®®ght gave her strength to get up, dress herself and go out. She
’'alked till she came to a wood, aod then sat down. She told bow
* looked at
the face of her baby as she tried to lay it among the
I
cover it with them; how it cried, and she couldn’t bear
0 kill it; so
she just left the baby, hoping it would be found and
ten care of.
As she hurried away, the sound of its crying followed
even when she knew she was too far away to hear it. At last
* to a farm building, and
went in and slept,
Hetty, “when I woke, I could still hear the
h h
^ ^ turned back the way I had come. I had to go.
Oh
^ hear that little baby crying now. Shall I always hear
it?'
When I got to the place in the wood, my baby was gone.’’
 42S HOW TO Write correct evolisii

Precis

Choice of Ocmdrs
Innumerable book* arc published
now-a-days. Nafarariy. tier
t no ime to read even (he best
ones which are available io larri
numbers One should, therefore, read only
the best books. Besi*
classics, best books arc those that give
maximum of wisdom sad
inspiration. For quick and correct choice the advice of teacben,
well-read friends or public'
public librarians,
librarianc I u
not advertisements, !t
really helpful.
(67 words)

Kiran was a universal favourite

with her family and neigli-
ours, so that when she fell seriously
ill they were all aasiocs.
viilage-wiseacres thought It shameless for her husband to mike so

j If
suggest a change of air and
asked if Sharat supposed that
no woman bad ever been ill before cr
whether he had found out that
the folk of the place to which be
meant to take her were ImmorUl.
Did he imagine that the writ of
fate did not rua there?
But Sharat and bis mother tamed a deaf
carlo them thinking that the life of their darUng was of greater
importance than the united wisdom of a village. So Sharat »-eat to
Chandarnagar, and Kiran recovered, though weak.
she was still very
There was a pinched look on her face which filled the beholders with
pity, and made his heart Ircmble, as narrowly
be thought how
had escaped death. (ISO words)

Precis
Title : — Kiran’s Illness
The popular Kiran’s serious illness grieved her relations ind
neighbours. Her husband, Sharat, desired her climatic change p''
the so-called wise villagers opposed
the idea as foolish and
but to her husband and mother-in-law, her life was
!;
e
village opinion. Therefore they took her to Chandamagirw
she recovered, although still too w^ak. She had a narrow
from death. (60 words)

EXERCISES

Hetty was quite used to the thought that people liked

at her, and she knew that Adam Bede— tall, clever bf*'*
 pREctS'WRirmo 431

»irds.This a high ideal no doubt, but is capable of being attained.

is

That can be done by making

a beginning somewhere.
Bhoodan is the process whereby wc can reach this goal.
The
and problem Is a problem that affects crores of
people. Hence, the
Bhoodan mevement makes a direct appeal to the masses and would
loevitably cast
its influence on their approach and way of life.

Aids
Solicitous— dtiiTOMi
{t'sgs, Reappear afterwards— Tf
afterwards reappear Jf afterwards
4
0 irgwnirtg— beginning. Goa/— aim
“““lerous, innumerable
w^pRct, 4I?t). Masses—
cnw” I
''**''^*f>’~-“ecessarily &. Cast its influ-
'we-mfluence(55t»i5Ri).

this
****^*^ mankind have Insisted on
BOtthevh™*''
to live for themselves alone. We ought
*hat»6 energy in getting just
° [°^o'Jfselves. power and money and importance in the
*orM we
led
something greater than ourselves, whether a
Or*
** •* serving this something

Thiicf
^®'’*** themselves and so achieve happiness.
' religions have taught, and
ft one «r.k
of th* things that civilization means,
’'ttslio th
to learn and practise; in fact, most people have
foutidi,
'•nmueh too hard.

R V
wanWnJ— prophets, preachers. Insisted-
e/one^be selfi.h
Ought — should. To live for tbemsehes
c leve—get Much loo Aarrf— difficult.

J"=r5ly bccau^jT*am
*‘‘1' another man, Ido not get beaten
' to larJnH knock me down.

place of
Thus ?„
»»
d-® ?'” f’etween man and man right has taken
*1^'

mipht
*'"1
'ioUnce. NntJ.i„ ** *** Protects me from robbery
'"y foods,
or run off
nrr
**“* '"*o my house, steal
wuh my children. Of course, there are burglars.
 4J2 ilow to wme conntct I'lCiiaw
bol they are very rare, and the law puniihet them whenever it catche-
them.
It it ditnculi for ut to realtte how much Ihij safety means
Without safely those higher activities of mankind whuh makeup
civiliMlion could not go on. The inventor could not invent, the
scientist find out or the artist make beautifui tbinfs. ilence order
and safety, although they are not themselves eivilieation, are tbinp

without which civiliration would be impossiMe. They are as nece-

ssary to our civilieaiion as the air we breathe is to os; and we have
grown to used to them that we do not notice them any more than
we notice the air.

Aids

Alnoek dOH-fl— beat down (mt vrr fhn t=n). Disputes—

fights. Aflght—(Tti(i{tK trf»). rroreerr— saves. Robbery- dacoity.

t'fofenee— (f?*n). Break bito—taxtr. Bun ejf with my children^

kidnap crstr) my children. Burglars— xh-.t^ts (^). ot— <7^

continue. Crown so used re— habituated, accustomed (orri

hforiee— see.

vn
There was once a iaundryman named QeaO'Clotb in a certain

town. He had a single donkey who had grown very feeble from
lack of fodder. As the Iaundryman wandered in a forest, be saw a
dead tiger, and he thought, “Ah. this is luck I I will put this tige^
skinon the donkey and let him loose in the barley field at nifht.
For the farmers will think him a tiger and will not drire him out.
When this was done, the donkey ate barley to his heart's content.
And ai dawn the Iaundryman took him back to the fann. So, as
sta
time passed, he grew plump. He could hardly squeeze into the
.

*be
But one day the donk^ beard the bray of a she-donkey in
Then
distance. At the mere sound he himself began to bray.
killed him
farmers perceived that he was a donkey in disguise, and
with blows from clubs and stones and arrows.

Aids

Laundryman — washerman. A certain —a (f%fff)* Feeble—

From lack o/— for want of («ifO. Fodder— •il'Or. Lei
Plump^
Efrf ^l). To his heart's emtent—Xo his satisfaction.
Perceiye
(tftn). Squeeze into the stall— fwprr. Bray-^^t.
saw, found (^ar). Club—inst,zwi. Arrows— ^K,^-
 pREas-wRinso 433

vni
Educated women have to |4ay the role of teachers. An educa-
humble capacity of a teacher.
ted lady can serve the country in the
The education of children depends mainly upon women. They
can leach as well as amuse. They can do research work in art,
literature, philosophy and sdence. We are fortunate m having
very intelligent girls who are anxious to have training in foreign
countries. They are being given schotacship by the Government
of India and many of them haveproceeded to western countries and
have made their mark as educationists. Women can also render
social service whenever there is flood, famine, earthquake or
some natural calamity. It is also during war that they can be of
utmost utility to their nation. In free India ladies are being given
training in First Aid, use ofguDS and rifles, and some of them are

getting training as drivers and pilots. The defence of the country

is a matter of great importance to all and women should share the

bttiden with men.

Aids
flay the rcU o/— act as (cw cvm). Mode iheir mark — distin-
guished (nti sffl Calamisy— n^fortune (^). Of utmost
uttfity^useful, Share the burden—«n ^ urn Pilots—
tlvntw,

IX
For many centuries in Indian history there was no city so
famous as the city of Ujjain. It was always renowned as the seat of
learning. Here lived at one time tbe poet Kahdas, one of the supreme
poets of the world fit to be named with Homer and Dante and
Shakespeare. And here worked and risited an Indian king, who was
also a great and learned astronomer, the greatest of his day, Kajah
ley Singh of Jeypore. So one can see what a great love all who care
for India must feel for the ancient city of Ujjain.
But deep in the hearts of tbe Indian people, one name is held
even dearer than those I have mentioned, tbe name of Vikramaditya
who became king of Malawa, It Is saW, in the year 57 before Christ.
He was like King Arthur, or like Alfred the Great— so strong and
true and gentle that the men of iris own day almost worshipped him
and those of all aftertiraes were obliged to give him the first place,
though they had never looked in his face nor appeared to his
great and tender heart simply because they could see that never had

H W. C. E.-2S
 434 now TO WltnE COSBECT ENGLWII

a king been loved like tMt king. But one thing we do not kso
about Vikramaditya. fl N told about him that he wai the greater
judge in hiJtory. Neter wae he deceived. Never did he punish th

wrong man.
y4/<ir

famout (afhi). Obliged-

competled (fkw t^i). TV/idrr—*oft (iftmt). cheated.

Oliver Twist and bis companions suffered the tortures of slow

starvation for three months. At Ust they got so wild svith hunger
that one boy who was tall for his age and had not been used to that

sort of thing hinted darkly to his companions that unless he had

another basin of gruel for him, be was afraid, he might some night
happen to eat the boy who slept next to him and who happened to
and
be a wealthy youth of tender age. He had a wild hungry eye,
they believed him.
A council was held; lots were cast who should walk up to the
master after supper that evcoiog and ask for more, aod it feU t»

Oliver Twist,
Then evening arrived; the boys took their places. The Barter
inhis cook’s uniform stationed himself at the copper; his assistaots
ranged themselves behind him; the gruel was served ont, and a long
the
grace was said over the short commons. The gruel disappeared;
boys whispered to each other and winked at Oliver. He rose from
head,
the table and advancing to the master, basin and spoon in
said, “Please, Sir, I want some mote."
Aids
Tortures~pi\a. Starvation — garrrt. Hinted dark ly—h ia^

(WKi wr^i). Basin — vxfpr. Gruel—alj. Lots were cast—^ktt

Uniform — Stationed^sot. Grace — thanks. Short commons—

small quantity of food.

XI
each o ^
Human life consists ofa succession of small events,
which comparatively unimportant and yet the happiness
is
these $m
success of every man depends upon the manner in which
*
events are dealt with. Character is built up oo little ihiogs-'hh
rnsa t
things well and honourably transacted. The success of a
. business depends upon his attention to little things. The com o
 PREClS-WnniNC
435
a household is the result of small thiofs well arraoBefi- Good
government can only be accomplished in the same way by well-
regulated provisions for (he doing of little things.
Accumulation of knowledge and experience of the most valu-
able kind are the result of little bits of knowledge and experience

carefully treasured up. Those who learn nothing or accumulate noth-

ing in lifeare set down as failuTts, because they have neglected little
things. They may themselves consider that the world has gone against
them but, in fact, they have been their own enemies. There has long
been a popular belief in ‘good luck’, but, like many other popular
notions, it is gradually giving way. The conviction is extending that
ddigence is the mother of good luck; in other words, that a man's
success in life will be proportionate to his efforts, to his industry, to
his at(en(ion to small things.

yfit/s

Trenseeted-^one. ffoasehoW— family, flufy— properly

^ fr). Accmpffifi«J—doac, achieved. AecumuhUon collectioa. —
Treasurti wp— gathered (mrr ^rm). Notions— iiti% (ftwrr). Conyieiion
—faith, belief. Extend/ng— spreading. DiHgenee— labour. Broper‘
ilonolt fo— according to. Ef/oris, /rKA/j/ry— eftanr.

xn
The problem that confronts most of us is whether the individual
is merely the Instrument of society or the aid of society. Are you
and 1 as Individuals to be used, directed, educated, controlled, shaped
to a certain pattern by society and government or does society, the
state, exist for the individual 7 Is the individual the end of society or
is he merely a puppet to be taught, exploited, butchered as an iustiu-

ment of war ? Hiat is the problem of the world— whether the indivi-
dual Is a mere instrument of society, a playdilng of influences to be
moulded or whether society exists for the individual.
How are you going to find this out ? It is a serious problem,
is it not 1 K the individual w merely an instrument of society, the*
society is much more important than the individual. If that is true,
then we must give up individuality and work for society; our whole
educaiionalsystem must be entirely tevolutionalized and the indivi-
dual turned into an instrument to be used and destroyed.
But if
society exists for the individual, then the function
of society is not to
make him conform to any pattern but to give him the feel, the
urge
of freedom. So we have to find out which is false.
 436 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGmH

AiJj

Confronts— hces. End—zim (3^). Pattern — model. Puppet—

^foulded—%hzpl^. Conform — inspintion

XIII

Why is society crumbling, collapsing, as it surely is 7 One of the

fundamental reasons is that the individual, you, has ceased to be
creative. I will explain mean. You and I have become Imita-
what I
tive; we are copying outwardly and inwardly. Outwardly, when learn-

ing a-techniquc, when communicating with each other on the verbal

level, naturally there must be some imitation, copy. 1 copy words.

To become an engineer, I must learn the technique, then use the

technique to build a bridge. There must be a certain amount of
imitation, copying in outward technique, but when there is Inward,
psychological imitation, surely we cease to be creative. Our education,
00
our social structure, our so called religious life, are all based
imitation; that is. I fit into a particular social or religious formula.
I have ceased to be a real individual.

Aids
Crumbling— brezkitti (jvfi ijlwi, rt^)- Collapsing—
MUnt
(ftisn). /u/K/j/nr/iWf— basic (gftwrO). Crorri/— stopped. Creailte—
OrstFSTW. Imitative— Verbal level —
wr CTT. Structure
— frame.
XIV
The hand-spinning and weaving industries are extremely
important in balancing our village economy. Therefore Mshatma
Gandhi carried on a life-long crusade for the encouragement and
growth of those industries. For many years all leaders and working
membersof the Indian National Congress have worn clothes pf^
pared from cloth woven on the handloom from hand-spun yarn The
All-India Spinners* Association started under Gandhiji'i inspifstion
has done excellent wort popularising in or hand-woven
hai^hvom
cloth, made from hand-spun yam. It has also helped the
worker by supplying him with materials and, with
improvement of the quality ofbis product. Morcihan • ,*?fc
®
a half yards of KhadJar are prodii^ In India every year.
•»
has bra a great boon to many people during the recent •

of mill made cloth.

 437

Aldi
Spinning and in'raylng—irttm Bjlanelng—d'J^n *ftr

CWt. CniWe— fighl. j*T. fom — Inspiration

—eneounjcment (Jf^^i). wwt. /?oo»i— advantage
(TTV^.^W).
XV
There was a time when men took life easily and had enough
leisure. Life was simple and wants were Cew, and these could be
easily satisfied. In those days men believed that whatever was worth
doing should he done thoroughly. But gone is that time. With the
Industrial Revolution, with (he progress of scientific discoveries and
inventions and with the ever-growing demand for machinery, our
wants have increased and life has become complex. Now-a-days we
want to do many things, think many thoughts and to enjoy too
many benefits. Consequently, we are always pressed for time, because
it b the fashion of (he age. Our complaint about want of time may
be true or false. Out the fact remains that we want short-cuts. Hence,
in this age of burry there is a persistent demand for sbort-hand, for
summaries, abridgements, and preeb. A busy politician or a
merchant has got so many things to do and so many important
decisions to make that he cannot spare time for each. Yet he must
know what is going on in the political or business world. So he
asks Us tecceiary or same other man to make a precis at summary
of what is being said, done and thought about things in which he is
viulty interested. This is the use of precis.

Aids
Complex— Pretend—wfptt «v=ri- Shorr-cur— ^tn er trlvi
nWT. Persistent— /furry— Abridgement— Spare
—Twi. t'/ra/f/— essentially (rttaww we ft).

XVI
One day, as she came into the room, where all the poor
children were at work, my nurse sat down just over against me and
aftera while began to. talk to me. “Thou foolish child”, says she,
“thou art always crying. Prithee, what dost thou cry for "Because
they will take me away”, says I, “and put me to service, and I can’t
work house-work.” "Well, child'’, says she. "but though you can’t
work house-work, you will learn it in time, and they won’t put you
to hard things at first.” “Yes, they will”, says I, “and if 1 can’t do
it, they will beat me, and the maids will beat
me to make me do great
 43S now TO witnE correct englism

work, and I am
but a liKlegirJ.and I can’t do”; and then Icrisd
again till I could not ipeat: any more. Thi* moved my good motherly
Durie, lo that she reiolved I should not go to service yet; she bfd
me not to cry» and she would speak to Mr. Mayor, and f should not
go to service till 1 was bigger.

Well, this did not satisfy me for to think of going to service

at all was such a frightful thing lo me, that if she bad assured me I
should not have gone tsH I was twenty years old. tt would have been
the tame to me. When she saw 1 was not pacified yet. she bepn to
be angry with me. “And what would you have says she. "Don’t
I tell you that you shall not go to service till jou are bigger
7” "Aj”

says I, “but then I must go at last” "Why, what", says she, "is
the girl mad 7 What J would you be a gentJewomaa ?" “yes’*,
says I, and cried heartily till I roared out again.

Aids
At work-working. Afttra wArVe— after sons tost, /ft lime—
in ooune of time (tnw «n^ tt. Moids— maid-servaots.
ordered. /WgAt/u/— fearful. Pacified—c»la Aod quiet (tnwt). i/ust

g#—most have to go. l/earii/y—binetly. Roared— cM-

xvu
My good old nurse, Mn. Mayoress, and all the rest of them did
let understand me at all, for they meant one sort of things by the
under-
word ’gentlewoman’, and I meant quite another; for alas ! all I
myself,
stood by being a gentlewoman was to be able to work for
they
and get enough to keep me without going to service, whereas
meant to live great and high, and I know not what
came
Well, after Mrs. Mayoress was gone, her two daughten
to me, an
it, and they called for me and talked a long while
asked i«
answered them in my innocent way, but always, if they
At t
whether resolved to be a geoliewoman, I answered, yes.
I
muc
they asked a gentlewoman was. That puzzled me
me what
one that do
However, I explained myself negatively that it was
go to service, to do house-work; they were mightily
plea ^ .

liked my little prattle to them.

Aids
‘
One sort e>/—one kind of. Keep me— maintato me.
real and AigA— high living whw).
. /T*^,rtatJy.

esolred —decided. Puerled—coaftsscd (vrypn). A/tg r/y

rattle — talk.
 PREaS-WMIINO 439

XVIII
h^s gone out of our lives and there 'is darkness every-
Tlje light
where and do not quite know what to tell you and how to say it.
I

Our beloved Bapu as we call hita, the father of our nation, is

leader,
no more. Perhaps I am wrong to say that. Nevertheless, we will not
see him again as we have seen him these many years. We will not
run to him for advice and seek solace from him, and that is a terrible
blow not to me only but to millions and millions in this country.
And it is difficult to soften the blow by any advice that I or anyone
cite can give you.
The light has gone out, I said and yet I was wrong. Forthe light
that shone in this country was no ordinary light. The light has
illumined this country for these many years, will illumine this country
for many more years, and a thousand years later that light will still

be seen in this country, and the world will see it and it will give
solace to innumerable hearts. For that light represented the living
Inth, and the eternal man was with us wUh his eternal truth reminding
us of the right path, drawing us from error, taking this ancient
couatty to freedom.
All this has happened. There is much more to do. There was
so much him to do. We could never think that he was unnecessary
for
•r that he had done bis task. But now, particularly, when we are
faced with so many difficuilies, fits not being with US is a blow most
terrible to bear.

A madman has put an end to bis life.

Aids
No ffiore-^ead. —
Solace consolation Ntrn). Illumine — iiwrr
Eternal—-uadymi. Blow—^.
XIX
A California girl of thirteen wrote in a letter ‘I : was really
terribly sad to hear about Gandhi’s death. 1 never knew was
I
interested in him but I found myself quite unhappy about the great
man’s death !’

In New York, a twelve-year-old girl had gone into the kitchen

for breakfast. The radio was on and it brought the news of the
shooting of Gandhi. There, in the kitchen, the girl, the
maid and the
prdenet held a prayer meeting and prayed and wept. Just so, millions
IB all countries
mourned Gandhi's death as a personal loss. They did
not quite know why; they did not quite know
what he stood for. But
he Was a good man aod good men are rare.
 440 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH

“
ot time of mTI'T/' f of lift, I,
»"ly -talcrman losund
toh/r
or a higher
for h?
human ,
rcrationship in the political sphere.'

Aids
Mourned-bcamc sorrowful. 5>/«V-spirituar
MJoeunes-ltyJpll
d^vT ‘

oecay, *fl/«mufl-poiirician.
S/Aw-field.
Uner-ioXil Dsccdencs-

XX
Douglas MacAfthur. supreme Allied military cem-
**"
•
the evolution of civilirafion. If It is to
*n
survive, all men cannot fail eventually to adopt Gaodhi’s belief that
*’^®****
®^'"^”'*PPl'cailonoffofce to resolve contentious issues
«
•
r
luodamentally not only wrong but
contains within Itself the fernii
selMestruction.’ Lord Mounibatten, last British Viceroy In India,
capressed the hope that
Gandhi's life might ‘inspire our troubled
world to save Itself by
following bis noble example.* The world-wide
rcsjwnse to Gandhi's
death was in itself an important fact; itrevsaled
a Widespread mood and
need. There is still some hope for the world
which reacted as reverently
as it did to the death of Gandhi’. Albert
Deutsch declared in the New
York newspaper, P. M., ‘The shock and
sorrow that followed the New Delhi tragedy shows wc sitll respect
sainthood even when wc cannot fully understand it.' To thesuteimen
and politicians who eulogised him Gandhi was at least a leminder of
their own Inadequacies.
Aids
fro/w/o/t— progress. Surfite—im. £ve!t/aa///— finally, dp?!''
—
catlcn—Mse. Resohe decide. Co«ren//o«»— disputable («nrTSt«et
^ /uiM^nre/i/n///— basically H %)•
^rerenr/y— honourably. Sahthaod-ioodnen. £Wi»g/fr(/-prai*«J.
/'icideTuoriVs— iflcompleteness, weakness (rjiv)-

XXI
A] (Thomas Alva Edison) was not a pupil after ibe tncf'f'*
 PRECIS*WIIIT1N0 44r

bean. He paid little attention to the books and kept asking questions,
just as he had done at home. He either talked to his classmates when
he should have listened to the instructor's words or dreamed with
open eyes.
One afternoon, eight>year*old AI came home from school and
went straight to his mother. ’Ma*. he asked, ‘What is addled ?”
Mrs. Edison laughed. ‘Don’t you know what an addled egg is ? It
means it is rotten.’ ‘Yes, Ma, I know ibatall right. But what’s an
addled boy 7’

‘Well, it’s just another word for crazy.*

‘And what is “not normal’’, Ma 7
‘Not normal—well, it means.. ..But where did you bear those
words?'
A1 looked at her seriously. ‘The Inspector visited our school
to-day, and asked teacher about boys. You know 1’ ve very good ears
Ma. I heard what teacher said when he pointed me out to the Inspec-
tor. He said I’m addled. I'm not normal like other boys. It’s a
Waste of time letting me go to school
Mrs. Edison jumped up. ‘So be said that about you, did be 7’
She cried with flashing
eyes. ‘Come along. I'm going to have a nice
little chat
with him, as one teacher to another.’
And
she marched to the school-house dragging A1 behind her.
know, what you said to the Inspector about my boy,’ she
'1

told the teacher.

‘Well, if anybody here is addled, it’s you. You
could call yourself lucky And
if you bad half as much brain as Al.
raark my words’,
she added thumping her little fist on the frightened
school master's
desk 'some day the world will hear of him— but never
of you I’Then
she turned on her heels, and took the boy home. ‘You
won't have to go
back there’, she told him. ’I’m going to do the
teaching myself’.
And she did.

Aids
Addled — rotten, unproductive. Crazy —mad, of unsound mind,
^orma/— usual, common. Flashing—angry, shining. CAaf— talk.
num;>i>rg— striking hard (vttH Fist—s^^ Turned on her heels
Jr).
'returned quickly.

XXII
The conditions under which democracy can flourish are difficult
to define;
but one thing is clear that democracy is always a slow
growth, whereas dictators
may rise to power and inaugurate a new
 ^42 now TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLISH
regime with dramatic suddenoess and success under suitaWe condi-
tions. One great new force has appeared
in the world since the Great
War, the art of modern propaganda. It is invaluable
to the dictator
who can iricuicate his creed day by day through the press, the doema,
the radio, to the whole body of the people and can
suppress all coon*
ter propaganda. It is a terrible danger to democracy, since it tend*

to destroy the sound and commonsense judgment of the people which

depends on constant access to facts and on honest public discussion
based on those facts.
Then again the kindly and co-operative outlook which alone
«an make democracy a success depends on material conditions, on
the economic security and welfare of the whole of the people^ a
starving man or a man in constant fear of unemployflient cannot be
expected to be a good citixen of democracy.
And lastly, war is utterly hostile to democracy. The horrors
and passion of war inevitably produce a war mentality tinder which

the method of democracy becomes impossible.

AiJs
Flourish — prosper. Inaugurate— tiztx. Regime— n\t, admimstn-
tion (tTTtw). //ira/uflWe— vciy helpful. JncuJcate-Xmfttsi. Creed—
principle (ftittva). Counrer—opporile. U fends to— it has a tendency
Innitablj
to. i^ccMj— reach, approach. /f<wr//e— unhelpful, opposed.
— necessarily. Mentality—attitude.
xxin
of China, as everyone knows, is based
up®>'
The civilization
before
the teaching of Confucius, who flourished five hundred years
Christ. Like the Greeks and the Romans, he did not
society as naturally progressive; on the contrary, he
l«n app
remote antiquity rulers had been wise and the people bad
admire but n J
to a degree which the degenerate present could
practical res
achieve. This, of course, wasa delimon. But the
other teachers of antiquity, aimed at
that Confucius, like
sublc society, maintaining a certain level of
always striving after new success. In this he was more
any other man who ever lived. His personality has b«n
Chinese civilization from his day to our own. During ^
present
the Chinese occupied only a small part of
were divided into a number oF warring states. Dunng
throughout w
hundred years they established themselves
 PREaS-WRlTING 443

Chiaa proper, and founded an empire exceeding, andin territory

popu'ation, any other that existed until the last fifty years. In spite of
barbarian invasions, Mongol and Monchn dynasties and occasional
longer or shorter periods of chaos and dvil war, the Confucian sys-
tem sunived. bringing with it art and literature and a civilized way of
life.

Akh
Kemote nn/i^w/y— distant past. Degenerate— fallea, degraded,
titi/re— praise. Zle/us/on— illusioD, false idea(vlm). Striving — trying.
S/amped— imprinted («rpE?r). Warring— Gghtiog. Barbarian— vnaviUz-
td. /nvoi/onj— attack. CAoot— anarchy /Jy-narf;-— line
“flings (fr?1).

XXIV
The hand-spin’.ing and weaving industries are extremely im-
parlant in balancing our village economy, niereforc Mahatma
Oandhi carried on a life-long crusade for the encouragement and
trowih of these industries. For many years all leaders and working
Biembers of the Indian National Congress have worn clothes prepared
^rom cloth woven on the handloom from hand-spun yarn. The AH
India Spinners
Association, started under Gandhijt’ inspiration, has
^oae excellent work in populating khaddar or hand-woven cloth
®ade from hand-spun yam. It has also helped the handloom worker
supplying him with materials and with advice for the improvement
^ the quality of his
sf
product. More than a crore and a halfyardsof
^dJar is produced in India every year. 1111$ cloth has been a great
^eon to many people during
the recent shortage of mill-made cloth.
Hand-made cloth always costs moie than mill-made cloth. For
Ijis reason
some people say that the industry should be allowed to
lie and cloth
be produced in the mills. Those who see the benefits
brought by the handloom
industry to the villager say that it should
M supported even by restricting the growth of mills. The Ministry in
Madras has decided that no new mills should be started in the provi-
»ce and that
every encouragement should be pven to handloom indo-
*ry- These are extremely opposite wews. One thing is clear, however,
riz.that more then 60 lakhs of people earn their livelihood in their
5wn homes with the help of
the handloom industry. Until alternative
''Ork is found for
this large number of people, encouragement must
** given to the industry.
Aids
CruM(/e_holy fight. —
Yarn—v^. Boon blessing (ir^). Restrict-
"i— limiting (fftfttg wpnl. Alternative —
some other work.
 444 HOW TO WRHE CORRECT ENGUSH

XXV
Workers who repeat the same operation day after day, can take
no pleasure or pride in their work. Their chief pleasure in life
is outside the factory. Their work is dull and they spend their time
with one eye on the clock. It is realised that modem work is often
dull and in some factories a wireless set or a gramophone is turned on
to provide music for the workers. In spile of various attempts to
brighten the lives of the workers, however, the avenge man In a fac-
tory is rather to be pitied than envied. The dullness of his life is one
of the drawbacks of mass production. Some people consider that man
is becoming the slave of the machine. Let us hope that machines will

never become more imporlanl than the men they were intended to
serve. We must all hope that means will be found to retain the
advantages arising out of mass production, while at tbs same time
giving the worker some of the pride and pleasure of the old crsfti-
man. Charlie Chaplin in his film “Modem Times" drew attention
to the dangers of mass production and the need for lafeguardirtg
nun’s Individuality from the tyranny of the machine. In the film.
Charlie Chaplin got a job in a factory that employed msis-predoetion
methods. He bad to stand by a machine with a spanner in hli hand.
An endless belt passed iftfront of him, carrying slowly an endlese
line of articles. As each one passed, he tightened one nut in one bolt
with his spanner. His work wasdone with one turn of the wrist r^
peated throughout the day. Very soon bis mind became affected and
of h'*
the film showed the amusing things which he did as a result
mental disorder. It showed that the kind of work which many pcop**
do, far from giving them pride and pleasure, is more likely to fit them
for the lunatic asylum.

AUj
Operat/Oft-~^otk. ZJemvftae* -defect. Cra/nmon— artisan
Sa^fguarJ— protect Tjreowi/— cruelty
Jpuwier— **
(r?rT).

*T rm lAnr. Itvar — Iwmtle

Cducation, taken in Its most esteniiva sense, is ^

which makes the man. One method of educaiion.
o
ocly pfodacc one kind of men; but the great euel'.ence
Then
eafurecoasjjti in the variety of which it is capabie-
educaff*'*.
endeavourifig, Baiforin and fiecd systems of
by
to
caakiad always lie same, let Bs give free scope
cay bid fa:/ for iatrodacing more viricty amoeg «»*
 PRECU-WRtnNO 445

character of the Athenians was certainty preferable to the uniform

character of the Spartans or to any uniform national character what*
ever.Uniformity is the charactctislic of the brute creation. Among
them every species of bird build thdr nests with the same matenals
and same form; the genius and disposition of one individual is that
in
of all; it is only the education which men give them that raises any
and
of them much above others. But it is the glory of human nature that
the operations of reason though variable and by no means infallible,
are capable of infinite improvement. We come into the world worse
provided than any of the brutes; but when their faculties are at a full
stand and their enjoyments incapable of variety or increase, our in-
tellectual powers are growing apace; we are perpetually deriving
happintss from new sources, and even before we leave this world, are
capable of tasting the felicity of angels.

Aids
£xte«five— wide. £xce//Mce-~-superiority. Endeavouring~~tiyinp
t'el/o/'miry— sameness. Disposllion-^rm- swiftly. Perpelu-
coostantly. Felieliy-^tUgM.
 CHANTItXx

COMPREHENStON

'”™«»imTO,«OTii I
ntramSifip,

'”™’'°:''>-*«-o«1IC.Unot„
• meaning
c„„. , .

”•»»! W)
^ W, „

I »,
» language

"direct Narratton

.,
(
«t
449 )
^ifh. ,f^ ^
“•0.1.29
 450 now TO WRrTE correct enoush

inverted commas •*....*• frr *{ rd rrvff ^ T? tr n* ^

sm rhr f% *rpr^ fg trff55T ^ ;rff <^t rrftrt T^r arrif ^ rv ft?: J i

5. trm tTTH ^rf^, srp^j ;Tft rrfsrr 'rrfjr m <1975 2 vr

^
t

(Figures of Speech) 3 r? e sftl »mf»r *TJT^Tt stt) ’HTT

(Itt t ffCTT, vrrr nm f) stml (At iiot ft tt wrnft ^ ? 1

IIL LENGTH
^1. fspj 57 cT^r w ^ ft<pn m ifw T?Ti ^ Pnw ^ 97 t
«

3) Pwr *T?!7 J >r?5f 77 f Aftr ^ Twr gin ^ «rm ?t ^ ^

vTsr !, ^
iTftnr^itTTTT^icitjftaT sRTm^ (irrelevant) ^tet ^
Wl*rJ7 sf« (marks) «jr 1 Comprehension tmr w ^
(intelUgencc-tcst) reftr srn) ft^gT 5^1 nr zgm fi l

wrriT sfvr? gpi 5V7 5^ jinii

2. ^-Wr 3*rT nst ((gt wrt I fjpft *73^ 7 5^
-
^ i eft ft?
»rattr m Taft «t tAw (title) ^ cn ’TT ?ft ftr3*f«RT strr 8r ert '

?» wftT 37fV*rT*»n3 inTaT7nft?rTT?i«(reasooiBg)3 5TT75^

OT*T *Trsr Tai5 1 tf% T3 tti bV s*tt rm tt ?nT*5n •ft i

EXERCISES WORKED OUT

1

Gandhiji always loved his people—Muslims as much as Hind^

Even when Pakistan was formed, he spoke for the Muslims of India,
who were comparatively so lew in number. Many Hindus thougbJ
that he favoured the Muslims too much. Nathutam Godse he'd

misguided ideas of this kind. At a prayer meeting at Birla House in

New Delhi, Godse shot Gandhiji on the 30th January, 19-tS.
murdered,
great Mahatma died with “Hey Ram" on his lips. He was
he were
yet he was calm and peaceful even in death. It seemed as if
sleeping.

Q. 1. Why was Gandhiji shot dead 7

2. Where and when was he murdered ?

3. How did he look after murder ?

H-
Ans. 1. Gandhiji loved all men, both Hindus and Muslims.
PakistM. an
loved the Indian Muslims even after the formation of
Godse c
Hindus thought that he favoured the Muslims. Nathuram
similar views. So he shot Gandhiji dead.
J94S-
r ® A-
2. Gandhiji was murdered on the 30th Jsntary,
shot him at a prayer meeting at Birla House in New
Delhi.
even sfter
3. The Mahatma looked peaceful and cheerful
 COMPREHENSION 451

murder. It appeared as if be ««c sleeping, rather than dead. There

was 00 sign of sorrow or revenge on his face.
2
I

Fair dafibdils, we weep to see

You baste away so soon;
As yet the early-rising sun
Has not attained his noon.
Suy. stay
Until the hasting day
Has run
But to the evensong.
And, having pray'd together, we
Will go with you along.

II

We have short lime to stay, as you;

We have as short a spriog:
As tjuick a growth to meet decay,
As you. or anything.
m
We die
As your hours do, and dry
Away
Like to the summer’s rain;
Or ns the pearls of motBiog’s dew.
Ne’er to be found again.
Q. I. Why does the poet weep to see the fair daffodils 7
2. What does be think about man's life 7
3. Explain the line : Like to the summtT’s rain.
Ans. 1. Generally, beautiful things make us happy, because we
look at the beauty of things. But the poet here does not look at the
beauty of the daffodils. His eyes are on the short life of (be fair
daffodils Naturally, be is reminded of his own short life and also of
the short life of others. So be weeps to see the lovely daffodils.

2. Daffodils have a short spring. They grow and decay very

quickly. Similar is the fate orhoman beings.
3 The poet in this line compares man's life to summer’s rain.
 COMmenENStON 453

Oh, gold is great, btt( greater far

Is heavenly sympathy

Q. 1. Soggesi a suitable title.

2. How did the proud man treat the poet when he (the poet)
lay ID sorrow ?
3. What do when hU sorrow passed away ?
did the poet
4. How did the poor man treat the poet when he (the poet)
lay in grief tod pain ?
5. Which is greater—gold or sympathy ?

Aids

toy—TT Dttp dislreued—mn it. Grief— Cold—

ot swswTT-rf^. ErectsMt. Spake— spoke. Spake my thanks —
(hanked.

3
Abou Ben Adhem (may bis tnbe increase !)
Awoke One oight from a deep dream of peace,
And taw, within the moonlight io his room.
Making it rich, and like a lily in bloom,
An angel writing in a book of gold
Exceeding peace had made Ben Adhem bold,
And to the presence in the room be said,
“What writest thou?*'— The vision rais’d its head,
And with a look made of all sweet accord.
Answered, “The oames of those who love the Lord.”
"And is mine one 7*' said Abou. “Nay, not so,”
Replied (he angei. Abou spoke more low,
But cheeriy stilt; and »»d, “I pray thee, then.
Write me as one that loves his fellow-men."
The angel wrote, and vanished. The next night
It came again with a great wakening light,
And show’d the nassscs whom love of God had blest.
And Io Ben Adhem’s name led all the rest.
!

Q. 1. Why should Ben Adbem's tribe increase 7

2. What Ben Adhem
did see when he awoke from a deep
dream of peace ?
3. What did be ask the an^l and what did the angel reply ?
4. Why did Ben Adhem’s name top the list of the blessed 7
 454 HOW TO WKITB CORXICT ENCUSII
5. Do you love the Lord or your fellowTaen or jonr c*tj
self or allthese at the same time or noas at an ? Gh'C
reasoQS for your choice.

Aids

Tribe — race Li7y in bloom — jt ExcetUff—

Ffln/iAfrf—disappeared
^ »m). Lei all thertjt-^
m I

4
My heart leaps up when I behold
A rainbow in the sky
So was it when my life began;
So is it now I am a man.
So be it when I shall grow old.
Or let me die ?

The child is father of the man;

And I could wish my days to be
Bound each to each by natural piety.
Q. 1. How does the poet feel when he sees t rainbow in the

sky ?
2. How did be feel when he saw It (rainbow) in his child*

hood?
What feelings docs be wish to have towards it in hJi c'd
3.

age?
4. How do you feel when you fee a rainbow 7

Aids

Heart leapt up— ipvt »rrT J.

te^at —eTtw. .t/an— joungman. 5o he /r— %*n ^ tt.
Dayttoht—
WH ew f<w; F‘ei}—4^s^’u

5
Hoogly di^
PjiTi Mohan Roy was bom at Radbanagsr in Ihe
trfefof Bznezl on May 22r.d. 1772. Hi* father, Ramiion Roy.
M a.
post under Sinjitdoou
settled at Radhanagar after giving up hii
tie Vawab of Bengal He bad been oojostly treated by the
and he also had some trouble about his landi. So he became s’
•

what unatucbed to the world, and generally ipent bis li'”*

and th-nibf of Cod.

 CO&tPREBENSION 45S-

Ram Mohan’s mother, Tarini Devi, was a very religious

woman. She believed faithfully in the sound nature of the Hindu
religion as it was then understood. Her great belief is shown by the
fact that once she went for a i»lgrimage to Purj on foot, without
taking even a raaid-servant with her.
Q. 1. When and where was Ram Mohan Roy bom ?
2. Why did his father give op his post under Sirajud*
doula ?
3. Give a brief description of his mother.
4. Mow do you know that his mother had great belief in

the Hindu religion ?

AlJi

dying up— Pi/grimage—

«
Among the many scieotrsts who helped to advance human
knowledge, Jagadisb Chandra Bose holds an important position. He
was botn in East Bengal, near Dacca, on Sovember 30, l6St. His
father was a Deputy Magistrate at Faridpur where Jagadisb spent
most of his childhood. He was a very inquisitive child, always asking
questions. His father always tried to asswet all bis questions; be
was never told not to ask them. He went to a Bengali school at the
age of five, for his father wanted bins to learn bis owo language and
get to know his people before taking up English studies.
Jagadish Chandra wanted to go to England and complete his
studies there.But there were many difficulnes. His father bad lost
rauchofhis money which he bad spent on tea plsutations. Ilu
mother's love for him was great; she could not think of parting uith
her only son for so long. It seemed tbai Jagadish Chandra's hopes
would never be fulfilled. He felt sad and discouraged.
However, his mother found that be would not be happy unless
he west to England. She made up ber mind to bear the sorrow of
separation. Now, the only thing was to gel money. For such a
mother, this was no dilGcult task cither. She sold her Jewellery and
get the money. So Jagadish was able to go to England.

Q. 1. Describe the early life of lagadish Chandra Bote.

2. What were bis diSiCDitiea when be w'anted to go to Eog*
land?
3. How were the difiicultiea solved ?
 454 HOW TO WRITE CORRECT ENGLCII

5. Do you love the Lord or your fcllowmen or your

self or all these at the same time or none at all ? Give
reasons for your choice.

Aids

rr/f>c— race (Rjfa). Li7>' w Woonj— Exetedms-

?jfl. Vanished —disappeared Led ell the rest—
^ «ri I
(fWt^r ft

My heart leaps up when I behold

A rainbow in the sky
So was it when my life began;
So is it now I am a man.
So be it when I shall grow old.
Or let me die !

The child is father of the man;

And I could wish my days to be
Bound each to each by natural piety.
in the
Q. I. How does the poet feci when he sees s rainbow
sky ?
..H
his «iio*
2. How did he feel when be saw it (rainbow) in

in his c
3. What feelings does be wish to have towards it

age?
4. How do you feel when you see a rainbow ?

Aids

Heart leaps up—^ smpcfwtr Tt ssuT Behold—

began — Man —youngman. 50 be it—^ ^
«n% ft^r; Piety—

5
Hoogly
Ram Mohan Roy was boro at Radbanagar in the
triet of Bengal on May 22nd. 1772. His father, Ramkante f
settled at Radhanagar after giving up his post under
the Nawab of Bengal. He had been unjustly treated by t
and he also had some trouble about his lands. So be prayer
what unattached to the world, and generally spent bis lime
'

and thinking of God.

 COMPREHEtlSION 455-

Rara Mohan’s mothec, Twini Devi, was a very religious

woman. She believed faithfully in the sound nature of the Hindu
teli&oQ as it was then understood. Her great belief is shown by the
fact that once she went for a {Hlgrimage to Puri on foot, without
taking even a maid-servant with her.
Q. I. When and where was Ram Mohan Roy born ?
2. Why did hia father ^ve up his post under Sirajud-
doula ?

3. Give a brief description of bis mother.

4. How do you know that bis mother had great belief in

the Hindu relipon?

Aldt

Giving up— Pilgrimage —

6
Among the many helped to advance human
scientists who
knowledge, Jagadish Chandra Bose holds an important position. He
was bom in East Bengal, near Dacca, on November 30, 185t. His
fatherwas a Deputy hfa^strate at Faetdpur where Jagadish spent
most of his childhood. He was a very io()uisitive child, always asking
quesUoas, Hts father always tiled to answtt all bis questions; be
was never told not to ask them. He went to a Bengali school at the
age of five, for bis father wanted him to learn his own language and
get to know his people before taking up English studies.
Jagadish Chandra wanted to go to England and complete bis
studies there. But there were many difGcullies. His father had lost
much of his money which he bad spent on tea plantations. His
mother's love for him was great; she could not think of parting with
her only son for so long. It seemed that Jagadish Chandra’s hopes
would never be fulfilled. He felt sad and discouraged.
However, mother found that be would not be happy unless
bis
he went to England. She made up her mind to bear the sorrow of
separation. Now, the only thing was to get money. For such a
mother, this was no difficult task either. She sold her jewellery and
got the money. So Jagadish was able to go to England.

Q. 1. Describe the early life of Jagadish Chandra Bose.

2. What were bis diSicuIiies when he wanted to go to Eng-
land ?
3. How were the difficultiea solved ? ^
/
 456 now TO WUrTE COSMCT ESOLISfl

AUi
/'T7://jWrp—curloul (pr^, Tea Trr-npr-
AfaJe up her m/rtcf—decided (n finn).

7
Portia : Do you admil the bond ?
Antonio : I do.
Portia : Then the /ew must be merciful.
Must I ? Who can force me to show mercy ?
: Tell

me that.
Portia : Mercy is never forced. It comes naturally. We should
all show mercy to one another.
ShylocK : 1 will havenolhinjto do with mercy. laskforjustice.

Portia QuI justice should always be softened by neicy.

:

Shytock : f know nothing of that. I must have what a das to

me on my bond.
Partia : Is he (Antonio) not able to pay the money ?
Bajsanlo : Yes. Here I offer It for him (Antonio) in the court.

J am prepared to pay it ten times over.

Shyloek : I will not have it.

Q. 1. How does Portia try to persuade Sbylock (the Jew)

W
show mercy ?
2. What is Shylock’s demand ?
3. Which is greater— mercy or justice ? Give reasons.

Aids
Softened — fim jwr. Dihni jsn. Due —arci. Band—%rn^-

8
Jumman had an old relation, a maternal aunt who had some
property. This she transferred to him by a deed on the understan
that she would be well looked after. So long as the deed
°
unregistered none was so obliging to the oW
a
none so considerate to her. Her every wish was anticipate ^
moment e
cheerfully carried out. But everything changed the
a
was registered. Jumman who used to wait dotingly on his o
^
now became supremely indifferent. His wife, Kariman, wen
a e.^
farther. She grudged even the little food that the old lady
meal was now served to her without Kariman letting a bar
ate
dipped in gall
or poison. The very bread that the aunt
And this went on mo
to be seasoned with the meat of abuse.
 — —
coxirRMirNsicw aST

Q. 1. )low did Jumman treat his maternal aunt beTore ber pro-
perty was Iransferred to him by a deed 7

2. flow did he and his wife treat her after the deed was regis-
tered 7

2. Suggest a suitable title.

Aids

Dtfd—^^'kii, Obliging —n*. Considerate— Anti’

eipaied-^ t\ inns wnt ni ei «5iir «t firet ansi ui. Dofingl}’
'ft ss ft. fi’ail on— ihrT 5upren«f/>— ft, Indifferent —
Cr«e/gf</— f«e1 Rt. Barb—thK sft»r. Dipped—
5*T. <7e//— fi^TST. S’earonerf— flistm Mounting— w^t jffi.

Arthur journeyed quickly from Ireland on receiving news of

his grandfather’s death. He was now Squire; and as he travelled
towards his home, he thought of all he would have to do for the
good of the estate and his tenants. Tbeo be thought of the Poyser
family and Hetty, He was at ease now about Hetty, for Mr. Itwine’s
letter had told him of
her coming marriage with Adam. He was glad
of this. Pretty little Hetty 1 So she had not caied for him half so
ffluch as he bad eared for her Well, he certainly was sot in love
!
’•'ilh Hetty now
1 But he could feel that Hetty's husband had a
special claim on him. He felt he could now offer Adam friendship
agwn, in spite of that painful memory. Well, here was Hayslope at
IsstI And here was
the dear old home! Arthur jumped from the
osfriagc, ran up the steps and
entered the bouse.
“Your letters are waiting for you. Sir," said his serv.snt. Arthur
found them on his table, and
on the lop of the heap was one from
Mr. Ifwiae. Arthur took
it up carelessly and
read
“I send this in a hurry, dear Arthur, because I had to go to
^lotiiton to perform the most painful duty. I will not add anything
to the pain
and sorrow that will now come upon you. I must just
''11 you the simple fact. Hetly Sorrel is in prison, and is awaiting
punishment for killing her own child.*’

Q. 1. Why did Arthur journey quickly from Ireland ?

2. What did he think as he tavelled towards his home 7
3. What were the contents of the letter from Mr. Irwiae 7
 458 HOW TO wkite correct enoush

Aids

—
travelled. Tenanti — tttt. At e<zje—comfortable, at
peace. Memory Heap—^x. /collection).

10 .
At last Hetty reached a place she knew. But now she had spent
nearly all her money, and was feeling ill and very tired. Quite unable
to go any farther, she turned into a field, and nalked along a path
leading to a wood. She reached the wood and sat down under the
trees. These last days of Hetty’s wanderings had been terrible, for,
not only had she had little to eat, but had not always slept under a
roof, so afraid was she of not having enough money to last till she
got home again.

She could no longer think clearly of what to do. At one time

she decided to make her way to Dinah, remembering that her cousia
had told her to think of her if ever she was in trouble. At another
time, to go straight home seemed the tiring she most desired. But
when she thought of the shame that she would have to face she knew
that she could do neither. It would be easier to take her own life I

Q. 1. Describe the last days of Hetty's waoden’Dgs.

2. Could she think clearly of what to do ? Why did she

not like to return home ?

3. Suggest a suitable title.

Aids
to eat. Under o
IFoo.-/—ansr. Little to ear— almost nothing
roof—m a house. Make her way*—go. £ver
— "Lake her e*'n

h/e—kill herself,

11
Mr. U. N. Dhebar left here by air last -night -for Ade^at-sfr-”
stoni
invitation of the Aden Indbn Association, to lay the foundation
of the Mahatma Gandhi Memorial Hall.
The Hall, which will include a library and a reading
to be built at the Bay crater of the old city of Aden and is In
or
for the benefit of all Aden iohabitaots regardless of race
The library will contain books on Gandbian ideology.

The Indian community in Aden, comprising mainly

men, have subscribed five lakh rupees towards the crcaoon
memorial.
 COMPREHCKStON 459

Q. (a) Who is hfr. U. N. Dhcber ?

(b) What was the purpose of his journey to Aden ?

(c) V/htie will the public hall be built 1 What will tt consist of ?

(d) What sort of books will the library have ?

(e) With what intention is the memorial to be built ?

12

The Uttar Pradesh Chief Minister Dr. Sampurnanand and the

new U. P. Congress President Mr. C. B. Gupta have been summoned
to Delhi by the Central Parliamentaiy Board of the Congress for
talks at the ensuing meeting of Iht Board on Oct. 16 in connection
with the party leadership crisis in the state.
The crisis was heightened by a firm letter from Doctor
Sampurnanand requesting the High Command to permit him to resign
from the Chief Ministershipfollowittg the recent election of the rival

leader Mr. C. B. Gupu as the U. P. C. President.

Meanwhile there is a speculation here

in the Congress circle
about the prospect of a corepromise, if the rival group beaded by
Mr. Gupta does not accept leadership of Dr. Sampurnanand and
the talks break down. lo this connection the name of Mr. Sri
Prakasb, now Governor of Maharastra, is being mentioned.

Q. (a) Who is the Chief Minister of Uttar Pradesb and who is

the Congress President there ?
(b) What body has sumrooned them lo Delhi and why 7
(c) What meeting is going to be held on Oct. 18 and why 7
(d) What heightened the party leadership crisis in U. P. ?
(e) What is the speculation about the compromise ?

13

Acharya Vinoba Bhave told Mr. Sriman Naraysn, member of

the Planning Commissioa. that as he did in Kashmir, he was going
to Assam to see, to bear and to love.
The Sarvodaya leader added that he was going to Assam not
Mth any ready-made solstioo, as he fell that in the end the people
of Assam alone could solve their own problem.
Sriman Natayan. who discussed with the Acharya the latter’s
trip to Assam and a number of other subjects in a village 25 miles
from here, was giving pressmen a gist of what the Sarvodaya leader
had told him in conocclion with his proposed Assam tour.
 460 now TO VfMlTS COKKECT ViCLISn

The S^irvoclajra leader.

Mr. Narayan jaid, had made a
suggeslion* as of viut importance for the
people of Assam
well as 81 the Instance of Prime Minister Nehru.

Q. (a) Who Is Mr. Sriman Narayan 7 Where d.d be n

Acharya Ohave and nhal did he discuss with him ?
(b) Who is the Sarvodaya leader and what did he say ab
Assam and its problem
(c) Why was Acharya Bhavc going to Assam ?

14

Mr. Ananthasayanam Ayyangar, Speaker of the Lok Sat

underlined the inspiring role of (he social service organisations
relieve the distress of the downtrodden and needy.

Mr. Ayyangar who was presiding everibe AJJ Jndia Sewa San
Conference said, "Every youth in the country today should be
hard working aod ever ready to serve the sulTeriag hnsan
selfless,

as the Sewa Samiti Volunteers’*.

Mr. Ayyangar paid tributes to late Pandit Madan Mohan M:

viya, (he founder of the Sewa Samiti movement and said that tb>
should perpetuate his memory by continuing their eSbrts for soci
service. He hoped (bat the Sewa Samiti would grow from strength
strength and spread a aetwork of rts branches in the country to fuJ
its mission ofseldess social service.

Mr. Jaishukhlal Hathi, Union Deputy Minister for Power an

Irrigation who also addressed (be conference said that he had grt:

regard for all those who tendered selfless service to the society. Tb
Sewa Samiti, he said was a compact body of such workers. He sai'

that efl'orts should be made (o develop Kuruksbetra to attract touris

traffic.

Read the above extracts from a Newspaper and answer anl

three of the following questions—

Q. (0 Who started the Sewa Samiti Movement ?

(ii) What is the mission of the Sewa Samiti Movement ? i

(ill) Who presided over the conference ? What advice did

give for perpetuating the memory of the founder ? I

(iv) Who else addressed the conference and what did he saj

about the Samiti 7 j

 COMPREHENSION 461

15

Strious hiegulaiilies •ncie detected in the distiibution of food-

graiosinmost of the Fair Price Shops at Nawadah during the sur*
prise raid by the high officials of the Supply Department of Patna
and Gaya recently, it is reliably learnt. Licences of three shopkeepers
were cancelled immediately on the chargeof bunglingwith foodgrains
meant for the public on ration cards.
It is also reported that a high offidal of the Supply Department
strongly criticised the 'misuse* of power by the Assistant Supply Officer
and Supply Inspector of Nawadah in connection with issuing a fresh
licence to a veteran hlack-mackctcerof the town- It is alleged that the
licence of one Fair Price Shop-keeper of Nawadah was cancelled last
}'car on alleged charge of serious bungling in the food-grains quota,
but this year the same dealer again got the licence. However, his
licence was cancelled following the high official's remark.
H. S. from Gaya writes—Twenty-five Fair Price Shops in the
city were found practising unfair means in foodgrains in a raid by

the District Magistrate with four other Magistrates on 169 F. P.

Shops in the city on Thursday last.
Their licences are likely to be cancelled. In one shop shortage
of forty sis maunds of grains was found and in another one hundred
twenty-three maunds.

Q. (a) Who conducted Ibe raid on the Fair Price Shops at

Nawadah ?
(b) V/hal did they detect ?
(c) Who was guilty of misuse of powers ?
(d) Whose licence was cancelled following the high official's

xmark and why ?